Operation Manual

Steinberg Documentation Team: Cristina Bachmann, Martina Becker, Katharina Blavustyak, Lillie Harris, Christina
Kaboth, Dennis Martinez, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer
Translation: Ability InterBusiness Solutions (AIBS), Moon Chen, Jérémie Dal Santo, Rosa Freitag, GiEmme
Solutions, Josep Llodra Grimalt, Vadim Kupriianov, Roland Münchow, Boris Rogowski, Sergey Tamarovsky
This document provides improved access for people who are blind or have low vision. Please note that due to the
complexity and number of images in this document, it is not possible to include text descriptions of images.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on
the part of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. The software described by this document is subject to a License
Agreement and may not be copied to other media except as specifically allowed in the License Agreement.
No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or otherwise transmitted or recorded, for any purpose,
without prior written permission by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. Registered licensees of the product
described herein may print one copy of this document for their personal use.
All product and company names are ™ or ® trademarks of their respective owners. For more information, please
visit www.steinberg.net/trademarks.
© Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH, 2025.
All rights reserved.
Cubase Elements_14.0.20_en-US_2025-03-12
 Table of Contents

7 New Features 114 Arranger Track

115 Chord Track
10 Introduction 115 Video Tracks
10 Platform-Independent Documentation 116 Marker Track
10 PDF Documents and Online Documentation 117 Set up Inspector Sections Pane
11 Documentation Structure 130 Set up Channel Sections Pane
11 Typographical Conventions 132 Track Controls Settings Dialog
12 Key Commands 137 Add Track Dialog
13 Setting up Your System 139 Track Handling
13 Studio Setup Dialog 139 Adding Tracks via Double-Click
14 Setting up Audio 139 Adding Tracks via the Add Track Dialog
23 Setting up MIDI 140 Adding Tracks Using Track Presets
27 Synchronizers 140 Adding Tracks by Dragging Files from the
28 Audio Connections MediaBay
28 Audio Connections Window 141 Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files
29 Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs 142 Channel Configurations
30 Adding Input and Output Busses 143 Removing Selected Tracks
31 Presets for Input and Output Busses 143 Removing Empty Tracks
32 Monitoring Bus 144 Reordering Tracks in the Track List
32 Bus Configurations 144 Renaming Tracks
145 Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/
34 Project Window
Channels
35 Menus in Cubase
145 Showing Track Pictures
35 Showing/Hiding Zones
147 Setting the Track Height
36 Project Zone
148 Selecting Tracks
49 Channel Tab
149 Deselecting Tracks
50 Project Window Left Zone
149 Duplicating Tracks
54 Project Window Lower Zone
150 Disabling Tracks
59 Project Window Right Zone
150 Freezing Multiple Tracks
65 Keyboard Focus in the Project Window
151 Organizing Tracks in Folder Tracks
66 Zooming in the Project Window
152 Handling Overlapping Audio
70 Snap Function
153 Events Display on Folder Tracks
73 Snap Grid
153 Track Presets
74 Cross-Hair Cursor
75 Edit History Dialog 159 Parts and Events
76 Color Handling 159 Events
163 Parts
84 Project Handling
165 Editing Techniques for Parts and Events
84 Creating New Projects
84 Cubase Hub 185 Range Editing in the Project Window and in
86 Project Files and Project Location the Editors
87 Template Files 185 Creating Selection Ranges
90 Project Setup Dialog 186 Selection Range Editing
93 Opening Project Files 195 Playback and Transport
94 Saving Project Files 195 Transport Panel
96 Reverting to the Last Saved Version 199 Transport Menu
96 Self-Contained Projects 205 Transport Bar
99 Tracks and Channels 210 Transport Pop-Up Window
100 Audio Tracks and Channels 210 Time Display Window
102 Instrument Tracks and Channels 211 Left and Right Locators
103 Sampler Tracks and Channels 214 Setting the Project Cursor
105 MIDI Tracks and Channels 215 Auto-Scroll Settings Menu
107 Group Channel Tracks 215 Time Formats
108 Effect Channel Tracks 216 Pre-Roll and Post-Roll
110 Ruler Track 217 Punch In and Punch Out
112 Folder Tracks 218 Metronome Click
222 Chase

3
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Table of Contents

224 On-Screen Keyboard 380 Direct Offline Processing Window

224 Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard 384 Built-In Audio Processes
225 On-Screen Keyboard Window 389 Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing

227 Recording 391 Time Stretch Algorithms

227 Basic Recording Methods 391 Standard
231 Monitoring 392 Limitations
233 Audio Recording Specifics 393 Audio Functions
238 MIDI Recording Specifics 393 Detect Silence Dialog
246 Remaining Record Time 397 Spectrum Analyzer Window
246 Lock Record 398 Statistics Window
247 Importing Audio and MIDI Files 401 Sample Editor
247 Audio File Import 402 Sample Editor Toolbar
254 MIDI File Import 408 Info Line
256 Quantizing MIDI and Audio 408 Overview Line
256 Quantize Functions 409 Sample Editor Inspector
257 Quantizing MIDI Event Starts 410 Ruler
258 Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths 411 Waveform Display
258 Quantizing MIDI Event Ends 413 Regions List
258 Quantizing Audio Event Starts 416 Snap Point
259 Quantize Panel 418 Hitpoints
266 Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume 419 Calculating Hitpoints
266 Event Handles 422 Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window
268 Event-Based Fades 423 Slices
271 Creating Clip-Based Fades 425 Creating a Groove Quantize Preset
271 Crossfades 425 Creating Markers
275 Auto Fades and Crossfades 426 Creating Regions
277 Adjusting the Event Volume 426 Creating Events
426 Creating MIDI Notes
278 Arranger Track
278 Adding Arranger Events on the Arranger Track 428 Tempo Matching Audio
279 Arranger Editor 428 Algorithm Presets
283 Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding 428 Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo
Events 429 Musical Mode
285 Jump Mode 430 Audio Part Editor
286 Arranging Music to Video 431 Audio Part Editor Toolbar
288 Markers 435 Info Line
288 Marker Track 435 Ruler
289 Position Markers 436 Lanes
289 Cycle Markers 436 Operations
289 Adding and Editing Markers on the Marker 440 Sampler Tracks
Track 440 Loading Audio Samples into Sampler Control
290 Markers Window 441 Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control
295 Setting the Locators Using Cycle Markers 441 Creating Sampler Tracks
295 Using Markers to Select Ranges 441 Sampler Control
295 Importing and Exporting Markers 460 Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to
297 MixConsole VST Instruments
297 MixConsole in Lower Zone 461 Sample Editing and Playback Functions
298 MixConsole Window 468 Pool
349 Audio Effects 468 Pool Window
349 Insert Effects and Send Effects 473 Working with the Pool
352 Insert Effects 489 MediaBay and Media Rack
357 VST Effect Selector 489 Media Rack in Right Zone
357 Send Effects 500 MediaBay Window
362 Side-Chaining 522 Working with Volume Databases
367 Dither Effects 524 MediaBay Settings
367 Effect Control Panel 525 Automation
371 Effect Presets 525 Recording your Actions
376 System Component Information Window 525 Automation Curves
379 Direct Offline Processing 526 Static Value Line
380 Direct Offline Processing Workflow 526 Write/Read Automation

4
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Table of Contents

526 Writing Automation Data 635 Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track
529 Editing Automation Events Loops
533 Automation Tracks 636 Extending MIDI Notes
535 VST Instruments 636 Fixing MIDI Note Lengths
535 Adding VST Instruments 637 Fixing MIDI Note Velocities
536 VST Instrument Control Panel 638 Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths
538 VST Instrument Selector 638 Deleting Overlaps
539 Creating Instrument Tracks 638 Editing Velocity
539 VSTi Rack in the Right Zone 640 Deleting Double Notes
540 VST Instruments Window 640 Deleting Controller Data
540 VST Instruments Window Toolbar 640 Deleting Continuous Controller Data
541 VST Instrument Controls 640 Restricting Polyphonic Voices
543 Presets for Instruments 641 Thinning Out Controller Data
545 Playing Back VST Instruments 641 Extracting MIDI Automation
548 Latency 641 Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events
549 Import and Export Options 642 Inverting the Order of Selected MIDI Events
550 Side-Chaining for VST Instruments 643 MIDI Editors
553 Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins 643 Common MIDI Editor Functions
553 Plug-ins and Collections 653 Controller Display
557 Adding New Plug-in Collections 675 Key Editor
557 Hiding Plug-ins 691 Key Editor Operations
558 Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist 704 Drum Editor
717 Drum Maps
559 Track Quick Controls 723 Drum Editor Operations
560 Parameter Assignment
563 Controlling Automatable Parameters 726 Chord Functions
726 Chord Track
565 MIDI Remote 727 Chord Events
565 MIDI Remote Tab 736 Scale Events
569 Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI 739 Voicings
Remote 742 Converting Chord Events to MIDI
570 Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote 743 Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord
575 Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog Track
583 MIDI Controller Settings Pane 747 Assigning Voices to Notes
584 MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant 747 Creating Chord Events from MIDI
592 MIDI Remote Manager Window 748 Creating Chord Events from Audio Events
598 MIDI Remote Script Console 750 Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard
599 MIDI Remote API
751 Using Chord Pads
600 Remote-Controlling Cubase 751 Chord Pads Zone
600 Connecting Remote Devices 762 Chord Assignment
600 Removing the Remote Input from All MIDI 767 Root Key
Inputs 771 Chord Pad Playback and Recording
601 Setting up Remote Devices 774 Inserting Chord Events via Step Input
603 Remote Devices and Automation 775 Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads
604 Assigning Commands to Remote Devices 775 Creating MIDI Parts from Chord Pads
605 Remote Control Editor 775 Chord Pads Presets
609 Track Quick Controls 777 Chord Assistant
611 VST Quick Controls 781 Players and Voicings
611 Generic Remote Page (Legacy) 783 Player Mode Settings
617 MIDI Realtime Parameters 786 Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog
617 MIDI Track Parameters 791 Chord Pads Display Settings Pane
617 MIDI Modifiers 793 Editing Tempo and Time Signature
622 Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line 793 Project Tempo Modes
623 Using MIDI Devices 793 Tempo Track Editor
623 Program Change Messages and Bank Select 796 Projects with Tempo Changes
Messages 798 Projects in Fixed Tempo Mode
624 Patch Banks 800 Tap Tempo Modes
624 MIDI Device Manager 801 Set Definition from Tempo Dialog
802 Time Signature Events
631 MIDI Functions
631 Transpose Setup Dialog 804 Export Audio Mixdown
632 Merging MIDI Events into a New Part 804 Export Audio Mixdown Dialog
634 Dissolve Part Dialog 811 Mixing Down to Audio Files

5
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Table of Contents

811 File Formats

817 Synchronization
817 Master and Slave
818 Timecode Formats
819 Clock Sources
820 Project Synchronization Setup Dialog
825 External Synchronization
826 VST System Link
826 Setting up VST System Link
831 Activating VST System Link
833 Application Examples
837 Video
837 Video File Compatibility
838 Frame Rates
838 Video Output Devices
839 Preparations for Creating Video Projects
841 Preparations for Video Playback
845 Editing Video
845 Export Video Dialog
852 Extracting Audio from Video
853 Key Commands
853 Key Commands Dialog
855 Assigning Key Commands
855 Searching for Key Commands or Assignments
856 Removing Key Command Assignments
856 Saving Key Command Presets
856 Loading Key Command Presets
857 Exporting Key Command Assignments
857 Resetting Key Commands
858 Default Key Commands
869 Setting up Tool Modifier Keys
871 Customizing
871 Setup Panes
872 Windows Dialog
872 Where are the Settings Stored?
873 Safe Mode Dialog
876 Optimizing Audio Performance
876 Performance Aspects
877 Settings That Affect Performance
878 Audio Performance Monitor Panel
880 ASIO-Guard
882 Preferences
882 Preferences Dialog
884 Editing
891 Editors
891 Event Display
895 General
896 MIDI
900 MediaBay
901 Metering
901 Record
903 Transport
904 User Interface
906 VST
908 Video
909 Index

6
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 New Features

The following list informs you about the most important improvements in Cubase and provides
links to the corresponding descriptions.

New Features in Version 14.0.20

Highlights
Score Editor
● The Score Editor now allows you to import Dorico projects and MusicXML files. The new
Notation Settings allows you to control how music is notated. New options in the Layout
Settings dialog allow you to make adjustments for bar numbers. Further notation types,
such as rhythm slashes, bar repeats, numbered bar regions, tremolos and grace notes are
now supported. See Score Editor.

More New Features

Transport improvements
● You can now instantly play back a selected event or selection range once or in a loop, with
the selected tracks soloed. See Transport Menu.
● You can now start a recording at the start position of a selected event or selection range.
See Common Record Modes Menu.

Extract Markers from Wave Files

● Cubase allows you to extract marker information from the marker chunk of wave files and
to add the corresponding markers to your project. See Importing Markers from Wave Files.

New Key Command to Insert Tempo Events at the Project Cursor Position
● You can now assign a key to the command Insert Tempo Event at Cursor. See Inserting
Tempo Events at the Cursor Position.

New Key Command to Insert Time Signature Events at the Project Cursor Position
● You can now assign a key to the command Insert Time Signature Event. See Inserting
Time Signature Events at the Cursor Position.

Audio Export Improvements

● When exporting wave files, Cubase allows you to embed markers from your project via
marker chunk. See Export Audio Mixdown Dialog.
● The number of attributes for customized naming schemes is no longer limited. See Naming
Scheme Dialog.

Color Space Management

● You can change the color space for the video output device and for the video files in your
project. When using calibrated external video hardware, you can also disable the internal
color space management in Cubase. See Video Player Page.

7
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
New Features

New Features in Version 14.0.0

Score Editor
● Cubase introduces a revamped Score Editor, built upon technology from Dorico, our music
notation and composition application. The new Dorico-powered Score Editor replaces the
existing Score Editor, and with it brings both many new benefits but also a change in
focus. The Score Editor is described in a separate document. See Score Editor.

Underwater
● The new Underwater plug-in allows you to create a typical underwater or party next
door effect. The plug-in is described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. See
Underwater.

Improved Auto Save Handling

● Cubase now automatically saves copies of project files in a dedicated Auto Saves folder
inside the project folder. See Auto Save.

Ruler Track Improvements

● You can now select the time format for ruler tracks when you add them. See Add Track
Dialog – Ruler.
● You can now set up a time offset for ruler tracks in the corresponding time format, and
activate/deactivate it by using the corresponding control in the track list. If you deactivate
the time offset, the ruler track follows the transport offset specified in the Project Setup
dialog. See Ruler Track Controls.

Creating Empty MIDI Parts via Double-Click

● You can now double-click in an empty area of the Project window event display to create an
empty MIDI part. See Creating Empty MIDI Parts.

Range Tool Improvements

● You can now use the Move submenu options for moving events within a selection range to
specific positions. See Move Submenu.
● You can glue events within a selection range together. See Gluing Events Together.
● You can fill selection ranges with content from the clipboard. See Filling Selection Ranges
with Content from the Clipboard.
● The new Slip Range Content function allows you to move the content of an event within a
selection range. See Moving the Content of Events without changing the Event Position.
● You can invert the phase of audio events within a selection range. See Inverting the Phase
of Audio Events.
● You can mute audio events in selection ranges. See Muting Events.
● You can now create selection ranges by double-clicking between them. See Creating
Selection Ranges.
● Selection ranges are now maintained after performing editing operations. See Selection
Range Editing.
● It is now easier to create and adjust selection ranges. See Adjusting the Size of Selection
Ranges.
● You can choose to automatically split and edit partially selected events when performing
editing operations on selection ranges. In addition to this, you can automatically move
selection ranges when selecting another track. See Editing.

Event Volume Editing Improvements

● The usability of the event volume control has been improved. See Adjusting the Event
Volume.

8
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
New Features

Full MixConsole in Lower Zone

● The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window now contains the full MixConsole
feature set. See MixConsole in Lower Zone.

Reorder MixConsole Channels

● You can now reorder channels in the MixConsole. See Reordering Channels in the
MixConsole.

Key Editor and Drum Editor Improvements

● In the controller display of the Key Editor and in the Drum Editor you can now edit
off-velocity values of note events. See Editing Note-Off Velocities.

Video Playback Improvements

● Cubase provides an improved video performance and supports the playback of video files
with a resolution of up to 8K. See Video.

Audio Performance Monitor

● The new Audio Performance Monitor panel visualizes audio dropouts that have been
detected during the playback of your project. It provides detailed information about
dropouts and suggests measures to decrease the processing load. See Audio Performance
Monitor Panel.

New Preference for Bouncing/Rendering Audio

● A new preference allows you to determine what happens when you apply Bounce
Selection on an audio event in the Project window, or on an audio selection in the Sample
Editor. See Editing - Audio.

9
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Introduction

This is the Operation Manual for Steinberg’s Cubase. Here you will find detailed information
about all the features and functions in the application.

Platform-Independent Documentation
The documentation applies to the operating systems Windows and macOS.

Features and settings that are specific to one of these platforms are clearly indicated. In all other
cases, the descriptions and procedures in the documentation are valid for Windows and macOS.

Some points to consider:

● The screenshots are taken from Windows.

● Some functions that are available on the File menu on Windows can be found in the
program name menu on macOS.

PDF Documents and Online Documentation

The documentation consists of several documents. You can read them online or download them
from steinberg.help.

You can reach steinberg.help from within Cubase by selecting Help > Cubase Help.

Operation Manual
The main Cubase reference documentation, with detailed descriptions of operations,
parameters, functions, and techniques.

Plug-in Reference
Describes the features and parameters of the included VST plug-ins and VST
instruments.

Remote Control Devices

Lists the supported MIDI remote control devices.

Groove Agent SE
Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Groove Agent
SE.

HALion Sonic
Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument HALion Sonic.

Iconica Sketch
Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Iconica Sketch.

Steinberg Library Manager

Describes how you can register and manage your VST Sound libraries.

10
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Introduction
Documentation Structure

Documentation Structure
In our documentation, we divide information into three different types of topics, according to
their content.

Descriptions of the User Interface

Topics that describe the functionality of user interface items and list the options and
settings of dialogs, panels, or other items.

Descriptions of Basic Concepts

Topics that describe concepts and explain the functionality of a specific software
feature.

Descriptions of Procedures
Topics that provide step-by-step instructions for how to perform a specific task. These
topics often provide an example for why you might want to follow the steps and a brief
summary of the result, including consequences to be aware of.

Because of this division of information, our documentation structure functions as a reference

you can consult for specific information or instructions as required, rather than a guide you must
read from start to finish.

TIP

Descriptive topics do not describe how to perform a task, and procedural topics do not explain
what something is. To find general information about items or concepts, we recommend
searching for them by name, such as “events”. To find instructions for performing particular
actions, we recommend including a relevant verb in your search, such as “recording”.

Links at the bottom of topics guide you to further relevant content. You can also check the
sidebar for nearby, related topics in the documentation structure.

Typographical Conventions
In our documentation, we use structural and markup elements to present information according
to its purpose.

Structural Elements
Prerequisite
Describes any actions or conditions you must have fulfilled before starting a
procedure.

Procedure
Lists the steps that you must take to achieve a specific result.

Important
Informs you about serious issues; for example, issues that affect the system, the
connected hardware, or that risk data loss.

Note
Informs you about issues or other relevant information.

Tip
Adds further information or useful suggestions.

11
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Introduction
Key Commands

Example
Provides you with an example.

Result
Describes the result of the procedure.

After Completing This Task

Informs you about actions or tasks that you can perform after completing the
procedure.

Related Links
Lists related topics that you can find in this documentation.

Markup
Bold text indicates the name of a menu, option, function, dialog, window, and so on.

EXAMPLE
To open the Functions menu, click Functions Menu in the top right corner of the MixConsole.

If bold text is separated by a greater-than symbol, this indicates a sequence of different menus
to open.

EXAMPLE
Select Project > Add Track.

File names and folder paths are shown in a different font.

EXAMPLE
example_file.txt

Key Commands
Many of the default key commands, also known as keyboard shortcuts, use modifier keys, some
of which are specific to each operating system.

Whenever key commands with modifier keys are described in this manual, the Windows modifier
key is indicated first, followed by the macOS modifier key and the key.

EXAMPLE
Ctrl/Cmd - Z means: press Ctrl on Windows or Cmd on macOS, then press Z .

12
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Setting up Your System

To use Cubase, you must set up your audio, and if required, your MIDI system.

Studio Setup Dialog

The Studio Setup dialog allows you to set up your connected audio, MIDI, and remote control
devices.

● To open the Studio Setup dialog, select Studio > Studio Setup.

The following options are available in the Devices section to the left:

Add Device
Allows you to manually add devices, such as a Note Expression Input Device, an
additional Time Display device, or specific remote control devices.

Remove Selected Device

Allows you to remove manually added devices.

13
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

Reset All Devices

Resets all devices in the devices list.

Devices list
Select a device in the Devices list to show its settings in the right section.

The following options are available at the bottom of the page for each device:

Reset
Sends a reset signal to the active ASIO device and restarts the audio processing. This
can solve problems with audio playback.

NOTE

This leads to a short interruption of the playback.

Apply
Applies your settings on this page.

RELATED LINKS
Audio System Page on page 17
ASIO Driver Setup Page on page 19
MIDI Port Setup Page on page 24

Setting up Audio
You must set up your audio equipment before you can use it in Cubase.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections.

14
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

Simple Stereo Input and Output Setup

If you only use a stereo input and output from Cubase, you can connect your audio hardware, for
example, the inputs of your audio card or your audio interface, directly to the input source and
the outputs to a power amplifier and speaker.

Audio Connections
Your system setup depends on many different factors, for example, on the kind of project
that you want to create, on the external equipment that you want to use, or on the computer
hardware that is available to you. Therefore, the following sections can only serve as examples.

How to connect your equipment, that is, whether to use digital or analog connections also
depends on your setup.

Recording Levels and Inputs

When you connect your equipment, make sure that the impedance and levels of the audio
sources and inputs are matched. Using the correct type of input is important to avoid distortion
or noisy recordings. For example, different inputs can be used, such as consumer line level (-10
dBV) or professional line level (+4 dBu).

Sometimes, you can adjust input characteristics on the audio interface or on its control panel. For
details, refer to the documentation that came with the audio hardware.

IMPORTANT

Cubase does not provide any input level adjustments for the signals that are coming into your
audio hardware, since these are handled differently for each card. Adjusting input levels is either
done in a special application that is included with the hardware or via its control panel.

15
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

Word Clock Connections

If you are using a digital audio connection, you may also need a word clock connection between
the audio hardware and external devices. For details, refer to the documentation that came with
the audio hardware.

IMPORTANT

Set up word clock synchronization correctly, or you may experience clicks and crackles in your
recordings.

Selecting an Audio Driver

By selecting an audio driver, you allow Cubase to communicate with the audio hardware.
Normally, when you start Cubase, a dialog opens that prompts you to select a driver, but you
can also select your audio hardware driver as described below.

NOTE

On Windows operating systems, we recommend that you access your hardware via an ASIO
driver developed specifically for the hardware. If no ASIO driver is installed, contact the
manufacturer of your audio hardware for information on available ASIO drivers. If no specific
ASIO driver is available, you can use the Steinberg built-in ASIO Driver.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select Audio System.
3. Open the ASIO Driver pop-up menu and select your audio hardware driver.
4. Click Switch to confirm your choice.

Setting up Audio Hardware

You must select and set up your audio hardware in the Studio Setup dialog before you can use
it.

PREREQUISITE
You have selected a driver for your audio hardware.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver.
3. Do one of the following to open the control panel for your audio hardware:

● On Windows, click Control Panel.

● On macOS, click Open Config App.
This button is available only for particular hardware products. If it is not available in your
setup, refer to the documentation of your audio hardware.

16
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

NOTE

The control panel is provided by the manufacturer of your audio hardware, and it is different
for each audio interface brand and model. However, control panels for the Steinberg built-in
ASIO Driver (Windows only) are provided by Steinberg.

4. Set up your audio hardware as recommended by the manufacturer.

Audio System Page

On the Audio System page, you can select an ASIO driver for your audio hardware.

● To open the Audio System page, select Studio > Studio Setup and select Audio System in
the Devices list.

The following options are available:

ASIO Driver
Allows you to select a driver.

Release Driver when Application is in Background

Releases the driver and allows other applications to play back via your audio hardware
even if Cubase is running.

Input Latency
Shows the input latency of the audio hardware.

17
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

Output Latency
Shows the output latency of the audio hardware.

ASIO-Guard Latency
Shows the ASIO-Guard latency.

HW Sample Rate
Shows the sample rate of your audio hardware.

HW Pull Up/Down
Shows the pull up/down status of the audio hardware.

In the Advanced Options section, the following options are available:

Reset
Allows you to reset the options in this section to their defaults.

Processing Precision
Allows you to set the audio processing precision to 32 bit float or 64 bit float.
Depending on this setting, all channels are processed and mixed in 32-bit floating-
point or 64-bit floating-point format.

NOTE

A processing precision of 64 bit float can increase CPU load and memory consumption.

To show all plug-ins that support 64-bit float processing, open the VST Plug-in
Manager from the Studio menu, and activate Show Plug-ins That Support 64-Bit
Float Processing in the Display Options pop-up menu.

NOTE

VST 2 plug-ins and instruments are always processed with 32-bit precision.

Activate Multi Processing

Allows you to distribute the processing load evenly to all available CPUs. This way,
Cubase can make full use of the combined power of multiple processors.

Activate ASIO-Guard
Activates the ASIO-Guard. This is only available if Activate Multi Processing is
activated.

ASIO-Guard Level
Allows you to set the ASIO-Guard level. The higher the level, the higher the processing
stability and the audio processing performance. However, higher levels also lead to
increased ASIO-Guard latency and memory usage.

Activate Steinberg Audio Power Scheme

Deactivates all power save modes that have an impact on real-time processing.

NOTE

This only works for very low latencies, and it increases the power consumption of your
computer.

Disk Preload
Allows you to specify how many seconds of audio are preloaded into RAM prior to
starting playback. This allows for smooth playback.

18
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

Adjust for Record Latency

If this option is activated, the plug-in latencies are taken into account during recording.

Record Shift
Allows you to shift the recordings by the specified value.

Volume Automation Precision

Allows you to set the number of samples after which a new volume automation event
is processed. The automation curve between the processed events is interpolated. This
smoothens transitions between automation events and prevents sudden jumps which
may lead to crackles.

At the bottom of the page, the following options are available:

Reset
Sends a reset signal to the active ASIO device and restarts the audio processing. This
can solve problems with audio playback.

NOTE

This leads to a short interruption of the playback.

Apply
Applies your settings on this page.

RELATED LINKS
VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 554

ASIO Driver Setup Page

This page allows you to set up your ASIO driver.

● To open the page where you can set up the ASIO driver, select Studio > Studio Setup and
select the audio driver in the Devices list.

19
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

The following options are available:

Control Panel
Opens the control panel for the audio hardware.

Input Latency
Shows the input latency of the audio driver.

Output Latency
Shows the output latency of the audio driver.

Clock Source
Allows you to select a clock source.

Externally Clocked
Activate this option if you use an external clock source.

Direct Monitoring
Activate this option to monitor via your audio hardware and to control it from Cubase.

In the Ports section, the following options are available:

Reset
Allows you to restore the default port names and to enable the visibility for all ports.

I/O
The port input/output status.

Port System Name

The system name of the port.

Show As
Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output
Routing pop-up menus.

Visible
Allows you to activate/deactivate audio ports.

State
The state of the audio port.

At the bottom of the page, the following options are available:

Reset
Sends a reset signal to the active ASIO device and restarts the audio processing. This
can solve problems with audio playback.

NOTE

This leads to a short interruption of the playback.

Apply
Applies your settings on this page.

20
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

Using External Clock Sources

If you use an external clock source, Cubase must be notified that it receives external clock signals
and derives its speed from that source.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver.
3. Activate Externally Clocked.

RESULT
Cubase now derives its speed from the external source.

NOTE

For proper audio playback and recording, you must set the sample rate of the project to the
sample rate of the incoming clock signals.

When a sample rate mismatch occurs, the Record Format field on the Project window status
line is highlighted in a different color. Cubase accepts a sample rate mismatch, and playback is
therefore faster or slower.

Using Several Audio Applications Simultaneously

You can allow other applications to play back via your audio hardware even if Cubase is running.

PREREQUISITE
You have set other audio applications that access the audio hardware to release the audio driver.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select Audio System.
3. Activate Release Driver when Application is in Background.

RESULT
The application that has the focus can access the audio hardware.

Audio Hardware Configuration

Most audio cards provide one or more small applications that allow you to customize your
hardware.

The settings are normally gathered on a control panel that can be opened from within Cubase or
separately, when Cubase is not running. For details, refer to the audio hardware documentation.

Settings include:

● Selecting which inputs/outputs are active.

● Setting up word clock synchronization.
● Turning on/off monitoring via the hardware.
● Setting levels for each input.

21
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up Audio

● Setting levels for the outputs so that they match the equipment that you use for monitoring.
● Selecting digital input and output formats.
● Making settings for the audio buffers.

Setting up Input and Output Ports

Once you have selected the driver for your audio hardware and have set it up, you must specify
which inputs and outputs to use.

PREREQUISITE
You have selected a driver for your audio hardware.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver.
3. Make your changes.
4. Click OK.

RELATED LINKS
ASIO Driver Setup Page on page 19

Audio Bus Setup

Cubase uses a system of input and output busses to transfer audio between the program and
the audio hardware.

● Input busses let you route audio from the inputs of your audio hardware into Cubase. This
means that audio is always recorded through one or several input busses.
● Output busses let you route audio from Cubase to the outputs of your audio hardware. This
means that audio is always played back through one or several output busses.

Once you have set up the internal input and output busses, you can connect your audio source,
for example, a microphone, to your audio interface and start recording, playing back, and
mixing.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections on page 28

Monitoring
In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while recording.

The following ways of monitoring are available:

● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase.

● Via Cubase.
● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring.
This is a combination of the other methods.

RELATED LINKS
External Monitoring on page 231

22
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up MIDI

Monitoring via Cubase on page 231

ASIO Direct Monitoring on page 232

Setting up MIDI
You must set up your MIDI equipment before you can use it in Cubase.

IMPORTANT

Turn off all equipment before making any connections.

PROCEDURE
1. Connect your MIDI equipment (keyboard, MIDI interface, etc.) to your computer.
2. Install the drivers for your MIDI equipment.

RESULT
You can use your MIDI equipment in Cubase.

MIDI Connections
To play back and record MIDI data from your MIDI device, for example, a MIDI keyboard, you
need to connect the MIDI ports.

Connect the MIDI output port of your MIDI device to the MIDI input port of your audio hardware.
This way, the MIDI device sends MIDI data to be played back or recorded inside your computer.

Connect the MIDI input port of your MIDI device to the MIDI output port of your audio hardware.
This way, you can send MIDI data from Cubase to the MIDI device. For example, you can record
your own playing, edit the MIDI data in Cubase, and then play it back on the keyboard and record
the audio that is coming out of the keyboard.

Showing or Hiding MIDI Ports

You can show the MIDI ports that you want to use and hide those that you do not use on the
MIDI pop-up menus in the program.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup.
3. To hide a MIDI port, deactivate its Visible column.
4. Click OK.

Setting up All MIDI Inputs

When you record MIDI, you can specify which MIDI input each recording MIDI track should use.
However, you can also record any MIDI data from any MIDI input. For this to work, you must first
set up which inputs are included when you select All MIDI Inputs for a MIDI track.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.

23
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up MIDI

2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup.

3. Activate In ‘All MIDI Inputs’ for a port.

NOTE

If you have connected a MIDI remote control unit, make sure to deactivate the In ‘All MIDI
Inputs’ option for that MIDI input. This avoids accidental recording of data from the remote
control when All MIDI Inputs is selected as input for a MIDI track.

4. Click OK.

RESULT
When you select All MIDI Inputs on the Input Routing pop-up menu of a MIDI track in the
Routing section of the Inspector, the MIDI track uses all MIDI inputs that you specified in the
MIDI Port Setup.

MIDI Port Setup Page

The MIDI Port Setup page in the Studio Setup dialog displays the connected MIDI devices and
allows you to set up their ports.

● To open the MIDI Port Setup page, select Studio > Studio Setup and activate MIDI Port
Setup in the Devices list.

The following columns are displayed:

Device
The connected MIDI devices.

I/O
The port input/output status.

Port System Name

The system name of the port.

Show As
Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output
Routing pop-up menus.

Visible
Allows you to activate/deactivate MIDI ports.

24
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up MIDI

State
The state of the MIDI port.

In 'All MIDI Inputs'

Allows you to record MIDI data from all MIDI inputs.

NOTE

Deactivate this option if you use remote control devices.

State
The state of the MIDI port.

Monitor
Opens the Input Monitor/Output Monitor window that allows you to monitor
incoming/outgoing MIDI events.

Usage
If you connect a MIDI controller and use it on the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone
of the Project window, the corresponding port Usage columns change to display the
name of the connected controller. These ports are used for remote control only.

The following options are available:

Use System Timestamp for 'Windows MIDI' Inputs

Activate this option if you have persistent timing problems, such as shifted notes. If this
is activated, the system timestamp is used as a time reference.

Use Device 'DirectMusic'

If you do not use a device with a DirectMusic device driver, you can leave this option
deactivated. This enhances the system performance.

Use System Timestamp for 'DirectMusic' Inputs

Activate this option if you have persistent timing problems, such as shifted notes. If this
is activated, the system timestamp is used as a time reference.

Use Device 'WinRT MIDI'

Activates the Windows Runtime MIDI API, WinRT MIDI, that allows for native support
of bluetooth MIDI in Windows, better plug and play, and better handling of multiple
identical devices.
If you have problems with bluetooth MIDI and plug and play, deactivate Use Device
'WinRT MIDI', reconnect your bluetooth MIDI device, and activate Use Device 'WinRT
MIDI' again.

Use System Timestamp for 'WinRT MIDI' Inputs

Activate this option if you have persistent timing problems, such as shifted notes. If this
is activated, the system timestamp is used as a time reference.

At the bottom of the page, the following options are available:

Reset
Allows you to restore the default port names and to enable the visibility for all ports.

Apply
Applies your settings on this page.

25
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Setting up MIDI

Plug and Play Support for MIDI Devices

Cubase supports plug and play of USB MIDI devices. These devices can be plugged in and
switched on while the application is running.

MIDI Remote Page

The MIDI Remote page in the Studio Setup dialog displays the connected MIDI controllers.

● To open the MIDI Remote page, select Studio > Studio Setup and activate MIDI Remote in
the Devices list.

The following columns are displayed:

Vendor
Shows information about the vendor of the connected MIDI controller.

Device
Shows the connected MIDI controller.

Created By
Shows information about the script creator for the connected MIDI controller.

Input
Shows the input port of your MIDI controller.

Output
Shows the output port of your MIDI controller.

Open MIDI Remote in Lower Zone

Opens the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window.

Open MIDI Remote Manager

Opens the MIDI Remote Manager that shows information about the connected MIDI
controllers and the installed scripts.

At the bottom of the page, the following options are available:

Reset
Allows you to restore the default port names and to enable the visibility for all ports.

26
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Setting up Your System
Synchronizers

Apply
Applies your settings on this page.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote on page 565

Synchronizers
When using Cubase with external tape transports, you must probably add a synchronizer to your
system.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections.

For information on how to connect and set up your synchronizer, refer to the documentation of
your synchronizer.

RELATED LINKS
Synchronization on page 817

27
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Audio Connections

To play back and record in Cubase, you must set up input and output busses in the Audio
Connections window.

The bus types that you need depend on your audio hardware, on your general audio setup, and
on the projects that you use.

Audio Connections Window

The Audio Connections window allows you to set up input and output busses.

To open the Audio Connections window, do one of the following:

● Select Studio > Audio Connections.

● Press F4 .

Inputs/Outputs Tab
The Inputs and Outputs tabs allow you to set up and configure input and output busses.

Inputs tab

Outputs tab

The following options are available above the bus list:

Add Bus
Opens the Add Input Bus dialog, where you can create a new bus configuration.

Presets
Opens the Presets pop-up menu, where you can select bus configuration presets. Save
Preset allows you to save a bus configuration as preset. Remove Preset deletes the
selected preset.

28
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Connections
Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs

Expand All/Collapse
Expands/Collapses all busses in the bus list.

The following columns are available for the bus list:

Bus Name
Lists the busses. Click the name of a bus to select or rename it.

Speakers
Indicates the speaker configuration (mono, stereo) of each bus.

Audio Device
Shows the selected ASIO driver.

Device Port
Shows which physical inputs/outputs on your audio hardware are used by the bus.
Expand the bus entry to show all speaker channels. If the bus entry is collapsed, only
the first port that is used by this bus is visible.
The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given
port. The busses are shown in square brackets next to the port name.
Up to three bus assignments can be displayed in this way. If more connections have
been made, this is indicated by a number at the end of the port name.
For example, “Adat 1 [Stereo1] [Stereo2] [Stereo3] (+2)” means that the Adat1 port is
already assigned to three stereo busses plus two additional busses.

Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs

Before you set up busses, you should rename the default inputs and outputs of your audio
hardware. This allows you to transfer projects between different computers and setups.

For example, if you move your project to another studio, the audio hardware may be of a
different model. But if you and the other studio have agreed on identical names for your inputs
and outputs, Cubase corrects inputs and outputs for your busses.

NOTE

If you open a project that was created on another computer and the port names do not match
or the port configuration is not the same, the Missing Ports dialog opens. This allows you to
manually re-route ports that are used in the project to ports on your computer.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select Audio System.
3. Open the ASIO Driver pop-up menu and select your audio hardware driver.
4. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver.
5. In the Show As column, click on a port name and enter a new name.
6. Repeat the previous step until you have renamed all required ports.
7. Click OK.

RELATED LINKS
Re-Routing Missing Ports on page 94

29
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Connections
Adding Input and Output Busses

Hiding Ports
You can hide ports that you are not using. Hidden ports are not displayed in the Audio
Connections window.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver.
3. In the Visible column, deactivate the ports that you want to hide.
4. Click OK.

Activating and Deactivating Ports (macOS only)

On macOS, you can specify which input and output ports are active. This allows you to use the
microphone input instead of the line input or to deactivate the audio card input or output.

NOTE

This function is only available for built-in audio, standard USB audio devices, and some other
audio cards.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Activate/Deactivate ports.
5. Click OK.

Adding Input and Output Busses

You must add input and output busses to establish the connection between your audio hardware
and Cubase.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Audio Connections dialog, click the Inputs or Outputs tab.
2. Click Add Bus.
3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus.
4. Optional: Enter a name for the bus.
If you do not specify a name, the bus is named according to the channel configuration.
5. Click Add Bus.
The new bus is added to the bus list.
6. For each of the speaker channels in the bus, click in the Device Port column and select a
port for your audio hardware.

30
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Connections
Presets for Input and Output Busses

Setting the Default Output Bus (Main Mix)

Main Mix is the default output bus to which each new audio, group, or effect channel is
automatically routed. If only one bus is available, this bus is automatically used as the default
output bus.

PREREQUISITE
Add an output bus.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Audio Connections dialog, right-click the output bus that you want to use as default
output bus.
2. Select Set <bus name> as Main Mix.

RESULT
The selected bus is used as the default bus. Main Mix is indicated by a speaker icon next to its
name.

RELATED LINKS
Inputs/Outputs Tab on page 28

Presets for Input and Output Busses

For input and output bus configurations, you can use different kinds of presets.

● Standard bus configurations.

● Automatically created presets tailored to your specific hardware configuration.
On startup, Cubase analyzes the physical inputs and outputs that are provided by your audio
hardware and creates a number of hardware-dependent presets.
● Your own presets.

NOTE

You can create default presets for input and output bus configurations. If you create a new
empty project, these default presets are applied. To create default presets, save your preferred
input and output bus configurations under the name Default. If you have not defined default
presets, the last used input and output bus configuration is applied when you create a new
empty project.

Saving a Bus Configuration Preset

You can save your own input and output bus configuration as presets.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Audio Connections.
2. Click the Inputs or Outputs tab, and set up your bus configuration.
3. Open the Presets menu, and select Save Preset.
4. In the Save Preset dialog, enter a name.
5. Click OK.

31
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Connections
Monitoring Bus

RESULT
The preset is available in the Presets menu.

Deleting a Bus Configuration Preset

You can delete bus configuration presets that you no longer need.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Audio Connections.
2. Click the Inputs or Outputs tab.
3. From the Presets menu, select the preset that you want to delete.
4. Select Remove Preset.

RESULT
The preset is deleted.

Monitoring Bus
The default output bus (Main Mix) is used for monitoring. You can adjust the monitoring level in
the MixConsole.

RELATED LINKS
Setting the Default Output Bus (Main Mix) on page 31
MixConsole on page 297

Bus Configurations
After you have set up all the required busses for a project, you can edit the names and change
port assignments. The bus configuration is saved with the project.

Removing Busses
You can remove busses that you no longer need.

PROCEDURE
● In the Audio Connections window, do one of the following:

● To remove a single bus, right-click the bus in the list and select Remove Bus.
Alternatively, you can select the bus and press Backspace .
● To remove multiple input or output busses at the same time, use Shift or Ctrl/Cmd to
select them in the list, right-click them, and select Remove Selected Busses.

Changing Port Assignments

You can change the port assignment of busses.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Audio Connections.

32
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Connections
Bus Configurations

2. Do one of the following:

● To change the assignment of a single bus, open the Device Port pop-up menu, and
select a new port.
● To assign subsequent busses to several selected busses, open the Device Port pop-up
menu for the first selected entry, press Shift , and select a device port.
● To assign the same port to several selected busses, open the Device Port pop-up menu
for the first selected entry, press Shift - Alt/Opt , and select a device port.

Renaming Multiple Busses

You can rename all the selected busses at once using incrementing numbers or letters.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Audio Connections.
2. Select the busses that you want to rename.
3. Do one of the following:

● Enter a new name for one of the busses, followed by a number.

● Enter a new name for one of the busses, followed by a space and a capital letter.
4. Press Return .

RESULT
The busses are renamed automatically, using either incrementing numbers or letters.

NOTE

The renaming starts from the bus where you edit the name and runs to the bottom. Then it
continues from the top until all selected busses have been renamed.

33
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window

The Project window provides you with an overview of the project and allows you to navigate and
perform large scale editing.

Each project has one Project window. The Project window is displayed whenever you open or
create a new project.

● To open a project, select File > Open.

● To create a new project, select File > New Project.

The Project window is divided into several sections:

1 Channel
The Channel tab shows the channel-related sections and layouts for the track that is
selected in the track list.
2 Left Zone
The left zone shows the Inspector that features the Track tab and the Editor tab:

● The Track tab shows the settings for the track that is selected in the track list.

NOTE

In this documentation, we use Inspector to refer to the Track tab of the Inspector.

● The Editor tab shows the settings for the editor that is open in the lower zone.
3 Project Zone
The project zone shows the toolbar, the track list with the tracks, the event display with the
parts and events of the project, and the Project window ruler.

34
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Menus in Cubase

On the toolbar, you can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the overview line,
and the Transport Bar.
4 Lower Zone
The lower zone features the following tabs: Chord Pads, Editor, Sampler Control,
MixConsole, Drum Machine, and MIDI Remote.
5 Right Zone
The right zone shows the VSTi rack, and the Media rack.

RELATED LINKS
Project Zone on page 36
Channel Tab on page 49
Project Window Left Zone on page 50
Project Window Lower Zone on page 54
Project Window Right Zone on page 59
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Menus in Cubase
The main menus and submenus in Cubase provide access to all features and settings of the
program.

On Windows, the full menu is available in the Project window. Other windows offer their own
menus with a reduced number of menu entries which are useful in the respective context. In
the Hub, the menu is always shown. The menu of all other windows can be shown/hidden by
activating/deactivating Show Menu Bar in the context menu of the corresponding window title.

On macOS, all menus are available via the system menu bar on the top of the screen.

Showing/Hiding Menu Bars (Windows only)

On Windows, you can choose whether to show or hide the menu bars of most windows.

NOTE

For the Hub you cannot hide the menu bar.

PROCEDURE
● To show/hide the menu bar of a window, right-click its title bar and activate/deactivate Show
Menu Bar.

RELATED LINKS
Menus in Cubase on page 35

Showing/Hiding Zones
You can show/hide the zones in the Project window according to your needs.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

35
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

● To show/hide the Channel tab, click Show/Hide Channel on the Project window
toolbar.
● To show/hide the left zone, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar.
● To show/hide the lower zone, click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window
toolbar.
● To show/hide the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window
toolbar.

NOTE

The project zone is always shown.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Channel Tab on page 49
Project Window Left Zone on page 50
Project Window Lower Zone on page 54
Project Window Right Zone on page 59

Project Zone
The project zone is the heart of the Project window and cannot be hidden.

The project zone features the track list and the event display with the ruler. Furthermore, you can
activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the overview line, and the Transport Bar for the
project zone.

RELATED LINKS
Track List on page 43
Event Display on page 44
Global Track Controls on page 44
Ruler on page 45
Status Line on page 47
Info Line on page 47
Overview Line on page 48
Transport Bar on page 48

36
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

Project Window Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for opening other windows and various project settings
and functions.

● To show/hide tools, right-click an empty area of the toolbar and activate the tools that you
want to display. To show all tools, click Show All.

NOTE

The number of elements that are shown also depends on the size of the Project window and
the screen resolution.

The following options are available:

Project Activation Control

Activate Project

NOTE

Only available if more than one project is open.

Activates a project.

Project History
Undo/Redo

Undoes/Redoes actions in the Project window.

Constrain Delay Compensation

Constrain Delay Compensation

Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.

Media & MixConsole Windows

Open MediaBay

Opens/Closes the MediaBay.

Open Pool Window

Opens/Closes the Pool window.

Open MixConsole

37
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

Opens/Closes the MixConsole.

State Buttons
Deactivate All Mute States

Deactivates all mute states.

Deactivate All Solo States

Deactivates all solo states.

Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks

Activates/Deactivates read automation for all tracks.

Activate/Deactivate Write for All Tracks

Activates/Deactivates write automation for all tracks.

Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll

Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.

Select Auto-Scroll Settings

Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend
Auto-Scroll When Editing.

Locators
Go to Left Locator Position

Allows you to go to the left locator position.

Left Locator Position

Shows the left locator position.

Go to Right Locator Position

Allows you to go to the right locator position.

Right Locator Position

Shows the right locator position.

Transport Controls
Go to Previous Marker/Zero

Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline.

38
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

Go to Next Marker/Project End

Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end.

Rewind

Moves backward.

Forward

Moves forward.

Activate Cycle

Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.

Stop

Stops playback.

Start

Starts playback.

Transport Record

Activates/Deactivates record mode.

Tool Buttons
Object Selection

Selects events and parts.

Range Selection

Selects ranges.

Draw

Draws events.

Erase

Erases events.

Split

Splits events.

Glue

Glues events together.

39
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

Mute

Mutes events.

Zoom

Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt and click to zoom out.

Line

Creates a series of contiguous events.

Play

Allows you to play back events.

Color

Allows you to colorize events.

Color Menu
Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events

Opens the Colorize pane that allows you to colorize the selected tracks or events.

Nudge

Nudge Start Left

Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left.

Nudge Start Right

Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right.

Move Left

Moves the selected event to the left.

Move Right

Moves the selected event to the right.

Nudge End Left

Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left.

Nudge End Right

Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right.

40
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

Snap
Snap to Zero Crossing

Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero.

Snap On/Off

Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap
Type.

Snap Type

Allows you to specify to what positions you want events to snap.

Grid Type
Grid Type

Allows you to specify a grid type for the Snap function. This setting only has effect if
Snap Type is set to one of the grid options.

Quantize
Apply Quantize

Applies the quantize settings.

Quantize Presets

Allows you to select a quantize preset.

Soft Quantize On/Off

Activates/Deactivates soft quantize.

Open Quantize Panel

Opens the Quantize Panel.

Audio Performance Meter

Audio Performance Meter

The upper bar displays either the current realtime peak or the ASIO-Guard load,
depending on which of the two has the higher value. The lower bar shows the hard
disk transfer load of the disk engine.
For a more detailed display of realtime peak and ASIO-Guard load, click to open the
Audio Performance panel.

41
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

Open MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

Opens the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.

Right Divider
Right Divider
Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.

Window Zone Controls

Show/Hide Channel

Shows/Hides the Channel tab.

Show/Hide Left Zone

Shows/Hides the left zone of the window.

Show/Hide Lower Zone

Shows/Hides the lower zone of the window.

Show/Hide Right Zone

Shows/Hides the right zone of the window.

Set up Window Layout

Allows you to set up the window layout.

RELATED LINKS
Left/Right Toolbar Divider on page 42
Snap Types Menu on page 71
Markers on page 288
Automation on page 525
Synchronization on page 817
Audio Performance Monitor Panel on page 878

Left/Right Toolbar Divider

The left and right toolbar dividers allow you to lock the position of specific tools on the left or on
the right side of the toolbar, so that they are always shown.

All other items are shown in the center of the toolbar. When you reduce the width of the Project
window, these toolbar items are hidden successively. When you increase the width, they are
shown again.

42
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

Toolbox
The toolbox makes the editing tools from the toolbar available at the mouse pointer position. It
can be opened instead of the standard context menus in the event display and editors.

● To activate the toolbox function, activate Show Toolbox on Right-Click in the Preferences
dialog (Editing—Tools page).
● To open the toolbox, right-click in the event display or editor.
If Show Toolbox on Right-Click is deactivated, the context menu opens.
● To open the context menu instead of the toolbox, press any modifier key and right-click in
the event display or editor.
If Show Toolbox on Right-Click is deactivated, press any modifier key to open the toolbox
instead of the context menu.

Track List
The track list shows the tracks that are used in the project. When a track is added and selected, it
contains name fields and settings for this track.

● To decide which controls are visible for each track type, right-click the track list and open the
Track Controls Settings dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Track Controls Settings Dialog on page 132

Dividing the Track List

You can divide the track list into an upper track list and a lower track list. These track lists can
have independent zoom and scroll controls. Dividing the track list is useful if you are working
with a video track and multi-track audio, for example. It allows you to place the video track in the
upper track list and to scroll the audio tracks separately in the lower track list, so that they can be
arranged with the video.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Select Project > Divide Track List.

● Click Divide Track List in the top right corner of the Project window below the ruler.

43
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

RESULT
The track list is divided, and video, marker, or arranger tracks are automatically moved to the
upper track list. All other track types are moved to the lower track list.

NOTE

The area of the project zone that has the focus is indicated by a highlighted and solid focus
frame, whereas the non-active area is shown with a dashed frame.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

● To move any type of track from the lower track list to the upper track list and vice versa,
right-click it in the track list and select Toggle Track List from the context menu.
● To resize the upper part of the track list, click and drag the divider between the track list
sections.
● To revert to a single track list, click Divide Track List again.

RELATED LINKS
Keyboard Focus in the Project Window on page 65

Event Display
The event display shows the parts and events that are used in the project. They are positioned
along the timeline.

Global Track Controls

The global track controls allow you to manage the tracks in the track list.

● The global track controls are shown above the track list.

44
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

1 Add Track
Opens the Add Track dialog.
2 Use Track Preset
Allows you to add a track using a track preset.

Ruler
By default, the ruler shows the timeline and the time format of the project.

Initially, the Project window ruler uses the time format that is specified in the Project Setup
dialog.

However, you can select an independent time format for the ruler.

● To select an independent time format for the ruler, click the arrow button to the right of the
ruler and select an option from the pop-up menu, or right-click anywhere in the ruler.

The ruler settings affect the ruler, the info line, and the tooltip position values.

You can also select independent formats for other rulers and position displays.

NOTE

To set the time format globally for all windows, use the Time Format pop-up menu in the
Project Setup dialog or the Select Primary Time Format pop-up menu on the Transport panel,
or hold down Ctrl/Cmd and select a format in any ruler.

RELATED LINKS
Project Setup Dialog on page 90
Ruler Modes on page 46
Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 215

Ruler Time Format Menu

You can select a time format for the ruler.

● To show the ruler time formats, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler.

The selection that you make affects the time formats in the following areas:

● Ruler
● Info line
● Tooltip position values

The following options are available:

45
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

Bars+Beats
Sets the ruler to display bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default, there are
120 ticks per sixteenth note. To change this, adjust the MIDI Display Resolution
setting in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).

Seconds
Sets the ruler to display hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.

Timecode
Sets the ruler to display hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. You can set the
number of frames per second (fps) via the Project Frame Rate pop-up menu in the
Project Setup dialog. To display subframes, activate Show Timecode Subframes in
the Preferences dialog (Transport page).

Samples
Sets the ruler to display samples.

RELATED LINKS
Ruler Modes on page 46

Ruler Modes
By default, the ruler follows the primary time format, that is, the time format that you set up in
the Project Setup dialog or on the Transport. The ruler modes, however, allow you to set up a
time format for the ruler that differs from the time format in the main time display.

● To show the ruler modes, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler.

Time Linear
Sets the ruler relative to the time. If there are tempo changes on the Tempo track, the
distance between the bars varies in Bars+Beats mode.

Bars+Beats Linear
Sets the ruler relative to the meter position, that is, bars and beats. If there are tempo
changes on the Tempo track, the distance between the bars remains the same in
Bars+Beats mode. If the ruler is set to a time-based mode, the distance between
seconds varies depending on the tempo changes.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Tempo and Time Signature on page 793
Ruler Time Format Menu on page 45
Project Setup Dialog on page 90
Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 215

46
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

Status Line
The status line shows the most important project settings.

● To activate the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Status
Line.

The following information is shown on the status line:

NOTE

To show/hide status line elements, right-click an empty area of the status line and activate the
corresponding options. To show all elements, click Show All.

Record Time
Max. Record Time
Displays the remaining time for recording, depending on your project settings and
the available hard disk space. Click to display the remaining record time in a separate
window.

Record File Format

Record Format
Displays the sample rate and the bit depth used for recording. Click to open the
Project Setup dialog.

Project Frame Rate

Project Frame Rate
Displays the frame rate used in the project. Click to open the Project Setup dialog.

Project Pan Law

Project Pan Law
Displays the current pan law setting. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog.

External Sync State

External Sync State
Displays the current pan law setting. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Info Line
The info line shows information about the event or part that you selected in the project zone.

To activate the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Info Line.

47
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Zone

NOTE

To show/hide info line elements, right-click an empty area of the info line and activate the
corresponding options. To show all elements, click Show All.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Value Editing Rules on the Info Line

On the info line you can edit almost all event or part data using regular value editing.

If you select several events or parts, the information on the info line is shown in another color
and only. In this case, only information about the first item in the selection is displayed. The
following rules apply:

● Value changes are applied to all selected elements, relative to the current values.
Example: You have selected two audio events. The first event has a length of 1 bar, the
second event has a length of 2 bars. If you change the info line value to 3, the first event is
resized to 3 bars and the second event is resized to 4 bars.
● Value changes are applied absolute to the current values if you press Ctrl/Cmd while
modifying the value on the info line.
In the example above, both events are resized to 3 bars.

NOTE

To change the modifier, select a new modifier in the Info Line category of the Preferences
dialog (Editing—Tool Modifiers page).

Overview Line
The overview line allows you to zoom and to navigate to other sections in the project.

To activate the overview line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Overview.

On the overview line, events and parts are displayed as boxes. A rectangle indicates the section
of the project that is displayed in the event display.

● To zoom the event display in or out horizontally, resize the rectangle by dragging the edges.
● To navigate to another section of the event display, drag the rectangle to the left or to the
right, or click in the upper part of the overview.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Transport Bar
The Transport Bar displays the transport functions in an integrated zone of the Project window.

● To activate the Transport Bar, click Set up Window Layout on the Project window toolbar
and activate Transport Bar.
● To show/hide tools, right-click an empty area of the Transport Bar, and activate the tools
that you want to display. To show all tools, click Show All.

48
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Channel Tab

RELATED LINKS
Common Record Modes Menu on page 230
Audio Record Modes on page 235
MIDI Record Modes on page 242
Left/Right Toolbar Divider on page 42
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Channel Tab
The Channel tab shows the channel-related sections and layouts for the track that is selected in
the track list.

To show/hide the Channel tab, do one of the following:

● In the Project window toolbar, click Show/Hide Channel.

● In the Project window toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Channel.

● If the selected track does not have a corresponding channel or if the track is disabled, the
Channel tab is empty.
● If the selected track is a MIDI or instrument track that is routed to an external MIDI port, the
Channel tab shows the MIDI channel.
● If the selected track is a MIDI or instrument track that is routed to a multitimbral rack or
track instrument, the Channel tab shows the first return channel.
● If the selected track is a MIDI or instrument track that is routed to a multi-out instrument,
the Channel tab shows a control that allows the user to choose which return channel is
displayed.

NOTE

You can adjust the width of the Channel tab by dragging its right divider to the left or to the
right.

49
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Left Zone

RELATED LINKS
Track List on page 43
Channel Sections on page 131
Inspector on page 51

Opening the Channel Tab

If the Channel tab is not shown, you can show it via the Project window toolbar.

PROCEDURE
1. Select a track in the track list.
2. Do one of the following:

● On the Project window toolbar, activate Show/Hide Channel.

● On the Project window toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate the Channel
option.

RESULT
The Channel tab for the selected track opens. If more than one track is selected in the track list,
the controls and parameters for the topmost selected track are shown.

RELATED LINKS
Channel Tab on page 49
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

Project Window Left Zone

The left zone of the Project window allows you to display the Inspector.

To show/hide the left zone, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar.

● Inspector

50
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Left Zone

RELATED LINKS
Inspector on page 51
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Inspector
The Inspector displays controls and parameters for either the selected track in the track list or
the event or part that is displayed in the editor in the lower zone.

● To show/hide the Inspector, click Show/Hide Left Zone in the Project window toolbar.

The following tabs are available:

Track
Opens the Track Inspector for the selected track.

Editor
Opens the Editor Inspector for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the
lower zone.

NOTE

You can adjust the width of the Inspector by dragging its right divider to the left or to the right.

RELATED LINKS
Opening the Track Inspector on page 51
Opening the Editor Inspector on page 52
Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 57

Opening the Track Inspector

The Track Inspector shows controls and parameters for the track that is selected in the track list.

PROCEDURE
1. If the Left Zone is not visible, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to
activate it.
2. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Track tab.

51
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Left Zone

RESULT
The Track Inspector for the selected track opens. If more than one track is selected in the track
list, the controls and parameters for the topmost selected track are shown.

NOTE

In this documentation, we use Inspector to refer to the Track tab of the Inspector.

RELATED LINKS
Opening the Editor Inspector on page 52

Opening the Editor Inspector

The Editor Inspector shows controls and parameters for the event or part that is displayed in
the editor in the lower zone.

PREREQUISITE
The Sample Editor, the Audio Part Editor, the Key Editor, the Drum Editor, the Pattern Editor,
the Drum Machine or the Score Editor is shown in the lower zone.

PROCEDURE
1. If the left zone is not visible, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to
activate the Left Zone.
2. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Editor tab.

52
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Left Zone

RESULT
The Editor Inspector for the event or part opens.

NOTE

The Editor Inspector only contains information if an editor is displayed in the lower zone.
Otherwise, it is empty.

RELATED LINKS
Opening the Track Inspector on page 51
Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 57

Inspector Sections
The Track tab and the Editor tab of the Inspector are divided into sections that each contain
different controls for the track, event or part.

Not all Inspector sections are shown by default. The available sections depend on the type of the
selected track, event, or part and on the settings in the setup dialog for the Track tab and the
Editor tab of the Inspector.

● To show/hide sections, right-click an empty space in the Inspector, and activate/deactivate

the corresponding options.
● To open/close sections, click their names.

NOTE

To show the selected section exclusively and collapse the other sections, right-click the section
header and activate Expand Sections Exclusively.

RELATED LINKS
Set up Inspector Sections Pane on page 117
Track Inspector Sections on page 117
Basics Section for Audio Tracks on page 119
Basics Section for Instrument Tracks on page 121
Basics Section for MIDI Tracks on page 123
Basics Section for Sampler Tracks on page 120
Arranger Track Inspector on page 128
Basics Section for Marker Tracks on page 126
Video Track Inspector on page 130
Key Editor Inspector on page 685
Drum Editor Inspector on page 714
Sample Editor Inspector on page 409

53
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Lower Zone

Project Window Lower Zone

The lower zone of the Project window allows you to display specific windows and editors in an
integrated and fixed zone of the Project window. This is useful if you work on single screen
systems and notebooks, for example.

To show/hide the lower zone, click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar.

The lower zone features the following tabs: Chord Pads, Editor, Sampler Control, MixConsole,
Drum Machine, and MIDI Remote.

NOTE

You can show/hide specific tabs in the lower zone by right-clicking a tab and activating/
deactivating the options in the Set up Tabs pane.

To close the lower zone, click Close Lower Zone to the left of the tabs.

RELATED LINKS
Opening Chord Pads on page 55
Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 56
Opening Sampler Control on page 56
Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 57
Opening MIDI Remote in the Lower Zone on page 59
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Setup Panes on page 871

Setting up the Lower Zone Tabs

The lower zone shows the Chord Pads, the Editor, the Sampler Control, the MixConsole, and
MIDI Remote. You can change the order of the tabs, and you can hide tabs that you do not need.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click a tab header in the lower zone.

54
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Lower Zone

2. Do one of the following:

● Activate/Deactivate options to show/hide particular tabs in the lower zone.

● Drag the items up or down in the list to change the order of the tabs.
● Use the Preset menu to save your configuration as a preset.

RESULT
The tabs are shown in the lower zone, according to your configuration.

Opening Chord Pads

Chord Pads allow you to play with chords and to change their voicings and tensions.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone.
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Chord Pads tab.

RESULT
The Chord Pads are opened.

55
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Lower Zone

RELATED LINKS
Using Chord Pads on page 751
Setting up the Lower Zone Tabs on page 54
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone

The MixConsole in the lower zone allows you to perform all basic mixing procedures in the lower
zone of the Project window. At the same time, you see your tracks and events in context.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone.
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the MixConsole tab.

RESULT
The MixConsole is displayed in the lower zone.

RELATED LINKS
MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 297
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Opening Sampler Control

Sampler Control allows you to display and edit the waveform of an audio sample on a sampler
track.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone.
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Sampler Control tab.

56
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Lower Zone

RESULT
Sampler Control is opened.

RELATED LINKS
Sampler Tracks on page 440
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone

The Editor in the lower zone allows you to edit events from within the lower zone of the Project
window. At the same time, you see the context of your tracks and events.

NOTE

By default, double-clicking an audio event/part or a MIDI part in the event display or selecting
it and pressing Return opens the corresponding editor in the lower zone of the Project
window. Using a menu command opens a separate editor window. You can change this in the
Preferences dialog (Editors page).

PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone.
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Editor tab.
3. In the event display, do one of the following:

● Select a MIDI part.

● Select an audio event.
● Select an audio part.

57
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Lower Zone

RESULT
Depending on your event or part selection, the lower zone shows either the Audio Part Editor,
the Sample Editor, or one of the MIDI editors.

NOTE

To change the default MIDI editor, select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, and select an option
from the Default MIDI Editor pop-up menu.

NOTE

If you open the editor and no event or part is selected, the editor in the lower zone is empty.

RELATED LINKS
Selecting a different MIDI Editor on page 58
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Selecting a different MIDI Editor

You can display the MIDI part that is opened in the editor in the lower zone in a different MIDI
editor. You can do this without changing the default MIDI editor.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Editor tab in the editor in the lower zone, click Select MIDI Editor.
2. Select an editor from the pop-up menu.

RESULT
The MIDI part is displayed in the selected editor.

58
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Right Zone

NOTE

This selection is temporary. The next time you open the MIDI part, the default MIDI editor is
used.

Opening MIDI Remote in the Lower Zone

The MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window allows you to load scripts for
MIDI remote controllers. It shows a visual representation of the actual physical controller and its
control mappings to Cubase parameters.

PROCEDURE
1. If the lower zone is not visible, click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar
to activate the lower zone.
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the MIDI Remote tab.

RESULT
The MIDI Remote tab is opened in the lower zone.

NOTE

The MIDI Remote tab is not a clickable user interface. All operations are meant to be performed
on the connected MIDI controller.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote on page 565

Project Window Right Zone

The right zone of the Project window allows you to display the VSTi rack and the Media rack.

To show/hide the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar.

The top of the right zone features the following tabs: VSTi and Media.

59
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Right Zone

NOTE

You can show/hide specific tabs in the right zone by right-clicking a tab and activating/
deactivating the options in the Set up Tabs pane.

RELATED LINKS
VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 61
Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 64
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Setup Panes on page 871

Opening the VSTi Rack in the Right Zone

You can open the VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window. This allows you to add and
edit VST instruments, and, at the same time, to see the context of your tracks and events.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Right Zone.
2. At the top of the right zone, click the VSTi tab.

60
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Right Zone

RESULT
The VSTi rack is opened in the right zone of the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 61
VST Instruments on page 535
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

VSTi Rack in the Right Zone

The VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to add and edit VST instruments
in the context of the Project window.

The following sections are available:

● Track
Shows the associated VST instrument for an instrument track.
● Rack
Shows a VST instrument.

The following controls are available:

Add Track Instrument

Opens the Add Track dialog that allows you to select an instrument and to add an
instrument track that is associated with this instrument.

Find Instruments

Opens a selector that allows you to find a loaded instrument.

Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Previous Instrument

Allows you to set the remote control focus to the previous instrument.

Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Next Instrument

61
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Right Zone

Allows you to set the remote control focus to the next instrument.

Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls

Shows/Hides the default quick controls for all loaded instruments.

Settings

Opens the Settings pop-up menu, where you can activate/deactivate the following
modes:

● Show VST Quick Controls for One Slot Only shows the VST Quick Controls
exclusively for the selected instrument.
● MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector follows
the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you work with
multitimbral instruments.
● Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls follows track selection ensures
that the VST Quick Controls remote control focus follows the track selection.

RELATED LINKS
VST Instruments Window on page 540

Opening the Media Rack in the Right Zone

You can show the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window. This allows you to see
the context of your tracks and events when you drag audio events, MIDI parts, presets, or
instruments into the Project window.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Right Zone.
2. At the top of the right zone, click the Media tab.

62
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Right Zone

RESULT
The Media rack is opened in the right zone of the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 64
MediaBay and Media Rack on page 489
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

63
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Project Window Right Zone

Media Rack in the Right Zone

The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to drag audio events, MIDI
parts, or instrument presets into the event display. It lists Steinberg factory content and any
installed Steinberg content sets.

The Media rack Home tab displays the following tiles:

VST Instruments
Shows all included VST instruments.

VST Effects
Shows all included VST effects.

Loops & Samples

Shows audio loops, MIDI loops, or instrument sounds ordered by content set.

Presets
Shows the track presets, strip presets, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets.

User Presets
Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, VST FX presets, and
instrument presets that are listed in the User folder.

Favorites
Shows your favorite folders and allows you to add new favorites. The favorites are
automatically added to the MediaBay database.

File Browser
Shows your file system and the pre-defined folders Favorites, This Computer, VST
Sound, Factory Content, and User Content where you can search for media files and
access them immediately.

64
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Keyboard Focus in the Project Window

RELATED LINKS
Media Rack in Right Zone on page 489
MediaBay and Media Rack on page 489

Keyboard Focus in the Project Window

The different zones in the Project window can be controlled by key commands. For this to work,
you must set the keyboard focus to the zone that you want to control by key commands.

The following Project window zones can have the keyboard focus:

● Project zone

NOTE

If you activate Divide Track List, the area of the project zone that has the focus is indicated
by a highlighted and solid focus frame, whereas the non-active area is shown with a dashed
frame.

● Channel tab
● Left zone
● Lower zone
● Right zone

If a zone has the keyboard focus, the border that surrounds it is highlighted in a specific color.

NOTE

You can change the focus color in the Preferences dialog (User Interface—Color Schemes
page).

RELATED LINKS
Project Zone on page 36
Channel Tab on page 49
Project Window Left Zone on page 50
Project Window Lower Zone on page 54
Project Window Right Zone on page 59
Project Window on page 34
Dividing the Track List on page 43

Activating Keyboard Focus for a Zone

You can activate the keyboard focus for a zone via mouse-click or key commands.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

65
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Zooming in the Project Window

● To activate any zone, click in it.

● To activate the next zone, press Tab . This allows you to move forward through the
zones.
● To activate the previous zone, press Shift - Tab .

NOTE

The editor in the lower zone automatically gets the keyboard focus if you double-click an
event or part in the event display, if you select an event or part and press Return , or if you
use key commands to open the zone.

RESULT
The keyboard focus is activated for this zone and the border of the zone is highlighted.

NOTE

The project zone and the lower zone have separate toolbars and info lines. If you use the toolbar
or the info line for one of these zones, the corresponding zone automatically gets the focus.

RELATED LINKS
Keyboard Focus in the Project Window on page 65

Zooming in the Project Window

To zoom in the Project window, use the standard zoom techniques.

NOTE

If screen redraws are slow on your system, activate Quick Zoom in the Preferences dialog
(Editing—Zoom page).

Zooming Horizontally
● Select the Zoom tool and click in the event display to zoom in. To zoom out, hold down
Alt/Opt and click.
● Move the mouse pointer over the event display, hold down Ctrl/Cmd , and move the mouse
wheel.
● Click Horizontal Zoom Presets, and from the menu, select an option.
● Use the horizontal zoom sliders to zoom in and out.
● Click the lower half of the ruler and drag down to zoom in horizontally. Click the lower half of
the ruler and drag up to zoom out horizontally.
● Press H to zoom in horizontally. Press G to zoom out horizontally.

NOTE

If the Grid Type in the Project window toolbar is set to Adapt to Zoom, the horizontal zoom
level affects the grid and snap resolution in the event display.

66
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Zooming in the Project Window

Zooming Vertically
● Select the Zoom tool, click in the event display, and drag a selection rectangle to zoom in
vertically and horizontally.

NOTE

For this to work, you must deactivate the Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming
Only option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Zoom page).

● Move the mouse pointer over the event display, hold down Ctrl/Cmd + Shift , and move the
mouse wheel.
● Click Track Height Presets, and from the menu, select an option.
● Use the vertical zoom sliders to zoom in and out. If you have made any individual track
height adjustments, the relative height differences are maintained.
● Press Shift - H to zoom in vertically. Press Shift - G to zoom out vertically.

RELATED LINKS
Zoom Submenu on page 67
Horizontal Zoom Presets on page 68
Track Height Presets Menu on page 147
Zooming in on Cycle Markers on page 69
Zoom History on page 70
Grid Type Menu on page 72

Zooming in on Audio Contents

You can zoom in vertically on the contents of audio parts and events. This is useful when viewing
quiet audio passages.

PROCEDURE
● Click the waveform zoom slider in the top right corner of the event display and drag up.

RESULT
The contents of audio parts and events in your project are zoomed in vertically.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To get an approximate reading on the level of the audio events by viewing the waveforms,
zoom out by dragging the slider all the way down again. Otherwise, zoomed waveforms may be
mistaken for clipped audio.

Zoom Submenu
The Zoom submenu contains options for zooming in the Project window.

● To open the Zoom submenu, select Edit > Zoom.

The following options are available:

67
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Zooming in the Project Window

Zoom In
Zooms in one step, centering on the project cursor.

Zoom Out
Zooms out one step, centering on the project cursor.

Zoom Full
Zooms out so that the whole project is visible. The whole project means the timeline
from the project start to the length set in the Project Setup dialog.

Zoom to Selection
Zooms in horizontally and vertically so that the current selection fills the screen.

Zoom to Selection (Horiz.)

Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the screen.

Zoom to Event
Zooms in to show the currently selected event. This option is available in the Sample
Editor and in some MIDI editors.

Zoom In Vertically
Zooms in one step vertically.

Zoom Out Vertically

Zooms out one step vertically.

Zoom In Tracks
Zooms the selected tracks in one step vertically.

Zoom Out Tracks

Zooms the selected tracks out one step vertically.

Zoom Selected Tracks

Zooms in vertically on the selected tracks and minimizes the height of all other tracks.

Undo Zoom
These options allow you to undo the last zoom operation.

Redo Zoom
These options allow you to redo the last zoom operation.

RELATED LINKS
Zoom Submenu on page 412

Horizontal Zoom Presets

You can create horizontal zoom presets to set up different zoom settings. For example, you can
create a preset that displays the entire project and a second preset with a high zoom factor for
detailed editing. The Horizontal Zoom Presets pop-up menu allows you to select, create, and
organize presets.

● To open the Horizontal Zoom Presets menu, click the button to the left of the horizontal
zoom control.

68
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Zooming in the Project Window

● To save the current zoom setting as a preset, open the Horizontal Zoom Presets pop-up
menu and select Add. In the Save Preset dialog that opens, type in a name for the preset
and click OK.
● To apply a preset, select it from the Horizontal Zoom Presets pop-up menu.
● To display the entire project, open the Horizontal Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select
Zoom Full.
This displays the project from the Project Start Time to the Project Length, as set in the
Project Setup dialog.
● To delete a preset, open the Horizontal Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Organize. In
the dialog that opens, select the preset in the list and click Delete.
● To rename a preset, open the Horizontal Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Organize.
In the dialog that opens, select a preset from the list and click Rename. Type in a new name
for the preset. Click OK to close the dialogs.

IMPORTANT

Once set, presets are available for all projects that you open or create.

RELATED LINKS
Zooming in the Project Window on page 66
Track Height Presets Menu on page 147

Zooming in on Cycle Markers

You can zoom in on the area between cycle markers in the project.

PREREQUISITE
You have created at least one cycle marker for the project.

PROCEDURE
● Click the button to the left of the horizontal zoom control to open the Horizontal Zoom
Presets pop-up menu, and select a cycle marker.

The middle part of the pop-up menu lists any cycle markers that you have added to the
project.

RESULT
The event display is zoomed in to encompass the marker area.

69
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Snap Function

RELATED LINKS
Markers Window on page 290

Zoom History
You can undo and redo zoom operations. This enables you to zoom in several steps and then
easily go back to the zoom stage at which you started.

You can undo and redo zoom operations in the following ways:

● To undo zoom, select Edit > Zoom > Undo Zoom or double-click with the zoom tool.
● To redo zoom, select Edit > Zoom > Redo Zoom or press Alt/Opt and double-click with the
zoom tool.

Snap Function
The Snap function helps you to find exact positions when editing in the Project window. It does
this by restricting horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. Operations affected
by Snap include moving, copying, drawing, sizing, splitting, range selection, etc.

● To activate/deactivate Snap, activate/deactivate Snap on the toolbar.

Setting the Snap Point

You can set the snap point at any position of the audio event.

PROCEDURE
1. Select an event.
2. Position the project cursor within the selected audio event.
3. Select Audio > Snap Point to Cursor.

RESULT
The snap point is set at the cursor position. The snap point for an event is displayed as a vertical
line in the Project window.

NOTE

You can also set the snap point in the Sample Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Adjusting Snap Points on page 417
Snap Point on page 416

Snap to Zero Crossing

Splitting and resizing of audio events can lead to sudden amplitude changes that might cause
pops and clicks. To avoid this, activate Snap to Zero Crossing to snap to points where the
amplitude is zero.

● To activate Snap to Zero Crossing, activate Snap to Zero Crossing on the toolbar.

70
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Snap Function

Snap Types Menu

You can select between different snap types to determine the snap point.

● To open the Snap Type pop-up menu, click Snap Type on the toolbar.

The following snap types are available:

Grid
The snap points are set with the Grid Type pop-up menu. The options depend on the
primary time format.
If you select Seconds as ruler format, time-based grid options are available.
If you select Bars+Beats as ruler format, musical grid options are available.

Grid Relative
Events and parts are not magnetic to the grid. Rather, the grid determines the step
size for moving the events. This means that a moved event keeps its original position
relative to the grid.
For example, if an event starts at the position 3.04.01, with Snap set to Grid Relative
and Grid Type set to Bar, you can move the event in steps of one bar to the positions
4.04.01, 5.04.01, and so on.

NOTE

This only applies to dragging existing events or parts. When you create new events or
parts, this Snap Type works like Grid.

Events
If this option is activated, the start and end positions of other events and parts become
magnetic. This means that, if you drag an event to a position near the start or the end
of another event, it is automatically aligned with the start or end of the other event.
For audio events, the position of the snap point is also magnetic. This includes marker
events on the marker track.

Shuffle
Shuffle is useful when you want to change the order of adjacent events. If you have
two adjacent events and drag the first one to the right, past the second event, the two
events change places.

The same principle works when changing the order of more than two events.

Cursor
This grid type causes the project cursor to become magnetic. Dragging an event near
the cursor causes the event to be aligned with the cursor position.

Grid + Cursor
This is a combination of Grid and Cursor.

Events + Cursor
This is a combination of Events and Cursor.

71
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Snap Function

Events + Grid + Cursor

This is a combination of Events, Grid, and Cursor.

RELATED LINKS
Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 215

Grid Type Menu

Allows you to specify a grid type that determines the grid and snap resolution in the event
display.

NOTE

This setting only has an effect if Snap Type is set to one of the grid options.

● To open the Grid Type pop-up menu, click Grid Type on the toolbar.

If you select Bars+Beats as time format, the following grid types are available:

Bar
Sets the grid and snap resolution to bars.

Beat
Sets the grid and snap resolution to beats.

Use Quantize
Sets the grid and snap resolution to the value that is activated in the Quantize Presets
pop-up menu.

Adapt to Zoom
Sets the grid and snap resolution to the horizontal zoom level. The more you zoom in
on the event display, the finer the resolution. High zoom levels allow you to snap to
64th notes, low zoom levels allow you to snap to bars.

NOTE

Adapt to Zoom is only available if Bars+Beats is set as ruler time format.

NOTE

You can assign key commands to the grid types in the Key Commands dialog in the Edit
category.

If you select Seconds as the time format, the following grid types are available:

1 ms
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1 ms.

10 ms
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 10 ms.

100 ms
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 100 ms.

1000 ms
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1000 ms.

If you select Timecode as the time format, the following grid types are available:

72
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Snap Grid

Subframe
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1 subframe.

1/4 frame
Sets the grid and snap resolution to ¼ frame.

1/2 frame
Sets the grid and snap resolution to ½ frame.

1 frame
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1 frame.

2 frames
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 2 frames.

1 second
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1 second.

NOTE

If you activate this as a time format and Show Timecode Subframes is activated in the
Preferences dialog (Transport page), the frames will also display subframes. There are 80
subframes per frame.

If you select Samples as the time format, the following grid types are available:

1 sample
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1 sample.

10 samples
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 10 samples.

100 samples
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 100 samples.

44100 samples
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 44100 samples.

RELATED LINKS
Snap Types Menu on page 71
Zooming in the Project Window on page 66
Ruler Time Format Menu on page 45

Snap Grid
In the Project window, and in some of the editors, you can have events, parts, and ranges snap
to the grid.

The grid is based on the following settings:

● Primary time format

You can set the primary time format on the Transport panel.
● Snap Type
You can select the Snap Type on the Project window toolbar.
● Grid Type
You can select the Grid Type on the Project window toolbar.

73
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Cross-Hair Cursor

The Snap Type pop-up menu allows you to determine if the events snap to the grid, to other
events, or to the cursor.

NOTE

If you want your events to snap to the grid while you are editing, select one of the grid-related
snap types, Grid or Grid Relative.

If you selected one of the grid-related snap types, the Grid Type pop-up menu on the Project
window toolbar defines what the events snap to. The values that are shown depend on the
primary time format:

● If you select Bars+Beats as a primary time format, you can select Bar or Beat as the Grid
Type to snap your events to bars or beats. If you activate Use Quantize as the Grid Type,
your events snap to the value that you set up in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. If you
activate Adapt to Zoom as the Grid Type, snapping depends on the zoom level.
● You can select Seconds, Timecode, or Samples as a primary time format to have your
events snap to time positions.

You can also set up a different grid in the following editors:

● Key Editor
● Drum Editor
● Audio Part Editor
● Sample Editor

NOTE

In the Project window and in the editors, the grid is represented by vertical grid lines in the
event display. You can change the overlay intensity of the displayed grid lines by raising the Grid
Overlay Intensity in the Preferences dialog (Event Display page).

RELATED LINKS
Snap Function on page 70
Project Setup Dialog on page 90
Ruler on page 45
Snap Types Menu on page 71
Ruler Modes on page 46
Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 215
Grid Type Menu on page 72

Cross-Hair Cursor
The cross-hair cursor is displayed when working in the Project window and in the editors,
facilitating navigation and editing, especially for large projects.

● You can set up the cross-hair cursor in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
You can set up the colors for the line and the mask of the cross-hair cursor and define their
width.

The cross-hair cursor works as follows:

● When the Object Selection tool or one of its subtools is selected, the cross-hair cursor
appears when you start moving/copying a part/event, or when using the event handles.

74
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Edit History Dialog

Cross-hair cursor when moving an event.

● When the Object Selection tool, the Split tool, or any other tool that makes use of this
function is selected, the cross-hair cursor appears as soon as you move the mouse over the
event display.
● The cross-hair cursor is only available for particular tools. The Mute tool, for example, does
not use a cross-hair cursor, as you click on an event to mute it.

Edit History Dialog

The Edit History dialog lists all your edits. This allows you to undo any actions in the Project
window as well as in the editors.

● To open the Edit History dialog, select Edit > History.

Action
Shows the name of the action.

Time
Shows the time when this action was performed.

State
Shows the state of the action.

Details
Shows further details, and allows you to enter new text.

Separator
Move the separator upwards to undo your actions. To redo an action, move the
separator down.

NOTE

● You can also undo applied audio processes. However, we recommend to use Direct Offline
Processing window to modify or delete plug-in effects or audio processes.

75
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Color Handling

● Sampler Control offers its own 20-step edit history for sampler tracks. Edits in Sampler
Control are not available via the Edit History dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Direct Offline Processing on page 379
Sample Editing and Playback Functions on page 461

Setting the Number of Maximum Undo Steps

You can limit the number of maximum undo steps. This is useful if you run out of memory, for
example.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select General.
2. Set the number in the Maximum Undo Steps field.

Color Handling
You can colorize events and tracks in Cubase. This contributes to an easier overview in the
Project window.

RELATED LINKS
Color Picker on page 82
Project Colors Setup Dialog on page 79
Event Colors Menu on page 644
Setting Event Colors to Track Colors on page 79
Colorizing Events on the Fly on page 78
Colorizing Selected Events or Parts on page 78
Resetting the Track Color on page 78
Colorizing Single Tracks on page 77
Colorizing Selected Tracks on page 76
Color Handling on page 76
User Interface - Track & MixConsole Channel Colors on page 905
Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/Channels on page 145

Colorizing Selected Tracks

You can colorize selected tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, deselect all events or parts.

NOTE

To select colors by names, activate the Select Colors by Name option in the Project Colors
Setup dialog on the Options page.

2. Select the tracks that you want to colorize.

3. On the Project window toolbar, select Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events.
The Colorize Selected Tracks pane opens.

76
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Color Handling

4. Select a color.

RESULT
The selected tracks are colorized, and the events and parts get the track color.

NOTE

If you assign a different color to individual events or parts with the Color tool, events or parts no
longer follow any color changes of the track.

RELATED LINKS
Colorizing Events on the Fly on page 78
Project Colors Setup Dialog on page 79
Options Tab on page 82

Colorizing Single Tracks

You can colorize single tracks via the Inspector or the track list. This is useful if you want to
ensure that no other tracks, events, or parts are colorized accidentally.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:
● Select the track that you want to colorize, and Alt/Opt -click the header of the basic track
Inspector section.

● Alt/Opt -click the left area of the track list.

The Choose Track Color pane opens.

NOTE

To select colors by names, activate the Select Colors by Name option in the Project Colors
Setup dialog on the Options page.

2. Select a color.

RESULT
The track is colorized, and any events or parts on that track get the same color.

NOTE

If you assign a different color to individual events or parts with the Color tool, they no longer
follow any color changes of the track.

RELATED LINKS
Colorizing Events on the Fly on page 78

77
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Color Handling

Options Tab on page 82

Resetting the Track Color

You can reset the color of a track to the default color.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select the track that you want to reset to the default color, and
deselect all events or parts.
2. On the Project window toolbar, select Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events.
3. On the Colorize Selected Tracks pane, click Set Track Color to Default.

RESULT
The default color is assigned to the selected track.

Colorizing Selected Events or Parts

You can colorize selected events or parts with Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events. By
default, events or parts follow the color of the corresponding track. However, you can overwrite
this setting and, for example, select the same color for events or parts on different tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select all events or parts that you want to colorize.

NOTE

To select colors by names, activate the Select Colors by Name option in the Project Colors
Setup dialog on the Options page.

2. On the Project window toolbar, select Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events.
The Colorize Selected Events pane opens.
3. Select a color.

RESULT
The selected events are colorized and no longer follow any color changes of the track.

RELATED LINKS
Colorizing Events on the Fly on page 78
Options Tab on page 82
Event Colors Menu on page 644

Colorizing Events on the Fly

You can colorize events or parts with the Color tool. By default, events or parts follow the color
of the corresponding track. However, you can overwrite this setting and, for example, select the
same color for events or parts that reside on different tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window toolbar, select the Color tool.
2. Do one of the following to select a tool color:

78
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Color Handling

● Alt/Opt -click an event or part to copy its color.

● Move the mouse pointer over the Color tool, and use the mouse wheel to step through
the colors of the current color set.
3. Optional: Select the events or parts that you want to colorize with the Object Selection tool.
This is only necessary if you want to colorize multiple events or parts.
4. On the Project window toolbar, select the Color tool.
5. Click the events or parts that you want to colorize.

RESULT
The events or parts are colorized and no longer follow color changes of the track.

NOTE

You can also Ctrl/Cmd -click an event or part with the Color tool to open the Choose Event Color
pane or to select colors by names.

RELATED LINKS
Colorizing Selected Events or Parts on page 78
Options Tab on page 82
Event Colors Menu on page 644

Setting Event Colors to Track Colors

You can set the color of events or parts to the track color. This is useful if you previously colorized
events or parts with the Color tool and you want them to follow the track color again.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select the event or part that you want to set to the track color.
2. On the Project window toolbar, click Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events.
3. On the Colorize Selected Events pane, click Set Event Color to Track.

RESULT
The track color is assigned to the selected event or part.

RELATED LINKS
Colorizing Events on the Fly on page 78
Event Colors Menu on page 644

Project Colors Setup Dialog

The Project Colors Setup dialog allows you to set up colors for your project.

● To open the Project Colors Setup dialog, select Project > Project Colors Setup.

79
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Color Handling

RELATED LINKS
Color Picker on page 82
Color Set Tab on page 80
Presets Tab on page 81
Options Tab on page 82

Color Set Tab

The Color Set tab allows you to change the color set that is used in the project.

The following options are available:

80
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Color Handling

Color fields
Click a field to open the Color Picker and specify a new color.

Name
Shows the name of the color. Double-click to change it.

Set up
Allows you to add or remove color fields.

● Insert Color
Adds a new color field.
● Duplicate Color
Duplicates the selected color field.
● Remove Color
Removes the selected color field.
● Reset Color
Resets the selected color field to the factory settings.

Apply
Applies your changes and closes the dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Color Picker on page 82

Presets Tab
The Presets tab allows you to expand the color set to 24 or even 32 colors or to reduce it to 8
colors. You can add tints, and you can sort colors according to their color tint or their basic color.

In the New Color Set Settings section, the following options are available:

Number of Basic Colors

You can set up 8, 16, 24, or 32 basic colors.

Number of Color Tints

You can set up 1, 2, or 4 color tints.

81
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Color Handling

Sort Colors by
Allows you to sort the colors of the color set by their basic color or by their color tint.

The New Color Set section displays the current colors of the new color set.

The Missing Current Project Colors section shows which missing colors are replaced. Move the
mouse pointer over the color field of a missing color to highlight the color that is used to replace
it in the New Color Set section.

Apply
Applies your changes and closes the dialog.

Options Tab
The Options tab allows you to access the color set options.

In the Color Set Options section, the following options are available:

Save Color Set as Default

Saves the current set of colors as default.

Reset Color Set to Default

Applies the default set of colors.

Reset Color Set to Factory Settings

Returns to the standard color palette.

Select Colors by Name

Allows you to select colors by name.

Apply
Applies your changes and closes the dialog.

Color Picker
The Color Picker allows you to define new custom colors.

To open the Color Picker, do one of the following:

● Select Project > Project Colors Setup, and, in the Project Colors Setup dialog on the Color
Set tab, click a color field.
This allows you to define custom project colors.
● Select Edit > Preferences, select one of the User Interface entries, and click a color field.
This allows you to define custom user interface colors.

82
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Window
Color Handling

Color selectors
Allow you to select a color shade and the nuance of the shade.

Context menu
Allows you to copy, paste, or reset colors.

Current Color/New Color

Shows the current color and the new color.

Hue/Saturation/Value
Allows you to edit the colors numerically.

Red/Green/Blue
Allows you to edit the colors numerically.

OK
Confirms the color changes.

NOTE

You must restart the application for some changes to take effect.

83
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Project Handling

In Cubase, projects are the central documents. You must create and set up a project to work with
the program.

Creating New Projects

You can create empty projects or projects that are based on a template.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > New Project.
The Hub opens.
2. In the location options section, select where to store the new project.

● To use the default location, select Use default location.

● To choose another location, select Prompt for project location.
3. Do one of the following:
● To create an empty new project, click Create Empty.
● To create a new project from a template, select a template and click Create.

RESULT
A new, untitled project is created. If you selected a template, the new project is based on this
template and includes the corresponding tracks, events, and settings.

NOTE

If you create an empty project, your default presets for the input and output bus configurations
are applied. If you have not defined default presets, the last used configurations are applied.

RELATED LINKS
Cubase Hub on page 84
Presets for Input and Output Busses on page 31

Cubase Hub
The Cubase Hub keeps you up to date with the latest information and assists you with organizing
your projects.

To open the Cubase Hub, do one of the following:

● Select Hub > Open Hub.

● Select File > New Project.

84
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Cubase Hub

News Section
The News section displays Steinberg news as well as links to interesting deals, video tutorials,
the user manuals, the user forum, and the support.

NOTE

● Make sure that you have an active Internet connection to access this material.
● You can show/hide this section by activating/deactivating Show News in Hub option in the
Preferences dialog (General page).

Projects Section
The Projects section allows you to create new projects, which can either be empty or based on a
template. It allows you to specify where to save the projects. It also allows you to access recently
opened projects or projects that are stored in other locations.

Category bar
The Recent category contains a list of the recently opened projects.
The available factory templates are sorted into the predefined categories Recording,
Scoring, Production, and Mastering.
The More category contains the default project template and all templates that are not
assigned to any of the other categories.

Template list
When you click on one of the category items, the list below the category bar shows the
available templates for this category. Any new templates that you create are added at
the top of the corresponding list.

Location options
This section allows you to specify where the project is stored.

Open Other
Allows you to open any project file on your system.

85
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Project Files and Project Location

NOTE

This is identical to using the Open command on the File menu.

Create Empty
Allows you to create a new empty project.

Cancel
Closes the Hub.

Quit Cubase (Windows only)

Closes Cubase.

RELATED LINKS
General on page 895

Project Files and Project Location

A project file (extension *.cpr) is the central document in Cubase. It contains references to the
media data that is used in your project.

We recommend to save project files in the project folder. You can specify the location of the
project folder in the Hub.

In addition to the project files, the project folder contains the following folders that Cubase
automatically creates, if required:

● Audio
● Edits
● Images
● Track Pictures
● Auto Saves

IMPORTANT

Project file sizes larger than 2 GB are only supported by program version 13.0.30 or newer. If a
file exceeds this limit, you can choose to reduce the project size in order to maintain compatibility
with older versions.

RELATED LINKS
Cubase Hub on page 84
Choosing a Project Location on page 86

Choosing a Project Location

You can specify a project location for saving projects in the Hub.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● Select Use default location to create a project in the default project location. In the
Project Folder field, specify a name for the project folder. If you do not specify a project
folder here, the project is saved in a folder named Untitled.

86
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Template Files

● Click in the path field to change the default project location. Specify the new default
location in the file dialog that opens.
● Activate Prompt for project location to open a file dialog where you can specify the
project folder location.
2. Do one of the following:

● Click Create Empty to create a new empty project.

● Select one of the template projects and click Create to create a project based on a
template.

RESULT
The project is created and saved in the specified location.

RELATED LINKS
Cubase Hub on page 84

Template Files
Templates can be a good starting point for new projects. Templates are projects where you can
save all settings that you regularly use, such as bus configurations, sample rates, record formats,
basic track layouts, VSTi setups, drum map setups, etc.

The following template types are available from within the Hub:

● Factory templates for specific scenarios. These are listed in the Recording, Scoring,
Production, or Mastering categories.
● The default template. This is listed in the More category.
● Any new user templates that you create and save. These are listed in the More category.

Template projects are not saved in project folders. Therefore, they contain no subfolders and no
media files.

● To open the location of a specific template, right-click a template in the template list and
select Show in Explorer (Windows only) or Reveal in Finder (macOS only).

Save As Template Dialog

The Save As Template dialog allows you to save projects as templates.

● To open the Save As Template dialog, select File > Save As Template.

87
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Template Files

The following options are available in the Current Presets section:

New Folder
Allows you to add a folder to the template list.

Template list
Lists the templates and the folders.

The following options are available in the Attribute Inspector section:

Value
Click this field to enter a description for the Content Summary attribute or to select a
template category for Template Category attribute.

The following options are available in the New Preset section:

New Preset
Allows you to enter a name for the new project template.

Show Attribute Inspector

Allows you to show/hide the Attribute Inspector.

88
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Template Files

Saving a Project Template File

You can save the current project as a template. When you create a new project, you can select
this template as a starting point.

PREREQUISITE
You have removed all clips from the Pool. This ensures that references to media data from the
original project folder are deleted.

PROCEDURE
1. Set up a project.
2. Select File > Save as Template.
3. In the New Preset section of the Save as Template dialog, enter a name for the new project
template.

4. In the Attribute Inspector section, double-click the Value field of the Content Summary
attribute to enter a description for the template.
5. Click the Value field of the Template Category attribute and select a template category
from the pop-up menu.
If you do not select a category, the new template will be listed in the Hub, as part of the
More category.
6. Click OK to save the template.

RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 468

Renaming Templates
You can rename template files from within the Hub.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Hub, right-click a template and select Rename.

89
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Project Setup Dialog

2. In the Rename dialog, enter a new name and click OK.

Project Setup Dialog

The Project Setup dialog allows you to make general settings for your project.

● To open the Project Setup dialog, select Project > Project Setup.
● To open the Project Setup dialog automatically when you create a new project, activate the
Run Setup on Create New Project option in the Preferences dialog (General page).

IMPORTANT

While you can change most Project Setup settings at any time, you must set the sample rate
right after creating a new project. If you change the sample rate at a later stage, you must
convert all audio files in the project to the new sample rate to ensure that they play back
properly.

In the Project Duration section, the following options are available:

Project Start Time

Allows you to specify the start time of the project in timecode format. This also
determines the sync start position when synchronizing to external devices.

Project Duration
Allows you to specify the duration of the project.

Project Frame Rate

In the Project Frame Rate section, the following options are available:

90
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Project Setup Dialog

Project Frame Rate

Allows you to specify the timecode standard and the frame rate for the project. When
synchronizing to an external device, this setting must correspond to the frame rate of
any incoming timecode.

Get Frame Rate From Video

Allows you to set the project frame rate to the frame rate of an imported video file.

Project Time Displays

In the Project Time Displays section, the following options are available:

Time Format
Allows you to specify the global time format for all rulers and position displays in the
program, except for the ruler tracks. However, you can make independent time format
selections for the individual rulers and displays.

Time Offset
Allows you to specify an offset for the time positions in the rulers and position displays
to compensate for the Project Start Time setting.

Time Offset (Bars+Beats)

This setting is only used in conjunction with the Bars+Beats format. Allows you
to specify an offset for the time positions in the rulers and position displays to
compensate for the Project Start Time setting.

Record File Format

In the Record File Format section, the following options are available:

Sample Rate
Allows you to specify the sample rate at which Cubase records and plays back audio.
● If your audio hardware generates the sample rate internally and you select a
non-supported sample rate, this is indicated by a different color. In this case, you
must set a different sample rate to ensure that your audio files play back properly.
● If you select a sample rate that your audio hardware supports but that differs from
its current sample rate setting, it is automatically changed to the project sample
rate.
● If your audio hardware is externally clocked and receives external clock signals,
sample rate mismatches are accepted.

Bit Depth
Allows you to specify the bit depth of the audio files that you record in Cubase. Select
the record format according to the bit depth that is delivered by your audio hardware.
The available options are 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, and 64 bit float.

NOTE

● If your audio interface supports a bit depth of 32 bit and you want to maintain this
precision in your recordings, select a Processing Precision of 64 bit float in the
Studio Setup dialog.
● When you record with effects, consider setting the bit depth to 32 bit float or
64 bit float. This prevents clipping (digital distortion) in the recorded files and
keeps the audio quality very high. Effect processing and level or EQ changes in the
input channel are performed in 32-bit float or 64-bit float format, depending on
the Processing Precision setting in the Studio Setup dialog. If you record at 16 bit

91
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Project Setup Dialog

or at 24 bit, the audio is converted to this lower bit depth when it is written to a
file. As a result, the signal may degrade. This is independent of the actual bit depth
of your audio hardware. Even if the signal from the audio hardware has a bit depth
of 16 bit, the signal is 32 bit float or 64 bit float after the effects are added to the
input channel.
● The higher the bit depth value, the larger the files and the more strain is put on the
disk system. If this is an issue, lower the record format setting.

Record File Type

Allows you to specify the file type of the audio files that you record in Cubase.

NOTE

● For wave file recordings larger than 4 GB, the EBU RIFF standard is used. If you
use a FAT 32 disk (not recommended), audio files are split automatically. In the
Preferences dialog, you can specify what happens if your recorded Wave file is
larger than 4 GB.
● You can set up embedded strings in the Preferences dialog.

Project Ownership
In the Project Ownership section, the following options are available:

Author
Allows you to specify a project author that is written into the file when you export audio
files and activate the Insert iXML chunk option. You can specify a default author in
the Default Author Name field of the Preferences dialog (General—Personalization
page).

Company
Allows you to specify a company name that is written into the file when you export
audio files and activate the Insert iXML chunk option. You can specify a default
company in the Default Company Name field in the Preferences dialog (General—
Personalization page).

Other Project Settings

In the Other Project Settings section, the following options are available:

Stereo Pan Law

If you pan a channel left or right, the sum of the left and the right side is higher
(louder) than if this channel is panned center. These modes allow you to attenuate
signals panned center. 0 dB turns off constant-power panning. Equal Power means
that the power of the signal remains the same, regardless of the pan setting.

Volume Max
Allows you to specify the maximum fader level. By default, this is set to +6 dB.

Hermode Tuning
In the Hermode Tuning section, the following options are available:

HMT Type (MIDI only)

Allows you to specify a mode for Hermode tuning of MIDI notes.

92
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Opening Project Files

HMT Depth (MIDI only)

Allows you to specify the overall degree of retuning.

Project Location
In the Project Location section, the following options are available:

Project Location information

Displays the project location.

Show in Explorer/Reveal in Finder

Opens a file dialog that shows the location of the project file.

RELATED LINKS
Audio System Page on page 17
Hermode Tuning on page 621
Record - Audio on page 902

Opening Project Files

You can open several saved project files at the same time.

IMPORTANT

If you open a project saved with a different program version and it contains data for functions
that are not available in your version, this data may be lost when you save the project with your
version.

NOTE

● If you open an external project, the last used view that was saved on your computer is used.
● External projects are automatically connected to the input and output busses. If you open
a project created on a computer with an ASIO port configuration that differs from the
configuration of your computer, this can result in unwanted audio connections. You can
deactivate the automatic connection of input and output busses in the Preferences dialog
(VST page).

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Open.
2. In the file dialog that opens, select the project that you want to open and click Open.
3. If there is already an open project, you are asked if you want to activate the new project. Do
one of the following:

● To activate the project, click Activate.

● To open the project without activating it, click No.
This reduces load times for projects.

RELATED LINKS
Do Not Connect Input/Output Busses When Loading External Projects on page 906
Activating Projects on page 94

93
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Saving Project Files

Activating Projects
In Cubase you can have several projects opened at the same time. However, only one project can
be active. The active project is indicated by the lit Activate Project button in the upper left corner
of the Project window. To work on another project, activate the other project.

PROCEDURE
● To activate a project, click Activate Project .

NOTE

If you close the active project, you must activate another open project manually, as Cubase
cannot automatically activate one of the other open projects.

Opening Recent Projects

You can open recent projects from the recent projects list.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● In the category bar of the Hub, click Recent, select a project from the projects list, and
click Open.
● In Cubase, select File > Recent Projects and select a recently opened project.

Re-Routing Missing Ports

If you open a Cubase project that was created on a different system with other audio hardware,
Cubase tries to find matching audio inputs and outputs for the input/output busses. If Cubase
cannot resolve all audio/MIDI inputs and outputs that are used in the project, the Missing Ports
dialog opens.

This allows you to manually re-route any ports specified in the project to ports that are available
on your system.

NOTE

To improve the search for matching audio inputs and outputs for the input/output busses, use
descriptive, generic names for your input and output ports.

RELATED LINKS
Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs on page 29

Saving Project Files

You can save the active project as a project file. To keep your projects as manageable as possible,
make sure that you save project files and all related files in the respective project folders.

● To save the project and to specify a file name and location, open the File menu and select
Save As.
● To save the project with its current name and location, open the File menu and select Save.

94
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Saving Project Files

Auto Save
Cubase can automatically save copies of all open project files with unsaved changes.

NOTE

Only the project files are automatically saved. To include the files from the Pool and to save your
project at a different location, use Back up Project.

Cubase can automatically save copies of all open projects with unsaved changes. To set this up,
activate the Auto Save option in the Preferences dialog (General page).

Auto save files are saved in the Auto Saves folder inside your project folder.

The files are named Name-xx-(last edit).bak, where “Name” corresponds to the name of
the project and “xx” is an incremental number. Unsaved projects files are automatically saved in
a similar way as UntitledX-xx-(last edit).bak, with “X” being the incremental number for
unsaved projects.

In the Preferences dialog (General page), you can use the Auto Save Interval setting to define
the time intervals at which a project file is automatically saved. You can use the Maximum
Number of Auto Save Files option to specify how many files are created with the Auto Save
function.

NOTE

When the maximum number of files is reached, the existing files are overwritten, starting with
the oldest file.

RELATED LINKS
Project Files and Project Location on page 86
Auto Save on page 896
Maximum Number of Auto Save Files on page 896

Saving Project Files As a New Version

You can create and activate a new version of an active project file. This is useful if you are
experimenting with edits and arrangements and want to be able to go back to a previous
version.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Select File > Save New Version.

● Press Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - S .

RESULT
The new file is saved under the same name as the original project, with an incremental number
attached to it. For example, if your project is called “My Project”, new versions are called “My
Project-01”, “My Project-02”, and so on.

95
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Reverting to the Last Saved Version

Reverting to the Last Saved Version

You can return to the last saved version and discard all changes that have been made.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Revert.
2. In the warning message, click Revert.
If you have recorded or created new audio files since the last version was saved, you are
prompted to delete or keep the files.

Self-Contained Projects
To share your work or to transfer it to another computer, your project must be self-contained.

The following functions facilitate this task:

● Select Media > Prepare Archive to verify that every clip that is referenced in the project is
located in the project folder and to take actions if that is not the case.
● Select File > Back up Project to create a new project folder where you can save the project
file and the necessary work data. The original project remains unchanged.

RELATED LINKS
Preparing Archives on page 96
Backing up Projects on page 96

Preparing Archives
The Prepare Archive function allows you to gather all files that are referenced by your project
and to ensure that they are in the project folder. This is useful if you want to move or archive
your project.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Media > Prepare Archive.
If your project references external files, you are prompted to copy them to your working
directory.
2. Click Proceed.
External audio files are copied to the Audio folder of your project. Video files are copied to
the project root folder.

RESULT
Your project is ready to be archived. You can move or copy the project folder to another location.

Backing up Projects
You can create a backup copy of your project. Backups only contain the necessary work data. All
media files, except for the files from VST Sound archives, are included as a copy.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Back up Project.
2. Select an empty folder or create a new one.

96
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Self-Contained Projects

3. Make your changes in the Back up Project Options dialog and click OK.

RESULT
A copy of the project is saved in the new folder. The original project remains unaffected.

NOTE

VST Sound content provided by Steinberg is copy-protected and is not included in the backup
project. If you want to use a backup copy that uses VST Sound content on a different computer,
make sure that the corresponding content is also available on that computer.

RELATED LINKS
Back up Project Options Dialog on page 97

Back up Project Options Dialog

The Back up Project Options dialog allows you to create a backup copy of your project.

● To open the Back up Project Options dialog, select File > Back up Project.

Project Name
Allows you to change the name of the backed up project.

Keep Current Project Active

Allows you to keep the current project active after clicking OK.

Minimize Audio Files

Allows you to include only the audio file portions that are actually used in the project.
This can significantly reduce the size of the project folder if you are using small sections
of large files. It also means that you cannot use other parts of the audio files if you
continue working with the project in its new folder.

Make Direct Offline Processing Permanent

Allows you to flatten all edits and to apply all processing and effects permanently to
each clip in the Pool.

Remove Unused Files

Allows you to remove unused files and to back up only the files that are actually used.

Do Not Back up Video

Allows you to exclude video clips from the video track or from the Pool of the current
project.

97
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Project Handling
Self-Contained Projects

Do Not Back up Mixdown Folder

Allows you to exclude the Mixdown folder of your project from the backup.

RELATED LINKS
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog on page 804
Backing up Projects on page 96

98
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels

Tracks are the building blocks of your project. They allow you to import, add, record, and edit
parts and events. Tracks are listed from top to bottom in the track list and extend horizontally
across the Project window. Channels can be shown for all audio-related and MIDI-related tracks.

Tracks
If you select a track in the Project window, the controls, settings, and parameters that are
displayed in the Inspector and in the track list allow you to control the track.

A full overview of all added tracks listed from top to bottom is shown in the track list.

Channels
All audio-related and MIDI-related tracks, that is, audio tracks, instrument tracks, sampler tracks,
group channel tracks, effect channel tracks, and MIDI tracks are assigned to a particular channel
that can be displayed on the Channel tab. The Channel tab represents a MixConsole channel,
and the handling and usability is similar. The Channel tab, however, shows only the sections that
correspond to the channel of the selected track.

A full overview of the corresponding audio-related and MIDI-related channels listed from left to
right is provided in the MixConsole.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117
Channel Sections on page 131

99
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Audio Tracks and Channels

Channel Tab on page 49

Project Window Left Zone on page 50
Inspector on page 51
MixConsole on page 297

Audio Tracks and Channels

You can use audio tracks for recording and playing back audio events and audio parts. Each
audio track has a corresponding audio channel. An audio track can have any number of
automation tracks for automating channel parameters, effect settings, etc.

You can add audio tracks via the Add Track dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Audio on page 100

Add Track Dialog – Audio

The Audio page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add audio tracks.

To open the Audio page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:

● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Audio.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Audio page.

● Select Project > Add Track > Audio or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and select
Add Audio Track.
This opens the Audio page of the Add Track dialog.

100
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Audio Tracks and Channels

The following settings are available:

Audio Inputs
Opens a window where you can select an input of your connected audio hardware.
If you have added an input bus in the Audio Connections window, you can connect to
that input bus.
The Open Audio Connections button opens the Audio Connections window.

Configuration
Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as
mono or stereo tracks.

Audio Outputs
Allows you to set the output routing.

Name
Allows you to specify a track name.

Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.

Keep Dialog Open

You can activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you
to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.

NOTE

This option is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track
controls.

Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and the settings of the active
page, and closes the dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections Window on page 28

101
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Instrument Tracks and Channels

Instrument Tracks and Channels

You can use instrument tracks for dedicated VST instruments. Each instrument track has a
corresponding instrument channel. An instrument track can have any number of automation
tracks.

You can add instrument tracks via the Add Track dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 102

Add Track Dialog – Instrument

The Instrument page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add instrument tracks.

To open the Instrument page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:

● Click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list, and click Instrument.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Instrument page.

● Select Project > Add Track > Instrument or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and
select Add Instrument Track.
This opens the Instrument page of the Add Track dialog.

102
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Sampler Tracks and Channels

The following settings are available:

Instrument
Allows you to select an instrument.

MIDI Inputs
Allows you to set the MIDI inputs.

Audio Outputs
Allows you to set the output routing.

Name
Allows you to specify a track name.

Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.

Keep Dialog Open

You can activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you
to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.

NOTE

This option is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track
controls.

Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and the settings of the active
page, and closes the dialog.

Sampler Tracks and Channels

You can use sampler tracks for controlling the playback of audio samples via MIDI. Each sampler
track has a corresponding channel. A sampler track can have any number of automation tracks.

You can add sampler tracks via the Add Track dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Sampler on page 104
Creating Sampler Tracks on page 441
Sampler Control on page 441

103
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Sampler Tracks and Channels

Add Track Dialog – Sampler

The Sampler page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add sampler tracks.

To open the Sampler page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:

● Click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list, and click Sampler.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Sampler page.

● Select Project > Add Track > Sampler or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and
select Add Sampler Track.
This opens the Sampler page of the Add Track dialog.

The following settings are available:

MIDI Inputs
Allows you to set the MIDI inputs.

Audio Outputs
Allows you to set the output routing.

Name
Allows you to specify a track name.

Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.

104
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
MIDI Tracks and Channels

Keep Dialog Open

You can activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you
to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.

NOTE

This option is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track
controls.

Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and the settings of the active
page, and closes the dialog.

MIDI Tracks and Channels

You can use MIDI tracks for recording and playing back MIDI parts. Each MIDI track has a
corresponding MIDI channel. A MIDI track can have any number of automation tracks.

You can add MIDI tracks via the Add Track dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – MIDI on page 105

Add Track Dialog – MIDI

The MIDI page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add MIDI tracks.

To open the MIDI page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:

● Click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list, and click MIDI.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the MIDI page.

● Select Project > Add Track > MIDI or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and select
Add MIDI Track.

105
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
MIDI Tracks and Channels

This opens the MIDI page of the Add Track dialog.

The following settings are available:

MIDI Inputs
Allows you to set the MIDI inputs.

MIDI Outputs
Allows you to set the MIDI outputs.

Output Group and Channel

Allows you to specify the MIDI output channel.

NOTE

If you use MIDI 2.0 devices with dedicated device ports, this allows you to specify the
MIDI output group, and the MIDI output channels.

Name
Allows you to specify a track name.

Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.

Keep Dialog Open

You can activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you
to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.

NOTE

This option is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track
controls.

Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and the settings of the active
page, and closes the dialog.

106
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Group Channel Tracks

Group Channel Tracks

You can use group channel tracks to create a submix of several audio channels and to apply the
same effects to them. A group channel track contains no events as such, but displays settings
and automation for the corresponding group channel.

For easy management, all group channel tracks are automatically placed in a special group
channel track folder in the track list. Each group channel track has a corresponding channel. A
group channel track can have any number of automation tracks.

You can add group channel tracks via the Add Track dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Group Channel on page 107

Add Track Dialog – Group Channel

The Group page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add group channel tracks.

To open the Group page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:

● Click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list, and click Group.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Group page.

● Select Project > Add Track > Group.

This opens the Group page of the Add Track dialog.

107
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Effect Channel Tracks

The following settings are available:

Configuration
Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as
mono or stereo tracks.

Audio Outputs
Allows you to set the output routing.

Folder Setup
Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a dedicated
folder.

Name
Allows you to specify a track name.

Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.

Keep Dialog Open

You can activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you
to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.

NOTE

This option is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track
controls.

Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and the settings of the active
page, and closes the dialog.

Effect Channel Tracks

You can use effect channel tracks for adding send effects. By routing sends from an audio track
to an effect channel track, you send audio from the audio track to the effects on the effects
channel track. You can place effect channel tracks inside or outside a dedicated Effect folder in
the track list. Each effect channel track has a corresponding channel. An effect channel track can
have any number of automation tracks.

You can add effect channel tracks via the Add Track dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Effect on page 109

108
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Effect Channel Tracks

Add Track Dialog – Effect

The Effect page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add effect channel tracks.

To open the Effect page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:

● Click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list, and click Effect.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Effect page.

● Select Project > Add Track > Effect.

This opens the Effect page of the Add Track dialog.

The following settings are available:

Effect
Allows you to select an effect.

Configuration
Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as
mono or stereo tracks.

109
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Ruler Track

Audio Outputs
Allows you to set the output routing.

Folder Setup
Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a dedicated
folder.

Name
Allows you to specify a track name.

Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.

Keep Dialog Open

You can activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you
to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.

NOTE

This option is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track
controls.

Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and the settings of the active
page, and closes the dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Effect Channel Tracks on page 358
Adding Effect Channels to Selected Channels on page 359

Ruler Track
You can use ruler tracks to show several rulers with different time formats for the timeline. This is
completely independent from the main ruler, as well as from rulers and position displays in other
windows.

You can add ruler tracks via the Add Track dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Ruler on page 110

Add Track Dialog – Ruler

The Ruler page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add ruler tracks.

To open the Ruler page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:

● Click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list, and click Ruler.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Ruler page.

110
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Ruler Track

● Select Project > Add Track > Ruler.

This opens the Ruler page of the Add Track dialog.

The following settings are available:

Time Format
Allows you to select the time format for the ruler track.

Time Offset
Allows you to set up a time offset for the ruler track.

Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.

Keep Dialog Open

You can activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you
to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.

NOTE

This option is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track
controls.

111
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Folder Tracks

Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and the settings of the active
page, and closes the dialog.

Ruler Track Controls

In the track list for ruler tracks, you can change the time format for the ruler.

The following options are available:

Time Format
Allows you to select the time format for the ruler track.

Time Offset On/Off

Allows you to activate/deactivate the time offset for the ruler track.

Time Offset
Allows you to set up a time offset for the ruler track.

NOTE

You can now set up a time offset for ruler tracks in the corresponding time format,
and activate/deactivate it by using the corresponding control in the track list. If you
deactivate the time offset, the ruler track follows the transport offset specified in the
Project Setup dialog.

Set Time Offset to Project Cursor Position

Sets the time offset for the ruler track to the project cursor position.

NOTE

Ruler tracks are not affected by the time format setting in the Project Setup dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Ruler Time Format Menu on page 45

Folder Tracks
Folder tracks function as containers for other tracks, making it easier to organize and manage
the track structure. They also allow you to edit several tracks at the same time.

You can add folder tracks via the Add Track dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Folder on page 112

Add Track Dialog – Folder

The Folder page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add folder tracks.

To open the Folder page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:

● Click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list, and click Folder.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Folder page.

112
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Folder Tracks

● Select Project > Add Track > Folder.

This opens the Folder page of the Add Track dialog.

The following settings are available:

Name
Allows you to specify a track name.

Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.

Keep Dialog Open

You can activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you
to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.

NOTE

This option is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track
controls.

Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and the settings of the active
page, and closes the dialog.

113
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Arranger Track

Folder Track Controls

The track list for folder tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit all tracks in
the folder.

Expand/Collapse Folder

Shows/Hides the tracks in the folder. Hidden tracks are played back as usual.

Track name

Double-click to rename the track.

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

Solos the track.

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Monitor

For audio-related tracks, this routes incoming signals to the selected output.
For MIDI and instrument-related tracks, this allows you to route incoming MIDI signals
to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the
Preferences dialog (MIDI page).

Arranger Track
You can use the arranger track for arranging your project by marking out sections and
determining in which order they are to be played back.

You can add this track type to a project only once.

● To add the arranger track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Arranger.

Arranger Track Controls

The track list for the arranger track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the
arranger track.

Select Active Arranger Chain

Allows you to select the active arranger chain.

Current Item

114
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Chord Track

Displays which arranger event is active.

Current Repeat

Displays which repeat is active.

Activate Arranger Mode

Allows you to activate and to deactivate the arranger mode.

Open Arranger Editor

Opens the Arranger Editor for the track.

Chord Track
You can use the chord track for adding chord and scale events to your project. These can
transform the pitches of other events.

You can add this track type to a project only once.

● To add the chord track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Chord.

Chord Track Controls

The track list for the chord track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the
chord track.

The track list for the chord track contains the following controls:

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Mute Chord Track

Mutes the track.

Select Track for Auditioning

Allows you to select a track for auditioning the chord events.

Resolve Display Conflicts

Allows you to show all chord events on the track properly, even at low horizontal zoom
levels.

Show Scales

Allows you to show the scale lane in the lower part of the chord track.

Video Tracks
You can use the video track to play back video events. Video files are displayed as events/clips on
the video track, with thumbnails representing the frames in the film.

You can add this track type only once to a project.

115
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Marker Track

● To add a video track, select Project > Add Track > Video.

Video Track Controls

The track list for the video track contains parameters to control the video track.

Mute Video Track

Mutes the track.

Name

Shows the name of the track. Double-click to rename the track.

Marker Track
You can use the marker track to add and edit markers that help you to locate certain positions
quickly.

You can add this track type only once to a project.

● To add the marker track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Marker.

Marker Track Controls

The track list for the marker track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the
marker track.

Track name

Double-click to rename the track.

Locate

Allows you to move the project cursor to the selected marker position.

Cycle

Allows you to select a cycle marker.

Zoom

Allows you to zoom in a cycle marker.

Add Marker

Allows you to add a position marker at the project cursor position.

Add Cycle Marker

Allows you to add a cycle marker at the project cursor position.

116
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Set up Inspector Sections Pane

For audio-related and MIDI-related tracks you can configure the visibility settings of the
individual Inspector sections. You can also specify the order of the sections.

● To configure the sections for the Inspector, right-click an empty area of the Inspector, and
select Set up Sections.

Section options
Activate/Deactivate the option for the section that you want to show/hide.

Preset
Allows you to save the settings as presets.

Show All
Shows all sections.

Reset All
Allows you to restore the default settings.

NOTE

You can change the order of the sections by dragging them up or down in the list.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117
Channel Sections on page 131

Track Inspector Sections

For audio-related and MIDI-related tracks, you can set up track-specific Inspector sections on the
Set up Sections pane.

Depending on the track type, you can set up the following track Inspector sections:

Basics
Allows you to set up the basic track settings.

Routing
For audio-related channels/tracks, this allows you to set up the input and output
routing.

117
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

For MIDI-related tracks, this allows you to set up the input routing, the output routing,
and the group and channel.

Chords
For MIDI-related channels/tracks, this allows you to specify how the track follows the
chord track.

Notepad
Allows you to enter annotations for the track.

MIDI Modifiers
For MIDI-related channels/tracks, this allows you to transpose or to adjust the velocity
of the MIDI track events in real time during playback.

MIDI Fader
Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel.

Inserts
For audio-related channels/tracks, this allows you to add audio insert effects.

EQ
For audio-related channels/tracks, this allows you to adjust up to four bands of EQs.

Sends
For audio-related channels/tracks, this allows you to select send effects.

Fader
Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel.

Quick Controls
Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example.

NOTE

To expand/collapse a section, click its header or the arrow to the left of the section header. If the
section is too narrow, the arrow is automatically hidden.

RELATED LINKS
Inspector Sections on page 53
Set up Inspector Sections Pane on page 117
Insert Effects on page 352
Send Effects on page 357
Equalizer Section on page 321
Chords Section for MIDI Tracks on page 743
Track Quick Controls on page 559
MIDI Modifiers Section on page 618

118
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Basics Section for Audio Tracks

The Basics section for audio tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your
audio track.

The top section of the audio track Inspector contains the following basic track settings:

Track name

Click to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track.
Alt/Opt -click to colorize the track.

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

Solos the track.

Read Automation

Allows you to read track automation.

Write Automation

Allows you to write track automation.

Auto Fades Settings

Opens a dialog where you can make separate fade settings for the track.

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Monitor

Routes incoming signals to the selected output.

Freeze Channel

Allows you to freeze the audio channel.

Volume

119
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Allows you to adjust the level of the track.

Pan

Allows you to adjust the panning of the track.

Delay

Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track.

Load/Save/Reload Track Preset

Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

Basics Section for Sampler Tracks

The Basics section for sampler tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit
your sampler track.

The top section of the sampler track Inspector contains the following basic track settings:

Track name

Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the
track.

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

Solos the track.

Read Automation

Allows you to read track automation.

Write Automation

Allows you to write track automation.

120
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Open/Close Sampler

Opens/Closes the Sampler Control in the lower zone.

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Monitor

Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI
Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).

Freeze Channel

Allows you to freeze the sampler track.

Volume

Allows you to adjust the level of the track.

Pan

Allows you to adjust the panning of the track.

Delay

Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track.

Load/Save/Reload Track Preset

Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets.

Retrospective Recording

Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to insert a retrospective track recording, that is,
MIDI data that was captured during playback.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117
Freezing Sampler Tracks on page 465

Basics Section for Instrument Tracks

The Basics section for instrument tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to
control your instrument track. It shows some of the sections from VST instrument channels and
MIDI tracks.

121
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

The top section of the instrument track Inspector contains the following basic track settings:

Track name

Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the
track.

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

Solos the track.

Read Automation

Allows you to read track automation.

Write Automation

Allows you to write track automation.

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Monitor

Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, you must activate
MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).

Freeze Channel

Allows you to freeze the instrument.

Volume

Allows you to adjust the level of the track.

Pan

Allows you to adjust the panning of the track.

Delay

Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track.

Load/Save/Reload Track Preset

Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets.

122
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Retrospective Recording

Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to insert a retrospective track recording, that is,
MIDI data that was captured during playback.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117
Freezing Instruments on page 545

Basics Section for MIDI Tracks

The Basics section for MIDI tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to control
your MIDI track. These affect MIDI events in real time, on playback, for example.

The top section of the MIDI track Inspector contains the following basic track settings:

Track name

Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the
track.

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

Solos the track.

Read Automation

Allows you to read track automation.

Write Automation

Allows you to write track automation.

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Monitor

123
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI
Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).

ASIO Latency Compensation

Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency.

Volume

Allows you to adjust the level of the track.

MIDI Pan

Allows you to adjust the MIDI panning of the track.

Delay

Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track.

Load/Save/Reload Track Preset

Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets.

Retrospective Recording

Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to insert a retrospective track recording, that is,
MIDI data that was captured during playback.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

Basics Section for Group Channel Tracks

The Basics section for group channel tracks shows the settings for the group channel.

Track name

Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the
track.

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

124
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Solos the track.

Read Automation

Allows you to read track automation.

Write Automation

Allows you to write track automation.

Volume

Allows you to adjust the level of the track.

Pan

Allows you to adjust the panning of the track.

NOTE

When you select the group folder track, the Inspector shows the folder and the group channels
it contains. You can click one of the group channels shown in the folder to display the settings for
that group channel in the Inspector.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

Basics Section for Effect Channel Tracks

The Basics section for effect channel tracks shows the settings for the effect channel.

Track name

Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the
track.

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.

Mute

Mutes the track.

125
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Solo

Solos the track.

Read Automation

Allows you to read track automation.

Write Automation

Allows you to write track automation.

Volume

Allows you to adjust the level of the track.

Pan

Allows you to adjust the panning of the track.

NOTE

When you select the effect folder track, the Inspector shows the folder and the effect channel
tracks it contains. You can click one of the effect channel tracks shown in the folder to display the
settings for that track in the Inspector.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

Basics Section for Marker Tracks

The Basics section for marker tracks displays the marker list.

Track name

Double-click to rename the track.

Open Marker Window

Opens the Markers window.

Marker attributes

126
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Shows the markers, their IDs, and their time positions. Click in the leftmost column for
a marker to move the project cursor to the marker position.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

Folder Track Inspector

The Inspector for folder tracks shows the folder and its underlying track, similar to the folder
structure in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. When you select one of the tracks shown under the
folder, the Inspector shows the settings for that track.

Track name

Double-click to rename the track.

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

Solos the track.

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Monitor

For audio-related tracks, this routes incoming signals to the selected output.
For MIDI and instrument-related tracks, this allows you to route incoming MIDI signals
to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the
Preferences dialog (MIDI page).

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

127
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Arranger Track Inspector

The arranger track Inspector displays the lists of available arranger chains and arranger events.

The arranger track Inspector contains the following settings:

Track name

Double-click to rename the track.

Open Arranger Editor

Opens the Arranger Editor.

Select Active Arranger Chain + Functions

Allows you to select the active arranger chain, to rename it, to create a new one, to
duplicate, or to flatten it.

Arranger Events

Lists all arranger events in your project. Click the arrow of an arranger event to play it
back and start the live mode.

Stop

Stops playback after the time interval set in the Jump Mode pop-up menu.

Jump Mode

Allows you to define how long the active arranger event is played before jumping to
the next one.

RELATED LINKS
Jump Mode on page 285
Arranger Editor on page 279

128
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Inspector Sections Pane

Chord Track Inspector

The chord track Inspector contains settings for the chord events.

The top section of the chord track Inspector contains the following settings:

Track name

Click to show/hide the basic track settings section.

Mute Chord Track

Mutes the track.

Acoustic Feedback

Allows you to audition the events on the chord track. For this to work, you need to
select a track for auditioning in the track list.

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Voicing library

Allows you to set up a voicing library for the track.

Voicing library subset

Allows you to select a library subset.

Set up Voicing

Allows you to configure your own voicing parameters for a specific voicing scheme.

Adaptive Voicings

If this option is activated, the voicings are set automatically.

Automatic Scales

If this option is activated, the program automatically creates scale events.

Shift Chords

Allows you to specify an offset value to ensure that chord events also affect the MIDI
notes. Enter a negative value to affect notes that have been triggered too early. Enter a
positive value to affect notes that have been triggered too late.

129
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Channel Sections Pane

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

Video Track Inspector

The video track Inspector contains parameters to control the video track.

Reveal Video Window

Opens the Video Player window.

Mute Video Track

Mutes the track.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117

Set up Channel Sections Pane

For audio-related and MIDI-related tracks you can configure the visibility settings of the
individual Channel sections. You can also specify the order of the sections.

● To configure the sections for the Channel tab, right-click an empty area of the Channel tab,
and select Set up Sections.

Section options
Activate/Deactivate the option for the section that you want to show/hide.

Show All
Shows all sections.

Reset All
Allows you to restore the default settings.

130
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Set up Channel Sections Pane

NOTE

You can change the order of the sections by dragging them up or down in the list.

RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Sections on page 117
Channel Sections on page 131

Channel Sections
You can set up channel-specific sections on the Set up Sections pane for the Channel tab.

Depending on the track type, you can set up the following Channel sections:

Equalizer Curve
For audio-related tracks/channels, this allows you to draw an EQ curve. Click in the
curve display to open a larger view, where you can edit the curve points.

Routing
For audio-related channels/tracks, this allows you to set up the input and output
routing.
For MIDI-related tracks, this allows you to set up the input routing, the output routing,
and the group and channel.

Pre
For audio-related channels/tracks, it contains input filter controls along with Phase and
Gain controls.

Inserts
For audio-related channels/tracks, this allows you to add audio insert effects.

EQ
For audio-related channels/tracks, this allows you to adjust up to four bands of EQs.

Strip
For audio-related tracks/channels, this allows you to integrate channel strip modules
that enable you to enhance your sound.

Sends
For audio-related channels/tracks, this allows you to select send effects.

Picture
Allows you to add a picture to the channel.

Latency
For audio-related tracks/channels, this displays the latencies caused by insert effects,
channel strip modules, or panners.

To expand/collapse a section, click its header or the arrow to the left of the section header. If the
section is too narrow, the arrow is automatically hidden.

RELATED LINKS
Channel Tab on page 49
Channel Sections on page 131
Set up Inspector Sections Pane on page 117

131
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Track Controls Settings Dialog

Track Controls Settings Dialog

The Track Controls Settings dialog allows you to configure which track controls are displayed
in the track list. You can also specify the order of controls and group controls so that they are
always shown adjacent to each other.

NOTE

The Track Controls Settings dialog is available for the main track types. The track types that
are shown in the More Tracks section of the Add Track dialog, however, have a fixed set of
track-specific controls. Exceptions to this are the chord track and the video track.

● To open the Track Controls Settings dialog, right-click a track in the track list and select
Track Controls Settings from the context menu, or click Open Track Controls Settings
Dialog in the bottom right corner of the track list.

Track type
Allows you to select the track type to which your settings are applied.

Hidden Controls
Displays controls that are hidden in the track list.

132
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Track Controls Settings Dialog

Visible Controls
Displays controls that are visible in the track list.

Width
Allows you to set the maximum length for the track name.

Group
Displays the group number.

Add
Allows you to move a selected item from the list of hidden controls to the list of visible
controls.

Remove
Allows you to move a selected item from the list of visible controls to the list of hidden
controls. All controls can be removed, except for Mute and Solo.

Move Up/Move Down

Allows you to change the order of items in the list of visible controls.

Group
Allows you to group two or more selected items in the visible controls list that are next
to each other. This ensures that they are always positioned side by side in the track list.

Ungroup
Allows you to ungroup grouped controls in the visible controls list. To remove an entire
group, select the first (topmost) element of this group and click Ungroup.

Reset
Allows you to restore all default track controls settings for the selected track type.

Controls Area Preview

Shows a preview of the customized track controls.

Presets
Allows you to save settings for track controls as presets. To recall a preset, click Switch
Presets in the bottom right corner of the track list. The name of the selected preset is
shown in the left corner.

Controls Area Width

Allows you to determine the width of the track controls area for the selected track type.
In the Controls Area Preview, this area is shown with a frame.

Track Name Width (global)

Allows you to determine the global name width for all track types.

Output Group and Channel Width (MIDI)

Allows you to determine the width for the Output Group and Channel field for MIDI-
related track types.

Apply
Applies your settings.

Reset All
Allows you to restore all default settings for track controls for all track types.

133
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Track Controls Settings Dialog

Track Controls
You can configure which track controls are shown in the track list.

NOTE

You can only configure track controls for the main track types. The track types that are shown
in the More Tracks section of the Add Track dialog, however, have a fixed set of track-specific
controls. The chord track and the video track are exceptions to this.

The following track controls are always shown:

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

Solos the track.

The track name control is available for all track types:

Name

Shows the name of the track. Double-click to rename the track.

Audio-Related Tracks
The following track controls are specific to audio-related tracks, that is, audio tracks, instrument
tracks, sampler tracks, group channel tracks, and effect channel tracks:

Inserts State

Shows the state of the inserts for the track. Click the button to bypass the inserts.
Right-click it to show which insert effect is loaded.

Bypass EQs

Shows the state of the equalizers for the track. Click the button to bypass the
equalizers.

Bypass Sends

Shows the state of the sends for the track. Click the button to bypass the sends.
Right-click it to show which send effect is loaded.

Freeze Channel

Opens a dialog that allows you to set the Tail Size time in seconds.

Channel Configuration

Shows the channel configuration of the track.

For mono and stereo tracks, it allows you to switch between mono and stereo.

134
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Track Controls Settings Dialog

MIDI-Related Tracks
The following controls are specific to MIDI-related tracks, that is, MIDI tracks, sampler tracks, and
instrument tracks:

ASIO Latency Compensation

Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency.

Programs

Allows you to select a program.

Drum Map

Allows you to select a drum map for the track.

Audio- and MIDI-Related Tracks

The following track controls are specific to audio- and MIDI-related tracks:

Record Enable

Activates the track for recording.

Monitor

For audio-related tracks, this routes incoming signals to the selected output.
For MIDI and instrument-related tracks, this allows you to route incoming MIDI signals
to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the
Preferences dialog (MIDI page).

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.

Read Automation

Allows you to read track automation.

Write Automation

Allows you to write track automation.

Instrument Tracks
The following controls are specific to instrument tracks:

Edit Instrument

Allows you to open the instrument panel.

Instrument

Allows you to select an instrument.

135
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Track Controls Settings Dialog

Sampler Tracks
The following controls are specific to sampler tracks:

Open/Close Sampler

Opens/Closes the Sampler Control in the lower zone.

MIDI Tracks
The following controls are specific to MIDI tracks:

Output Group and Channel

Allows you to specify the MIDI output channel.

NOTE

If you use MIDI 2.0 devices with dedicated device ports, this allows you to specify the
MIDI output group, and the MIDI output channels.

Output

Allows you to specify the output for the track.

Group/FX/VCA Tracks
The following track controls are specific to group/FX/VCA tracks:

Mute

Mutes the track.

Solo

Solos the track.

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.

Channel Configuration

Shows the channel configuration of the track.

For mono and stereo tracks, it allows you to switch between mono and stereo.

Marker Tracks
The following controls are specific to marker tracks:

Add Position Marker

Allows you to add a position marker at the project cursor position. This track control is
always shown.

136
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Add Track Dialog

NOTE

Shift -clicking allows you to add a marker and instantly rename it.

Add Cycle Marker

Allows you to add a cycle marker at the project cursor position. This track control is
always shown.

NOTE

Shift -clicking allows you to add a marker and instantly rename it.

Locate

Allows you to move the project cursor to the selected marker position.

Cycle

Allows you to select a cycle marker.

Zoom

Allows you to zoom in on a cycle marker.

Add Track Dialog

The Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add tracks.

To open the Add Track dialog, click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list.

137
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tracks and Channels
Add Track Dialog

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Audio on page 100
Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 102
Add Track Dialog – Sampler on page 104
Add Track Dialog – MIDI on page 105
Add Track Dialog – Group Channel on page 107
Add Track Dialog – Effect on page 109
Add Track Dialog – Ruler on page 110
Add Track Dialog – Folder on page 112
Arranger Track on page 114
Chord Track on page 115
Video Tracks on page 115
Marker Track on page 116

138
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Track Handling

Tracks are the building blocks of your project. In Cubase, events and parts are placed on tracks.

Adding Tracks via Double-Click

You can add tracks by double-clicking in the track list.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● To add a MIDI track, make sure no track is selected, and double-click an empty area of
the track list.
● To add an audio track or a MIDI and adapt the same input bus, output bus of a track of
the same type, select that track and double-click an empty area of the track list.

RELATED LINKS
Deselecting Tracks on page 149

Adding Tracks via the Add Track Dialog

You can add tracks via the Add Track dialog.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track control area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Do one of the following:

● Click the track type and set up the options according to your needs.
● To add other track types, open the More Tracks section and click the track type.
3. Click Add Track.

RESULT
The new track is added to the project below the selected track.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Audio on page 100
Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 102
Add Track Dialog – Sampler on page 104
Add Track Dialog – MIDI on page 105
Add Track Dialog – Effect on page 109
Add Track Dialog – Group Channel on page 107
Add Track Dialog – Ruler on page 110
Add Track Dialog – Folder on page 112
Arranger Track on page 114
Chord Track on page 115
Video Tracks on page 115

139
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Adding Tracks Using Track Presets

Marker Track on page 116

Adding Tracks Using Track Presets

You can add tracks based on track presets. Track presets contain sound and channel settings.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track control area of the track list, click Use Track Preset .

2. In the Choose Track Preset dialog, select a track preset.

The number and type of the added tracks depend on the selected track preset.
3. Click OK.

RESULT
The new tracks are added to the project below the selected track.

RELATED LINKS
Track Presets on page 153

Adding Tracks by Dragging Files from the MediaBay

You can add tracks by dragging files from the MediaBay.

PREREQUISITE
One of the following prerequisites must apply:
● The MediaBay is open. To open the MediaBay, press F5 .
● The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window is open. Click Show/Hide Right Zone
and click the Media tab to open it.

PROCEDURE
1. In the MediaBay, select the files for which you want to add tracks.
2. Drag the files into the track list.
● The indicator highlights the position at which the new tracks will be added.
● If you drag multiple audio files into the track list, choose if you want to place all files on
one track or on different tracks.
● If you drag multiple audio files into the track list, the Import Options dialog opens. It
allows you to edit the import options.

RESULT
The new tracks are added at the position that was highlighted by the indicator in the track list.
The audio files are inserted at the cursor position.

RELATED LINKS
MediaBay and Media Rack on page 489
Media Rack in Right Zone on page 489
Import Options Dialog for Audio Files on page 247

140
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files

Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files

You can export MIDI tracks as standard MIDI files. This allows you to transfer MIDI material to
virtually any MIDI application on any platform.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Export > MIDI File.
2. In the file dialog that opens, specify a location and name for the file.
3. Click Save.
4. In the Export Options dialog, activate the settings that you want to export, and click OK.

RESULT
The MIDI file is exported. It includes the tempo and the time signature events of the Tempo
Track Editor or, if the tempo track is deactivated on the Transport panel, the current tempo and
time signature.

NOTE

If you want to include Inspector settings that differ from those specified in the Export Options,
use Merge MIDI in Loop to convert these settings to real MIDI events.

RELATED LINKS
Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files on page 141
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part on page 632

Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files

The Export Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data to include in the exported MIDI
files.

● To open the Export Options for MIDI files, select File > Export > MIDI File.

Export Inspector Patch

Includes MIDI patch settings in the Inspector as MIDI bank select and program
change events in the MIDI file.

Export Inspector Volume/Pan

Includes volume and pan settings in the Inspector as MIDI volume and pan events in
the MIDI file.

Export Automation
Includes automation as MIDI controller events in the MIDI file.

141
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Channel Configurations

Export Inserts
Includes MIDI modifiers and MIDI inserts in the MIDI file.
Includes MIDI modifiers in the MIDI file.

Export Markers
Includes markers as standard MIDI file marker events in the MIDI file.

Export as Type 0
Exports a type 0 MIDI file with all data on a single track, but on different MIDI channels.
If you deactivate this option, a type 1 MIDI file with data on separate tracks is exported.

Export Resolution
Allows you to set a MIDI resolution between 24 and 960 for the MIDI file. The
resolution is the number of pulses, or ticks, per quarter note (PPQ) and determines
the precision with which you will be able to view and edit the MIDI data. The higher the
resolution, the higher the precision. Choose the resolution based on the application or
sequencer to be used, because certain applications and sequencers may not be able to
handle certain resolutions.

Export Locator Range

Exports only the range between the left and the right locator.

Export includes Delay

Includes delay settings you have made in the MIDI file via the Inspector.

RELATED LINKS
Automation on page 525
Markers on page 288
MIDI Track Parameters on page 617
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part on page 632
Export Options on page 898
Exporting MIDI Parts as MIDI Files on page 184

Channel Configurations
The channel configuration of audio, group channel, and effect channel tracks defines their
number and configuration of speaker channels. Cubase supports mono, stereo, and several 2D
and 3D surround channel configurations.

For audio, group channel, and effect channel tracks in your project, you can change the channel
configuration from mono to stereo and vice versa at any time.

NOTE

● You cannot switch channel configurations during recording.

● You cannot switch the channel configuration of a frozen track.

When you switch the channel configuration, the following routing rules apply:

● When switching from stereo to mono, the left signal of the stereo input is used.
● When switching a mono track that uses a mono input bus to stereo, the mono input bus is
kept.

RELATED LINKS
Switching the Channel Configuration between Mono and Stereo on page 143

142
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Removing Selected Tracks

Switching the Channel Configuration between Mono and Stereo

You can switch the channel configuration between mono and stereo for audio, group channel,
and effect channel tracks.

PREREQUISITE
Recording is not activated.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● In the track control area of an audio, group channel, and effect channel track in mono or
stereo channel configuration, click Channel Configuration.

● In the MixConsole fader section of an audio, group channel, and effect channel track in
mono or stereo channel configuration, click Channel Configuration.

RESULT
The channel configuration of the track switches from mono to stereo, or vice versa.

RELATED LINKS
Channel Configurations on page 142

Removing Selected Tracks

You can remove selected tracks from the track list.

PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Remove Selected Tracks.
If you delete tracks that are not empty, a warning message is displayed.

NOTE

You can deactivate this message. To reactivate the message, activate Display Warning
before Deleting Non-Empty Tracks in the Preferences dialog (Editing page).

Removing Empty Tracks

You can remove empty tracks from the track list.

PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Remove Empty Tracks.

143
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Reordering Tracks in the Track List

Reordering Tracks in the Track List

You can reorder tracks in the track list of the Visibility tab. The corresponding channels in the
MixConsole follow.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the tracks that you want to reorder.
2. In the track list, click the track name or an empty area of one of the tracks, and drag the
tracks up or down.
A green line indicates the positions where you can drop the tracks.

NOTE

You can also move the channels by right-clicking one of the selected channels and selecting
one of the following commands from the Move Selected Tracks menu:

● To New Folder moves the tracks into a newly created folder.

● To Previous Available Position moves the tracks to the previous position.
● To Next Available Position moves the tracks to the subsequent position.
● To First Available Position moves the tracks to the first position.
● To Last Available Position moves the tracks to the final position.

RESULT
The tracks are reordered, and the corresponding channels in the MixConsole follow. You can
restore the original order via the Edit History dialog.

NOTE

● You can also reorder tracks/channels by selecting them on the Visibility tab of the
MixConsole and dropping them onto the Project window track list or the MixConsole fader
section, or vice versa.
● When you drag a track and drop it onto a folder track, the track is moved to the last position
in the folder.

RELATED LINKS
Reordering Channels in the MixConsole on page 332
MixConsole Visibility on page 302

Renaming Tracks
You can rename tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● Double-click a track name, and type in a new name for the track.
● With multiple tracks selected, to rename the first one, select Edit > Rename > Rename
First Selected Track.

144
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/Channels

NOTE

Alternatively, you can use a key command (by default Alt - F2 ).

2. Press Return .
To assign the same name to all events on the track, hold down any modifier key, and press
Return .

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

If the Parts Get Track Names option is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing page)
and you move an event from one track to another, the moved event is automatically named
according to its new track.

Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/Channels

You can automatically assign colors to newly added tracks or channels.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Preferences.
2. Open the User Interface page, and select Track & MixConsole Channel Colors.
3. Open the Auto Track/Channel Color Mode pop-up menu and select an option.
4. Click OK.

RESULT
Any tracks/channels that you added by using Add Track, or by dragging files from the Media
rack to the event display, are automatically colorized according to your settings.

RELATED LINKS
User Interface - Track & MixConsole Channel Colors on page 905

Showing Track Pictures

Track pictures can help you to recognize your tracks. Track pictures are available for audio,
instrument, MIDI, effect channel, and group channel tracks.

PREREQUISITE
Adjust the track height to at least two rows.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click any track in the track list.
2. From the track list context menu, select Show Track Pictures.

If you move the mouse to the left on a track, a highlighted rectangle appears.
3. Double-click the rectangle.
4. In the Track Pictures Browser, select a picture.

145
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Showing Track Pictures

5. Click OK.

RESULT
The picture is shown in the track list and in the MixConsole pictures section.

RELATED LINKS
Track Pictures Browser on page 146
Adding Pictures to MixConsole Channels on page 333

Track Pictures Browser

The Track Pictures Browser allows you to set up and select pictures that can be shown in the
track list and in the MixConsole. With track pictures, you can recognize tracks and channels. You
can select pictures from the factory content or add new ones to the user library.

● To open the Track Pictures Browser for a track, double-click the square in the lower left side
of the track list.

Pictures browser
Shows the pictures that you can assign to the selected track/channel.

Factory
Shows the factory content in the pictures browser.

User
Shows your user content in the pictures browser.

Import
Opens a file dialog that allows you to select pictures in bmp, jpeg, or png format and
add them to the user library.

Remove Selected Pictures from User Library

Removes the selected pictures from the user library.

146
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Setting the Track Height

Reset Current Picture

Removes the picture from the selected track/channel.

Preview
Opens/Closes a section with further color and zoom settings.

Track Picture Preview

Shows the current track picture. When you zoom in the picture, you can drag it with the
mouse to change its visible part.

Rotate
Allows you to rotate the track picture.

Track Color
Opens the Colorize pane that allows you to select a track color.

Intensity
Allows you to apply the track color to the track picture and to set the color intensity.

Zoom
Allows you to change the size of the track picture.

RELATED LINKS
Showing Track Pictures on page 145
Adding Pictures to MixConsole Channels on page 333

Setting the Track Height

You can enlarge the track height to show the events on the track in detail, or you can decrease
the height of several tracks to get a better overview of your project.

● To change the height of an individual track, click its lower border in the track list and drag up
or down.
● To change the height of all tracks simultaneously, hold down Ctrl/Cmd , click the lower
border of one track, and drag up or down.
● To set the number of tracks to view in the Project window, use the track zoom menu.
● To set the track height automatically when you select a track, click Edit > Enlarge Selected
Track.

RELATED LINKS
Track Height Presets Menu on page 147
Track Controls Settings Dialog on page 132

Track Height Presets Menu

The Track Height Presets menu allows you to set the number of tracks and the track height in
the Project window.

● To open the Track Height Presets menu in the lower right of the Project window, click the
arrow button above the vertical zoom control.

147
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Selecting Tracks

The following options are available:

Zoom Tracks 1 Row

Zooms all tracks to a height of 1 row.

Zoom Tracks 2 Rows

Zooms all tracks to a height of 2 rows.

Zoom Tracks 3 Rows

Zooms all tracks to a height of 3 rows.

Zoom Tracks 4 Rows

Zooms all tracks to a height of 4 rows.

Zoom Tracks N Rows

Opens a dialog where you can define a custom number of rows.

Zoom Tracks Full

Zooms all tracks to fit in the active Project window.

Zoom 4 Tracks
Zooms in on the selected and 3 adjacent tracks.

Zoom 8 Tracks
Zooms in on the selected and 7 adjacent tracks.

Zoom N Tracks
Opens a dialog where you can define a custom number of tracks.

Zoom Tracks Minimal

Zooms all track heights to the minimum size.

Snap Track Heights

Changes the track height in fixed increments when you resize it.

RELATED LINKS
Horizontal Zoom Presets on page 68
Zooming in the Project Window on page 66

Selecting Tracks
You can select one or multiple tracks in the track list.

● To select a track, click on it in the track list.

● To select several tracks, Ctrl/Cmd -click several tracks.
● To select a continuous range of tracks, Shift -click the first and last track in a continuous
range of tracks.

Selected tracks are highlighted.

148
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Deselecting Tracks

RELATED LINKS
Track Selection Follows Event Selection on page 884
Scroll to Selected Track on page 888
Select Channel/Track on Solo on page 888
Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings on page 888

Selecting Tracks with Arrow Keys

You can select tracks and events with the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key on the
computer keyboard. You can also make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively
available for selecting tracks.

● To make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively available for selecting
tracks, activate Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks Only in the
Preferences dialog (Editing page).

The following applies:

● If this option is deactivated and no event/part is selected in the Project window, the
Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key are used to step through the tracks in the track list.
● If this option is deactivated and an event/part is selected in the Project window, the
Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key still step through the tracks in the track list –
but on the selected track, the first event/part is automatically selected as well.
● If this option is activated, the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key are only used to
change the track selection – the current event/part selection in the Project window is not
altered.

Deselecting Tracks
You can deselect tracks that are selected in the track list.

PROCEDURE
● Shift -click a selected track.

RESULT
The track is deselected.

Duplicating Tracks
You can duplicate a track with all of its contents and channel settings.

PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Duplicate Tracks.

RESULT
The duplicated track appears below the original track.

149
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Disabling Tracks

Disabling Tracks
You can disable audio, instrument, MIDI, and sampler tracks that you do not want to play back
or process at the moment. Disabling a track zeroes its output volume and shuts down all disk
activity and processing for the track.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the tracks that you want to disable.
2. Right-click in the track list and select Disable Selected Tracks from the context menu.

RESULT
The track color changes and the corresponding channel in the MixConsole is hidden.
To enable the disabled tracks and to restore all channel settings, right-click in the track list and
select Enable Selected Tracks.

Freezing Multiple Tracks

You can freeze multiple selected audio, instrument, or sampler tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the tracks that you want to freeze.
2. Do one of the following:
● Select Edit > Freeze/Unfreeze > Selected Tracks.
● Right-click one of the selected tracks, and from the context menu, select Freeze/
Unfreeze Selected Tracks.

NOTE

If you select several tracks, and you click Freeze Channel in the Inspector, only the active
track is frozen.

3. In the Freeze Channel Options dialog, make your changes.

NOTE

You can also select Edit > Freeze/Unfreeze > Selected Tracks (with Current Settings) to
freeze the tracks without showing the Freeze Channel Options dialog. In this case, the last
settings are applied.

4. Click OK.

RESULT
● The output of the tracks are rendered to audio files, and on playback you hear the same
sound as before freezing.
● Less CPU load is used.
● The Freeze Channel buttons light up.
● The track controls are grayed out.
● The audio events and MIDI parts are locked.
● You can still adjust the level and panning, make EQ settings, and adjust the effect sends.

150
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Organizing Tracks in Folder Tracks

● The Sampler Control section in the lower zone of the Project window is disabled.

NOTE

The audio file is saved in the Freeze folder that can be found in the following location:

● Windows: within the Project folder

● macOS: User/Documents

The freeze options are saved and used for all further freeze operations.

NOTE

In the Key Commands dialog in the Edit category, you can also assign a key command
for Freeze/Unfreeze Selected Tracks and Freeze/Unfreeze Selected Tracks (with Current
Settings).

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To unfreeze the frozen tracks, select them and select Edit > Freeze/Unfreeze > Selected Tracks
or Edit > Freeze/Unfreeze > Selected Tracks (with Current Settings).

RELATED LINKS
Freezing Insert Effects on page 356
Freezing Instruments on page 545
Freeze Channel Options Dialog for Instruments on page 546
Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog for Instruments on page 547
Freezing Sampler Tracks on page 465
Freeze Channel Options Dialog for Sampler Tracks on page 466
Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog for Sampler Tracks on page 467

Organizing Tracks in Folder Tracks

You can organize your tracks in folders by moving tracks into folder tracks. This allows you to
perform editing on several tracks as one entity. Folder tracks can contain any type of track,
including other folder tracks.

● To add a folder track, click Add Track in the global track control area of the track list, and
click Folder.
● To move tracks into a folder, select them and drag them into the folder track.
● To remove tracks from a folder, select them and drag them out of the folder.
● To hide/show tracks in a folder, click the Expand/Collapse Folder button of the folder track.
● To hide/show data on a folder track, open the context menu for the folder track, and select
an option from the Show Data on Folder Tracks submenu.
● To mute/solo all tracks in a folder track, click the Mute or Solo button for the folder track.

NOTE

Hidden tracks are played back as usual.

151
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Handling Overlapping Audio

Modifying Event Display on Folder Tracks

You can modify the event display on folder tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the folder track.
2. On the context menu, select Show Data on Folder Tracks.
You have the following options:

● Always Show Data

Always displays data blocks or event details.
● Never Show Data
Displays nothing.
● Hide Data When Expanded
Hides the display of events when you open folder tracks.
● Show Event Details
Displays event details instead of data blocks.

NOTE

You can change these settings in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Folders page).

RELATED LINKS
Event Display - Folders on page 894

Handling Overlapping Audio

The basic rule for audio tracks is that each track can only play back a single audio event at a time.
If two or more events overlap, only the one that is in the front is played back. You can, however,
select the event/region that you want to play back.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Right-click the audio event in the event display and select the desired event or region
from the To Front or Set to Region submenu.

NOTE

The available options depend on whether you performed a linear or a cycle recording
and on the record mode you used. When recording audio in cycle mode, the recorded
event is divided into regions, one for each take.

● Click the middle handle on the lower border of a stacked event, and select an entry from
the pop-up menu.

152
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Events Display on Folder Tracks

Events Display on Folder Tracks

Closed folder tracks can display data of the contained audio, MIDI, and instrument tracks as data
blocks or as events.

When you close folder tracks, the contents of the contained tracks are displayed as data blocks
or events. Depending on the folder track height, the display of the events can be more or less
detailed.

Track Presets
Track presets are templates that can be applied to newly created or existing tracks of the same
type.

You can create them from any track types (audio, MIDI, instrument, sampler, group, effect,
VST instrument return, input, and output channels). They contain sound and channel settings,
and they allow you to quickly browse, preview, select, and change sounds, or to reuse channel
settings across projects.

Track presets are organized in the MediaBay.

When you apply a track preset, all the settings that are saved in the preset are applied.

Track presets can only be applied to tracks of their own type. The only exception are instrument
tracks. For these, VST presets are also available.

NOTE

● Once a track preset is applied, you cannot undo the changes. It is not possible to remove an
applied preset from a track and return to the previous state. If you are not satisfied with the
track settings, you have to either edit the settings manually or apply another preset.
● Applying VST presets to instrument tracks leads to the removal of modifiers, inserts, or EQs.
These settings are not stored in VST presets.

Audio Track Presets

Track presets for audio tracks, group channel tracks, effect channel tracks, VST instrument
channels, input channels, and output channels include all the settings that define the sound.

You can use the factory presets as a starting point for your own editing and save the audio
settings that you optimized for an artist you often work with as a preset for future recordings.

The following data is saved in audio track presets:

● Insert effects settings (including VST effect presets)

● EQ settings
● Volume and pan
● Input gain and phase

NOTE

To access the track presets functions for input and output channels, activate the Write buttons
for input and output channels in the MixConsole. This creates input and output channel tracks in
the track list.

153
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Track Presets

MIDI Track Presets

You can use MIDI track presets for multitimbral VST instruments.

When creating MIDI track presets, you can either include the channel or the patch.

The following data is saved in MIDI track presets:

● MIDI modifiers (Transpose, etc.)

● Output and Channel or Program Change
● Volume and pan
● Staff settings
● Color settings
● Drum map settings

Creating a Track Preset

You can create a track preset from a single track or from a combination of tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select one or more tracks.
2. In the track list, right-click one of the selected tracks and select Save Track Preset.
3. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset.

NOTE

You can also define attributes for the preset.

4. Click OK to save the preset and exit the dialog.

RESULT
Track presets are saved within the application folder in the track presets folder. They are saved in
default subfolders, named according to their track type: audio, MIDI, instrument, and multi.

Loading Presets for Tracks

You can choose from a variety of track presets.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
2. Right-click the Inserts section header, and select From Track Preset.
3. In the Results browser, double-click a track preset to apply it.

RELATED LINKS
Track Presets on page 153

154
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Track Presets

Loading Presets for VST Instruments

When working with VST instruments, you can choose from a variety of presets via the Results
browser.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, right-click the instrument track and select Load Track Preset.
2. In the Results browser, double-click a preset to apply it.

Instrument Track Presets

Instrument track presets offer both MIDI and audio features and are the best choice when
handling sounds of simple, mono-timbral VST instruments.

Use instrument track presets to audition your tracks or to save your preferred sound settings, for
example. You can also extract sounds from instrument track presets to use them in instrument
tracks.

The following data is saved in instrument track presets:

● Audio insert effects

● Audio EQ
● Audio volume and pan
● MIDI insert effects
● MIDI track parameters
● The VST instrument used for the track
● Staff settings
● Color settings
● Drum map settings

VST Presets
VST instrument presets behave like instrument track presets. You can extract sounds from VST
presets to use them in instrument tracks.

The following data is saved in VST instrument presets:

● VST instrument
● VST instrument settings

NOTE

Modifiers, inserts, and EQ settings are not saved.

VST effect plug-ins are available in VST 3 and VST 2 format.

NOTE

In this manual, VST presets stands for VST 3 instrument presets, unless stated otherwise.

155
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Track Presets

Extracting the Sound from an Instrument Track or VST Preset

For instrument tracks, you can extract the sound of an instrument track preset or VST preset.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the instrument track to which you want to apply a sound.
2. In the Inspector, open the Routing section.
3. Click Extract Sound from Track Preset .

4. In the preset browser, select an instrument track preset or a VST preset.

5. Double-click the preset to load the settings.

RESULT
The VST instrument and its settings (but no inserts, EQs, or modifiers) on the existing track are
overwritten with the data of the track preset. The previous VST instrument for this instrument
track is removed. The new VST instrument is set up for the instrument track.

Multi-Track Presets
You can use multi-track presets, for example, when recording setups that require several
microphones (a drum set or a choir, where you always record under the same conditions), and
you have to edit the resulting tracks in a similar way. Furthermore, they can be used when
working with layered tracks, where you use several tracks to generate a certain sound instead of
manipulating only one track.

If you select more than one track when creating a track preset, the settings of all selected tracks
are saved as a single multi-track preset. Multi-track presets can only be applied if the target
tracks are of the same type, number, and sequence as the tracks in the track preset. Therefore,
they should be used in recurring situations with similar tracks and settings.

Loading Multi-Track Presets

You can apply multi-track presets to several selected tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select several tracks.

NOTE

Multi-track presets can only be applied if track type, number, and sequence are identical for
the selected tracks and the track preset.

2. In the track list, right-click a track and select Load Track Preset.
3. In the preset browser, select a multi-track preset.
4. Double-click the preset to load it.

RESULT
The preset is applied.

156
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Track Presets

Sampler Track Presets

You can use sampler track presets to reuse created sounds in later projects or newly created
sampler tracks.

The following data is saved in sampler track presets:

● Audio insert effects

● Audio EQ
● Audio volume and pan
● MIDI track parameters
● Color settings

RELATED LINKS
Sampler Tracks and Channels on page 103

Creating a Sampler Track Preset

You can create a sampler track preset from a sampler track or you can use the Sampler Control
toolbar.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Sampler Control toolbar, click Preset Management .

2. Click Save Track Preset.

3. In the Save Track Preset dialog, type in a name for the new preset.
4. Click OK to save the preset and to exit the dialog.

RESULT
The new sampler track preset is saved. It is displayed in the Preset Name field on the info line.
Sampler track presets are saved within the application folder of the sampler track presets folder.

RELATED LINKS
Creating a Track Preset on page 154

Loading Track or VST Presets

You can apply track or VST presets to selected tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select a track.
2. Do one of the following:

● In the Inspector, click Load Track Preset.

● In the track list, right-click the track and select Load Track Preset.
● In the Sampler Control toolbar, click the Preset Management button next to the
Preset Name field and select Load Track Preset.
3. In the preset browser, select a track, VST, or sampler track preset.
4. Double-click the preset to load it.

157
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Handling
Track Presets

RESULT
The preset is applied.

NOTE

You can also drag and drop track presets from the MediaBay or from the File Explorer/macOS
Finder onto a track of the same type.

RELATED LINKS
Filters Section on page 517

158
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Parts and Events

Parts and events are the basic building blocks in Cubase.

Events
In Cubase, you can view and edit most event types on their specific tracks in the Project window.

You can add events by importing or recording.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Regions on page 161
MIDI Events on page 162

Audio Events
Audio events are created automatically when you record or import audio in the Project window.

You can view and edit audio events in the Project window and in the Sample Editor.

An audio event triggers the playback of the corresponding audio clip. By adjusting the Offset
and the Length values of the event, you can determine which section of the audio clip is played
back. The audio clip itself remains unchanged.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window on page 34
Sample Editor on page 401
Audio Files and Audio Clips on page 161
Basic Recording Methods on page 227

Creating Audio Events

You can create audio events by recording or importing audio into the Project window.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Record some audio.

● Select File > Import > Audio File to import an audio file from your hard disk or from any
external storage device.
● Select File > Import > Audio CD to import an audio file from an audio CD.
● Select File > Import > Audio from Video File to import audio from a video file on your
hard disk or from any external storage device.
● Drag an audio file from the MediaBay, the Audio Part Editor, or the Sample Editor, and
drop it in the event display.
● Copy an event from a different Cubase project, and paste it in the event display.

159
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Events

RELATED LINKS
Basic Recording Methods on page 227
Audio File Import on page 247
Importing Audio CD Tracks on page 250
Importing Audio from Video Files on page 252
MediaBay and Media Rack on page 489
Audio Part Editor on page 430
Sample Editor on page 401

Creating New Files From Events

An audio event plays a section of an audio clip, which, in turn, refers to one or more audio files
on the hard disk. However, you can create a new file that consists only of the section that is
played by the event.

PROCEDURE
1. Select one or several audio events.
2. Set up fade in, fade out, and event volume.
These settings will be applied to the new file.
3. Select Audio > Bounce Selection.
You are asked whether you want to replace the selected event or not.
4. Do one of the following:
● To create a new file that only contains the audio in the original event, click Replace.
● To create a new file and add a clip for the new file to the Pool, click No.

TIP

To always apply the selected setting without opening the dialog again, activate Please,
don’t ask again. You can reset this with the On Bouncing/Rendering Audio option in the
Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).

RESULT
If you clicked Replace, a clip for the new file is added to the Pool, and the original event is
replaced by a new event playing the new clip.
If you clicked No, the original event is not replaced.

NOTE

You can also apply the Bounce Selection function to audio parts. In that case, the audio of all
events in the part is combined to a single audio file. If you select Replace when asked, the part is
replaced with a single audio event playing a clip of the new file.

RELATED LINKS
Event-Based Fades on page 268
On Bouncing/Rendering Audio on page 886

160
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Events

Audio Files and Audio Clips

In Cubase, audio editing and processing are non-destructive.

When you edit or process audio in the Project window, the audio file on the hard disk remains
untouched. Instead, your changes are saved to an audio clip that is automatically created on
import or during recording, and that refers to the audio file. This allows you to undo changes or
revert to the original version.

If you apply processing to a specific section of an audio clip, a new audio file that contains only
this section is created. The processing is applied to the new audio file only, and the audio clip is
automatically adjusted, so that it refers both to the original file and to the new, processed file.
During playback, the program will switch between the original file and the processed file at the
correct positions. You will hear this as a single recording, with processing applied to one section
only.

This allows you to undo processing at a later stage, and to apply different processing to different
audio clips that refer to the same original file.

You can view and edit audio clips in the Pool.

RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 468
Audio Regions on page 161
Replacing Clips in Events on page 161

Replacing Clips in Events

You can replace the clips in audio events.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Hold down Shift , drag an audio file from the File Explorer/macOS Finder, and drop it
onto the event.
● Click a clip in the Pool, hold down Shift , and drop it onto the event.

RESULT
The clip in the event is replaced. However, the event edits remain unchanged. If the new clip is
shorter than the replaced clip, the length of the event is adapted. If the new clip is longer than
the replaced clip, the length of the event stays the same.

RELATED LINKS
Inserting Clips into a Project via Drag and Drop on page 475

Audio Regions
Cubase allows you to create audio regions within audio clips to mark important sections in the
audio.

You can view audio regions in the Pool. You can create and edit them in the Sample Editor.

NOTE

If you want to use an individual audio file in different contexts, or if you want to create several
loops from one audio file, convert the corresponding regions of the audio clip to events and

161
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Events

bounce them into separate audio files. This is necessary because different events that refer to
the same clip access the same clip information.

RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 468
Regions List on page 413

Creating Regions
You can create regions from several selected audio events or from selection ranges.

PROCEDURE
1. Select several audio events or selection ranges.
2. Select Audio > Advanced > Event or Range as Region.
3. In the Create Regions dialog, enter a name for the regions, and click OK.

RESULT
A region is created in the corresponding clip, with the start and the end position of the region
determined by the start and the end position of the event or selection range within the clip.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Regions on page 414

Creating Events from Regions

You can create events from regions, which replace the original event.

PROCEDURE
1. Select an audio event whose clip contains regions within the boundaries of the event.
2. Select Audio > Advanced > Events from Regions.

RESULT
The original event is removed and replaced by events positioned and sized according to the
regions.

MIDI Events
MIDI events are created automatically when you record or import MIDI in the Project window.

You can view and edit MIDI events in the Key Editor, the Drum Editor, or the Score Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window on page 34
Key Editor on page 675
Drum Editor on page 704
Basic Recording Methods on page 227

162
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Parts

Creating MIDI Events

You can create MIDI events by recording or importing MIDI into the Project window.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Record MIDI.
● Select File > Import > MIDI File to import a MIDI file from your hard disk.
● Drag a MIDI file from the File Explorer/macOS Finder, from one of the MIDI editors, or
from the MediaBay, and drop it into the event display.
● Copy an event from a different Cubase project and paste it in the event display.

RELATED LINKS
Basic Recording Methods on page 227
Importing MIDI Files on page 255
MIDI Editors on page 643
MediaBay and Media Rack on page 489

Parts
Parts are containers for MIDI or audio events and for tracks.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Parts on page 163
MIDI Parts on page 164
Folder Parts on page 165

Audio Parts
Audio parts are containers for audio events. If you want to treat several audio events as one unit
in the Project window, you can convert them into a part.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Part Editor on page 430

Creating Audio Parts

In the Project window, you can create empty audio parts.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Select the Draw tool, and draw on the audio track.

● Press Alt/Opt , select the Object Selection tool, and draw on the audio track.
● Select the Object Selection tool, and double-click on the audio track, between the left
and right locator.
● Select several audio events on an audio track, and select Audio > Events to Part.

163
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Parts

NOTE

To make the events appear as independent objects on the track again, select the part, and
select Audio > Dissolve Part.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Parts on page 163

MIDI Parts
MIDI parts are containers for MIDI events.

MIDI parts are automatically created when you record or import MIDI in the Project window. The
MIDI parts contain the recorded or imported events. You can also create empty MIDI parts.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Recording on page 240
Importing MIDI Files on page 255
Creating Empty MIDI Parts on page 164

Creating Empty MIDI Parts

In the Project window, you can create empty MIDI parts on MIDI tracks, instrument tracks, and
sampler tracks.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● To create an empty one-bar MIDI part, regardless of the used time format, select the
Object Selection tool, and double-click an empty area on the track.
● To create an empty MIDI part that spans the length of the locator range, select the
Object Selection tool, and double-click on the track, between the left and the right
locator.

● To draw an empty MIDI part with the Draw tool, select the tool and draw on the track.
● To draw an empty MIDI part with the Object Selection tool, select the tool, press Alt/
Opt , and draw on the track.

RESULT
The empty MIDI part is created accordingly.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Parts on page 164

164
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

Folder Parts
A folder part is a graphic representation of events and parts on the tracks in the folder.

Folder parts indicate the time position as well as the vertical track position. If part colors are
used, these are also shown in the folder part.

Any editing that you perform on a folder part affects all the events and parts it contains. Tracks
inside a folder can be edited as one entity.

NOTE

To edit the individual tracks within the folder, you can double-click the folder part. This opens the
editors for the events and parts that are present on the tracks.

RELATED LINKS
Event Colors Menu on page 644

Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

This section describes techniques for editing in the Project window. If not explicitly stated, all
descriptions apply to both events and parts, even though we use the term event for convenience.

In the Project window, you can edit events using the following techniques:

● By selecting and using one of the tools in the Project window toolbar.

NOTE

Some editing tools feature additional functions if you press modifier keys. You can customize
the default modifier keys in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tool Modifiers page).

● By opening the Edit menu and selecting one of the functions.

● By editing on the info line.
● By using a key command.

NOTE

Snap is taken into account.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Tool Modifiers on page 890

Auditioning Audio Parts and Events

You can audition audio parts and events in the Project window by using the Audition tool.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, click Play and select Play.
2. Click where you want playback to start, and keep the mouse button pressed.
3. Optional: Select Media > MediaBay, and in the Previewer section, adjust the Preview Level.

165
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

RESULT
The track on which you click is played back, starting at the click position. Playback is stopped
when you release the mouse button.

NOTE

When auditioning, the Main Mix bus is always used for monitoring.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Previewer Section on page 511

Scrubbing
The Scrub tool allows you to locate positions in events by playing back, forwards or backwards.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, click Play.
2. Click again to open a pop-up menu.
3. Select Scrub.
4. Click the event and keep the mouse button pressed.
5. Drag to the left or right.

RESULT
The project cursor moves correspondingly, and the event is played back. The speed and the pitch
of the playback depend on how fast you move the mouse.

NOTE

Insert effects are bypassed when scrubbing with the mouse.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Scrub Tool
Scrubbing can be quite a burden on your system. If playback problems occur, open the
Preferences dialog (Transport—Scrub page), and deactivate Use High Quality Scrub Mode.
This lowers the resampling quality but makes scrubbing less demanding on the processor,
especially with large projects.

In the Preferences dialog (Transport—Scrub page), you can also adjust the Scrub volume.

Selecting with the Object Selection Tool

PROCEDURE
1. Click Object Selection.
2. In the event display, click the events that you want to select.

166
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

NOTE

You can also use the Up Arrow , Down Arrow Selecting with the Object Selection Tool,
Left Arrow or Right Arrow keys on the computer keyboard to select the event on the
upper or lower track, or the previous or next event on the same track.

RESULT
You can choose to display red borders around selected events in the event display by activating
Highlight Borders of Selected Events in the Preferences dialog (Event Display page).

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Event Display on page 891

Select Submenu
If the Object Selection tool is selected, the Select submenu features specific options for
selecting events in the Project window.

● To open the Select submenu, select Edit > Select.

All
Selects all events in the Project window.

None
Deselects all events in the Project window.

Invert
Inverts the selection. All selected events are deselected, and all events that were not
selected are selected instead.

In Loop
Selects all events that are located partly or entirely within the area between the left and
right locator.

From Start to Cursor

Selects all events that end to the left of the project cursor.

From Cursor to End

Selects all events that start to the right of the project cursor.

Equal Pitch all Octaves/Equal Pitch same Octave

These functions are available in the MIDI editors and the Sample Editor.

Select Controllers in Note Range

This function is available in the MIDI editors.

All on Selected Tracks

Selects all events on the selected track.

Events under Cursor

Automatically selects all events on the selected tracks that are touched by the project
cursor.

Select Event
This function is available in the Sample Editor.

167
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

Left Selection Side to Cursor/Right Selection Side to Cursor

These functions are only used for range selection editing.

NOTE

● When the Range Selection tool is selected, the Select submenu features different functions.
● You can choose to display red borders around selected events in the event display by
activating Highlight Borders of Selected Events in the Preferences dialog (Event Display
page).

RELATED LINKS
Event Display on page 891
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors on page 185

Removing Events
You can remove events from the Project window.

PROCEDURE
● To remove an event from the Project window, do one of the following:
● On the Project window toolbar, activate Erase and click the event.
● In the event display, select the events and select Edit > Delete.
● In the event display, select the events and press Backspace .

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Event Movement Options

Cubase provides several methods to move events in the Project window.

You can move events using any of the following methods:

● Use the Object Selection tool.

● Use the Range Selection tool.
● Use the Nudge buttons.
● Select Edit > Move, and select one of the options.
● Select the event, and edit the start position on the info line.

RELATED LINKS
Moving Events with the Object Selection Tool on page 169
Moving Events with the Range Selection Tool on page 169
Moving Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 170
Move Submenu on page 172
Moving Events via the Info Line on page 173

168
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

Moving Events with the Object Selection Tool

You can select one or several events with the Object Selection tool and drag them to a new
position.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Object Selection .

2. Click the events that you want to move, and drag them to a new position.

NOTE

You can only drag events to tracks of the same type. If you hold down Ctrl/Cmd while
dragging, you can restrict the movement either horizontally or vertically.

RESULT
The events are moved. If you moved several events, their relative positions are kept.

NOTE

To avoid accidentally moving events when you click them in the Project window, when you move
an event by dragging, the response is slightly delayed. You can adjust this delay with the Drag
Delay setting in the Preferences dialog (Editing page).

RELATED LINKS
Editing on page 884

Moving Events with the Range Selection Tool

You can select one or several events with the Range Selection tool and drag them to a new
position.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Range Selection .

2. Create a selection range.

3. Drag the selection range to a new position.

NOTE

You can only drag events to tracks of the same type. If you hold down Ctrl/Cmd while
dragging, you can restrict the movement either horizontally or vertically.

RESULT
The selection range and the encompassed events are moved. If you moved several events, their
relative positions are kept.

NOTE

To avoid accidentally moving events when you click them in the Project window, when you move
an event by dragging, the response is slightly delayed. You can adjust this delay with the Drag
Delay setting in the Preferences dialog (Editing page).

169
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

RELATED LINKS
Creating Selection Ranges on page 185
Editing on page 884

Moving Events with the Nudge Buttons

You can move one or several selected events by using the nudge buttons on the Project window
toolbar.

PREREQUISITE
You have activated the Nudge section in the Project window toolbar.

PROCEDURE
1. Click the points to the right of the Nudge section.
The Nudge buttons become available.

2. In the event display, select the events that you want to move, and do one of the following:

● Click Move Left or use the corresponding key command Ctrl/Cmd - Left Arrow to move
the events to the left.
● Click Move Right or use the corresponding key command Ctrl/Cmd - Right Arrow to
move the events to the right.

NOTE

If you use the Range Selection tool, you must Ctrl/Cmd -click Move Left or Move Right to
move the content of the selection range.

RESULT
The selected events or parts are moved.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up a Snap Grid for Nudge Operations on page 170
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Snap Grid on page 73
Ruler on page 45
Ruler Time Format Menu on page 45
Grid Type Menu on page 72
Moving the Content of Selection Ranges to a New Position on page 190

Setting up a Snap Grid for Nudge Operations

You can set up an independent snap grid just for nudge operations. This way, you can perform
all editing with the mouse using a musical (tempo-related) grid that is set to Bars+Beats while all
nudge operations and corresponding key commands are based on a linear (time-related) grid.

PREREQUISITE
The primary time format on the Transport panel is set to Bars+Beats. Your project contains
some parts or events that you want to move to a time-related position.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the Project window toolbar and activate Nudge.

170
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

The Nudge Settings become available on the toolbar.

2. Open the Nudge Settings pop-up menu to select a time-related format for your nudge
operations.

The settings Link to Grid and Link to Primary Time Format are deactivated.
3. Optional: Select Project > Add Track > Ruler to add a ruler track. In the track list for the ruler
track, select the same time format as for your nudge operations.
This is not necessary, but it helps you to get visual control over your nudge operations.
4. On the Project window toolbar, click the points to the right of the Nudge Settings section.
The Nudge buttons become available.

5. In the event display, select the events or parts that you want to move, and do one of the
following:
● To nudge the events to the left, click Move Left or use the corresponding key command
Ctrl/Cmd - Left Arrow .
● To nudge the events to the right, click Move Right or use the corresponding key
command Ctrl/Cmd - Right Arrow .

RESULT
The selected events or parts that you nudged are moved. They snap to the linear grid that
you set in the Nudge Settings pop-up menu. If you now move some events or parts using the
mouse, these will snap to the musical grid that you set with the primary time format.

171
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

RELATED LINKS
Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 215
Ruler Track Controls on page 112
Snap Grid on page 73
Nudge on page 40
Moving Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 170
Resizing Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 175
Resizing Events Using the Nudge Settings on page 176

Move Submenu
With the Object Selection tool or the Range Selection tool selected, the Move submenu
contains options for moving events to specific positions in the Project window.

● To open the Move submenu, select Edit > Move.

The following options are available:

Event Start/Range Start to Cursor

Moves the start of a selected event or a selection range to the project cursor position.
With several events selected, the subsequent events keep their relative positions.

NOTE

If you use the Range Selection tool with Range Tool Splits Partly Selected Events
activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing page), partially selected events are split.

Event End/Range End to Cursor

Moves the end of a selected event or a selection range to the project cursor position.
With several events selected, the subsequent events keep their relative positions.

NOTE

If you use the Range Selection tool with Range Tool Splits Partly Selected Events
activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing page), partially selected events are split.

Events to Origin
Moves selected events to the positions at which they were originally recorded.

Event/Range to Selected Track

Moves selected events to separate tracks, starting on the selected track, and inserts
them at their current positions.

NOTE

The following applies when using the Range Selection tool:

● To keep the selection range when selecting another track, you must deactivate
Range Selection Follows Track Selection in the Preferences dialog (Editing
page).
● If Range Tool Splits Partly Selected Events is activated in the Preferences dialog
(Editing page), partially selected events are split.

Events to Front
Moves the selected events to the front. This is useful if you have overlapping audio
events and you want to play back another event.

172
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

NOTE

For this to work, make sure that the Objection Selection tool is selected.

Events to Back
Moves the selected events to the back. This is useful if you have overlapping audio
events and you want to play back another event.

NOTE

For this to work, make sure that the Objection Selection tool is selected.

RELATED LINKS
Editing on page 884

Moving Events via the Info Line

You can move a selected event by changing its start value on the info line.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the event that you want to move.
2. On the info line, double-click the Start field, and enter a new value for the event start.

RESULT
The event is moved by the set value.

Renaming Events
PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Select the events, select Edit > Rename > Rename Selected Events, and type the new
name into the text field of the Rename Selected Events dialog.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can open the Rename Selected Events dialog via a key command (by
default F2 ) or the context menu.

● Select the events, and type a new name into the File field on the info line.

● Change the track name, hold down a modifier key, and press Return to rename all
events according to the track.

173
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

Event Resize Options

You can resize events by moving their start or end positions individually.

To resize events, you can use the Object Selection, the Scrub tool or the Nudge buttons.

Resizing also works if the Combine Selection Tools mode is active.

IMPORTANT

When resizing events, automation data is not taken into account.

RELATED LINKS
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Normal Sizing on page 174
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Moves Contents on page 174
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch on page 175
Resizing Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 175
Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool on page 177
Snap Function on page 70

Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Normal Sizing

You can move the start or end point of the event.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Object Selection.
2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Normal Sizing from the pop-up menu.
3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event.

NOTE

If your event contains fades and you want to adapt their length while sizing the event, hold
down Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt .

RESULT
The event is resized and, depending on where you dragged, more or less of the content is
revealed. If several events are selected, they are all resized in the same way.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Editing - Tool Modifiers on page 889

Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Moves Contents
You can move the start or end point of the event and move the content.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Object Selection.

174
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Sizing Moves Contents from the pop-up
menu.
3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event.

RESULT
The event is resized, and the content follows. If several events are selected, they are all resized in
the same way.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch
You can move the start or the end point of the event and time-stretch the content to fit the new
event length.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Object Selection.
2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Sizing Applies Time Stretch from the
pop-up menu.
3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event.

RESULT
The part is stretched or compressed to fit the new length.
● If you resize MIDI parts, the note events are stretched (moved and resized).
Controller data are stretched, too.
● If you resize audio parts, the events are moved, and the referenced audio files are time-
stretched to fit the new length.
If several events are selected, they are all resized in the same way.

RELATED LINKS
Time Stretch on page 388
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Resizing Events with the Nudge Buttons

You can change the start or the end position of events. The setting on the Grid Type pop-up
menu applies.

PREREQUISITE
The Object Selection tool is set to Normal Sizing or Sizing Moves Contents.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the Project window toolbar and activate Nudge.
The Nudge Settings become available on the toolbar.

175
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

2. Click the points to the right of the section.

The Nudge buttons become available.

3. Select the event.

4. Do one of the following:

● Click Nudge Start Left or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Left Arrow to
move the event start to the left.
● Click Nudge Start Right or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Shift -
Right Arrow to move the event start to the right.
● Click Nudge End Left or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Shift -
Left Arrow to move the event end to the left.
● Click Nudge End Right or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Right Arrow
to move the event end to the right.

RESULT
The start or end position of the selected events is moved, and the setting on the Grid Type
pop-up menu applies.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Resizing Events Using the Nudge Settings on page 176
Setting up a Snap Grid for Nudge Operations on page 170
Ruler on page 45
Ruler Time Format Menu on page 45
Grid Type Menu on page 72

Resizing Events Using the Nudge Settings

You can move the start or the end position of events. The setting on the Nudge Settings pop-up
menu applies.

PREREQUISITE
The Object Selection tool is set to Normal Sizing or Sizing Moves Contents.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the Project window toolbar and activate Nudge.
The Nudge Settings become available on the toolbar.

2. Open the Nudge Settings pop-up menu, and activate a format and a value for your
operations.
3. Click the points to the right of the section.
The Nudge buttons become available.

4. Select the event.

5. Do one of the following:

176
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

● Click Nudge Start Left or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Left Arrow to
move the event start to the left.
● Click Nudge Start Right or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Shift -
Right Arrow to move the event start to the right.
● Click Nudge End Left or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Shift -
Left Arrow to move the event end to the left.
● Click Nudge End Right or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Right Arrow
to move the event end to the right.

RESULT
The start or the end position of the selected events is moved, and the setting on the Nudge
Settings pop-up menu applies.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up a Snap Grid for Nudge Operations on page 170
Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 215
Snap Grid on page 73
Resizing Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 175

Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool

You can scrub the event when moving the start or the end point of the event.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Play.
2. Click Play again to open a pop-up menu.
3. Select Scrub.
4. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event.

RESULT
The event is resized, and you get an acoustic feedback while dragging.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Splitting Events
PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Select Split, and click the event that you want to split.
● Select Object Selection, hold down Alt/Opt , and click the event.
● Move the project cursor to the position where you want to split the events, and select
Edit > Functions > Split at Cursor.

NOTE

This splits all events on all tracks that are intersected by the project cursor. If you select
specific events, only these events are split.

177
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

● Set up the left and right locators at the position where you want to split the events, and
select Edit > Functions > Split Loop.

NOTE

This splits all events on all tracks that are intersected by the locators. If you select
specific events, only these events are split.

RESULT
The events are split.

NOTE

If you split a MIDI part so that the split position intersects one or several MIDI notes and Split
MIDI Events is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—MIDI page), the intersected notes
are split and new notes are created at the beginning of the second part. If Split MIDI Events is
deactivated, the notes remain in the first part, but stick out after the end of the part.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Splitting Events Repeatedly

You can repeatedly split events into multiple events of equal size.

PROCEDURE
● Select Split , hold down Alt/Opt , and click the event where you want to make the first
split.

RESULT
The event is automatically split into as many equal events as the length of the original event
allows.

Gluing Events Together

In the Project window, you can glue two or more events that are on the same track together.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Use the Object Selection tool or the Range Selection tool to select the events that you
want to glue together, and select Edit > Glue.
● To glue an event to the next event, select Glue, and click the event that you want to glue
to the next event.
● To glue an event to all subsequent events, select Glue, hold down Alt/Opt , and click the
event that you want to glue to all subsequent events.

RESULT
The events are glued together.

178
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

NOTE

Splitting an audio event and then gluing the parts together again, results in an event. In any
other case, a part is created.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Pasting Events
You can paste events from the clipboard.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Select the events, and select Edit > Functions > Paste at Origin to paste the event at the
same position from which you cut or copied it.
● Select the events, select the track where you want to paste them, and select Edit >
Functions > Paste Relative to Cursor to paste the events while keeping their relative
position to the project cursor.

RESULT
If you paste an audio event, it is inserted on the selected track, positioned so that its snap point is
aligned with the cursor position.
If the selected track is of the wrong type, the event is inserted on its original track.

Pasting Events to Matching Track Names

You can copy events in one project and paste them at the first track that matches the exact track
name in another project.

PROCEDURE
1. Copy the events in one project.
2. Activate the project where you want to paste the events.
3. Select Edit > Functions > Paste to Matching Track Name.

RESULT
The events are inserted on the track with the name that exactly matches the original track name.
For all events that have no matching track name, new tracks are created.

Duplicating Events
In the Project window, you can duplicate selected events.

PROCEDURE
● Select the event and do one of the following:

● Select Edit > Functions > Duplicate.

● Hold down Alt/Opt , and drag the event to a new position.

179
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

NOTE

If you hold down Ctrl/Cmd as well, direction of the movement is restricted to either
horizontal or vertical.

RESULT
A copy of the selected event is created and placed after the original. If several events are
selected, all of these are copied as one unit, maintaining the relative distance between the
events.

NOTE

If you duplicate audio events, the copies always refer to the same audio clip.

Repeating Events
PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Select the events, and select Edit > Functions > Repeat to open the Repeat Events
dialog, which allows you to create a number of real or shared copies of the selected
events.
● Select the events, hold down Alt/Opt , click the handle in the lower right corner of the
last selected event, and drag to the right to create a real copy.
● Move the mouse pointer over the middle of the right event border so that it becomes a
pointing hand symbol. Click and drag to the right to create a real copy.
● Select the events, hold down Alt/Opt - Shift , and drag to the right to create a shared
copy.

NOTE

This applies to MIDI events only.

● Move the mouse pointer over the middle of the right event border so that it becomes a
pointing hand symbol, hold down Shift , click and drag to the right to create a shared
copy.

NOTE

Repeating by dragging only works if the track has a height of at least 2 rows.

RELATED LINKS
Shared Copies on page 181
Repeat Events Dialog on page 180
Setting the Track Height on page 147

Repeat Events Dialog

The Repeat Events dialog allows you to create a number of real or shared copies of the selected
events.

● To open the Repeat Events dialog, select an event, and select Edit > Functions > Repeat.

180
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

Count
Allows you to specify how many times you want the event to be repeated.

Shared Copies
Activate to create a shared copy.

RELATED LINKS
Shared Copies on page 181

Shared Copies
Shared copies are useful if you want to create copies that are automatically edited in the same
way as the original event.

You can create shared copies by using the Repeat Events dialog.

You can convert a shared copy to a real copy by selecting Edit > Functions > Convert to Real
Copy. This creates a new version of the clip that you can edit independently. The new clip is
automatically added to the Pool.

RELATED LINKS
Repeating Events on page 180
Repeat Events Dialog on page 180

Filling the Locator Range with Copies of Events

The Fill Loop function allows you to create multiple copies of a selected event or a selection
range within the locator range on the same track.

PROCEDURE
1. Select events or selection ranges in your project.
2. Select Edit > Functions > Fill Loop.

RESULT
The range between the left and right locators is filled with as many copies of the selected content
as fit into the range. The last copy is automatically cut off at the right locator position.

Filling Selection Ranges with Content from the Clipboard

You can fill selection ranges with multiple copies of events or selection ranges from the
clipboard.

PREREQUISITE
● You have copied events or selection ranges to the clipboard.

PROCEDURE
1. With the Range Selection tool, create a selection range.

181
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

2. Select Edit > Range > Fill Range from Clipboard.

RESULT
The selection range is filled with as many copies of events from the clipboard as fit into the
range. The last copy is automatically cut off at the right border of the selection range.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Selection Ranges on page 185

Moving the Content of Events without changing the Event Position

You can move the content of an event or a selection range without changing its position in the
Project window.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Hold down the tool modifier key for Slip Event Content, click an event, and drag to the
left or to the right.

NOTE

You can change the modifier key for Slip Event Content in the Select Tool category of
the Preferences dialog (Editing–Tool Modifiers page).

● Hold down the tool modifier key for Slip Range Content, click a selection range, and
drag to the left or to the right.

NOTE

You can change the modifier key for Slip Range Content in the Range Tool category of
the Preferences dialog (Editing–Tool Modifiers page).

RESULT
The content of the event is moved. If you only selected a part of an event with a selection range,
the event is split accordingly.

NOTE

● You cannot move the content of an audio event past the start or the end of the actual audio
clip. If the event plays the whole clip, you cannot move the content at all.
● To move the content of events to the left or to the right, you can set up key commands
for Slip Event Content Left and Slip Event Content Right in the Edit category of the Key
Commands dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Editing - Tool Modifiers on page 889
Setting up Tool Modifier Keys on page 869

182
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

Inverting the Phase of Audio Events

You can invert the phase of audio events in the Project window.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select one or multiple audio events.

NOTE

If you use the Range Selection tool with Range Tool Splits Partly Selected Events activated
in the Preferences dialog (Editing page), partially selected events are split.

2. Do one of the following:

● Select Audio > Invert Phase On/Off

● On the info line, click the Invert Phase field.

RESULT
The phase of the events is inverted. This is reflected on the info line.

RELATED LINKS
Info Line on page 47

Muting Events
You can mute events in the Project window. Muted events can be edited as usual, with the
exception of adjusting fades, but they cannot be played back.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Select the Mute tool, and click the events or drag a selection rectangle around them.
● Select events or create a selection range, and select Edit > Mute.

RESULT
The selected events are muted and grayed out.

If you have activated Range Tool Splits Partly Selected Events in the Preferences dialog
(Editing page), partly selected events are split.
You can unmute events by selecting them and selecting Edit > Unmute.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Editing on page 884

183
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events

Exporting MIDI Parts as MIDI Files

You can export MIDI parts as MIDI files.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select the MIDI part that you want to export.
2. Drag the MIDI part to the File Explorer/macOS Finder.

RESULT
A corresponding MIDI file is exported. The Export Options for MIDI files are taken into account.

RELATED LINKS
Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files on page 141

184
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Range Editing in the Project
Window and in the Editors

Editing is not restricted to handling whole events and parts. You can also work with selection
ranges, which can be independent from event, part, and track boundaries.

You can select only one range at a time.

Creating Selection Ranges

You can create selection ranges in the Project window, the Sample Editor, the Audio Part
Editor, the Key Editor, or the Drum Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the Range Selection tool on the Project window, Sample Editor, Audio Part Editor,
Key Editor, or Drum Editor toolbar.
2. Optional: Activate Snap, and select a Snap Type option.
This ensures that the range start and the range end snap to the set snap type option.
3. Optional: On the Project window, Sample Editor, or Audio Part Editor toolbar, activate
Snap to Zero Crossing.
This ensures that the start and the end of a selection of audio material are always at zero
crossings.
4. Do one of the following:
● To create a selection range, click at the position in the event display where you want the
range to start, and drag to the position where you want it to end.
● To create a selection range that encompasses an event, double-click the event.

NOTE

To create a selection range that encompasses multiple events, hold down Shift , and
double-click several events in a row.

● To create a selection range that encompasses the space between two events, double-
click between the events.
● To choose a selection range function from the menu, select Edit > Select.

RESULT
The selected range is highlighted in the event display, and the Range Start, Range End, and
Range Length are shown on the info line.

RELATED LINKS
Adjusting the Size of Selection Ranges on page 188
Selection Range Editing on page 186
Switching from Range Selection to other Tools on page 186

185
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

Selecting Ranges Covering Several Tracks

You can create selection ranges that cover several tracks. It is also possible to include or exclude
tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. With the Range Selection tool, select a range that covers several tracks.
2. Optional: To include or exclude tracks, press Ctrl/Cmd and select the tracks.

Switching from Range Selection to other Tools

When you create a selection range with the Range Selection tool, you can switch tools, and the
events stay selected.

PROCEDURE
1. Select a range with the Range Selection tool.
2. Select the Object Selection tool or any other tool.

RESULT
The events that are part of the selected range stay selected. This way, you can transpose or
nudge MIDI events in the MIDI editors, for example.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Selection Ranges on page 185

Selection Range Editing

You can edit selection ranges, for example by adjusting their size, splitting them, moving them,
or duplicating their contents.

General Rules
● When editing selection ranges, settings referring to snapping and quantizing are taken into
account. The snapping types Events, Cursor, and their combinations are supported.
● With the Range Selection tool selected, you can adjust the Range Start, the Range End, and
the Range Length on the info line.
● When editing selection ranges on multiple parts/tracks, Part Editing Mode is taken into
account.
● Clicking in the event display with the Range Selection tool selected defines the Range Start.
If you do not define a Range End, the selection range has a length of zero. This is indicated
on the info line and by the range selection cursor.

● After performing editing operations, selection ranges are maintained.

186
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

NOTE

In the Range Selection Cursor section of the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page), you can
customize the color of the range selection cursor, as well as its width. You can also show an
outline for the cursor.

Selection Ranges Containing Audio

● If you edit a selection range that contains audio material in the Sample Editor, the Audio
Part Editor, or the Project window, activate Snap to Zero Crossing on the corresponding
toolbar to limit editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero.

Selection Ranges Containing MIDI

● If you edit a selection range that contains MIDI notes in the Key Editor, the Drum Editor,
or the Project window, all MIDI note events that intersect at the start or the end of the
selection range are split.

NOTE

● In the Project window, notes are only split if Split MIDI Events is activated in the
Preferences dialog (Editing—MIDI page).
● To see if a note is split or not and to display the note length in the event, activate Show
Note Length On/Off on the toolbar when editing selection ranges in the Drum Editor.
● The diamond symbols do not reflect the actual note length. If you want to work with the
diamond symbols, refer to the info line for the actual start and end values of a selected
symbol.

● If you edit a selection range that intersects with a controller curve, additional controller
events are created at the range start and the range end. This ensures that the area outside
the range is not edited. The controller event editor is also available for selection ranges on
controller lanes.

NOTE

Selection ranges that contain MIDI can also contain data on controller lanes and
articulations, even if these are not shown. To extent your selection to cover all events,
including events on hidden controller lanes, activate Full Vertical in the Selection Mode
field on the info line.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Sample Editor Toolbar on page 402
Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 431
Expanding Selection Ranges Vertically (MIDI only) on page 189
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677
Drum Editor Toolbar on page 706
Drum Editor Info Line on page 713
Drum Editor Note Display on page 715
Controller Display on page 653
Controller Event Editor on page 673
Range Selection Cursor on page 890
Editing - Tools on page 890

187
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

Adjusting the Size of Selection Ranges

You can adjust the size of a selection range horizontally, that is, its start and its end. You can also
change its vertical size, which allows you to specify how many tracks or lanes it covers.

PREREQUISITE
You have created a selection range.

CHOICES
● Drag the edges of the selection range horizontally.
● Drag the edges of the selection range vertically.
● To extend/reduce the size of the selection range, hold down Shift , and click and drag
outside of the selection range.
● To create a new selection range, hold down Shift , and click and drag inside of the selection
range.
● On the info line, adjust the values for Range Start, Range End, and Range Length.
● Audio Part Editor and Project window only: On the info line, adjust the values for Top Track
or Bottom Track.
● Use the buttons Nudge Start Left, Nudge Start Right, Nudge End Left, or Nudge End
Right in the Nudge section of the corresponding toolbar.
The edges are moved by the amount specified in the Grid pop-up menu or by the amount
set in the Nudge Settings pop-up menu.
● Choose from the following key commands in the Nudge category of the Key Commands
dialog:
● Nudge Start Left: Alt/Opt - Left Arrow
● Nudge Start Right: Alt/Opt - Right Arrow
● Nudge End Left: Alt/Opt - Shift - Left Arrow
● Nudge End Right: Alt/Opt - Shift - Right Arrow
● Nudge Bottom Down (Audio Part Editor and Project window only): Alt/Opt -
Down Arrow
● Nudge Bottom Up (Audio Part Editor and Project window only): Alt/Opt - Shift -
Up Arrow
● Nudge Top Down: (Audio Part Editor and Project window only): Alt/Opt - Shift -
Down Arrow
● Nudge Top Up (Audio Part Editor and Project window only): Alt/Opt - Up Arrow

RELATED LINKS
Creating Selection Ranges on page 185
Editing - Tool Modifiers on page 889
Nudge Category on page 864
Moving Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 170
Resizing Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 175
Nudge on page 40
Lanes on page 436

188
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

Expanding Selection Ranges Vertically (MIDI only)

You can expand a selection range vertically.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the Range Selection tool on the Key Editor or the Drum Editor toolbar.
2. Do one of the following:

● To select a range that encompasses note events or controller events, click at the position
in the event display or in the controller lane where you want the range to start, and drag
horizontally, to the position where you want the range to end.
3. Do one of the following:

● To include/exclude a single controller lane, press Ctrl/Cmd and click the corresponding
controller lane.
● To expand the selection by multiple controller lanes, press Shift and click the
corresponding controller lane.
● To expand the selection to note events, press Shift and click in the event display.
● To expand the selection to all events, including events on hidden controller lanes, click
the Selection Mode field on the info line to activate the Full Vertical mode.

NOTE

You can also use the tool modifiers that are specified for the Range Tool in the
Preferences dialog (Editing > Tool Modifiers page).

RESULT
The selection range is expanded.

RELATED LINKS
Editing - Tool Modifiers on page 889
Selection Range Editing on page 186

Moving Selection Ranges

You can move selection ranges to a new position without moving their contents.

PREREQUISITE
● You have created a selection range.
● You have activated the Nudge section by right-clicking the corresponding toolbar and
activating Nudge.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Grid Type pop-up menu, and select a value to set the nudge amount.
2. Do one of the following:

● In the Nudge section of the toolbar, click Move Left, or use the corresponding key
command Ctrl/Cmd - Left Arrow .
● In the Nudge section of the toolbar, click Move Right, or use the corresponding key
command Ctrl/Cmd - Right Arrow .

189
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

RESULT
The selection range is nudged according to your settings, but the contents of the selection are
not moved.

RELATED LINKS
Selection Range Editing on page 186
Moving the Content of Selection Ranges to a New Position on page 190
Creating Selection Ranges on page 185
Duplicating Events on page 179

Moving the Content of Selection Ranges to a New Position

You can move the content of selection ranges to a new position.

PREREQUISITE
● You have created a selection range.
● If you want to move the content via nudge commands, you have set the nudge amount via
the Grid Type pop-up menu.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Click the selection range, and drag it to a new position.
● Click the Move Left or Move Right buttons on the toolbar, or use the corresponding key
commands.

RESULT
The content of the selection range are moved to the new position. If the range intersected with
any events or parts, these are split before moving, so that only the sections within the selection
range are affected.

RELATED LINKS
Nudge on page 40
Moving Selection Ranges on page 189
Creating Selection Ranges on page 185
Duplicating Events on page 179

Duplicating the Contents of Selection Ranges

You can duplicate the contents of selection ranges.

PREREQUISITE
You have created a selection range.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Click the selection range, hold down Alt/Opt , and drag.

● Select Edit > Functions > Duplicate.
● Right-click the selection range, and select Duplicate.

190
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

RESULT
The contents of the selection range are duplicated at the new position. If the range intersects
with events or parts, these are split before moving, so that only the sections within the selection
range are affected.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Selection Ranges on page 185
Selection Range Editing on page 186

Deleting the Contents of Selection Ranges

You can delete the contents of selection ranges.

PREREQUISITE
You have created a selection range.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● To delete the contents of a selection range and replace it with empty space, select Edit >
Delete, or press Backspace .
● To delete the contents of a selection range and move events that are situated at later
timeline positions to the left, to close the gap, select Edit > Range > Delete Time.

RESULT
The content of the selection range is deleted.

RELATED LINKS
Selection Range Editing on page 186

Cutting the Contents of Selection Ranges

You can cut the contents of selection ranges.

PREREQUISITE
You have created a selection range.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● To cut the contents of a selection range and replace it with empty space, select Edit >
Cut, or press Ctrl/Cmd - X .
● To cut the contents of a selection range and move events that are situated at later
timeline positions to the left, to close the gap, select Edit > Range > Cut Time.

RESULT
The cut data is saved to the clipboard.

RELATED LINKS
Selection Range Editing on page 186

191
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

Inserting Silence
You can insert silence at the start of a selection range and move events that are situated at later
timeline positions to the right, to make room for the silence.

PROCEDURE
● Select Edit > Range > Insert Silence.

RESULT
Events to the right of the selection range start are moved farther to the right, to make room for
the silence. The length of the silence corresponds to the length of the selection range.

RELATED LINKS
Selection Range Editing on page 186

Splitting Events at Selection Range Edges

You can split events or parts at the selection range edges, that is, at the start and at the end of a
selection range.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool.
2. Do one of the following:
● Select Edit > Range > Split.
● Right-click the selection range, and from the context menu select Split.
● Press Shift - X .

RESULT
The events or parts are split at the edges of the selection range.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can split partly selected events automatically when performing editing
operations by activating Range Tool Splits Partly Selected Events in the Preferences dialog
(Editing page).

RELATED LINKS
Selection Range Editing on page 186
Editing on page 884

Cropping Events to Selection Ranges

You can crop events to selection ranges, that is, remove the audio or MIDI outside the selection
range from events or parts.

PREREQUISITE
You have created a selection range.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

192
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

● Select Edit > Range > Crop.

● Right-click the selection range, and from the context menu select Crop.

RESULT
The events are cropped to the selection range. Events that are entirely inside or outside the
selection range are not affected.

RELATED LINKS
Selection Range Editing on page 186

Creating Audio Events from Selection Ranges

You can create a new audio event that exclusively contains a selection range in the Sample
Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool.
2. Select a range by clicking at the position in the waveform display where you want the range
to start, and drag to the position where you want the range to end.
3. Drag the selection range to an audio track in the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
Selection Range Editing on page 186

Creating Audio Clips from Selection Ranges

You can create a new audio clip that exclusively contains a selection range in the Sample Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool.
2. Select a range by clicking at the position in the waveform display where you want the range
to start, and drag to the position where you want the range to end.
3. Select Audio > Bounce Selection.
4. Perform one of the following actions:
● To replace the original, click Replace.
● To keep the original, click No.

TIP

To always apply the selected setting without opening the dialog again, activate Please,
don’t ask again. You can reset this with the On Bouncing/Rendering Audio option in the
Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).

RESULT
A new Sample Editor window opens with the new clip. It refers to the same audio file as the
original clip, but it only contains the audio corresponding to the selection range.

193
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors
Selection Range Editing

RELATED LINKS
Selection Range Editing on page 186
On Bouncing/Rendering Audio on page 886

194
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Playback and Transport

Cubase offers multiple methods and functions to control playback and transport.

Transport Panel
The Transport panel contains the main transport functions as well as many other options related
to playback and recording.

● To show the Transport panel, select Transport > Transport Panel or press F2 .

Transport Panel Sections

The Transport panel has different sections that you can show or hide by activating the
corresponding options in the Set up Transport Panel pane.

● To show all Transport panel sections, right-click anywhere on the Transport panel and
select Show All.

The following sections are available:

Audio Performance Meter

Audio Performance Meter

The upper bar displays either the current realtime peak or the ASIO-Guard load,
depending on which of the two has the higher value. The lower bar shows the hard
disk transfer load of the disk engine.
For a more detailed display of realtime peak and ASIO-Guard load, click to open the
Audio Performance panel.

Common Record Modes

Common Record Modes

Allow you to determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI
recording, and where to start the recording.

Audio Record Modes

Audio Record Modes

Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing audio events.

MIDI Record Modes

MIDI Record Modes

Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing MIDI parts.

195
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Panel

MIDI Auto Quantize

Automatic MIDI Record Quantize

Activates automatic quantizing during a MIDI recording.

Locators
Go to Left Locator Position

Allows you to go to the left locator position.

Left Locator Position

Shows the left locator position.

Go to Right Locator Position

Allows you to go to the right locator position.

Right Locator Position

Shows the right locator position.

Locator Range Duration

Locators to Selection

Allows you to set the locators to the selection.

Locator Range Duration

Shows the duration of the locator range.

Punch Points
Punch In

Activates Punch In.

Punch Out

Activates Punch Out.

Transport Controls
Go to Previous Marker/Zero

Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline.

Go to Next Marker/Project End

Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end.

196
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Panel

Rewind

Moves backward.

Forward

Moves forward.

Cycle

Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.

Stop

Stops playback.

Start

Starts playback.

Transport Record

Activates/Deactivates record mode.

Time Display
Select Primary Time Format

Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display.

Primary Time Display

Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format.

Markers
Jump to Marker

Allows you to set and locate marker positions.

Open Markers Window

Opens the Markers window.

Pre-roll & Post-roll

Activate Pre-roll

Activates pre-roll.

Pre-roll Amount

Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider.

197
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Panel

Activate Post-roll

Activates post-roll.

Post-roll Amount

Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the
divider.

Tempo & Time Signature

Activate Tempo Track

Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track.

Tempo

Allows you to set the tempo value.

Time Signature

Allows you to set the first time signature value. To show/hide this, click the points on
the divider.

Tap Tempo

Allows you to insert tempo changes into your project by tapping.

Tap Tempo Mode

Defines where new tempo events are inserted.

Activate External Sync

Activate External Sync

Activates external synchronization.

Open Synchronization Setup

Allows you to open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog.

Click & Count-in & Click Pattern

Activate Metronome Click

Activates the metronome click.

Activate Count-in

Activates the metronome click in count-in.

Open Metronome Setup

198
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Menu

Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider.

Input/Output Activity
MIDI In Activity

Displays the MIDI input signals.

MIDI Out Activity

Displays the MIDI output signals.

Audio Activity

Displays the audio input/output signals.

Audio Clipping

Displays audio clipping.

Level Display

Displays the output level.

Level Control

Allows you to control the output level.

RELATED LINKS
Transport on page 903
Transport - Scrub on page 904
Tap Tempo Modes on page 800

Transport Menu
The Transport menu contains several transport functions as well as many other options related
to playback and recording.

Transport Panel
Opens the Transport panel.

Transport Commands
Start
Starts playback.

Stop
Stops playback.

Start/Stop
Starts/Stops playback.

199
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Menu

Cycle
Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.

Record
Activates/Deactivates record mode.

Rewind
Moves backward.

Forward
Moves forward.

Fast Rewind
Moves backward at a faster speed.

Fast Forward
Moves forward at a faster speed.

Nudge Cursor Left

Moves the project cursor position to the left.

Nudge Cursor Right

Moves the project cursor position to the right.

Enter Project Cursor Position

Allows you to enter the project cursor position manually.

Go to Project Start
Moves the project cursor position to the start of the project.

Go to Project End
Moves the project cursor position to the end of the project.

Exchange Time Formats

Switches the primary and the secondary time display.

Start Mode
Start from Project Cursor Position
If activated, playback starts from the current project cursor position.

Start from Cycle Start

If activated, playback starts from the left locator.

Start from Selection

If activated, playback starts from the start of the current selection.

Start from Selection or Cycle Start

If activated, playback starts from the start of the current selection. If nothing is
selected, playback starts from the left locator.

Return to Start Position on Stop

If activated, the project cursor returns to its start position when playback is stopped.

Locators
Go to Left Locator Position
Moves the project cursor position to the left locator.

200
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Menu

Go to Right Locator Position

Moves the project cursor position to the right locator.

Set Left Locator to Project Cursor Position

Sets the left locator to the project cursor position.

Set Right Locator to Project Cursor Position

Sets the right locator to the project cursor position.

Enter Left Locator Position

Allows you to enter the position of the left locator manually.

Enter Right Locator Position

Allows you to enter the position of the right locator manually.

Enter Locator Range Duration

Allows you to enter the duration of the locator range manually.

Set Locators to Selection Range

Sets the locators to encompass the selection.

Exchange Left & Right Locator Positions

Switches the positions of the left and right locator.

Punch Points
Activate Punch In
Activates/Deactivates punch in.

Activate Punch Out

Activates/Deactivates punch out.

Go to Punch In Position (Left Locator)

Moves the project cursor position to the punch in position.

Go to Punch Out Position (Right Locator)

Moves the project cursor position to the punch out position.

Set Project Cursor Position

Locate Selection Start
Moves the project cursor to the beginning of the selection.

Locate Selection End

Moves the project cursor to the end of the selection.

Locate Next Marker

Moves the project cursor to the next marker.

Locate Previous Marker

Moves the project cursor to the previous marker.

Locate Next Hitpoint

Moves the project cursor to the next hitpoint on the selected track.

Locate Previous Hitpoint

Moves the project cursor to the previous hitpoint on the selected track.

Locate Next Event

Moves the project cursor to the next event on the selected track.

201
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Menu

Locate Previous Event

Moves the project cursor to the previous event on the selected track.

Play Project Range

Play from Selection Start
Activates playback from the start of the current selection.

Play from Selection End

Activates playback from the end of the current selection.

Play until Selection Start

Activates playback two seconds before the start of the current selection and stops at
the selection start.

Play until Selection End

Activates playback two seconds before the end of the current selection and stops at the
selection end.

Play until Next Marker

Activates playback from the project cursor and stops at the next marker.

Play Selection
Activates playback from the start of the current selection and stops at the selection
end.

Loop Selection
Sets the locators to encompass the current selection, and starts playback at the start of
the selection and keeps starting over again at the selection end.

Play Selection Solo

Activates playback from the start of the current selection, with the selected tracks
soloed, and stops at the selection end.

Loop Selection Solo

Sets the locators to encompass the current selection, and starts playback at the start
of the selection, with the selected tracks soloed, and keeps starting over again at the
selection end.

Pre-roll & Post-roll

Use Pre-roll
Activates/Deactivates the pre-roll.

Use Post-roll
Activates/Deactivates the post-roll.

Post-roll from Selection Start

Starts playback from the beginning of the selected range and stops after the time set
in the post-roll field on the Transport panel.

Post-roll from Selection End

Starts playback from the end of the selected range and stops after the time set in the
post-roll field on the Transport panel.

Pre-roll to Selection Start

Stops playback at the selection start. The playback start position can be specified via
the pre-roll field on the Transport panel.

202
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Menu

Pre-roll to Selection End

Stops playback at the selection end. The playback start position can be specified via the
pre-roll field on the Transport panel.

Use Tempo Track

Activates/Deactivates the tempo track.

Common Record Modes

Punch In/Out
Activates/Deactivates punch in/out.

Re-Record
Activates/Deactivates the re-record mode.

Start Recording at Project Cursor Position

Activates/Deactivates the start of the recording at the project cursor position.

Start Recording at Left Locator/Punch In Position

Activates/Deactivates the start of the recording at the left locator.

Audio Record Mode

These options allow you to select what happens when you record over existing events.

Keep History
Keeps existing events or portions of events.

Cycle History + Replace

Replaces existing events or portions of events with the new recording. In cycle mode,
all takes from the current cycle recording are kept.

Replace
Replaces existing events or portions of events with the last take.

MIDI Record Mode

These options allow you to select what happens when you record over existing parts.

New Parts
Keeps existing parts and saves the new recording as a new part.

Merge
Keeps existing events in parts and adds the newly recorded events.

Replace
Replaces existing events in parts with the new recording.

Auto Quantize in Record

Activates automatic quantizing during recording.

MIDI Cycle Record Mode

Mix
Adds everything you record to what was previously recorded.

203
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Menu

Overwrite
Overwrites any MIDI that you have recorded on previous laps as soon as you play a
MIDI note or send any MIDI message.

Keep Last
Replaces previously recorded laps only if the new lap is completed.

Auto Quantize in Record

Activates automatic quantizing during recording.

MIDI Retrospective Recording

Allows you to recover MIDI data that you play in Stop mode or during playback. The following
options are available:

Insert from All MIDI Inputs

Inserts MIDI data that was sent to all track inputs as a linear MIDI part on the selected
track.

Insert from Track Input as Linear Recording

Inserts MIDI data that was sent to the track input as a linear MIDI part on the selected
track.

Insert from Track Input as Cycle Recording

Inserts MIDI data that was sent to the track input as stacked MIDI parts on the selected
track.

Empty All Buffers

Empties the retrospective record buffer for the selected track.

Metronome Setup
Opens the Metronome Setup dialog.

Activate Metronome
Activates/Deactivates the metronome click.

Project Synchronization Setup

Opens the Project Synchronization Setup dialog.

Activate External Sync

Sets Cubase to be synchronized externally.

RELATED LINKS
Left and Right Locators on page 211
Punch In and Punch Out on page 217
Pre-Roll and Post-Roll on page 216
Common Record Modes Menu on page 230
Audio Record Modes on page 235
MIDI Record Modes on page 242
Recovery of MIDI Recordings on page 243
Metronome Click on page 218

204
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Bar

Transport Bar
The Transport Bar contains all transport functions in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project
window.

● To activate the Transport Bar, click Set up Window Layout on the Project window toolbar
and activate Transport Bar.
● To display all transport elements, right-click in an empty area of the Transport Bar and click
Show All.
● To show all controls of a section, click the points to the right of the section, and drag all the
way to the right. To hide the controls again, drag to the left.

RELATED LINKS
Transport Bar on page 48
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Transport Bar Sections

The Transport Bar panel has different sections that you can show or hide by activating the
corresponding options in the Set up Transport Bar pane.

● To activate the Transport Bar, click Set up Window Layout on the Project window toolbar
and activate Transport Bar.
● To show/hide tools, right-click an empty area of the Transport Bar, and activate the tools
that you want to display. To show all tools, click Show All.

Constrain Delay Compensation

Constrain Delay Compensation

Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation.

Common Record Modes

Common Record Modes

Allow you to determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI
recording, and where to start the recording.

Audio Record Modes

Audio Record Modes

Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing audio events.

MIDI Record Modes

MIDI Record Modes

Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing MIDI parts.

205
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Bar

MIDI Auto Quantize

Automatic MIDI Record Quantize

Activates automatic quantizing during a MIDI recording.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.

Audio Performance Meter

Audio Performance Meter

The upper bar displays either the current realtime peak or the ASIO-Guard load,
depending on which of the two has the higher value. The lower bar shows the hard
disk transfer load of the disk engine.
For a more detailed display of realtime peak and ASIO-Guard load, click to open the
Audio Performance panel.

Locators
Go to Left Locator Position

Allows you to go to the left locator position.

Left Locator Position

Shows the left locator position.

Go to Right Locator Position

Allows you to go to the right locator position.

Right Locator Position

Shows the right locator position.

Locator Range Duration

Locators to Selection

Allows you to set the locators to the selection.

Locator Range Duration

Shows the duration of the locator range.

Punch Points
Punch In

206
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Bar

Activates Punch In.

Punch Out

Activates Punch Out.

Transport Controls
Go to Previous Marker/Zero

Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline.

Go to Next Marker/Project End

Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end.

Rewind

Moves backward.

Forward

Moves forward.

Cycle

Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.

Stop

Stops playback.

Start

Starts playback.

Transport Record

Activates/Deactivates record mode.

Retrospective Record
Insert Retrospective Recording from All MIDI Inputs on Selected Track

Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback.

Time Displays
Select Primary Time Format

Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display.

Primary Time Display

207
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Bar

Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format.

Markers
Jump to Marker

Allows you to set and locate marker positions.

Open Markers Window

Opens the Markers window.

Pre-roll & Post-roll

Activate Pre-roll

Activates pre-roll.

Pre-roll Amount

Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider.

Activate Post-roll

Activates post-roll.

Post-roll Amount

Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the
divider.

Tempo & Time Signature

Activate Tempo Track

Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track.

Tempo

Allows you to set the tempo value.

Time Signature

Allows you to set the first time signature value. To show/hide this, click the points on
the divider.

Tap Tempo

Allows you to insert tempo changes into your project by tapping.

Tap Tempo Mode

Defines where new tempo events are inserted.

208
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Bar

Right Divider
Right Divider
Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.

Activate External Sync

Activate External Sync

Activates external synchronization.

Open Synchronization Setup

Allows you to open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog.

Click & Count-in & Click Pattern

Activate Metronome Click

Activates the metronome click.

Activate Count-in

Activates the metronome click in count-in.

Open Metronome Setup

Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider.

Input/Output Activity
MIDI In Activity

Displays the MIDI input signals.

MIDI Out Activity

Displays the MIDI output signals.

Audio Activity

Displays the audio input/output signals.

Audio Clipping

Displays audio clipping.

Level Display

Displays the output level.

Level Control

Allows you to control the output level.

209
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Transport Pop-Up Window

Transport Pop-Up Window

The Transport pop-up window allows you to access specific transport commands if the
Transport panel, the Transport Bar, and the Transport Controls in the Project window toolbar
are closed or hidden.

The following default key commands open the Transport Bar pop-up window:

Enter Left Locator

Shift - L

Enter Right Locator

Shift - R

Enter Project Cursor Position

Shift - P

Enter Tempo
Shift - T

Enter Time Signature

Shift - C

Enter Punch In Position

Shift - I

Enter Punch Out Position

Shift - O

Go to Left Locator
Num 1

Go to Right Locator
Num 2

A specific key command opens the corresponding section of the Transport pop-up window:

Transport pop-up window for entering the left Locator position.

NOTE

To close the Transport pop-up window, press Esc .

Time Display Window

The Time Display window allows you to view the current time position in a separate window. You
can adjust its size and specify the time format that you want to display.

● To open the Time Display window, select Studio > More Options > Time Display.

210
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Left and Right Locators

Right-click the window to access the following options:

Bars+Beats
Displays the time in bars and beats.

Seconds
Displays the time in seconds.

Fps
Displays the time in frames per second.

Samples
Displays the time in samples.

Show Beat Count Only

Shows the beat counts only. This is useful if you want to use the Time Display window
as a visual metronome.

Increase Window Size

Increases the size of the window and the displayed values.

Decrease Window Size

Decreases the size of the window and the displayed values.

NOTE

You can set up the Window Transparency in the Studio Setup dialog (Time Display page).

RELATED LINKS
Time Signature Events on page 802

Left and Right Locators

The left and right locators are a pair of markers that you can use as reference positions in the
Project window and in the editors.

Locators help you, for example, to do the following:

211
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Left and Right Locators

● Positioning the project cursor.

● Defining start and stop positions for recording.
● Defining start positions for importing or exporting events.
● Setting up a cycle range.
● Selecting, copying, creating or splitting events.

Locators are indicated by the flags in the ruler.

The area between the left and the right locator is the locator range. The locator range is
highlighted in the ruler and in the event display.

NOTE

In the event display of the MIDI editors, the locator range is only highlighted if Show Part
Borders is deactivated.

● To activate/deactivate cycle mode, click the locator range in the upper part of the ruler or
activate Activate Cycle in the transport controls.

● NOTE

If you activate cycle mode and the right locator is positioned before the left locator, the
locator range is skipped during playback.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Setting the Project Cursor on page 214
Activating Recording Manually on page 228
Activating Recording Automatically on page 228
Cycle Recording on page 229
Punch In and Punch Out on page 217
Common Record Modes Menu on page 230
Import Options for MIDI Files on page 254
Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files on page 141
Export Audio Mixdown on page 804
Setting the Locators Using Cycle Markers on page 295
Select Submenu on page 167
Audio Parts on page 163
MIDI Parts on page 164
Filling the Locator Range with Copies of Events on page 181
Splitting Events on page 177
Transport on page 903

212
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Left and Right Locators

Setting the Left Locator

Setting the left locator can be useful if you want to add a reference position in the Project
window and in the editors.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Press Ctrl/Cmd , and click in the upper part of the ruler to set the left locator to that
position.
● Adjust the Left Locator Position value.
This is available in the Locators section of the Project window toolbar, the editor
toolbars, the Transport panel, and the Transport Bar.
● Drag the left locator handle in the upper part of the ruler.
● Press Ctrl/Cmd , and, on the numeric keypad, press 1 to set the left locator to the
project cursor position.
● Press Alt/Opt , and click Go to Left Locator Position on the Transport panel.

Setting the Right Locator

Setting the right locator can be useful if you want to add a reference position in the Project
window and in the editors.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Press Alt/Opt , and click in the upper part of the ruler to set the right locator to that
position.
● Adjust the Right Locator Position value.
This is available in the Locators section of the Project window toolbar, the editor
toolbars, the Transport panel, and the Transport Bar.
● Drag the right locator handle in the upper part of the ruler.
● Press Ctrl/Cmd , and, on the numeric keypad, press 2 to set the right locator to the
project cursor position.
● Press Alt/Opt , and click Go to Right Locator Position on the Transport panel.

Setting up Locator Ranges

You can set up the locator range, that is, the area between the left and the right locator.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Click and drag in the upper part of the ruler.

● Select a range or an event, and press P to set the locators to the selection.
● Double-click a cycle marker.
● Press Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt , and click at a position in the upper part of the ruler to set
both locators to the nearest snap position.

213
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Setting the Project Cursor

RESULT
The locator range is set up and highlighted in the ruler and in the event display. Snap is taken
into account.

Moving Locator Ranges

In the ruler, you can move the locator range.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up a locator range.

PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the upper part of the ruler inside a locator range.
A hand symbol is shown.
2. Click and drag to the left or to the right to move the locator range.

Setting the Project Cursor

You can set the project cursor by clicking at a position, or you can predefine a position.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Hold down Shift - Alt/Opt , and click in the Project window event display.
● Click Go to Previous Marker/Zero or Go to Next Marker/Project End.
These are available in the Transport Controls section of the Project window toolbar, the
editor toolbars, the Transport panel, and the Transport Bar.
● Click in the lower part of the ruler.
● Select Transport > Set Project Cursor Position, and select an entry in the submenu.
● Use a key command.

NOTE

You can assign key commands for setting the project cursor location in the Transport
category of the Key Commands dialog. In addition to the default key commands, you
can set up further commands, for example, for moving the project cursor forward or
backward in fixed intervals.

RELATED LINKS
Transport Panel Sections on page 195
Ruler on page 45
Transport Menu on page 199
Transport on page 903
Transport Bar on page 205
Left and Right Locators on page 211
Key Commands on page 853

214
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Auto-Scroll Settings Menu

Auto-Scroll Settings Menu

Auto-Scroll allows you to keep the project cursor visible in the window during playback.

If you activate Auto-Scroll on the toolbar of the Project window or in one of the editors, the
following modes are available in the Select Auto-Scroll Settings pop-up menu:

Page Scroll

The project cursor moves from the left side to the right side of the window. When
the project cursor reaches the right side of the window, the ruler and the project
cursor jump to the left side of the window and start over again. This behavior can be
compared to turning a page of a book.

Stationary Cursor

The project cursor is kept in the middle of the window, and the ruler scrolls
continuously to the left.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing

If you do not want the Project window display to change when editing during playback, activate
Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing.

Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing is available as an option in the Select Auto-Scroll Settings
pop-up menu to the right of the Auto-Scroll button.

If this option is activated, auto-scrolling is suspended as soon as you click anywhere in the event
display during playback, until playback stops or until you click Auto-Scroll again.

As a visual feedback, the Auto-Scroll button changes its color.

Time Formats
You can set up different time formats.

Selecting the Primary Time Format

On the Transport panel, you can select the primary time format. This is the global time format
that is used for all rulers and position displays in the program, except for the ruler tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. In the main transport section on the Transport panel, click Select Primary Time Format.
2. Select a time format from the pop-up menu.

215
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Pre-Roll and Post-Roll

RESULT
The time format on the Transport panel and all rulers and position displays are updated.

NOTE

You can also select Project > Project Setup. In the Project Time Displays section, open the Time
Format pop-up menu to select the primary time format.

RELATED LINKS
Project Setup Dialog on page 90

Independent Time Displays

You can show time displays that are independent from the global time format.

To select an independent time display, do one of the following:

● In the ruler of the Project window or any editor, click the arrow button to the right of the
ruler.
● Select Project > Add Track > Ruler to add a ruler track, and right-click the ruler.
● In the Main Transport section of the Transport panel, click Select Secondary Time Format.

RELATED LINKS
Ruler on page 45
Ruler Track on page 110

Pre-Roll and Post-Roll

You can activate pre-roll and post-roll with the corresponding buttons in the Pre-roll & Post-
roll section on the Transport panel or by selecting Transport > Pre-roll & Post-roll > Use
Pre-roll/Use Post-roll.

NOTE

To show the Pre-roll & Post-roll section, right-click anywhere in the Transport panel or in the
Transport Bar and activate Pre-roll & Post-roll.

● By setting a pre-roll value, you instruct Cubase to roll back a short section whenever
playback is activated.

● By setting a post-roll value, you instruct Cubase to play back a short section after automatic
punch out before stopping.

216
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Punch In and Punch Out

NOTE

This only works if Punch Out is activated on the Transport panel, and if Stop after
Automatic Punch Out is activated in the Preferences dialog (Record page).

Using Pre-Roll and Post-Roll

You can set up a pre-roll and a post-roll value for recording.

PREREQUISITE

PROCEDURE
1. Set the locators to where you want to start and end recording.
2. On the Transport panel or in the Transport Bar, activate Punch In and Punch Out.
3. In the Preferences dialog, select Record.
4. Activate Stop after Automatic Punch Out.
5. Right-click anywhere on the Transport panel or in the Transport Bar and activate Pre-roll &
Post-roll.
6. In the Pre-roll & Post-roll section, activate Pre-roll and Post-roll .

7. In the Pre-roll Amount and Post-roll Amount fields, enter the pre-roll and post-roll values.
8. Activate Record.

RESULT
The project cursor rolls back by the specified pre-roll value, and playback starts. When the cursor
reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated. When the cursor reaches the right
locator, recording is deactivated, but playback continues for the specified post-roll value before
stopping.

Punch In and Punch Out

The punch in and the punch out points are a pair of markers that you can use for punch in
and punch out of recordings. The punch in position determines the record start position and the
punch out position determines the record stop position.

You can activate punch in and punch out by activating the corresponding buttons on the
Transport panel.

The punch in position is locked to the left locator position and the punch out position to the right
locator position.

RELATED LINKS
Activating Recording Automatically on page 228
Stopping Recording Automatically with Punch Out on page 229

217
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Metronome Click

Metronome Click
You can use the metronome click as a timing reference for playing along and recording. The two
parameters that govern the timing of the metronome are project tempo and the time signature.

● To activate the metronome click, activate Activate Metronome Click on the Transport
panel.
You can also select Transport > Activate Metronome or use the corresponding key
command.
● To define if the metronome click is played during playback, recording or count-in, select
Transport > Metronome Setup, and make your changes on the General tab.
● To set up the sounds for the metronome click, select Transport > Metronome Setup, and
make your changes on the Click Sounds tab.

RELATED LINKS
Transport Panel Sections on page 195
Project Tempo Modes on page 793

Metronome Setup Dialog

The Metronome Setup dialog allows you to make settings for the metronome.

To open the Metronome Setup dialog, do one of the following:

● Select Transport > Metronome Setup.

● In the Transport Bar, open the Click & Count-In section, and click Open Metronome Setup.

218
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Metronome Click

RELATED LINKS
General Tab on page 219
Click Sounds Tab on page 220
Transport Bar Sections on page 205

General Tab
The General tab allows you to make basic metronome settings.

In the topmost section, the following options are available:

Activate Metronome Click

Activates/Deactivates the metronome click.

In the Click Destinations section, the following options are available:

Use MIDI Click

Activates a MIDI click for the metronome.

Use Audio Click

Activates an audio click for the metronome that is output via the audio hardware.

In the Click Options section, the following options are available:

Click while Recording

Activates the metronome click during recording.

Click while Playing

Activates the metronome click during playback.

Click during Count-In

Activates a musical count-in that is played when you start recording from stop mode.

219
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Metronome Click

In the Count-In section, the following options are available:

● Number of Bars in Count-In

Allows you to set the number of bars that the metronome counts in before
recording starts.
● Time Signature at Record Start Position
Activate this to let the count-in automatically use the time signature and tempo set
at the position where recording starts.
● Time Signature at Project Position
Activate this to let the count-in use the time signature at the project position.
● Use Custom Time Signature
Allows you to set a time signature for the count-in. In this mode, signature
changes in the project do not affect the count-in.

Click Sounds Tab

The Click Sounds tab allows you to set up and audition the MIDI click and the audio click. You
can use the default audio or MIDI click, choose from a list of factory preset sounds, or assign
your own custom sounds.

The MIDI Click Settings section allows you to set up the MIDI click that sounds if you activate
Use MIDI Click in the Click Destinations section on the General tab.

MIDI Output Port

Allows you to select a MIDI output port for the MIDI click. You can also select a VST
instrument previously set up in the VST Instruments window.

MIDI Output Channel

Allows you to select a MIDI output channel for the MIDI click.

220
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Metronome Click

Note
Allows you to set the MIDI note number, that is, the pitch from C-2 to G8. Set the note
number for the first beat in a bar in the top row, and the note numbers for the other
beats in the rows below.

Velocity
Allows you to set the velocity of the MIDI click sound. Set the velocity for the first beat
in a bar in the top row and the velocities for the other beats in the rows below.

The Audio Click Settings section allows you to set up the audio click that sounds if you activate
Use Audio Click in the Click Destinations section on the General tab.

Use Steinberg Click Sound

Activates the default sounds for the metronome click.

Pitch
Allows you to set the pitch for the default sounds. Set the pitch for the first beat in a
bar in the top row and the pitches for the other beats in the rows below.

Level
Allows you to set the level for the default sounds. Set the level for the first beat in a bar
in the top row and the levels for the other beats in the rows below.

Use Custom Sounds

Activates custom sounds for the metronome click. For this to work, you must select an
audio file for the custom sounds by clicking in the Sound column.

Sound
Allows you to select an audio file for the custom sounds. Select an audio file for the first
beat in a bar in the top row and the audio files for the other beats in the rows below.

Level
Allows you to set the level for the custom sounds. Set the level for the first beat in a bar
in the top row and the levels for the other beats in the rows below.

Audio Click Level

Allows you to adjust the level of the audio click.

Click Sound Presets

Allows you to load one of the click sound presets that supports up to 4 accents.
Amongst other click sounds that are suited for a broad range of applications, you can
also select Steinberg Click Sound, the default click sound of Cubase.
You can also create your own presets and save them.

Audition Click Sounds

Click Start to audition the activated click sounds.

Setting up a Custom Audio Click Sound

If you do not want to use the default click sound, you can set up your own custom sound.

PREREQUISITE
In the Metronome Setup dialog on the General tab, Activate Metronome Click is activated. In
the Click Destinations section, Use Audio Click is activated, and an audio output selected in the
Audio Click Outputs pop-up menu.

221
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Chase

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Click Sounds tab, and in the Audio Click Settings section, activate Use Custom
Sounds.
2. In the Sound column, click the top row.
3. In the file dialog, navigate to the audio file that you want to use as a custom sound for the
first beat and select it.
4. Click Open.
5. Click the other rows to select audio files for the other beats.
6. Set the level of the sounds by clicking the respective rows in the Level column and adjusting
the value.
7. Optional: Click Start to audition the custom sounds.

RESULT
The metronome uses the defined custom sounds for the audio click.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Open the Click Sound Presets pop-up menu, and save your custom sounds as a preset.

Chase
Chase is a function that makes sure your MIDI instruments sound as they should when you
locate to a new position and start playback. This is accomplished by the program transmitting
a number of MIDI messages to your instruments each time that you move to a new position in
the project, making sure all MIDI devices are set up correctly with regard to program change,
controller messages (such as MIDI volume), etc.

EXAMPLE
You have a MIDI track with a program change event inserted at the beginning. This event makes
a synth switch to a piano sound.
At the beginning of the first chorus, you have another program change event, which makes the
same synth switch to a string sound.
You now play back the song. It begins with the piano sound and then switches to the string
sound. In the middle of the chorus, you stop and rewind to some point between the beginning
and the second program change. The synth now still plays the string sound, although, in this
section, it should really be a piano.
The Chase function takes care of that. If program change events are set to be chased, Cubase
tracks the music back to the beginning, finds the first program change, and transmits it to your
synth, setting it to the correct sound.

The same can apply to other event types as well. In the Preferences dialog (MIDI page), the
Chase Events settings determine which event types are chased when you locate to a new
position and start playback.

222
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Playback and Transport
Chase

RELATED LINKS
Chase Events on page 897

223
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 On-Screen Keyboard

The On-Screen Keyboard window allows you to play and record MIDI notes by using your
computer keyboard or mouse. This is useful if you have no external MIDI instrument at hand and
you do not want to draw in notes with the Draw tool.

When the On-Screen Keyboard window is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked
because they are reserved for the on-screen keyboard. The only exceptions are:

● Save: Ctrl/Cmd - S
● Start/Stop Record: Num *
● Start/Stop Playback: Space
● Jump to Left Locator: Num 1
● Delete: Delete or Backspace
● Cycle on/off: Num /
● Show/Hide Transport panel: F2
● Show/Hide On-Screen Keyboard: Alt/Opt - K

RELATED LINKS
Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard on page 224
On-Screen Keyboard Window on page 225

Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard

You can use the On-Screen Keyboard window to record MIDI in Cubase.

PREREQUISITE
You have selected a MIDI or instrument track and activated Record Enable.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > On-Screen Keyboard.

NOTE

You can adjust the size of the On-Screen Keyboard window by dragging its edges.

2. On the Transport panel, activate Record.

3. Perform one of the following actions to enter notes:

● Click on the keys of the On-Screen Keyboard window.

● Press the corresponding key on your computer keyboard.

NOTE

Press several keys simultaneously to enter polyphonic parts. The maximum number of notes
that can be played at one time varies between the different operating systems and hardware
configurations.

224
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
On-Screen Keyboard
On-Screen Keyboard Window

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Close the On-Screen Keyboard window to make all key commands available again.

RELATED LINKS
On-Screen Keyboard Window on page 225

On-Screen Keyboard Window

The On-Screen Keyboard window offers two different display modes. It also allows you to
pitchbend and modulate played notes, and to adjust the velocity level.

● To open the On-Screen Keyboard window, select Studio > On-Screen Keyboard.

On-Screen Keyboard in computer keyboard mode

On-Screen Keyboard in piano keyboard mode

1 Pitchbend/Modulation indicators
The left indicator shows pitchbend, the right indicator shows modulation changes. To
introduce pitchbend, click on a key and drag left or right. To introduce modulation, drag
upwards or downwards.
2 Octave Offset
This slider allows you to switch the keyboard range to a lower or higher octave. You have
seven full octaves at your disposal.
3 Note Velocity Level
This slider allows you to adjust the velocity level of the notes played.
4 Change On-Screen Keyboard Type
This button allows you to switch between computer keyboard and piano keyboard display
mode.
In computer keyboard mode, you can use the two rows of keys that are displayed on the
On-Screen Keyboard window to enter notes.
The piano keyboard has a wider range of keys. It allows you to enter notes in more than one
voice simultaneously.

225
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
On-Screen Keyboard
On-Screen Keyboard Window

RELATED LINKS
Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard on page 224

226
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Recording

In Cubase, you can record audio and MIDI.

Make the following initial preparations:

● Set up, connect, and calibrate your audio hardware.

● Open a project and set up the parameters in the Project Setup dialog according to your
specifications.
The parameters in the Project Setup dialog determine the record file format, sample rate,
project duration, etc. that affect the audio recordings that you make during the course of the
project.
● If you plan to record MIDI, set up and connect your MIDI equipment.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Audio on page 14
Setting up MIDI on page 23

Basic Recording Methods

The basic recording methods apply to audio and MIDI recordings.

Record Enabling Tracks

To be able to record, you must record-enable the tracks on which you want to record.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Activate Record Enable in the track list.
● Activate Record Enable in the MixConsole.
● Select the track that you want to record-enable, and activate Record Enable in the
Inspector.

RESULT
The tracks are record-enabled.

NOTE

If you set up a key command for Activate Record Enable for all Audio Tracks in the Mixer
category of the Key Commands dialog, you can record-enable all audio tracks simultaneously.
The exact number of audio tracks that you can record simultaneously depends on your computer
CPU and hard disk performance. Activate the Warn on Processing Overloads option in the
Preferences dialog (VST page) to show a warning message as soon as the Processing Overload
indicator lights up during recording.

RELATED LINKS
Editing - Project & MixConsole on page 888

227
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Basic Recording Methods

VST on page 906

Record Enabling Tracks on Selection

You can set up a preference so that tracks are record-enabled when you select them.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Preferences.
2. Open the Editing—Project & MixConsole page and activate Enable Record on Selected
Audio Track or Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track.

RESULT
The tracks are record-enabled when you select them.

Activating Recording Manually

You can activate recording manually.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Click Record on the Transport panel, on the toolbar, or in the Transport Bar.
● Press Num * .

RESULT
Recording starts from the current cursor position.

NOTE

When you start recording in stop mode, you can start recording from the left locator. For this to
work, you must select Transport > Common Record Modes and activate Start Record at Left
Locator/Punch In Position. The metronome count-in will be applied.

Activating Recording Automatically

Cubase can automatically switch from playback to recording at a given position. This is useful if
you must replace a section of a recording and want to listen to what is already recorded up to the
recording start position.

PROCEDURE
1. Set the left locator to the position where you want to start recording.
2. Activate Punch In on the Transport panel.
3. Activate playback from any position before the left locator.

RESULT
When the project cursor reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated.

RELATED LINKS
Punch In and Punch Out on page 217

228
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Basic Recording Methods

Stopping Recording
You can stop recording manually.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Click Stop on the Transport panel.

● Press Num * .

RESULT
Recording stops while playback continues.

Stopping Recording Automatically with Punch Out

Activating Punch Out allows you to stop recording automatically at the defined punch out
position.

PROCEDURE
● Activate Punch Out on the Transport panel.

RESULT
Recording stops automatically when the project cursor reaches the punch out position. Playback
continues.

RELATED LINKS
Punch In and Punch Out on page 217

Stopping Recording and Playback

You can manually stop recording and playback.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Click Stop on the Transport panel.
● Press Num 0 .

RESULT
Recording and playback stops.

Cycle Recording
You can record in a cycle, that is, you can record a selected section repeatedly and seamlessly.

PREREQUISITE
A cycle is set up with the left and right locators.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Activate Cycle on the Transport panel to activate cycle mode.
2. Activate recording from the left locator, before or within the cycle.

229
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Basic Recording Methods

As soon as the project cursor reaches the right locator, it jumps back to the left locator and
continues recording a new lap.

RESULT
The results of cycle recording depend on the selected record mode. They also differ for audio and
MIDI.

RELATED LINKS
Left and Right Locators on page 211
MIDI Recording on page 240
Audio Recording on page 235

Common Record Modes Menu

The Common Record Modes determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or
MIDI recording.

● To access the record modes, select Transport > Common Record Modes.
You can also access the Common Record Modes by clicking the upper part of the Record
Modes section on the Transport panel.

Punch In/Out
In this mode, the recording is stopped.

Re-Record
In this mode, the recording is reinitiated, the events are removed, and recording is
restarted from the exact same position.

Start Recording at Project Cursor Position

In this mode, recording starts at the cursor position.

Start Recording at Left Locator/Punch In Position

In this mode, recording starts at the left locator position, or at the punch in position if
Punch In is activated.

Start Recording at Selection

In this mode, recording starts at the selection start position.

RELATED LINKS
Transport Menu on page 199
Transport Panel Sections on page 195

Re-Recording
If you activate the Re-Record mode, you can reinitiate your recording by hitting the Record
button again. Recording will restart from the initial position.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Transport > Common Record Modes, and activate Re-Record.
2. Activate recording.
3. Click Record again to restart recording.

RESULT
The project cursor jumps back to the record start position, and recording is reinitiated.

230
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Monitoring

NOTE

The previous recordings are removed from the project and cannot be retrieved using Undo.
However, they remain in the Pool.

Monitoring
In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while preparing to record or while
recording.

The following ways of monitoring are available:

● Via Cubase.
● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase.
● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring.
This is a combination of both other methods.

Monitoring via Cubase

If you use monitoring via Cubase, the input signal is mixed with the audio playback. This requires
an audio hardware configuration with a low latency value.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, activate Monitor.

2. In the MixConsole, adjust the monitoring level and the panning.

You can add effects and EQ to the monitor signal using the channel of the track. If you are
using plug-in effects with large inherent delays, the automatic delay compensation function
in Cubase will increase the latency. If this is a problem, you can use the Constrain Delay
Compensation function while recording.
3. In the Preferences dialog, select VST.
4. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu, and select a monitoring mode.

RESULT
The monitored signal will be delayed according to the latency value, which depends on your
audio hardware and drivers. You can check the latency of your hardware in the Studio Setup
dialog (Audio System page).

RELATED LINKS
VST on page 906
Constrain Delay Compensation on page 548

External Monitoring
External monitoring means listening to the input signal before it is sent into Cubase. It requires
an external mixer for mixing the audio playback with the input signal. The latency value of
the audio hardware configuration does not affect the monitor signal. When using external

231
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Monitoring

monitoring, you cannot control the level of the monitor signal from within Cubase or add VST
effects or EQ to the monitor signal.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select VST.
2. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu and select Manual.
3. Deactivate Monitor in Cubase.
4. On your mixing desk or mixer application for your audio hardware, activate the Thru or
Direct Thru mode to send the input audio back out again.

ASIO Direct Monitoring

If your audio hardware is ASIO 2.0 compatible, it may support ASIO Direct Monitoring. This
feature may also be available for audio hardware with macOS drivers. In ASIO Direct Monitoring
mode, the monitoring is done in the audio hardware, and monitoring is controlled via Cubase.
The latency value of the audio hardware configuration does not affect the monitor signal when
using ASIO Direct Monitoring.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, activate Monitor.

2. Select Studio > Studio Setup.

3. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver, and activate Direct Monitoring.
If the checkbox is grayed out, your audio hardware (or its driver) does not support ASIO
Direct Monitoring. Consult the audio hardware manufacturer for details.
4. In the Preferences dialog, select VST.
5. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu, and select a monitoring mode.
6. In the MixConsole, adjust the monitoring level and panning.
Depending on the audio hardware, this might not be possible.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

You can monitor the input levels of audio tracks, that is, you can map the input bus metering to
monitor-enabled audio tracks and watch the input levels of your audio tracks when working in
the Project window.

● Activate Map Input Bus Metering to Audio Track (in Direct Monitoring) in the
Preferences dialog (Metering page).
As the tracks are mirroring the input bus signal, you will see the same signal in both places.
When using mapped metering, any functions that you apply to the audio track are not
reflected in its meters.

RELATED LINKS
VST on page 906

232
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Audio Recording Specifics

Monitoring MIDI Tracks

You can monitor everything you play and record through the MIDI output and channel that are
selected for the MIDI track.

PREREQUISITE
Local Off is activated on your MIDI instrument.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select MIDI.
2. Make sure MIDI Thru Active is activated.
3. In the track list, activate Monitor.

RESULT
Incoming MIDI is echoed back out again.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI on page 896

Audio Recording Specifics

Specific preparations and settings are required for audio recording.

Audio Recording Preparations

Before you can record audio, you must make some preparations.

Selecting a Record File Format

You can set up the record file format, that is, the sample rate, bit depth, and the record file type
for new audio files.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Project Setup.
2. Set up the settings for Sample Rate, Bit Depth, and Record File Type.

IMPORTANT

The bit depth and the file type can be changed at any time, while the sample rate of a project
cannot be changed at a later stage.

RELATED LINKS
Creating New Projects on page 84

233
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Audio Recording Specifics

Setting the Audio Record Folder

Each Cubase project has a project folder containing an Audio folder. By default, this is where
recorded audio files are stored. However, if needed, you can select record folders independently
for each audio track.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select all tracks to which you want to assign the same record folder.
2. Right-click one of the tracks to open the context menu.
3. Select Set Record Folder.
4. In the file dialog, navigate to the folder that you want to use as the record folder or create a
new folder by clicking New Folder.
If you want separate folders for different types of material (speech, ambient sounds, music,
etc.), you can create subfolders within the project Audio folder and assign different tracks
to different subfolders. This way, all audio files still reside within the project folder, which
makes managing the project easier.

Getting the Track Ready for Recording

Before you can record audio, you must add a track and set it up.

Adding a Track and Setting the Channel Configuration

To record audio, you must add an audio track and set up its channel configuration. The channel
configuration of the track determines the channel configuration of the recorded audio file.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Click Audio.
3. In the Count value field, select the number of tracks that you want to add.
4. Open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel configuration.
5. Optional: In the Name field, enter a track name.
6. Click Add Track.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Audio on page 100

RAM Requirements for Recording

Each track on which you record requires a certain amount of RAM, and the memory usage
increases, the longer the recording lasts. For each audio channel, 2.4 MB of RAM are required
for MixConsole settings, etc. The memory usage increases with the length of the recording, the
sample rate, and the number of tracks you record. Consider the RAM limitation of your operating
system when setting up your project for recording.

234
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Audio Recording Specifics

Selecting an Input Bus for the Track

Before you can record on your track, you must add and set up the required input busses and
specify from which input bus the track records.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for the audio track, open the Routing section.
2. Open the Input Routing pop-up menu.

3. Select an input bus.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Input and Output Ports on page 22
Audio Bus Setup on page 22
Basics Section for Audio Tracks on page 119

Audio Recording
To record audio, use any of the basic recording methods.

When you finish recording, an audio file is created in the Audio folder within the project folder.
In the Pool, an audio clip is created for the audio file, and an audio event that plays the whole clip
appears on the recording track. Finally, a waveform image is calculated for the audio event. If the
recording was very long, this may take a while.

NOTE

The waveform image is calculated and displayed during the actual recording process. This real-
time calculation uses some processing power. If your processor is slow or if you are working
on a CPU-intensive project, deactivate Create Audio Images during Record in the Preferences
dialog (Record—Audio page).

RELATED LINKS
Basic Recording Methods on page 227
Cycle Recording on page 229

Audio Record Modes

By selecting an Audio Record Mode, you decide what happens to your recording and to any
existing events on the track where you are recording. This is necessary because the tracks you

235
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Audio Recording Specifics

record on are not necessarily empty. There may be situations where you record over existing
events, especially in cycle mode.

● To access the record modes, select Transport > Audio Record Mode.
You can also access the Audio Record Modes by clicking to the right of the audio symbol in
the Record Modes section on the Transport panel.

Keep History
Existing events or portions of events that overlap with a new recording are kept.

Cycle History + Replace

Existing events or portions of events that overlap with a new recording are replaced
by the new recording. However, if you record in cycle mode, all takes from the current
cycle recording are kept.

Replace
Existing events or portions of events that overlap with a new recording are replaced by
the last recorded take.

RELATED LINKS
Transport Menu on page 199
Transport Panel Sections on page 195

Recording and Effects

Cubase allows you to add effects and/or EQ while recording. This is done by adding insert effects
and/or making EQ settings for the input channel in the MixConsole.

IMPORTANT

If you record with effects, the effects become part of the audio file itself. You cannot change the
effect settings after recording.

When you record with effects, consider using 32-bit float or 64-bit float format. This way, the bit
depth is not reduced, which means there is no risk of clipping at this stage. Also, this preserves
the signal quality perfectly. If you record in 16-bit or 24-bit format, the available headroom is
lower, which means clipping can occur if the signal is too loud.

Undoing Recordings
You can undo a recording immediately after recording it.

PROCEDURE
● Select Edit > Undo.

RESULT
● The events that you just recorded are deleted from the Project window.
● The audio clips in the Pool are moved to the trash folder.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To remove the recorded audio files from the hard disk, select Media > Open Pool Window,
right-click the Trash icon and select Empty Trash.

236
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Audio Recording Specifics

RELATED LINKS
Pool Window on page 468

Recovery of Audio Recordings

Cubase allows you to recover audio recordings.

You can recover audio recordings in two situations:

● You hit Record too late.

For this to work, you must specify an audio pre-record time.
● The system failed during recording.

Specifying an Audio Pre-Record Time

You can capture up to 1 minute of any incoming audio that you play in stop mode or during
playback. This is possible because Cubase can capture audio input in buffer memory, even when
not recording.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select Record > Audio.
2. Specify a time (up to 60 seconds) in the Audio Pre-Record Seconds field.
This activates the buffering of audio input, making pre-recording possible.
3. Make sure that the audio track is record-enabled and receives audio from the signal source.
4. When you have played some audio material that you want to capture (either in stop mode or
during playback), click Record.
5. Stop the recording after a few seconds.
This creates an audio event that starts where the cursor position was when you activated
recording. If you were in stop mode, and the cursor was at the beginning of the project, you
may have to move the event to the right in the next step. If you were playing along to a
project, you can leave the event where it is.
6. Select the Object Selection tool.
7. Place the cursor on the bottom left edge of the event, so that a double arrow appears. Then
click and drag to the left.

RESULT
The event is now extended, and the audio that you played before activating the recording is
inserted. This means that if you played along during playback, the captured notes end up exactly
where you played them in relation to the project.

RELATED LINKS
Record - Audio on page 902

Recovery of Audio Recordings after System Failure

Cubase allows you to recover audio recordings after a system failure.

When you experience a computer crash during a recording, relaunch the system, and check the
project record folder. By default, this is the Audio subfolder inside the project folder. It should
contain the audio file that you recorded, from the moment when you started recording to the
time when your computer crashed.

237
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics

NOTE

● This feature does not constitute an overall guarantee by Steinberg. While the program itself
is capable of recovering audio recordings after a system failure, it is always possible that a
computer crash, power cut, etc. might have damaged another component of the computer,
making it impossible to save or recover any of the data.
● Do not try to actively bring about this kind of situation to test this feature. Although the
internal program processes are designed to cope with such situations, Steinberg cannot
guarantee that other parts of the computer are not damaged as a consequence.

MIDI Recording Specifics

Specific preparations and settings are required for MIDI recordings.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Recording Specifics on page 238
Recording in MIDI Editors on page 240
MIDI Record Modes on page 242

MIDI Recording Preparations

The preparations described in the following sections mainly focus on external MIDI devices.

MIDI Instruments and Channels

Most MIDI synthesizers can play several sounds simultaneously, each on a different MIDI
channel. This allows you to play back several sounds (bass, piano, etc.) from the same
instrument.

Some devices, such as General MIDI compatible sound modules, always receive on all 16
MIDI channels. If you have such an instrument, you do not have to adjust any settings in the
instrument.

On other instruments, use the front panel controls to specify the number of parts, timbres, and
the like, so that they all receive on one MIDI channel.

For more information, refer to the manual that came with your instrument.

Naming MIDI Ports

MIDI inputs and outputs are often displayed with long and complicated names. In Cubase, you
can rename your MIDI ports to more descriptive names.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup.
The available MIDI inputs and outputs are listed. On Windows, the device to choose depends
on your system.
3. Click in the Show As column, and type in a new name.
4. Click OK.

238
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics

RESULT
The new port names appear on the Input Routing on the Output Routing pop-up menus.

Setting the MIDI Input

In the Inspector, set the MIDI input for the track.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a MIDI input.
2. In the topmost Inspector section, open the Input Routing pop-up menu, and select an
input.
The available inputs depend on the type of MIDI interface that you use. If you hold down
Shift - Alt/Opt , the selected MIDI input is used for all selected MIDI tracks.

NOTE

If you select All MIDI Inputs, the track receives MIDI data from all available MIDI inputs.

Setting the MIDI Channel and Output

The MIDI channel and the output settings determine where the recorded MIDI is routed during
playback. They are also relevant for monitoring MIDI in Cubase. You can select the channel and
the output from the track list or in the Inspector.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a MIDI channel and an output.
2. In the topmost Inspector section, open the Output Routing pop-up menu and select an
output.
The available outputs depend on the type of MIDI interface that you use. If you hold down
Shift - Alt/Opt , the selected MIDI output is used for all selected MIDI tracks.
3. Open the Output Group and Channel pop-up menu, and select a MIDI channel.

NOTE

If you select Any as the Output Group and Channel, the MIDI material is routed to the
channels that are used by your MIDI instrument.

Selecting a Sound
You can select sounds from within Cubase by instructing the program to send Program Change
and Bank Select messages to your MIDI device.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a sound.
2. In the Routing section of the Inspector, open the Program Selector pop-up menu, and
select a program.
Program Change messages give you access to 128 different program locations.
3. If your MIDI instruments have more than 128 programs, you can open the Bank Selector
pop-up menu and select different banks, each containing 128 programs.

239
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics

NOTE

Bank Select messages are recognized differently by different MIDI instruments. The
structure and the numbering of banks and programs may also vary. Refer to the
documentation of your MIDI instruments for details.

RELATED LINKS
Basics Section for MIDI Tracks on page 123

Recording in MIDI Editors

You can record MIDI data into the MIDI part that is opened in a MIDI editor.

PREREQUISITE
You have selected Merge or Replace as the MIDI Record Mode.

PROCEDURE
1. Click in the MIDI editor so that it gets the focus.
2. In the MIDI editor toolbar, activate Record in Editor.
3. Click Record on the Transport panel.
You can also trigger the Record function via remote devices or via the corresponding key
command.

RESULT
The MIDI data is recorded into the MIDI part that is open in the MIDI editor. If you record outside
the part borders, the part is automatically enlarged.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677

MIDI Recording
To record MIDI, use any of the basic recording methods.

When you finish recording, a part that contains MIDI events is created in the Project window.

NOTE

If you perform a live recording on a VST instrument, you usually compensate the latency of the
audio card by starting to play earlier. As a consequence, the timestamps are recorded too early.
If you activate ASIO Latency Compensation on the track list, all recorded events are moved by
the current latency setting.

The following preferences affect MIDI recording:

● Length Adjustment
● Snap MIDI Parts to Bars
● MIDI Record Catch Range in ms
● ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default

You can find them in the Preferences dialog on the MIDI and on the Record—MIDI page.

240
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics

RELATED LINKS
Basic Recording Methods on page 227
MIDI on page 896
Record - MIDI on page 902

Types of MIDI Messages

You can record different types of MIDI messages.

● To specify which event types are recorded, deactivate the options for the type of MIDI
message that you want to record in the Preferences dialog (MIDI—MIDI Filter page).

RELATED LINKS
MIDI - MIDI Filter on page 900

Note Messages
Cubase records note-on, note-off, and MIDI channel messages.

If you press and release a key on your synthesizer or on another MIDI keyboard, the following
messages are recorded:

● Note-on (key down)

● Note-off (key up)
● MIDI channel

NOTE

Normally, the MIDI channel information is overridden by the MIDI channel setting for the track.
However, if you set the track Any as the MIDI channel, the notes is played back on their original
channels.

Continuous Messages
Pitchbend, aftertouch, and controllers, such as modulation wheel, sustain pedal, volume, etc.
are considered continuous MIDI events, as opposed to the momentary key down and key up
messages.

You can record continuous messages with or separate from the notes, that is, afterwards or
before.

You can record continuous messages on their own tracks, separately from the notes to which
they belong. As long as you set the two tracks to the same output and MIDI channel, the MIDI
instrument identifies them as two simultaneously created recordings.

Program Change Messages

When you switch from one program to another on your synthesizer or on another MIDI
keyboard, a number corresponding to that program is sent out as a Program Change Message
via MIDI.

You can record Program Change Messages with or separate from the notes, that is, afterwards or
before.

You can record Program Change Messages on their own tracks, separately from the notes to
which they belong. As long as you set the two tracks to the same output and MIDI channel, the
MIDI instrument identifies them as two simultaneously created recordings.

241
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics

System Exclusive Messages

SysEx (System Exclusive) messages are special types of MIDI messages that are used to send
data that only makes sense to a unit of a certain make and type.

SysEx can be used to transmit a list of the numbers that make up the settings of one or more
sounds in a synth.

Reset Function
The Reset function sends out note-off messages and resets controllers on all MIDI channels. This
is sometimes necessary if you experience hanging notes, constant vibrato, etc. when punching in
and out on MIDI recordings with pitchbend or controller data.

● To perform a manual MIDI reset, select MIDI > Reset.

● If you want Cubase to perform a MIDI reset on stop, activate Reset on Stop in the
Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
● If you want Cubase to insert a reset event at the end of a recorded part, activate Insert
Reset Events after Record in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
This resets controller data such as sustain, aftertouch, pitchbend, modulation, and breath
control. This is useful if a MIDI part is recorded and the sustain pedal is still held after
stopping the recording. Usually, this would cause all following parts to be played with
sustain, as the pedal off command was not recorded.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI on page 896

MIDI Record Modes

By selecting a MIDI Record Mode, you decide what happens to any existing parts on the track
where you are recording. MIDI tracks can play back all events in overlapping parts. If you record
several parts in the same locations or move parts so that they overlap, you will hear the events in
all parts.

NOTE

If you activate Record in Editor to record MIDI data in the editor, all new recordings are merged
into the active part, and the MIDI Record Modes do not apply.

● To access the record modes, select Transport > MIDI Record Mode.
You can also access the MIDI Record Modes by clicking to the right of the MIDI symbol in
the MIDI Recording Modes section on the Transport panel.

MIDI Record Mode

New Parts
Existing parts that overlap with a new recording are kept. The new recording is saved
as a new part.

Merge
Existing events in parts that overlap with a new recording are kept. The newly recorded
events are added to the existing part.

Replace
Existing events in parts that overlap with a new recording are replaced.

242
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics

MIDI Cycle Record Mode

When you record MIDI in cycle mode, the result not only depends on the MIDI record mode, but
also on the cycle record mode that is selected in the Cycled MIDI Recording Only section.

Mix
For each completed lap, everything you record is added to what was previously
recorded. This is useful for building up rhythm patterns. Record a hi-hat part on the
first lap, the bass drum part on the second lap, etc.

Overwrite
As soon as you play a MIDI note or send any MIDI message, all MIDI that you have
recorded on previous laps is overwritten from that point. Make sure that you stop
playing before the next lap begins. Otherwise, you will overwrite the entire take.

Keep Last
Each completed lap replaces the previously recorded lap. If you deactivate recording or
press Stop before the cursor reaches the right locator, the previous take will be kept. If
you do not play or input any MIDI during a lap, nothing happens, and the previous take
is kept.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Recording Specifics on page 238
Recording in MIDI Editors on page 240
Transport Menu on page 199
Transport Panel Sections on page 195

Automatic MIDI Record Quantize

Cubase can automatically quantize MIDI notes on recording.

● Automatic MIDI Record Quantize is available in the MIDI Auto Quantize section of the
Transport Bar.

If you activate Auto Quantize, the notes that you record are automatically quantized according
to the quantize settings.

RELATED LINKS
Quantizing MIDI and Audio on page 256
Quantize Panel on page 259

Recovery of MIDI Recordings

Cubase allows you to recover MIDI data, including controller data, that was captured in Stop
mode or during playback.

The MIDI data is stored in the retrospective record buffer, and you can insert it as a MIDI part on
the selected MIDI track.

The buffer captures up to 10000 MIDI events. This can amount to a MIDI recording of around 2
minutes and 30 seconds. However, if you use a keyboard that produces a large amount of MIDI
controller events, such as the ROLI Seaboard, this only corresponds to a recording of around 20
seconds.

243
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics

NOTE

In the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI page), you can specify a Retrospective Record Buffer
Size.

If the buffer is full, the MIDI events that were captured first are replaced by the new events. MIDI
events in the buffer are also replaced in the following situations:

● You have inserted the retrospective recording on a track, and you play new events in Stop
mode or during playback.
● You play MIDI notes in Stop mode, and you do not play for more than 30 seconds, before
playing further MIDI events in Stop mode.

NOTE

You can also empty the buffer manually.

RELATED LINKS
Record - MIDI on page 902
Emptying the Retrospective Record Buffer on page 246

Inserting a Retrospective Recording from All MIDI Inputs into the Selected Track
You can insert a retrospective recording, that is, MIDI data that was sent to All MIDI Inputs in
Stop mode or during playback, into the selected track.

PREREQUISITE
You have played MIDI notes in Stop mode or during playback, and you want to recover them.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI track into which you want to insert the captured MIDI data.
2. Select Transport > MIDI Retrospective Recording > Insert from All MIDI Inputs.

RESULT
The MIDI data that was captured at All MIDI Inputs is inserted into the selected track as a single,
linear MIDI part.

NOTE

If you insert buffer data from multiple selected tracks, the timing offsets between the data
played on the different tracks are retained.

Inserting a Retrospective Track Recording

You can insert a retrospective track recording, that is, MIDI data that was sent to the track input
in Stop mode or during playback, into the selected track.

PREREQUISITE
You have played MIDI notes in Stop mode or during playback, and you want to recover them.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI track into which you want to insert the captured MIDI data.

244
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics

2. In the top section of the MIDI track Inspector, click Retrospective Recording.

3. From the pop-up menu, select one of the following:

● To insert the MIDI data as one, continuous MIDI part, select Insert as Linear Recording.
● To insert the MIDI data as stacked MIDI parts, select Insert as Cycle Recording.

NOTE

This is only available if your MIDI data was captured during playback, and if cycle mode
was active.

RESULT
The MIDI data that was captured at the track input is inserted into the track.

NOTE

If the data was captured during playback, it is inserted at the position where you played it. If the
data was captured in Stop mode, it is inserted at the project cursor position.

Inserting a Retrospective Track Recording into an Editor

You can insert a retrospective track recording, that is, MIDI data that was sent to the track input
in Stop mode or during playback, into the MIDI part that is open in a MIDI editor.

PREREQUISITE
You have played MIDI notes in Stop mode or during playback, and you want to recover them.

PROCEDURE
1. Double-click the MIDI part where you want to insert the captured MIDI data to open it in a
MIDI editor.
2. On the MIDI editor toolbar, click Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor.

RESULT
The MIDI data that was captured on the track input is inserted into the MIDI part.

● If the data was captured during playback, it is inserted into the MIDI part along the timeline.
● If the data was captured in Stop mode, it is inserted at the project cursor position.

245
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Recording
Remaining Record Time

Emptying the Retrospective Record Buffer

You can empty the retrospective record buffer manually.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● In the top section of the MIDI track Inspector, open the Retrospective Recording
pop-up menu, and select Empty Retrospective Record Buffer.
● Select a track, and select Transport > MIDI Retrospective Recording > Empty All
Buffers.

Remaining Record Time

The Max. Record Time displays the time that is left for recording.

The available time depends on the current setup, for example, on the amount of tracks that are
record-enabled, the sample rate for your project, and the available hard disk space.

● To open the display, select Studio > More Options > Max. Record Time.

NOTE

The remaining recording time is also shown in the status line above the track list.

If you use individual record folders to store your tracks on different drives, the time display refers
to the medium with the least available storage space.

Lock Record
The Lock Record function prevents you from accidentally deactivating record mode.

● Select Edit > Key Commands. In the Transport category, assign key commands to the Lock
Record and Unlock Record commands.

If Lock Record is activated and you want to enter stop mode, confirm this in the corresponding
dialog. You can also use the Unlock Record key command first and then enter stop mode as
usual.

NOTE

An automatic punch out at the right locator position is ignored in Lock Record mode.

246
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Importing Audio and MIDI Files

You can add audio and MIDI files to your project by importing them.

Audio File Import

You can import compressed and uncompressed audio files in a variety of different formats. You
can also import audio from audio CDs or extract the audio of video files.

RELATED LINKS
Importing Audio Files on page 249
Importing Audio CD Tracks on page 250
Importing Audio from Video Files on page 252
Importing ReCycle Files on page 253
Importing Media on page 482

Setting up Audio File Import Options

You can specify how to handle audio files on import.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Audio.
2. Select an option from the On Import Audio Files pop-up menu.

3. Click OK.

RESULT
The import settings are saved and take effect when you import audio.
● If you selected Open Options Dialog, the Import Options dialog opens on every import and
allows you to make your changes.
● If you selected Use Settings, the settings specified in the On Import Audio Files section of
the Preferences dialog are used.

RELATED LINKS
Import Options Dialog for Audio Files on page 247
On Import Audio Files Settings on page 248

Import Options Dialog for Audio Files

The Import Options dialog allows you to make specific settings for the audio import.

● When you import audio files and Open Options Dialog is activated in the On Import Audio
Files section of the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the Import Options dialog
opens.

247
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
Audio File Import

Import Options dialog for single file import

Import Options dialog for multiple file import

Copy File to Project Folder/Copy All Files to Project Folder

Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project and causes the clip refer to the
copy.
Deactivate this option if you want the clip to refer to the original file in the original
location. In this case, it is marked as “external” in the Pool.

Convert to Project Settings/Convert to Project Settings and Copy to Project Folder If

Needed
Converts the imported file if the sample rate or the bit depth differ from the settings
in the Project Setup dialog. For single file import, you can choose which properties are
converted.

Do not ask again

Always applies the current settings without opening the dialog again. You can reset
this option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Audio File Import Options on page 247

On Import Audio Files Settings

You can set up standard settings that are performed automatically, each time you import audio
files.

● When you import audio files and Use Settings is activated in the On Import Audio Files
section of the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the settings are used for importing
audio.

248
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
Audio File Import

Copy File to Project Folder/Copy All Files to Project Folder

Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project and causes the clip refer to the
copy.
Deactivate this option if you want the clip to refer to the original file in the original
location. In this case, it is marked as “external” in the Pool.

Convert to Project Settings/Convert to Project Settings and Copy to Project Folder If

Needed
Converts the imported file if the sample rate or the bit depth differ from the settings
in the Project Setup dialog. For single file import, you can choose which properties are
converted.

Importing Audio Files

You can import uncompressed audio and compressed audio in several formats.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Audio File.
2. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select the audio file, and click Open.
3. Make your changes in the Import Options dialog.

NOTE

If Use Settings is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the

corresponding import settings are used.

RESULT
In the Project window, an event referencing the audio file is inserted into the selected track at
the project cursor position. If no track was selected, a new track is created.
A new audio clip is created and added to the Pool.
If you chose a compressed audio file other than FLAC, Cubase copies the original compressed file
and converts it to wave format (Windows) or AIFF format (macOS).

NOTE

The resulting Wave/AIFF file is significantly larger than the original compressed file.

The imported file is placed in the Audio folder of the project.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Audio File Import Options on page 247

Supported Compressed Audio File Formats

Cubase allows you to import compressed audio files.

The following compressed audio file formats are supported:

249
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
Audio File Import

FLAC file
This is an open source format that reduces the size of audio files by 50% to 60%,
compared to regular Wave files. The file extension is .flac.

MPEG 1 Layer 3 file

This is a family of standards used for encoding audio-visual information, such as
movies, video, and music in a digital compressed format. Cubase can read MPEG Layer
2 and MPEG Layer 3. MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio
quality. The file extension is .mp3.

Ogg Vorbis file

This is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology. The Ogg
Vorbis encoder uses variable bit rate encoding. It offers small, compressed audio files
of comparatively high audio quality. The file extension is.ogg.

Windows Media Audio file (Windows only)

This is an audio file format defined by Microsoft Inc. WMA files can be decreased in
size, with no loss of audio quality. The file extension is.wma.

Importing Audio CD Tracks

You can import audio from audio CDs into Cubase projects.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Audio CD to import CD tracks into the Project window.
2. Activate every audio file that you want to import in the Copy column.
3. Optional: Set a Default Name and a Destination Folder for the imported audio files.
4. Click the Copy button to create a local copy of the audio files or sections.
5. Click OK.

RESULT
The copied audio files are imported into the Project window and inserted into new tracks at the
project cursor position. By default, imported audio CD tracks are saved as wave files (Windows)
or AIFF files (macOS), in the Audio folder of the current project.
New audio clips are created and added to the Pool.

NOTE

You can also import audio files to the Pool without importing them into the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
Importing Media on page 482

Import From Audio CD Dialog

The Import from Audio CD dialog allows you to specify how the CD tracks are imported.

● To open the Import from Audio CD dialog, select File > Import > Audio CD.

250
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
Audio File Import

Drive
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to select the correct CD drive.

Speed (Windows only)

Allows you to select the data transfer speed.

NOTE

While you normally want to use the fastest possible speed, you may have to select a
slower speed for flawless audio extraction.

Eject CD
Opens the CD drive.

Secure Mode (Windows only)

Activates error checking and correction when reading the CD.

Columns
The columns in the dialog have the following functions:

Copy
Activate this option for the tracks that you want to copy/import.

#
Shows the track number.

CD Track
The name of the CD track. On import, this is used as file name. It is provided
automatically from CDDB, if available.
To rename a track, click the track name and enter a new name.

Length
The length of the audio CD track in minutes and seconds.

251
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
Audio File Import

Size
The file size of the audio CD track in MB.

Copy Start
The start of the section that is imported. On the ruler, drag the Left Marker to the
right to adjust this.

Copy End
The end of the section that is imported. On the ruler, drag the Right Marker to the left
to adjust this.

The Ruler
The ruler has the following functions:

1 Play Tracks
Plays back the selected track from the start to the end or from the left marker to the right
marker.
2 Stop Playback
Stops playback.
3 Play from Left Marker
Starts playback at the left marker.
4 Play to Right Marker
Starts playback a few moments prior to the right marker and stops at the right marker.
5 Left Marker
Allows you to set the copy start manually.
6 Right Marker
Allows you to set the copy end manually.

Destination Folder
Allows you to select a folder for the imported files.

Copy
Copies the files.

Copied Files
Lists the files that you copied for import.

Importing Audio from Video Files

You can import audio from a video file without importing the video itself.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Audio from Video File.
2. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select the video file, and click Open.

252
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
Audio File Import

RESULT
The audio of the selected video file is extracted and converted to a wave file that is saved in the
Audio folder.
A new audio clip is created and added to the Pool. In the Project window, an event referencing
the audio file is inserted on the selected track at the project cursor position. If no track was
selected, a new track is created.

RELATED LINKS
Extracting Audio from Video on page 852
Importing Video Files on page 839

Importing ReCycle Files

You can import REX and REX2 audio files created by ReCycle from Propellerhead Software.
ReCycle slices a loop and creates separate samples of each beat, so that you can tempo match
and edit a loop as if it was made of individual sounds.

PREREQUISITE
REX Shared Library is installed on your system.

PROCEDURE
1. Select an audio track, and move the project cursor to where you want the imported file to
start.
2. Select File > Import > Audio File.
3. In the file dialog, open the file type pop-up menu, and select REX File or REX 2 File.
4. Select the file you want to import, and click Open.

RESULT
The file is imported and automatically adjusted to the current Cubase tempo.
The imported REX file consists of several events, one for each slice in the loop. The events are
automatically placed in an audio part on the selected track and positioned so that the original
internal timing of the loop is preserved.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Open the part in the Audio Part Editor to edit each slice separately by muting, moving, and
resizing events, adding effects and processing, for example.
You can also adjust the tempo and have the REX file automatically follow, provided that its track
is set to a musical time base.

NOTE

You can achieve similar results by using Cubase’s own loop slicing features.

RELATED LINKS
Slices on page 423

253
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
MIDI File Import

MIDI File Import

Cubase can import standard MIDI files. This allows you to transfer MIDI material to and from
virtually any MIDI application, on any platform.

Import Options for MIDI Files

The Import Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data to include in imported MIDI
files.

Extract First Patch

Converts the first Program Change and Bank Select events for each track to
Inspector settings for the track.

Extract First Volume/Pan

Converts the first MIDI Volume and Pan events for each track to Inspector settings
for the track.

Import Controller as Automation Tracks

Converts MIDI Controller events in the MIDI file to automation data for the MIDI
tracks.

Import to Left Locator

Aligns the imported MIDI file to the position of the left locator.

Import Markers
Imports any markers that have been added.

Import Dropped File as Single Part

Places the file on one track if you drag a MIDI file into the project.

Ignore Master Track Events on Merge

Ignores tempo track data if you import a MIDI file into the current project. The
imported MIDI file adapts to the current tempo track in the project.

Auto Dissolve Format 0

Automatically dissolves imported MIDI files of type 0. Each embedded MIDI channel in
the file is placed on a separate track in the Project window.

Destination
Allows you to specify what happens when you drag a MIDI file into the project.

● MIDI Tracks creates MIDI tracks for the imported file.

● Instrument Tracks creates instrument tracks for each MIDI channel in the MIDI
file and causes the program to automatically load appropriate presets.

254
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
MIDI File Import

● HALion Sonic multi-timbral creates several MIDI tracks, each routed to a

separate instance of HALion Sonic in the VST Instruments window, and loads the
appropriate presets.

Import Karaoke Lyrics as Text

If this option is deactivated, lyrics are only shown in the List Editor.

Importing MIDI Files

You can import MIDI files into Cubase.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > MIDI File.
2. Optional: If a project is open, choose if you want to create a new project.
If you select No, the MIDI file is imported into the current project.
3. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select the MIDI file, and click Open.

RESULT
The MIDI file is imported. The result depends on the contents of the MIDI file and the settings
you made in the Import Options section of the Preferences dialog (MIDI—MIDI File page).

RELATED LINKS
Import Options for MIDI Files on page 254
Markers on page 288

Yamaha XF Format
Cubase supports the Yamaha XF format. XF is an extension of the standard MIDI file format that
allows you to save song-specific data with a MIDI file of type 0.

When importing a MIDI file containing XF data, this data is placed in parts on separate tracks
called XF Data, Chord Data, or SysEx Data. You can edit such a part in the List Editor to add or
change lyrics, for example.

IMPORTANT

Do not change the order of events within the XF data or the event data itself, unless you have a
lot of experience with XF data.

Cubase can also export XF data as part of a MIDI file of type 0. If you do not want to export the XF
data with the MIDI data, mute or delete the tracks containing the XF data.

MIDI Loops
In Cubase, you can import MIDI loops.

To import MIDI loops, use the MediaBay. MIDI loops have the file extension .midiloop.

RELATED LINKS
Importing MIDI Loops on page 549

255
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Quantizing MIDI and Audio

Quantizing means moving recorded audio or MIDI and positioning it on the nearest grid position
that is musically relevant. Quantizing is designed to correct errors, but you can also use it in a
creative way.

You can quantize audio and MIDI to a grid or to a groove.

Audio and MIDI can be quantized at the same time. However, what exactly happens during
quantizing differs for audio and MIDI:

● Audio quantizing affects the audio event starts.

● MIDI quantizing can affect the starts of MIDI events in a part, the MIDI event lengths, or the
MIDI event ends.

NOTE

Quantizing is based on the original position of the events. Therefore, you can freely try out
different quantize settings without the risk of destroying anything.

RELATED LINKS
Quantizing Audio Event Starts on page 258
Quantizing MIDI Event Starts on page 257
Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths on page 258
Quantizing MIDI Event Ends on page 258

Quantize Functions
The quantize functions are available in the Edit menu and in the Snap and Quantize sections of
the Project window toolbar and the Sample Editor toolbar.

Quantize Functions on the Edit Menu

Quantize
Quantizes audio or MIDI event starts.

Reset Quantize
Reverts your audio or MIDI to its original, unquantized state, and resets any length
changes that you performed in the Quantize Panel.

Quantize Panel
Opens the Quantize Panel.

Advanced Quantize
From this submenu, you can select the following functions:

● Quantize MIDI Event Lengths

Cuts off the ends of selected MIDI events so that the events match the length
quantize value. The start positions are kept.
● Quantize MIDI Event Ends
Moves the ends of MIDI events to the nearest grid positions.

256
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantizing MIDI Event Starts

● Freeze MIDI Quantize

Makes the start and end positions of MIDI events permanent. This function is
useful in situations where you want to quantize a second time, based on the
current quantized positions rather than the original positions.
● Create Groove Quantize Preset
Creates a groove quantize preset based on hitpoints that you have created in the
Sample Editor.

Quantize Functions on the Project Window Toolbar and on the Sample

Editor Toolbar
Apply Quantize

Applies the quantize settings.

Quantize Presets

Allows you to select a quantize preset.

Soft Quantize On/Off

Activates/Deactivates soft quantize.

Open Quantize Panel

Opens the Quantize Panel.

Quantizing MIDI Event Starts

You can quantize the MIDI event start positions.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up a quantize grid on the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the Project window
toolbar.

PROCEDURE
1. Perform one of the following actions:
● In the Key Editor, select the MIDI events that you want to quantize.
● In the Project window, select a MIDI part.
2. Select Edit > Quantize.

RESULT
The starts of the selected MIDI events or all events of the selected MIDI part are quantized.
Events that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid position. The note
lengths are maintained.

257
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths

Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths

You can quantize the MIDI event lengths.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up a length quantize value on the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the Key
Editor toolbar.

PROCEDURE
1. Perform one of the following actions:

● In the Key Editor, select the MIDI events that you want to quantize.
● In the Project window, select a MIDI part.
2. Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Quantize MIDI Event Lengths.

RESULT
The ends of the selected MIDI events are cut off so that the events match the length quantize
value. The start positions are kept.

NOTE

If you have selected Quantize Link in the Length Quantize pop-up menu of the Key Editor
toolbar, the events are resized according to the grid that is set up in the Quantize Presets
pop-up menu. The Swing, Tuplet, and Catch Range settings on the Quantize Panel are taken
into account.

Quantizing MIDI Event Ends

You can quantize the MIDI event end positions.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up a quantize grid on the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the Project window
toolbar.

PROCEDURE
1. Perform one of the following actions:
● In the Key Editor, select the MIDI events that you want to quantize.
● In the Project window, select a MIDI part.
2. Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Quantize MIDI Event Ends.

RESULT
The ends of the MIDI events are moved to the nearest grid positions.

Quantizing Audio Event Starts

You can quantize the audio event start positions.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up a quantize grid on the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the Project window
toolbar.

258
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantize Panel

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select an audio event, a sliced loop, or an audio part.
2. Select Edit > Quantize.

RESULT
The event snap point, or, if not available, the start of the audio event, is quantized. Event starts
that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid positions.

NOTE

If you use the Quantize function on an audio part, the starts of the events inside the part are
quantized.

Quantize Panel
The Quantize Panel allows you to define how to quantize audio or MIDI to the grid or to a
groove. Depending on what method you choose, different parameters are shown.

To open the Quantize Panel, perform one of the following actions:

● Click Open Quantize Panel on the toolbar.

● Select Edit > Quantize Panel.

259
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantize Panel

Quantize Presets
The quantize presets are displayed at the top of the Quantize Panel. Here, you can load and
save presets that include all settings for quantizing.

Select Preset
Allows you to select a preset.

Save Preset
Allows you to save the current settings as presets, so that they become available on all
Quantize Presets pop-up menus.

Remove Preset
Allows you to remove the selected preset.

Rename Preset
Opens a dialog where you can rename the selected preset.

Restore Factory Presets

Allows you to restore the factory presets.

260
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantize Panel

Creating Groove Quantize Presets

You can create a groove quantize preset, based on hitpoints that you have created in the Sample
Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, double-click the audio event from which you want to extract the
timing.
The Sample Editor opens.
2. Open the Hitpoints section.
The hitpoints for the audio event are automatically detected and displayed.
3. Open the Create section, and click Groove.
The groove is extracted.

RESULT
The groove is extracted from the audio event and made available in the Quantize Presets
pop-up menu on the Project window toolbar.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Open the Quantize Panel, and save the groove as a preset.

RELATED LINKS
Creating a Groove Quantize Preset on page 425
Quantize Presets on page 260

Options For Quantizing to a Musical Grid

You can use the musical grid to quantize your recorded music.

● To access the options for quantizing to a musical grid, select a musical time format from the
Select Preset pop-up menu on the Quantize Panel.

261
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantize Panel

The following options are available:

Grid
Allows you to select the basic value for the quantize grid.

Swing
Offsets every second position in the grid, creating a swing or shuffle feel.

NOTE

Swing is only available if Grid is set to a straight value and Tuplet is deactivated.

Catch Range
Allows you to set a value that determines that quantizing only affects audio or MIDI
within the set distance from the grid lines. This is reflected in the grid display.

Safe Range
Creates a safe zone before and after the quantize positions. If you specify a distance in
ticks (120 ticks = one 16th note), events within this zone are not quantized. As a result,
slight variations are kept.

Grid Display
Shows the quantize grid. Quantized audio or MIDI is moved to the positions indicated
by the vertical grid lines.

262
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantize Panel

Tuplet
Creates rhythmically more complex grids by dividing the grid into smaller steps,
thereby creating n-tuplets.

Rough
Allows you to set a distance in ticks, so that your audio or MIDI is quantized to random
positions within the specified distance from the quantize grid. This allows for slight
variations and, at the same time, prevents your audio or MIDI from ending up too far
away from the grid.

Soft Quantize Mode

Applies a loose quantization so that your audio or MIDI moves only part of the
way to the closest quantize grid position. The Quantize Strength value to the right
determines how close your audio or MIDI moves towards the grid.

NOTE

Soft quantizing is based on the current quantized positions and not on the original
event positions. You can repeatedly use the soft quantize mode to gradually move your
audio or MIDI closer to the quantize grid until you have found the right timing.

MIDI CC
Automatically moves controllers related to MIDI notes (pitchbend, etc.) with the notes
when these are quantized.

Reset Quantize
Resets your audio or MIDI to its original, unquantized state.

IMPORTANT

This function has no effect on an event that was moved manually.

Auto
Immediately applies any changes to the selected parts or events. A way of using this
feature is to set up a playback loop and to adjust the settings until you are satisfied
with the result.

Quantize
Applies your settings.

Options for Quantizing to a Groove

You can generate a timing grid from a MIDI part or an audio loop and use this groove to quantize
your recorded music. This way, you can recreate the rhythmic feel of this specific event or part.

To access the options for quantizing to a groove, select a MIDI part from an audio loop, an audio
event with hitpoints, or sliced audio. Perform one of the following actions:

● Drag the part or event to the grid display in the middle of the Quantize Panel.
● Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Create Groove Quantize Preset.

263
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantize Panel

The following options become available:

Position
Determines how much the timing of the groove affects the music.

Velocity (MIDI Only)

Determines how much the velocity values within the groove affect the music.

NOTE

Not all grooves contain velocity information.

Length (MIDI Only)

Allows you to specify how much the lengths of the notes are affected by the groove.

NOTE

For drums, the Length setting is ignored.

Safe Range
Allows you to create a safe zone before and after the quantize positions. If you specify
a distance in ticks (120 ticks = one 16th note), events within this zone are not quantized.
As a result, slight variations are kept.

Grid display
Shows the quantize grid. Quantized audio or MIDI is moved to the positions indicated
by the vertical grid lines.

Pre-Q
Allows you to select a musical grid to which you can quantize your audio or MIDI first.
This moves the notes closer to their groove destination.

NOTE

If you apply a shuffle groove to a 16th-note pattern, for example, set up a pre-quantize
value of 16 to straighten up the timing before applying the groove quantizing.

264
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantize Panel

Max. Move
Allows you to select a note value to specify a maximum distance for audio or MIDI
movement.

Orig. Position
Sets the original starting position of the quantized material as the starting point of the
quantizing. This allows you to synchronize material that does not start from bar 1 of
the project.

Rough Quantize
Allows you to set a distance in ticks so that your audio or MIDI is quantized to random
positions within the specified distance from the quantize grid. This allows for slight
variations and, at the same time, prevents your audio or MIDI from ending up too far
away from the grid.

Soft Quantize Mode

Applies a loose quantization so that your audio or MIDI moves only part of the
way to the closest quantize grid position. The Quantize Strength value to the right
determines how close your audio or MIDI moves towards the grid.

NOTE

Soft quantizing is based on the current quantized positions and not on the original
event positions. You can repeatedly use the soft quantize mode to gradually move your
audio or MIDI closer to the quantize grid until you have found the right timing.

MIDI CC
Automatically moves controllers related to MIDI notes (pitchbend, etc.) with the notes
when these are quantized.

Reset Quantize
Resets your audio or MIDI to its original, unquantized state.

IMPORTANT

This function has no effect on an event that was moved manually.

Auto
Immediately applies any changes to the selected parts or events. A way of using this
feature is to set up a playback loop and to adjust the settings until you are satisfied
with the result.

Quantize
Applies your settings.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Groove Quantize Presets on page 261

265
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Fades, Crossfades, and Event
Volume

Fades allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume at the start or at the end of audio
events or audio clips, and to create smooth transitions. To change the volume of the entire event,
you can define an event volume offset.

You can create the following fades:

● Fade ins/fade outs

Fade ins and fade outs allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume of audio
events or audio clips. Fade ins and fade outs can be either event-based or clip-based.
Event-based fades are calculated in real time when you play back audio events. You can
create different fade curves for several events, even if they refer to the same audio clip.

NOTE

The more event-based fades you apply, the more processing power is required.

Clip-based fades are applied to an audio clip. Events that refer to the same clip obtain the
same fades.
● Crossfades
Crossfades allow you to create smooth transitions for consecutive audio events on the same
track. Crossfades are event-based.
● Auto fades
Auto fades allow you to automatically apply short fade ins and fade outs to the events on
specific audio tracks. You can also apply them globally, on all audio tracks. This creates
smooth transitions between events.
● Event volume
You can adjust the event volume by setting an offset value for the entire event.

RELATED LINKS
Event-Based Fades on page 268
Creating Clip-Based Fades on page 271
Crossfades on page 271
Auto Fades and Crossfades on page 275
Adjusting the Event Volume on page 277

Event Handles
Audio events have a fade-in and a fade-out handle, as well as a volume handle. These handles
provide a quick way to change the fade length or the volume of events in the Project window.

By default, event handles become visible when you move the mouse pointer to an event or select
events.

266
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Event Handles

NOTE

You can choose when to display fades, event volume curves, and event volume controls in the
Preferences dialog (Event Display—Audio page).

In the upper left and right corners, you can find triangular fade handles that allow you to change
the fade-in or fade-out length. The event volume control at the bottom left allows you to change
the volume.

● To change the fade-in length, drag the fade handle to the right or to the left.

● To change the fade-out length, drag the fade handle to the left or to the right.

● To change the event volume, click the event volume control and move the fader.

Changes affecting fades or the volume are reflected in the event waveform and on the info line.

NOTE

To change the event volume and the fades with the mouse wheel, activate Use Mouse Wheel for
Event Volume and Fades in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page). To move the fade-in
end point, press Shift while moving the mouse wheel, and position the mouse pointer anywhere
in the left half of the event. When the mouse pointer is in the right half of the event, the fade-out
start point is moved.

267
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Event-Based Fades

RELATED LINKS
Event Display - Audio on page 892
Editing - Audio on page 885

Event-Based Fades
You can create event-based fade ins and fade outs. These are calculated in real time when you
play back audio events. You can create different fade curves for several events, even if they refer
to the same audio clip.

There are several ways to create event-based fades:

● By using the event handles

● By using range selections

You can edit event-based fades in the Fade dialogs.

RELATED LINKS
Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles on page 268
Creating and Editing Fades with the Range Selection Tool on page 269
Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades on page 269

Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles

You can create and edit event-based fade ins and fade outs using the event handles. This gives
you a visual feedback and allows you to apply the same fade type to several selected events.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio events for which you want to create fades, and point at one of them with the
mouse.
Triangular fade handles become visible in the upper left and right corners.

2. Perform one of the following actions:

● To create a fade in, drag the left fade handle to the right.

● To create a fade out, drag the right fade handle to the left.

268
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Event-Based Fades

RESULT
The fade is applied and displayed in the event waveform. If you select multiple events, the same
fade is applied to all selected events.

NOTE

You can change the length of the fades at any time by dragging the handles.

Creating and Editing Fades with the Range Selection Tool

You can create and edit event-based fades with the Range Selection tool. Using the Range
Selection tool is useful if you want to create fades for multiple audio events on separate tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, select the Range Selection tool.

NOTE

If you select a range that spans multiple audio events on multiple audio tracks, you can
create fades on multiple tracks.

2. Select a range in the middle of the event, and select Audio > Fades > Adjust Fades to
Range.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Removing Event-Based Fades

You can remove event-based fades.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the event with the Object Selection tool.
2. Do one of the following:
● To remove a fade in, select Audio > Fades > Remove Fade In.
● To remove a fade out, select Audio > Fades > Remove Fade Out.
● To remove a fade in and a fade out, select Audio > Fades > Remove Fades.

Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades

The fade dialog for event-based fades allows you to set up the selected event-based fades.

● To open the dialog for event-based fades, create a fade for one or more audio events, select
the events, and select Audio > Fades > Open Fade Editor(s).

NOTE

If you select several events, you can adjust the fade curves for all selected events at the same
time. This is useful if you want to apply the same type of fade in to more than one event, for
example.

269
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Event-Based Fades

The following options are available:

1 Presets pop-up menu

Allows you to set up presets for fade-in or fade-out curves.
● To apply a saved preset, select it from the pop-up menu.
● To remove a saved preset, select it from the pop-up menu and click Remove.
2 Curve Type buttons
Apply a spline interpolation, a damped spline interpolation, or a linear interpolation to the
curve.
3 Restore
Click this button to cancel any changes you have made since opening the dialog.
4 Fade display
Shows the shape of the fade curve. The darker waveform displays the result, whereas the
current waveform is displayed in a lighter shade.
● To add points, click the curve.
● To change the curve shape, click and drag existing points.
● To remove a point from the curve, drag it outside the display.
5 Curve Shape buttons
Give you quick access to some common curve shapes.
6 Length field
Allows you to enter fade lengths numerically. The format of the values displayed here is
determined by the time display on the Transport panel.
● If you activate Apply Length, the value entered in the Fade Length value field is used
when clicking Apply or OK.
● If you set the current fade as the default fade, the length value is included as part of the
default settings.
7 As Default
Saves the current settings as the default fade.
8 Apply
Applies the current fade settings to the selected events.

270
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Creating Clip-Based Fades

Creating Clip-Based Fades

You can create and edit clip-based fade ins and fade outs using Direct Offline Processing. These
fades are applied to the audio clip. Events that refer to the same clip receive the same fades.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select one or more audio events or a range for which you want to
create a fade.
The length of your selection determines the length of the fade area.
2. Perform one of the following actions:

● To create a fade in, select Audio > Processes > Fade In.
● To create a fade out, select Audio > Processes > Fade Out.
3. In the Direct Offline Processing window, click the Curve Type buttons to specify a fade
curve, or click and drag with the mouse to draw in a curve in the curve display.
4. Optional: Activate Audition to hear the effect of the specified fade on the selected audio
event.

RESULT
The fade is applied to the audio.

RELATED LINKS
Direct Offline Processing on page 379
Fade In/Fade Out on page 385
On Processing Shared Clips on page 271

On Processing Shared Clips

If several events refer to the same audio clip, this clip is a shared clip. If you edit one of the
events that refer to a shared clip, you can decide if you want to apply the processing to all events
referring to this clip.

Continue
Click Continue to apply the processing to all events that refer to the audio clip.

New Version
Click New Version to create a separate, new version of the audio clip for the selected
event.

Crossfades
Crossfades allow you to create smooth transitions for consecutive audio events on the same
track. Crossfades are always event-based.

You can only create crossfades if the consecutive events or their respective clips overlap.

271
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Crossfades

● If the audio events overlap, a crossfade of the default shape (linear, symmetric) is applied in
the overlapping area.

Overlapping events

Overlapping events with a crossfade

NOTE

You can edit the default crossfade length and shape in the Crossfade editor.

● If the respective audio clips overlap, the two events are resized so that they overlap, and a
crossfade of the default length and shape is applied in the overlapping area.
● If neither the audio events nor the clips overlap, a crossfade cannot be created.

RELATED LINKS
Crossfade Editor on page 273

Creating Crossfades
You can create crossfades between two consecutive audio events.

PROCEDURE
1. Perform one of the following actions:
● To create a crossfade between two events, select the Object Selection tool, and select
two consecutive audio events.
● To create a crossfade to a selected range between two events, select the Range
Selection tool, and select a range covering the area where you want to apply a
crossfade.
2. Select Audio > Fades > Crossfade or use the key command X .

RESULT
The crossfade is applied.

Changing the Crossfade Length

You can change the length of a crossfade.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the Range Selection tool.
2. Select a range between two events that covers the length of the crossfade you want to apply.
3. Select Audio > Fades > Adjust Fades to Range.

RESULT
The crossfade length is adjusted to the selected range.

272
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Crossfades

Crossfade Editor
The Crossfade editor allows you to edit crossfades. It contains fade-in and fade-out curve
settings, and common settings.

● To open the Crossfade editor, select one or both crossfaded events, and select Audio >
Fades > Crossfade or double-click the crossfade zone.

Curve Type buttons

Determine whether the corresponding fade curve uses Spline Interpolation ,
Damped Spline Interpolation , or Linear Interpolation .

Curve Shape buttons

Give you quick access to some common curve shapes.

Fade Curve displays

Show the shape of the fade-out and fade-in curve, respectively.
● To add points, click a curve.
● To change the fade shape, click and drag existing points.
● To remove a point, drag a point outside the display.

Presets
Click Save Preset on the Presets pop-up menu to store the crossfade settings so that
you can apply them to other events.

● To remove a preset, select it on the pop-up menu and click Remove Preset.

Default buttons
Click As Default to store the current settings as default. Default settings are used
whenever you create new crossfades.
Click Recall Default to apply the curves and settings of the default crossfade.

Length
Specifies the length of the crossfade area. Cubase tries to center the crossfade, that is,
the length change is applied equally to both sides. To be able to resize a crossfade, it

273
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Crossfades

must be possible to resize the corresponding event. For example, if the fade-out event
already plays its audio clip to the end, its end point cannot be moved any further to the
right.

Equal Gain
Adjusts the fade curves so that the summed fade-in and fade-out amplitudes are the
same all along the crossfade region. This can be beneficial for short crossfades.

Equal Power
Adjusts the fade curves so that the energy (power) of the crossfade is constant all along
the crossfade region.
Equal Power curves have only one editable curve point. You cannot change the curve
shape if this mode is selected.

Volume
Allows you to set the audition level.

Pre-roll and Post-roll

● To start playback before the fade area, activate Use Pre-roll.
● To stop playback after the fade area, activate Use Post-roll.
● To adjust the pre-roll time, use the Pre-roll Amount value field.
● To adjust the post-roll time, use the Post-roll Amount value field.

Audition buttons
● To audition the fade-out part of the crossfade, click Play Fade Out.
● To audition the whole crossfade, click Play Crossfade.
● To audition the fade-in part of the crossfade, click Play Fade In.
You can set up key commands for this in the Key Commands dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Key Commands on page 853
Event Handles on page 266
Auto-Scroll Settings Menu on page 215

Removing Crossfades
You can remove crossfades.

PROCEDURE
1. Perform one of the following actions:

● Select the Object Selection tool, and select one of the crossfaded events.
● Select the Range Selection tool, and select the crossfades you want to remove.
2. Select Audio > Fades > Remove Fades.

RESULT
The selected crossfades are removed.

NOTE

You can also remove a crossfade by clicking and dragging it outside the event.

274
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Auto Fades and Crossfades

Auto Fades and Crossfades

Cubase features an Auto Fade function that can be set either globally or separately for each
audio track. Auto fades allow you to create smoother transitions between events by applying
fade ins and fade outs with a length between 1 and 500 ms.

IMPORTANT

As event-based fades are calculated in real time during playback, applying auto fades to a higher
number of audio events results in a higher demand on the processor.

NOTE

Auto fades are not indicated by fade lines.

Auto Fades Dialog

The Auto Fades dialog allows you to set up auto fades and crossfades, either for the entire
project or individually, for each audio track.

● To open the global Auto Fades dialog, select Project > Auto Fades Settings.
● To open the Auto Fades dialog for a track, right-click in the track list and select Auto Fades
Settings.

1 Auto Fade In

275
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Auto Fades and Crossfades

Activates auto fade ins.

2 Auto Fade Out
Activates auto fade outs.
3 Auto Crossfades
Activates auto crossfades.
4 Use Project Settings
This is only available if you opened the Auto Fades dialog for individual tracks. Deactivate
this to set up and apply the settings to individual tracks only. To apply the global settings
again, activate Use Project Settings.
5 Length
Specifies the length of the auto fades or crossfades.
6 As Default
Saves the current settings as default.
7 Fades section
Provides the settings for auto fades.
The Curve Type buttons allow you to determine whether the corresponding fade curve uses
Spline Interpolation , Damped Spline Interpolation or Linear Interpolation .
The Curve Shape buttons give you quick access to common curve shapes.
8 Crossfades section
Provides the settings for auto crossfades.
Equal Gain allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the summed fade-in and fade-out
amplitudes are the same, all along the crossfade region.
Equal Power allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the energy (power) of the
crossfade is constant, all along the crossfade region.

Making Global Auto Fade Settings

You can set up auto fades and crossfades for the whole project.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Auto Fades Settings.
This opens the Auto Fades dialog for the project.
2. Set up the fades as desired.
3. Click OK.

RELATED LINKS
Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades on page 269
Crossfade Editor on page 273

Making Auto Fade Settings for Individual Tracks

As auto fades use computing power, we recommend turning global auto fades off and activating
them for individual tracks only.

PROCEDURE
1. Perform one of the following actions:

● Right-click the track in the track list. From the context menu, select Auto Fades Settings.

276
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Fades, Crossfades, and Event Volume
Adjusting the Event Volume

● Select the track. In the Inspector, click Auto Fades Settings.

The Auto Fades dialog for the track opens.

2. Deactivate Use Project Settings.
Any settings you make are applied to the track only.
3. Set up the auto fades.
4. Click OK.

Adjusting the Event Volume

To adjust the volume of an entire event, you can specify an offset value.

PREREQUISITE
You have zoomed in on the event so that the event volume control is displayed.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, select the Object Selection or the Draw tool.
2. On an audio event, click and hold the event volume control at the bottom left of the event.

3. Drag the fader up or down to adjust the volume offset value. For finer volume adjustments,
press Shift while moving the fader.

The waveform image of the event changes according to the volume change.

RESULT
The volume of the entire event is changed.

NOTE

● If Use Mouse Wheel for Event Volume and Fades is activated in the Preferences dialog
(Editing—Audio page), you can use the mouse wheel to change the event volume.
● Alternatively, you can adjust the event volume by changing the Volume value on the info
line.

RELATED LINKS
Zooming in the Project Window on page 66
Editing - Audio on page 885
Info Line on page 47

277
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Arranger Track

The arranger functions in Cubase allow you to work in a non-linear fashion. Using an arranger
track allows you to determine how and when specific sections are played back, even for live
performances. This way, you do not need to move, copy, and paste events in the Project window.

NOTE

There can only be one arranger track in a project.

To use the arranger functions, add an arranger track and define arranger events. Arranger
events can be of any length. They can overlap and are not bound to the start or end of existing
events and parts. You can order them in a list and add repeats.

To edit arranger events, use the standard techniques. Copies from arranger events are
independent from the original event.

You can create several arranger chains that allow you to save different versions of a song within
the project.

You can flatten arranger chains to convert them into a linear project.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Arranger Events on the Arranger Track on page 278
Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events on page 283
Flattening the Arranger Chain on page 284

Adding Arranger Events on the Arranger Track

On the arranger track, you can add arranger events that define specific sections of the project.

PREREQUISITE
Snap is activated, and Snap Type is set to Events.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Add Track > Arranger.
The arranger track is added.
2. Select the Draw tool, and draw an arranger event on the arranger track.
An arranger event is added.
3. Draw as many events as you need.

RESULT
The arranger events are added to your project.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Use the functions of the Arranger Editor to arrange the events.

278
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Arranger Editor

RELATED LINKS
Arranger Track on page 114
Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events on page 283
Snap Function on page 70
Snap Types Menu on page 71

Renaming Arranger Events

When you add arranger events, they are automatically named in alphabetical order. You can
change the names so that they reflect the structure of your project, such as Intro, Chorus, Bridge.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the arranger event that you want to rename.
2. Perform one of the following actions:

● Select the event name on the info line.

● In the Arranger section of the Inspector or in the Arranger Editor, hold down Alt/Opt ,
and double-click the name in the arranger chain.

3. Enter a new name.

Arranger Editor
The Arranger Editor allows you to set up arranger chains.

To open the Arranger Editor, select the arranger track, and do one of the following:

● Click Open Arranger Editor in the track list.

● Click Open Arranger Editor on the Arranger Track section header of the Inspector.

Arranger toolbar
Shows the transport buttons, the arranger transport buttons, and the arranger tools.

Current Arranger Chain

Shows the order in which the events are played back, from top to bottom, and how
many times they are repeated.

279
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Arranger Editor

NOTE

Initially, the arranger chain is empty. To use it, add events from the Arranger Events
list.

Arranger Events
Lists the available arranger events in the same order as they appear on the timeline.

Arranger Editor Toolbar

The Arranger Editor contains tools and shortcuts for setting the flatten options.

To open the Arranger Editor, select the arranger track, and do one of the following:

● Click Open Arranger Editor in the track list.

● Click Open Arranger Editor on the Arranger Track section header of the Inspector.

Activate Arranger Mode

Activates playback in arranger mode.

Previous Chain Step

Navigates to the previous entry in the current arranger chain list. Alt -click to jump to
the first chain step.

Next Chain Step

Navigates to the next entry in the current arranger chain list. Alt -click to jump to the
last chain step.

First Repeat of Current Chain Step

Navigates to the first repeat of the current entry in the current arranger chain list.

Last Repeat of Current Chain Step

Navigates to the last repeat of the current entry in the current arranger chain list.

Select Active Chain

Allows you to select and activate an arranger chain.

Rename Arranger Chain

Allows you to rename the current arranger chain.

Create New Chain

Creates a new, empty arranger chain.

Duplicate Current Chain

Creates a duplicate of the current arranger chain, containing the same events.

280
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Arranger Editor

Remove Current Chain

Removes the selected arranger chain. This is only available if you have created more
than one arranger chain.

Flatten Chain

Converts the current arranger chain into a linear project.

NOTE

Flattening the arranger chain may remove events and parts from the project. Only use
Flatten when you are sure that you do not want to edit the arranger track/chain any
more. If in doubt, save a copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain.

Flatten (with Options & Preferences)

Allows you to set up the flatten options.

Arranger Chain Repeat Modes

The Arranger Editor comes with a function that allows you to repeat and loop your arranger
events. This way, you can create a sketch of a song structure.

To open the Arranger Editor, select the arranger track, and do one of the following:

● Click Open Arranger Editor in the track list .

● Click Open Arranger Editor on the Arranger Track section header of the Inspector .

To select one of the repeat modes, click the Mode column in the Current Arranger Chain list.

1 Normal
Plays back the arranger chain exactly the way you set it up.
2 Repeat Forever
Repeats the current arranger event in a loop until you click another event in the Arranger
Editor or until you click Play once again.
3 Pause After Repeats
Pauses playback after all repeats of the current arranger event have been played back.

NOTE

During playback, the Counter column indicates which repetition of the event is playing.

Flatten Options & Preferences

The flatten options allow you to define what happens when you flatten the arranger track.

NOTE

Flattening the arranger chain may remove events and parts from the project. Only use Flatten
when you are sure that you do not want to edit the arranger track/chain any more. If in doubt,
save a copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain.

281
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Arranger Editor

● To show the flatten options, open the Arranger Editor, and click Flatten (with Options &
Preferences).

In the Source section, you can specify which arranger chains are flattened.

Current Chain
Flattens the current chain only.

Checked Chains
Opens a list of the available arranger chains where you can activate the arranger tracks
that you want to flatten.

All Chains
Flattens all arranger chains of the current project.

The Destination section allows you to choose where the result of the flattening is saved.

Current Project
This is only available if Source is set to Current Chain. Activate this option to save the
flattened chain in the current project.

New Project
Allows you to flatten one or more chains in a new project with the following naming
options:
● Append Chain Name
Appends the chain names to the project name.
● Use Chain Name
Names the new projects after the current arranger chains.
● Add Number
Names the new projects after the old ones and adds a number.

The Options section contains further settings.

Keep Arranger Track

Keeps the arranger track after flattening. Activate Rename Arranger Events to append
numbers to the events.

Make Real Event Copies

Allows you to create real copies of the arranger track instead of shared copies.

Don‘t Split Events

Excludes MIDI notes that start before or are longer than the arranger event. Only MIDI
notes that begin and end inside the arranger event are taken into account.

282
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events

Open New Projects

Creates a new project for every flattened arranger chain. If you activate Cascade New
Projects, the opened projects are cascaded.

RELATED LINKS
Flattening the Arranger Chain on page 284

Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events

In the Arranger Editor, you can set up arranger chains and add events to them.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:
● Click Open Arranger Editor in the track list.
● Click Open Arranger Editor on the Arranger Track section header of the Inspector.

2. Activate Activate Arranger Mode.

3. Perform one of the following actions to add arranger events to the arranger chain:
● Double-click an event in the Arranger Events list.
● Select one or more events in the Arranger Events list, right-click, and select Append
Selected In Arranger Chain.
● Drag an arranger event from the Arranger Events list, and drop it in the Current
Arranger Chain list.
● Drag an arranger event from the Project window, and drop it in the Current Arranger
Chain list.
4. Click Play.

RESULT
The arranger events are played back in the order that you specified in the arranger chain.

RELATED LINKS
Arranger Chain Repeat Modes on page 281

Adding a New Arranger Chain

You can create several arranger chains in order to set up alternative versions for playback.

PREREQUISITE
Arranger Mode is activated.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Arranger Editor.
2. Click Create New Chain.

283
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events

RESULT
A new, empty arranger chain is activated. This is reflected by a new name in the Select Active
Chain pop-up menu and a new, empty Current Arranger Chain list.

Editing Arranger Events in the Arranger Chain

In the Current Arranger Chain list, you can edit your arranger events.

You can perform the following actions:

● To select multiple events, Ctrl/Cmd -click or Shift -click them.

● To move events in the list, drag them up or down.
● To copy events, select them, hold Alt/Opt and drag.
● To repeat events, click in the Repeats column, and enter the number of repeats.
● To specify how the event is repeated, click in the Mode column, and select a Repeat Mode
from the pop-up menu.
● To move the playback position to the start of an event, click the arrow to the left of the event.
● To remove an event from the list, right-click, and select Remove Touched.
● To remove several events, select them, right-click, and select Remove Selected.

RELATED LINKS
Arranger Chain Repeat Modes on page 281

Flattening the Arranger Chain

When you have set up an arranger chain that you like, and you are sure that you do not want to
edit it any more, you can convert it into a linear project.

PREREQUISITE
You have saved a copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain.

NOTE

Flattening the arranger chain may remove events and parts from the project. Only use Flatten
when you are sure that you do not want to edit the arranger track/chain any more. If in doubt,
save a copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the arranger chain that you want to convert into a linear project.
2. Optional: Click Flatten (with Options & Preferences).

3. Optional: Activate the desired flattening options.

NOTE

If you realize that you want to do further adjustments, click Go Back. The activated flatten
options are kept.

284
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Jump Mode

4. Click Flatten.

RESULT
The events and parts in the project are reordered, repeated, resized, moved and/or deleted, so
that they correspond exactly to the arranger chain.

Jump Mode
If you have set up an arranger track and play it back, you have live access to the playback order.
This way, you can loop your arranger events with more flexibility regarding the length of the
playback.

PREREQUISITE
An arranger chain is set up, and the arranger mode is activated.

PROCEDURE
1. Play back your project.
2. In the lower part of the Inspector, open the Jump Mode pop-up menu, and select an option
from the pop-up menu.

This determines how long the active arranger event is played before jumping to the next
one.
3. In the Arranger Events list of the Inspector, click the arrow to the left of the arranger event
that you want to trigger.

RESULT
The arranger event is looped according to your settings, until you click another arranger event.

NOTE

You can assign key commands to trigger arranger events in the Arranger category of the Key
Commands dialog.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

● To stop Jump Mode after the time interval set in pop-up menu, click Stop.
● To continue playback from a specific arranger event, click the arranger event in the Current
Arranger Chain list.

RELATED LINKS
Jump Mode Options on page 285

Jump Mode Options

The Jump Mode pop-up menu allows you to define how long the active arranger event is played
before jumping to the next one.

● To show the Inspector for the arranger track, select the arranger track in the track list.

285
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Arranging Music to Video

The following options are available:

None
Jumps to the next section immediately.

4 Bars, 2 Bars
Jumps to the next arranger event after 2 or 4 bars. If the current arranger event is
shorter than 2 or 4 bars, playback jumps to the next arranger event at the end of the
event.

1 Bar
Jumps to the next section at the next barline.

1 Beat
Jumps to the next section at the next beat.

End
Plays the current section to the end, then jumps to the next section.

Arranging Music to Video

When you compose music for video, you can use arranger events to fill a specific video section
with music.

PREREQUISITE
You have connected and set up an external sync master device to your computer. You have
created a new, empty project and added a MIDI track.

NOTE

The following values and settings are just meant as an example.

PROCEDURE
1. Create a MIDI part that starts at position 00:00:00:00 and ends at position 00:01:00:00.
2. Create a MIDI part that starts at position 00:01:00:00 and ends at position 00:02:00:00.
3. Create a MIDI part that starts at position 00:02:00:00 and ends at position 00:03:00:00.
4. On the Transport panel, activate Sync.
5. Select Project > Add Track > Arranger.
The arranger track is added.
6. On the arranger track, add arranger events at the positions of the MIDI parts.
7. Set up the arranger chain A-A-B-B-C-C.
8. Activate Arranger mode and start playback.

286
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Arranger Track
Arranging Music to Video

9. On your external sync master device, start the external timecode at position 00:00:10:00.
In your project, the position 00:00:10:00 is located, and arranger part A is played back.
10. Start your external sync master device at a position that does not match the project start
time, for example, 00:01:10:00.
In your project, the position 00:01:10:00 is located, and arranger part A is played back.

RESULT
If you position the external sync master device to a position that does not match the project start
time, Cubase automatically jumps to the right position in the arranger track.

NOTE

The reference for the external timecode can be MIDI or any other timecode that can be
interpreted by Cubase.

RELATED LINKS
Arranger Track on page 114

287
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Markers

Markers are used to locate certain positions quickly. There are two types of markers: position
markers and cycle markers.

If you often find yourself jumping to a specific position within a project, you should insert a
marker at this position. You can also use markers to make range selections or for zooming.

Markers are located on the marker track. You can add 1 marker track.

Vertical marker lines are shown in the Project window to indicate marker positions on all tracks
throughout the entire project.

NOTE

● Marker lines are shown behind other events on other tracks. If you need a more pronounced
indication of the lines, consider lowering the Event Opacity in the Preferences dialog (Event
Display page).

RELATED LINKS
Position Markers on page 289
Cycle Markers on page 289
Marker Track on page 288
Event Opacity on page 892

Marker Track
A marker track is used for adding and editing markers.

1 Add Position Marker

Adds a position marker at the cursor position.
2 Add Cycle Marker
Adds a cycle marker at the cursor position.
3 Locate pop-up menu
If you select a position or a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the corresponding marker in
the event display or in the Markers window is selected.
4 Cycle pop-up menu
If you select a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the left and right locators are set to the
corresponding cycle marker.
5 Zoom pop-up menu
If you select a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the view zooms to the corresponding cycle
marker.

288
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Markers
Position Markers

6 Cycle marker event (inactive)

Shows an inactive cycle marker event.
7 Position marker event (inactive)
Shows an inactive marker event.
8 Position marker event (active)
Shows an active marker event.

Adding, Moving, and Removing the Marker Track

You can add, move, and remove the marker track.

● To add a marker track to the project, select Project > Add Track > Marker.
● To move a marker track to another position in the track list, click and drag it up or down.
● To remove the marker track, right-click it in the track list and select Remove Selected
Tracks.
● To remove an empty marker track, select Project > Remove Empty Tracks.
This also removes any other tracks that are empty.

Position Markers
Position markers allow you to save a specific position.

Position markers on the marker track are shown as marker events: vertical lines with the marker
description (if assigned) and number beside it. If you select a marker track, all of its markers are
shown in the Inspector.

Cycle Markers
By creating cycle markers, you can save any number of left and right locator positions as start
and end positions of a range and recall them by double-clicking on the corresponding marker.

Cycle markers are shown on a marker track as two markers bridged by a horizontal line. Cycle
markers are ideal for saving sections of a project.

By defining cycle markers for the intro, verse, and chorus of a song, for example, you can
quickly navigate to the song sections and repeat the section by activating Activate Cycle on the
Transport panel.

You can zoom in on a cycle marker, by holding Alt/Opt , and double-clicking the cycle marker.

RELATED LINKS
Setting the Locators Using Cycle Markers on page 295

Adding and Editing Markers on the Marker Track

Cubase offers several ways to add position and cycle markers to a marker track and to edit them.

NOTE

When editing markers on a marker track, snapping is taken into account.

● To add a position marker, press Alt/Opt , and click on the marker track.

289
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Markers
Markers Window

To add a position marker and instantly rename it, press Shift - Alt , and click on the marker
track.
● To add a position marker at the project cursor position, click Add Position Marker in the
track control area, or use a key command.
● To add a cycle marker, press Ctrl/Cmd , click and drag on the marker track.
To add a cycle marker and instantly rename it, press Shift - Ctrl/Cmd , and drag on the
marker track.
● To add a cycle marker to the locator range, click Add Cycle Marker in the track control area,
or use a key command.
To add and instantly rename a cycle marker to the locator range, use Shift -click Add Cycle
Marker.
● To change the start/end position of a cycle marker, drag the start/end handle.
Alternatively, you can edit the marker positions on the info line.
● To cut a range in a cycle marker, select a range in the cycle marker, and press Ctrl/Cmd - X .
● To set the marker start/end of the selected cycle marker to the cursor position, select
Project > Markers to open the Markers window, and select Functions > Set Marker
Start/End to Cursor.
● To move a position marker, select it and drag it. To move a cycle marker to another position,
drag its upper border.
Alternatively, you can edit the marker positions on the info line.
● To delete a marker, select it, and press Delete , or use the Erase tool.
To delete all markers on a track that are situated at a later timeline position, select the Erase
tool, and Alt/Opt -click.

RELATED LINKS
Marker Track on page 288

Markers Window
In the Markers window, you can view and edit markers.

To open the Markers window, you have the following possibilities:

● Select Project > Markers.

● On the Transport panel in the marker section, click Open Markers Window.
● Use a key command (by default Ctrl/Cmd - M ).

290
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Markers
Markers Window

Settings Section
Show Marker IDs on Marker Track
If this option is activated, the marker IDs are shown on marker track events.

Cycle Follows When Locating to Markers

This automatically sets the left and right locators to a position or cycle marker when
locating to this marker. This is useful if you need to set the locators on the fly during
recording for Punch In/Punch Out, for example.

Sync Selection
If this option is activated, the selection in the Markers window is linked to the selection
in the Project window.

NOTE

● Sync Selection is automatically deactivated when a recording is started and

activated again after stopping the recording.

Marker List Section

Add Position Marker
Adds a position marker at the cursor position.

Add Cycle Marker

Adds a cycle marker at the cursor position.

Remove Marker
Removes the marker that is selected in the marker list.

Functions pop-up menu

Allows you to move selected markers on the project timeline and to reassign the
marker IDs of all position or cycle markers in the marker list.

● Move Markers to Cursor moves position markers or start positions of cycle

markers to the cursor position.
● Reassign Position Marker IDs reassigns the IDs for all position markers on the
active marker track to match the order of markers on the track.

291
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Markers
Markers Window

● Reassign Cycle Marker IDs reassigns the IDs for all cycle markers on the active
marker track to match the order of markers on the track.

Auto-Scroll with Project Cursor

Allows you to keep track of the locate arrow, even if your project contains a high
number of markers. If this option is activated, the Markers window is automatically
scrolled to keep the locate arrow visible.

List of markers
Lists the markers of the selected track.

RELATED LINKS
Reassigning Marker IDs on page 294

Editing in the Markers Window

In the Markers window, you can select, edit, add, move, and remove markers. You can edit
multiple markers at the same time.

● To select or edit a marker, click on it.

To select multiple markers, Shift - or Ctrl/Cmd -click them.
● To add a position marker at the cursor position, click Add Position Marker.
A position marker is added at the current project cursor position on the marker track.
● To add a cycle marker at the cursor position, click Add Cycle Marker.
This adds a cycle marker between the left and right locators on the marker track.
● To move position markers or the start of cycle markers to the cursor position, select the
markers. From the Functions pop-up menu, select Move Markers to Cursor. For cycle
markers, this operation moves the end of the marker accordingly.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can enter the new position numerically in the Position column.

● To remove markers, select them, and click Remove Marker.

RELATED LINKS
Markers Window on page 290

Navigating in the Marker List

You can navigate in the marker list using your computer keyboard, and you can select entries by
pressing Return . This is a quick and easy way to jump to markers during playback or recording.

● To move to the previous/next marker in the list, press the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys.
● To jump to the first/last marker, press the Home / End keys.
● To move up/down a page in the list, press the Page Up / Page Down keys.

Sorting and Reordering the Marker List

You can customize the display of the marker attributes in the marker list by sorting or reordering
the columns.

● To sort the marker list by a specific attribute, click on the corresponding column header.
● To reorder the marker attributes, drag and drop the corresponding column headers.

292
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Markers
Markers Window

● To adjust the width of a column, place the mouse pointer between two column headers, and
drag left or right.

NOTE

Regardless of what attributes you sort by, the second sort criterion will always be the position
attribute.

Marker Attributes
Marker attributes are shown in the marker list of the Markers window.

● To open the Markers window, select Project > Markers.

The following attribute columns are available:

Locate

An arrow indicates which marker is at the project cursor position (or closest to
the project cursor). If you click in this column, the project cursor is moved to the
corresponding marker position. This column cannot be hidden.

ID
Shows the marker ID numbers.

Type
Indicates whether a marker is a position marker or a cycle marker.

Position
Allows you to view and edit the time positions for position markers and the start
positions for cycle markers. This column cannot be hidden.

End
Allows you to view and edit the end positions of cycle markers.

Length
Allows you to view and edit the length of cycle markers.

Description
Allows you to view and edit marker descriptions.

RELATED LINKS
Marker IDs on page 294
Cycle Markers on page 289

Editing Attributes
You can edit marker attributes in the Markers window or on the info line.

To edit marker attributes in the Markers window, proceed as follows:

● To edit a marker attribute, select the corresponding marker, click in the desired attribute
column, and make your changes.
● To change the attributes of several markers, select the markers, and activate the checkbox
for the attribute.
All selected markers change their attributes accordingly. Note that this does not work when
clicking on a timecode value or a text field.

293
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Markers
Markers Window

NOTE

To navigate in the list of marker attributes, you can also use the Tab key and the Up Arrow ,
Down Arrow , Left Arrow , and Right Arrow keys.

To edit a marker attribute on the info line, select the marker in the Project window, and click the
corresponding attribute field on the info line.

NOTE

To choose which marker attributes are displayed on the info line, click Set up Info Line to the
right of the info line.

RELATED LINKS
Info Line on page 47

Marker IDs
Each position or cycle marker on a marker track has its own marker ID.

When you add a position marker, it is automatically and sequentially assigned an ID number,
starting from 1 . IDs for cycle markers are shown in brackets and start from 1 .

You can change ID numbers at any time, which allows you to assign specific markers to key
commands.

You can also automatically reassign the IDs for all position or cycle markers to match the order
of markers on a track. To do so, select the corresponding function from the Functions pop-up
menu.

RELATED LINKS
Reassigning Marker IDs on page 294

Reassigning Marker IDs

Sometimes, especially when setting markers on the fly, you may forget or miss to set a marker.
When added later, the ID of this marker does not correspond to its position on the marker track.
Therefore, it is possible to reassign the IDs for all markers on a track.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Markers window.
2. From the Functions pop-up menu, select either Reassign Position Marker IDs or Reassign
Cycle Marker IDs.

RESULT
The marker IDs of the selected type are reassigned to match the order of markers on the marker
track.

294
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Markers
Setting the Locators Using Cycle Markers

Setting the Locators Using Cycle Markers

Cycle markers represent ranges in your project. You can use them for moving the left and right
locators.

PROCEDURE
● To set the left locator to the cycle marker start and the right locator to the cycle marker end,
perform one of the following actions:

● Double-click on a cycle marker.

● Select a cycle marker from the Cycle pop-up menu in the track list.

RESULT
The left and right locators are moved to encompass the cycle marker.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Now you can move the project cursor position to the start or the end of the cycle marker by
moving it to the corresponding locator or use cycle markers to export specific ranges of your
project with the Export Audio Mixdown dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Cycle Markers on page 289

Using Markers to Select Ranges

Markers can be used in conjunction with the Range Selection tool to make range selections in
the Project window. This is useful if you quickly want to make a selection that spans all tracks in
the project.

PROCEDURE
1. Set markers at the start and at the end of the section that you want to move or copy.
2. Select the Range Selection tool, and double-click on the marker track between the markers.
Everything in the project within the marker boundaries is selected. Any function or
processing you perform now affects the selection only.
3. Click on the marker track in the selected range, and drag the range to a new position.
If you hold down Alt/Opt while you drag the range, the selection in the Project window is
copied instead.

Importing and Exporting Markers

Markers and marker tracks can be imported and exported.

The following files can contain markers:

● Wave files
● MIDI files

RELATED LINKS
Importing Markers from Wave Files on page 296
Importing Markers via MIDI on page 296
Exporting Markers via MIDI on page 296

295
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Markers
Importing and Exporting Markers

Importing Markers from Wave Files

You can add position and cycle markers from wave files that contain a marker chunk.

The Extract Markers from Wave File function allows you to extract the marker information from
the marker chunk of the audio and to add the corresponding markers to the marker track.

NOTE

If your project does not contain a marker track, it is added automatically.

● Select an audio event with a marker chunk, and select Audio > Advanced > Extract Markers
from Wave File.

Importing Markers via MIDI

You can import position markers by importing MIDI files that contain markers. This is useful if
you want to use your marker tracks in other projects or if you want to share them with other
Cubase users. Any markers you have added are included in the MIDI file as standard MIDI file
marker events.

● Activate Import Markers in the Preferences dialog (MIDI—MIDI File page).

The following settings are imported:

● The start position of position markers and cycle markers

RELATED LINKS
Importing MIDI Files on page 255

Exporting Markers via MIDI

You can export your markers as part of a MIDI file.

● To include any markers in the MIDI file, activate Export Markers in the Export Options
dialog.

The following settings are exported:

● The start position of position markers and cycle markers

NOTE

To export markers via MIDI export, your project must contain a marker track.

RELATED LINKS
Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files on page 141

296
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 MixConsole

The MixConsole provides a common environment for producing mixes in stereo. It allows you to
control level, pan, solo/mute status, etc. for audio and MIDI channels. Furthermore, you can set
up input and output routing for multiple tracks or channels at the same time.

You can open the MixConsole in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 297
MixConsole Window on page 298

MixConsole in Lower Zone

You can show a MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window. This enables you to
access the MixConsole functions in a fixed zone of the Project window. The MixConsole in the
lower zone of the Project window does not follow any visibility changes that you perform in the
MixConsole window.

To open a MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window, do one of the following:

● Press Alt/Opt - F3 .
● Select Studio > MixConsole in Project Window.

The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window is divided into the following sections:

Toolbar
The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.

297
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Channel section
The channel section displays MixConsole functions that are organized in sections, such
as routing, insert, or sends.

Fader section
The fader section is optional. The fader section shows all channels in the same order as
in the track list.

RELATED LINKS
Set up Window Layout Pane on page 300
Fader Section on page 310
Inserts Section on page 319
Sends Section on page 331
Filtering Channel Types on page 306
Linking Channels on page 307
Functions Menu on page 308

MixConsole Window
You can open the MixConsole in a separate window.

To open the MixConsole in a separate window, do one of the following:

● Press F3 .
● Select Studio > MixConsole.
● On the Project window toolbar, click Open MixConsole.

NOTE

This is only visible on the toolbar if the Media & MixConsole Windows section is activated.

298
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

The MixConsole is divided into the following sections:

Toolbar
The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.

Left Zone
Allows you to set up the visibility of channels in the fader section.

Channel section
The channel section displays MixConsole functions that are organized in sections, such
as routing, insert, or sends.

Fader section
The fader section is optional. The fader section shows all channels in the same order as
in the track list.

RELATED LINKS
Set up Window Layout Pane on page 300
MixConsole Left Zone on page 301
MixConsole Toolbar on page 302
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Fader Section on page 310
Adding Pictures to MixConsole Channels on page 333
Adding Notes to a MixConsole Channel on page 334
Channel Latency Overview on page 334
Strip Section on page 323

299
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Set up Window Layout Pane

The Set up Window Layout pane allows you to select the sections to be shown in the
MixConsole.

To open the Set up Window Layout pane, click Set up Window Layout on the MixConsole
toolbar.

You can choose to display the following sections:

Channel Overview (not available in the lower zone)

Displays all channels as boxes. If you have more channels than can be displayed in the
window, you can use the channel overview to navigate to further channels and select
them.

Meter Bridge (not available in the lower zone)

Allows you to monitor the levels of your channels.

Left Zone
Shows the left zone with the following tabs:
● Visibility

Channel Name
Shows the name of the channel.

Equalizer Curve
Allows you to draw an EQ curve. You can click in the curve display to open a larger view,
where you can edit the curve points.

Channel sections
Allows you to show additional channel sections, as needed.

● Hardware
● Routing
● Pre
● Inserts

300
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

● EQ
● Strip
● Sends
● Quick Controls

Pictures
Allows you to add a track picture to the selected channel. Pictures can help you to
quickly identify your MixConsole channels.

Notepad
Allows you to enter notes and comments about a channel. Each channel has its own
notepad.

Channel Latency
Allows you to show the latencies caused by insert effects or channel strip modules.

Fader
Allows you to show the fader section. The fader section displays input and output
channels in conjunction with audio, instrument, MIDI, drum, sampler, group, effect,
and VCA fader channels.

RELATED LINKS
MixConsole Window on page 298
MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 297
Channel Sections on page 315
MixConsole Left Zone on page 301

MixConsole Left Zone

The left zone of the MixConsole shows a list of the MixConsole channels that allows you to
show/hide specific channels.

● To show/hide the left zone of the MixConsole, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the
MixConsole window toolbar.

Visibility
Lists all channels contained in your project and allows you to show/hide specific
channels.

RELATED LINKS
MixConsole Toolbar on page 302

301
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

MixConsole Visibility
The Visibility tab in the MixConsole lists all channels in your project and allows you to show/hide
specific channels.

● To show/hide channels, check/uncheck them by clicking to the left of the channel name.

NOTE

The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window does not reflect any visibility
changes that you perform in the MixConsole window, and vice versa.

● To collapse/expand groups and folders, click the group or folder name.

● To reorder channels, select them, and drag them up or down.

NOTE

You can also reorder tracks/channels by selecting them on the Visibility tab of the
MixConsole and dropping them on the Project window track list or the MixConsole fader
section, and vice versa.

RELATED LINKS
Reordering Channels in the MixConsole on page 332

MixConsole Toolbar
The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.

NOTE

Settings that are available in the Project window toolbar, such as Locators, State Buttons,
Markers, are not shown in the MixConsole toolbar in the lower zone.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are
always shown.

Channel Visibility Configuration

Channel Visibility Configurations

Allows you to create configurations that are useful for switching quickly between
different visibility setups.

302
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Set Channel Type Filter

Opens the channel filter that allows you to show/hide all channels of a particular
channel type.

Locators
Go to Left Locator Position

Allows you to go to the left locator position.

Left Locator Position

Shows the left locator position.

Go to Right Locator Position

Allows you to go to the right locator position.

Right Locator Position

Shows the right locator position.

Locator Range Duration

Locators to Selection

Allows you to set the locators to the selection.

Locator Range Duration

Shows the duration of the locator range.

Transport Buttons
Go to Previous Marker/Zero

Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline.

Go to Next Marker/Project End

Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end.

Rewind

Moves backward.

Forward

Moves forward.

Activate Cycle

Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.

303
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Stop

Stops playback.

Start

Starts playback.

Transport Record

Activates/Deactivates record mode.

Time Displays
Primary Time Display

Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format.

Select Primary Time Format

Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display.

Secondary Time Display

Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format.

Select Secondary Time Format

Allows you to select a time format for the secondary time display.

Markers
Jump to Marker

Allows you to set and locate marker positions.

Open Markers Window

Opens the Markers window.

State Buttons
Deactivate All Mute States

Deactivates all mute states.

Deactivate All Solo States

Deactivates all solo states.

Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks

Activates/Deactivates read automation for all tracks.

304
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Activate/Deactivate Write for All Tracks

Activates/Deactivates write automation for all tracks.

Bypass Inserts of All Visible Channels

Bypasses the inserts of all visible channels.

Bypass EQs of All Visible Channels

Bypasses the EQs of all visible channels.

Bypass Channel Strip of All Visible Channels

Bypasses the channel strip modules of all visible channels.

Bypass Sends of All Visible Channels

Bypasses the sends of all visible channels.

Link Group
Temporary Link Mode

Synchronizes all touched parameters of selected channels.

Zoom Palette
Reduce Channel Width

Allows you to reduce the channel width.

Set Number of Channels

Displays the number of channels that are currently set.

Increase Channel Width

Allows you to increase the channel width.

Reduce Section Height

Allows you to reduce the height of the sections.

Increase Section Height

Allows you to increase the height of the sections.

Audio Performance Meter

Audio Performance Meter

305
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

The upper bar displays either the current realtime peak or the ASIO-Guard load,
depending on which of the two has the higher value. The lower bar shows the hard
disk transfer load of the disk engine.
For a more detailed display of realtime peak and ASIO-Guard load, click to open the
Audio Performance panel.

Right Divider
Right Divider
Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.

Mixer Functions Menu

Functions Menu

Opens a pop-up menu, where you can select a MixConsole function.

Window Zone Controls

Show/Hide Left Zone

Shows/Hides the left zone of the window.

Set up Window Layout

Allows you to set up the window layout.

Filtering Channel Types

The channel types filter on the MixConsole toolbar allows you to determine which channel types
are shown.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Set Channel Type Filter.
This opens the channel types filter.

2. Click to the left of a channel type to uncheck it and to hide all channels of that type.

RESULT
Channels of the filtered type are removed from the fader section, and the color of the Set
Channel Type Filter button changes to indicate that a channel type is hidden.

306
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Channel Visibility Configurations Menu

The Channel Visibility Configurations button on the MixConsole toolbar allows you to create
configurations that are useful for switching quickly between different visibility setups.

The button displays the name of the active configuration. A list of configurations is shown as
soon as you create at least one configuration. To load a configuration, select it from the menu.
Channel visibility configurations are saved with the project.

Add Configuration
Opens the Add Configuration dialog that allows you to save the configuration and to
enter a name for it.

Update Configuration
If you change the active configuration, this is indicated by an asterisk after the
configuration name. Use this function to save changes to the active configuration.

Rename Configuration
Opens the Rename Configuration dialog that allows you to rename the active
configuration.

Delete Configuration
Allows you to delete the active configuration.

Move Configuration to Position

This function becomes available if 2 or more configurations exist. It allows you to
change the position of the active configuration on the menu. This is useful, as you can
assign key commands to the first 8 configurations in the Channel & Track Visibility
category of the Key Commands dialog.

Saving Configurations
To quickly switch between different channel setups, you can save configurations. The
configurations contain visibility settings as well as the show/hide status of channel types and
sections.

PROCEDURE
1. Set up the configuration that you want to save.
2. On the toolbar, click Channel Visibility Configurations.
3. From the pop-up menu, select Add Configuration.
4. In the Add Configuration dialog, enter a name for the configuration.
5. Click OK.

RESULT
The configuration is saved, and you can return to it at any time.

Linking Channels
You can link selected channels in the MixConsole. Any volume change that is applied to one
channel is mirrored by all linked channels. Q-Link allows you to temporarily synchronize all
touched parameters of selected channels.

307
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Linking Selected Channels

You can link selected channels. This is useful, if you want to apply volume changes to all channels
that are linked.

PROCEDURE
1. In the MixConsole, select the channels that you want to link.
2. Right-click one of the selected channels, and select Link Selected Channels.

RESULT
The selected channels are linked.

Using Quick Link

You can activate Q-Link to synchronize all touched parameters of selected channels.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the channels that you want to link.
2. On the MixConsole toolbar, activate Q-Link.

NOTE

You can also press Shift - Alt/Opt to temporarily link channels. In that case, the link is only
active as long as you press the keys.

3. Change the parameters for one of the selected channels.

RESULT
The changes are applied to all selected channels until you deactivate Q-Link.

Functions Menu
The Functions Menu contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.

● To open the Functions Menu, click Functions Menu on the MixConsole toolbar.

Scroll to Selected Channel

If this option is activated and you select a channel on the Visibility tab, the selected
channel is automatically displayed in the fader section.

Copy First Selected Channel’s Settings

Copies the settings of the first selected channel.

Paste Settings to Selected Channels

Pastes the settings to the selected channels.

Zoom
Opens a submenu where you can increase or reduce the channel width and the section
height.

Link Sections to Configurations

If this option is activated, the section status is taken into account when you save and
load a configuration.

Open Audio Connections

Opens the Audio Connections window.

308
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Constrain Delay Compensation

Allows you to activate/deactivate the Constrain Delay Compensation that keeps all
channels in perfect sync and automatically compensates any delay inherent in VST
plug-ins during playback.

EQ/Filter Transition
Allows you to change the EQ/Filter Transition mode from Soft to Quick.

Save Selected Channels

Saves the settings for the selected channels.

Load Selected Channels

Loads the settings for the selected channels.

Global Meter Settings

Opens a submenu where you can set up the global meter settings.

Reset MixConsole Channels

Allows you to reset EQ, insert, and send effect settings for all channels or for selected
channels only. Solo and mute buttons are deactivated, the volume fader is set to 0 dB,
and pan is set to the center position.

RELATED LINKS
MixConsole Toolbar on page 302

Saving MixConsole Settings

You can save MixConsole settings for selected audio-related channels and load them into any
project.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the channels with the settings that you want to save.
2. Select Functions Menu > Save Selected Channels.
3. In the file dialog, specify the file name and location.
4. Click Save.

RESULT
The settings for the selected channels are saved with the file extension .vmx. The input/output
routing is not saved.

Loading MixConsole Settings

You can load MixConsole settings that have been saved for selected channels.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the same number of channels that you selected when you saved your MixConsole
settings.
The loaded MixConsole settings are applied in the same order as originally saved. For
example, if you have saved the settings for channels 4, 6, and 8, and apply these settings to
channels 1, 2, and 3, the settings saved for channel 4 are applied to channel 1, the settings
saved for channel 6 to channel 2, and so on.
2. Select Functions Menu > Load Selected Channels.

309
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

3. In the Load Selected Channels dialog, select the .vmx file and click Open.

RESULT
The channel settings are applied to the selected channels.

NOTE

When you apply loaded MixConsole settings to fewer channels, some of the saved settings are
not applied. Since the saved settings are applied from left to right, as shown in the MixConsole,
the settings for the channels furthest to the right are not applied to any channels.

Fader Section
The fader section is the heart of the MixConsole. It shows input and output channels in
conjunction with audio, instrument, MIDI, group, and effect channels.

NOTE

If a channel is deactivated on the Visibility tab or if its channel type is deactivated, it is not shown
in the fader section. The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window does not follow
any visibility changes you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa. It is linked to the
track visibility of the Project window.

The fader section allows you to do the following:

● Set panorama
● Activate mute and solo
● Open channel settings
● Set volume
● Enable automation
● Set input levels

310
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

NOTE

All fader section functions and settings are also available in the MixConsole in the lower zone of
the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
Channel Settings on page 336
Write/Read Automation on page 526

Pan Control
For each audio-related channel with at least a stereo output configuration, you can find a pan
control at the top of the fader section. For MIDI channels, the pan control sends out MIDI pan
messages. The result depends on how your MIDI instrument is set to respond to pan.

The pan control allows you to position a channel in the stereo spectrum.

● To make fine adjustments, hold down Shift when you move the pan control.
● To select the default center pan position, hold down Ctrl/Cmd , and click the pan control.
● To edit the value numerically, double-click the pan control.

RELATED LINKS
Creating New Projects on page 84

Stereo Balance Panner

The stereo balance panner allows you to control the balance between the left and right channels.
It is activated by default.

Pan Bypass
You can bypass the panning for all audio-related channels.

● To activate panning bypass, activate the bypass button to the left or press Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/
Opt - Shift and click the pan control.
● To deactivate panning bypass, press Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Shift , and click again.

When panning is bypassed for a channel, the following happens:

● Mono channels are panned center.

● Stereo channels are panned hard left and right.

Using Solo and Mute

You can silence one or several channels using Solo and Mute.

● To silence a channel, click Mute.

Click again to deactivate the mute state for the channel.
● To mute all other channels, click Solo for a channel.
Click again to deactivate the solo state.
● To deactivate the mute or solo states for all channels simultaneously, click Deactivate All
Mute States or Deactivate All Solo States on the toolbar.

311
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

● To activate exclusive solo mode, hold down Ctrl/Cmd , and click Solo for the channel.
The Solo buttons of all other channels are deactivated.
● To activate Solo Defeat for a channel, Alt/Opt -click Solo or click and hold Solo.

In Solo Defeat mode, the channel is not muted when you solo another channel. Click again
to deactivate Solo Defeat.

Volume
Each channel in the fader section of the MixConsole has a volume fader. The fader levels are
displayed below the fader, in dB for audio-related channels and as MIDI volume (0 to 127) for
MIDI channels.

● To change the volume, move the fader up or down.

● To make fine volume adjustments, press Shift while moving the faders.
● To reset the volume to its default value, press Ctrl/Cmd and click a fader.

For audio channels, the volume fader controls the volume of the channel before it is routed to an
output bus, directly or via a group channel. For output channels, the volume fader controls the
master output level of all audio channels that are routed to an output bus. For MIDI channels,
the volume fader controls the volume changes in the MixConsole by sending out MIDI volume
messages to the connected instruments that are set to respond to MIDI messages.

Global Meter Settings Menu

You can change the meter characteristics for audio channels using the context menu of the
channel meter.

Right-click the channel meter and select one of the following options from the Global Meter
Settings menu:

Meter Peak - Hold Peaks

If this option is activated, the highest registered levels are held and shown as static
horizontal lines in the meter.

Meter Peak - Hold Forever

If this option is activated, the peak levels are shown until you reset the meters. If
this option is deactivated, you can use the Meters’ Peak Hold Time parameter in the
Preferences dialog (Metering page) to specify for how long the peak levels are held.
The peak hold time can be between 500 and 30000 ms.

Meter Position - Input

If this option is activated, the meters show input levels for all audio channels and input/
output channels. The input meters are post input gain.

Meter Position - Post-Fader

If this option is activated, the meters show post-fader levels.

Meter Position - Post-Panner

If this option is activated, the meters show post-fader levels and also reflect pan
settings.

Reset Meters
Resets the meters.

312
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Setting up Meter Colors

Setting up meter colors can help you to keep an overview of what levels are being reached.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select Metering > Appearance.

2. Do one of the following to set the level position for a color change:
● Double-click a level position to the right of the meter scale and enter the level (dB) value.
To enter dB values smaller than zero, add a minus sign before the entered number.
● Click a level position, and drag it to a specific level. Press Shift for more accurate
positioning.
● Click a level position, and nudge it up or down with the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys.
Press Shift for faster positioning.
3. Click the upper or lower part of a color handle so that a frame is shown. In the color picker,
select a color.
Selecting the same color for the upper and lower part of the handle results in a meter that
changes its colors gradually. Different colors indicate level changes even more precisely.

NOTE

● To add more color handles, click Add, or Alt -click at a level position to the right of the
meter scale. Each new handle is automatically associated with a default color.
● To remove a handle, select the handle and click Remove, or Ctrl/Cmd -click the handle.

4. Click OK.

RELATED LINKS
Metering - Appearance on page 901

313
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Level Meters
The channel meters show the level when you play back audio or MIDI. The Meter Peak Level
indicator shows the highest registered level.

● To reset the peak level, click the Meter Peak Level value.

NOTE

Input and output channels have clipping indicators. When they light up, lower the gain or the
levels until the indicator is no longer lit.

Input Levels
When recording digital sound, it is important to set the input levels high enough to ensure low
noise and high audio quality. At the same time, you must avoid clipping (digital distortion).

Setting Input Levels

In the MixConsole, you can set the input level. Make sure that the signal is loud enough but does
not exceed 0 dB.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Functions Menu > Global Meter Settings > Meter Position and activate Input.
In this mode, the input channel level meters show the level of the signal at the input of the
bus, before any adjustments, such as input gain, EQ, effects, level, or pan are made. This
allows you to check the level of the unprocessed signal coming into the audio hardware.
2. Play back the audio, and check the level meter for the input channel.
The signal should be as loud as possible without exceeding 0 dB, that is, the clipping
indicator for the input bus should not light up.
3. If necessary, adjust the input level in one of the following ways:
● Adjust the output level of the sound source or the external mixer.
● If possible, use the application program of the audio hardware to set the input levels.
Refer to the documentation for the audio hardware.
● If your audio hardware supports the ASIO control panel function, it may be possible
to make input level settings. To open the ASIO control panel, select Studio > Studio
Setup. In the Devices list, select your audio card. When this is selected, you can open
the control panel by clicking Control Panel in the settings section to the right.
4. Optional: Select Functions Menu > Global Meter Settings > Meter Position and activate
Post-Fader.

NOTE

This allows you to check the level of the audio being written to a file on your hard disk, which
is only necessary if you make any adjustments to the input channel.

5. Optional: In the Inserts section, click a slot and select an effect, or adjust the settings in the
Equalizer section.
For some effects, you may want to adjust the level of the signal going into the effect. Use the
input gain function for this. Press Shift or Alt/Opt to adjust the input gain.
6. Play back the audio, and check the level meter of the input channel.
The signal should be reasonably loud without exceeding 0 dB, that is, the clipping indicator
for the input bus should not light up.

314
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

7. If necessary, use the input channel fader to adjust the signal level.

Clipping
Clipping typically occurs in the audio hardware when an analog signal is too loud and therefore
converted to digital in the A/D converters of the hardware.

Channel Sections
Specific MixConsole functions, such as routing, insert, or sends, are organized in sections.

By default, all sections are expanded. To exclusively show the selected section and collapse the
other sections, right-click the section and activate Expand Sections Exclusively.

RELATED LINKS
Routing Section on page 316
Pre Section on page 317
Inserts Section on page 319
Equalizer Section on page 321
Strip Section on page 323
Sends Section on page 331
Set up Window Layout Pane on page 300

Copying and Moving Section and Channel Settings

You can use drag and drop to copy or move section and channel settings.

NOTE

● The Routing section can only be copied, not moved via drag and drop.
● Copying the Routing section via drag and drop is not possible for input channels and output
channels.

Drag and drop works between different channels or different section slots on the same channel.
When you drag, a visual feedback indicates the sections where you can drop your settings.

The following applies:

● To move the section settings from one section to another, drag the section, and drop it on
the section to which you want to move the settings.
● To copy the section settings from one section to another, press Alt/Opt , drag the section,
and drop it on the section to which you want to copy the settings.
● To copy the channel settings from one channel to another, drag the channel, and drop it on
the channel to which you want to copy the settings.

315
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

● To copy the channel settings from one channel to another, including the output routing
settings, press Alt/Opt , drag the channel, and drop it on the channel to which you want to
copy the settings.

You can copy section and channel settings between different types of channels, provided that the
target channels have corresponding settings.

● For example, copying from input/output channels leaves the sends settings in the target
channel unaffected.

Routing Section
The Routing section allows you to configure input and output routing, that is, to set up input and
output busses.

NOTE

This channel section is exclusively available in the MixConsole window.

Input busses are used when you record on an audio track. In this case, you must select from
which input bus to receive the audio.

NOTE

Your settings for the input channel become a permanent part of the recorded audio file.

Output busses are used when you play back an audio, group, or effect channel. In this case, you
must route the channel to an output bus.

Setting up Routing
You can set up the input and output busses in the Routing section of the MixConsole.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up busses and group channels in the Audio Connections window.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Routing to show the
Routing section above the fader section.
2. Click one of the slots of the Routing section to open the input or the output routing pop-up
menu for a channel.
3. In the routing selector, select an entry.

● To set up the routing for multiple selected channels simultaneously, press Shift - Alt/
Opt , and select a bus.
● To set several selected channels to incrementing busses (the second selected channel to
the second bus, the third one to the third bus, etc.), press Shift , and select a bus.
● To disconnect input or output bus assignments, select No Bus.

316
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Input Busses
The Input Routing selector only lists busses that correspond to the channel configuration.

Input Routing Configurations for Mono Channels

For mono channels, the following input routing configurations are available:

● Mono input busses.

● Mono output busses, or mono group output busses.
These should not lead to feedback.

RELATED LINKS
Routing Section on page 316

Input Routing Configurations for Stereo Channels

For stereo channels, the following input routing configurations are available:

● Mono or stereo input busses.

● Mono or stereo output busses, and mono or stereo group output busses.
These should not lead to feedback.

RELATED LINKS
Routing Section on page 316

Output Busses
For output busses, any assignment is possible.

You can route the output of audio, instrument, group, and effect channels to output, group, and
effect channels, or use it as an effect side-chain source.

Routing the outputs from multiple audio channels to a group allows you to control the channel
levels using one fader, and to apply the same effects and equalization to all the channels.

Pre Section
The Pre section for audio-related channels features a high-cut and a low-cut filter as well as gain
and phase settings.

NOTE

You cannot edit the Pre section settings in the EQ curve display.

RELATED LINKS
Equalizer Settings on page 321

Making Filter Settings

Each audio-related channel has separate high-cut and low-cut filters that allow you to attenuate
signals with frequencies that are higher or lower than the cutoff frequency.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Pre to show the Pre
section above the fader section.

317
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

2. Click to the left of the high-cut filter to activate the high-cut filter. You have the following
options:

● Drag the slider to adjust the cutoff frequency.

The available range spans from 20 kHz to 50 Hz.
● Click Select Filter Slope to the right of the high-cut filter to select a filter slope.
You can choose 6, 12, 24, 36, or 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB.
3. Click to the left of the low-cut filter to activate the low-cut filter. You have the following
options:

● Drag the slider to adjust the cutoff frequency.

The available range spans from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
● Click Select Filter Slope to the right of the low-cut filter to select a filter slope.
You can choose 6, 12, 24, 36, or 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB.

RESULT
The changed settings are visible in the curve display. If you deactivate the high-cut and low-cut
filters, the filter curves are removed from the display. Bypassed high-cut and low-cut filters are
displayed in a different color.

Making Input Gain Settings

The Pre-Gain slider allows you to change the level of a signal before it reaches the EQ and the
effects section. This is useful as the level going into certain effects can change the way the signal
is affected. A compressor, for example, can be driven harder by raising the input gain. You can
also use gain to boost the level of poorly recorded signals.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Pre to show the Pre
section above the fader section.
2. Drag the Gain slider to the left or to the right to cut or boost the gain.

Making Phase Settings

Each audio-related channel and input/output channel has a Phase button that allows you to
correct the phase for balanced lines and microphones that are wired backwards or that are out
of phase due to their positioning.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Pre to show the Pre
section above the fader section.
2. Activate Phase to invert the phase polarity for the signal.

View Options for Pre

The view options allow you to choose how the Pre controls are shown in the corresponding
section.

● To open the view options for Pre, right-click the Pre section header, and select Show Pre as.

The following options are available:

318
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Combined Label & Setting

Shows a combination of the label and the setting.

Separate Label & Setting

Shows the label and the setting separately.

Combined Label & Setting (Compact)

Shows a combination of the label and the setting on one line.

Inserts Section
The Inserts section for audio-related channels features insert effect slots that allow you to load
insert effects for a channel. For MIDI channels, you can load MIDI inserts.

For further information, see the separate document Plug-in Reference.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Effects on page 349

Adding Insert Effects

You can add insert effects to MixConsole channels.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Inserts to show the
Inserts section above the fader section.
2. Click one of the insert slots to open the insert selector.
3. Click an insert effect to select it.

RESULT
The selected insert effect is loaded and automatically activated. Its plug-in panel opens.

Bypassing Insert Effects

You can bypass all insert effects.

● To bypass all inserts, activate Inserts Bypass on/off at the top of the Inserts section.

319
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

● To bypass a single insert, activate Bypass Insert on/off on the left of the inserts slot.
● To deactivate bypassing, deactivate Bypass Insert on/off.
● To activate/deactivate an insert, Alt -click Bypass Insert on/off.

Activating Side-Chaining for Inserts

Some of the inserts feature side-chain functionality.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click an insert effect that supports side-chaining.
2. From the context menu, select Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining.

Saving/Loading FX Chain Presets

You can save and load all insert section settings using FX chain presets. FX chain presets have the
file name extension .fxchainpreset.

PROCEDURE
● Right-click the Inserts section header, and perform one of the following actions:
● To save the current settings as a preset, select Save FX Chain Preset, and name your
preset.
● To load a preset, select Load FX Chain Preset, and select a preset.

NOTE

You can also apply inserts with EQ and channel strip settings from track presets. You can
load, tag, and save FX chain presets in the MediaBay.

View Options for Inserts

The view options allow you to choose how to show the selected Inserts in the corresponding
section.

● To open the view options for inserts, right-click the Inserts section header, and select Show
Inserts as.

The following options are available:

Plug-in Names

Shows a combination of the plug-in names and the insert controls.

Plug-in Names & Insert Controls

Shows the plug-in names and the insert controls separately.

320
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Equalizer Section
The EQ section is only available for audio-related channels. It features a built-in parametric
equalizer with up to 4 bands for each audio channel.

Activating Equalizer Bands

In the EQ section, you can activate up to 4 EQ bands for each audio channel.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate EQ to show the EQ
section above the fader section.
2. Click EQ Band on/off to activate an EQ band.

Equalizer Settings
You can make equalizer settings for the 4 bands. The bands have different default frequency
values and different Q names. However, they all have the same frequency range (20 Hz to 20
kHz). You can specify different filter types for each individual module.

321
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

1 Equalizers Bypass on/off

Click to bypass all EQ bands.
2 Curve display
Click on the display in a channel to show a larger version. The display is also available in
the EQ section of the track Inspector, in the Project window and in the Channel Settings
window.
Clicking the curve display enlarges the view and shows a cross-hair cursor. The current
mouse position shows the frequency, note value, offset, and level at the top or bottom of the
display.

● Click to add a curve point and activate the corresponding EQ band.

● Double-click the curve point to deactivate it.
● Drag the curve point up or down to adjust the gain.
● Press Ctrl/Cmd to edit only the gain.
● Drag left or right to adjust the frequency.
● Press Alt/Opt to edit only the frequency.
● Press Shift while dragging to set the Q-factor.
● To invert the EQ curve, open the context menu, and select Invert EQ Settings.
The final curve shows the EQ settings as well as active high-cut and low-cut filters of the
Pre section settings. Bypassed filter settings are shown in a different color than the active
settings. Disabled filter settings are hidden from the display.

NOTE

You cannot edit the high-cut and low-cut filters in the curve display. To edit the filters, open
the Pre section.

Band Settings

1 EQ Band on/off
Activates/Deactivates the equalizer band.
2 Select EQ Band Type
Opens a pop-up menu, where you can select an EQ type for the band. Bands 1 and 4 can
act as parametric, shelving, or high/low-cut filters. EQ bands 2 and 3 are always parametric
filters.
3 Gain
Sets the amount of cut or boost. The range is ±24 dB.
4 Frequency
Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted. You can set the
frequency either in Hz or as a note value. If you enter a note value, the frequency is
automatically displayed in Hz. For example, a note value of A3 sets the frequency to 440

322
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Hz. When you enter a note value, you can also enter a cent offset; for example, A5 -23 or C4
+49.

NOTE

Enter a space between the note and the cent offset. Otherwise, the cent offsets are not taken
into account.

5 Q-Factor
Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values result in narrower
frequency ranges.

RELATED LINKS
Making Filter Settings on page 317

Saving/Loading EQ Presets
You can save and load EQ presets.

PROCEDURE
● Right-click the EQ section header, and perform one of the following actions:
● To save the current settings as a preset, select Save Preset, and name your preset.
● To load a preset, select Load Preset, and select a preset.

NOTE

You can also apply EQ with insert and channel strip settings from track presets. You can load,
tag, and save EQ presets in the MediaBay.

Strip Section
The Strip section is available for audio-related channels only. It allows you to load built-in
processing modules for separate channels. You can change the position of specific modules in
the signal flow via drag and drop.

Noise Gate
Allows you to silence audio signals below a set threshold level. As soon as the signal
level exceeds the set threshold, the gate opens to let the signal through.

Compressor
Allows you to create smooth compression effects. Drag the compressor up or down to
change its position in the signal flow.

EQ
Allows you to make EQ settings.

Tools
Provides various tools.

Sat
Allows you to add warmth to the sound.

Limit
Allows you to prevent clipping, even at high levels.

323
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Noise Gate
Noise gating silences audio signals below a set threshold. As soon as the signal level exceeds the
threshold, the gate opens to let the signal through.

Threshold
Determines the level at which Gate is activated. Signal levels above the set threshold
open the gate, and signal levels below the set threshold close the gate.

Range
Adjusts the attenuation of the gate when it is closed. The higher the value, the higher
the level of the signal that passes through the closed gate.

Attack
Sets the time after which the gate opens when it is triggered.

Release
Sets the time after which the gate closes.

Listen Filter
Allows you to monitor the filtered signal.

Activate Filter
Activates/Deactivates the internal side-chain and allows you to set up a filter to modify
the signal detection.

Auto Release
Automatically finds the best Release setting for the audio material.

Filter Frequency
If the internal side-chain is activated, this parameter sets the filter frequency for the
signal detection.

Q-Factor
If the internal side-chain is activated, this parameter sets the resonance of the filter for
the signal detection.

State LED
Indicates whether the gate is open (LED lights up in green), closed (LED lights up in
red), or in an intermediate state (LED lights up in yellow).

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.

Compressor
This channel strip module reduces the dynamic range of the audio, making softer sounds louder
or louder sounds softer, or both.

Open the pop-up menu to select Standard Compressor, Tube Compressor,

orVintageCompressor.

Standard Compressor

The Standard Compressor allows you to create smooth compression effects. Drag the
compressor up or down to change its position in the signal flow.

Threshold
Determines the level where the compressor kicks in. Only signal levels above the set
threshold are processed.

324
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Ratio
Sets the amount of gain reduction that is applied to signals above the set threshold.
A ratio of 3:1 means that for every 3 dB the input level increases, the output level
increases by 1 dB.

Attack
Determines how fast the compressor responds to signals above the set threshold.
The longer the attack time, the more of the early part of the signal passes through
unprocessed.

Release
Sets the time it takes for the gain to return to its original level when the signal drops
below the threshold.

AutoMakeUp
Automatically adjusts the output for gain loss.

Auto Release
Automatically finds the best Release setting for the audio material.

MakeUp Gain
Compensates for output gain loss caused by compression.

Gain Reduction LED

Indicates the level of compression of the signal.

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.

RELATED LINKS
Standard Compressor – Details View on page 341

Tube Compressor

The Tube Compressor with integrated tube-simulation allows you to achieve smooth and warm
compression effects. The VU meter shows the level of gain reduction. This compressor features
an internal side-chain section that lets you filter the trigger signal.

Input Gain
Determines the compression level. The higher the input gain, the more compression is
applied.

Output Gain
Sets the output gain.

Gain Reduction LED

Indicates the level of compression of the signal.

Attack
Determines how fast the compressor responds. The longer the attack time, the more of
the early part of the signal passes through unprocessed.

Release
Sets the time it takes for the gain to return to its original level.

Auto Release
Automatically finds the best Release setting for the audio material.

325
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Drive
Controls the amount of tube saturation.

Mix
Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal.

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.

RELATED LINKS
Tube Compressor – Details View on page 341

VintageCompressor

The VintageCompressor is modeled after vintage compressors.

Input Gain
In combination with the Output Gain setting, this parameter determines the
compression level. The higher the input gain setting and the lower the output gain
setting, the more compression is applied.

Output Gain
Sets the output gain.

Attack
Determines the response time of the compressor. The longer the attack time, the more
of the early part of the signal passes through unprocessed.

Release
Sets the time it takes for the gain to return to its original level.

Attack Mode (Punch)

If this option is activated, the early attack phase of the signal is preserved, retaining the
original punch in the audio material, even with short Attack settings.

Auto Release
Automatically finds the best Release setting for the audio material.

Gain Reduction LED

Indicates the level of compression of the signal.

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.

RELATED LINKS
VintageCompressor - Details View on page 342

EQ
You can make equalizer settings for each of the 4 bands. They have different default frequency
values and different Q names. However, they all have the same frequency range (20 Hz to 20
kHz). You can specify different filter types for each individual module.

1 EQ Band on/off
Activates/Deactivates the equalizer band.
2 Select EQ Band Type
Opens a pop-up menu, where you can select an EQ type for the band. Bands 1 and 4 can act
as parametric, shelf, or high/low-cut filters. EQ bands 2 and 3 are always parametric filters.

326
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

3 Gain
Sets the amount of cut or boost. The range is ±24 dB.
4 Q-Factor
Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values result in narrower
frequency ranges.
5 Frequency
Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted.

Tools
Provides a tool to attenuate or boost the gain of the attack and release phase of your audio.

EnvelopeShaper

This channel strip module can be used to attenuate or boost the gain of the attack and the
release phases of audio material. You can use the knobs to change parameter values. Be careful
with levels when boosting the gain. If needed, reduce the output level to avoid clipping.

Attack
Changes the gain of the attack phase of the signal.

Release
Changes the gain of the release phase of the signal.

Attack Length
Determines the length of the attack phase.

Output Gain
Sets the output level.

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.

Sat
Allows you to add warmth to the sound. Open the pop-up menu to select between Tape
Saturation and Tube Saturation.

Tape Saturation

This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording on analog tape
machines.

Drive
Controls the amount of tape saturation.

Low Filter
A low shelving filter with fixed frequency.

High Filter
A high-cut filter. Use the frequency fader to reduce the harshness of the output signal.

Dual
Simulates the use of two tape machines.

Auto Gain
Adjusts the gain automatically.

327
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Output
Sets the output gain.

Drive Amount LED

Indicates the amount of drive of the signal.

Tube Saturation

This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording of analogue
tube compressors.

Drive
Controls the amount of tube saturation.

Low Filter
A low shelving filter with fixed frequency.

High Filter
A high-cut filter. Use the frequency fader to reduce harshness.

Output Gain
Sets the output gain.

Drive Amount LED

Indicates the amount of drive of the signal.

Limit
Allows you to prevent clipping, even at high levels. Open the pop-up menu to choose between
Brickwall Limiter, Maximizer, and Standard Limiter.

Brickwall Limiter

Brickwall Limiter ensures that the output level never exceeds a set limit. Due to its fast
attack time, Brickwall Limiter can even reduce short audio level peaks without creating audible
artifacts. However, this channel strip module creates a latency of 1 ms.

Threshold
Determines the level where the limiter kicks in. Only signal levels above the set
threshold are processed.

Release
Sets the time it takes for the gain to return to the original level when the signal drops
below the threshold.

Auto Release
Automatically finds the best Release setting for the audio material.

Gain Reduction LED

Displays the amount of gain reduction.

Maximizer

This channel strip module raises the loudness of audio material without the risk of clipping.

Optimize
Determines the loudness of the signal.

Mix Amount
Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal.

328
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Output
Determines the maximum output level. Set this to 0 dB to avoid clipping.

Gain Reduction LED

Displays the amount of gain reduction.

Standard Limiter

This channel strip module ensures that the output level does not exceed a set output level, to
prevent clipping in subsequent devices. Standard Limiter can adjust and optimize the Release
parameter automatically, according to the audio material, or it can be set manually.

Input
Adjusts the input gain.

Release
Sets the time it takes for the gain to return to its original level. If Auto Release is
activated, Standard Limiter automatically finds the best Release setting for the audio
material.

Output
Determines the maximum output level.

Gain Reduction LED

Displays the amount of gain reduction.

Saving/Loading Strip Presets

You can save and load strip presets. Strip presets have the file name extension .strippreset.

PROCEDURE
● Right-click the Channel Strip section header, and perform one of the following actions:
● To save the current settings as a preset, select Save Strip Preset, and name your preset.
● To load a preset, select Load Strip Preset, and select a preset.

NOTE

You can also apply channel strip settings with insert and EQ settings from track presets. You
can load, tag, and save strip presets in the MediaBay.

RELATED LINKS
Loading Strip Presets on page 521

View Options for Strip Modules

The view options allow you to choose how to show the Strip modules in the corresponding
section.

● To open the view options for the Strip section, right-click the section header, and select
Show Strip Modules as.

The following options are available:

329
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Pop-up Modules

Shows the strip modules and their controls in a pop-up pane.

Strip Modules

Shows the strip modules and their controls in the strip section.

330
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Strip Modules (Exclusive)

Shows only the selected strip module and its controls in the strip section.

NOTE

The view options only have an effect on audio channels.

Sends Section
The Sends section for audio-related channels offers send effect slots. These slots allow you
to load send effects and value sliders for determining the send level for a channel. For MIDI
channels, the Sends section features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects.

You can use sends to route audio, instrument, group, and effect channels to output, group, effect
channels, or as effect side-chain sources.

Adding Send Effects

In the Sends section, you can add send effects.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Sends to show the
section above the fader section.
2. Click one of the send slots to open the send selector.
3. Click a send effect to select it.
The selected send effect is loaded.
4. Click on the left of the slot to activate the send.

Bypassing Send Effects

You can bypass all send effects.

● To bypass all sends, activate Sends Bypass on/off at the top of the Sends section.
● To deactivate bypassing, deactivate Sends Bypass on/off.

331
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Adding Effect Channel Tracks to a Send Effect

You can add an effect channel track that is routed to a send effect from within the MixConsole.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click on the send slot to open the context menu.
2. Select Add Effect Track to <send name>.
3. In the Add Effect Track window, select the effect and configuration.
4. Click OK.

RESULT
The effect channel track is added to the Project window, and the send is automatically routed to
it.

View Options for Send Effects

The view options allow you to choose how to show the selected Sends in the corresponding
section.

● To open the view options for sends, right-click the Sends section header, and select Show
Sends as.

The following options are available:

Send Destination & Gain

Shows the destination and the gain control separately.

Send Destination, Gain & Send Controls

Shows a combination of the destination, the gain control, and the send controls.

Send Destination & Gain (Compact)

Shows a combination of the destination and the gain control in one line.

Reordering Channels in the MixConsole

You can reorder channels in the MixConsole. The corresponding tracks in the track list follow.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the channels that you want to reorder.
2. Click the channel name or the meter section of one of the channels, and drag the channels to
the left or to the right in the fader section.
The cursor becomes a hand symbol to indicate that you can drag the channel. A green line
indicates the positions where you can drop the channels.

332
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

NOTE

You can also move channels by right-clicking a selected channel and selecting one of the
following commands from the Move Selected Channels menu:

● To New Folder moves the corresponding tracks from the track list into a newly created
folder. Folders are not shown in the MixConsole.
● To Previous Available Position moves the channels to the previous position.
● To Next Available Position moves the channels to the subsequent position.
● To First Available Position moves the channels to the first position.
● To Last Available Position moves the channels to the final position.

RESULT
The MixConsole channels are reordered, and the corresponding tracks in the track list are
rearranged accordingly. You can restore the original order via the Edit History dialog.

NOTE

● You can also reorder tracks/channels by selecting them on the Visibility tab of the
MixConsole and dropping them onto the Project window track list or the MixConsole fader
section, and vice versa.
● Multi-out instrument return channels cannot be positioned outside their group.
● Input and output channels have fixed positions in the MixConsole. You cannot reorder
them, and they are not rearranged accordingly in the track list.

RELATED LINKS
Reordering Tracks in the Track List on page 144
MixConsole Window on page 298
MixConsole Visibility on page 302

Adding Pictures to MixConsole Channels

You can add track pictures to one or multiple channels in the MixConsole.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Pictures.
2. Do one of the following:
● To add a picture to a channel, select the channel, and double-click the pictures section.
● To add the same picture to multiple channels, select multiple channels, hold Shift , and
double-click the pictures section.
3. In the Track Pictures Browser, select a picture.
4. Click OK.

RESULT
The picture is shown in the track list and in the MixConsole pictures section.

RELATED LINKS
Track Pictures Browser on page 146
Showing Track Pictures on page 145

333
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Adding Notes to a MixConsole Channel

You can add annotations to MixConsole channels.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Notepad.
The Notepad section is shown above the fader section.
2. Select the channel for which you want to add notes, click in the Notepad section, and enter
your notes.
3. To close the Notepad, press Esc , or click in another section of the MixConsole.

Applying Channel Colors to Channel Controls

You can apply channel colors to the channel controls. This is useful if you have many channels in
the MixConsole and you want to identify them by their color.

PREREQUISITE
You have manually or automatically assigned track/channel colors.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Preferences.
2. Open the User Interface page, and select Track & MixConsole Channel Colors.
3. In the Colorize Tracks and MixConsole Channels section, activate MixConsole Channels.
4. Optional: To adjust the brightness of a selected channel, adjust the Selection Brightness
slider.

NOTE

By default, the selected channel is shown in gray. If you want to display the selected channel
in color, activate Show Color for Selected Channel. You can then discern it from the other
channels by its pronounced color strength.

5. Click OK.

RESULT
The channel colors are applied to the channel controls.

RELATED LINKS
Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/Channels on page 145
Colorizing Single Tracks on page 77
Colorizing Selected Tracks on page 76
User Interface on page 904
User Interface - Track & MixConsole Channel Colors on page 905

Channel Latency Overview

The Channel Latency Overview displays the latencies caused by insert effects or panners for
audio-related channels in the MixConsole.

334
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

● Click Set up Window Layout on the MixConsole toolbar, and activate Channel Latency to
show channel latencies in the fader section, then click Open Channel Latency Overview to
open an overview of the latencies for a specific channel.

NOTE

The Channel Latency Overview is only available if latencies are present.

The Channel Latency Overview shows the following information:

Name
The name of the plug-in that causes the latency.

Type
Indicates if the latency is caused by an insert effect, a channel strip module, or a
panner.

Latency (ms)
Shows the latency in milliseconds.

NOTE

● If the latency value is marked with (*), the corresponding plug-in features a Live
button or a low latency mode. If you activate Constrain Delay Compensation, this
mode is automatically activated.
● If the latency value is marked with (**), the corresponding plug-in does not
feature a Live button or a low latency mode. If you activate Constrain Delay
Compensation and the plug-in latency is higher than the Constrain Delay
Compensation threshold, this plug-in is automatically deactivated.

NOTE

If you want any plug-in delay to be compensated during playback, make sure that
Constrain Delay Compensation is deactivated.

Latency (Samples)
Shows the latency in samples.

Total Channel Latency

Shows the total latency for that channel in milliseconds and in samples.

RELATED LINKS
Plug-In Delay Compensation on page 351
Functions Menu on page 308
Constrain Delay Compensation on page 548
MixConsole Window on page 298

335
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

VST on page 906

Channel Settings
You can open each MixConsole channel in a separate Channel Settings window. This allows for
a better overview and easy editing of individual channels and their settings.

The channel selection in the Channel Settings window is synchronized with the channel
selection in the MixConsole and the track selection in the Project window.

NOTE

To separate the channel selection in the Channel Settings window from the channel selection in
the MixConsole, open the Functions Menu on the toolbar of the Channel Settings window, and
deactivate Follow ‘e’ buttons or selection changes.

To open the channel settings for an audio-related channel, do one of the following:

● In the fader section of the MixConsole, select the channel, and click Edit Channel Settings.
● In the track list, select the track, and, in the top section of the Inspector, click Edit Channel
Settings.
● In the track list, select the track, and, on the track, click Edit Channel Settings.

The Channel Settings window is divided into several sections:

1 Toolbar
The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the Channel Settings
window.
2 Inserts/Strip
The Inserts section features insert effect slots that allow you to load insert effects for a
channel.
The Strip section allows you to load built-in processing modules for separate channels.
3 Channel Strip/Equalizer
The Channel Strip section allows you to load built-in processing modules for separate
channels.

336
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

The Equalizer section features a built-in parametric equalizer with up to 4 bands for each
audio channel.
4 Destinations
The Destinations section features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects.
5 Fader
The fader section shows the current channel.
6 Output Chain
The output chain allows you to keep track of more complicated output routings.

The sections are arranged in zones at the left and right of the Channel Settings window.

RELATED LINKS
Channel Settings – Channel Inserts on page 339
Channel Settings – Channel Strip on page 340
Channel Settings – Equalizer on page 345
Channel Settings – Destinations on page 346
Channel Settings – Channel Faders on page 347
Equalizer Settings on page 321

Channel Settings Toolbar

The toolbar in the Channel Settings window contains tools and shortcuts for settings and
functions in the Channel Settings window.

Channel Navigation
Go to Last Edited Channel

Shows the channel that you last edited in the Channel Settings window. This is only
available if you have edited at least 2 channels.

Go to Next Edited Channel

Shows the next channel in the Channel Settings window. This is only available if you
have edited at least 2 channels.

Go to Previous MixConsole Channel

Shows the previous MixConsole channel in the Channel Settings window.

Go to Next MixConsole Channel

Shows the next MixConsole channel in the Channel Settings window.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.

Channel Sources
Input

337
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Opens the name of the input channel.

Go to Input/Select an Input

Shows the input channel in the Channel Settings window.

Channel Name
Channel Name

Shows the name of the channel that is shown in the Channel Settings window.

Channel Destinations
Go to Output/Select an Output

Opens the output channel in the Channel Settings window.

Output

Shows the name of the output channel.

Edit Instrument
Edit VST Instrument

Allows you to open the VST instrument control panel. This is available for MIDI and
instrument channels only.

Output Chain
Show Output Chain

Shows the output chain. This allows you to keep track of more complicated output
routings.

Track Templates
Load Track Preset

Allows you to load/save track presets.

Preset Management

Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to load, save or reload a track preset.

Channel Functions
Functions Menu

Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a Channel Settings function.

338
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Window Zone Controls

Set up Window Layout

Allows you to set up the window layout.

Channel Settings – Channel Inserts

The Channel Inserts section is shown in the Channel Settings window.

Inserts Bypass on/off

Bypasses the insert effects for the channel.

Inserts
Allows you to add insert effects for the channel.

Preset Management
Allows you to load or save FX Chain presets.

Move Channel Strip to Pre/Post-Inserts Position

Allows you to move the channel strip to a pre-fader position or to a post-fader position
in the signal flow.

Strip
Allows you to activate and set up channel strip modules for the channel.

RELATED LINKS
Channel Settings on page 336

339
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Channel Settings – Channel Strip

The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is shown in the Channel Settings window.

Channel Strip Bypass on/off

Bypasses the channel strip modules for the channel.

NOTE

You can reset the channel strip modules for the channel by Alt/Opt -clicking this
button.

Channel Strip
Allows you to activate and set up channel strip modules for the channel.

Preset Management
Allows you to load or save strip presets.

Channel Strip Modules

The following channel strip modules are shown:

● Noise Gate
● Compressor
● EQ
● Tools
● Sat
● Limit

You can change the position of channel strip modules in the signal chain by dragging.

RELATED LINKS
Noise Gate on page 324
Compressor on page 324
EQ on page 326

340
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Tools on page 327

Sat on page 327
Limit on page 328
Channel Settings on page 336

Standard Compressor – Details View

The Standard Compressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the
meters.

● To open the details view, click Edit Module .

In the details view, the following additional parameters are available:

● Soft Knee/High Ratio

● Hold
● Analysis
● Dry Mix
● Input Gain meter
● Output Gain meter
● Gain Reduction meter

You can close the details view by clicking Close Module .

RELATED LINKS
Standard Compressor on page 324

Tube Compressor – Details View

The Tube Compressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the
meters.

● To open the details view, click Edit Module .

341
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

In the details view, the following additional parameters are available:

● Character
● Low/High switch for Ratio
● Side-chain section with Frequency, Filter Type, Q-Factor, and Monitor
● Input Gain meter
● Output Gain meter

You can close the details view by clicking Close Module .

RELATED LINKS
Tube Compressor on page 325

VintageCompressor - Details View

The VintageCompressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the
meters.

● To open the details view, click Edit Module .

342
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

In the details view, the following additional parameters are available:

● Mix
● Ratio buttons
● Input Gain meter
● Output Gain meter
● Gain Reduction meter

You can close the details view by clicking Close Module .

RELATED LINKS
VintageCompressor on page 326

Maximizer – Details View

The Maximizer features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters.

● To open the details view, click Edit Module .

343
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

In the details view, the following additional parameters are available:

● Classic
This mode is suited for all styles of music.
● Modern
This mode is particularly suited for contemporary styles of music. Release allows you to set
the overall release time, Recover allows for a faster signal recovering at the beginning of the
release phase.
● Soft Clip
Activate this to start limiting or clipping the signal softly and to generate harmonics that add
a warm, tube-like characteristic to the audio material.
● High resolution input/output meter with gain reduction.

You can close the details view by clicking Close Module .

RELATED LINKS
Maximizer on page 328

344
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Channel Settings – Equalizer

The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is shown in the Channel Settings window.

Equalizers Bypass on/off

Bypasses the equalizer settings for the channel.

NOTE

You can reset the equalizers by Alt/Opt -clicking this button.

Preset Management
Allows you to load or save equalizer presets.

Equalizer Settings
Opens the Equalizer Settings panel.

Equalizer display
Allows you to make equalizer settings for the 4 bands in a large EQ curve display with
several modes.

Equalizer Controls
Allows you to make equalizer settings for the 4 bands in a large EQ curve display with
several modes.

RELATED LINKS
Channel Settings on page 336

Equalizer Settings Panel

The Equalizer Settings panel allows you to set up the equalizer.

● To open the Equalizer Settings panel, click Equalizer Settings in the Equalizer section of
the Channel Settings window.

345
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Show Equalizer Controls

Shows/Hides the equalizer controls.

Show FFT Pre EQ Curve

Shows/Hides the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) input curve for the reference channel.

Hold FFT Post EQ Peak Curve

Holds the peak values of the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) output curve for the
reference channel.

Transparency for Channel Curve

Allows you to adjust the transparency of the filled area for the spectral curve.

Channel Settings – Destinations

The Channel Sends section is shown in the Channel Settings window.

Sends Bypass on/off

Bypasses the send effects for the channel.

Sends—Destinations
Allows you to set up a destination for the send effects of the channel.

RELATED LINKS
Channel Settings on page 336

346
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Channel Settings – Channel Faders

The Channel Faders section is shown in the Channel Settings window.

The controls are the same as in the MixConsole fader section.

RELATED LINKS
Fader Section on page 310
Channel Settings on page 336

Keyboard Focus in the MixConsole

You can control the left zone, the channel section, and the fader section with the computer
keyboard.

For this to work, the section must have the focus. If a section has the keyboard focus, the border
that surrounds it is highlighted in a specific color.

Activating Keyboard Focus

To be able to control the MixConsole with the keyboard, you must activate the keyboard focus.

PROCEDURE
1. Click in an empty area of the section to activate the keyboard focus.
2. Press Tab to activate the next section. This allows you to cycle forward through the sections.
3. Press Shift - Tab to activate the previous section.

347
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Navigating in a Section
Once you have activated the focus for a section, you can control it with the computer keyboard.
The channel sections and the fader controls that are selected for keyboard control are indicated
by a red border.

CHOICES
● To navigate through the controls, use the Up Arrow , Down Arrow , Left Arrow , or
Right Arrow keys.
● To activate or deactivate a switch, press Return .
● To expand or collapse an active section, to open or close a value field in a slot, or to open the
plug-in panel for a loaded plug-in, press Return .
● To access the controls in the left zone, press Ctrl/Cmd - Return .
● To access the controls in the middle zone, press Return .
● To access the controls in the right zone, press Alt/Opt - Return .
● To close a pop-up menu or a plug-in panel, press Esc .
● To enable or disable the loaded plug-in, press Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Return .

348
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Audio Effects

Cubase comes with a number of included effect plug-ins that you can use to process audio,
group, and instrument channels.

The effects and their parameters are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference.

Insert Effects and Send Effects

You can apply effects to audio channels by using insert effects or send effects.

Insert Effects
Insert effects are inserted into the signal chain of an audio channel. As a result, the whole
channel signal passes through the effect.

You can add up to 8 different insert effects per channel.

Use insert effects for effects such as distortion, filters, or other effects that change the tonal or
dynamic characteristics of the sound.

To add and edit insert effects, you can use the following inserts sections:

● The Inserts section in the MixConsole.

● The Inserts section in the Channel Settings window.

● The Inserts section in the Inspector.

● The Inserts section on the Channel tab.

349
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Insert Effects and Send Effects

Send Effects
Send effects can be added to effect channel tracks, and the audio data to be processed can be
routed to the effect. This way, the send effects remain outside the audio channel’s signal path.

Each audio channel has 8 sends, each of which can be freely routed to an effect (or to a chain of
effects).

Use send effects in the following cases:

● To control the balance between the dry and the wet sound individually for each channel.
● To use the same effect for several different audio channels.

To edit send effects, you can use the following sends sections:

● The Sends section in the MixConsole.

● The Destinations section in the Channel Settings window.

● The Sends section in the Inspector.

● The Sends section on the Channel tab.

RELATED LINKS
Direct Offline Processing on page 379

VST Standard
Audio effects can be integrated in Cubase, thanks to the VST standard. At the moment, the VST 3
and VST 2 standards are supported.

The VST 3 plug-in standard offers improvements like smart plug-in processing and side-chain
inputs. VST 3 retains full backwards compatibility to VST 2.

350
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Insert Effects and Send Effects

Smart Plug-In Processing

Smart plug-in processing is a technology that serves to disengage the processing for plug-ins
when no signal is present. This reduces the CPU load on silent passages and allows you to load
more effects.

To activate smart plug-in processing, activate Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio
signals are received in the Preferences dialog (VST—Plug-ins page).

NOTE

Check the processor for the passage with the largest number of events playing simultaneously to
make sure that your system offers the required performance at every time position.

Side-Chain Inputs
Several VST 3 effects feature side-chain inputs. These allow you to control the operation of the
effect via external signals that are routed to the side-chain input.

The effect processing is still applied to the main audio signal.

RELATED LINKS
Side-Chaining on page 362

Plug-In Delay Compensation

Some audio effects, especially dynamics processors that feature a look-ahead functionality, may
take a brief time to process the audio fed into them. As a result, the output audio is slightly
delayed. To compensate for this, Cubase provides plug-in delay compensation.

Plug-in delay compensation is featured throughout the entire audio path, maintaining the sync
and timing of all audio channels.

VST 3 dynamics plug-ins with look-ahead functionality feature a Live button that allows you to
disengage the look-ahead. This minimizes latency during real-time recording. For details, see the
separate document Plug-in Reference.

To avoid latency during real-time recording or real-time playback of VST instruments, you can
also use Constrain Delay Compensation.

RELATED LINKS
Constrain Delay Compensation on page 548
MixConsole Window on page 298

Tempo Sync
Plug-ins can receive timing and tempo information from Cubase. This is useful to synchronize
plug-in parameters, such as modulation rates or delay times, to the project tempo.

Timing and tempo information is provided to plug-ins of the standard VST 2.0 or later.

To set up tempo sync, you must specify a base note value. Straight, triplet, or dotted note values
(1/1 to 1/32) are supported.

For details about the included effects, see the separate document Plug-in Reference.

351
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Insert Effects

Insert Effects
Insert effects can be inserted in the signal chain of an audio channel. This way, the whole channel
signal passes through the effect.

You can add up to 8 different insert effects for each audio-related channel (audio track, group
channel track, effect channel track, or instrument channel) or output bus.

The signal passes through the insert effects from top to bottom, according to their slot positions.

You can define post-fader insert slots for any channel. Post-fader insert slots are always post-EQ
and post-fader.

NOTE

To show all post-fader slots for insert effects in the MixConsole, right-click the inserts section,
and in the context menu activate Show all available Slots for Inserts.

Use post-fader slots for insert effects where you want the level to remain unchanged after the
effect. Dithering and maximizers are typically used as post-fader insert effects for output busses,
for example.

NOTE

If you want to use an effect with identical settings on several channels, set up a group channel,
and apply your effect as a single insert for this group.

RELATED LINKS
Dither Effects on page 367
Adding Insert Effects to Group Channels on page 353

Adding Insert Effects

If you add insert effects to audio channels, the audio is routed through the insert effects.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio track.
2. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings.
The Channel Settings window for the audio channel opens.
3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from
the selector.

RESULT
The selected insert effect is loaded and activated, and the audio is routed through it. The effect
control panel is opened.

RELATED LINKS
Effect Control Panel on page 367

352
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Insert Effects

Adding Insert Effects to Busses

If you add insert effects to input busses, the effects become a permanent part of the recorded
audio file. If you add insert effects to output busses, all audio routed to that bus is affected.
Insert effects that are added to output busses are sometimes referred to as master effects.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > MixConsole to open the MixConsole.
2. In the fader section, perform one of the following actions:

● Locate the input channel, and click Edit Channel Settings to edit the input bus.
● Locate the output channel, and click Edit Channel Settings to edit the output bus.

The Channel Settings window for the selected channel opens.

3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from
the selector.

RESULT
The selected insert effect is added to the bus and activated. The effect control panel is opened.

Adding Insert Effects to Group Channels

If you add insert effects to group channels, you can process several audio tracks through the
same effect.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Click Group.
3. Open the Audio Outputs pop-up menu, and select the desired output bus.
4. Click Add Track.
The group channel track is added to the track list.
5. In the Inspector for the group channel track, open the Inserts section.
6. Click the first effect slot, and select an effect from the selector.
7. In the Inspector for the audio tracks, open the Output Routing pop-up menus and select
the group.

RESULT
The signal from the audio track is routed through the group channel and passes through the
insert effect.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Group Channel on page 107

Adding Group Channels to Selected Channels

You can add a group channel to several selected channels.

PREREQUISITE
Your project contains some tracks that you want to route to a group channel.

353
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Insert Effects

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, right-click the tracks that you want to route to a group channel, and select
Add Track > Group Track to Selected Tracks.
2. In the Add Track dialog, open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel
configuration for the group channel track.
3. Open the Folder Setup pop-up menu, and select wether to create group channel tracks
inside or outside a dedicated folder.
4. Click OK.

RESULT
The group channel track is added to the track list. In the Output Routing pop-up menu of the
selected tracks, the group is selected. The tracks are routed to the group channel.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Group Channel on page 107

Copying Insert Effects

You can add insert effects to audio channels by copying them from other audio channels or from
other slots of the same audio channel.

PREREQUISITE
You have added at least one insert effect to an audio channel.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > MixConsole.
2. In the Inserts section, locate the insert effect that you want to copy.
3. Hold down Alt/Opt , and drag the insert effect on an insert slot.

RESULT
The insert effect is copied. If the destination slot already contains an insert effect, the existing
effect is moved down one slot.

Rearranging Insert Effects

You can change the position of an insert effect in the signal chain of the audio channel by moving
it to a different slot of the same channel. You can also move an insert effect to another audio
channel.

PREREQUISITE
You have added at least one insert effect to an audio channel.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > MixConsole.
2. In the Inserts section, locate the insert effect that you want to rearrange.
3. Drag the insert effect to another insert slot.

354
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Insert Effects

RESULT
The insert effect is removed from the source slot and placed on the destination slot. If the
destination slot already contains an insert effect, this effect is moved to the next insert slot.

Deactivating Insert Effects

If you want to listen to a track without having it processed by an effect, but do not want to
remove this effect completely from the insert slot, you can deactivate it.

PREREQUISITE
You have added an insert effect to an audio channel.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the audio track with the insert effect that you want to deactivate.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section, and Alt/Opt -click Bypass Insert on/off.

RESULT
The effect is deactivated, and all processing is terminated, but the effect is still loaded.

Bypassing Insert Effects

If you want to listen to the track without having it processed by a particular effect, but do not
want to remove this effect completely from the insert slot, you can bypass it. A bypassed effect is
still processing in the background. This allows for crackle-free comparison of the original with the
processed signal.

PREREQUISITE
You have added an insert effect to an audio channel.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the audio track with the insert effect that you want to bypass.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section, and click Bypass Insert on/off.

RESULT
The effect is bypassed but still processing in the background.

355
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Insert Effects

Removing Insert Effects

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the audio track with the insert effect that you want to remove.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
3. On the effect that you want to remove, click Select Insert.
4. In the effect selector, select No Effect.

RESULT
The insert effect is removed from the audio channel.

Freezing Insert Effects

Freezing an audio track and its insert effects allows you to reduce processor power. However,
frozen tracks are locked for editing. You cannot edit, remove, or add insert effects for the frozen
track.

PREREQUISITE
You have made all settings for the track and you are sure that you do not need to edit it
anymore.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for the audio track that you want to freeze, click Freeze Channel.

2. In the Freeze Channel Options dialog, specify a Tail Size in seconds.

This adds time at the end of the rendered file. As a result, reverb and delay tails can fully fade
out.

RESULT
● The output of the audio track is rendered to an audio file, and on playback you hear the
same sound as before freezing.
● Less CPU load is used.
● The Freeze Channel button lights up.
● The track controls are grayed out.
● The audio events are locked.
● You can still adjust the level and panning, make EQ settings, and adjust the effect sends.

NOTE

The audio file is saved in the Freeze folder that can be found in the following location:

356
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
VST Effect Selector

● Windows: within the Project folder

● macOS: User/Documents

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To unfreeze a frozen track, click Freeze Channel again.

RELATED LINKS
Freezing Multiple Tracks on page 150

VST Effect Selector

The VST effect selector allows you to select VST effects from the active collection.

● To open the VST effect selector, open the Inserts section of the audio track Inspector, and
on an insert slot, click Select Insert.

The following controls are available:

1 Expand Tree/Collapse Tree

Expands/Collapses the tree.
2 Search VST Effect
Allows you to search for VST effects by typing in the name or parts of the name or the
category.
3 Plug-in Collections and Options
Allows you to select a collection.
If you select the Default collection, the options Sort By Category and Sort by Vendor
become available. These allow you to sort the default collection.

Send Effects
Send effects are outside the signal path of an audio channel. The audio data to be processed
must be sent to the effect.

● You can select an effect channel track as the routing destination for a send.
● You can route different sends to different effect channels.
● You can control the amount of signals sent to the effect channel by adjusting the effect send
level.

357
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Send Effects

NOTE

In the Preferences dialog (VST page), you can set a default send level. Use Ctrl/Cmd -click to
set the send level to this default value.

To do this, create effect channel tracks.

RELATED LINKS
Effect Channel Tracks on page 358
VST on page 906

Effect Channel Tracks

You can use effect channel tracks as routing destinations for audio sends. The audio is sent to
the effect channel track and through any insert effects set up for it.

● You can add several insert effects to an effect channel track.

The signal passes through the effects in series, from the top downward.
● You can rename effect channel tracks, just like any other tracks.
● You can add automation tracks to effect channel tracks.
This allows for automating various effect parameters.
● You can route the effect return to any output bus.
● You can adjust the effect channel in the MixConsole.
This includes adjusting the effect return level, the balance, and the EQ.

When you add an effect channel track, you can choose whether to create effect channel tracks
inside or outside a dedicated folder. If you select Create Inside Folder, effect channel tracks are
shown in a dedicated folder.

This results in a better overview and facilitates editing the effect channel tracks.

NOTE

To save screen space, collapse the Effect folder.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Effect Channel Tracks on page 358

Adding Effect Channel Tracks

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Click Effect.
3. Open the Effect pop-up menu, and select an effect for the effect channel track.
4. Open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel configuration for the effect
channel track.

358
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Send Effects

5. Open the Folder Setup pop-up menu, and choose whether to create effect channel tracks
inside or outside a dedicated folder.
6. Click Add Track.

RESULT
The effect channel track is added to the track list, and the selected effect is loaded into the first
available insert effect slot of the effect channel track.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Effect on page 109

Adding Effect Channels to Send Slots

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the tracks to which you want to add an effect channel.
2. In the Inspector, open the Sends section.
3. Right-click the send slot for the effect channel, and select Add Effect Track to Send.
4. Open the Effect pop-up menu, and select an effect for the effect channel track.
5. Open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel configuration for the effect
channel track.
6. Open the Folder Setup pop-up menu, and choose whether to create effect channel tracks
inside or outside a dedicated folder.
7. Click Add Track.

RESULT
The effect channel track is added to the track send slot.

Adding Effect Channels to Selected Channels

PREREQUISITE
Your project contains some tracks to which you want to add an effect channel.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select all tracks to which you want to add an effect channel.
2. Right-click one of the tracks, and select Add Track > Effect Track to Selected Tracks.
3. In the Add Track dialog, open the Effect pop-up menu, and select an effect for the effect
channel track.
4. Open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel configuration for the effect
channel track.
5. Open the Folder Setup pop-up menu, and choose whether to create effect channel tracks
inside or outside a dedicated folder.
6. Click OK.

359
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Send Effects

RESULT
The effect channel track is added to the track list. The selected effect is loaded into the first
available insert effect slot of the effect track and to the first available send effect slot of all tracks
that you selected.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Effect on page 109

Adding Insert Effects to Effect Channel Tracks

You can add insert effects to effect channel tracks.

PREREQUISITE
You have added an effect channel track and set up the correct output bus in the Output Routing
pop-up menu.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list for the effect channel track, click Edit Channel Settings.
The Channel Settings window for the effect channel track opens.
2. In the Inserts section, click an insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from the
selector.

RESULT
The selected effect is added to the effect channel track as an insert effect.

Routing Audio Channels to Effect Channels

If you route an audio channel send to an effect channel, the audio is routed through the insert
effects that you have set up for the effect channel.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio track.
2. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings to open the Channel Settings window.
3. On the Destinations tab, click Select Destination for an effect slot, and select the effect
channel track from the selector.

4. On the send slot, click Send on/off.

360
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Send Effects

RESULT
The audio is routed through the effect channel.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

In the Channel Settings window for the audio channel, hold down Alt/Opt and double-click to
show the send destination. If you have routed the send to an effect channel, the effect control
panel is opened.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Effect Channel Tracks on page 358

Pre/Post Fader Sends

You can choose whether to send the signal from the audio channel to the effect channel before
or after the audio channel volume fader.

● Pre-fader sends
The audio channel signal is sent to the effect channel before the audio channel volume
fader.
● Post-fader sends
The audio channel signal is sent to the effect channel after the audio channel volume fader.
● To move a send to a pre-fader position, open the Channel Settings window for the audio
channel, right-click a send, and select Move to Pre-Fader.

The Pre-/Post-Fader button indicates that the send is in pre-fader position.

● To move a send to post-fader position, open the Channel Settings window for the audio
channel, right-click a send, and select Move to Post-Fader.
The Pre-/Post-Fader button indicates that the send is in post-fader position.

NOTE

If you activate Mute Pre-Send when Mute in the Preferences dialog (VST page), sends in
pre-fader mode are muted if you mute their channels.

361
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining

Setting the Level for the Sends

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the effect channel track that contains the effect for which you want to
set the level.
2. Open the Inserts section of the Inspector, and click the effect slot to open the effect control
panel.
3. In the effect control panel, set the Mix control to 100.
This allows for full control of the effect level when you use the effect sends to control the
signal balance later.
4. In the track list, select the audio track that is routed through the effect for which you want to
set the level.
5. Click Edit Channel Settings to open the Channel Settings window for the audio track.
6. On the Destinations tab, locate the effect slot and drag to the left or to the right to set
the send level. Ctrl/Cmd -click to set the level to the default send level, as specified in the
Preferences dialog (VST page).

This determines how much of the signal from the audio channel is routed to the effect
channel.

RESULT
The effect level is adjusted according to your settings.

NOTE

To determine how much of the signal is sent from the effect channel to the output bus, open the
Channel Settings window for the effect channel track, and adjust the effect return level.

Side-Chaining
Many VST 3 effects support side-chaining. Side-chaining allows you to use the output of one track
to control the action of an effect on another track.

Effects from the following categories feature side-chaining:

● Modulation
● Delay
● Filter

By activating side-chaining, you can do the following:

● Use the side-chain signal as a modulation source.

● Apply ducking to the instrument, that is, reduce the volume of the instrument track when a
signal is present on the audio track.
● Compress the signals on one audio track when a second audio track starts.
This is commonly used to add compression on a bass sound when the drums are hit.

362
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining

NOTE

For detailed descriptions of the plug-ins that feature side-chaining, see the separate document
Plug-in Reference.

NOTE

● Certain combinations of tracks and side-chain inputs may lead to feedback loops and
additional latency. If this is the case, the side-chain options are not available.
● Side-chain connections are only kept when you move an effect within a channel. When you
drag and drop an effect between channels, or when you copy an effect into another effect
slot, the side-chain connections are lost.

Side-Chain and Modulation

Side-chain signals bypass the built-in LFO modulation and apply modulation according to the
envelope of the side-chain signal. Since each channel is analyzed and modulated separately, this
allows for creating astonishing spatial modulation effects.

RELATED LINKS
Side-Chain Routing on page 365
Triggering a Delay Effect with Side-Chain Signals on page 363
Triggering a Compressor with Side-Chain Signals on page 364
Creating Side-Chain Connections From Multiple Inputs on page 366

Triggering a Delay Effect with Side-Chain Signals

You can use side-chain signals to create a ducking delay effect. This is useful if you want to apply
a delay effect that is audible only when no signal is present on a track.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio track that contains the audio you want to delay.
2. Select Project > Duplicate Tracks.
The events on the duplicated track are only used to reduce the volume of the effect that is
added to the original track.
3. Select the original track.
4. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section and select Delay > PingPongDelay, for example.
5. On the effect control panel, make your effect settings, and click Activate/Deactivate Side-
Chaining.

363
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining

6. Click Set up Side-Chain Routing.

7. Click Add Side-Chain Source, and select the duplicate track from the selector.
8. Optional: Adjust the send level in the Level value field.
9. In the Project window, select the duplicate track.
10. In the Inspector, click Output Routing, and select the side-chain node for the
PingPongDelay effect.

RESULT
The signals from the duplicated track are routed to the effect. Every time the audio signals on the
track set in, the delay effect is deactivated.

NOTE

To ensure that audio signals of low or medium volume also silence the delay effect, you can
adjust the volume of the duplicated track.

RELATED LINKS
Side-Chaining on page 362
Side-Chain Routing on page 365

Triggering a Compressor with Side-Chain Signals

Compression, expansion, or gating can be triggered by side-chain signals exceeding a specified
threshold. This allows you to lower the volume of one audio signal every time another audio
signal sets in.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up a project with a bass guitar and a bass drum track, for example, and you want to
lower the bass guitar volume each time the bass drum hits.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the bass guitar track.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
3. Click the first effect slot, and, from the selector, select Dynamics > Compressor.

364
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining

4. On the effect control panel, make your effect settings, and click Activate/Deactivate Side-
Chaining.
5. On the effect control panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing.
6. Click Add Side-Chain Source, and select the bass drum track from the selector.
7. Optional: Adjust the send level in the Level value field.

RESULT
You have connected the bass drum track side-chain to the Compressor on the destination track.
The bass drum signal triggers the Compressor on the bass guitar track. When you now play back
the project, the bass guitar is compressed whenever the signals on the bass drum track exceed
the set threshold.

RELATED LINKS
Side-Chaining on page 362
Side-Chain Routing on page 365

Side-Chain Routing
The Side-Chain Routing panel allows you to set up the side-chain routing for the selected
plug-in.

● To open the Side-Chain Routing panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing on the plug-in
control panel.

The following controls are available:

Select the Plug-in Side-Chain Input

This pop-up menu is only available if your plug-in supports several side-chain inputs.
From the pop-up menu, select the input for which you want to add a side-chain source.
Side-chain plug-in inputs that are routed to side-chain sources are indicated by a
rhombus next to the input name. The number of available side-chain inputs depends
on the plug-in.

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Enables/Disables the side-chain source.

Name
Shows the name of the side-chain source.

365
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining

Type
Shows the type of the side-chain source.

Level
Allows you to adjust the send level.

Meter
Shows the volume level of the input track.

Pre-/Post-Fader
Allows you to set the insert to pre-fader position or to post-fader position.

Edit Channel Settings

Opens the Channel Settings window for the selected side-chain source.

Remove Side-Chain Source

Removes the side-chain source.

Add Side-Chain Source

Opens a selector that allows you to add a side-chain source.

RELATED LINKS
Side-Chaining on page 362
Creating Side-Chain Connections From Multiple Inputs on page 366

Creating Side-Chain Connections From Multiple Inputs

For plug-ins that support multiple side-chain inputs, you can create side-chain connections
coming from multiple side-chain inputs of that plug-in.

PREREQUISITE
You are using an effect plug-in that supports several side-chain inputs, such as the Squasher
plug-in.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select an audio track.
2. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings.
The Channel Settings window for the audio channel opens.
3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and, from the selector
select the effect plug-in that supports several side-chain inputs.
The selected insert effect is loaded and activated, and the audio is routed through it. The
effect control panel opens.
4. On the effect control panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing.
5. In the Side-Chain Routing panel, click Select the Plug-in Side-Chain Input, and, from the
pop-up menu, select the plug-in input for the side-chain source.
The number of available side-chain inputs depends on the plug-in.
6. Click Add Side-Chain Source, and select a source from the pop-up menu.
7. Optional: Repeat the steps above to activate more plug-in inputs.
8. Adjust the effect plug-in, as required and do not forget to activate the corresponding side-
chain inputs.

366
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Dither Effects

RESULT
The number of possible side-chain inputs determines the number of bands that can be
controlled by side-chain sources.

RELATED LINKS
Side-Chaining on page 362
Side-Chain Routing on page 365

Dither Effects
Dither effects allow you to control the noise produced by quantization errors that can occur
when you mix down to a lower bit depth.

Dithering adds a special kind of noise at an extremely low level to minimize the impact of
quantization errors. This is hardly noticeable and preferable to the distortion caused by the
errors.

Applying Dither Effects

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > MixConsole.
2. Click Edit Channel Settings for the output channel.
3. In the Inserts section, click a post-fader effect slot, and select Mastering > Lin Dither.
4. On the plug-in panel, select a bit depth for the mixdown file you want to create.

RELATED LINKS
Export Audio Mixdown on page 804

Effect Control Panel

The effect control panel allows you to set up the effect parameters. The contents, design, and
layout of the control panel depend on the selected effect.

● To open the control panel for a plug-in, click the effect slot.

The following controls are available for all effects:

367
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Effect Control Panel

1 Activate Effect
Activates/Deactivates the effect.
2 Bypass Effect
Allows you to bypass the effect.
3 Read Automation/Write Automation
Allows you to read/write automation for the effect parameter settings.
4 Switch between A/B Settings
Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active.
5 Apply current settings to A and B
Copies the effect parameters of effect setting A to effect setting B, and vice versa.
6 Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.
7 Set up Side-Chain Routing
Allows you to set up the side-chain routing for the selected plug-in.
8 Preset browser
Opens the preset browser, where you can select another preset.
9 Load previous Program/Load next Program
Loads the previous/next program in the preset browser.
10 Preset Management
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save or load a preset.
11 Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack
Adds a picture of the VST plug-in to the Media rack. This is available for plug-ins of other
vendors only.
12 Functions menu
Opens a pop-up menu with specific functions and settings.
13 Show/Hide VST Quick Controls
Shows/hides the quick controls.
14 Focus Quick Controls Lock State: Locked/Unlocked

368
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Effect Control Panel

Allows you to lock the focus of the quick control to the plug-in window.
15 Focus Quick Controls Indicator
If this indicator is lit, the plug-in window has the quick control focus.

NOTE

For detailed information about the included effects and their parameters, see the separate
document Plug-in Reference.

RELATED LINKS
Hiding/Showing Effect Control Panels on page 370

Effect Control Panel Context Menu

The context menu and the Functions menu on the effect control panel display functions and
settings that are specific to the effect.

Do one of the following:

● Right-click into an empty area of the effect control panel.

● Open the Functions pop-up menu on the effect control panel.

The following functions are available:

Copy <VST effect name> Setting/Paste <VST effect name> Setting

Allows you to copy the effect settings and to paste them to another effect.

Load Preset/Save Preset

Allows you to load/to save a preset.

Default Preset
Allows you to define and save a default preset.

Switch to A Setting/Switch to B Setting

Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active.

Apply Current Settings to A/Apply Current Settings to B

Copies the effect parameters of effect setting A to effect setting B, and vice versa.

Activate Outputs
Allows you to activate one or more outputs for the effect.

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates side-chaining for the effect.

NOTE

This option is only available for VST 3 effects that support side-chaining.

Remote Control Editor

Opens the Remote Control Editor.

Switch to Generic Editor

Opens the generic editor for the effect.

369
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Effect Control Panel

Allow Window to be Resized

Allows for dynamic resizing of third-party plug-in windows in Cubase. This is useful if
you activated Enable HiDPI (Windows only) in the Preferences dialog (General page)
and your plug-in does not support dpi settings.

NOTE

Allow Window to be Resized is a plug-in-specific setting. Activate/deactivate it for

every plug-in that requires it.

RELATED LINKS
General on page 895
Side-Chaining on page 362

Fine-Tuning Effect Settings

You can take your effect parameter settings as a starting point for further fine-tuning and
subsequent comparison of the new settings with the original settings.

PREREQUISITE
You have adjusted the parameters for an effect.

PROCEDURE
1. On the control panel for the effect, click Switch between A/B Settings.
This copies the initial parameter setting A to setting B.
2. Fine-tune the effect parameters.
These parameter settings are now saved as setting B.

RESULT
You can now switch between both settings by clicking Switch between A/B Settings. You can
compare them, make further adjustments or just go back to setting A. Settings A and B are saved
with the project.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

You can copy the settings between A and B by clicking Copy A to B. These settings can serve as a
starting point for further fine-tuning.

Hiding/Showing Effect Control Panels

When you add an audio effect, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You can
hide the control panels from view. This contributes to a better overview, in case you added a
number of plug-ins to your project whose control panels clutter up the screen.

PROCEDURE
● Select Window > Hide Plug-in Windows.

NOTE

Hide Plug-in Windows also hides VST instrument control panels.

370
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Effect Presets

RESULT
The control panels are hidden and sent to the back of the application. To show them again, select
Show Plug-in Windows.

RELATED LINKS
Effect Control Panel on page 367

Closing All Control Panels

When you add an audio effect, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You can
close all control panels at once.

PROCEDURE
● Select Window > Close All Plug-in Windows.

NOTE

Close All Plug-in Windows also closes VST instrument control panels.

RESULT
The control panels are closed.

RELATED LINKS
Effect Control Panel on page 367

Effect Presets
Effect presets store the parameter settings of an effect. The included effects feature a number of
presets that you can load, adjust, and save.

The following effect preset types are available:

● VST presets for a plug-in are plug-in parameter settings for a specific effect.
● Insert presets that contain the whole insert effects section with settings for each effect.

Effect presets are saved in the following location:

● Windows: \Users\<user name>\My Documents\VST 3 Presets\<company>\<plug-in

name>
● macOS: /Users/<user name>/Library/Audio/Presets/<company>/<plug-in name>

RELATED LINKS
Loading Presets for Effects on page 372
Loading Insert Presets on page 375

Preset Browser
The preset browser allows you to select a VST preset for the loaded effect.

● To open the preset browser, click the preset browser field in the effect control panel.

371
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Effect Presets

The Results section of the presets browser lists the available presets for the selected effect.

Loading Presets for Effects

Most VST effect plug-ins feature a number of useful presets that you can instantly select.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded an effect, either as a channel insert or into an effect channel, and the effect
control panel is open.

PROCEDURE
1. Click the preset browser field at the top of the control panel.

2. In the Results section, select a preset from the list.

3. Double-click to load the preset that you want to apply.

372
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Effect Presets

RESULT
The preset is loaded.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To return to the preset that was selected when you opened the preset browser, click Revert to
Last Setting.

Saving Effect Presets

You can save your effect settings as presets for further use.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Preset Management pop-up menu.

2. Select Save Preset.

The Save <plug-in name> Preset dialog opens.
3. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset.
4. Optional: Click New Folder to add a subfolder inside the effect preset folder.
5. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector in the bottom left corner of the dialog, and define
attributes for the preset.
6. Click OK.

RESULT
The effect preset is saved.

Saving Default Effect Presets

You can save your effect parameter settings as default effect presets. This allows you to load
your parameter settings automatically, every time you select the effect.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Preset Management pop-up menu.

373
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Effect Presets

2. Select Save as Default Preset.

3. Click Yes.

RESULT
The effect settings are saved as default presets. Every time you load the effect, the default preset
is loaded automatically.

Copying and Pasting Presets Between Effects

You can copy and paste effect presets between different instances of the same plug-in.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the control panel for the effect that you want to copy.
2. Right-click the control panel and select Copy <plug-in name> Setting from the context
menu.
3. Open another instance of the same effect.
4. Right-click the control panel, and select Paste <plug-in name> Setting from the context
menu.

Saving Insert Presets

You can save the inserts for a channel as an inserts preset, including all parameter settings.
Insert presets can be applied to audio, instrument, effect channel, or group channel tracks.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a combination of insert effects, and the effect parameters are set up for each
effect.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the track.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
3. Right-click the Inserts section header, and select Save FX Chain Preset.

374
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
Effect Presets

4. In the Save FX Chain Preset pane, enter a name for the new preset in the New Preset
section.
5. Click OK.

RESULT
The insert effects and their effect parameters are saved as insert presets.

Loading Insert Presets

You can load insert presets into audio, group, instrument, and effect channels.

PREREQUISITE
You have saved a combination of insert effects as insert presets.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the track to which you want to apply the new preset.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
3. Right-click the Inserts section header, and select Load FX Chain Preset.

TIP

You can also assign a key command to the function Load FX Chain Preset for Selected
Channel in the Mixer category of the Key Commands dialog, and use it to open the presets
pane.

4. Select an insert preset.

375
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
System Component Information Window

5. Double-click to apply the preset, and close the pane.

RESULT
The effects of the insert effect preset are loaded and any plug-ins that were previously loaded for
the track are removed.

Loading Insert Effect Settings from Track Presets

You can extract the effects that are used in a track preset and load them into your inserts section.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the track to which you want to apply the new preset.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
3. Right-click the Inserts section header, and select From Track Preset.
4. In the track preset pane, select the preset that contains the insert effects you want to load.
5. Double-click to load the effects and close the pane.

RESULT
The effects used in the track preset are loaded.

RELATED LINKS
Track Presets on page 153

System Component Information Window

The System Component Information window lists all available audio-codec plug-ins, program
plug-ins, project import-export plug-ins, and the virtual file system plug-ins.

● To open the System Component Information window, select Studio > More Options >
System Component Information.

376
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
System Component Information Window

The following columns are available:

Active
Allows you to activate or deactivate a plug-in.

Instances
The number of plug-in instances that are used in Cubase.

Name
The name of the plug-in.

Architecture
The architecture of the plug-in.

Vendor
The manufacturer of the plug-in.

File
The name of the plug-in, including its file name extension.

Path
The path on which the plug-in file is located.

Category
The category of each plug-in.

Version
The version of the plug-in.

SDK
The version of the VST protocol that is compatible with the plug-in.

Managing System Components in the System Component

Information Window
● To make a plug-in available for selection, activate it in the left column.
Only activated plug-ins are displayed in the effect selectors.
● To see where a plug-in is used, click the Instances column.

377
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Effects
System Component Information Window

NOTE

A plug-in may be in use, even if it is not activated in the left column. The left column only
determines whether or not the plug-in is visible on the effect selectors.

Exporting System Component Information Files

For archiving purposes or troubleshooting, you can save system component information as an
XML file.

● The system component file contains information on the installed/available plug-ins, their
version, vendor, etc.
● The XML file can be opened in any editor application that supports the XML format.

NOTE

The export function is not available for program plug-ins.

PROCEDURE
1. In the System Component Information window, right-click in the middle of the window,
and select Export.
2. In the dialog, specify a name and a location for the export file.
3. Click Save to export the file.

378
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing

Direct Offline Processing allows you to instantly add audio processes to the selected audio
events, clips, or ranges, without destroying the original audio.

Applying offline effects is common practice in dialogue editing and sound design. Offline
processing has several advantages over applying real-time mixer effects:

● The workflow is clip-based. This allows you to apply different effects to events on the same
track.
● The MixConsole can be kept clean from insert effects and parameter changes. This
facilitates subsequent mixing by another person, on a different system.
● Less CPU load is used.

Direct Offline Processing allows you to undo any changes regarding audio processes. You can
always revert to the original version. This is possible because processing does not affect the
actual audio files.

If you process an event, a clip, or a selection range, the following happens:

● A new audio file is created in the Edits folder within your project folder.
This file contains the processed audio, and the processed section of the audio clip refers to it.
● The original file remains unaffected.
The unprocessed sections still refer to it.

All applied offline processing is saved with the project and can still be modified after reopening
the project. Direct Offline Processing operations on the selected audio are persistent in project
backups.

Processing is always applied to the selection. The selection can include one or multiple events in
the Project window or in the Audio Part Editor, an audio clip in the Pool, or a selection range
on one or multiple events in the Project window or in the Sample Editor. If a selection is shorter
than the audio file, only the selected range is processed.

If you select an event that is a shared copy and therefore refers to a clip that is used by other
events in the project, you can decide how to proceed:

● Select Continue to process all shared copies.

● Select New Version to process the selected event only.

NOTE

This only works if Open Options Dialog is selected for the On Processing Shared Clips setting in
the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).

RELATED LINKS
Modifying Processes on page 383
Editing - Audio on page 885
Direct Offline Processing Workflow on page 380
Direct Offline Processing Window on page 380

379
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Direct Offline Processing Workflow

Direct Offline Processing Workflow

You can perform offline processing operations in the Direct Offline Processing window. The
window always shows the processing of the selected audio.

When you add or modify offline processing, the following applies:

● If you add a process, its last used parameter settings are loaded. You can reset it to its
default settings by clicking Reset to Default Values.
● All changes are instantly applied to the audio.
● If you modify parameters or remove processing, these changes are instantly applied to the
audio.
● You get a visual feedback while a process is running.

NOTE

You can add, modify, or delete audio processes at any time, even if a process is running. A
new rendering process is instantly started.

● You can undo and redo all Direct Offline Processing operations by using Ctrl/Cmd - Z or
Shift - Ctrl/Cmd - Z .
● You can apply all offline processing permanently to the audio.
● If you load a project with offline processing of audio processes that are not available on your
computer, these processes are shown as Not available in the Direct Offline Processing
window.

RELATED LINKS
Direct Offline Processing Window on page 380
Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing on page 389

Direct Offline Processing Window

The Direct Offline Processing window allows you to add, modify, or delete audio processing
instantly for one or multiple events, clips, or selection ranges in one window. Furthermore, you
can undo any audio processing.

To open the Direct Offline Processing window, do one of the following:

● Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing.

● Press F7 .
● On the Project window toolbar, click Open Direct Offline Processing Window.
● Select Audio > Processes, and, from the submenu, select a process.

NOTE

Processes without adjustable parameter settings, such as Silence, do not open the Direct
Offline Processing window when applied from the menu or using a key command.

380
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Direct Offline Processing Window

In the Direct Offline Processing window, the following options and settings are available:

Toolbar
Allows you to add audio processing, to audition the audio with the current edits, and to
make global settings for offline processing.

Process panel
Shows the last added process and allows you to modify or reset its settings, or to
delete it.

RELATED LINKS
Applying Processing on page 382
Applying Processing to Multiple Events on page 383
Direct Offline Processing Toolbar on page 381

Direct Offline Processing Toolbar

The toolbar of the Direct Offline Processing window allows you to apply audio processing, to
audition the audio with the current edits, and to make global settings for offline processing.

On the toolbar, the following options and settings are available:

Add Processes
Add Process

Allows you to add a built-in audio process to the selected event or clip.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.

381
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Direct Offline Processing Window

Audition
Audition

Allows you to audition the selected audio with all processing from the top of the
process list to the process selected in the list. All processes below the selected process
are ignored during playback.
To bypass the selected process for auditioning, press Alt/Opt and click Audition.

Audition Loop

Loops the playback until you deactivate the Audition button.

Audition Volume

Allows you to adjust the volume.

Process Range
Extend Process Range in ms

Allows you to extend the process range beyond the left and right event borders,
enabling you to enlarge the event later while retaining the processing that you applied.

RELATED LINKS
Process Range Extension on page 383

Applying Processing
You can add processing to one or multiple events, clips, or ranges in the Direct Offline
Processing window. This includes audio processes and Sample Editor operations, such as Cut,
Paste, Delete, and using the Draw tool.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:
● Select an event or a range in the Project window.
● Select a clip in the Pool.
● Select a range in the Sample Editor.
● Select an event or a range in the Audio Part Editor.
2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing.
3. On the Direct Offline Processing toolbar, click Add Process and select an audio process.
The selected audio process is added to process list in the left zone.
4. Activate Audition, and make your changes on the process panel.
You get a visual feedback while a process is running. However, even if the processing is not
finished, you can activate Audition at any time.

RESULT
The audio process is rendered into the audio.

382
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Direct Offline Processing Window

In the Project window, the Pool or the Audio Part Editor, a waveform symbol is displayed for
the processed events.

Applying Processing to Multiple Events

Direct Offline Processing allows you to add the built-in audio processes to multiple events at
once. You can also modify or delete processing on multiple events simultaneously.

● To apply audio processes to multiple events, select the audio and add, modify, or delete the
processing.

NOTE

In the Direct Offline Processing window, you can also edit the audio processing of multiple clips
in the Pool simultaneously.

RELATED LINKS
Built-In Audio Processes on page 384
Direct Offline Processing Window on page 380

Process Range Extension

You can extend the process range over the left and the right borders of the audio event.

When adding processing to an event, by default, only the part of the audio clip that corresponds
to the event is processed. If you extend the process range, a specified additional range of the clip
before and after the event borders is also processed. This allows you to enlarge the event, even
after applying the processing.

● To extend the process range, click in the Extend Process Range in ms field on the Direct
Offline Processing toolbar, and specify a value in milliseconds.

NOTE

● For this to work, audio must be available outside the event borders.
● This setting works globally for all events.

Modifying Processes
You can delete or modify some or all processing from a clip in the Direct Offline Processing
window. This includes the audio processes on the Processes pop-up menu and Sample Editor
operations, such as Cut, Paste, Delete, and drawing with the Draw tool.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● Select the processed event in the Project window or in the Audio Part Editor.

NOTE

In the Project window or in the Audio Part Editor, processed events are indicated by a
waveform symbol in the upper right corner.

● Select the processed clip from the Pool.

383
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Built-In Audio Processes

NOTE

In the Pool, processed clips are indicated by a waveform symbol in the Status column.

● Select the processed range in the Sample Editor.

2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing.
3. Do one of the following:

● Activate Audition, and modify the settings of the process.

● Reset the process to its default settings by clicking Reset to Default Values.
● Delete the process by clicking Delete on the process panel.

RELATED LINKS
Direct Offline Processing Window on page 380
Pool Window Columns on page 470

Built-In Audio Processes

Cubase provides several built-in audio processes that can be used for Direct Offline Processing.

Envelope
Envelope allows you to apply a volume envelope to the selected audio.

Curve Type buttons

Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped
Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation.

Envelope display
Shows the shape of the envelope. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark
tone, while the current waveform shape is displayed in a light tone.

● To add a curve point, click the curve.

● To move a curve point, click and drag.
● To remove a curve point, click and drag it outside the display.

Presets pop-up menu

Allows you to manage your presets.

● To save a preset, select Save Preset from the pop-up menu, enter a name, and
click OK.
● To apply a preset, select it from the pop-up menu.
● To remove a preset, select it from the pop-up menu, and click Remove Preset.

384
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Built-In Audio Processes

Fade In/Fade Out

Fade In and Fade Out allow you to apply a fade to the selected audio.

Curve Type buttons

Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped
Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation.

Fade display
Shows the shape of the fade curve. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark
tone, while the current waveform shape is displayed in a light tone.
● To add points, click the curve.
● To change the curve shape, click and drag existing points.
● To remove a point from the curve, drag it outside the display.

Presets pop-up menu

Allows you to manage your presets.
● To save a preset, select Save Preset from the pop-up menu, enter a name, and
click OK.
● To apply a preset, select it from the pop-up menu.
● To remove a preset, select it from the pop-up menu, and click Remove Preset.

Curve Shape buttons

These buttons give you quick access to some common curve shapes.

Gain
Gain allows you to change the gain, that is, the level of the selected audio.

Gain
Allows you to set a gain value between -50 dB and +20 dB.

Clipping Detection text

This text is displayed if you use Audition and the gain setting results in audio levels
above 0 dB.

385
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Built-In Audio Processes

NOTE

In case of clipping, lower the Gain value, and use the Normalize audio process instead.
This allows you to increase the level of the audio to the highest extent possible without
causing clipping.

RELATED LINKS
Normalize on page 386

Invert Phase
Invert Phase allows you to invert the phase of the selected audio.

For stereo audio files, a pop-up menu is available. It allows you to specify which channels are
phase-inverted: the left channel, the right channel, or both.

Normalize
Normalize allows you to raise or lower the level of audio that was recorded at an inappropriate
input level.

Maximum Peak Level

Allows you to normalize your audio based on the maximum peak level. Maximum
Peak Level in dBFS sets a maximum peak level for the audio, between -50 dB and 0 dB.
The current maximum level of the selected audio is subtracted from this maximum
level, and the gain is raised or lowered by the resulting amount.

Remove DC Offset Option

Remove DC Offset allows you to remove any DC offset in the audio selection.

If your audio signal contains too large a component of direct current, you may notice that it is
not centered around the zero level axis. This is called DC offset.

● To verify if your audio contains DC offsets, select the audio, and select Audio > Statistics.

IMPORTANT

DC offset is normally present throughout the entire recording. Therefore, always apply Remove
DC Offset to complete audio clips.

There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process.

RELATED LINKS
Statistics Window on page 398

386
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Built-In Audio Processes

Resample
Resample allows you to change the length, tempo, and pitch of an event.

If you resample to a higher sample rate, the event gets longer, and the audio plays back at a
slower speed, with a lower pitch. If you resample to a lower sample rate, the event gets shorter,
and the audio plays back at a faster speed, with a higher pitch.

File Sample Rate

Shows the original sample rate of the event.

New Sample Rate

Allows you to resample the event by specifying a sample rate.

Difference
Allows you to resample the event by specifying the difference between the original
sample rate and the new sample rate.

Reverse
Reverse allows you to reverse the audio selection so that it sounds as if you play a tape
backwards. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process.

Silence
Silence allows you to replace the selection with silence. There are no adjustable parameters for
this audio process.

Stereo Flip
Stereo Flip allows you to manipulate the left and the right channels of stereo audio selections.

In the Mode pop-up menu, the available options are:

Flip Left-Right
Swaps the left and right channel.

Left to Stereo
Copies the left channel sound to the right channel.

Right to Stereo
Copies the right channel sound to the left channel.

Merge
Merges both channels on each side for mono sound.

Subtract
Subtracts the left channel information from the right. This function is typically used for
karaoke background as it removes the centered mono material from a stereo signal.

387
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Built-In Audio Processes

Time Stretch
Time Stretch allows you to change the length and the tempo of the selected audio without
affecting the pitch.

Define Bars
You can set the length of the selected audio and the time signature in this section.

Bars
Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in bars.

Beats
Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in beats.

Signature
Allows you to set the time signature.

Original Length
This section contains information and settings regarding the audio that is selected for
processing.

Length in Samples
Shows the length of the selected audio in samples.

Length in Seconds
Shows the length of the selected audio in seconds.

Tempo in BPM
Allows you to enter the actual tempo of the audio in beats per minute. This option
allows you to time-stretch the audio to another tempo, without having to compute the
actual time stretch amount.

Resulting Length
These values change automatically if you adjust the Time Stretch Ratio to stretch the audio so
that it fits within a specific time span or tempo.

Samples
Shows the resulting length in samples.

Seconds
Shows the resulting length in seconds.

388
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing

BPM
Shows the resulting tempo in beats per minute. For this to work, the Original Length
values must be specified.

Range
These settings allow you to set a range for the time stretch.

Arbitrary Range Start Time

Allows you to set a start position for the range.

Arbitrary Range End Time

Allows you to set an end position for the range.

Use Locators
Allows you to set the Range values to the left and right locator positions, respectively.

Algorithm
Allows you to select a time stretch algorithm.

Time Stretch Ratio

Allows you to set the amount of time stretch as a percentage of the original length. If you use
the settings in the Resulting Length section to specify the amount of time stretch, this value
changes automatically.

RELATED LINKS
Time Stretch Algorithms on page 391

Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing

You can apply offline processing by using key commands.

If you add audio processes via key commands, the following applies:

● The current settings are used.

● The Direct Offline Processing window opens. This does not apply if the selected process
does not feature any adjustable parameters or if the window is in the background or
minimized.
● You can apply offline processing by using key commands, even with Auto Apply deactivated.

If the corresponding section in the Direct Offline Processing window has the focus, the
following default key commands apply:

Option Key command

Open/Close Direct Offline Processing window F7

Set focus within Direct Offline Processing Tab

window

Navigate in the process list Up Arrow / Down Arrow

389
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Direct Offline Processing
Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing

Option Key command

Activate/Deactivate Audition (Playback Toggle Space

triggers Local Preview must be activated in
the Preferences dialog)

Undo Ctrl / Cmd - Z

To define key commands for further Direct Offline Processing operations, and for directly
adding particular audio processes, use the Key Commands dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Direct Offline Processing Window on page 380
Transport on page 903
Key Commands on page 853

390
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Time Stretch Algorithms

In Cubase, time stretching algorithms are used for operations like the Time Stretch offline
process, or in the Sample Editor.

NOTE

MPEX algorithms are not supported on Apple silicon-based computers.

RELATED LINKS
Time Stretch on page 388
Sample Editor on page 401
Standard on page 391
Limitations on page 392

Standard
The Standard algorithm is optimized for CPU-efficient realtime processing.

The following presets are available:

Standard – Drums
For percussive sounds. This mode does not change the timing of your audio. If you use
it with certain tuned percussion instruments, you may experience audible artifacts. In
this case, try Mix mode as an alternative.

Standard – Plucked
For audio with transients and a relatively stable spectral sound character like plucked
instruments.

Standard – Pads
For pitched audio with slower rhythm and a stable spectral sound character. This
minimizes sound artifacts, but the rhythmic accuracy is not preserved.

Standard – Vocals
For slower signals with transients and a prominent tonal character like vocals.

Standard – Mix
For pitched material with a less homogenous sound character. This mode preserves
the rhythm and minimizes the artifacts.

Standard – Custom
Allows you to set the time-stretching parameters manually.

Standard – Solo
For monophonic material like solo woodwind/brass instruments or solo vocals,
monophonic synths or string instruments that do not play harmonies. This mode
preserves the timbre of the audio.

391
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Time Stretch Algorithms
Limitations

Custom Warp Settings

If you select the Standard – Custom mode, a dialog opens where you can manually adjust the
parameters that govern the sound quality of the time stretching:

Grain Size
Allows you to determine the size of the grains into which the standard time-stretching
algorithm splits the audio. Low grain size values lead to good results for material that
has many transients.

Overlap
This is the percentage of the whole grain that will overlap with other grains. Use higher
values for material with a stable sound character.

Variance
This is the percentage of the whole length of the grains, and it sets a variation in
positioning, so that the overlapping area sounds smooth. A variance setting of 0
produces a sound akin to the time stretching used in early samplers, whereas higher
settings produce more rhythmic smearing effects but fewer audio artifacts.

Limitations
Applying time stretching to audio material can lead to a degradation in audio quality and to
audible artifacts. The result depends on the source material, the particular stretch operations
applied, and the selected audio algorithm preset.

As a rule of thumb, smaller changes in duration cause less degradation. However, there are
additional issues one should be aware of when working with time stretching algorithms.

NOTE

In rare cases, editing warped audio events may cause discontinuities at the edit points. You can
then try to move the edit point to a different position or bounce the audio event prior to editing.

Reverse Playback and Scrubbing

Most of the algorithms used for time stretching only support forward playback. Reverse playback
or scrubbing of warped audio events can lead to recurring artifacts in playback.

Stretch Factor
Some algorithms may put limitations on the maximum degree of time stretching supported.

392
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Audio Functions

Cubase offers particular functions for analyzing the audio in your project.

RELATED LINKS
Detect Silence Dialog on page 393
Spectrum Analyzer Window on page 397
Statistics Window on page 398

Detect Silence Dialog

The Detect Silence dialog allows you to search for silent sections in events. You can split events
and remove the silent parts from the project, or create regions corresponding to the non-silent
sections.

● To open the Detect Silence dialog for a selected audio event, clip, or selection range, select
Audio > Advanced > Detect Silence.

NOTE

If you select multiple events, you can process the selected events successively with individual
settings or apply the same settings to all selected events simultaneously.

393
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Functions
Detect Silence Dialog

The following options are available:

Waveform display
Shows the waveform of the selected audio and allows you to preview the analyzed
audio before it is processed.
When you move the mouse over the waveform, the mouse pointer changes to a
speaker icon. Click the waveform, and hold to play back the audio from this position.
The Preview slider allows you to set the preview level. Mute Gaps mutes sections that
are detected as silence when previewing.

● To zoom in and out of the waveform, use the zoom slider to the right, or hold
Ctrl/Cmd and use the mouse wheel.
● To scroll the waveform, use the scrollbar or the mouse wheel.
● To adjust the Open Threshold and Close Threshold values, move the squares at
the beginning and at the end of the audio file.

The Detection section features the following options:

Open Threshold
When the audio level exceeds this value, the function opens and lets the sound pass.
Audio material below the set level is detected as silence.

394
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Functions
Detect Silence Dialog

Close Threshold
When the audio level drops below this value, the function closes and detects sounds
below this level as silence. This value cannot be higher than the Open Threshold value.

Linked
Activate this option to set the same values for Open Threshold and Close Threshold.

Minimum Time Open

Determines the minimum time that the function lets the sound pass. If your audio
contains repeated short sounds and this results in too many short open sections, try
raising this value.

Minimum Time Closed

Determines the minimum time that the function remains closed after detecting silence.
Set this to a low value to make sure that you do not remove sounds.

Pre-roll
Causes the function to open slightly before an open section. Use this option to avoid
removing the attack of sounds.

Post-roll
Causes the function to close slightly after an open section. Use this option to avoid
removing the natural decay of sounds.

The Result section features the following options:

Number of Sections
Shows the number of events that are created if you click Process.

Add as Regions
Creates regions of the non-silent sections.

Region Name
Allows you to specify a name for the non-silent sections.

Auto Number Start

Allows you to specify the start number for the numbers that are automatically
appended to the region names.

Strip Silence
Splits the event at the beginning and at the end of each non-silent section and removes
the silent sections in between.

Process All Selected Events

Applies the same settings to all selected events. This option is only available if you
selected more than one event.

Apply Fades
Applies fade ins and fade outs of the set length to the resulting events.

Analyze
Analyzes the audio event and redraws the waveform display to indicate which sections
are considered silent.

Auto
Activate this option to analyze the audio event and to update the display automatically
every time you change the settings.

395
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Functions
Detect Silence Dialog

NOTE

If you are working with very long files, consider deactivating the Auto option, as this
may slow down the process.

Process
Processes the audio according to your settings.

RELATED LINKS
Removing Silent Sections on page 396

Removing Silent Sections

The Detect Silence dialog allows you to detect and remove silent sections of your audio.

PROCEDURE
1. Select one or multiple audio events in the Project window.
2. Select Audio > Advanced > Detect Silence.
3. In the Detect Silence dialog, make your changes.
4. Click Analyze to analyze the audio.
The audio is analyzed, and the waveform is redrawn to indicate which sections are
considered silent according to your settings. The number of detected regions is displayed.
5. Optional: Click and hold the waveform display to preview the result.
If Mute Gaps is activated, silent sections are muted during preview.
6. Optional: In the Detection section, readjust the settings until you are satisfied with the
result.
7. Optional: In the Result section, activate Add as Regions.
8. In the Result section, activate Strip Silence.
9. Click Process.

RESULT
The event is split and the silent sections are removed.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

● If you have selected more than one event and did not activate Process All Selected Events,
the Detect Silence dialog opens again after processing, allowing you to make separate
settings for the next event.

RELATED LINKS
Detect Silence Dialog on page 393

396
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Functions
Spectrum Analyzer Window

Spectrum Analyzer Window

The Spectrum Analyzer window displays the audio spectrum of an event, clip, or selection range
as a two-dimensional graph, with frequency range on the x-axis and level distribution on the
y-axis.

● To open the Spectrum Analyzer window for a selected audio event, clip, or selection range,
select Audio > Spectrum Analyzer.

Frequency display
Shows the frequency graphs for the analyzed audio.
If you hover the mouse pointer over a certain position, the channel, frequency, note,
and level at that position are shown in the value field at the top of the display.

Channel selector
For multi-channel audio, this pop-up menu allows you to select which channels are
shown in the frequency display.

Zoom slider
Allows you to zoom in and out horizontally.

RELATED LINKS
Analyzing the Audio Spectrum on page 397

Analyzing the Audio Spectrum

The Spectrum Analyzer allows you to analyze the audio of a selected event, clip, or selection
range.

PROCEDURE
1. Select an audio event, clip, or a selection range.
2. Select Audio > Spectrum Analyzer.

397
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Functions
Statistics Window

RESULT
The audio spectrum of the selected event, clip, or selection range is displayed as a two-
dimensional graph in the Spectrum Analyzer window.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

You can display the difference in level between two positions on the same or on different graphs.

RELATED LINKS
Comparing Level Values on page 398

Comparing Level Values

You can display the difference in level between two positions on the same or on different graphs
in the Spectrum Analyzer window.

PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the first position and right-click to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the second frequency position.

RESULT
The difference in level between the positions is displayed as value D in the value field.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Click the frequency display to reset the selection of the first position.

RELATED LINKS
Spectrum Analyzer Window on page 397

Statistics Window
The Statistics function analyzes the selected audio events, clips, or selection ranges.

● To open the Statistics window for a selected audio event, clip, or selection range, select
Audio > Statistics.

398
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Functions
Statistics Window

The Statistics window shows the following information:

Channel
Shows the name of the analyzed channel.

Min. Sample Value

Shows the lowest sample value in dB.

Max. Sample Value

Shows the highest sample value in dB.

Peak Amplitude
Shows the largest amplitude in dB.

True Peak
Shows the maximum absolute level of the audio signal waveform in the continuous
time domain.

DC Offset
Shows the amount of DC offset as a percentage and in dB.

Bit Depth
Shows the current calculated bit depth.

Estimated Pitch
Shows the estimated pitch.

Sample Rate
Shows the sample rate.

Average RMS (AES17)

Shows the average loudness, in accordance with the AES17 standard.

Max. RMS
Shows the highest RMS value.

Max. RMS All Channels

Shows the highest RMS value of all channels.

399
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Functions
Statistics Window

RELATED LINKS
Remove DC Offset Option on page 386

400
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor

The Sample Editor provides an overview of the selected audio event. It allows you to view and
edit audio by cutting and pasting, removing, or drawing audio data, as well as by processing
audio. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time.

You can open the Sample Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project
window. This is useful if you want to access the Sample Editor functions from within a fixed zone
of the Project window.

To open an audio event in the Sample Editor, do one of the following:

● Double-click an event in the Project window.

● Select an event in the Project window, and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd - E .
● Select an event in the Project window, and select Audio > Open Sample Editor.
● In the Key Commands dialog in the Editors category, assign a key command for Open
Sample Editor. Select an event in the Project window, and use the key command.

NOTE

If you select Audio > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors
page. Make your changes to specify if you want the Sample Editor to open in a separate window
or in the lower zone of the Project window.

The Sample Editor window:

The Sample Editor is divided into several sections:

1 Toolbar

401
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Toolbar

Contains tools for selecting, manipulating, and playing back audio.

2 Info Line
Shows information about the audio.
3 Overview
Shows an overview of the whole audio clip and indicates which part of the clip is shown in
the waveform display.
4 Sample Editor Inspector
Contains audio editing tools and functions.

NOTE

The Inspector for the lower zone editor is shown in the left zone of the Project window.

5 Ruler
Shows the timeline and the time format of the project.
6 Waveform display
Shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip.
7 Regions
Allows you to add and edit regions.

NOTE

The info line, the overview line, and the regions can be activated/deactivated by clicking Set up
Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options.

RELATED LINKS
Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 57
Opening the Editor Inspector on page 52
Sample Editor Toolbar on page 402
Info Line on page 408
Overview Line on page 408
Sample Editor Inspector on page 409
Ruler on page 410
Waveform Display on page 411
Regions List on page 413

Sample Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio.

● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar, and activate or deactivate the
elements.

The following options are available:

Default Items
Solo Editor

Solos the selected audio during playback.

402
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Toolbar

Solo Editor Mode

Allows you to select a mode for the Solo Editor function.

● Solo All Clips uses all clips in the editor display.

● Solo follows ‘Clip Editing Mode’ uses only the clips specified via the Clip Editing
Mode.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.

Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll

Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.

Select Auto-Scroll Settings

Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend
Auto-Scroll When Editing.

Preview
Audition

Plays back the selected audio.

Audition Loop

Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition.

Audition Volume

Allows you to adjust the volume.

Tool Buttons
Range Selection

Selects ranges.

Draw

Draws a volume curve.

Zoom

Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt , and click to zoom out.

Play

403
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Toolbar

Allows you to play back the clip from the position where you click until you release the
mouse button.

Scrub

Allows you to locate positions.

Snap
Snap to Zero Crossing

Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero.

Snap On/Off

Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the specific positions.

Grid Options
Show/Hide Grid

Shows/Hides the grid in the waveform display.

Grid Type

Allows you to select a grid type. The options depend on the time format that is selected
for the ruler. If you select Seconds as the ruler format, time-based grid options
are available. If you select Bars+Beats as the ruler format, musical grid options are
available.

Quantize
Apply Quantize

Applies the quantize settings.

Quantize Presets

Allows you to select a quantize preset.

Soft Quantize On/Off

Activates/Deactivates soft quantize.

Open Quantize Panel

Opens the Quantize Panel.

Musical Mode
Musical Mode

Locks audio clips to the project tempo by using realtime time stretching.

404
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Toolbar

Musical Information
Number of Bars Defined in Audio File

Displays the estimated bars of your audio file.

Remaining Number of Beats Defined in Audio File

Displays the remaining number of beats of your audio file.

Defined Tempo of Audio File

Displays the estimated tempo of your audio file.

Defined Time Signature of Audio File

Displays the estimated time signature of your audio file.

Warping Algorithm for Audio Clip

Allows you to select a warp algorithm.

View Options
Zoom Mode

Allows you to select a zoom mode for the waveform display.

● If Global Zoom is selected, the display follows the zoom and scroll controls of the
Sample Editor.
● If Clip-Based Zoom is selected, the display automatically zooms to the clip of the
selected event. In this mode, you cannot scroll beyond the clip borders.
● If Auto-Zoom to Event is selected, the display automatically zooms to the active
event. In this mode, you can scroll between project start and end.

NOTE

If the Definition section of the Sample Editor Inspector is opened, Zoom Mode is
automatically switched from Global Zoom to Clip-Based Zoom.

Editor Display Mode

Allows you to select a display mode for the waveform display.

● If Show Clips and Events is selected, the display shows the clips and the start and
end boundaries of the events that are opened in the Sample Editor.
● If Show Events is selected, the display shows only the waveform between the start
and end boundaries of the events that are opened in the Sample Editor.
● If Show Clips is selected, the display shows only the clips of the events that are
opened in the Sample Editor, but not the event boundaries.

Activate Clip for Editing

405
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Toolbar

Lists all audio clips that are opened in the Sample Editor and allows you to activate
one of them for editing.

Independent Track Loop

Independent Track Loop

Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.

Loop Start Time

The independent track loop start time.

Loop End Time

The independent track loop end time.

Right Divider
Right Divider
Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.

Window Zone Controls

Open in Separate Window

This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate
window.

Open in Lower Zone

This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of
the Project window.

Set up Window Layout

Allows you to set up the window layout.

Show/Hide Left Zone

Allows you to activate/deactivate the left zone.

Show/Hide Regions

Allows you to activate/deactivate the regions.

RELATED LINKS
Auto-Scroll Settings Menu on page 215
Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing on page 215

406
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Toolbar

Locating Positions with the Scrub Tool

The Scrub tool allows you to locate positions in the audio.

PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, activate the Scrub tool.
2. Click in the waveform display, and keep the mouse button pressed.
The project cursor moves to the position where you clicked.
3. Drag to the left or to the right.

RESULT
The audio is played back, and you can hear at which position the cursor is located.

NOTE

You can determine the speed and the pitch of the playback by dragging faster or more slowly.

Editing Audio Samples with the Draw Tool

You can edit the audio clip at sample level with the Draw tool. This way, you can remove audio
clicks manually, for example.

PROCEDURE
1. On the audio waveform, locate the sample position that you want to edit, and zoom in to the
highest zoom level.
2. On the toolbar, select the Draw tool.

3. Click at the beginning of the section that you want to correct, and draw in the new curve.

RESULT
A range selection covering the edited section is automatically applied.

407
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Info Line

Selecting a Range with the Range Selection Tool

The Range Selection tool in the Sample Editor toolbar allows you to select a range.

PREREQUISITE
Snap to Zero Crossing is activated on the toolbar. This option ensures that the start and the end
of the selection are always at zero crossings.

PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool.
2. Click at the position in the waveform display where you want the range to start, and drag to
the position where you want the range to end.
3. Optional: Perform one of the following actions to resize the selection range:

● Drag the left or the right edge of the selection to a new position.
● Hold down Shift , and click at a new position.

RESULT
The selected range is highlighted in the waveform display.

RELATED LINKS
Range Editing in the Project Window and in the Editors on page 185

Info Line
The info line shows information about the audio clip, such as the audio format and the selection
range.

● To show or hide the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or
deactivate Info Line.
The on/off status of the info line in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor
are independent of each other.

NOTE

Initially, length and position values are displayed in the format specified in the Project Setup
dialog.

Overview Line
The overview line displays the whole clip and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the
waveform display.

● To show or hide the overview line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate
or deactivate the Overview option.

408
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Inspector

The on/off status of the overview line in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone
editor are independent of each other.

1 Event Start
Indicates the start of the audio event.
2 Waveform display
The area in lighter gray indicates the section of the audio that is displayed in the waveform
display.

● You can specify which section of the audio is shown by clicking in the lower half of this
display and dragging to the left or right.
● You can zoom in or out horizontally by dragging the left or the right edge of this display.
● You can show a different section of the audio by clicking in the upper half of this display
and dragging a rectangle.
3 Snap Point
The dotted vertical line indicates the start of the audio event.
4 Selection
The blue area indicates which section is selected in the waveform display.
5 Event End
Indicates the end of the audio event.

Sample Editor Inspector

The Inspector shows controls and parameters that allow you to edit the audio event that is
opened in the Sample Editor.

● In the Sample Editor window, you can show or hide the Inspector by clicking Set up
Window Layout on the toolbar and activating or deactivating Inspector.

NOTE

In the lower zone editor, the Inspector is always shown in the left zone of the Project
window.

● To open or close the Inspector sections, click their names.

RELATED LINKS
Opening the Editor Inspector on page 52

409
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Ruler

Hitpoints Section
The Hitpoints section allows you to edit hitpoints to slice your audio. Here you can create groove
quantize presets, markers, regions, and events based on hitpoints.

● To open the Hitpoints section, click its tab in the Sample Editor Inspector.

RELATED LINKS
Hitpoints on page 418

Ruler
The ruler shows the timeline and the time format of the project, the project tempo grid.

The ruler is located above the waveform display. It is always shown.

410
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Waveform Display

Waveform Display
The waveform display shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip.

1 Level Scale menu

Allow you to show the level as a percentage or in dB. Here, you can also activate the display
of the half level axis.
2 Ruler
Shows the project tempo grid.
3 Half Level Axis
To show the half level axis, open the level scale menu, and select Show Half Level Axis.
4 Audio waveform
Shows the waveform image of the selected audio.

NOTE

You can set up a wave image style in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Audio page).

Zooming Vertically
You can zoom in the waveform vertically. This allows you to see a specific detail of the waveform.

PROCEDURE
● Drag the vertical zoom slider down to zoom in or drag it upwards to zoom out.

RESULT
The vertical scale changes relative to the height of the Sample Editor.

411
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Waveform Display

Zooming Horizontally
You can zoom in the waveform horizontally. This allows you to zoom in or out on the time scale.

PROCEDURE
● Drag the horizontal zoom slider to the right to zoom in or to the left to zoom out.

RESULT
The horizontal zoom setting is shown on the info line as samples per pixel. You can zoom in
horizontally to a scale of less than one sample per pixel. This is required for using the Draw tool.

NOTE

● If you have zoomed in to one sample per pixel or less, the appearance of the samples
depends on the Interpolate Audio Waveforms option in the Preferences dialog (Event
Display—Audio page).

Zoom Submenu
The Zoom submenu of the Edit menu contains options for zooming in the Sample Editor.

● To open the Zoom submenu, select Edit > Zoom.

The following options are available:

Zoom In
Zooms in one step, centering on the project cursor.

Zoom Out
Zooms out one step, centering on the project cursor.

Zoom Full
Zooms out according to the Zoom Mode in the Sample Editor.
● If Global Zoom is activated, this function zooms out so that the entire project is
visible in the waveform display. The entire project means the timeline from the
project start to the length set in the Project Setup dialog.
● If Clip-Based Zoom or Auto-Zoom to Event is activated, this function zooms out
so that the entire clip is visible in the waveform display.

Zoom to Selection
Zooms out so that the entire clip is visible in the waveform display.

Zoom to Selection (Horiz.)

Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the waveform display.

Zoom to Event
Zooms in so that the waveform display shows the section of the clip corresponding to
the edited audio event. This is not available if you have opened the Sample Editor from
the Pool.

Zoom In Vertically
Zooms in one step vertically.

412
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Regions List

Zoom Out Vertically

Zooms out one step vertically.

Zoom In On Waveform Vertically

Zooms in on the waveform vertically.

Zoom Out Of Waveform Vertically

Zooms out of the waveform vertically.

Undo/Redo Zoom
Allows you to undo/redo the last zoom operation.

RELATED LINKS
Zoom Category on page 869

Regions List
Regions are sections within an audio clip that allow you to mark important sections in the audio.
You can add and edit regions for the selected audio clip in the regions zone.

● To show or hide the Regions, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or
deactivate Regions.

The following controls are available:

1 Region Start
Shows the start of the region in the audio waveform.
2 Region End
Shows the end of the region in the audio waveform.
3 Add Region
Allows you to create a region of the current range selection.
4 Remove Region
Allows you to remove the selected region.
5 Select Region

413
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Regions List

If you select a region from the list and click this button above, the corresponding section
of the audio clip is selected (as if you had selected it with the Range Selection tool) and
zoomed. This is useful if you want to apply processing to the region only.
6 Play Region
Plays back the selected region.
7 Regions list
Allows you to select and display regions in the audio waveform.

Creating Regions
PREREQUISITE
You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and you have activated Regions.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool.
2. In the waveform display, select the range that you want to convert into a region.
3. Perform one of the following actions:
● Above the regions list, click Add Region.
● Select Audio > Advanced > Event or Range as Region.
A region is created, corresponding to the selected range.
4. Optional: Double-click the region name in the list, and enter a new name.

RESULT
The region is added to the regions list.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Click the region in the regions list to instantly display it in the Sample Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Regions on page 426

Creating Regions from Hitpoints

You can create regions from hitpoints. This is useful to isolate specific sounds.

PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create regions is opened in the Sample Editor, and the
hitpoints are set at the correct positions.

PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section of the Sample Editor Inspector, click Create Regions.

RESULT
Regions are created between two hitpoint positions and shown in the Sample Editor.

414
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Regions List

Adjusting Start and End Positions of Regions

PREREQUISITE
You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and you have activated Regions. You
have created regions.

PROCEDURE
● Perform one of the following actions:

● Drag the Region Start or Region End handle to a different position in the waveform
display.
● Double-click the Start or End field in the regions list, and enter a new value.

NOTE

The positions are shown in the time format selected for the ruler and the info line, but they
are relative to the start of the audio clip.

Removing Regions
PREREQUISITE
You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and you have activated Regions. You
have created regions.

PROCEDURE
1. In the regions list, select the region that you want to remove.
2. Above the regions list, click Remove Region.

RESULT
The region is removed from the regions list.

Creating Audio Events from Regions

You can create new audio events from regions using drag and drop.

PREREQUISITE
You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and you have activated Regions. You
have created regions.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the region in the regions list.
2. Drag the region to the desired position in the Project window.

RESULT
An event is created from the region.

415
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Snap Point

Snap Point
The snap point is a marker within an audio event that can be used as a reference position. An
event can only have one snap point.

● To show the snap point, click Editor Display Mode on the toolbar, then choose Show Clips
and Events or Show Event.

Depending on the context, the event snap point is set as follows:

● If you record an audio event, the snap point is set to the next grid position.
● If you bounce a selection of one or multiple events, the snap point is set to the start of the
new event. If there are any existing snap points in the selection that you have set manually,
the first one of them on the timeline is used for the new event.
● If you make offline processing permanent, the snap point is set to the start of the new event.
If you set the snap point manually, it maintains its current position.
● If you export audio, the snap point is set to the start of the new audio file.

You can manually move the snap point to any other relevant position in the audio.

The snap point is used when Snap is activated and you insert a clip from the Sample Editor in
the event display. It is also used when you move or copy events in the event display.

In the Sample Editor, you can edit the following snap points:

● Event Snap Point

This is shown in the Sample Editor if you open a clip from within the Project window.
● Clip Snap Point
This is shown in the Sample Editor if you open a clip from the Pool.

NOTE

The clip snap point serves as a template for the event snap point. However, it is the event snap
point that is taken into account when snapping.

RELATED LINKS
Sample Editor Toolbar on page 402

416
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sample Editor
Snap Point

Adjusting Snap Points on page 417

Adjusting Snap Points

You can manually set the snap point to any position in the audio event.

PREREQUISITE
● You have opened the audio event in the Sample Editor.
● To show the snap point, click Editor Display Mode on the toolbar, then choose Show Clips
and Events or Show Event.

PROCEDURE
1. Optional: On the Sample Editor toolbar, select the Scrub tool.
This allows you to audition the audio while setting the snap point.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the snap point, and drag it to the desired position in the audio
event.
The mouse pointer becomes a hand symbol, and a tooltip indicates that you can set the snap
point.

RESULT
The event snap point is moved to the position to which you dragged it.

NOTE

You can also adjust the snap point by setting the project cursor at the desired position and
selecting Audio > Snap Point to Cursor.

RELATED LINKS
Snap Point on page 416

417
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints

Hitpoints mark musically relevant positions in audio files. Cubase can detect these positions and
create hitpoints automatically by analyzing onsets and melodic changes of the audio.

NOTE

All hitpoint operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone
editor.

When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically
detects hitpoints if Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection is activated in the Preferences dialog
(Editing—Audio page).

In the Project window, hitpoints are shown for the selected event, provided that the zoom factor
is high enough.

The hitpoint functions are available in the Hitpoints section of the Sample Editor.

You can use hitpoints for the following purposes:

● Create slices of the audio

Slices allow you to change the tempo and the timing of the audio without affecting its pitch
and quality, or to replace or extract individual sounds from loops.
● Quantize audio
● Extract the groove from the audio
The timing is extracted from the audio, and a groove quantize preset is created. You can use
this to quantize other events.
● Create markers from the audio
● Create regions from the audio
● Create events from the audio
● Create MIDI notes from the audio

NOTE

Hitpoints work best with drums, rhythmic recordings, or loops.

If the automatic hitpoint detection does not meet your expectations, you can edit hitpoints
manually or add additional hitpoints. The following editing operations are available in the
Sample Editor:

● Locking hitpoints prevents them from being filtered out, regardless of the settings in the
Hitpoints section. You can lock a hitpoint by pointing at the triangle that represents the
hitpoint and clicking on it.
● Disabling hitpoints excludes them from further operations. You can disable a hitpoint that
you do not need by pressing Shift and clicking on the line that represents the hitpoint.
● You can insert an additional hitpoint by pressing Alt/Opt and clicking at the position where
you want to insert the hitpoint.

418
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Calculating Hitpoints

● You can move a hitpoint by moving the mouse pointer on the vertical line that represents the
hitpoint and dragging to the left or to the right.

RELATED LINKS
Calculating Hitpoints on page 419
Editing Hitpoints Manually on page 421

Calculating Hitpoints
When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase can
automatically detect hitpoints.

PREREQUISITE
Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio
page).

PROCEDURE
1. Import or record an audio file.
Cubase automatically detects hitpoints.

NOTE

If your audio file is very long, this may take a while.

2. Select the audio event in the Project window, and make sure the zoom factor is high
enough.

RESULT
The hitpoints calculated for the selected event are shown in the Project window.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

You can manually edit detected hitpoints or add further hitpoints in the Sample Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Editing - Audio on page 885
Editing Hitpoints Manually on page 421

Hitpoint Filters in the Hitpoint Section

Cubase can automatically detect and filter hitpoints.

For the automatic hitpoint detection to work, Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection must be
activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page). If the detection result does not meet
your expectations, you can adjust the hitpoint filtering manually.

● To filter hitpoints, open the audio event in the Sample Editor, and open the Hitpoints
section.

419
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Calculating Hitpoints

Main Section
Edit Hitpoints
Allows you to edit hitpoints manually in the event display.

Threshold
Filters hitpoints by their peaks. Drag the slider to the right to discard hitpoints of
quieter crosstalk signals, for example.

Intensity
Filters hitpoints by their intensity. Drag the slider to the right to discard less intense
hitpoints.

Minimum Length
Filters hitpoints by their distance between two hitpoints. This option allows you to
avoid creating slices that are too short.

Beats
Filters hitpoints by their musical position. This option allows you to discard hitpoints
that do not fit within a certain range of a defined beat value.

Remove All
Removes all automatically calculated and manually created hitpoints. To restore all
automatically calculated hitpoints, click Edit Hitpoints.

Create Section
Slices
Creates slices at hitpoint positions.

Groove
Creates a groove quantize preset at hitpoint positions.

Markers
Creates markers at hitpoint positions.

Regions
Creates regions at hitpoint positions.

Events
Creates events at hitpoint positions.

420
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Calculating Hitpoints

MIDI Notes
Creates MIDI notes at hitpoint positions.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Hitpoints Manually on page 421

Editing Hitpoints Manually

It is crucial for any further editing that the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. Therefore,
if the automatic hitpoint detection does not meet your expectations, you can edit hitpoints
manually.

PREREQUISITE
The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor, and in the Hitpoints section, hitpoints are
filtered by their peak and/or intensity, by their distance, or by their musical position.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, activate the Edit Hitpoints tool.

2. Move the mouse to the waveform display, and click between two hitpoints.
The mouse pointer changes to a speaker icon, and the tooltip Play back Slice is shown. The
slice is played back from the beginning to the end.

421
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window

3. To disable a hitpoint that you do not need, press Shift , and click on the line that represents
the hitpoint.
The mouse pointer changes to a cross icon, and the tooltip Disable Hitpoints is shown.
Disabled hitpoints are not taken into account for further operations.

4. Press Tab to navigate to the next slice.

The slice is played back automatically.
5. To insert a hitpoint, press Alt/Opt , and click at the position where you want to insert the
hitpoint.
The mouse pointer changes to a draw icon, and the tooltip Insert Hitpoint is shown.
6. To move a hitpoint, move the mouse pointer on the vertical line that represents the hitpoint,
and drag to the left or to the right.
The mouse pointer changes to a double arrow, and the tooltip Move Hitpoint is shown.
Moved hitpoints are locked by default.
7. To make sure that a hitpoint is not accidentally filtered out, lock it by pointing at the triangle
that represents it and clicking on it.
The tooltip Lock Hitpoint is shown.

RESULT
The hitpoints are edited according to your settings.

NOTE

To reset a hitpoint to its original state, press Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt until the tooltip Enable/Unlock
Hitpoints is shown, and click on the line that represents the hitpoint.

RELATED LINKS
Hitpoint Filters in the Hitpoint Section on page 419

Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window

You can navigate through the hitpoints of an audio event in the Project window.

PREREQUISITE
Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio
page).

PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio track that contains the audio event for which you want to locate hitpoints.
2. Perform one of the following actions:

422
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Slices

● Press Alt/Opt - N to navigate to the next hitpoint.

● Press Alt/Opt - B to navigate to the previous hitpoint.

RESULT
The project cursor jumps to the respective hitpoint.

Slices
You can create slices from hitpoints, where each slice ideally represents an individual sound or
beat of the audio.

You can use these slices to change the tempo and the timing of the audio without affecting its
pitch and quality.

NOTE

Slices are created in the Sample Editor and edited in the Audio Part Editor.

Audio that meets the following characteristics is suitable:

● Individual sounds have a noticeable attack.

● The recording quality is good.
● The recording is free of crosstalk signals.
● The audio is free of smearing effects like delays, for example.

Slicing Audio
Slicing audio is useful if you want to change the tempo and the timing of the audio without
affecting its pitch and quality.

PREREQUISITE
The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct
positions.

NOTE

When slicing audio, all events referring to the edited clip are also replaced.

PROCEDURE
● Perform one of the following actions:

● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Create section, and
click Slices.
● Select Audio > Hitpoints > Create Audio Slices from Hitpoints.

RESULT
The areas between the hitpoints are sliced and become separate events. The original audio event
is replaced by an audio part containing the slices.

423
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Slices

On playback, the audio plays back seamlessly at the project tempo.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Change the project tempo. The slices are moved accordingly, keeping their relative positions
within the part.
Double-click the sliced audio part, and replace or extract individual slices in the Audio Part
Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Slices and the Project Tempo on page 424
Audio Part Editor on page 430

Slices and the Project Tempo

The project tempo affects how the sliced audio is played back.

RELATED LINKS
Closing Gaps on page 424
Deleting Overlaps on page 424
Musical Mode on page 429
Making Global Auto Fade Settings on page 276
Making Auto Fade Settings for Individual Tracks on page 276

Closing Gaps
If the project tempo is slower than the tempo of the original audio event, there may be audible
gaps between the slice events in the part. You can close these gaps so that the audio plays
without any breaks.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● Select Audio > Advanced > Close Gaps (Time Stretch) to apply time stretch to each slice
and to close the gaps.
Consider activating auto fades for the corresponding audio track and setting the fade-
out to 10 ms to eliminate clicks.
● Select Audio > Advanced > Close Gaps (Crossfade) to apply crossfades to the slices and
to close the gaps.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

NOTE

If you decide to change the tempo again, undo your actions and use the original, unstretched
file.

Deleting Overlaps
If the project tempo is higher than the tempo of the original audio event, the slice events in the
part may overlap. You can delete these overlaps.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the track in the track list, and from the context menu, select Auto Fades Settings.

424
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Creating a Groove Quantize Preset

2. In the Auto Fades dialog, activate Auto Crossfades.

3. Click OK.
4. Select the overlapping events in the part, and select Audio > Advanced > Delete Overlaps.

RESULT
The sound is smoothed out.

Creating a Groove Quantize Preset

You can use hitpoints to create a groove quantize preset.

PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to extract the timing is opened in the Sample Editor, and
the hitpoints are set at the correct positions.

PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Create section, and click
Groove.

RESULT
The groove is extracted from the audio event and automatically selected in the Quantize Presets
pop-up menu on the Project window toolbar.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Open the Quantize Panel, and save the groove as a preset.

RELATED LINKS
Quantize Panel on page 259

Creating Markers
You can create markers at hitpoint positions. This allows you to snap to hitpoint positions.

PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create markers is opened in the Sample Editor, and the
hitpoints are set at the correct positions.

PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Create section, and click
Markers.

RESULT
If your project has no marker track, a marker track is added and activated automatically, and a
marker is created at every hitpoint position.

RELATED LINKS
Markers on page 288

425
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Creating Regions

Creating Regions
You can create regions at hitpoint positions. This allows you to isolate recorded sounds.

PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create regions is opened in the Sample Editor, and the
hitpoints are set at the correct positions.

PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Create section, and click
Regions.

RESULT
Regions are created between two hitpoint positions and shown in the Sample Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Regions on page 414

Creating Events
You can create events at hitpoint positions.

PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create events is opened in the Sample Editor, and the
hitpoints are set at the correct positions.

PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Create section, and click
Events.

RESULT
Events are created between two hitpoint positions.

Creating MIDI Notes

You can create MIDI notes from hitpoints. This allows you to double, replace, or enrich drum hits
by triggering sounds of a VST instrument.

PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create MIDI notes is opened in the Sample Editor, and
the hitpoints are set at the correct positions.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Create section, and click
MIDI Notes.
2. In the Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes dialog, set up the parameters.
3. Click OK.

426
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Hitpoints
Creating MIDI Notes

RESULT
A MIDI track is added to your project, and MIDI notes are created at every hitpoint position.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Assign a VST instrument to the MIDI track, and select a sound to enrich the audio.

Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes Dialog

The Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes dialog allows you to specify how to convert hitpoints
when you create MIDI notes from hitpoints.

● To open the Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes dialog, open the Create section in the
Hitpoints section of the Sample Editor Inspector, and click MIDI Notes.

The following options are available:

Velocity Mode
Allows you to select a velocity mode:
● If you want the velocity values of the created MIDI notes to vary according to the
peak levels of the corresponding hitpoints, select Dynamic Velocity.
● If you want to assign the same velocity value to all created MIDI notes, select Fixed
Velocity.

Velocity
Sets the Fixed Velocity.

Pitch
Sets a note pitch for all created MIDI notes.

Length
Sets a note length for all created MIDI notes.

Destination
Allows you to select a destination:

● To place the MIDI part on the first selected MIDI or instrument track, select First
Selected Track.

NOTE

Any MIDI parts from previous conversions on this track will be deleted.

● To create a new MIDI track for the MIDI part, select New MIDI Track.
● To copy the MIDI part to the clipboard, select Project Clipboard.

427
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Tempo Matching Audio

Cubase offers several functions that allow you to match the tempo of the audio in your project.

In the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor, you can perform the following tempo
matching operations:

● Stretch to Project Tempo

Stretches the selected event to match the project tempo.
● Musical Mode
Applies realtime time stretching to audio clips, so that they match the project tempo.

RELATED LINKS
Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo on page 428
Musical Mode on page 429

Algorithm Presets
You can select an algorithm preset that is applied for realtime playback and time stretching.

The Warping Algorithm for Audio Clip pop-up menu on the toolbar and in the Inspector of
the Sample Editor contains various presets that determine the audio quality of the realtime time
stretching.

The algorithm preset affects warp changes in Musical Mode.

RELATED LINKS
Algorithm Presets on page 428
Time Stretch Algorithms on page 391

Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo

You can stretch audio loops to the project tempo.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Audio File, select the audio loop that you want to import, and click
OK.
2. Select the audio loop in the project.
3. Select Audio > Advanced > Stretch to Project Tempo.

428
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Tempo Matching Audio
Musical Mode

RESULT
The audio loop is stretched to match the project tempo.

Musical Mode
The Musical Mode allows you to tempo-match audio loops to the project tempo.

If you activate Musical Mode for an audio clip, realtime time stretching is applied to the clip so
that it matches the project tempo. The audio events adapt to any tempo changes in Cubase, just
like MIDI events.

In the Sample Editor, you can activate Musical Mode on the toolbar.

NOTE

● You can also activate/deactivate Musical Mode from within the Pool by clicking the
corresponding checkbox in the Musical Mode column.
● Cubase supports ACID® loops. These loops are standard audio files, but with embedded
tempo/length information. When ACID® files are imported into Cubase, Musical Mode is
automatically activated, and the loops adapt to the project tempo.

429
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor

The Audio Part Editor provides an overview of the selected audio parts. It allows you to
view, audition, and edit parts by cutting and pasting, crossfading, drawing level curves, or by
processing parts. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time.

You can open the Audio Part Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project
window. Opening the Audio Part Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful if you
want to access the Audio Part Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.

To open an audio part in the Audio Part Editor, do one of the following:

● Double-click an audio part in the Project.

● Select an audio part in the Project window, and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd - E .
● Select an audio part in the Project window, and select Audio > Open Audio Part Editor.
● In the Key Commands dialog in the Editors category, assign a key command for Open
Audio Part Editor. Select an audio part in the Project window, and use the key command.

NOTE

If you select Audio > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors
page. Specify if you want the Audio Part Editor to open in a separate window or in the lower
zone of the Project window.

The Audio Part Editor

1 Toolbar
Contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts.
2 Info Line
Displays information on the audio parts.

430
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Audio Part Editor Toolbar

3 Ruler
Displays the timeline and the time format of the project.
4 Part Display
Shows the waveform images of the audio parts.

RELATED LINKS
Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 57
Opening the Editor Inspector on page 52
Ruler on page 45
Info Line on page 47
Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 431
Audio Parts on page 163

Audio Part Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts.

● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the
elements.

The following options are available:

Info/Solo
Solo Editor

Solos the selected audio during playback.

Solo Editor Mode

Allows you to select a mode for the Solo Editor function.

● Solo All Parts uses all parts in the editor display.
● Solo follows ‘Part Editing Mode’ uses only the parts specified via the Part Editing
Mode.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.

Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll

Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.

Select Auto-Scroll Settings

Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend
Auto-Scroll When Editing.

431
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Audio Part Editor Toolbar

Preview
Audition

Plays back the selected audio.

Audition Loop

Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition.

Audition Volume

Allows you to adjust the volume.

Tool Buttons
Object Selection

Selects audio parts.

Range Selection

Selects ranges.

Draw

Draws a volume curve.

Erase

Deletes audio parts.

Split

Splits audio parts.

Mute

Mutes audio parts.

Zoom

Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt , and click to zoom out.

Scrub

Allows you to locate positions.

Play

Allows you to play back the clip from the position where you click until you release the
mouse button.

432
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Audio Part Editor Toolbar

Multiple Part Controls

Show Part Borders

Shows/Hides part borders for the active audio part, within the left and right locators.

Part Editing Mode

Sets the editing mode for parts.

● All Parts allows you to edit all parts that are open in the Editor at the same time.
● Active Part restricts editing operations to the part that is selected in the Activate
Part for Editing pop-up menu.
● All Parts on Active Track allows you to edit all parts on the active track.

Activate Part for Editing

Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor and allows you to activate
a part.

Nudge

Nudge Start Left

Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left.

Nudge Start Right

Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right.

Move Left

Moves the selected event to the left.

Move Right

Moves the selected event to the right.

Nudge End Left

Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left.

Nudge End Right

Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right.

Snap
Snap to Zero Crossing

Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero.

433
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Audio Part Editor Toolbar

Snap On/Off

Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the specific positions.

Snap Type

Allows you to specify to what positions you want events to snap.

Grid Type
Grid Type

Allows you to select a grid type. The options depend on the time format that is selected
for the ruler. If you select Seconds as the ruler format, time-based grid options
are available. If you select Bars+Beats as the ruler format, musical grid options are
available.

Quantize
Apply Quantize

Applies the quantize settings.

Quantize Presets

Allows you to select a quantize preset.

Soft Quantize On/Off

Activates/Deactivates soft quantize.

Open Quantize Panel

Opens the Quantize Panel.

Event Colors
Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events

Allows you to define audio part colors.

Independent Track Loop

Independent Track Loop

Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.

Loop Start Time

The independent track loop start time.

Loop End Time

434
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Info Line

The independent track loop end time.

Right Divider
Right Divider
Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.

Window Zone Controls

Open in Separate Window

This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate
window.

Open in Lower Zone

This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of
the Project window.

Show/Hide Info

Allows you to activate/deactivate the info line.

RELATED LINKS
Auto-Scroll Settings Menu on page 215
Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing on page 215

Info Line
The info line shows information about the audio part, such as the start, the end, the length, or
the time stretch algorithm.

● To show or hide the info line, activate Show/Hide Info on the toolbar.
The on/off status of the info line in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone
editor are independent of each other.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 431

Ruler
The ruler shows the timeline and the time format of the project.

You can select a separate time format by clicking on the arrow button on the right. Select an
option from the pop-up menu.

435
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Lanes

Lanes
Lanes can make it easier to work with several audio events in a part. Moving some of the events
to another lane can facilitate selecting and editing.

If Snap is deactivated and you want to move an event to another lane without accidentally
moving it horizontally, press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging it up or down.

RELATED LINKS
Track Handling on page 139

Operations
You can perform all operations in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone editor.

Zooming, selecting, and editing in the Audio Part Editor is done just as in the Project window.

NOTE

If a part is a shared copy, any editing you perform affects all shared copies of this part.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window on page 34
Shared Copies on page 181

Audition
When auditioning with the Speaker tool or Audition icon, audio will be routed directly to the
main mix (the default output bus).

436
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Operations

Auditioning Using the Audition Tool

You can use the Audition tool to start a single audition of a selection or to loop an audition by
using the Audition Loop function.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● To play back the section between the first and last selected event, select the events with
the Object Selection tool.
● To play back a range, select a range with the Range Selection tool.
● To start playback from the current cursor position, set the project cursor to that position.
2. On the toolbar, click Audition.

NOTE

If you activate Audition Loop, playback continues until you deactivate Audition.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 431

Auditioning Using the Play Tool

PROCEDURE
1. Select Play on the toolbar.
2. On an audio part, click and hold at the position from which you want to begin auditioning.

RESULT
You are auditioning the audio part. The audition stops at the end of the part you clicked on.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 431

Auditioning Using Regular Playback

PROCEDURE
1. Set the project cursor to the position where you want to start playback.
2. Optional: On the toolbar of the Audio Part Editor, activate Solo Editor.
This way, only the events in the edited part are played back.
3. On the Transport panel, activate Start.

Setting up the Independent Track Loop

The independent track loop is a sort of mini-cycle, affecting only the edited part. When the loop
is activated, the events in the parts within the loop are repeated continuously and completely
independent. Other events (on other tracks) are played back as usual. The only interaction
between the loop and the regular playback is that, with every iteration of the cycle, the loop
starts again as well.

437
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Operations

PROCEDURE
1. Activate Independent Track Loop on the toolbar.
If it is not visible, right-click the toolbar, and add the Independent Track Loop section.
2. Ctrl/Cmd -click in the ruler to set the start of the loop. Alt/Opt -click to set the end of the
loop.

NOTE

You can also edit the start and end positions of the loop numerically in the fields next to the
Loop button.

RESULT
The loop is displayed in blue in the ruler.

NOTE

The events are looped as long as the Loop button is activated and the Audio Part Editor is open.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 431

Scrub
In the Audio Part Editor, the Scrub tool has a separate icon on the toolbar. Apart from that,
scrubbing works exactly as in the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
Scrubbing on page 166

Handling Several Audio Parts

The Multiple Part Controls section in the Audio Part Editor toolbar features controls and tools
for working with multiple parts.

● The Activate Part for Editing pop-up menu lists all parts that were selected when you
opened the editor. The list is arranged in the same way as the track list, and the parts are
listed under the name of their corresponding track. The parts are arranged by their position
on the timeline. You can use the search field to search for part names.

To activate a part for editing, click its name in the list. As soon as you select a part, it is
activated and centered in the display.

438
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Audio Part Editor
Operations

NOTE

You can also activate a part by clicking on it with the Object Selection tool.

● Active Part in the Part Editing Mode pane allows you restrict editing operations to the
active part.
If you select Edit > Select > All with this option activated, all events in the active part are
selected, but no events in other parts.
● You can zoom in on an active part so that it is fully displayed in the window by selecting
Edit > Zoom > Zoom to Event.
● Select Show Part Borders to see clearly defined borders for the active part.
If this option is activated, all parts except the active one are grayed out, so that you can
easily identify the borders. There are also two markers in the ruler with the name of the
active part, marking its beginning and end. These can be moved freely to change the part
borders.
● To switch between parts, activate them via key commands. In the Key Commands dialog,
there are two functions in the Edit category: Activate Next Part and Activate Previous
Part. If you assign key commands to these, you can use them to cycle between parts.

RELATED LINKS
Key Commands on page 853
Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 431

439
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Sampler Tracks

The sampler track feature allows you to chromatically play back any audio from your audio
sample library via MIDI. You can create and edit new sounds based on specific samples and
integrate them into an existing project.

The sampler track feature includes:

● The Sampler Control section in the lower zone of the Project window. Here, you can load
and edit audio samples, choose from different playback modes, or transfer samples to
Steinberg VST instruments.
● A sampler track in your project that allows you to control the playback of the sample that is
loaded in Sampler Control via MIDI.

RELATED LINKS
Sampler Control on page 441
Sampler Tracks and Channels on page 103
Creating Sampler Tracks on page 441

Loading Audio Samples into Sampler Control

You can load audio samples into Sampler Control by dragging.

Cubase allows you to load mono or stereo samples in .wav or .aiff file format or REX and REX2
audio files created by ReCycle from Propellerhead Software into Sampler Control.

● To load an audio sample, drag it from the MediaBay, the Project window event display, or
the File Explorer/macOS Finder, and drop it in Sampler Control.

IMPORTANT

If Sampler Control already contains an audio sample, this sample and all of its settings are
overwritten.

NOTE

● Audio samples that you load into Sampler Control are not copied to the project audio folder.
If you want to archive or share your project, including all audio samples that you have loaded
into Sampler Control, you must create a self-contained project.
● In the Pool, all audio samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control are listed in a
dedicated sampler track subfolder in the main audio folder.
● Imported REX and REX2 files are converted to files in .wav format. These files are stored in a
wav folder, created in addition to the original file.

In Sampler Control, slicing is activated, and hitpoints are set according to the slice markers
of the imported REX file.

RELATED LINKS
Self-Contained Projects on page 96
Pool on page 468
Playback Section on page 447

440
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control

Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control

You can load MIDI parts from instrument tracks or MIDI tracks into Sampler Control by
dragging.

NOTE

For this to work, the instrument track or the MIDI track must be routed to a VST instrument.

● To load a MIDI part, drag it from the MediaBay, the Project window event display, or the File
Explorer/macOS Finder, and drop it in Sampler Control.

IMPORTANT

If Sampler Control already contains MIDI, it is overwritten.

Cubase creates an audio file from the MIDI part. This includes the instrument sound and the
channel settings from the VST instrument or the return channel. The audio file is copied to the
project audio folder.

RELATED LINKS
VST Instruments on page 535
Basics Section for Instrument Tracks on page 121
Basics Section for MIDI Tracks on page 123

Creating Sampler Tracks

To create a sampler track, do one of the following:

● In the Project window, select an audio event, and select Audio > Create Sampler Track.
● In the MediaBay, right-click an audio file, and select Create Sampler Track.
● In the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Range section, and click Create Sampler Track.
This creates a sampler track from the selected range. If no range is selected, the entire event
is used.
● From the context menu of the track list, select Add Sampler Track.
In this case, Sampler Control is empty, and you must load an audio sample by dragging.

Sampler Control
If the sampler track is selected, Sampler Control is available in the lower zone of the Project
window. Sampler Control allows you to view, edit, and play back samples or specific sections of
the samples.

441
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

1 Toolbar
Contains tools that allow you to select and edit the audio sample, to organize track presets,
and to transfer the sample, including its settings, to an instrument.
2 Waveform display/Envelope editor
Shows the waveform image of the sample. Allows you to define the playback range for the
sample and to set a loop.
If the envelope editors for the pitch, the filter, or the amp section are shown, you can adjust
their envelope curve settings here.
3 Playback and Sound Parameter section
Allows you to make settings for playback, warping, and slicing (Playback section), tuning
and pitch modulation (Pitch section), filtering (Filter section), and level and panorama (Amp
section).
4 Keyboard section
Allows you to set the key range of the sample, its root key, and the modulation range of the
pitchbend wheel. These settings are used if you work with an external MIDI device.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Sampler Tracks on page 441
Waveform Display on page 446
Envelope Editors on page 452
Playback and Sound Parameters on page 447
Keyboard Section on page 459

Sampler Control Toolbar

The Sampler Control toolbar contains various settings and functions.

Undo/Redo

These buttons allow you to undo/redo Sampler Control parameter changes.

Read Automation

Allows you to read track automation.

Write Automation

Allows you to write track automation.

Switch between A/B Settings

Allows you to switch between different parameter settings.

Event Received Indicator

This LED indicates incoming MIDI messages via the selected MIDI input. The LED lights
up on receiving note-on and controller messages. This way, you can check if Cubase
and your MIDI keyboard are connected to the same MIDI device input.

Snap to Zero Crossing

442
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

Restricts sample editing to zero crossings, that is, to positions where the amplitude is
zero.

Auto-Scroll

Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.

Preset section

Shows the name of the track preset that is loaded for the sampler track. You can also
save and load presets.

Import Audio File

Opens the Import Audio dialog that allows you to load an audio file into Sampler
Control.

NOTE

If Sampler Control already contains an audio file, the original file is replaced by the
new file.

File Name

Shows the file name of the sample.

Tempo

Shows the tempo of the loop, as read from the sample file or calculated from the
sample length. In Slice playback mode, you can manually adjust this value.

Root Key

Shows the root key that determines the pitch of the sample. You can change the root
key by entering a new value in the value field or by dragging the root key handle on the
Sampler Control keyboard.

Fixed Pitch

If a sample is triggered by a MIDI note other than the one defined by the Root Key
setting, the sample is pitched accordingly. If Fixed Pitch is activated, the relation
between played note and root key is disregarded, and all keys play the sample just as it
was recorded.

NOTE

This setting is only available in Normal and AudioWarp playback mode.

Loop Mode

Allows you to select a loop mode for playback via MIDI.

● If this is set to No Loop, the sample is played once.

● If this is set to Continuous, the sample is played in a continuous loop.

443
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

● If this is set to Alternate, the sample is played back in a loop that alternates
between forward and backward playback.
● If this is set to Once, the sample is looped once.
● If this is set to Until Release, the sample is looped repeatedly until you release the
key on the keyboard.
● If this is set to Alternate Until Release, the loop alternates between forward and
backward playback for as long as you hold the key.

NOTE

This setting is only available in Normal and AudioWarp playback mode.

Signature

Shows the detected time signature of the sample. You can manually adjust this value.

NOTE

This setting is only available in Slice playback mode.

Bars/Beats

These value fields show the detected length of the sample in bars and beats. You can
manually adjust these values, which affects the grid and the tempo.

NOTE

This setting is only available in Slice playback mode.

Grid

Sets the grid.

NOTE

This setting is only available in Slice playback mode.

One Shot

The sample is played back once from beginning to end, regardless of any loop settings.

Normalize Sample

Normalizes the sample by detecting the highest peak level in the sample and adjusting
the gain so that it reaches the set Normalization Level value. Sample Gain allows you
to manually modify the gain value afterwards.

Trim Sample

Trims the sample to a selected range. If no range is selected, the sample is trimmed to
the range that is set with the sample start/end markers. Revert to Full Sample resets
the sample to its original range.

444
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

NOTE

This setting is only available in Normal and AudioWarp playback mode.

Reverse Sample

Reverses the sample. This allows you to play back the sample backwards.

Monophonic Mode

Activates monophonic playback. For solo instruments, this usually results in a more
naturally sounding performance. With monophonic playback activated, a note that
was stolen by another note is retriggered if you still hold the stolen note when you
release the new one. You can play trills by holding one note and quickly and repeatedly
pressing and releasing another note, for example.

NOTE

If Monophonic Mode is deactivated, you can play up to 128 notes simultaneously.

If Legato Mode is activated as well and you play legato notes, only the pitch of the
sample is set to the new note. The sample is not retriggered, and the envelopes keep
running.

Lock Parameter Settings

With this option is activated, the current Sampler Control parameter settings are kept
if you load another sample into Sampler Control.

NOTE

Parameters that are directly related to the sample, for example, sample start/end, loop
start/end, root key, or tempo are not kept, but taken from the new sample instead.

MIDI Reset

Stops playback and resets all MIDI controllers to their default values.
This is useful, for example, if you want to stop the playback of a long audio sample in
One Shot mode.

Transfer to New Instrument

Allows you to transfer the audio sample with all its Sampler Control settings to an
instrument that is loaded to a new instrument track.

Open in Separate Window

Opens Sampler Control in a separate window.

Open in Lower Zone

Opens Sampler Control in the lower zone.

445
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

RELATED LINKS
Setting the Root Key Manually on page 462
Setting up Loops for Audio Samples on page 462
Normalizing Samples on page 464
Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments on page 460

Waveform Display
The waveform display shows the waveform of your audio sample. It allows you to define the start
and the end of the audio sample, of the loop, and of the fade-in/-out.

Set Sample Start

Defines the sample start. On playback, all audio before the sample start is ignored.

Set Sample End

Defines the sample stop. On playback, all audio after the sample end is ignored.

Set Sample Start and End Markers Simultaneously

When you move the mouse cursor between the sample start and the end marker, a
connecting bar appears at the height of the marker flags. Dragging this bar moves
both markers simultaneously whilst keeping their relative distance to each other.

Set Sustain Loop Start

Defines where the sustain loop starts.

Set Sustain Loop End

Defines where the sustain loop ends. When this marker is reached, playback jumps
back to start of the sustain loop.

Set Sustain Loop Start and End Markers Simultaneously

When you move the mouse cursor between the sustain loop start and end marker, a
connecting bar appears at the height of the marker flags. Dragging this bar moves
both markers simultaneously whilst keeping their relative distance to each other.

Set Fade In Length

Defines the fade-in length.

Set Fade Out Length

Defines the fade-out length.

Set Sustain Loop Crossfade Length

Loop crossfades allow for smoother loops. This marker defines the length for the loop
crossfade.

Ruler
The ruler shows the timeline in the specified time format.

● To select the format, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler, and select an option
from the pop-up menu.
You can display bars and beats, seconds, or samples.

446
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

Zooming
● To zoom in/out on the time and level axes, use the horizontal and vertical zoom sliders or the
corresponding key commands.

RELATED LINKS
Key Commands on page 853

Playback and Sound Parameters

In the sections below the waveform display, you can edit the settings for playback, warping, and
slicing (Playback section), tuning and pitch modulation (Pitch section), filtering (Filter section),
and level and panorama (Amp section).

RELATED LINKS
Playback Section on page 447
Pitch Section on page 450
Filter Section on page 451
Amp Section on page 451

Playback Section
In the playback section, you can choose from different playback options.

Playback Tab

Quality
Sets the quality for sample playback. When samples are played back with a pitch other
than their original one, you can choose from different algorithms for transposing them
in real time.
● Standard, High, Best, and Extreme provide different algorithms for transposing
samples in real time. The higher the quality setting, the better the suppression of
artifacts, particularly with higher frequencies. Better quality settings, however, also
lead to a higher processor load. For samples with little high-frequency content, we
recommend to use Standard quality.
● Vintage allows for a deliberate reduction of the playback quality by lowering the
bit rate and the sample rate to emulate the artifacts of early samplers. Turntable
emulates a memory-optimized sampling workflow of the past, where turntables
were sampled at a higher speed to record short samples, and then tuned down
again to correct for the change in pitch. A value of 45 rpm leads to typical vintage
artifacts. A value of 78 rpm allows you to increase the effect even further.

NOTE

This option is only available if AudioWarp is deactivated.

447
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

AudioWarp
Activates/Deactivates AudioWarp for sample playback. AudioWarp allows you to apply
time stretching and formant shifting to your samples. You can choose from different
warp and sync modes.

If AudioWarp is activated, the following options are available in the Playback section:

Mode
Sets the AudioWarp mode.
● Music mode offers parameters for time stretching.
This mode is suitable for complex material, such as drum loops and samples of
mixed music. It uses considerably more CPU time than Solo mode.

NOTE

The more the sample is stretched, the higher the CPU load.

● Solo mode offers parameters for time stretching and formant shifting.
This mode is suitable for loops and samples of solo instruments or vocals.
● Spectral mode offers parameters for time stretching and formant shifting.
This mode uses a spectral resynthesis algorithm. It is suitable for all types of audio,
such as loops and samples of solo instruments or vocals. It allows for extreme
stretching factors down to 0%. This allows you, for example, to play back the static
spectrum that is present at the sample start position.
● Spectral HD mode offers parameters for time stretching and formant shifting.
This mode works in the same way as Spectral mode, but uses a higher internal
frequency resolution, which often works better with audio that contains very low
frequencies or audio with a high frequency density.
● Spectral Vocal mode offers parameters for time stretching and formant shifting.
This mode works in the same way as Spectral mode, but is optimized for vocals.

Sync
You can set the playback speed of the sample manually or sync it to the project tempo.
● If Sync is deactivated, Speed allows you to set the playback speed of the sample
manually, in percent.

NOTE

If you set the AudioWarp mode to Music, the minimum playback speed
adjustment is 12.5%. Values below this limit have no effect.

● If Sync is activated, ORIG BPM allows you to enter the original tempo of the
sample in beats per minute. The playback speed of the sample is adjusted to
match the tempo of Cubase.

NOTE

If you set the AudioWarp mode to Music, the lower limit of the playback speed
adjustment is 12.5%. Values below this limit have no effect.

448
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

Legato
If this option is deactivated, each note that is played via MIDI starts playback from the
Sampler Control position cursor.
If this option is activated, the first note starts playback from the position cursor, and
any of the following notes start from the current playback position, for as long as the
first note is held.

Formant
Allows you to adjust formant shifting. This is especially useful for samples of human
voices or acoustic instruments. Key F determines how much the formants follow the
pitch. Use positive values to minimize the Mickey Mouse effect when pitch-shifting a
sample.
The formant parameters are not available in AudioWarp mode Music.

Slice Tab
You can create slices of a sample. These are automatically mapped to the keyboard, so that each
slice can be played back individually. During that process, a MIDI phrase that corresponds to the
sliced sample is created. If you drag this MIDI phrase to the Project window and drop it on the
sampler track, a MIDI part is created. Use this part to play back the slices in their original order,
or to rearrange the events in the MIDI part in order to change their playback order.

Enabling Slice Playback automatically slices the sample. You can choose from different slice
detection modes or combine them. You can manually adjust the position of the slice markers by
dragging, and you can Alt -click to add or remove slices.

NOTE

Slice playback uses the settings for Quality and AudioWarp on the Playback tab.

Slice Playback On/Off

Activates/Deactivates slice playback.

Mode
Sets the slice detection mode.
● Transient mode allows you to specify the Threshold that determines the
minimum peak level that a transient needs to become a hitpoint.
● Grid mode sets the hitpoints according to the Grid Resolution on the Sampler
Control toolbar.
● Transient + Grid mode combines the conditions of both Transient and Grid
mode.
● Manual mode allows you to add and to remove slices manually by Alt -clicking in
the waveform. In this mode, no automatic hitpoint detection is performed.

Threshold
Determines the minimum level that a hitpoint needs to be detected as the start of a
new slice.

449
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

Min Length
Sets the minimum length of a slice.

Grid Catch
In Transient + Grid slice detection mode, this parameter specifies how close to the
grid a hitpoint must be.

Fade-In
Sets the fade-in time for all slices of the loop.

Fade-Out
Sets the fade-out time for all slices of the loop.

Drag MIDI Phrase to Project

Click this button, and drag it to the event display to create a MIDI part that corresponds
to the sample in your project.

RELATED LINKS
Slicing Samples on page 465

Pitch Section
In the Pitch section, you can adjust the tuning and the pitch of your audio sample. The pitch
envelope allows you to modulate the pitch over time.

Show/Hide Pitch Modulators

Shows/Hides the pitch envelope and the LFO editor in the waveform window.

Octave
Sets the pitch of the sample in octave steps.

Coarse
Sets the pitch of the sample in semitone steps.

Fine
Fine-tunes the pitch of the sample in cents (hundredths of a semitone).

LFO
Allows you to select the LFO and to set the LFO modulation depth.

Glide
Specifies the time that is needed to bend the pitch of the sample from one note to the
following note. If you move this control all the way to the left, Glide is deactivated.
If Fingered is activated, the pitch only glides between notes that are played legato.

RELATED LINKS
Envelope Editors on page 452

450
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

Filter Section
In the Filter section, you can adjust the tone color of the sample sound. The filter envelope
allows you to control the cutoff frequency to shape the harmonic content over time.

Filter On/Off
Activates/Deactivates the filtering effect.

Show/Hide Filter Modulators

Shows/Hides the filter envelope and the LFO editor in the waveform window.

Type
Sets the filter type.

Shape
Sets the filter shape.

Cutoff
Controls the cutoff frequency of the filter.

Resonance
Sets the filter resonance.

Drive
Determines the level of the input signal and thus, the amount of saturation.

Cutoff Key Follow

Sets the cutoff modulation via the note number. Increase this parameter to raise the
cutoff with higher notes. At 100%, the cutoff frequency follows the played pitch exactly.

LFO
Allows you to select the LFO and to set the LFO modulation depth.

RELATED LINKS
Envelope Editors on page 452

Amp Section
In the Amp section, you can set the volume and the pan of the sample. The amplifier envelope
allows you to shape the volume over time.

Show/Hide Amp Modulators

Shows/Hides the amp envelope and the LFO editor in the waveform window.

Volume
Sets the level of the sample.

Volume LFO
Allows you to select the volume LFO and to set the volume LFO modulation depth.

451
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

Pan
Sets the position of the sample in the stereo panorama.

Pan LFO
Allows you to select the pan LFO and to set the pan LFO modulation depth.

RELATED LINKS
Envelope Editors on page 452

Envelope Editors
You can adjust the Pitch, Filter, and Amp envelope curves. Each of these envelopes can contain
up to 512 nodes.

● Click Show/Hide Pitch Modulators, Show/Hide Filter Modulators, or Show/Hide Amp

Modulators in the section header to show/hide the corresponding envelope editor and the
LFO section.

Pitch Envelope

Filter Envelope

Amp Envelope

Edit
Allows you to edit single or multiple nodes.

Erase
Allows you to delete envelope nodes.

Draw
Allows you to insert a predefined envelope shape.
You can enter shapes by clicking or by clicking and dragging.

● Click once on the envelope display to insert the selected shape with its predefined
length.
If Sync Envelope is activated, the shape is inserted at the nearest grid position. If
you repeatedly click at the same position, the shape is inserted multiple times.
● Click and drag to insert the shape in the covered drag area. If Sync Envelope is
activated, the start and the end nodes of the shape snap to the grid, and all nodes
in between are scaled relative to the overall length of the shape.
After the shape is inserted, all nodes remain selected. This allows you to switch
back to the Edit tool for further editing of the shape.

452
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

With Fixed Mode activated, the inserted nodes replace all nodes that cover the current
time range. With Fixed Mode deactivated, all consecutive nodes are moved to the
right.

Paint
Allows you to paint in a predefined envelope shape. The shape is inserted with its
predefined length.

Select Shape
Allows you to select the shape that is used when entering nodes with the Draw or the
Paint tool. A shape consists of multiple nodes making up a progression that can be
used when creating your envelopes. The predefined factory shapes are available via
the Factory tab. You can also create your own shapes and add them to the User tab.
Up to 48 shapes are available per tab.

Save Shape
Allows you to save the current envelope shape as a user shape. You can add up to 48
user shapes.

Fixed Mode
● With Fixed Mode activated, only the selected nodes are moved when you move a
node on the time axis.
● With Fixed Mode deactivated, all subsequent nodes are moved as well when you
move a node.

Mode
Determines how the corresponding envelope is played back when it is triggered.
● Select Sustain to play the envelope from the first node to the sustain node. The
sustain level is held for as long as you play the note. When you release the note,
the envelope continues with the stages following the sustain. This mode is suited
for looped samples.
● Select Loop to play back the envelope from the first node to the loop nodes. Then,
the loop is repeated for as long as the key is held. When you release the note, the
envelope continues playing the stages that follow the sustain. This mode is suited
for adding motion to the sustain of the envelope.
● Select One Shot to play the envelope from the first to the last node, even if you
release the key. The envelope has no sustain stage. This mode is suited for drum
samples.
● Select Sample Loop to preserve the natural attack of the sample. The decay of the
envelope does not start until the sample has reached the sample loop start.
If you set the second node to the maximum level and use the following nodes to
shape the decay during the loop phase of the sample, the envelope only affects
the loop phase. The attack of the envelope is still executed.
● Select Shaper to use the envelope as a modulator that allows you to create freely
programmable cyclic modulations. To ensure a seamless cycle, the start and end
node levels are linked.

453
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

● The Pitch and Filter envelopes continue to be played in a loop after releasing
notes, which makes it possible to use the modulation in the Release phase of
a note.
● The Amp envelope immediately stops playing when notes are released.

NOTE

The end node of the Amp envelope does not need to have a level of zero.
However, when switching from Shaper mode to another mode, the end node
level is set back to zero.

Velocity
Determines how the velocity affects the level of the corresponding envelope.
The level of the envelope depends on the velocity setting and on how hard you hit
a key. The higher the values and the harder you hit a key, the more the level of the
envelope increases.

Time
Sets the time value for the selected node.

Sync Envelope
Activates/Deactivates tempo sync for the corresponding envelope. Grid sets the base
note value for tempo-syncing the envelope.

Shaper Sync Mode

Sets the tempo sync mode for the corresponding envelope if Shaper mode is selected.
● With Tempo + Retrig selected, the entire length of the envelope is scaled with
the project tempo and can be retriggered, depending on the selected Retrigger
Mode.
● With Tempo + Beat selected, the entire length of the envelope is scaled with the
project tempo. The envelope restarts with the transport and lines up to temporal
positions in the project. In this mode, the Retrigger Mode is not available.
● NOTE

This parameter is only available with Sync Envelope activated.

Shaper Retrigger Mode

Determines whether the envelope is restarted when a note is triggered. The envelope
restarts either immediately (Tempo + Retrig) or lines up with the project position
(Tempo + Beat).

● With Off selected, the envelope is not retriggered and runs freely.
● With First Note selected, the envelope restarts when a note is triggered and no
other notes are held.
● With Each Note selected, the envelope restarts each time that a note is triggered.

Envelope Amount
Determines how much the selected envelope affects the audio. This parameter allows
for positive and negative values. If the Envelope Amount is set to 0, the envelope has
no effect.

NOTE

This parameter is only available for Pitch and Filter.

454
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

Envelope display
Shows the pitch, filter, or amp envelope curve. You can adjust it by adding, moving, and
deleting nodes. The nodes for attack (A), sustain (S), and release (R) are always shown
and cannot be deleted. Next to the release node, the release time of the envelope is
shown.
The upper part of the context menu of the envelope display allows you to edit the
nodes of the envelope curve:
● Copy copies the selected nodes to the clipboard.
● Paste pastes nodes from the clipboard to the cursor position.
● Replace replaces the selected nodes with the nodes from the clipboard.
● Duplicate duplicates the selected nodes.
● Invert Levels flips the nodes horizontally around the center of the selection.
● Reverse Times flips the Time values of the nodes around the horizontal center of
the selection.
● Set Sustain Node makes the selected node the sustain node.

The lower part of the context menu allows you to assign automation or quick controls
to the attack, decay, sustain, and release segments of the envelope:
● Env Attack allows you to scale the first envelope segment. The control range is from 0
(1/30,000) to 1 (30,000). This means that you can stretch/extend an attack time of 1 ms to
a length of 30 s, and you can shorten/reduce an attack time of 30 s to a length of 1 ms, for
example.
● Env Decay allows you to scale all segments after the first node, up to the sustain node. The
control range is from 0 (1/100) to 1 (100). This means that a decay time of 5 seconds can be
reduced to 50 ms and extended to 500 s, for example.
● Env Sustain allows you to scale the sustain level. The range starts at 0 and ends at the
sustain level set for the envelope.
● Env Release allows you to scale all segments after the sustain node. The control range is
from 0 (1/100) to 1 (100).

RELATED LINKS
Selecting Nodes on page 455
Node Editing on page 456
Zoom Functions in the Envelope Editors on page 457
Synchronizing Envelopes to the Project Tempo on page 464

Selecting Nodes
You can select single nodes or multiple nodes. Selected nodes are edited together.

CHOICES
● To select a node, click on it in the graphical editor.
The focused node is indicated by a frame. The value fields above the graphical envelope
editor display the parameters of the focused node.
● To add a node to a selection, Shift -click the node. Selected nodes are edited together.
● To select multiple nodes, draw a rectangle around them with the mouse.
● To select all envelope nodes, press Ctrl/Cmd - A .
● If the graphical envelope editor has the focus, you can select the next or the previous node
with the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys.

455
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

● If multiple nodes are selected and the Edit tool is active, a selection rectangle is shown,
allowing for further editing functions.

RELATED LINKS
Keyboard Focus in the Project Window on page 65

Node Editing
You can edit single nodes or multiple selected nodes.

● To add a node, double-click on the envelope curve.

● You can also add nodes by copying and pasting selected nodes.
When you press Ctrl/Cmd , the insert position is indicated by a line. With Sync Envelope
activated, this insert line is aligned with the note value grid.

NOTE

An envelope can consist of up to 512 nodes. If more nodes are copied to the clipboard than
can be pasted into the envelope, a warning indicator lights up.

● To delete a node, double-click it, or click it with the Erase tool.

NOTE

● You cannot remove the attack (A), the sustain (S), or the release node (R).
● All nodes added after the sustain node affect the release phase of the envelope.

● To delete several nodes, select them, and press Delete or Backspace . Alternatively, drag a
selection rectangle around them with the Erase tool.
With Fixed Mode activated, the positions of the remaining nodes are not modified. The Time
value of the node to the right of the deleted selection is automatically adjusted.
With Fixed Mode deactivated, the remaining nodes are moved to the left to fill the gap.
● To change the curvature between two nodes, drag the curve segment up or down, or enter a
new value in the Curve field.
Positive values change the curvature towards logarithmic, and negative values towards
exponential behavior.
To reset a curve to linear, Ctrl/Cmd -click it.
● To move a node, drag it sideways, or enter a new value in the Time field.
For a higher resolution, hold Shift while moving the nodes.
To limit the movement to the time axis, that is, to change only the horizontal position of a
node, hold Ctrl/Cmd while dragging.
● To change the level of a node, drag it up or down, or enter a new value in the Level field.
For a higher resolution, hold Shift while moving the nodes.
To limit the movement to the level axis, that is, to change only the vertical position of a node,
hold Alt/Opt while dragging.

Replacing Node Selections

You can replace a selection of nodes with nodes copied to the clipboard or with one of the
predefined shapes on the shape selector.

● To replace multiple nodes with a predefined curve, select the nodes, and select the curve
from the shape selector.

456
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

The shape is stretched/compressed to replace the exact time range of the selection.
● To replace multiple nodes with a selection of nodes from the clipboard, select the nodes that
you want to replace, open the context menu, and select Replace.
The copied nodes are stretched/compressed to replace the exact time range of the selection.

Multi Selection Editing with the Edit Tool

With multiple envelope nodes selected and with the Edit tool active, a selection rectangle is
shown in the envelope display. It has six handles that allow you to modify the selected nodes.

● To compress the node levels, drag the right middle handle down.
● To expand the node levels, drag the right middle handle up.
● To tilt the left part of the node selection upwards or downwards, drag the upper left handle.
To use a shelving curve instead of a linear curve, press Ctrl/Cmd .
● To tilt the right part of the node selection upwards or downwards, drag the upper right
handle.
To use a shelving curve instead of a linear curve, press Ctrl/Cmd .
● To scale the node levels, drag the upper middle handle.
To offset all nodes, press Shift . To use a bell curve instead of a linear curve, press Ctrl/
Cmd .
● To scale the overall time of the selected nodes relative to the start node, drag the lower right
handle.
● To scale the overall time of the selected nodes relative to the start node, drag the lower left
handle.
● To move the time position of all selected nodes, drag the lower middle handle to the left or
right.
To move the nodes in smaller steps, press Shift .
● To compress or expand the overall time of the selected nodes relative to the selection center,
press Ctrl/Cmd , and drag the lower middle handle.
● To change the level and position of all selected nodes, drag one of the nodes.

Zoom Functions in the Envelope Editors

The vertical axis of the envelope editor displays the level. The horizontal axis displays the time.

● To zoom in or out, click the + or - buttons to the right of the scrollbar below the envelope
editor or use the corresponding key commands.
● To zoom in or out at the current position, click in the timeline, and drag up or down.
● To zoom to a specific region, hold Alt/Opt , and click and drag the mouse over the region.

RELATED LINKS
Key Commands on page 853

457
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

LFO Editor
Sampler Control provides two monophonic LFOs. These LFOs are only calculated once and feed
all voices at the same time.

LFO
Allows you to select LFO 1 or 2 for editing.

Sync
Defines how the speed of the corresponding LFO is set.
● Off allows you to set the LFO speed in Hz.
● Tempo + Retrig allows you to set the LFO speed in note values. The resulting rate
depends on the tempo of your project.
● Tempo + Beat allows you to set the LFO speed in note values. The resulting rate
depends on the tempo of your project. Additionally, the current start phase is
calculated based on the current position.

Retrigger
Defines whether the LFO is restarted with the specified start phase when a new note is
triggered. This parameter is available for the sync modes Off and Tempo + Retrig.
● If Off is selected, the LFO is not restarted.
● First Note restarts the LFO when a note is triggered and no other note is held.
● Each Note restarts the LFO every time that a note is triggered.

MW
Allows you to scale the output level of the LFO via the modulation wheel of your
keyboard. This allows you, for example, to control the vibrato of the sound with the
modulation wheel.

Waveform
Sets the waveform for the selected LFO. You can adjust the selected waveform using
the Shape control to the right.
● Sine produces smooth modulation, suitable for vibrato or tremolo. Shape adds
additional harmonics to the waveform.
● Triangle is similar to Sine. Shape continuously changes the triangle waveform to a
trapezoid.
● Saw produces a ramp cycle. Shape continuously changes the waveform from ramp
down to triangle to ramp up.
● Pulse produces stepped modulation, where the modulation switches abruptly
between two values. Shape continuously changes the ratio between the high and
the low state of the waveform. If Shape is set to 50%, an even square wave is
produced.
● Ramp is similar to the Saw waveform. Shape increasingly adds silence before the
sawtooth ramp up begins.
● Log produces a logarithmic modulation. Shape continuously changes the
logarithmic curvature from negative to positive.

458
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control

● S & H 1 produces randomly stepped modulation, where each step is different.

When fully turned right, Shape puts ramps between the steps and changes the
sample and hold signal into a smooth random signal.
● S & H 2 is similar to S & H 1. The steps alternate between random high and low
values. When fully turned right, Shape puts ramps between the steps and changes
the sample and hold signal into a smooth random signal.

Freq
Controls the frequency of the modulation, that is, the speed of the LFO.
If Sync is activated for the corresponding LFO, the speed is specified in fractions of
beats. If Sync is deactivated, you can set the frequency in Hz.

Phase
Sets the initial phase of the waveform when the LFO is retriggered. If RND is activated,
each note starts with a randomized start phase.

Keyboard Section
In the keyboard section of Sampler Control, you can set the root key and the key range of the
sample as well as the modulation range of the pitchbend wheel on your MIDI keyboard.

Pitchbend

Determines the maximal modulation that is applied when you move the pitchbend
wheel on your MIDI keyboard. You can set the pitchbend range in semitone steps, up
to 24 semitones.

Key range handles

Determine the key range of the sample.

NOTE

The set key range is used in Normal and AudioWarp mode.

Root key handle

Determines the root key of the sample.

RELATED LINKS
Setting the Root Key Manually on page 462
Setting the Key Range on page 463

Sampler Control History

Sampler Control offers its own edit history that allows you to undo/redo your most recent edits.

You can undo/redo up to 20 parameter changes or edit steps in Sampler Control by clicking
Undo or Redo on the Sampler Control toolbar. This can be particularly useful, when editing

459
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments

complex envelopes, for example, where a single action with the Paint tool can significantly alter
the existing envelope.

NOTE

Edits in Sampler Control are not available via the Edit History dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Sample Editing and Playback Functions on page 461
Sampler Control Toolbar on page 442
Edit History Dialog on page 75

Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST

Instruments
You can transfer audio samples to specific Steinberg VST instruments with any settings that you
have made in Sampler Control.

Transferring audio samples from Sampler Control to a VST instrument creates a new instrument
track in the track list. This new track is added below the sampler track. The audio sample and all
of its settings are loaded in the VST instrument.

You can transfer audio samples from Sampler Control to the following Steinberg VST
instruments:

● Groove Agent
● Groove Agent SE
● HALion
● Padshop
● Backbone

Transferring a Sample
PREREQUISITE
You have installed Groove Agent, Groove Agent SE, HALion, Padshop, or Backbone. You have
loaded an audio sample in Sampler Control.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Sampler Control toolbar, click Transfer to New Instrument.
2. In the pop-up menu, select the instrument to which you want to transfer the sample.

RESULT
In the track list, a new instrument track is created below the sampler track. The instrument track
has the same name as the sampler track. The audio sample and its settings are loaded in the
selected VST instrument.

NOTE

If a parameter is not available for the VST instrument that you have chosen as the destination,
it is either not transferred or it is adapted to a similar parameter in the VST instrument. The
following applies:

460
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sample Editing and Playback Functions

● Groove Agent/Groove Agent SE: LFO and filter settings are not used.
● Padshop: Sample trimming is not used. A transfer in AudioWarp playback mode sets the
grain settings to a Number of 2 grains and the Speed value accordingly. A transfer in Slice
playback mode uses the selected slice only.
● Backbone: Sample trimming is not used. A transfer in AudioWarp playback mode activates
Resynth mode and sets the Speed value accordingly. A transfer in Slice playback mode uses
the selected slice only.

RELATED LINKS
Transferring a Sample on page 460

Sample Editing and Playback Functions

Sampler Control allows you to tailor the loaded sample to your needs and to specify the way it is
played back.

All sample editing in Sampler Control is non-destructive, and its edit history allows you to undo/
redo your most recent edits and parameter changes.

RELATED LINKS
Sampler Control History on page 459

Setting Sample Start and End

By setting the sample start and end, you can define what range of the sample is played back
when you press a key on your MIDI keyboard.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control.

PROCEDURE
1. In the waveform display, drag the Set Sample Start handle to the right to adjust the sample
start point.
2. Drag the Set Sample End handle to the left to adjust the sample end point.

RESULT
When you trigger the sample, only the defined range between start and end handle is played
back.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

● You can move both sample start and end markers simultaneously whilst keeping their
relative distance to each other by moving the mouse cursor between the two markers and
dragging the connecting bar.

NOTE

This only works if no loop mode is selected.

● You can trim the sample length to the defined playback range by clicking Trim Sample in the
Sampler Control toolbar.

461
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sample Editing and Playback Functions

RELATED LINKS
Waveform Display on page 446
Sampler Control Toolbar on page 442

Setting up Loops for Audio Samples

You can set up a loop that is played back when the sample is triggered.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control.

PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, click Loop Mode, and select a loop mode from the pop-up menu.
The Set Sustain Loop Start and Set Sustain Loop End handles and the green loop range
overlay are shown.
2. Drag the Set Sustain Loop Start and Set Sustain Loop End handles to adjust the loop start
and end points.
To create a smooth loop transition, try to match the shape of the green loop range overlay
with the shape of the gray sample waveform.

NOTE

You cannot drag the loop start and end points outside the defined sample range.

RESULT
When you trigger the sample in a loop mode, the defined loop range is used.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

● You can move both start and end markers simultaneously by dragging the area between the
loop markers.

RELATED LINKS
Setting Sample Start and End on page 461

Setting the Root Key Manually

The Root Key shows the original pitch of the sample. Sometimes, if the sample does not contain
any root key information or if you want the sample to play at a different pitch, you must set the
root key manually. In Slice mode, lowering the root key allows you to increase the number of
slices that can be mapped to your keyboard.

NOTE

If you load a sample that does not contain any root key information, the root key is automatically
set to C3.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● In the keyboard section of Sampler Control, click and drag the root key handle.

462
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sample Editing and Playback Functions

● On the toolbar of Sampler Control, double-click in the Root Key field, and enter the new
root key via your computer keyboard, your mouse wheel, or your MIDI keyboard.

RELATED LINKS
Keyboard Section on page 459
Setting the Key Range on page 463
Slicing Samples on page 465

Setting the Key Range

You can determine the key range for the sample. This is useful for samples that only sound good
within a certain key range.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control.

PROCEDURE
● In the keyboard section, adjust the key range by dragging the range handles above the
keyboard display.

RESULT
Only keys within the determined key range play a sound when triggered.

RELATED LINKS
Keyboard Section on page 459

Playing Back Samples

After you have loaded an audio sample into Sampler Control, you can play back the sample
using an external MIDI keyboard or the On-Screen Keyboard.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control and made all sample editing and settings. You
have installed and set up your MIDI keyboard.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, activate Monitor for the sampler track.
2. Optional: On the Sampler Control toolbar, activate Fixed Pitch.
This allows you to play back the sample in its original pitch and speed.
3. Hit some notes on your keyboard or use the On-Screen Keyboard to play back the sample.

RESULT
If Fixed Pitch is deactivated, the sample is played back, and the pitch is defined by the notes you
play. If you hit lower keys, the sample is played back with a low pitch. If you hit higher keys, the
sample is played back with a high pitch.
If Fixed Pitch is activated, the sample is played back in its original pitch.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To use the sound of the edited sample in your project, create or record a MIDI event on the
sampler track.

463
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sample Editing and Playback Functions

RELATED LINKS
Monitoring via Cubase on page 231
On-Screen Keyboard on page 224
Sampler Control Toolbar on page 442
MIDI Events on page 162
Basic Recording Methods on page 227

Synchronizing Envelopes to the Project Tempo

You can synchronize the Pitch Envelope, the Filter Envelope, and the Amp Envelope to the
tempo of your project. This allows you to set envelope times that relate to musical time intervals,
regardless of tempo changes.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control.

PROCEDURE
1. In the corresponding envelope section, set Sync to On.
2. Use Grid to set a note value. This sets the note resolution to which envelope nodes snap
when coming close enough.

NOTE

● The Time field of an envelope node displays times in fractions of a whole note. The
fraction is always reduced to the smallest possible value, for example, 2/16 is displayed
as 1/8.
● You can also enter note values manually in the Time field. Envelope nodes that do not
exactly match a note value display the closest note value.

Normalizing Samples
You can normalize samples to a target value. An additional gain control allows you to fine-tune
the gain value afterwards.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Sampler Control toolbar, set a Normalization Level as the target value.
2. Click Normalize Sample.
The sample is normalized to the target value.
3. Use Sample Gain to fine-tune the normalization result.

RELATED LINKS
Sampler Control Toolbar on page 442

464
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sample Editing and Playback Functions

Slicing Samples
You can slice samples into several pieces that are mapped to the keyboard, so that you can play
every slice individually.

PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control.

PROCEDURE
1. In the playback section, select the Slice tab, and activate slicing.
2. Optional: Change the Slice Mode, adjust the slicing parameters, and add or delete slicing
markers.
3. Optional: If you want to increase the number of slices that can be mapped to your keyboard,
lower the root key in the keyboard section.

RESULT
The slices are automatically mapped to the keyboard, starting on the set root key. You can play a
slice by pressing the corresponding key on your MIDI keyboard.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

You can create a corresponding MIDI phrase in your project by dragging the Drag MIDI Phrase
to Project button to the event display. This allows you to rearrange the order of the slices.

RELATED LINKS
Playback Section on page 447
Setting the Root Key Manually on page 462
Setting the Key Range on page 463

Freezing Sampler Tracks

You can freeze sampler tracks to reduce the real-time processing load.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the sampler track, and open the top Inspector section.
2. Click Freeze Channel.
3. In the Freeze Channel Options dialog, make your changes.
4. Click OK.

RESULT
● The output of the sampler track is rendered to an audio file, and on playback you hear the
same sound as before freezing.
● Less CPU load is used.
● The Freeze Channel button lights up.
● The track controls are grayed out.
● The MIDI parts are locked.
● You can still adjust the level and panning, make EQ settings, and adjust the effect sends.
● The Sampler Control section in the lower zone of the Project window is disabled.

465
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sample Editing and Playback Functions

NOTE

The audio file is saved in the Freeze folder that can be found in the following location:

● Windows: within the Project folder

● macOS: User/Documents

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To unfreeze a frozen track, click Freeze Channel again.

RELATED LINKS
Freeze Channel Options Dialog for Sampler Tracks on page 466
Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog for Sampler Tracks on page 467
Freezing Multiple Tracks on page 150

Freeze Channel Options Dialog for Sampler Tracks

The Freeze Channel Options dialog allows you to specify exactly what should happen if you
freeze a sampler track.

To open the Freeze Channel Options dialog, select the sampler track, and do one of the
following:

● In the top Inspector section, click Freeze Channel.

● Select Edit > Freeze/Unfreeze > Selected Tracks.
● Right-click the selected track, and from the context menu, select Freeze/Unfreeze Selected
Tracks.

Tail Size
Allows you to set a tail size time to let sounds complete their normal release cycle.

Include Inserts for Sampler Tracks

Activate this option if you want to include insert effects on this channel when freezing
the sampler track.

NOTE

You can still adjust level, pan, sends, and EQ.

Deactivate this option if you still want to be able to edit insert effects on this channel.

RELATED LINKS
Freezing Sampler Tracks on page 465
Freezing Multiple Tracks on page 150
Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog for Sampler Tracks on page 467

466
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Sampler Tracks
Sample Editing and Playback Functions

Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog for Sampler Tracks

The Unfreeze Channel Options allows you to specify exactly what should happen if you unfreeze
a sampler track.

To open the Unfreeze Channel Options dialog, select a frozen sampler track, and do one of the
following:

● In the top Inspector section, click Freeze Channel.

● Select Edit > Freeze/Unfreeze > Selected Tracks.
● Right-click the selected track, and from the context menu, select Freeze/Unfreeze Selected
Tracks.

Delete Freeze Files

Deletes the freeze files.

Keep Freeze Files

Keeps the freeze files in the Freeze folder that can be found in the following location:
● Windows: within the Project folder
● macOS: User/Documents

RELATED LINKS
Freeze Channel Options Dialog for Sampler Tracks on page 466
Freezing Multiple Tracks on page 150
Freezing Sampler Tracks on page 465

467
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Pool

Every time that you record on an audio track, a file is created on your hard disk. A reference to
this file, a clip, is added to the Pool.

The following rules apply to the Pool:

● All audio and video clips that belong to a project are listed in the Pool.
● Every project has a separate Pool.

The way the Pool displays folders and their contents is similar to the way the File Explorer/macOS
Finder displays folders and file lists. In the Pool, you can perform operations that affect files on
disk and operations that only affect clips.

Operations That Affect Files

● Importing clips (audio files can automatically be copied and/or converted)
● Converting file formats
● Renaming clips (this also renames the referenced files on disk) and regions
● Deleting clips
● Preparing file archives for backup
● Minimizing files

Operations That Affect Clips

● Copying clips
● Auditioning clips
● Organizing clips
● Applying audio processing to clips

Pool Window
The Pool window allows you to manage the media files of the active project.

To open the Pool, do one of the following:

● On the Project window toolbar, click Open Pool Window. If this icon is not visible, right-click
the toolbar and activate Media & MixConsole Windows.
● Select Project > Pool.
● Select Media > Open Pool Window.

468
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Pool Window

The content of the Pool is divided into the following folders:

Audio folder
Contains all audio clips and regions that are in the project.
If the project contains one or more sampler tracks, a dedicated Sampler Track
subfolder is created in the Audio folder. This subfolder contains all clips of the samples
that you have loaded into Sampler Control.

Video folder
Contains all video clips that are in the project.

Trash folder
Contains unused clips that have been moved here from the hard disk for permanent
removal.

NOTE

You cannot rename or delete these folders, but you can add any number of subfolders.

469
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Pool Window

Pool Window Columns

The Pool window columns display information about the clips and regions.

The following columns are available:

Media
Contains the Audio, Video, and Trash folders. If the folders are opened, the clip or
region names are shown and can be edited.

Used
Displays how many times a clip is used in the project. If there is no entry in this column,
the corresponding clip is not used.

Status
Displays various icons that relate to the current Pool and clip status. The following
symbols can be displayed:
● Record folder
Indicates the Record folder.
● Process
Indicates that a clip has been processed.
● Missing
Indicates that a clip is referenced in the project but missing from the Pool.
● External
Indicates that the file the clip relates to is external, for example, located outside
the current Audio folder for the project.
● Recorded
Indicates that the clip has been recorded in the open version of the project. This is
useful for quickly finding recently recorded clips.

Musical Mode
You can use Musical Mode to tempo-match audio loops to the project tempo. The
checkbox in this column allows you to activate or deactivate musical mode. If the
Tempo column displays “???”, you must enter the correct tempo before you can
activate Musical Mode.

470
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Pool Window

Tempo
Displays the tempo of audio files, if available. If no tempo has been specified, the
column displays “???”.

Sign.
Displays the time signature, for example, “4/4”.

Key
Displays the root key if one has been specified for the file.

Algorithm
Displays the algorithm preset that is used if the audio file is processed.
● To change the default preset, click the preset name, and select another preset
from the pop-up menu.

Info
For audio clips, this column displays the sample rate, the bit depth, the number of
channels, and the length.
For regions, it displays start and end times in frames.
For video clips, it displays frame rate, the resolution, the number of frames, and the
length.

Type
Displays the file format of the clip.

Date
Displays the date when the audio file was last changed.

Origin Time
Displays the original start position where a clip was recorded in the project. As this
value can be used as a basis for the Insert into Project option in the Media or context
menu, you can change it if the Origin Time value is independent (for example, not for
regions).
In the Pool, you can change the value by editing the Origin Time. In the Project
window, you can change the value by moving the event to a new position and selecting
Audio > Update Origin.

Image
Displays waveform images of audio clips or regions.

Path
Displays the path to the location of a clip on the hard disk.

Reel Name
Audio files may include this attribute, which is then shown in this column. It refers to
the reel or tape from which the media was originally captured.

NOTE

You can rearrange the order of the columns by clicking a header and dragging left or right.

Pool Window Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and settings for working in the Pool.

Show Info

471
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Pool Window

Shows/Hides the info line.

Audition

Plays back the selected audio.

Audition Loop

Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition.

Audition Volume

Allows you to adjust the volume.

View/Attributes
Allows you to activate/deactivate the attributes that are displayed in the Pool window.

+/- All
Opens/Closes all folders.

Import
Allows you to import media files to the Pool.

Search
Allows you to search the Pool and connected disks for media files.

Project Folder
Displays the path to the folder of the active project.

Pool Record Folder

Displays the path to the Record folder of the active project. By default, this is the Audio
folder. However, you can create a new Audio subfolder and designate this as your Pool
Record folder.

Info Line
The info line shows information about the event or part that you selected from the Pool.

● To activate the info line, click Show Info at the left of the toolbar.

The info line shows the following information:

Audio Files
The number of audio files in the Pool.

Used
The number of audio files in use.

Total Size
The total size of all audio files in the Pool.

External Files
The number of files in the Pool that do not reside in the project folder (for example,
video files).

472
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

Search Section
The search section allows you to search the Pool and connected disks for media files.

● To open the search section, activate Search on the Pool window toolbar.

The following elements are available:

Filter
Allows you to set a filter. Click the Name to open a pop-up menu to select one of the
following search criteria:
● Name: partial names or wildcards (*)
● Size: less than, more than, equal, between (two values), in seconds, minutes,
hours, and bytes
● Bit Depth: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, 64 bit float
● Channels: mono, stereo, and from 3 to 16
● Sample Rate: various values, choose Other for free setting
● Date: various search ranges

Location
Allows you to define a search location.

Search
Starts the search.

Select/Import
Selects the file that you select from the result list in the Pool window. If the selected file
is not located in the Pool, the label of the button changes to Import. Click Import to
import the selected file into the Pool.

Previewer
Allows you to listen to the file that you selected from the result list.

Result list
Lists all the files that match the search criteria.

RELATED LINKS
Searching for Audio Files on page 477
Using the Extended Search Functionality on page 478

Working with the Pool

NOTE

Most of the Pool-related main menu functions are also available on the Pool context menu.

473
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

Renaming Clips or Regions in the Pool

IMPORTANT

Renaming clips or regions in the Pool also renames the referenced files on disk. We recommend
to rename clips or regions in the Pool. Otherwise, the reference from the clip to the file may get
lost.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select a clip or region, and click the existing name.
2. Do one of the following:

● Enter a new name, and press Return .

● Select Edit > Rename > Rename Media Files,

RELATED LINKS
Missing Files on page 479

Duplicating Clips in the Pool

You can create duplicates of clips and apply different processing methods to them.

NOTE

Duplicating a clip does not create a new file on disk, but a new edit version of the clip that refers
to the same audio file.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clip that you want to duplicate.
2. Select Media > New Version.

RESULT
A new version of the clip appears in the same Pool folder. The duplicated clip is named after the
original, with a version number added to it. Regions within a clip are also copied but keep their
name.

Inserting Clips into a Project

To insert a clip into a project, you can either use the insert commands on the Media menu or
drag and drop.

Inserting Clips into a Project via Menu Commands

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to insert into the project.
2. Select Media > Insert into Project, and select one of the insert options.
If several clips are selected, choose whether to insert them on one track or each on a
different track.

474
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

NOTE

The clips are positioned so that their snap points are aligned with the selected insert
position. If you want to adjust the snap point before inserting a clip, double-click a clip to
open the Sample Editor. Here, you can adjust the snap position and then perform the insert
options.

RESULT
The clip is inserted on the selected track or on a new audio track. If several tracks are selected,
the clip will be inserted on the first selected track.

RELATED LINKS
Adjusting Snap Points on page 417

Inserting Clips into a Project via Drag and Drop

You can drag a clip from the Pool into the Project window.

Snap is taken into account if Snap is activated.

If you drag the clip into the Project window, the cross-hair cursor and a tooltip are shown. The
tooltip indicates the timeline position where the snap point of the clip is aligned.

If you position the clip in an empty area of the track list, that is, where no track exists, a new track
is created for the inserted event.

NOTE

If you press and hold Shift while dragging the clip from the Pool onto an event, the clip in this
event is replaced.

RELATED LINKS
Adjusting Snap Points on page 417
Replacing Clips in Events on page 161
Cross-Hair Cursor on page 74

Deleting Clips from the Pool

You can delete clips from the Pool with or without deleting the corresponding file from the hard
disk.

Removing Clips from the Pool

You can remove clips from the Pool without deleting the corresponding files from the hard disk.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to remove, and select Edit > Delete
You can also press Backspace or Delete .
2. Depending on whether the clips are used by an event, you have the following options:

● If the clips are used by an event, click Remove, and then click Remove from Pool.
● If the clips are not used by an event, click Remove from Pool.

475
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

RESULT
The clips are no longer available in the Pool for this project, but the files still exist on the hard
disk and can be used for other projects, etc. This operation can be undone.

Deleting Files from the Hard Disk

You can delete clips from the Pool by deleting the corresponding files from the hard disk. To
delete a file permanently from the hard disk, you must first move the corresponding clips to the
Trash folder in the Pool.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the audio files that you want to delete are not used in other projects.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to delete from the hard disk, and select
Edit > Delete.
You can also press Backspace or Delete , or drag the clips into the Trash folder.

NOTE

You can retrieve a clip or region from the Trash folder by dragging it back into an Audio or
Video folder.

2. Depending on whether the clips are used by an event, you have the following options:
● If the clips are used by an event, click Remove, then click Trash.
● If the clips are not used by an event, click Trash.
3. Select Media > Empty Trash.
4. Click Erase.

RESULT
The files are deleted from the hard disk.

Removing Unused Clips from the Pool

You can find all clips that are not used in the project in the Pool. This allows you to quickly
remove all unused clips.

PREREQUISITE
The Pool window is open.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Media > Remove Unused Media.
2. Do one of the following:

● To move the clips to the Trash folder, select Trash.

● To remove the clips from the Pool, select Remove from Pool.

476
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

Removing Regions from the Pool

PROCEDURE
● In the Pool, select a region, and select Edit > Delete.
You can also press Backspace or Delete .

IMPORTANT

If the region is still in use, you are not warned.

Locating Events and Clips

You can quickly display to which clips the selected events belong and to which events the
selected clips belong.

Locating Events via Clips in the Pool

You can find out which events in the project refer to a particular clip in the Pool.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select one or more clips.
2. Select Media > Select in Project.

RESULT
All events that refer to the selected clips are now selected in the Project window.

Locating Clips via Events in the Project Window

You can find out which clip belongs to a particular event in the Project window.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select one or more events.
2. Select Audio > Find Selected in Pool.

RESULT
The corresponding clips are located and highlighted in the Pool.

Searching for Audio Files

The search functions help you locate audio files in the Pool, on your hard disk, or on other media.
The process is similar to a regular file search, with some additional options.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, click Search on the toolbar.
A search pane appears at the bottom of the window, displaying the search functions.

477
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

2. Specify the files that you are looking for in the Name field.
You can use partial names or wildcards (*).

NOTE

Only audio files of supported formats will be found.

3. Use the Location pop-up menu to specify where to search.

The pop-up menu lists all of your local drives and removable media.

● To limit the search to certain folders, select Select Search Path, and, in the dialog that
opens, select the folder in which you want to search.

The search includes the selected folder and all subfolders.

NOTE

Folders that you have recently selected using the Select Search Path function appear on the
pop-up menu, so that you can quickly select them again.

4. Click Search.
The search is started.
● To cancel the search, click Stop.
When the search is finished, the search results are listed on the right.
● To audition a file, select it from the list, and use the playback controls to the left (Play,
Stop, Pause, and Loop). If Auto Play is activated, selected files are automatically played
back.
● To import a file into the Pool, double-click the file in the list or select it and click Import.
5. To close the search pane, click Search on the toolbar again.

RELATED LINKS
Search Section on page 473

Using the Extended Search Functionality

Apart from the search criterion Name, additional search filters are available. The extended
search options allow for a detailed search, helping you to master even the largest sound
database.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, click Search on the toolbar.
The search pane is displayed in the lower part of the Pool window.
2. Click Name to open the extended search pop-up menu, where you can select and define a
search criterion.

478
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

The menu also contains the Add Filter and Presets submenus.
3. Select one of the search criteria from the pop-up menu.
4. Optional: To display more search options, open the extended search pop-up menu, select the
Add Filter submenu, and select an element.
5. Optional: To save your search filter settings as a preset, open the extended search pop-up
menu, select Presets > Save Preset, and enter a name for the preset.
Saved presets are added to the Presets submenu.
6. Optional: To remove a search filter settings preset, open the extended search pop-up menu,
select the preset, and then select Remove Preset.

RELATED LINKS
Search Section on page 473

Missing Files
If you open a project and one or more files are missing, the Resolve Missing Files dialog opens.
If you click Close, the project opens without the missing files.

In the Pool, you can check which files are considered missing. This is indicated by a question
mark in the Status column.

A file is considered missing under one of the following conditions:

● The file has been moved or renamed outside the program since you last worked with the
project, and you ignored the Resolve Missing Files dialog when you opened the project for
the current session.
● You have moved or renamed the file outside the program during the current session.
● You have moved or renamed the folder that contains the missing files.

Resolve Missing Files Dialog

● To open the Resolve Missing Files dialog, select Media > Find Missing Files.

The following elements are available:

479
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

Missing Files List

Lists the files that are missing from the project.

Browse for File

Opens a file dialog that allows you to locate and select the missing files manually.

Browse Folder
Opens a file dialog that allows you to specify the folder in which the missing files can
be found.
Use this method if you have renamed or moved the folder that contains the missing
file, and if the file still has the same name.

Search Options
Opens the Search for File dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Locating Missing Files on page 481
Search for File Dialog on page 480

Search for File Dialog

● To open the Search for File dialog, select Media > Find Missing Files, and in the Resolve
Missing Files dialog, click Search Options.

The following elements are available:

Name
Displays the name of the file for which Cubase searches. This is the name of the file
that you selected in the Resolve Missing Files dialog, but you can also enter a file
name manually. Activate Case Sensitive to search for file names with the entered
spelling.

Search Folder
Opens a dialog where you can specify the folder that is searched.

Files list
Lists the found files.

Start
Starts the search.

Stop
Stops the search.

480
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

Accept
If the file was found, select it from the list, and click Accept. Cubase then tries to map
all other missing files automatically.

Close
Closes the dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Resolve Missing Files Dialog on page 479
Locating Missing Files on page 481

Locating Missing Files

PROCEDURE
1. Select Media > Find Missing Files.
2. In the Resolve Missing Files dialog, do one of the following:

● To navigate to the missing file, click Browse for File.

● To specify the directory in which the missing file can be found, click Browse Folder.
● To open the Search for File dialog, click Search Options.

RELATED LINKS
Search for File Dialog on page 480
Resolve Missing Files Dialog on page 479

Reconstructing Missing Edit Files

If a missing file cannot be found, this is normally indicated by a question mark in the Status
column of the Pool. However, if the missing file is an edit file (a file that is created when you
process audio and that is stored in the Edits folder within the project folder), it may be possible
for the program to reconstruct the edits for the original audio file.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, locate the clips for which files are missing.
2. Check the Status column. If the status of the files is “Reconstructible”, the files can be
reconstructed by Cubase.
3. Select the reconstructible clips, and select Media > Reconstruct.

RESULT
The editing is performed, and the edit files are recreated.

Removing Missing Files from the Pool

If the Pool contains audio files that cannot be found or reconstructed, you may want to remove
these.

PROCEDURE
● In the Pool window, select Media > Remove Missing Files.

481
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

RESULT
All missing files from the Pool and the corresponding events from the Project window are
removed.

Auditioning Clips in the Pool

You can audition clips in the Pool via key commands, the Audition button, or by clicking in the
waveform image for a clip.

● Use key commands.

If you activate Playback Toggle Triggers Local Preview in the Preferences dialog
(Transport page), you can use Space to audition. This is the same as activating Audition on
the toolbar.
● Select a clip and activate Audition.
The whole clip plays back. To stop playback, click Audition again.
● Click in the waveform image for a clip.
The clip plays back from the selected position in the waveform until the end. To stop
playback, click Audition or anywhere else in the Pool window.

The audio is routed directly to the Main Mix (the default output) bus, bypassing the settings of
the audio channel, effects, and EQs.

NOTE

You can adjust the auditioning level with the miniature level fader on the toolbar. This does not
affect the regular playback level.

If you have activated Audition Loop before you audition, the following happens:

● When you click Audition to audition a clip, the clip is repeated indefinitely until you stop
playback by clicking Audition or Audition Loop again.
● When you click in the waveform image to audition, the section from the selected point to the
end of the clip is repeated indefinitely until you stop playback.

Opening Clips in the Sample Editor

The Sample Editor allows you to perform detailed editing on the clip.

● To open a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a clip waveform icon in the Media column.
● To open a certain region of a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a region icon in the
Media column.
You can use this to set a snap point for a clip, for example. When you later insert the clip
from the Pool into the project, the defined snap point allows it to be properly aligned.

RELATED LINKS
Adjusting Snap Points on page 417
Sample Editor on page 401

Importing Media
The Import Medium dialog lets you import files directly into the Pool.

● To open the dialog, select Media > Import Medium, or click Import on the Pool toolbar.

482
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

This opens a standard file dialog, where you can navigate to other folders, audition files, etc.

The following audio file formats can be imported:

● Wave (Normal or Broadcast)

● AIFF and AIFC (Compressed AIFF)
● REX or REX 2
● FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
● MPEG Layer 2 and Layer 3 (MP2 and MP3 files)
● Ogg Vorbis (OGG files)
● Windows Media Audio (Windows only)
● Wave 64 (W64 files)

The following characteristics are possible:

● Stereo or mono
● Any sample rate

NOTE

Files that have a different sample rate than the project sample rate are played back at the
wrong speed and pitch.

● 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, or 64 bit float

● Various video formats

NOTE

You can also use the commands on the Import submenu of the File menu to import audio or
video files into the Pool.

RELATED LINKS
Wave Files on page 812
Importing ReCycle Files on page 253
Supported Compressed Audio File Formats on page 249
Video File Compatibility on page 837

Importing Audio CDs into the Pool

You can import tracks or sections of tracks from an audio CD into the Pool. This opens a dialog in
which you can specify which tracks are copied from the CD, converted to audio files, and added
to the Pool.

● To import an audio CD to the Pool, select Media > Import Audio CD.

RELATED LINKS
Importing Audio CD Tracks on page 250

Import Options Dialog

The Import Options dialog allows you to specify how audio files are imported into the Pool.

● If you select a file in the Import Medium dialog and click Open, the Import Options dialog
opens.

483
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

Import Options dialog for single file import

Import Options dialog for multiple file import

Copy File to Project Folder/Copy All Files to Project Folder

Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project and causes the clip refer to the
copy.
Deactivate this option if you want the clip to refer to the original file in the original
location. In this case, it is marked as “external” in the Pool.

Convert to Project Settings/Convert to Project Settings and Copy to Project Folder If

Needed
Converts the imported file if the sample rate or the bit depth differ from the settings
in the Project Setup dialog. For single file import, you can choose which properties are
converted.

Do not ask again

Always applies the current settings without opening the dialog again. You can reset
this option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).

RELATED LINKS
Pool Window Columns on page 470
Converting Files on page 487

Exporting Regions as Audio Files

If you have created regions within an audio clip, these can be exported as separate audio files. If
you have two clips that refer to the same audio file, you can create a separate audio file for each
clip.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the region that you want to export.
2. Select Audio > Bounce Selection.

484
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

3. Select the folder in which you want the new file to be created and click OK.
4. Optional: If you are using the Bounce Selection option to create a separate audio file for a
clip that refers to the same audio file as another clip, enter a name for the new audio file.

RESULT
A new audio file is created in the specified folder. The file has the name of the region and is
automatically added to the Pool.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Audio Events from Regions on page 415

Changing the Pool Record Folder

All audio clips that you record in the project are saved in the Pool Record folder. The Pool
Record folder is indicated by the text Record in the Status column and by a dot on the folder
itself.

By default, this is the main Audio folder. However, you can create a new Audio subfolder and
designate this as your Pool Record folder.

NOTE

The folders that you create in the Pool are intended for organizing your files in the Pool only. All
files are recorded to the folder that you specified as the Pool Record folder.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool, select the Audio folder or any audio clip.

NOTE

You cannot designate the Video folder or any of its subfolders as the Pool Record folder.

2. Select Media > Create Folder.

3. Rename the new folder.
4. Select the new folder and select Media > Set Pool Record Folder, or click in the Status
column of the new folder.

RESULT
The new folder becomes the Pool Record folder. Any audio recorded in the project is saved in
this folder.

Organizing Clips and Folders

If you accumulate a large number of clips in the Pool, it can be difficult to find specific items.
Organizing clips in new subfolders with names that reflect the content can be a solution. For
example, you could put all sound effects in one folder, all lead vocals in another, etc.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the folder for which you want to create a subfolder.

485
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

NOTE

You cannot put audio clips in a video folder and vice versa.

2. Select Media > Create Folder.

3. Rename the folder.
4. Drag the clips to the new folder.

Applying Processing to Clips in the Pool

You can apply audio processing to clips from within the Pool in the same way as to events in the
Project window.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to process.
2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing, and select a processing method.

RESULT
A waveform symbol indicates that the clips have been processed.

RELATED LINKS
Direct Offline Processing on page 379

Minimizing Files
You can minimize the audio files according to the size of the audio clips referenced in the project.
The files that are produced using this option only contain the audio file portions that are actually
used in the project.

This can significantly reduce the size of the project, if large portions of the audio files are unused.
Therefore, the option is useful for archiving purposes after you have completed a project.

IMPORTANT

This operation permanently changes the selected audio files in the Pool. It cannot be undone.
If you only want to create the minimized audio files as a copy, leaving the original project
untouched, you can use the Back up Project option.

NOTE

Minimizing files clears the entire Edit History.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to minimize.
2. Select Media > Minimize File.
3. Click Minimize.
After minimizing, the file references in the stored project become invalid.
4. Do one of the following:

● To save the updated project, click Save Now.

486
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

● To proceed with the unsaved project, click Later.

RESULT
Only the audio portions that are actually used in the project remain in the corresponding audio
files in the Pool Record folder.

RELATED LINKS
Backing up Projects on page 96

Converting Files
In the Pool, you can convert files to another format.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to convert.
2. Select Media > Convert Files.
3. In the Convert Options dialog, make your changes and click OK.

Convert Options Dialog

In this dialog, you can convert audio files in the Pool.

● To open the Convert Options dialog, select a clip in the Pool window, and select Media >
Convert Files.

Sample Rate
Allows you to convert to another sample rate.

Bit Depth
Allows you to convert to 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, or 64 bit float.

Channels
Allows you to convert to mono or stereo interleaved.

File Format
Allows you to convert to Wave, AIFF, Wave 64, or Broadcast Wave Format.

Options
You can use the Options pop-up menu to set one of the following options:

● New Files
Creates a copy of the file in the audio folder and converts this new file according to
the chosen attributes. The new file is added to the Pool, but all clip references still
point to the original, unconverted file.
● Replace Files

487
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Pool
Working with the Pool

Converts the original file without changing clip references. However, the
references are saved with the next save action.
● New + Replace in Pool
Creates a new copy with the chosen attributes, replaces the original file with the
new one in the Pool, and redirects the current clip references from the original
file to the new file. Select this option if you want your audio clips to refer to the
converted file but want to keep the original file on disk. This is useful if the file is
used in other projects, for example.

Extracting Audio from Video File

You can extract audio from video files. This automatically generates a new audio clip that
appears in the Pool Record folder.

NOTE

This function is not available for MPEG-1 video files.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select Media > Extract Audio from Video File.
2. Select the video file from which you want to extract audio, and click Open.

RESULT
The audio is extracted from the video file. The audio file gets the same file format and sample
rate/width as in the current project, and the same name as the video file.

488
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 MediaBay and Media Rack

You can manage media files on your computer as well as presets from multiple sources from
within the MediaBay or the Media rack.

The MediaBay window offers advanced functions for working with media files and managing
database items. To show the media files on your computer in the MediaBay, you must scan the
folders or volumes that contain the files so that these are added to the database.

The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to access some of the most
important MediaBay functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window. For quick access
to specific media files, the Media rack allows you to add specific folders on your computer as
favorites. Media files within the favorite folders that you add to the Media rack are automatically
scanned and added to the database.

RELATED LINKS
MediaBay Window on page 500
Scanning Folders on page 504
Media Rack in Right Zone on page 489
Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page on page 498
Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page on page 499

Media Rack in Right Zone

The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to access the MediaBay
functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.

● To open the Media rack in the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project
window toolbar. At the top of the right zone, click the Media tab.

The Media rack opens on the Home page that features different tiles. These tiles correspond to
the available media types.

RELATED LINKS
Showing/Hiding Zones on page 35
Home Page on page 489
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

Home Page
The Home page gives you access to the tiles that correspond to the available media types, to the
Favorites, and to the File Browser.

● To open the Home page, click the Home navigation control on the Media rack.

489
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

The following tiles are available:

VST Instruments
Shows VST instruments and instrument presets.

VST Effects
Shows VST effects and effect presets.

Loops & Samples

Shows audio loops, MIDI loops, or instrument sounds ordered by content set.

Presets
Shows the track presets, strip presets, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets.

User Presets
Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, VST FX presets, and
instrument presets that are listed in the User Content folder.
Shows the track presets, strip presets, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets.

Favorites
Shows your favorite folders and allows you to add new favorites. The folder content is
automatically added to the MediaBay database.

File Browser
Shows your file system and the pre-defined folders Favorites, This Computer, VST
Sound, Factory Content, and User Content, where you can search for media files and
access them immediately.

RELATED LINKS
Loading Instrument Presets on page 520
Loading Loops and Samples on page 519
Loading Track Presets on page 519

490
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

Loading Effect Plug-In Presets on page 520

Loading FX Chain Presets on page 521
Loading Strip Presets on page 521
Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page on page 498
Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page on page 499

Favorites Page
The Favorites page allows you to add your own favorite folders to the Media rack.

1 Add Favorite
Opens a file dialog where you can navigate to the location of a folder and add it as a favorite
folder.
2 Favorite folders
The folders that you added as favorites are displayed as tiles on the Favorites page.
● To show the content of a folder, click it.
● To delete a folder from the Favorites page, click its close button.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page on page 498

Results Page
The Results page shows all media files that are found in the defined favorite folder.

● To open the Results page, click the Show All Results navigation control on the Media rack.

491
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

The following options are available:

1 Media Rack navigation controls

Allow you to navigate to specific folders and to filter the Results list.
2 Attribute filter
Allows you to view and edit some of the standard file attributes found in your media files.
3 Results list
Shows all media files that are found in the selected folder and allows you to select a media
file.
4 Previewer
Allows you to preview the selected media file.

RELATED LINKS
Previewer Section on page 511
Media Rack Navigation Controls on page 496
Setting up the Results List Columns on page 506
Results Section on page 506

File Browser Page

The File Browser page shows all media files that are found in the File Browser.

● To open the File Browser page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click File
Browser.

492
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

The following options are available:

1 Media Rack navigation controls

Allow you to navigate to specific folders and to filter the Results list.
2 Add Favorite
Allows you to add the selected folder as a favorite folder.
3 Back/Forward/Up
Up navigates to the parent folder. Back navigates to the previously used folder. Forward
navigates to the most recent folder.
4 File browser
Allows you to browse selected folders.
5 Results list
Shows all supported media files that are found in the selected folder and allows you to select
a media file.
6 Previewer
Allows you to preview the selected media file.

RELATED LINKS
Media Rack Navigation Controls on page 496
File Browser Section on page 503
Results Section on page 506
Previewer Section on page 511

493
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

VST Instruments Page

The VST Instruments page shows all VST instruments of the selected collection.

● To open the VST Instruments page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST
Instruments.

The following options are available:

1 Media Rack navigation controls

Allow you to navigate to specific folders and to filter the Results list.
2 Expand All/Collapse All
Expands/Collapses all results.
3 Show/Hide VST Plug-in Pictures
Shows/Hides the pictures of the VST instrument control panels.
4 Plug-in Collections and Options
● Default activates the default collection.
● Sort By Category sorts the collection by category. This is available for the Default
collection only.
● Sort By Vendor sorts the collection by vendor. This is available for the Default collection
only.
● Plug-in Manager opens the Plug-in Manager that allows you to create new plug-in
collections. These will be listed in the Plug-in Collections and Options menu below the
Default collection.
5 Plug-in list
Shows the plug-ins of the selected collection.

494
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

RELATED LINKS
VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 554
Adding Pictures of VST Instruments to the Media Rack on page 499

VST Effects Page

The VST Effects page shows the VST effects of the selected collection.

● To open the VST Effects page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST Effects.

The following options are available:

1 Media Rack navigation controls

Allow you to navigate to specific folders and to filter the Results list.
2 Expand All/Collapse All
Expands/Collapses all results.
3 Show VST Plug-in Pictures/Hide VST Plug-in Pictures
Shows/Hides the pictures of the VST effect control panels.
4 Plug-in Collections and Options

● Default activates the default collection.

● Sort By Category sorts the collection by category. This is available for the Default
collection only.
● Sort By Vendor sorts the collection by vendor. This is available for the Default collection
only.

495
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

● Plug-in Manager opens the Plug-in Manager that allows you to create new plug-in
collections. These will be listed in the Plug-in Collections and Options menu below the
Default collection.
5 Plug-in list
Shows the plug-ins of the selected collection.

RELATED LINKS
VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 554
Adding Pictures of VST Effects to the Media Rack on page 500

Media Rack Navigation Controls

The navigation controls allow you to navigate to files and folders in the Media rack.

The following controls allow you to perform a text search, and to show the results on the current
page.

1 Search
Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute.
2 Reset Search
Allows you to reset the search.
3 Show All Results
Shows the Results page for a selected tile. If no tile is selected, all media files are shown.

The following controls allow you to navigate from the current page to other pages.

1 Back
Allows you to navigate back to the previous page.
2 Home
Allows you to navigate back to the Home page.
3 Breadcrumb path
Shows the path to the current page and allows you to navigate back to the previous page.

The following controls allow you to set up and modify the Results page.

1 Select Media Types

Allows you to select the media types that are displayed on the Results page.
2 Shuffle Results
Shuffles the Results page.
3 Reset Attribute Filter

496
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

Lights up if an attribute filter is set. Click this button to reset the attribute filter.
4 Set up Result Columns
Allows you to specify which attribute columns are displayed on the Results page.
5 Show/Hide Attribute Filters
Shows/Hides the Attribute Filters section.

RELATED LINKS
Home Page on page 489
Results Page on page 491
Media File Attributes on page 517

Working with the Media Rack

The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to search for supported
media files and included VST instruments, and to add them to your project.

The controls on the different pages of the Media rack allow you to browse, filter, select, and
preview your media files.

The Favorites page and the File Browser page allow you to add folders where your media files
are located as Favorites. This helps you to quickly navigate to these media files.

The tiles and controls on the different pages of the Media rack allow you to browse, filter, select,
and preview the content.

Once you have located the media file, the instrument, or the preset that you want to use and
selected it in the Results list, you can insert it into your project by using drag and drop, by using
the context menu options, or by double-clicking.

RELATED LINKS
Media Rack in Right Zone on page 489
Results Page on page 491

Adding VST Instruments to Projects

You can use the Media rack to add VST instruments to your project.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the VST Instruments tile.
2. Drag an instrument on the track list or on the event display.

NOTE

To exchange the VST instrument of an instrument track, drag the instrument from the Media
rack, and drop it on the top section of the instrument track Inspector. Note that you must
manually update the track name if needed.

RELATED LINKS
Loading Instrument Presets on page 520

497
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

Adding VST Effects to Projects

You can use the Media rack to add VST effects to your project.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the VST Effects tile.
2. Do one of the following:

● To create an effect channel track, drag an effect on the track list.

● To add the effect to an audio-related track, drag the effect from the Media rack, and
drop it in the Inserts or Sends section of the track Inspector.
● To add the effect to an audio-related channel, drag the effect from the Media rack,
and drop it in the Inserts or Sends section of the MixConsole in the lower zone of the
Project window or the Channel Settings window.

RELATED LINKS
Loading Effect Plug-In Presets on page 520

Applying Track Presets

You can use the Media rack to add track presets to your project.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the Presets tile.
2. Click Track Presets.
3. Click Audio, VST Instruments, MIDI, Multi, or Sampler, depending on the track type.
4. Do one of the following:
● Drag a track preset on the Inspector or into the track list for the corresponding track
type.
● Drag a track preset below the track list to add a new track with the track preset loaded.

NOTE

To exchange the track preset of a track, drag the preset from the Media rack, and drop it on
the track in the track list. Note that you must manually update the track name if needed.

RESULT
The track preset is applied.

Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page

You can add favorite folders to the Favorites page. This allows you to directly access media files
in specific folders.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the Favorites tile.
2. At the top left of the page, click Add Favorite.
3. Select the folder that you want to add as a Favorite.

498
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Media Rack in Right Zone

4. Click OK.

RESULT
● The favorite folder is added to the database.
● On the Favorites page, a new tile with the specified name is added.
● In the File Browser, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites folder.

RELATED LINKS
Favorites Page on page 491

Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page

You can add favorite folders using the File Browser page. This allows you to directly access
media files in specific folders.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the File Browser tile.
2. In the File Browser, navigate to the folder that you want to add as a favorite, and select it.
3. Do one of the following:
● At the top left of the page, click Add Favorite.
● Right-click the folder, and, from the context menu, select Add Favorite.
4. In the Add Favorite dialog that opens, enter a name for the folder.
5. Click OK.

RESULT
● The favorite folder is added to the database.
● In the File Browser, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites folder.
● On the Favorites page, a new tile with the specified name is added.

RELATED LINKS
File Browser Page on page 492

Adding Pictures of VST Instruments to the Media Rack

Pictures of VST instruments from other vendors are not loaded by default. However, you can
manually add them to the Media rack.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a VST instrument of another vendor as a rack or a track instrument.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the control panel of the VST instrument.
2. On the control panel, click Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack.

RESULT
The picture of the VST instrument is shown in the Media rack.

499
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

RELATED LINKS
Adding VST Instruments on page 535
VST Instrument Control Panel on page 536

Adding Pictures of VST Effects to the Media Rack

Pictures of VST effects from other vendors are not loaded by default. However, you can manually
add them to the Media rack.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a VST effect from another vendor.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the control panel of the VST effect.
2. On the control panel, click Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack.

RESULT
The picture of the VST effect is shown in the Media rack.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Insert Effects on page 352
Effect Control Panel on page 367

MediaBay Window
To open the MediaBay in a separate window, do one of the following:

● Select Media > MediaBay.

● Press F5 .

500
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

The MediaBay is divided into the following sections:

1 File Browser
Allows you to scan specific folders in your file system, and to add favorites.
2 Toolbar
Contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MediaBay, and allows you to
switch between the previously defined favorite locations. Favorites in the MediaBay window
are not automatically scanned.
3 Filters
Allows you to filter the Results list by applying a logical or an attribute filter.
4 Results
Displays all supported media files. You can filter the list and perform text searches.
5 Previewer
Allows you to preview the files shown in the Results list.

RELATED LINKS
File Browser Section on page 503
MediaBay Toolbar on page 501
Adding Favorites on page 505
Scanning Folders on page 504
Filters Section on page 517
Results Section on page 506
Previewer Section on page 511
Setting up the MediaBay on page 503

MediaBay Toolbar
The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MediaBay.

Navigation
Back

Navigates to the previously used folder.

Forward

Navigates to the most recent folder.

Up

Navigates to the parent folder.

Favorites
Add Favorite

Allows you to add the selected folder as a favorite folder.

Select Defined Favorite

Allows you to select a Favorite to quickly browse to the files you are looking for.

501
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Include Folders and Subfolders

Activate this to show the content of folders and subfolders.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.

Text Search
Search

Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute.

Media Types Filter

Select Media Types

Allows you to select the media types that are displayed on the Results page.

Rating Filter
Rating Filter

Filters files according to their rating.

Reset Result Filters

Reset Filters

Allows you to reset the filters.

Results
Results

Shows the results.

Update Results

Updates the results.

Shuffle Results

Shuffles the Results page.

Set up Result Columns

Allows you to set up the result columns.

502
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Attribute Counter
Attribute Counter

Shows the number of attributes that are being updated.

Right Divider
Right Divider
Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.

MediaBay Settings
MediaBay Settings

Opens the MediaBay settings.

Window Zone Controls

Show/Hide Left Zone

Shows/Hides the left zone of the window.

Show/Hide Lower Zone

Shows/Hides the lower zone of the window.

Show/Hide Right Zone

Shows/Hides the right zone of the window.

Set up Window Layout

Allows you to set up the window layout.

Setting up the MediaBay

You can show and hide the different sections of the MediaBay. This saves screen space and
allows you to display only the information that you need.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Set up Window Layout.

2. Activate/Deactivate the checkboxes for the sections that you want to show/hide.
3. Click outside the pane to exit the setup mode.

File Browser Section

The File Browser section shows your file system with the pre-defined folders Favorites, This
Computer, VST Sound, Factory Content, and User Content.

● To open the File Browser section in the MediaBay, click Set up Window Layout, and
activate File Browser.

503
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

To show the supported media files in the Results section of the MediaBay, you must scan all
folders that you want to include in the search.

You can also add favorite folders. All media files contained in a Favorite are automatically
scanned.

RELATED LINKS
Scanning Folders on page 504
Adding Favorites on page 505

Scanning Folders
To include specific folders in the MediaBay search, you must scan them.

PROCEDURE
1. In the File Browser section of the MediaBay, navigate to the folder that you want to include
in the scan.
2. Activate the checkbox for the folder to activate the scan.

RESULT
All files that are found in the scanned folder are shown in the Results list. The scan result is
saved in a database file.
The state of the checkbox helps you to identify which folders and subfolders are scanned:

● A square indicates that at least one subfolder is excluded from the scan.
● A checkmark indicates that all subfolders are included in the scan.
● An empty checkbox indicates that all folders and subfolders are excluded from the scan.

The color of the folder indicates its availability:

● Red indicates that a folder is currently being scanned.

● White indicates that all subfolders have been scanned.

NOTE

Please wait until the MediaBay completes the scan before you resume your work.

504
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Adding Favorites
You can add favorite folders using the File Browser section.

PROCEDURE
1. In the File Browser section, navigate to the folder that you want to add as a favorite, and
select it.
2. Right-click the folder or the volume, and, from the context menu, select Add Favorite.
3. In the Add Favorite dialog that opens, enter a name for the folder.
4. Click OK.

RESULT
● In the File Browser section, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites
folder.
● In the Favorites section, the added favorite is available in the Select Defined Favorite
pop-up menu.
● In the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window, a new tile with the specified name
is added to the Favorites page.

NOTE

Favorites in the MediaBay window are not automatically scanned.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To remove a Favorite, select it in the Favorites tree of the File Browser section, open the
context menu, and select Remove Favorite.

RELATED LINKS
Scanning Folders on page 504

Refresh Views
If you change previously scanned folders by adding or removing files with Cubase closed, you
must rescan the corresponding media folders. This also applies if you modified attributes of your
user content while using another program.

If you have applied changes to your content and want the changes to be displayed in the
MediaBay, you must refresh the views of the corresponding media folders.

● To refresh a folder, in the File Browser section of the MediaBay, right-click the folder, and
select Refresh Views.
● To display a new drive, in the File Browser section of the MediaBay, right-click the parent
node, and select Refresh Views. You can then scan the drive for media files.
● To update the scan state of the folders after modifying the volume database with another
program, right-click the volume database, and select Refresh Views.

505
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Results Section
The Results list shows all the media files that are found in the selected folder of the File
Browser.

● To show media files in the Results section, you must select a scanned folder in the File
Browser section of the MediaBay.

NOTE

You can set the maximum number of files to be displayed in the Results list in the MediaBay
Settings.

Setting up the Results List Columns

For each media type, or for combinations of media types, you can specify the attribute columns
to be displayed in the Results list.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Results section, select the media types for which you want to make settings.
2. On the MediaBay toolbar, click Set up Result Columns, and do one of the following:
● To show specific columns, activate or deactivate the respective options on the
submenus.
● To remove all columns except Name, select Select None.
● To show the default columns, select Use Defaults.
● To show all columns with set attributes, select All Available.

506
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

NOTE

RELATED LINKS
Setting up the MediaBay on page 503

Managing Media Files in the Results List

● To move or to copy a file from the Results list to another location, drag it to another folder in
the File Browser section.
● To change the order of the columns in the Results list, click a column header, and drag that
header to another position.
● To delete a file, right-click it in the list and select Delete. The file is permanently deleted from
your computer.

IMPORTANT

If you delete a file using the File Explorer/macOS Finder, it is still displayed in the Results list,
although it is no longer available to the program. To remedy this, rescan the corresponding
folder.

Shuffling the Results List

You can display the Results list entries in a random order.

● To shuffle the Results list, click Shuffle Results in the MediaBay toolbar.

Finding the Location of a File

You can display the location of a file on your system in the File Explorer/macOS Finder.

NOTE

This function is not available for files which are part of a VST Sound archive.

PROCEDURE
● In the Results list, right-click a file, and select Show in Explorer/Reveal in Finder.

RESULT
The File Explorer/macOS Finder opens, and the corresponding file is highlighted.

507
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Filtering According to Media Type

You can set up the Results list to display only a particular media type or a combination of media
types.

PROCEDURE
1. In the MediaBay toolbar, open the Show Media Types selector.

2. Activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list.

RESULT
The files are filtered by the selected media type.

Show Media Types Selector

You can activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list.

The following media types are available:

Audio Files
Shows all audio files. The supported formats
are .wav, .w64, .aiff, .aifc, .rex, .rx2, .mp3, .mp2, .ogg, .wma (Windows only).

MIDI Files
Shows all MIDI files (file name extension .mid).

MIDI Loops
Shows all MIDI loops (file name extension .midiloop).

508
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Track Presets
Shows all track presets for audio, MIDI, and instrument tracks (file name
extension .trackpreset). Track presets are a combination of track settings, effects,
and MixConsole settings that can be applied to new tracks of various types.

Plug-in Presets
Shows all VST presets for instrument and effect plug-ins. Furthermore, EQ presets that
you save in the MixConsole are listed. These presets contain all parameter settings for
a particular plug-in. They can be used to apply sounds to instrument tracks and effects
to audio tracks.

Strip Presets
Shows all strip presets (file name extension .strippreset). These presets contain
channel strip effect chains.

FX Chain Presets
Shows all effect chain presets (file name extension .fxchainpreset). These presets
contain insert effect chains.

Video Files
Shows all video files.

Projects
Shows all project files (.cpr).

RELATED LINKS
Track Presets on page 153
Saving/Loading Strip Presets on page 329
Saving/Loading EQ Presets on page 323
Saving/Loading FX Chain Presets on page 320
Video File Compatibility on page 837

Filtering According to Rating

With the Rating Filter, you can filter files according to their rating.

NOTE

The Rating Filter is not available in the Media rack in the right zone.

PROCEDURE
● In the Rating Filter section of the MediaBay toolbar, select a value from the Rating Filter
pop-up menu.

Performing a Text Search

You can perform a text search of the Results list. If you enter text in the text search field on the
MediaBay toolbar, only media files whose attributes match the entered text are displayed.

● Click the field, and enter the text that you want to find.
For example, if you are looking for all audio loops relating to drum sounds, enter “drum” in
the search field. The search results will contain loops called “Drums 01”, “Drumloop”, “Snare
Drum”, etc. In addition, all media files with the Drum&Percussion category attribute or any
other attribute that contains “drum” are found. You can also add apostrophes to find exact
matches for the entered words, and you can use boolean operators.

509
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

● To reset the text search, delete the text, or click Reset Filters.

Boolean Text Search

You can perform advanced searches, using boolean operators or wildcards.

You can use the following elements:

And [+]
[a and b]
When entering strings separated by “and” (or a plus sign), all files that contain both a
and b are found.
[And] is the default setting when no boolean operator is used, for example, you can
also enter [a b].

Or [,]
[a or b]
When entering strings separated by “or” (or a comma), files that contain either a or b,
or both are found.

Not [-]
[not b]
When entering text preceded by “not” (or a minus sign), all files not containing b are
found.

Parentheses [()]
[(a or b) + c]
Using parentheses, you can group text strings. In this example, files that contain c and
either a or b are found.

Quotation marks [“”]

[“your search text”]
With quotation marks, you can define sequences of several words. Files are found if
they contain the sequence of words that you entered.

IMPORTANT

When you are searching for files whose names contain a hyphen, put the search text in quotation
marks. Otherwise, the program treats the hyphen as the boolean operator “not”.

NOTE

These operators can also be used for logical filtering.

510
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Resetting the Results List

You can reset all filter settings and filter results.

● In the MediaBay toolbar, click Reset Filter.

Previewer Section
You can preview individual files in the Previewer section to decide which one to use in your
project.

The elements that are visible in this section and their functions depend on the media type.

IMPORTANT

The Previewer section is not available for video files, project files, and audio track presets.

If you preview a file from the content set, the corresponding picture is displayed on the left side
of the Previewer section. You can show/hide the picture by activating/deactivating Show Picture
in the context menu.

NOTE

In the Media rack, the picture is only displayed if enough space is available.

RELATED LINKS
MediaBay Settings on page 524
Results Page on page 491

Audio Files Previewer

The Previewer for audio files allows you to listen to audio files before adding them to your
project.

NOTE

● If you preview a file from the content set, the corresponding picture is displayed on the
left side of the Previewer section. You can show/hide the picture by activating/deactivating
Show Picture in the context menu.

511
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

● In the Media rack, the picture is only displayed if enough space is available.

1 Transport controls
Start, stop, pause, and cycle the preview.
2 Preview Level fader
Specifies the preview level.
3 Auto Play New Results Selection
Automatically plays back the selected file.
4 Wait for Project Play
Synchronizes the play and stop functions from the Transport panel with the play and stop
buttons in the Previewer section.
To use this option to its full extent, set the left locator to the beginning of a bar, then start
playing back the project using the Transport panel. The loops that you now select from the
Results list start in perfect sync with the project.
5 Link to Transpose Track
Plays back the selected file in sync with the transpose track. Activating this also activates
Link to Project Tempo.
1 Transpose by Semitones
Allows you to enter a transposition value for the playback of the selected file.
2 Transpose to Root Key
Allows you to enter a root key for the playback of the selected file.
3 Link to Project Tempo
Plays back the selected file in sync with the project, starting at the project cursor position.

NOTE

● This can apply real-time time stretching to your audio file.

● If you import an audio file into your project for which Link to Project Tempo is activated
in the Previewer, Musical Mode is automatically activated for the corresponding event.

4 Half Speed Playback

Plays back the selected file at half the speed.
5 Double Speed Playback
Plays back the selected file at twice the speed.
6 Tapemachine Style
Activates the Speed fader that allows you to adjust the tempo, emulating a standard
tapemachine behavior.

NOTE

Time stretching is not available for samples that are tagged One Shot.

RELATED LINKS
Musical Mode on page 429

512
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

MIDI Files Previewer

The Previewer for MIDI files allows you to listen to MIDI files before adding them to your project.

● To preview a MIDI file, load a VST instrument, and select it as an output device from the
Select MIDI Output pop-up menu.

NOTE

● If you preview a file from the content set, the corresponding picture is displayed on the
left side of the Previewer section. You can show/hide the picture by activating/deactivating
Show Picture in the context menu.
● In the Media rack, the picture is only displayed if enough space is available.

1 Transport controls
Starts and stops the preview.
2 Preview Level fader
Specifies the preview level.
3 Auto Play New Results Selection
Automatically plays back the selected file.
4 Wait for Project Play
Synchronizes the play and stop functions from the Transport panel with the play and stop
buttons in the Previewer section.
To use this option to its full extent, set the left locator to the beginning of a bar, then start
playing back the project using the Transport panel. The loops that you now select from the
Results list start in perfect sync with the project.
5 Output
Allows you to select the output device.
6 Link to Project Tempo
Plays back the selected file in sync with the project, starting at the project cursor position.

NOTE

● Note that this can apply real-time time stretching to your audio file.
● If you import an audio file into your project for which Link to Project Tempo is activated
in the Previewer, Musical Mode is automatically activated for the corresponding event.

RELATED LINKS
VST Instruments on page 535

513
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

MIDI Loops Previewer

The Previewer for MIDI loops allows you to listen to MIDI loops before applying them to your
project.

NOTE

MIDI loops are always played back in sync with the project.

NOTE

● If you preview a file from the content set, the corresponding picture is displayed on the
left side of the Previewer section. You can show/hide the picture by activating/deactivating
Show Picture in the context menu.
● In the Media rack, the picture is only displayed if enough space is available.

1 Transport controls
Starts and stops the preview.
2 Preview Level fader
Specifies the preview level.
3 Auto Play New Results Selection
Automatically plays back the selected file.
4 Wait for Project Play
Synchronizes the play and stop functions from the Transport panel with the play and stop
buttons in the Previewer section.
To use this option to its full extent, set the left locator to the beginning of a bar, then start
playing back the project using the Transport panel. The loops that you now select from the
Results list start in perfect sync with the project.
5 Link to Project Tempo
Plays back the selected file in sync with the project, starting at the project cursor position.

NOTE

● Note that this can apply real-time time stretching to your audio file.
● If you import an audio file into your project for which Link to Project Tempo is activated
in the Previewer, Musical Mode is automatically activated for the corresponding event.

6 Link Playback to Chord Track

Transposes the events of the MIDI loop to play back in context with the chord track.

NOTE

You need a chord track with chord events for this.

514
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

If this option is activated and you insert a MIDI loop into the project, Follow Chord Track is
automatically activated for the track.

RELATED LINKS
Using Follow Chord Track on page 744

VST Presets and Track Presets Previewer for MIDI and Instrument Tracks
The Previewer for VST presets and track presets allows you to listen to presets before adding
them to your project.

● To preview track presets for MIDI or instrument tracks and VST presets, you must send some
MIDI notes to the track preset via MIDI input, using a MIDI file, the Memo Recorder mode,
or the computer keyboard.

1 Transport controls
Starts and stops the preview.
2 Preview Level fader
Specifies the preview level.
3 Auto Play New Results Selection
Automatically plays back the selected file.
4 Wait for Project Play
Synchronizes the play and stop functions from the Transport panel with the play and stop
buttons in the Previewer section.
To use this option to its full extent, set the left locator to the beginning of a bar, then start
playing back the project using the Transport panel. The loops that you now select from the
Results list start in perfect sync with the project.
5 Keyboard display
You can display the Keyboard in keyboard display mode or in piano display mode.
6 Previewer Sequence Mode
Allows you to load a MIDI file to apply the selected preset to the MIDI file. You can also select
the Memo Recorder mode, which continually repeats a given sequence of notes as a loop.
7 MIDI Activity
Allows you to monitor incoming MIDI messages.
8 Computer Keyboard Input
Allows you to use your computer keyboard to preview the presets.

RELATED LINKS
Previewing Presets Using the Memo Recorder Mode on page 516
On-Screen Keyboard on page 224

515
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Previewing Presets Via MIDI Input

MIDI input is always active. For example, when a MIDI keyboard is connected to your computer
and set up properly, you can start playing the notes to preview the selected preset.

Previewing Presets Using a MIDI File

PROCEDURE
1. From the Previewer Sequence Mode pop-up menu, select Load MIDI File.
2. In the file dialog that opens, select a MIDI file and click Open.
The name of the MIDI file is displayed on the pop-up menu.
3. Click Play to the left of the pop-up menu.

RESULT
The notes received from the MIDI file are played back, with the settings of the track preset
applied.

NOTE

The recently used MIDI files are still displayed on the menu for quick access. To remove an entry
from this list, select it from the menu and select Remove MIDI File.

Previewing Presets Using the Memo Recorder Mode

The Memo Recorder mode continually repeats a given sequence of notes as a loop.

NOTE

You cannot use the Memo Recorder mode when using a MIDI file to preview presets.

PROCEDURE
1. From the Previewer Sequence Mode pop-up menu, select Memo Recorder.
2. Activate Play.
3. Play some notes on the MIDI keyboard or on the computer keyboard.

RESULT
The notes are played back with the instrument preset you selected in the Results section.
When you pause for 2 seconds, the note sequence that you played until this moment is played
back in a continuous loop.
To use another sequence, start entering notes again.

Previewing Presets Via the Computer Keyboard

NOTE

If you activate Computer Keyboard Input, the computer keyboard is used exclusively for the
Previewer section. However, you can still use the following key commands: Ctrl/Cmd - S (Save),
Num * (Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1 (Jump to left locator), Delete
or Backspace , Num / (Cycle on/off), and F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel).

516
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

PROCEDURE
1. Activate Computer-Keyboard Input.
2. Play some notes on the computer keyboard.

Filters Section
The MediaBay allows you to refine your file searches.

Media File Attributes

Media file attributes are sets of metadata that provide additional information on the file.

The different types of media files have different attributes. For example, .wav audio files have
attributes such as name, length, size, sample rate, content set, etc., while .mp3 files have
additional attributes, such as artist or genre.

Attribute Filter
Assigning attribute values facilitates organizing your media files. The Attribute filter allows you
to view and edit some of the standard file attributes in your media files.

The Filters section displays all the values that have been specified for the displayed attribute
categories. Selecting one of these values filters the results to display only the files to which this
attribute value is assigned.

1 Attribute column titles

Allow you to select different attribute categories. If the columns are wide enough, the
number of files that match these criteria is displayed to the right of the value.
2 Attribute values
Displays the attribute values and indicates how often a certain attribute value has been
assigned to your media files.

NOTE

● Some attributes are linked to each other. For example, there are certain sub-category values
available for each category value. Changing the value in one of these attribute columns
results in different values in the other column.
● Each attribute column displays only the attribute values that are found.

Applying an Attribute Filter

With the Attribute filter, you can quickly find tagged media files with certain attributes.

● To apply an Attribute filter, select an attribute value.

The Results list is filtered accordingly. Apply further attribute filters to narrow down the
result.

517
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

● To find files that match either one or the other attribute, Ctrl/Cmd -click different attribute
values in the same column.
● To change the displayed attribute values of a column, click the attribute column title, and
select another attribute.

NOTE

Character attributes always form an AND condition.

Performing a Context Menu Search

You can search for files that have the same attribute as the selected file. This allows you to find
all the files that have a value in common, for example, if you want to view all the files that were
created on the same day.

● In the Results list or the Attribute Inspector, right-click a file, and select the attribute value
from the Search for submenu.

● To reset the filter, click Go Back.

Resetting the Filter

PROCEDURE
● To reset the filter, click Reset Filter at the top of the Filters section.

This also resets the Results list.

518
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

Working with the MediaBay

When you work with many music files, the MediaBay helps you to find and organize your
content. After scanning your folders, all media files of the supported formats are listed in the
Results section.

You can set up Favorites, that is, folders or directories that contain media files. Usually,
files are organized on your computer in a specific way. You might have folders reserved for
audio content, folders for special effects, folders for combinations of sounds that make up the
ambience noise you need for a certain film take, etc. These can all be set as different Favorites in
the MediaBay, allowing you to limit the files available in the Results list according to context.

By using the search and filter options, you can narrow down the results.

You can insert the files into your project by using drag and drop, by double-clicking, or by using
the context menu options.

Using Media Files

The MediaBay window and the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window offer you
multiple possibilities to search for specific files, loops, samples, presets, and patterns that you
can use in your project.

Once you have found the media files that you were looking for, you can load them into your
project.

Loading Loops and Samples

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:
● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click MIDI Files, Audio Files, or MIDI
Loops, and select a media file.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click the Loops & Samples tile, and click the
following tiles until you can select the media files from the Results list.
2. Do one of the following:
● Double-click a media file to create a new instrument or an audio track with the loaded
file.
● Drag the media file to a track in the event display.

RESULT
The media file is inserted on the new track or at the insert position.

RELATED LINKS
Show Media Types Selector on page 508

Loading Track Presets

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Track Presets, and select a
preset.

519
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > Track Presets, and click the following
tiles until you can select the preset from the Results list.
2. Do one of the following:

● Double-click the track preset to create a new track with the loaded preset.
● Drag the track preset to a track to apply the preset to the track.

RESULT
The preset is applied to the track, and all settings of the preset are loaded.

RELATED LINKS
Show Media Types Selector on page 508

Loading Instrument Presets

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Plug-in Presets, and select a
preset for an instrument plug-in.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click the VST Instruments tile, and click the
following tiles until you can select the preset from the Results list.
2. Do one of the following:
● Double-click the instrument preset to create a new instrument track with the loaded
instrument preset.
● Drag the instrument preset to the track list to create a new instrument track with the
loaded instrument preset.
● Drag the instrument preset to the event display to create a new instrument track with
the loaded instrument preset.
● Drag the instrument preset to an instrument track to apply the preset to the track.

RESULT
The instrument is loaded as a track instrument, and the preset is applied to the instrument track.

RELATED LINKS
Adding VST Instruments to Projects on page 497
Show Media Types Selector on page 508

Loading Effect Plug-In Presets

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Plug-in Presets, and select a
preset.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > VST FX Presets, and click the
following tiles until you can select the preset from the Results list.
2. Do one of the following:

● Drag the plug-in preset to an audio track or to its Inserts section in the Inspector.

520
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Window

● Drag the plug-in preset to an empty area of the track list.

RESULT
If you drag the plug-in preset to an audio track, the first free insert slots are filled with the
corresponding plug-in. If there are no more free slots available, a warning is displayed.
If you drag the plug-in preset to an empty area of the track list, a new effect channel track is
created, and the first insert slots of this new track are filled.

RELATED LINKS
Show Media Types Selector on page 508
Adding VST Effects to Projects on page 498

Loading FX Chain Presets

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click FX Chain Presets, and select a
preset.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > FX Chain Presets, and click the
following tiles until you can select the preset from the Results list.
2. In the Project window, select an audio track.
3. Drag the preset from the MediaBay or Media rack, and drop it onto the open Inserts
section of the Inspector.

RESULT
The FX Chain Preset is applied to the track, and all settings of the preset are loaded. Any
previously loaded inserts are overwritten.

RELATED LINKS
Show Media Types Selector on page 508

Loading Strip Presets

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Strip Presets, and select a preset.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > Strip Presets, and click the following
tiles until you can select the preset from the Results list.
2. In the Project window, select an audio track.
3. Drag the preset from the MediaBay or Media rack and drop it onto the open Strip section of
the Inspector.

RESULT
The strip preset is applied to the track, and all settings of the preset are loaded.

RELATED LINKS
Show Media Types Selector on page 508

521
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Working with Volume Databases

Saving/Loading Strip Presets on page 329

Working with Volume Databases

Cubase saves all media file information used in the MediaBay, such as paths and attributes, in
a local database file on your computer. However, in some cases, it is necessary to browse and
manage this kind of metadata on an external volume.

For example, a sound editor might have to work both at home and in a studio, on two different
computers. Therefore, the sound effects are stored on an external storage medium. To be able to
connect the external device and browse its contents in the MediaBay without having to scan the
device, you have to create a volume database for the external device.

You can create volume databases for your computer drives or for external storage media. They
contain the same information about the media files as the regular MediaBay database.

NOTE

When you launch Cubase, all available volume databases are automatically mounted. Databases
that are made available while the program is running have to be mounted manually.

Rescanning Volume Databases

If you have modified the data on your external volume on a different system, you must rescan
the MediaBay.

RELATED LINKS
Refresh Views on page 505

Creating Volume Databases

PROCEDURE
● In the File Browser section, right-click the external storage medium, drive, or partition of
your computer system, and select Create Volume Database.

522
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
Working with Volume Databases

IMPORTANT

Select the topmost directory level for this. You cannot create a database file for a lower-level
folder.

NOTE

If you create a volume database on a network drive, multiple users can access it. This can
lead to write conflicts, as only one user at a time can write to the database.

RESULT
The file information for this drive is written into a new database file. Volume databases are
indicated by the symbol to the left of the drive name.

NOTE

If the drive contains a large amount of data, this process may take some time.

Volume databases are automatically mounted when Cubase is launched. They are shown in the
File Browser section, and their data can be viewed and edited in the Results list.

RELATED LINKS
Locked Volume Databases on Network Drives on page 523

Locked Volume Databases on Network Drives

You can unlock volume databases on network drives. This can be necessary, if the system of
another user who also used the volume database on the network drive crashed or was not
properly disconnected. In this case, Cubase creates a file in a hidden folder, which indicates that
the database is still in use.

If this happens, you get a warning message when you launch the program. It shows the name of
the user or the system.

Do one of the following:

● Ask the other user to restart Cubase, so that the lock is automatically released.
● If you cannot reach the other user and you do not need to access the database, click Ignore
Database.
● If you cannot reach the other user and you want to use the database, click Force unlock to
remove the lock.

Removing Volume Databases

If you have worked on another computer using an external hard disk and return to your own
computer and connect the external device as part of your system setup, you no longer need a
separate volume database. Any data on this drive can be included in the local database file again,
removing the extra database file.

PROCEDURE
● In the File Browser section, right-click the volume database, and select Remove Volume
Database.

523
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MediaBay and Media Rack
MediaBay Settings

RESULT
The metadata is integrated in the local MediaBay database file, and the volume database file is
deleted.

NOTE

If the drive contains a large amount of data, this process may take some time.

Mounting and Unmounting Volume Databases

Volume databases that are made available while Cubase is running must be mounted manually.

● To manually mount a volume database, right-click the external storage medium, drive, or
partition of your computer system that you want to mount, and select Mount Volume
Database.
● To unmount a volume database, right-click it, and select Unmount Volume Database.

MediaBay Settings
● To open a pane with settings for the MediaBay, click MediaBay Settings.

The following options are available in the File Browser section:

Hide Folders That Are Not Scanned

Hides all folders that are not scanned for files. This keeps the tree view in the File
Browser less cluttered.

Show Only Selected Folder

Shows only the selected folder and its subfolders.

Scan Folders Only When MediaBay Is Open

Scans folders for media files when the MediaBay window is open.
If this option is deactivated, the folders are scanned in the background, even when the
MediaBay window is closed. However, Cubase never scans folders while playing back
or recording.

The following options are available in the Results section:

Show File Extensions in Results List

Shows file name extensions in the Results list.

Scan Unknown File Types

When scanning for media files, the MediaBay ignores files with unknown file
extensions. If this option is activated, the MediaBay tries to open and scan any file
in the search location and ignores files that cannot be recognized.

524
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Automation

In essence, automation refers to recording values for a particular MixConsole or effect

parameter. When you create your final mix, Cubase can adjust this particular parameter control.

Recording your Actions

If the settings in your current project are crucial, you may not want to experiment with
automation until you know more about how it all fits together. If so, you can create a new
project for the following example. The project does not have to contain any audio events, just a
few audio tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, click W to activate write for all tracks.
2. Start playback and adjust some volume faders and/or other parameter settings in the
MixConsole.
Stop playback when you are done, and return to the position where you started playback.
3. Click W to deactivate the write mode and click R to activate read for all tracks.
4. Start playback, and watch the MixConsole.
All your actions that were performed during the previous playback are reproduced exactly.
5. Select Project > Show All Used Automation to view all recorded automation events.
6. To redo anything that was recorded, click W again and start playback from the same
position.

NOTE

You can have W and R activated simultaneously, if you want to watch and listen to your
recorded MixConsole actions while you are recording fader movements for another channel,
etc.

Automation Curves
Within a Cubase project, the changes affecting parameter values over time are represented by
curves on automation tracks.

There are different kinds of automation curves:

1 Ramp curves
Ramp curves are created for any parameter that generates continuous multiple values, such
as fader or encoder movements.

525
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Static Value Line

2 Step curves
Step curves are created for on/off parameters, such as mute.

Static Value Line

When you open an automation track for the first time, it does not contain any automation events.
This is indicated by a dotted horizontal line, the static value line, in the event display. This line
represents the current parameter setting.

If you manually add any automation events or use write automation for the corresponding
parameter and then disable the reading of automation data, the automation curve is grayed out
and the static value line is used instead.

As soon as Read is enabled, the automation curve is used.

Write/Read Automation
You can automation-enable tracks and MixConsole channels by activating their automation write
W and read R buttons.

● If you activate W for a channel, virtually all MixConsole parameters that you adjust during
playback for that specific channel are recorded as automation events.
● If R is activated for a channel, all your recorded MixConsole actions for that channel are
performed during playback.

The R and W buttons for a track in the track list are identical to the R and W buttons in the
MixConsole.

NOTE

R is automatically enabled when you enable W. This allows Cubase to read existing automation
data at any time. You can separately deactivate W if you only want to read existing data.

You can also find global read and write indicator buttons Activate/Deactivate Read/Write for
All Tracks on the Project window toolbar and on the MixConsole toolbar. These buttons light up
as soon as an R or W button on any channel/track within your project is enabled. Furthermore,
they can be clicked to activate or deactivate R/W of all tracks simultaneously.

Writing Automation Data

You can create automation curves manually or automatically.

● Manual writing makes it easy to quickly modify parameter values at specific points, without
having to activate playback.
● Automatic writing lets you work almost as if you were using a real mixer.

With both methods, any applied automation data is reflected in both the MixConsole by a moved
fader, for example, and in the corresponding automation track curve.

RELATED LINKS
Manual Writing of Automation Data on page 527

526
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Writing Automation Data

Automatic Writing of Automation Data

Every action that you perform is automatically recorded on automation tracks which you can
later open for viewing and editing.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, click Show/Hide Automation for a track to open its automation track.

2. Click W to enable the writing of automation data on this track.

3. Start playback.
4. Adjust the parameters in the MixConsole, in the Channel Settings window, or on the effect
control panel.
The value settings are recorded and displayed on the automation tracks as a curve. When
automation data is being written, the color of the automation track changes, and the delta
indicator in the automation track indicates the deviation of the new parameter from any
previously automated value.
5. Stop playback and return to the position where you started playback.
6. Click W to disable the writing of automation data.
7. Start playback.

RESULT
All actions that you record are reproduced exactly. When you drag a plug-in to a different insert
slot on the same channel, any existing automation data moves with the plug-in. When you drag
it to an insert slot on a different channel, any existing automation data is not transferred to the
new channel.

Manual Writing of Automation Data

You can manually add automation events by drawing automation curves on an automation track.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, click Show/Hide Automation for a track to open its automation track.

2. Click the automation parameter name, and select the parameter from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the Draw tool.
4. Click on the static value line.
An automation event is added, read automation mode is automatically activated, and the
static value line changes to a colored automation curve.
5. Click and hold to draw a curve by adding automation events.
When you release the mouse button, the number of automation events is reduced.
6. Start playback.

527
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Writing Automation Data

RESULT
The automated parameter changes with the automation curve, and the corresponding fader in
the MixConsole moves accordingly.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Repeat the procedure in case you are not satisfied with the result. If you draw over existing
events, a new curve is created.

Tools for Drawing Automation Data

Apart from the Draw tool, you can use the Object Selection tool and the Line tool to draw
automation events. If you click on the automation track with any of these tools, R is activated
automatically.

● Object Selection
If you click on an automation track with the Object Selection tool, an automation event is
added. If you hold down Alt/Opt , you can draw several automation events.

NOTE

Events that are introduced between existing events and do not deviate from the existing
curve are removed as soon as you release the mouse button.

To activate the Line tool in any other available mode, click the Line tool, and click again to open a
pop-up menu where you can select the Line tool mode.

The following Line tool modes are available:

Line
If you click on the automation track and drag, with the Line tool in Line mode, you can
create automation events in a line. This is a quick way to create linear fades, etc.

Parabola
If you click and drag on the automation track, with the Line tool in Parabola mode, you
can create more natural curves and fades.

NOTE

The result depends on the direction from which you draw the parabolic curve.

Sine/Triangle/Square
If you click and drag on the automation track, with the Line tool in Sine, Triangle, or
Square mode and with the Snap Type set to Grid, the period of the curve, that is, the
length of one curve cycle, is determined by the grid setting. If you press Shift and
drag, you can set the period length manually, in multiples of the grid value.

NOTE

The Line tool can only be used for ramp type automation curves.

528
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Editing Automation Events

Editing Automation Events

Automation events can be edited in the same manner as other events.

NOTE

If you move an event or part on a track and you want the automation events to follow
automatically, select Edit > Automation Follows Events. Any existing automation events at the
new position are overwritten.

● You can use the tools on the Project window toolbar to edit automation events.
● You can use the automation event editor to edit selected automation events on ramp
automation curves.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Automation Event Editor on page 530

Creating Smooth Transitions Between Automation Events (Bézier

Automation Curves)
Cubase supports bézier automation curves that allow you to create smooth transitions between
automation events. This way, you can edit linear ramp curves with more precision, flexibility, and
intuition.

PREREQUISITE
The Object Selection tool is active.

PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer on the linear ramp curve segment that you want to edit.
A handle is shown on the curve segment.

NOTE

If the automation events are next to each other on an almost horizontal or vertical line, or if
they are too close to each other, the handle is not available.

2. Click and drag, with the mouse button pressed to modify the shape of the curve segment.

3. As soon as you are satisfied with the result, release the mouse button.

RESULT
A smooth transition curve is created, reflecting your edits.
If you are not satisfied with the result and want to start over again from the original linear curve
segment, double-click the handle.

529
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Editing Automation Events

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

For even more precise editing, add new automation events to your bézier curve segment.

This creates new segments that you can smoothen.

Selecting Automation Events

● To select an automation event, click it with the Object Selection tool.
● To select multiple events, drag a selection rectangle with the Object Selection tool or Shift -
click the events.
● To select multiple events, select a range with the Range Selection tool or Shift -click the
events.
● To select all automation events on an automation track, right-click the automation track, and
select Select All Events from the context menu.

Selected events are indicated by a dark color.

NOTE

If you select several events of a ramp automation curve, the automation event editor becomes
available.

RELATED LINKS
Automation Event Editor on page 530

Automation Event Editor

The automation event editor allows you to edit selected events on the automation track. The
automation event editor is only available for automation ramp curves.

NOTE

All editing in the automation event editor only affects the automation events that are part of the
selection.

To open the automation event editor, do one of the following:

● Activate the Object Selection tool, and drag a selection rectangle on a ramp type
automation track.
● Activate the Range Selection tool, and select a range on a ramp type automation track.

NOTE

If you work with the Range Selection tool, the smart control for Stretch is not available.

The automation event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes:

530
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Editing Automation Events

1 Tilt Left
If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve.
2 Compress Left
If you Alt/Opt -click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the
left part of the curve.
3 Scale Vertically
If you click in the middle of the upper border of the editor, you can scale the curve vertically.
4 Move Vertically
If you click on the upper border of the editor, you can move the entire curve vertically.
5 Compress Right
If you Alt/Opt -click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the
right part of the curve.
6 Tilt Right
If you click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can tilt the right part of the curve.
7 Scale Around Relative Center
If you Alt/Opt -click in the center of the right border of the editor, you can scale the curve
relative to its center.
8 Scale Around Absolute Center
If you click in the center of the right corner of the editor, you can scale the curve absolute to
its center.
9 Stretch
If you click on the lower border of the editor, you can stretch the curve horizontally.

NOTE

To edit the automation curves on several tracks simultaneously, select the automation events
on the corresponding automation tracks with the Object Selection tool or the Range Selection
tool, and hold down Ctrl/Cmd while using the smart controls.

NOTE

If you select automation events with the Range Selection tool, additional automation events are
automatically created at the start and at the end of the selection. This ensures that the entire
selection is edited.

RELATED LINKS
Automation Curves on page 525

531
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Editing Automation Events

Quick Vertical Scaling of Automation Events

You can vertically scale the curve segment between two automation events without selecting the
events first.

PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the upper border of the automation track, above the linear ramp
curve segment that you want to scale.
A handle is shown.

2. Click and drag up or down, with the mouse button pressed.

3. When you are satisfied with the result, release the mouse button.

RESULT
The curve segment between the two automation events is scaled.

Moving Automation Events

Moving Single Automation Events
● To move a selected automation event, click it and drag to the left or to the right.
● To restrict the direction of the movement, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag.

NOTE

Snap is taken into account when you move automation curves horizontally. To turn it off
temporarily, hold down Ctrl/Cmd and any other modifier, and drag.

Moving Multiple Automation Events

● To move a selection of automation events, click inside the selection rectangle, and drag to
the left or to the right.
If you made a continuous selection of automation events, events at the destination range
are overwritten. However, if you move the same selection range past existing events, they
appear again. If a selection range contains automation events that are deselected, dragging
is restricted. You cannot move this selection past existing events.
● To copy a continuous selection of automation events, click inside the selection rectangle,
hold down Alt/Opt , and drag to the left or to the right.

NOTE

If you press Esc while dragging the selection rectangle, the selection jumps back to its original
position.

RELATED LINKS
Selecting Automation Events on page 530

532
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Automation Tracks

Removing Automation Events

● To remove an automation event, click on it with the Erase tool.
● To remove multiple automation events, select them, and press Backspace or Delete or
select Edit > Delete.
● To remove all automation events from the automation track and close the automation track,
click the automation parameter name in the track list, and select Remove Parameter from
the pop-up menu.

NOTE

When removing automation events, the curve is redrawn to connect the remaining events.

Automation Tracks
Most of the tracks in your project have automation tracks, one for each automated parameter.

To show automation tracks, open them.

Showing/Hiding Automation Tracks

● Position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner of the track, and click the arrow icon
(Show/Hide Automation) that appears.
● Right-click the track in the track list, and select Show/Hide Automation from the context
menu.
● To open another automation track, position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner of
an automation track, and click + (Append Automation Track).
● To show all used automation tracks in the track list, right-click any track, and select Show All
Used Automation from the context menu.
● To open the corresponding automation track on writing automation parameters, activate
Show Automation Track in Project on Writing Parameter in the Preferences dialog
(Editing page).

Removing Automation Tracks

● To remove an automation track with all automation events, click the parameter name, and
select Remove Parameter from the pop-up menu.
● To remove all automation tracks from a track that do not contain automation events, select
Remove Unused Parameters from any of its automation parameter name pop-up menus.

Assigning a Parameter to an Automation Track

Parameters are already assigned to automation tracks when you open them, according to their
order in the parameter list.

PROCEDURE
1. Open an automation track, and click on the automation parameter name.
A parameter list is shown. The content depends on the track type.
2. Do one of the following:

● Select the parameter.

533
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Automation
Automation Tracks

● Select More to open the Add Parameter dialog that lists all parameters that can be
automated, and select the parameter.

RESULT
The parameter replaces the current parameter in the automation track.

NOTE

Replacing automation parameters is non-destructive. If the automation track contains any

automation data for the parameter that you replaced, this data is still available, although it is
not visible. By clicking on the name of the automation parameter in the track list, you can switch
back to the replaced parameter. On the pop-up menu, an asterisk (*) after the parameter name
indicates hidden automation tracks.

Muting Automation Tracks

By muting an automation track, you turn off automation for a single parameter.

● To mute individual automation tracks, click Mute Automation in the track list.

534
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 VST Instruments

VST instruments are software synthesizers or other sound sources that are included with Cubase.
They are played internally via MIDI. You can add effects or EQ to VST instruments.

Cubase allows you to make use of VST instruments in the following ways:

● By adding a VST instrument and assigning one or several MIDI tracks to it.
● By creating an instrument track.
This is a combination of a VST instrument, an instrument channel, and a MIDI track. You play
and record MIDI note data for this track.

NOTE

Some VST instruments are included with Cubase. These are described in the separate document
Plug-in Reference.

RELATED LINKS
Instrument Tracks and Channels on page 102

Adding VST Instruments

PROCEDURE
1. On the Studio menu, select VST Instruments.
2. Right-click on an empty area of the VST Instruments window.
3. From the context menu, select Add Rack Instrument.
4. From the instrument selector, select an instrument.
5. Click Create.

RESULT
The instrument control panel opens, and the following tracks are added to the track list:
● A MIDI track with the name of the instrument. The output of the MIDI track is routed to the
instrument.

NOTE

In the Preferences dialog (VST—Plug-ins page), you can specify what happens when you
load a VST instrument.

● A folder with the name of the instrument that is added within a Rack Instruments folder.
The instrument folder contains two automation tracks: one for the plug-in parameters and
one for the synth channel in the MixConsole.

535
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
VST Instrument Control Panel

VST Instrument Control Panel

The VST instrument control panel allows you to set up the parameters of the selected instrument.
The contents, the design, and the layout of the control panel depend on the selected instrument.

The following controls are available:

1 Activate Instrument
Activates/Deactivates the instrument.
2 Read Automation/Write Automation
Allows you to read/write automation for the instrument parameter settings.
3 Switch between A/B Settings
Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active.
4 Apply current settings to A and B
Copies the instrument parameters of instrument setting A to instrument setting B, and vice
versa.
5 Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates the side-chain functionality for VST 3 instruments that support side-chaining.
6 Set up Side-Chain Routing
Allows you to set up the side-chain routing for the selected plug-in.
7 Event Received Indicator
Lights up on receiving note-on and controller messages.
8 Preset browser

536
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
VST Instrument Control Panel

Opens the preset browser, where you can select another preset.
9 Load previous Program/Load next Program
Loads the previous/next program in the preset browser.
10 Preset Management
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save, rename, or remove a preset.
11 Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack
Adds a picture of the VST plug-in to the Media rack. This is only available for plug-ins of other
vendors.
12 VST Instrument context menu
Opens a context menu with specific functions and settings.
13 Show/Hide VST Quick Controls
Shows/hides the quick controls.
14 Focus Quick Controls Lock State: Locked/Unlocked
Allows you to lock the focus of the quick control to the plug-in window.
15 Focus Quick Controls Indicator
If this indicator is lit, the plug-in window has the quick control focus.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Pictures of VST Instruments to the Media Rack on page 499
VST Instrument Context Menu on page 542
Hiding/Showing VST Instrument Control Panels on page 537
Side-Chaining for VST Instruments on page 550
Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 590
Focus Quick Controls on page 590

Hiding/Showing VST Instrument Control Panels

When you add a VST instrument, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You
can hide the control panels from view. This is useful to get a better overview if you added a
number of plug-ins to your project whose control panels clutter up the screen.

PROCEDURE
● Select Window > Hide Plug-in Windows.

NOTE

This also hides VST effect control panels.

RESULT
The plug-in windows are hidden and sent to the back of the application. To show them again,
select Show Plug-in Windows.

RELATED LINKS
VST Instrument Control Panel on page 536

537
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
VST Instrument Selector

Closing All Control Panels

When you add a VST instrument, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You
can close all control panels at once.

PROCEDURE
● Select Window > Close All Plug-in Windows.

NOTE

This also closes VST effect control panels.

RESULT
The control panels are closed.

RELATED LINKS
VST Instrument Control Panel on page 536

VST Instrument Selector

The VST instrument selector allows you to select VST instruments from the active collection.

● To open the VST instrument selector, click a slot in the VST Instruments window.

The following controls are available:

1 Expand Tree/Collapse Tree

Expands/Collapses the tree.
2 Search VST Instrument
Allows you to search for VST instruments by typing in the name or parts of the name or the
category.
3 Plug-in Collections and Options
Allows you to select a collection.
If you select the Default collection, the options Sort By Category and Sort by Vendor
become available. They allow you to sort the default collection.

538
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Creating Instrument Tracks

Creating Instrument Tracks

You can create instrument tracks that contain dedicated VST instruments.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Click Instrument.
3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu, and select a VST instrument.
4. Click Add Track.

RESULT
The selected VST instrument is loaded for the instrument track. In the MixConsole, an
instrument channel is added.

VSTi Rack in the Right Zone

The VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to add VST instruments for MIDI
and instrument tracks.

All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access up to 8 quick controls for
each added instrument.

● To open the VSTi rack in the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window
toolbar, and, at the top of the right zone, click the VSTi tab.

NOTE

The VSTi rack in the right zone is just another representation of the VST Instruments window. All
features are identical.

RELATED LINKS
Showing/Hiding Zones on page 35
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

539
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
VST Instruments Window

VST Instruments Window

The VST Instruments window allows you to add VST instruments for MIDI and instrument
tracks.

All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access up to 8 quick controls for
each added instrument.

To open the VST Instruments window, select Studio > VST Instruments.

RELATED LINKS
Instrument Tracks and Channels on page 102

VST Instruments Window Toolbar

The VST Instruments window toolbar contains controls that allow you to add and set up VST
instruments and VST Quick Controls.

Add Track Instrument

Opens the Add Track dialog that allows you to select an instrument and to add an
instrument track that is associated with this instrument.

Find Instruments

Opens a selector that allows you to find a loaded instrument.

Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Previous Instrument

Allows you to set the remote control focus to the previous instrument.

Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Next Instrument

Allows you to set the remote control focus to the next instrument.

Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls

Shows/Hides the default quick controls for all loaded instruments.

Settings

Opens the Settings pop-up menu, where you can activate/deactivate the following
modes:

● Show VST Quick Controls for One Slot Only shows the VST Quick Controls
exclusively for the selected instrument.

540
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
VST Instrument Controls

● MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector follows
the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you work with
multitimbral instruments.
● Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls follows track selection ensures
that the VST Quick Controls remote control focus follows the track selection.

VST Instrument Controls

The VST instrument controls allow you to make settings for a loaded VST instrument.

The following controls are available for each instrument:

1 Activate Instrument
Activates/Deactivates the instrument.
2 Edit Instrument
Opens the instrument panel.
3 Freeze Instrument
Freezes the instrument. This allows you to save CPU power.
4 Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates side-chaining.
5 Instrument selector
Allows you to select another instrument. Double-click to rename the instrument. The name is
shown in the Output Routing pop-up menu for MIDI tracks. This is useful for working with
several instances of the same instrument.
6 Preset Browser
Allows you to load or save an instrument preset.
7 Input Options
This lights up when MIDI data is received by the instrument. Click this button to open a
pop-up menu that allows you to select, mute/unmute, and solo/unsolo for tracks that send
MIDI to the instrument (inputs).

NOTE

If you resize the VST Instruments window, you can access this option by using an Input/
Output Options pop-up menu.

8 Activate Outputs
This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output. It allows you
to activate one or more outputs for the instrument.

NOTE

If you resize the VST Instruments window, you can access this option by using an Input/
Output Options pop-up menu.

RELATED LINKS
Freezing Instruments on page 545

541
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
VST Instrument Controls

VST Instrument Context Menu

The VST instrument control panel context menu and the Functions menu on the VST instrument
control panel display functions and settings that are specific to the instrument.

Do one of the following:

● Right-click an empty area of the VST instrument control panel.

● Open the Functions pop-up menu on the VST instrument control panel.

The following functions are available:

Copy <VST instrument name> Setting/Paste <VST instrument name> Setting

Allows you to copy the instrument settings and paste them to another instrument.

Load Preset/Save Preset

Allows you to load/to save a preset.

Default Preset
Allows you to define and save a default preset.

Switch to A Setting/Switch to B Setting

Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active.

Apply Current Settings to A/Apply Current Settings to B

Copies the instrument parameters of instrument setting A to instrument setting B, and
vice versa.

Activate Outputs
Allows you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument.

Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates side-chaining for the instrument.

NOTE

This option is only available for VST 3 instruments that support side-chaining.

Remote Control Editor

Opens the Remote Control Editor.

Switch to Generic Editor

Opens the generic editor for the instrument.

Allow Window to be Resized

Allows for dynamic resizing of third-party plug-in windows in Cubase. This is useful if
you activated Enable HiDPI (Windows only) in the Preferences dialog (General page)
and your plug-in does not support dpi settings.

NOTE

Allow Window to be Resized is a plug-in-specific setting. Activate/deactivate it for

every plug-in that requires it.

RELATED LINKS
General on page 895
Side-Chaining for VST Instruments on page 550

542
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Presets for Instruments

Presets for Instruments

You can load and save presets for instruments. Presets contain all the settings that are required
for the sound that you want.

The following presets for instruments are available:

● VST Presets
VST presets include the parameter settings of a VST instrument.
Presets are available from the VST Instruments window, from the instrument control
panels, and from the Programs field in the Inspector.
● Track Presets
Track presets include the instrument track settings and the settings for the corresponding
VST instrument.
Presets are available from the Inspector or the track list context menu.

Loading VST Presets

You can load VST Presets from the VST Instruments window, from the control panel or from the
Inspector.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:
● Select the track that contains the VST instrument. In the Routing section of the
Inspector, click Program Selector.
● In the VST Instruments window, click Preset Browser for the instrument, and select
Load Preset.
● In the control panel for the VST instrument, click Preset Browser, and select Load
Preset.
2. In the preset browser, select a preset from the list, and double-click it to load it.

RESULT
The preset is applied.

Saving VST Presets

You can save your settings on VST instruments as VST presets for further use.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● In the VST Instruments window, click Preset Browser for the instrument, and select
Save Preset.
● In the control panel for the VST instrument, click Preset Browser, and select Save
Preset.
2. In the Save <VST instrument name> Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset.
3. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog.

543
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Presets for Instruments

Loading Track Presets

You can load track presets for instrument tracks from the Inspector.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● Select the instrument track, and, in the Inspector, click the Load Track Preset field.
● Right-click the instrument track, and, from the context menu, select Load Track Preset.
2. In the preset browser, select a preset from the list, and double-click it to load it.

RESULT
The track preset is applied. To return to the previously loaded preset, open the preset browser
again, and click Revert to Last Setting.

Instrument Presets Results Browser

The Results browser for instrument track presets allows you to preview VST presets and to apply
them to your instrument track.

● To open the Results browser, right-click an instrument track, and select Load Track Preset.

VST presets for instruments can be divided into the following groups:

Presets
Presets contain the settings of the entire plug-in. For multitimbral instruments, this
includes the settings for all sound slots as well as the global settings.

Programs
Programs contain only the settings for one program. For multitimbral instruments, this
includes only the settings for one sound slot.

Saving Track Presets

You can save your settings on instrument tracks as track presets for further use.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the instrument track, and, from the context menu, select Save Track Preset.
2. In the Save Track Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset.

544
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Playing Back VST Instruments

3. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog.

Playing Back VST Instruments

After you have added a VST instrument and selected a sound, you can play back the VST
instrument using the instrument or MIDI track in your project.

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, activate Monitor for the track with the loaded VST instrument.
2. Press one or more keys on your MIDI keyboard or use the On-Screen Keyboard.
The corresponding sounds are triggered on your VST instrument.
3. Select Studio > MixConsole to open the MixConsole, and adjust the sound, add EQ or
effects, assign another output routing, etc.

VST Instruments and Processor Load

VST instruments can consume a lot of CPU power. The more instruments you add, the more likely
it is that you run out of processor power during playback.

If the Processing Overload indicator in the Audio Performance panel lights up or you get
crackling sounds, you have the following options:

● Activate Freeze Channel.

This renders the instrument into an audio file and unloads it.
● Activate Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio signals are received for VST 3
instruments.
This ensures that your instruments do not consume CPU power on silent passages.

RELATED LINKS
Freezing Instruments on page 545
Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio signals are received on page 908

Freezing Instruments
If you are using a moderately powerful computer or a large number of VST instruments, your
computer may not be able to play back all instruments in real time. At this point, you can freeze
instruments.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● Select Studio > VST Instruments.

● Select the instrument track, and open the top Inspector section.
2. Click Freeze Channel.
3. In the Freeze Channel Options dialog, make your changes.
4. Click OK.

545
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Playing Back VST Instruments

RESULT
● The output of the instrument is rendered to an audio file. On playback you hear the same
sound as before freezing.
● Less CPU load is used.
● The Freeze Channel button lights up.
● The track controls are grayed out.
● The MIDI parts are locked.
● You can still adjust the level and panning, make EQ settings, and adjust the effect sends.

NOTE

The audio file is saved in the Freeze folder that can be found in the following location:

● Windows: within the Project folder

● macOS: User/Documents

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To unfreeze a frozen track, click Freeze Channel again.

RELATED LINKS
Freezing Multiple Tracks on page 150
Freeze Channel Options Dialog for Instruments on page 546
Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog for Instruments on page 547

Freeze Channel Options Dialog for Instruments

The Freeze Channel Options allows you to specify exactly what is supposed to happen when you
freeze an instrument.

To open the Freeze Channel Options dialog, select the instrument track, and do one of the
following:

● In the top Inspector section, click Freeze Channel.

● Select Edit > Freeze/Unfreeze > Selected Tracks.
● Right-click the selected track, and from the context menu, select Freeze/Unfreeze Selected
Tracks.

Tail Size
Allows you to set a tail size time to let sounds complete their normal release cycle.

Include Inserts for Instrument Tracks

Activate this option if you want to include insert effects on this channel when freezing
the instrument.

546
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Playing Back VST Instruments

NOTE

You can still adjust level, pan, sends, and EQ.

Deactivate this option if you still want to be able to edit insert effects on this channel.

Unload Instruments When Frozen

Activate this option to unload the instrument after freezing. This makes the RAM
available again.

RELATED LINKS
Freezing Multiple Tracks on page 150
Freezing Instruments on page 545
Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog for Instruments on page 547

Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog for Instruments

The Unfreeze Channel Options allows you to specify exactly what should happen if you unfreeze
an instrument track.

To open the Unfreeze Channel Options dialog, select a frozen instrument track, and do one of
the following:

● In the top Inspector section, click Freeze Channel.

● Select Edit > Freeze/Unfreeze > Selected Tracks.
● Right-click the selected track, and from the context menu, select Freeze/Unfreeze Selected
Tracks.

Delete Freeze Files

Deletes the freeze files.

Keep Freeze Files

Keeps the freeze files in the Freeze folder that can be found in the following location:
● Windows: within the Project folder
● macOS: User/Documents

RELATED LINKS
Freeze Channel Options Dialog for Instruments on page 546
Freezing Instruments on page 545
Freezing Multiple Tracks on page 150

547
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Latency

Latency
Latency stands for the time it takes for the instrument to produce a sound after you press a key
on your MIDI controller. It can be an issue when using VST instruments in real time. Latency
depends on your audio hardware and its ASIO driver.

In the Studio Setup dialog (Audio System page), the input and output latency values should
ideally be a few milliseconds.

If the latency is too high to allow comfortable real time VST instrument playback from a
keyboard, you can use another MIDI sound source for live playback and recording, and switch to
the VST instrument for playback.

RELATED LINKS
Selecting an Audio Driver on page 16

Delay Compensation
During playback, Cubase automatically compensates any delay inherent in the VST plug-ins you
use.

You can specify a Delay Compensation Threshold in the Preferences dialog (VST page), so that
only plug-ins with a delay higher than this threshold setting are affected.

Constrain Delay Compensation

To prevent additional latency when you play a VST instrument in real time or record live audio,
you can activate Constrain Delay Compensation. This minimizes the latency effects of the delay
compensation while maintaining the sound of the mix as well as possible.

Constrain Delay Compensation is available on the Project window toolbar and in the Transport
zone. You can also find it as a menu item in the MixConsole on the Functions Menu.

If you activate Constrain Delay Compensation for instrument channels, record-enabled audio
track channels, group channels, and output channels, the following happens:

● For VST 3 plug-ins that feature a Live button, and for third-party VST 3 plug-ins that feature
a low latency mode, activating Constrain Delay Compensation activates the Live button or
the low latency mode for that particular plug-in. For details about the included plug-ins that
feature a Live button, see the separate document Plug-in Reference.
● For VST plug-ins that have no low latency mode, activating Constrain Delay Compensation
turns off that plug-in.

NOTE

VST plug-ins that are activated for effect channels are disregarded.

After recording or using a VST instrument, deactivate Constrain Delay Compensation again, in
order to restore full delay compensation.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37

548
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Import and Export Options

Import and Export Options

Importing MIDI Loops

You can import MIDI loops (file extension .midiloop) in Cubase. These files contain MIDI part
information (MIDI notes, controllers, etc.) and all the settings that are saved in instrument
track presets. This way, you can reuse instrument patterns in other projects or applications,
for example.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Media > MediaBay.
2. Optional: On the toolbar, open the Select Media Types menu, and activate MIDI Loops and
Plug-in Presets.

3. In the Results list, select a MIDI loop and drag it to an empty section in the Project window.

RESULT
An instrument track is created, and the instrument part is inserted at the position where you
dragged the file. The Inspector reflects all settings that are saved in the MIDI loop, for example,
the VST instrument that was used, applied insert effects, track parameters, etc.

NOTE

You can also drag MIDI loops onto existing instrument or MIDI tracks. However, this only imports
the part information. This means that this part only contains the MIDI data (notes, controllers)
saved in the MIDI loop, but no Inspector settings or instrument parameters.

RELATED LINKS
Presets for Instruments on page 543
Filtering According to Media Type on page 508

Exporting MIDI Loops

You can export MIDI loops to save a MIDI part, including its instrument and effect settings.
This allows you to reproduce patterns that you created, without having to search for the correct
sound, style, or effect. MIDI loops have the file extension .midiloop.

PROCEDURE
1. Select an instrument part.

549
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Side-Chaining for VST Instruments

2. Select File > Export > MIDI Loop.

3. In the Save MIDI Loop dialog, enter a name for the MIDI loop.
4. Optional: To save attributes for the MIDI loop, click the button below the New MIDI Loop
section at the bottom left.
The Attribute Inspector section opens, allowing you to define attributes for your MIDI loop.
5. Click OK.

RESULT
MIDI loop files are saved in the following folder:
Windows: \Users\<user name>\AppData\Roaming\Steinberg\MIDI Loops
macOS: /Users/<user name>/Library/Application Support/Steinberg/MIDI Loops/
The default folder cannot be changed. However, you can create subfolders within this folder to
organize your MIDI loops. To create a subfolder, click New Folder in the Save MIDI Loop dialog.

Exporting Instrument Tracks as MIDI Files

You can export instrument tracks as standard MIDI files.

PROCEDURE
1. Select an instrument track.
2. Select File > Export > MIDI File.
3. In the Export MIDI File dialog, select a location, and enter a name for the MIDI file.
4. Click Save.
5. In the Export Options dialog, make your changes.
If you activate Export Inspector Volume/Pan, volume and pan information of the VST
instrument is converted and written into the MIDI file as controller data.
6. Click OK.

RESULT
The instrument track is exported as a standard MIDI file. As there is no MIDI patch information in
an instrument track, this information is missing in the resulting MIDI file.

RELATED LINKS
Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files on page 141

Side-Chaining for VST Instruments

You can send audio into VST 3 instruments that support side-chaining. Side-chaining allows you
to use the output of one track to control the action of an instrument on another track.

Depending on the instrument, activating side-chaining allows you to:

● Use the instrument as an effect plug-in on audio events.

● Use the side-chain signal as a modulation source.
● Apply ducking to the instrument, that is, reduce the volume of the instrument track when a
signal is present on the audio track.

You can route the audio signal to the side-chain input of an instrument in different ways:

550
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Side-Chaining for VST Instruments

● To process the audio signal completely through the instrument, route the output of the
audio track to the side-chain input of an instrument.
● To use both the clean audio signal and the signal processed by the instrument, route a send
to the instrument side-chain.

NOTE

To listen to the audio played through the instrument, trigger a note, either by playing MIDI
events or by playing notes on your external MIDI keyboard.

RELATED LINKS
Using Instruments as Effects on Audio Tracks on page 551

Using Instruments as Effects on Audio Tracks

You can use instruments that support side-chaining to modify the audio on audio tracks. The
following example shows you how to apply the parameters in Retrologue to a drum loop.

PREREQUISITE
You have a drum loop on an audio track. You have created an instrument track with Retrologue
loaded.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Retrologue control panel, click Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining.
2. On the control panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing.
3. Click Add Side-Chain Source, and select the audio track from the selector.
4. In the Project window, select the audio track.
5. In the Inspector for the audio track, open the Routing section.
6. Open the Output Routing pop-up menu and select Retrologue as a side-chain input.
7. On the Retrologue panel in the Oscillator Mix section, adjust the Input Level control.
8. Optional: Deactivate oscillators OSC 1, OSC 2, and OSC 3.
9. Do one of the following:
● On the instrument track, create a MIDI event, set up a cycle with the left and right
locators, and activate cycle mode.
● Play notes on your MIDI keyboard.

NOTE

For this to work, your MIDI keyboard must be installed and set up.

RESULT
When a note is played, the drum loop is played back through Retrologue.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Use Retrologue to modify the sound of your drum loop. For example, you can do the following:

● Use the filter and distortion settings on the Synth page.

● Modulate the input signal. Select Modulation Matrix > Destination > Oscillator > Audio
Input.

551
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST Instruments
Side-Chaining for VST Instruments

● Set up a rhythmical modulation on the Arp page.

● Use the effects on the FX page, for example the Resonator.

NOTE

For detailed information about Retrologue and its parameters, see the separate document
Retrologue.

552
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Installing and Managing VST
Plug-ins

Cubase supports the VST 2 and VST 3 plug-in standards. You can install effects and instruments
that comply with these formats.

NOTE

● Cubase supports 64-bit plug-ins only.

● If you want to use VST 2 plug-ins in Cubase, you must activate Enable VST 2 Plug-ins in the
VST Plug-in Manager window.

NOTE

We recommend to replace VST 2 plug-ins with VST 3 versions if possible.

A plug-in is a piece of software that adds a specific functionality to Cubase. The audio effects and
instruments that are used in Cubase are VST plug-ins.

VST effect or VST instrument plug-ins normally have their own installation application. Read the
documentation or readme files before installing new plug-ins.

When you scan for newly installed plug-ins or relaunch Cubase, the new plug-ins are shown on
the VST effect or VST instrument selectors, respectively.

Cubase comes with a number of effect plug-ins included. These effects and their parameters are
described in the separate document Plug-in Reference.

RELATED LINKS
VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 554

Plug-ins and Collections

The VST Plug-in Manager shows the VST effects and VST instruments that are installed on your
computer.

In Cubase, plug-ins are arranged in collections. Only one collection can be active at a time.
The plug-ins contained in the active collection are displayed in the plug-in selectors, in various
locations of the program.

When you launch Cubase, all plug-ins that are found are automatically placed in the Default
collection. This is the collection of plug-ins that is active by default.

The Default collection is created each time you start Cubase or initiate a rescan.

You can add your own VST effect or VST instrument collections. This is useful if you only want
to see specific plug-ins that are used in a specific project, for example. When you activate this
collection, only VST effects and VST instruments of this collection are shown in the selectors for
VST effects or VST instruments.

553
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins
Plug-ins and Collections

NOTE

If an installed VST effect or a VST instrument cannot be loaded by Cubase, it is not shown on the
VST Effects tab or the VST Instruments tab, and it is grayed out in any collection. In this case,
verify that the plug-in is not copy-protected.

RELATED LINKS
VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 554
Adding New Plug-in Collections on page 557

VST Plug-in Manager Window

You can manage VST effects and VST instruments in the VST Plug-in Manager window.

● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager.

The VST Plug-in Manager window is divided into the following sections:

VST Effects
Lists all VST effects that are loaded in Cubase. To sort the list by a specific attribute,
click the corresponding column header.

VST Instruments
Lists all VST instruments that are loaded in Cubase. To sort the list by a specific
attribute, click the corresponding column header.

Blocklist
Lists all VST effects and VST instruments that are installed on your system but not
loaded in Cubase because they can lead to stability problems or even cause Cubase to
crash.

Toolbar
Shows tools and shortcuts for functions in the VST Plug-in Manager window.

Active plug-in collection

This section to the right shows the active collection for VST effects and VST
instruments. The plug-ins of the active collection are displayed in the selectors for VST
effects and VST instruments in Cubase; for example, in Inserts slots or the Add Track
dialog.

Plug-in Information

554
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins
Plug-ins and Collections

Shows information about the selected plug-in.

Plug-in Report
Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, which allows you to save a text file that
contains information about your system as well as plug-in information. This is useful
for troubleshooting, for example.

Enable VST 2 Plug-ins

Enables/Disables support for VST 2 plug-ins. This option allows you to make VST 2 plug-
ins immediately available/unavailable in Cubase. If you deactivate this option although
a VST 2 plug-in is used in your current project, a warning message is shown.

VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings

Shows/Hides the settings for VST 2 plug-in paths. This button is only available if Enable
VST 2 Plug-ins is activated.

RELATED LINKS
Plug-ins and Collections on page 553
Audio System Page on page 17
VST Plug-in Manager Toolbar on page 555
VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings on page 556
Hiding Plug-ins on page 557
Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist on page 558

VST Plug-in Manager Toolbar

Shows tools and shortcuts for functions in the VST Plug-in Manager.

● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager.

Search field

Allows you to search for specific plug-ins on the VST Effects tab or on the VST
Instruments tab by typing in their name.

Rescan All
Rescans the plug-in list.

Display Options

Allows you to choose which plug-ins are shown:

● Show All Plug-ins displays all loaded plug-ins.

● Hide Plug-ins That Are in Active Collection hides all plug-ins that are part of the
active collection.
● Show Plug-ins That Support 64-Bit Float Processing shows all VST 3 plug-ins that
support 64-bit float processing.

New Folder

Creates a new folder in the current collection.

Delete

Deletes the selected item from the current collection.

555
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins
Plug-ins and Collections

Add Collection

Creates a new collection.

● Empty creates a new, empty collection.

● Add All Plug-ins creates a new collection that contains all VST effects or VST
instruments, respectively.
● Copy Collection creates a new collection that contains the current collection.

Plug-in Collections and Options

● Default activates the default collection.

● New Collection allows you to create a new collection.
● Remove Unavailable Plug-ins from All Collections removes all plug-ins that are
not available from all user-created collections.
● Sort By Category sorts the collection by category.

NOTE

This option is available for the Default collection only.

● Sort By Vendor sorts the collection by vendor.

NOTE

This option is available for the Default collection only.

VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings

This section displays information about VST 2 plug-in paths.

● To open the VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings section, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager,
activate Enable VST 2 Plug-in Support, and click VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings.

VST 2 Plug-in path list

Shows all VST 2 plug-in paths.

Add Path
Allows you to add a new VST 2 plug-in path.

Delete Path
Deletes the selected VST 2 plug-in path.

Reset
Resets the list to default.

556
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins
Adding New Plug-in Collections

Adding New Plug-in Collections

You can add new collections of VST effects or VST instruments.

PREREQUISITE
A number of effect plug-ins is installed on your computer. These plug-ins are listed in the VST
Plug-in Manager on the VST Effects tab and the VST Instruments tab.

PROCEDURE
1. In the VST Plug-in Manager toolbar, click Add Collection, and select an option.

2. In the Add Collection dialog, enter a name for the new collection, and click OK.
3. Optional: Click New Folder.
You can then move your plug-ins into these folders to organize them by categories, for
example.
4. Enter a name for the new folder, and click OK.
5. From the VST Effects tab or the VST Instruments tab, select the plug-ins that you want to
add to the collection, and drag them into the new collection.
If you created folders, you can drag the plug-ins into them.

RESULT
The new collection is saved. If you select it, its plug-ins are shown in the plug-in selectors.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To remove a plug-in from a collection, select it, and click Remove.

RELATED LINKS
Plug-ins and Collections on page 553
VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 554

Hiding Plug-ins
You can hide plug-ins from all collections. This is useful if you have installed plug-ins on your
computer that you do not want to use in Cubase.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager.
2. On the VST Effects tab or on the VST Instruments tab, select the plug-ins that you want to
hide from view.
3. Click Show VST Plug-in Information to show information about the selected plug-in.
4. Activate Hide.

557
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins
Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist

RESULT
The selected plug-in is hidden from view.

RELATED LINKS
ASIO-Guard on page 880

Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist

You can reactivate 64-bit plug-ins that are on the blocklist.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Blocklist tab, select the plug-ins that you want to reactivate.

NOTE

You cannot reactivate 32-bit plug-ins because they are not supported.

2. Click Reactivate.

RESULT
Cubase rescans the plug-in and removes it from the blocklist.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

If you want to move the plug-in back to the blocklist, click Rescan All in the VST 2 Plug-in Path
Settings, and restart Cubase.

RELATED LINKS
VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 554

558
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Quick Controls

Cubase allows you to set up 8 different track parameters or settings as Track Quick Controls for
quick access.

Track Quick Controls are available for the following track types:

● Audio
● MIDI
● Instrument
● Sampler
● Effect
● Group

For instrument tracks and for MIDI tracks with a VST instrument assigned to on creation, that is,
that you created by loading a rack instrument, Track Quick Controls are automatically assigned
to the Quick Controls of the VST instrument.

For sampler tracks, Track Quick Controls are automatically assigned to the sound parameters of
Sampler Control.

NOTE

You can change the default assignment by assigning different track parameters or by loading a
preset.

You can assign parameters to Quick Controls in the Inspector.

Quick Controls section in the Inspector

Quick Controls assignments are saved with the project.

You can assign Track Quick Controls to an external remote control device. For this to work, you
must connect Track Quick Controls with your remote controller.

You can automate parameter settings in the Quick Controls section using the Read/Write
buttons (R and W).

RELATED LINKS
Track Presets on page 153

559
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Quick Controls
Parameter Assignment

Automation on page 525

Parameter Assignment
You can assign track, effect, and instrument parameters to Quick Controls.

For the parameter assignment, you can use the Inspector. You can assign parameters manually,
use the QC Learn Mode, or load an assignment preset.

RELATED LINKS
Assigning Track Parameters to Quick Controls on page 560
Assigning Effect Parameters to Quick Controls on page 561
Using QC Learn Mode on page 561
Setting Instrument Parameter Assignments to Default on page 561
Removing Parameter Assignments on page 562
Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets on page 563

Assigning Track Parameters to Quick Controls

You can assign track parameters manually.

NOTE

For instrument tracks and MIDI tracks with a VST instrument assigned to on creation, the main
parameters of the instrument are automatically assigned to the slots in the Quick Controls
section of the Inspector.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section.
2. Click the first slot to open a selector that lists all parameters for the track.
3. Select the parameter that you want to assign to the first Quick Controls.
The parameter name is displayed on the slot.
4. Move the mouse pointer over the slot and do one of the following depending on the
parameter type:
● Drag the slider to change the value.

● Click to change the value.

5. Repeat these steps for all slots for which you want to assign track parameters.

RESULT
You can now control the track parameters via the Quick Controls section in the Inspector.

560
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Quick Controls
Parameter Assignment

Assigning Effect Parameters to Quick Controls

You can assign effect parameters to Quick Control slots from within plug-in panels.

NOTE

This is available for VST 3 plug-ins that support this function only.

PROCEDURE
● In the effect plug-in panel, right-click the parameter.

● Select Add “x” to Focus Quick Controls (where x is the name of the parameter) to
assign the parameter to the next empty slot.
● Select Add “x” to Focus Quick Controls Slot (where x is the name of the parameter),
and select the slot from the submenu to assign the parameter to a specific slot.

RESULT
You can now control the effect parameters via the Quick Controls section in the Inspector.

Using QC Learn Mode

The QC Learn Mode allows you to assign a parameter by moving controls. This applies to all
automatable controls.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section.
2. Activate QC Learn Mode.
3. Select the slot to which you want to assign a parameter.
4. Move the control.

RESULT
The track parameter is assigned to the corresponding control.

RELATED LINKS
Controlling Automatable Parameters on page 563

Setting Instrument Parameter Assignments to Default

If you have changed the parameter assignment or if you manually routed a MIDI track to a VST
instrument, you can retrieve the default assignments.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for the instrument or MIDI track, open the Quick Controls section.
2. Click Get Default QCs from Plug-in.

561
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Quick Controls
Parameter Assignment

RESULT
The instrument parameter assignments are set to default.

Removing Parameter Assignments

You can remove parameter assignments for individual Quick Controls or for all Quick Controls
at the same time.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● To remove a parameter from a slot, click in the corresponding slot, and select No
parameter from the pop-up menu.
● To remove the Quick Control assignments for all slots, right-click the section header,
and select Remove All QC Assignments.

Saving Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets

You can save Quick Control assignments as track presets.

PREREQUISITE
You have assigned track parameters to Quick Controls.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section.
2. Right-click the Quick Controls section header.
3. From the Presets submenu, select Save Preset.
4. Enter a name in the Save Preset dialog.
5. Click OK.

RESULT
The Quick Control assignment is saved as a preset.

RELATED LINKS
Assigning Track Parameters to Quick Controls on page 560

562
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Quick Controls
Controlling Automatable Parameters

Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets

You can load presets for Quick Control assignments.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section.
2. Right-click the Quick Controls section header.
3. From the Presets submenu, select one of the presets.

RESULT
The preset is loaded and allows you to access the channel parameters.

Controlling Automatable Parameters

You can use Quick Controls to control all automatable parameters. This allows you to control
parameters on other tracks using Quick Controls.

IMPORTANT

Use this function with caution, as you might accidentally modify parameters on other tracks.

PROCEDURE
1. Create a new, empty audio track, and open the Quick Controls section.
2. Hold down Ctrl/Cmd , and click the first Quick Control slot.
The selector lists all automatable parameters.
3. Open the VST Mixer folder.
The selector lists all channels that are available in the MixConsole of your project.

4. Assign a parameter of one particular channel to Quick Control 1 and a different parameter
of another channel to Quick Control 2.

RESULT
The Quick Controls section now allows you to control automatable parameters on different
tracks.

563
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Track Quick Controls
Controlling Automatable Parameters

IMPORTANT

You cannot save Quick Control assignments for automatable parameters on different tracks as
track presets.

Showing Automated Quick Control Assignments

You can show all Quick Control assignments that have been automated for one track.

PROCEDURE
1. Click the track for which you want to show automated Quick Control assignments.
2. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section.
3. Right-click the Quick Controls section header.
4. Select Show Automated QC Assignments.

RESULT
The automation tracks of the automated Quick Control parameters open for the selected track.

NOTE

● If Volume is assigned as a Quick Control parameter, it is always shown as automated.

564
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 MIDI Remote

MIDI Remote allows you to integrate and use third party MIDI controllers in Cubase.

The MIDI Remote concept is based on dedicated scripts for specific MIDI controllers. These
scripts establish a connection between a specific MIDI controller and Cubase, and include factory
mappings to parameters.

The layout and functions of MIDI controllers with a script can be shown on the MIDI Remote tab
in the lower zone of the Project window. If a script is available for your MIDI controller, all you
have to do is plug in the controller, and you can start playing.

Cubase includes several MIDI controller scripts. If no script is yet available for your MIDI
controller, we encourage you to create one.

The MIDI Controller Surface Editor provides you with an easy way to create your own scripts. It
allows you to create a surface that describes the layout and the order of the control elements on
your MIDI controller.

As an alternative for those who have some programming skills and want to dive deeper into
scripting, we have created a MIDI Remote API that allows you to develop a script for your
dedicated MIDI controller.

RELATED LINKS
Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI Remote on page 569
MIDI Remote Tab on page 565
MIDI Remote Info Line on page 566
Generic Remote Page (Legacy) on page 611
MIDI Remote API on page 599
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 584
Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 590

MIDI Remote Tab

The MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window allows you to load scripts for
MIDI controllers. It shows the layout of your controller and its control mappings to Cubase
parameters. All operations that you perform on the connected MIDI controller are displayed on
the MIDI Remote tab.

NOTE

The purpose of the surfaces that are shown on the MIDI Remote tab is to map Cubase functions
to your connected MIDI controller. After mapping, you can control those Cubase functions via
your MIDI controller.

● To open the MIDI Remote tab, click the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project
window.

565
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Tab

The MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window

The following elements are available:

1 Info line
Shows the MIDI Remote info line.
2 MIDI controller surface
Shows which Cubase functions are mapped to which controls on your MIDI controller. You
can use multiple MIDI controllers simultaneously. All available supported MIDI controllers
are shown in the overview.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Info Line on page 566
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 584
Opening MIDI Remote in the Lower Zone on page 59

MIDI Remote Info Line

The MIDI Remote info line displays information about the current MIDI controller and the
recently used controls.

● To show or hide the info line elements, right-click the info line, and activate or deactivate the
elements.

MIDI Controllers Overview

Go to MIDI Controllers Overview

Click this to display an overview of all connected and supported MIDI controllers. To go
back to the surface of a specific controller, click it.

566
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Tab

MIDI Controller

Go to Previous Controller

If you have connected more than one MIDI controller, this allows you to go to the
previous MIDI controller.

MIDI Controller

Shows the name of the MIDI controller that is currently shown on the MIDI Remote
tab in the lower zone of the Project window.

Incoming MIDI Data from Other Controller

If you have connected more than one MIDI controller, this shows the activity of the
controller that is currently not selected.

Go to Next Controller

If you have connected more than one MIDI controller, this allows you to go to the next
MIDI controller.

Open MIDI Remote Manager

Opens the MIDI Remote Manager that shows information about the connected MIDI
controllers and the installed scripts.

Edit MIDI Controller Surface

NOTE

This is only available if you created the script for the selected MIDI controller with the
MIDI Controller Surface Editor.

Opens the MIDI Controller Surface Editor that allows you to create and edit a surface
that corresponds to the layout of your MIDI controller. You can use this surface to
assign Cubase functions to controls on your MIDI controller.

Mapping Page

Go to Previous Mapping Page

Activates the previous mapping page for the current controller.

Mapping Page

Allows you to activate a mapping page for the current controller.

Go to Next Mapping Page

567
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Tab

Activates the next mapping page for the current controller.

Open Mapping Assistant

Opens the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.

Quick Control Focus

Quick Control Focus

Shows the name of the item that has the quick control focus, that is, either the track
name or the plug-in name.

Focus Quick Controls Lock State: Locked/Unlocked

Allows you to lock the focus of the quick controls.

Focus Quick Controls Indicator

Displays which quick controls have the focus.

Quick Control Focus Setup

Opens the Quick Control Focus Setup panel.

Zoom Controls

Zoom In

Zooms in on the current MIDI controller surface in the lower zone.

Zoom Out

Zooms out of the current MIDI controller surface in the lower zone.

Zoom Full/Zoom to Fit

Zooms out so that the whole MIDI controller is visible.

NOTE

You can also press G to zoom in and H to zoom out of the current MIDI controller surface.

Last Touched Control

Last Touched Control

Shows the last hardware control that you touched, the host parameter that the control
is assigned to, and its last value.

568
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI Remote

Last Hovered Control

Last Hovered Control

Shows the control that you last hovered with the mouse on the controller surface, the
host parameter that the control is assigned to, and its last value.

Scripting Tools

Reload Scripts

Allows you to reload the scripts.

Open MIDI Remote Script Console

Opens the MIDI Remote Script Console with script messages.

Open Script Folder

Opens the location of the scripts folder.

Open MIDI Remote API - Programmer’s Guide

Opens the MIDI Remote API programmer’s guide, which allows you to write your own
scripts for your MIDI controller.

Show Surface Element Rectangles

Shows the size and position of surface elements while developing scripts.

Open in Separate Window

Open in Separate Window

Opens the MIDI Remote tab in a separate window.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote API on page 599
MIDI Remote Manager Window on page 592
Quick Control Focus Setup Panel on page 591

Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI Remote

The layout and the functions of supported MIDI controllers, that is, controllers with a script, are
shown on the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window.

PREREQUISITE
If you have previously used an earlier version of Cubase, and if you already set up your MIDI
controller using Generic Remote, Track Quick Controls or VST Quick Controls, open the
Studio Setup dialog, open the MIDI Port Setup page. Set the corresponding MIDI ports to Not

569
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote

Connected. This ensures that no double mappings occur when the MIDI Remote functionality
automatically detects those MIDI controllers on connection.

NOTE

Some of the supported MIDI controllers require additional settings to work with Cubase. To open
a document with the necessary information, open the MIDI Remote tab, and click Open Setup
Information in the upper right corner of the MIDI controller surface.

PROCEDURE
1. Connect your MIDI controller to your computer.
2. In the lower zone of the Project window, click MIDI Remote.
3. Optional: If you have connected several supported MIDI controllers, click the controller
surface that you want to use in the MIDI controllers overview.

RESULT
In the MIDI Remote tab, the layout and the functions of the connected MIDI controller are
displayed. Here, you can also see which Cubase functions are mapped to controls on your MIDI
controller.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Port Setup Page on page 24
MIDI Remote on page 565
VST Quick Controls on page 611
Track Quick Controls on page 609

Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote

You can also use MIDI controllers that do not have a ready-to-use script. For this purpose, you
must create a custom controller surface.

Cubase offers an easy way to create your own controller surface. It includes the following steps:

● Adding a MIDI controller surface in the Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog.
● Editing the MIDI controller surface in the MIDI Controller Surface Editor.
● Mapping the controls to Cubase functions in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.

You can also create controller surfaces by writing a script with the MIDI Remote API.

RELATED LINKS
Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
Mapping Controls on MIDI Controllers to Cubase Functions on page 573
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 584
MIDI Remote API on page 599

570
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote

Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces

If you want to use a MIDI controller that is not yet supported and, for this reason, has no script,
you must first add a new MIDI controller surface for it.

PREREQUISITE
If you have previously used an earlier version of Cubase, and if you already set up your MIDI
controller using Generic Remote, Track Quick Controls or VST Quick Controls, open the Studio
Setup dialog, open the MIDI Port Setup page, and set the corresponding MIDI ports to Not
Connected. This ensures that no double mappings occur when the MIDI Remote functionality
automatically detects those MIDI controllers on connection.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MIDI Remote info line, click Go to MIDI Controllers Overview.
2. In the overview, click Add MIDI Controller Surface.

3. In the Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog, enter the required information, and select the
MIDI ports of your MIDI controller.

NOTE

● Special characters are not allowed in that dialog.

● Make sure that you select the correct MIDI ports of your MIDI controller. Otherwise,
your surface script will not work as expected.

4. Click Create MIDI Controller Surface.

RESULT
The MIDI Controller Surface Editor opens in the lower zone of the Project window. Here, you
can edit the controller surface.

RELATED LINKS
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog on page 575
Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 584
Deleting Unused MIDI Controller Scripts on page 597

Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces

You can edit MIDI controller surfaces via the MIDI Controller Surface Editor in the lower zone of
the Project window.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a new surface using the Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog and clicked Create
MIDI Controller Surface to open the MIDI Controller Surface Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. In the MIDI Controller Surface Editor, follow the instructions on the message board to
create a surface that corresponds to the layout of your MIDI controller.

571
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote

When you touch the hardware controls of your MIDI controller, Cubase detects the incoming
MIDI messages and associates them with a control in the MIDI Controller Surface Editor.
2. When you are done, do one of the following:

● To map the controls on your MIDI controller to Cubase functions, click Open Mapping
Assistant on the MIDI Controller Surface Editor info line.
● To close the MIDI Controller Surface Editor, click Go to MIDI Controller Surface.

RESULT
Your controller surface is added to the MIDI Remote tab.

RELATED LINKS
Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
MIDI Remote Tab on page 565

Importing MIDI Controller Surface Scripts

You can import MIDI controller surface scripts from other users.

PREREQUISITE
Connect the controller that corresponds to the MIDI controller script that you want to import.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:
● Select Studio > MIDI Remote Manager to open the MIDI Remote Manager.
● Click Add MIDI Controller Surface on the MIDI Remote tab to open the Add MIDI
Controller Surface dialog.
2. On the info line, click Import Script.
3. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select a .midiremote file, and click Open.
.midiremote files contain script files that have the file extension .js or .json, .pdf files
with setup information, .sysex files, and mappings.

NOTE

Always use the Import Script and Export Script functions to exchange scripts with other
users, instead of just copying .js or .json files. Otherwise, the additional files and settings
are not included.

RESULT
The MIDI controller surface for the imported script opens in the lower zone of the Project
window.
If the corresponding MIDI controller is not connected, a warning message is shown.

RELATED LINKS
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog on page 575
MIDI Remote Manager Window on page 592
MIDI Controller Settings Pane on page 583

572
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote

Mapping Controls on MIDI Controllers to Cubase Functions

You can map controls on your MIDI controller to Cubase functions.

PREREQUISITE
You have connected a MIDI controller to your computer, and its controller surface is shown on
the MIDI Remote tab, in the lower zone of the Project window.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● On the info line of the MIDI Controller Surface Editor, click Open Mapping Assistant
.
● On the info line of the MIDI Remote tab, click Open Mapping Assistant .
● On the toolbar of the Project window, click Open MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant .

2. Do one of the following to select a control on your MIDI controller:

● Touch the control on your MIDI controller.

● Click the control in the controller surface of the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.

The name of the control is shown in the Mapping Assistant.

3. Do one of the following to select a Cubase function:
● Select it from the Functions Browser.

NOTE

If the Functions Browser is not shown in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant,
activate Show/Hide Functions Browser.

● Right-click a function in Cubase, and select Pick for MIDI Remote Mapping.
The name of the function is shown in the Mapping Assistant.
4. Click Apply Mapping.
5. Repeat the steps above to map more Cubase functions to hardware controls.

RESULT
The hardware controls on your controller are now mapped to Cubase functions.

TIP

To quickly apply mappings, you can also try one of the following:

● Select a control on your MIDI controller so that it is shown in the Mapping Assistant, and
double-click a Cubase function in the Functions Browser to map it.
● Select a Cubase function so that it is shown in the Mapping Assistant, and double-click a
control in the controller surface of the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant to map it.

TIP

In the Mappings section of the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant, you can view and edit
mapping details.

573
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 584
Mappings on page 587

Removing Mappings via Right-Click

You can remove your mappings via right-click from controller surfaces that you have created in
the MIDI Controller Surface Editor.

PREREQUISITE
You have mapped a control on your MIDI controller to a Cubase function.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MIDI Remote info line, open the MIDI Controller pop-up menu, and select the
controller surface that contains the mapping that you want to remove.
2. Right-click the control whose mapping you want to remove.

3. From the context menu, select Remove Mapping.

RESULT
The mapping is removed from the control.

RELATED LINKS
Mapping Controls on MIDI Controllers to Cubase Functions on page 573

574
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

Making Changes on MIDI Controller Surfaces

You can make changes on controller surfaces that you created in the MIDI Controller Surface
Editor.

PREREQUISITE
You have created a controller surface in the MIDI Controller Surface Editor.

NOTE

Controller surfaces that you created with a MIDI Remote API script, and controller surfaces from
factory scripts cannot be edited.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MIDI Remote info line, open the MIDI Controller pop-up menu, and select the
controller surface that you want to edit.

NOTE

Edit MIDI Controller Surface is only available for controller surfaces that you created in the
MIDI Controller Surface Editor.

2. On the info line, click Edit MIDI Controller Surface.

NOTE

You can also move the mouse pointer over the surface and click Edit MIDI Controller
Surface.

RESULT
In the lower zone of the Project window, the MIDI Controller Surface Editor opens, where you
can make changes to your controller surface.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571

Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

The Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog allows you to add a surface that corresponds to the
layout of your MIDI controller.

● To open the Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog, click Add MIDI Controller Surface on the
MIDI Remote tab.

575
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

NOTE

If the MIDI Remote tab shows a controller surface, click Go to MIDI Controllers Overview on
the MIDI Remote info line, then click Add MIDI Controller Surface.

Go to MIDI Controllers Overview

Cancels the operation and returns to the MIDI Controllers Overview.

Import Script
Allows you to import MIDI controller scripts.

Vendor
Opens a pop-up menu where you can select the vendor of the connected MIDI
controller from a list.
If the vendor of your MIDI controller is not listed, scroll to the end of the list, and select
Add Vendor to enter the information manually.

Model
Allows you to enter information about the model of your MIDI controller.

Script Creator
Allows you to enter information about the script creator of your MIDI controller.

NOTE

Special characters are not allowed.

Open Setup Information

Opens setup information for the selected MIDI controller. This is only available for
particular MIDI controllers that require specific settings to communicate with Cubase.

Input Port
Allows you to select the MIDI input port of your MIDI controller.

Output Port
Allows you to select the MIDI output port of your MIDI controller.

NOTE

Make sure that you select the MIDI port of your MIDI controller. Otherwise, your
surface script does not work as expected.

576
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

Create MIDI Controller Surface

Adds the surface to the MIDI Controllers Overview and opens the MIDI Controller
Surface Editor. In the editor, you can create and edit a surface that allows you to
assign Cubase functions to controls on your MIDI controller.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Page on page 26
Importing MIDI Controller Surface Scripts on page 572

MIDI Controller Surface Editor

The MIDI Controller Surface Editor allows you to create a surface that corresponds to the
layout of your MIDI controller. You can then use this surface to assign Cubase functions to
controls on your MIDI controller.

● To open the MIDI Controller Surface Editor, click Go to MIDI Controllers Overview on the
MIDI Remote info line. In the overview, click Add MIDI Controller Surface. In the Add MIDI
Controller Surface dialog, fill in the required information, and click Create MIDI Controller
Surface.

NOTE

If you already created a script for the selected MIDI controller using the MIDI Controller Surface
Editor, you can also click Edit MIDI Controller Surface on the surface or on the MIDI Remote
info line to reopen the editor and make changes.

Info line
Displays information about the current MIDI controller, allows you to undo or redo the
latest edits, and to access the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.

Message board
Shows if you are in Placement Mode or in Edit Mode and provides information about
the steps that you can perform.

Control types
Allows you to select the type of control that you want to add. You can add knobs,
horizontal or vertical faders, buttons, trigger pads, etc.

Surface display
Shows the added controls and allows you to edit them. The surface that you create
allows you to map controls of your MIDI controller to Cubase functions at a later point

577
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

in time. The surface is added to the MIDI Controllers Overview on the MIDI Remote
tab.

Properties
Shows the properties that are assigned to the selected controls. The Properties are
available in Edit Mode.

Go to Mapping Assistant
Closes the MIDI Controller Surface Editor and opens the Mapping Assistant that
allows you to map controls of your MIDI controller to Cubase functions.

RELATED LINKS
Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
MIDI Remote Tab on page 565
MIDI Remote API on page 599
Placement Mode and Edit Mode on page 578
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog on page 575
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 584
Properties on page 581

Placement Mode and Edit Mode

The different steps to take when creating a new surface for your MIDI controller in the MIDI
Controller Surface Editor are divided into two modes: Placement Mode and Edit Mode.

Placement Mode
Placement Mode allows you to add controls to the surface display. It is indicated by a red cursor.

The position and the size of the cursor determine the position and the size of the added control.

● To change the position of the cursor, click an empty area, or use Up Arrow , Down Arrow ,
Left Arrow , or Right Arrow .
● To change the size of the cursor, use the Resize handles, or hold down Shift while using
Up Arrow , Down Arrow , Left Arrow , or Right Arrow .

NOTE

● All editing in the surface display is based on a fixed grid.

● You can also adjust the position and the size of the added control in Edit Mode.

578
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

You can add controls to the surface display either manually or via the MIDI Learn function that
allows Cubase to learn MIDI messages from a MIDI controller:

● To add controls manually, select a control type to the left of the surface display. In the top
right corner of the cursor, click Add to Surface.

● To add controls via MIDI Learn, select a control type to the left of the surface display, and
move the corresponding hardware controls.

NOTE

● Adding controls via MIDI Learn is not possible for specific control types, such as Push
Encoders or Blind Panels. It is also not possible if you activate Bypass for MIDI Learn
on the info line.
● If MIDI Learn is available for a control, this is indicated by an L symbol on the cursor .
If MIDI Learn is not available, the L symbol is crossed out .

NOTE

As soon as you add controls in the MIDI Controller Surface Editor, a black frame is shown in the
event display to indicate the size of the added surface.

Edit Mode
Edit Mode allows you to edit the selected control. In Edit Mode, the selected control is displayed
in blue.

● To change the position of a control, click and drag, or use Up Arrow , Down Arrow ,
Left Arrow , or Right Arrow .
● To change the size of the control, use the Resize handles.
● To select multiple controls, hold down Shift .
● To create a label for your control, click Create Label Field.
● To specify the properties of the controls, use Properties to the right of the surface display.
● To remove a control, click Remove from Surface.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Tab on page 565

579
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

MIDI Remote API on page 599

MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577

Control Types
You can add different types of controls to your MIDI controller surface. What control type to
choose depends on the layout of your MIDI controller.

● To select a control type, open the MIDI Controller Surface Editor. To the left of the surface
display, click a control type.

NOTE

You can add labels for controls by selecting one or several controls and clicking Create Label
Field. As soon as you map your control in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant, the label
field is shown, and the label changes to the name of the mapped parameter.

The following control types are available:

Knob

Allows you to add a knob.

Fader

Allows you to add a fader. You can change the size and the aspect ratio of the added
control to determine whether to add a vertical or horizontal fader.

Button

Allows you to add a button for on/off control items.

Trigger Pad

Allows you to add a trigger pad. Trigger pads can show the on/off status and values in
between.

Pitchbend

Allows you to add a pitchbend wheel. The value is shown in the center position, or at
the position retrieved from the hardware.

Modulation

580
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

Allows you to add a modulation wheel. The value is shown in the bottom position, or at
the position retrieved from the hardware.

X/Y Pad

Allows you to add an x/y pad.

X/Y Joystick

Allows you to add an x/y joystick.

Push Encoder

Allows you to add a push encoder. Compared to a knob, this has an additional
parameter that allows you to set up the message for the push value.

Piano Keys

Allows you to add piano keys for decorative purposes. You can adjust the keyboard
range, but you cannot map host parameters to this control type.

Lamp

Allows you to add a lamp. You can use this as an indicator for showing the value of a
mapping.

Blind Panel

Allows you to add a blind panel for decorative purposes. You cannot map host
parameters to this item.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
Placement Mode and Edit Mode on page 578

Properties
The Properties are available in Edit Mode. They show the properties for the control that you
select from the MIDI Controller Surface Editor.

● To show the Properties, open the MIDI Controller Surface Editor. Use the Placement
Mode to create and place surface controls that are assigned to your MIDI controller. Select a
surface control from the surface display to activate Edit Mode.

581
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog

Depending on the control type, the following properties are available:

Message
Shows the MIDI message type that is assigned to the control. Message types can be
Note, Control Change, Pitchbend, and Aftertouch.
To pick up incoming MIDI messages from your hardware, click MIDI Monitor, and use
the controls on your hardware.

Channel
Shows the MIDI channel that is assigned to the control.

CC #
Shows the MIDI controller number that is assigned to the control.

CC Mode/Resolution
Allows you to set the resolution of the controls of your MIDI controller: Standard,
14 Bit, or 14 Bit NRPN.

Value Mode
Allows you to set the value mode of the controls of your MIDI controller to Absolute,
which means that MIDI controllers send absolute value messages from 0 to 127.
You can also select one of the relative modes. Relative or endless MIDI controllers
can send value increment and value decrement messages. This is useful to avoid
parameter jumps that can occur when the state of a control in the software and the
corresponding control on the hardware MIDI controller differ. The following relative
modes are available:
● Relative Signed Bit
Increases from 065 to 127, decreases from 001 to 063.
● Relative Binary Offset
Increases from 065 to 127, decreases from 063 to 000.
● Relative Twos Complement
Increases from 001 to 64, decreases from 127 to 065.

NOTE

We suggest that you experiment with the modes until you find what works best for
you.

Value Min.
The minimum value for the control.

582
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Controller Settings Pane

Value Max.
The maximum value for the control.

Transmit to Hardware
By default, mapped MIDI CCs are sent back to the MIDI controller. If this is not what
you want, deactivate this option.

NOTE

This is only available if you assigned a MIDI output to your MIDI controller surface.

Shape
For some controls, such as blind panels or lamps, you can specify if the shape should
be rectangular or circular.

First Key
Allows you to define the first key for piano keys.

Last Key
Allows you to define the last key for piano keys.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
Edit Mode on page 579
Output Port on page 576

MIDI Controller Settings Pane

The MIDI Controller Settings pane allows you to access the most important controller settings.

● To open the MIDI Controller Settings for the selected MIDI controller, click MIDI Controller
Settings to the top right of the corresponding MIDI controller surface.

Open MIDI Remote Manager

Opens the MIDI Remote Manager, which shows information about the connected
MIDI controllers and the installed scripts.

Remove Controller Surface

Removes the selected controller surface.

NOTE

This is only available for controller surfaces that are currently disconnected.

583
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

Disable Controller Script

Disables the script of the selected controller surface.

Delete Script
Deletes the script of the selected controller surface.

Open Script Folder

Opens the location of the scripts folder.

Export Script
Exports the script of the selected controller surface.

RELATED LINKS
Disabling Controller Scripts on page 597
Deleting Unused MIDI Controller Scripts on page 597
Importing MIDI Controller Surface Scripts on page 572
MIDI Remote Manager Window on page 592
MIDI Remote Manager - MIDI Controllers Tab on page 593

MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

The MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant allows you to map the controls of your MIDI controller to
functions in Cubase.

To open the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant, select a MIDI controller from the MIDI
Controller pop-up menu on the info line of the MIDI Remote tab, and do one of the following:

● On the MIDI controller surface, double-click a control.

● On the info line of the MIDI Remote tab, click Open Mapping Assistant.
● On the toolbar of the Project window, click Open MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.
● On the info line of the MIDI Controller Surface Editor, click Open Mapping Assistant.

584
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

The following sections are available:

Mapping Assistant
Show/Hide Functions Browser
Opens/closes the Functions Browser in the right zone.

Mapping Assistant

Mapping Assistant without Mapping

A control on your MIDI controller and a Cubase function selected for mapping

585
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

The Mapping Assistant guides you through the mapping process. It allows you to
select a control on your MIDI controller and a Cubase function for mapping.

Bypass MIDI Controller Learn Mode

● If this is deactivated, you can touch a control on your MIDI controller or click a
control in the controller surface to select it for mapping.
● If this is activated, you must click a control in the controller surface to select it
for mapping. Activate this if your MIDI controller constantly sends MIDI data and
thereby disturbs the mapping.

Bypass Function Learn Mode

● If this is deactivated, you can use a Cubase function or click a function in the
Functions Browser to select it for mapping.
● If this is activated, you must right-click a Cubase function and select Pick for MIDI
Remote Mapping to select it for mapping. You can also click a function in the
Functions Browser.

Apply Mapping
Applies the mapping.

Reset Mapping
Allows you to reset the mapping.

Controller Surface
Controller Surface

Shows a representation of your MIDI controller that allows you to view and edit
mappings. If your MIDI controller offers different layer zones, an indicator displays
the active layer zone. You can use the mouse wheel to switch from one layer zone to
the other.

NOTE

You might need to zoom in on the controller surface to display the layer zone indicator.

Zoom controls

Allow you to zoom in and out of the controller surface.

NOTE

You can also press G to zoom in and H to zoom out of the current controller surface.

586
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

Mappings

Mapping Page
Shows the active mapping page.

Mapping Page Settings

Opens a menu that allows you to delete, rename, or duplicate the selected mapping
page.

Add Mapping Page

Opens a dialog that allows you to add a new, empty mapping page.

Mapping List
To sort the list by a specific attribute, click the corresponding column header.
● Mapping Page Type
Indicates whether the mapping is saved as a Factory mapping or as a User
mapping.
● Mapping Scope
Indicates whether the mapping has a Global scope or a Project scope.
● Mapping Type
Shows the type of the selected mapping:
● Parameter Mapping
A mapping between a control on your MIDI controller and Cubase value.
● Key Command Mapping
A mapping between a control on your MIDI controller and a Cubase key
command.
● Action Mapping
A mapping between a control on your MIDI controller and a mapping page
action, such as switching to another mapping page, for example.
● Cubase Functions
Displays the Cubase function that is mapped.

The Mapping Configuration shows the details for the mapping that you select from the
mapping list.

Value Mode
Allows you to configure how Cubase functions take over values from controls on your
MIDI controller. This is useful in case the control value does not match the parameter
value.

587
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

● Jump
Sends a new value to the Cubase function, as soon as you move the control on
your MIDI controller. This can result in abrupt value changes.
● Pickup
Picks up on the value of the Cubase function, as soon as the control that you move
on your MIDI controller reaches that value. This results in smooth value changes
but requires you to estimate the pickup value.
● Scaled
Compares the value of the Cubase function to the control value, as soon as you
move the control on your MIDI controller, and approaches the two values in a
smooth way. As soon as the values are identical, the function follows the control
value. This results in smooth value changes.
● Toggle
Allows you to toggle the state of the mapped function. This is useful for mute and
solo controls, for example.

Focus Mode
● Fixed
Sets a fixed focus to the Cubase function that is picked for mapping.
● Track Selection
Sets the focus according to the track selection.

Min. Value/Max. Value

Allows you to set the value range of the mapped Cubase function.

Invert Minimum and Maximum

Inverts the minimum and maximum values.

Remove Selected Mappings

Allows you to remove the selected mapping.

Functions Browser
Functions Browser

This section shows the mappable functions in a browser view with different categories.
Select a function in the browser to show it in the Cubase Function section of the
Mapping Assistant.

Search
Allows you to search for functions by typing in their name or parts of their name.

588
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

Reset Filter
Allows you to reset the search filter.

Expand All
Expands all entries.

Collapse All
Collapses all entries.

RELATED LINKS
Mapping Pages and Mapping Scopes on page 589
Mapping Controls on MIDI Controllers to Cubase Functions on page 573
Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571

Mapping Pages and Mapping Scopes

Mapping Pages
All mappings of Cubase functions and controls on your MIDI controller are saved on mapping
pages. A MIDI controller can have different mapping pages for different purposes, but only one
mapping page can be active. The active mapping page is shown in the lower zone.

Cubase comes with several scripts that include one or more factory pages with factory mappings.
Neither the factory pages nor the factory mappings can be removed. However, you can use
factory pages as a basis for your own user mappings. All mappings that you apply are saved as
user mappings.

The Mapping Page Type column of the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant indicates if a mapping
is a user mapping or a factory mapping .

Mapping Scopes
All factory mappings are automatically set to Global scope, that is, they are saved with the
program. You cannot change the mapping scope for factory mappings.

All user mappings that you add by selecting a function in the Functions Browser are
automatically set to Global scope.

All user mappings that you add by picking a Cubase function or by using it are considered ad hoc
mappings, and therefore, automatically set to Project scope. The only exception are functions
that can also be found in the Functions Browser. These are automatically set to Global scope.

NOTE

For user mappings, you can change the mapping scope manually by selecting an option from the
Mapping Scope menu in the Mapping Configuration section.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 584

589
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

Focus Quick Controls

Focus Quick Controls are focus-dependent quick controls. This means that the active window
focus determines which parameters respond to your MIDI controller.

Focus Quick Controls are the most versatile form of quick controls. You can set them up in the
Functions Browser of the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.

To set up the focus behavior for the focus quick controls, activate one of the options in the Quick
Control Focus Setup. All hardware controls on your MIDI controller that are mapped as focus
quick controls follow this focus.

By default, Track and Plug-in Window Focus is active. As a result, the following conditions apply:

● If the Project window has the focus, your hardware controls the quick controls of the
selected track.
● If the plug-in window has the focus, your hardware controls the quick controls of the active
plug-in window.

RELATED LINKS
Quick Control Focus Setup Panel on page 591
Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 590
Quick Control Focus on page 568
VST Instrument Control Panel on page 536
Effect Control Panel on page 367
Locking the Quick Control Focus on page 591

Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

You can set up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant. Focus Quick
Controls are focus-dependent quick controls, that is, the active window focus determines which
parameters respond to your MIDI controller.

PREREQUISITE
You have connected a MIDI controller to your computer, and its controller surface is shown on
the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● On the MIDI Remote info line, click Open Mapping Assistant.

● On the Project window toolbar, click Open MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.
2. Do one of the following to select a hardware control on your MIDI controller:

● Click the control in the controller surface of the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant.
● Touch the control on your MIDI controller.

The name of the control is displayed in the Mapping Assistant.

3. Activate Show/Hide Functions Browser.

590
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant

4. In the Focus Quick Controls category of the Functions Browser, select a quick control.
5. Click Apply Mapping.
6. Repeat the steps above to map more Focus Quick Controls to your MIDI controller.

RESULT
The Focus Quick Controls are now mapped to your MIDI controller.

RELATED LINKS
Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI Remote on page 569
Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote on page 570
Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
Focus Quick Controls on page 590
Locking the Quick Control Focus on page 591
VST Instrument Control Panel on page 536
Effect Control Panel on page 367

Quick Control Focus Setup Panel

The Quick Control Focus Setup panel allows you to configure the focus behavior for the focus
quick controls.

● To open the Quick Control Focus Setup panel, click Quick Control Focus Setup on the
MIDI Remote info line.

The following options are available:

Track and Plug-in Window Focus

The quick control focus depends on the active window. If the Project window is active,
the selected track has the quick control focus. If the plug-in window is active, the
plug-in has the focus.

Track Focus Only

The quick control focus is always on the selected track.

Plug-in Window Focus Only

The quick control focus is always on the active plug-in window.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Info Line on page 566

Locking the Quick Control Focus

You can lock the Quick Control Focus to a specific track or plug-in window.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

591
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Manager Window

● To lock the focus to a specific plug-in window, open the corresponding window.
● To lock the focus to a specific track, select the track from the track list, and make sure
that the Quick Control Focus section is shown on the MIDI Remote info line.
2. Activate the lock by clicking Focus Quick Controls Lock State: Unlocked .

RESULT
The Quick Control Focus section of the MIDI Remote info line shows the name of the track or
the plug-in window that has the focus. The corresponding set of quick controls remains active,
even if another window gets the focus.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 590
Quick Control Focus Setup Panel on page 591
VST Instrument Control Panel on page 536
Effect Control Panel on page 367
Quick Control Focus on page 568

MIDI Remote Manager Window

The MIDI Remote Manager window displays information about the connected MIDI controllers
and the installed scripts.

To open the MIDI Remote Manager window, do one of the following:

● In the MIDI Controller section of the MIDI Remote info line, click Open MIDI Remote
Manager.
● Select Studio > MIDI Remote Manager.

MIDI Controllers
The MIDI Controllers tab lists all MIDI controllers, the ones that are currently
connected and active, but also the ones which have been active before. To sort the
list by a specific attribute, click the corresponding column header. Select a controller
from the list to display its information in the bottom part of the window.

592
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Manager Window

Scripts
The Scripts tab lists all scripts that are installed by the names of the corresponding
controllers. To sort the list by a specific attribute, click the corresponding column
header. Select a controller name from the list to display information about the script in
the bottom part of the window.

Add Surface
Opens the Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog, which allows you to add a new MIDI
controller surface for a MIDI controller that has no script.

Import Script
Allows you to import MIDI controller scripts.

Search
The search field allows you to search for specific controllers and scripts on the MIDI
Controllers tab and on the Scripts tab by typing in their name.

Reload Scripts
Allows you to reload the scripts.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Info Line on page 566
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
Deleting Unused MIDI Controller Scripts on page 597
Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog on page 575
MIDI Remote Manager - MIDI Controllers Tab on page 593
MIDI Remote Manager - Scripts Tab on page 595
Importing MIDI Controller Surface Scripts on page 572

MIDI Remote Manager - MIDI Controllers Tab

The MIDI Controllers tab of the MIDI Remote Manager window displays information about the
connected MIDI controllers.

To show information for a specific MIDI controller, select it from the MIDI controllers list in the
upper part of the MIDI Remote Manager window.

593
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Manager Window

Model
The model of the selected MIDI controller.

Vendor
The vendor of the selected MIDI controller.

Status
The status of the selected MIDI controller.

Input Port
Shows the MIDI input port of your MIDI controller.

Output Port
Shows the MIDI output port of your MIDI controller.

Show Script Info

Opens the Scripts tab for the selected MIDI controller.

Remove Controller Surface

Removes the selected controller surface.

594
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Manager Window

NOTE

This is only available for controller surfaces that are currently disconnected.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Manager Window on page 592
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
MIDI Remote Manager - Scripts Tab on page 595
MIDI Controller Settings Pane on page 583

MIDI Remote Manager - Scripts Tab

The Scripts tab of the MIDI Remote Manager window displays script information for the
connected MIDI controllers.

To show script information for a specific MIDI controller, select the MIDI controller from the MIDI
controllers list in the upper part of the MIDI Remote Manager window.

595
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Manager Window

Disable Controller Script/Enable Controller Script

Disables/enables the selected controller script.

Delete Script
Deletes the selected controller script.

Model
The model of the selected MIDI controller.

Vendor
The vendor of the selected MIDI controller.

Script Creator
The script creator of the selected MIDI controller.

Instances
The number of instances of the selected MIDI controller.

Surface Editor Script

If the selected MIDI controller script was created with the MIDI Controller Surface
Editor, this is indicated by a checkmark. Click Edit MIDI Controller Surface to open
the MIDI Controller Surface Editor.

Script File
The file name of the script.

Script Folder
The name of the folder where the script is located.

Script Path
The file path to the script file.

Open Script Folder

Opens the folder where the script is located.

Open Setup Information

Opens setup information for the selected MIDI controller. This is only available for
particular MIDI controllers that require specific settings to communicate with Cubase.

596
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Manager Window

Export Script
Opens a file dialog that allows you to export the selected script.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577
Deleting Unused MIDI Controller Scripts on page 597

Deleting Unused MIDI Controller Scripts

You can delete MIDI controller scripts that you no longer need. However, you can only delete
scripts that you have created by adding your own MIDI controller surfaces.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MIDI Remote info line, click Open MIDI Remote Manager.
2. Open the Scripts tab.
3. From the table, select the script that you want to delete.
4. Click Delete Script.

NOTE

Delete Script is available for user scripts only. To disable public scripts, click Disable
Controller Script instead.

RESULT
The script folder is moved to trash, and the controller surface is removed from the MIDI
controllers overview.

RELATED LINKS
Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
MIDI Remote Manager Window on page 592
MIDI Controller Settings Pane on page 583

Disabling Controller Scripts

You can disable controller scripts. This is useful if you want to use a custom script for a MIDI
controller with a public controller script assigned to it, for example.

PROCEDURE
1. On the MIDI Remote info line, click Open MIDI Remote Manager.
2. Open the Scripts tab.
3. Select the public script that you want to disable, and click Disable Controller Script.
4. Select the custom script that you want to enable instead, and click Enable Controller Script.

RELATED LINKS
Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 571
MIDI Remote Manager Window on page 592
MIDI Controller Settings Pane on page 583

597
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote Script Console

MIDI Remote Script Console

The MIDI Remote Console displays script messages.

Right-click the MIDI Remote info line and activate Scripting Tools. Click Open MIDI Remote
Script Console to open the MIDI Remote Script Console.

Reload Scripts
Allows you to reload the scripts that are displayed in the MIDI Remote Script Console.

Clear All Messages

Clears all messages from the message display.

All Messages
Shows all messages in the message display.

Error Messages
Shows error messages in the message display.

Log Messages
Shows log messages in the message display.

MIDI Controller Scripts

Shows information about the available MIDI controller scripts.

MIDI Input Ports

Shows information about the currently used MIDI input ports.

598
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Remote
MIDI Remote API

MIDI Output Ports

Shows information about the currently used MIDI output ports.

MIDI Remote API

The application programming interface MIDI Remote API allows you to develop a script, that is,
a device driver for dedicated MIDI controllers.

Scripts describe the layout and the order of the controls of a specific MIDI controller. They
include factory mappings to Cubase parameters.

Cubase comes with scripts for a number of MIDI controllers. If you connect one of these
controllers, it is automatically detected and displayed on the MIDI Remote tab.

If no script is available for your controller, we encourage you to write one. Refer to the
description in the MIDI Remote API - Programmer's Guide.

TIP

To access the MIDI Remote API - Programmer's Guide, right-click the info line on the MIDI
Remote tab, activate the Scripting Tools, and click Open MIDI Remote API - Programmer's
Guide.

NOTE

If you do not have any programming skills, you can use the MIDI Controller Surface Editor to
create a surface editor script for your MIDI controller.

RELATED LINKS
Scripting Tools on page 569
MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 577

599
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Remote-Controlling Cubase

You can control Cubase with a connected MIDI device via MIDI.

The supported devices are described in the separate document Remote Control Devices. You
can also use a generic MIDI controller to remote-control Cubase.

NOTE

Most remote control devices are able to control both MIDI and audio channels in Cubase, but
the parameter setup may be different. Audio-specific controls, such as EQ, are disregarded when
controlling MIDI channels.

RELATED LINKS
Generic Remote Page (Legacy) on page 611

Connecting Remote Devices

You can connect your remote device via USB or via MIDI.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● If your remote device provides a USB MIDI port, use a USB cable to connect it to the USB
port of your computer.
● If your remote device provides a MIDI output, use a MIDI cable to connect it to a MIDI
input on your MIDI interface.

NOTE

If the remote device features indicators, motorized faders, or other feedback devices,
connect a MIDI Out on the interface to a MIDI In on the remote device.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Connections on page 23

Removing the Remote Input from All MIDI Inputs

To avoid that you accidentally record data from the remote device when you record MIDI,
remove the remote input from All MIDI Inputs.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Remote Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup.
3. In the table on the right, deactivate In ‘All MIDI Inputs’ for the MIDI input to which you have
connected the MIDI remote device.
The State column reads Inactive.

600
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Setting up Remote Devices

4. Click OK.

RESULT
The remote unit input is removed from the All MIDI Inputs group.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Port Setup Page on page 24

Setting up Remote Devices

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. Click Add Device in the top left corner, and select a remote device from the pop-up menu to
add it to the Remote Devices category.

NOTE

If your device is not available in the pop-up menu, select Generic Remote.

3. In the Remote Devices category, select the device.

Depending on the selected device, either a list of programmable function commands or a
blank panel is shown in the right half of the dialog window.

4. Open the MIDI Input pop-up menu, and select a MIDI input.
5. Optional: Open the MIDI Output pop-up menu, and select a MIDI output.

601
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Setting up Remote Devices

6. Click OK.

RESULT
You can now use the MIDI device to control Cubase functions.
A bright stripe in the Project window and in the MixConsole indicates the channels that are
linked to the remote control device.

You can open a panel for the added device by selecting Studio > More Options.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Depending on your external MIDI control device, you might need to configure the parameters.

Resetting Remote Devices

You can reset remote devices. This is necessary if the communication between Cubase and a
remote device is interrupted or if the handshaking protocol fails to establish the connection.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Remote Devices list, select the remote device.
3. Click Reset in the lower part of the Studio Setup dialog to reset the selected remote device.

NOTE

To reset all devices in the Remote Devices list, click Reset All Devices in the top left of the
dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Studio Setup Dialog on page 13

602
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Remote Devices and Automation

Global Options for Remote Controllers

On the page for your remote device, global functions may be available.

MIDI Input
Allows you to select a MIDI input.

MIDI Output
Allows you to select a MIDI output.

User Commands
Lists the controls or buttons of your remote device.

Smart Switch Delay

Allows you to specify a delay for the smart switch function. Functions that support the
smart switch behavior are activated for as long as the button is pressed.

Enable Auto Select

For touch-sensitive remote control devices, this automatically selects a channel when
you touch a fader. For devices without touch-sensitive faders, the channel is selected as
soon as you move the fader.

Remote Devices and Automation

You can write automation via remote devices.

If your remote device does not have touch-sensitive controls and you want to replace existing
automation data in Write mode, consider the following:

● Make sure that you move only the controller that you want to replace.
● Stop playback to deactivate Write mode.

603
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Assigning Commands to Remote Devices

As a result, all data for the corresponding parameter is replaced, from the position where you
moved the control up to the position where you stop playback.

Assigning Commands to Remote Devices

You can assign any Cubase command to which a key command can be assigned to remote
devices.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Remote Devices list, select your remote device.
In the User Commands section, the controls or buttons of your remote device are listed in
the Button column.

3. Click in the Category column for the control to which you want to assign a Cubase
command, and select the category from the pop-up menu.
4. Click in the Command column, and select the Cubase command from the pop-up menu.
The available items on the pop-up menu depend on the selected category.
5. Click Apply.

RESULT
The selected function is assigned to the button or control on the remote device.

RELATED LINKS
Key Commands on page 853

604
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Remote Control Editor

Remote Control Editor

The Remote Control Editor allows you to define your own mapping of VST plug-in parameters to
the controls of the supported hardware controllers. This is useful if you think that the automatic
mapping of plug-in parameters to remote control devices is not intuitive enough.

● To open the Remote Control Editor, right-click the plug-in panel of the plug-in that you want
to remote-control, and select Remote Control Editor.

1 Inspector
Contains the settings and the parameter assignment for the selected cell. The upper section
contains settings for the text label. The lower section contains settings for the knob and the
switches.
2 Layout Selection
Shows the name of the layout. Click to select a different layout.
3 Set up Cell Layout
Opens the Cell Layout Configuration, where you can specify the number of cells per page
and select the switch layout for the pages. To specify the number of switches for a cell,
activate/deactivate them.
4 Add New Hardware Layout
Adds a new layout for a particular hardware type. To remove a hardware layout, click its
Close button.
5 Layout section
Displays layouts that represent the hardware devices that are used to remote-control the
plug-in parameters. Here, you can change the parameter assignments, the name in the text
label, the cell setup, and the order of cells and pages.
6 Toolbar

605
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Remote Control Editor

Shows tools for setting up the layout.

7 Status Bar
Shows information about an element when you position the mouse pointer over it in the
editor window.

RELATED LINKS
Remote Control Editor Toolbar on page 606

Remote Control Editor Toolbar

Shows tools for setting up the layout.

Remove All Assignments

Removes all parameter assignments.

Get Default Factory Layout/Copy Layout from Other Tab

Reverts to the default settings for the current layout or copies the settings of one
layout page to another.

Activate/Deactivate Learn Mode

Activates/Deactivates Learn mode for the Remote Control Editor.

Activate/Deactivate Assignment Inspection View

Shows the current assignment of all cells in a layout.

Apply Current Layout

Saves the settings. If the hardware supports this function, the changes are immediately
reflected on the hardware controllers.

Control Settings
You can define the control style for switches or knobs to which you have assigned a function. This
includes the LED ring or changing its behavior from continuous value representation to on/off,
for example.

To open the Control Settings panel, right-click the control.

NOTE

Not all hardware devices support all control type settings.

606
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Remote Control Editor

Control Type Settings for Knobs

The following control types are available for knobs:

Standard
A standard knob with an undefined LED style.

Toggle Switch
A knob with 2 states.

LED Ring
An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases clockwise.

LED Ring (counter-clockwise)

An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases counter-clockwise.

Center Width
An LED ring that starts at the top center position. When the settings increase, an LED is
shown, which is growing in both directions.

Center Neutral
A dial that starts at the top center position and can be moved left or right, like a pan
control, for example.

Single Dot
An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases clockwise, with a dot indicating the
current value.

Control Type Settings for Switches

The following options are available for switches:

Momentary
Activates the assigned function for as long as you hold the switch.

Increasing Stepwise
Steps through the available settings until the maximum is reached.

607
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Remote Control Editor

Decreasing Stepwise
Steps through the available settings in reverse order until the minimum is reached.

Increasing Stepwise (cycle)

Steps through the available settings, starting over with the minimum value when the
maximum is reached.

Decreasing Stepwise (cycle)

Steps through the available settings in reverse order, starting over with the maximum
value when the minimum is reached.

Smart Switch
Switches between 2 states every time you press the switch. Enters Momentary mode if
you hold the switch.

Invert Control Value

Inverts the control state/value.

Hide When Inactive

Hides plug-in parameters when they are inactive or disabled.

Assigning Parameters to Controls

PROCEDURE
1. On the Remote Control Editor toolbar, click Activate/Deactivate Learn Mode.
2. Select the control that you want to assign to a plug-in parameter.
3. Do one of the following:
● Click a parameter on the plug-in panel.
● Double-click on a control in the Remote Control Editor, and select a parameter from the
list of available plug-in parameters.
4. Press Esc to end Learn mode.

RESULT
The parameter is assigned to the control.

NOTE

To remove the parameter assignment for a cell, activate Learn mode, select the cell, and press
Delete or Backspace .

RELATED LINKS
Remote Control Editor Toolbar on page 606

Editing the Layout

In the layout section, you can perform a number of editing operations and arrange the pages to
your liking.

● To navigate from cell to cell, use the cursor keys.

608
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Track Quick Controls

● To step through the controls within the cells in Learn mode, press Shift , and use the cursor
keys.
● To step through the different layouts, use Tab and Shift - Tab .

● To copy the settings of one cell to another, select a cell, press Alt , and drag it to another cell.
● To move a cell, drag it to an empty cell.
● To swap the contents of 2 cells, press Ctrl/Cmd , and drag one cell to the other.

NOTE

Drag and drop also works between different pages.

● To add a page to a layout, click Add New Page.

● To remove a page, click Remove Current Page.

● To specify the label for a cell, use the top 3 text fields in the Inspector.
The first text field displays the long name, as it is shown in the cell. In the second field, you
can enter a name that can contain up to 8 characters, and up to 4 characters in the third.

NOTE

This is useful if your hardware devices have value fields that only display a limited number of
characters.

Track Quick Controls

If you have an external remote control device, you can set it up to control up to 8 parameters
of each audio track, MIDI track or instrument track, using the Track Quick Controls feature in
Cubase.

To show the Track Quick Controls for a specific track, select the track from the track list, and, in
the Inspector, open the Quick Controls section.

RELATED LINKS
Track Quick Controls on page 559
Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI Remote on page 569
Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 590

Setting up Track Quick Controls with Remote Controllers (Legacy)

Track Quick Controls become particularly powerful if you use them in conjunction with a remote
controller.

We recommend to set up Track Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant and to
use the Studio Setup dialog only in case you already used Track Quick Controls with an earlier
version of Cubase.

609
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Track Quick Controls

PREREQUISITE
The MIDI output on your remote device is connected to a MIDI input on your MIDI interface.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Remote Devices list, select Track Quick Controls.
3. Open the MIDI Input pop-up menu, and select a MIDI input.
4. Optional: Open the MIDI Output pop-up menu, and select a MIDI output.
5. Click Apply.
6. Activate Learn.
7. In the Control Name column, select QuickControl 1.
8. On your MIDI device, move the control that you want to connect with the first quick control.
9. Select the next slot in the Control Name column, and repeat the previous steps.
10. Click OK.

RESULT
The Track Quick Controls are now connected with control elements on your MIDI device. If you
move a control element, the value of the parameter that is assigned to the corresponding Track
Quick Controls changes accordingly.

NOTE

The remote controller setup for Track Quick Controls is saved globally, that is, it is independent
of any projects.

RELATED LINKS
Generic Remote Page (Legacy) on page 611
Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 590

Activating Pick-up Mode for Hardware Controls (Legacy)

Pick-up Mode allows you to change configured Quick Control parameters without accidentally
modifying the previous values. This is useful if you want the control to pick up the parameter at
the value to which it was last set. If you move a hardware control, the parameter only changes
when the control reaches the previous value.

NOTE

This only applies to hardware controllers whose controls use specific ranges.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Remote Devices list, select Track Quick Controls or VST Quick Controls.
3. Activate Pick-up Mode.
4. Click OK.

610
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
VST Quick Controls

VST Quick Controls

If you have an external remote control device, you can control up to 8 parameters of a VST
instrument via the VST Quick Controls feature in Cubase.

RELATED LINKS
VST Instrument Control Panel on page 536
Effect Control Panel on page 367
Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI Remote on page 569
Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 590
VST Quick Controls in the VSTi Rack (Legacy) on page 611

VST Quick Controls in the VSTi Rack (Legacy)

VST Quick Controls allow you to remote-control a VST instrument from within the VSTi rack.

To show the VST Quick Controls on the VSTi rack, activate Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls.

The following controls are available on each rack:

1 Show/Hide VST Quick Controls

Allows you to show/hide the VST Quick Controls for the instrument.
2 VST Quick Controls
Allow you to remote-control the parameters of the instrument.

NOTE

The number of VST Quick Controls that are displayed depends on the size of the VST
Instruments window.

3 Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls

Allows you to activate the VST Quick Controls to remote-control the instrument.

Generic Remote Page (Legacy)

You can use a generic MIDI controller to remote-control almost any function in Cubase. After
setting up the Generic Remote device, you can control the specified parameters via the MIDI
remote device.

● To open the Generic Remote page, select Studio > Studio Setup, and, from the Remote
Devices list, select Generic Remote.

611
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Generic Remote Page (Legacy)

The following options are available:

MIDI Input
Allows you to select the MIDI input port to which your remote device is connected.

MIDI Output
Allows you to select the MIDI output port to which your remote device is connected.

MIDI Remote Control Configuration

The upper table shows the MIDI remote control configuration of your remote device.

Cubase Control Assignment

The lower table allows you to assign Cubase controls to your remote device.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Control Configuration Section on page 612
Cubase Control Assignment Section on page 614

MIDI Remote Control Configuration Section

The MIDI remote control configuration section is displayed in the upper table of the Generic
Remote setup page.

● To open the Generic Remote settings, select Studio > Studio Setup, and, from the Remote
Devices list, select Generic Remote.

612
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Generic Remote Page (Legacy)

The following options are available in the upper table:

Control Name
Double-click this field to change the name of the control and to enter the name written
on the console, for example. This name change is automatically reflected in the lower
table.

MIDI Status
Allows you to specify the type of MIDI message sent by the control.

MIDI Channel
Allows you to select the MIDI channel on which the controller is transmitted.

Address
Allows you to specify the continuous controller number, the pitch of a note, or the
address of an NRPN/RPN continuous controller.

Max. Value
Allows you to specify the maximum value that the control transmits. This value is used
by the program to scale the value range of the MIDI controller to the value range of the
program parameter.

Flags
Allows you to select one of the following flags:
● Receive
Activate this if the MIDI message should be processed on reception.
● Transmit
Activate this if a MIDI message should be transmitted when the corresponding
value in the program changes.
● Relative
Activate this if the control is an endless rotary encoder, which reports the number
of turns instead of an absolute value.
● Pick-up
Activate this if you want the control to pick up the parameter at the value to which
it was last set.

The buttons and the options to the right of the table have the following functions:

Import
Allows you to import saved remote setup files.

Export
Allows you to export the current setup with the file extension .xml.

Add
Adds controls to the bottom of the table.

613
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Generic Remote Page (Legacy)

Delete
Deletes the selected control from the table.

Learn
Allows you to assign MIDI messages by learning.

Cubase Control Assignment Section

You can specify the Cubase control assignment section in the lower table of the Generic Remote
setup page. Each row in the table is assigned to the controller in the corresponding row of the
MIDI remote-control configuration table.

● To open the Generic Remote settings, select Studio > Studio Setup, and, from the Remote
Devices list, select Generic Remote.

The following options are available:

Control Name
Reflects the control name selected in the upper table.

Device
Allows you to select the Cubase device that you want to control.

Channel/Category
Allows you to select the channel or the command category that you want to control.

Value/Action
Allows you to select the parameter of the channel that you want to control. If the
Command device is selected, this is where you specify the Action of the category.

Flags
Allows you to select one of the following flags:
● Push Button
Activate this if the parameter should only be changed if the received MIDI message
shows a value unequal to 0.
● Toggle
Activate this if the parameter value should be switched between minimum and
maximum value, each time a MIDI message is received.
You can combine Push Button and Toggle for remote controls which do not latch
the state of a button. This is useful to control the mute status with a device on
which pressing the mute button turns it on, and releasing the mute button turns it
off.
● Not Automated
Activate this if you do not want the parameter value to be automated.

The buttons to the right of the table have the following functions:

614
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Generic Remote Page (Legacy)

Bank pop-up menu

Allows you to switch banks. This is necessary if your MIDI control device has 16 volume
faders and you are using 32 MixConsole channels in Cubase, for example.

Rename
Allows you to rename the selected bank.

Add
Adds banks to the pop-up menu.

Delete
Deletes the selected bank from the pop-up menu.

RELATED LINKS
Assignable Devices and Functions on page 615

Assignable Devices and Functions

The Device column in the Cubase control assignment section lists the Cubase devices that you
can control.

Command
Allows you to assign Cubase commands to which a key command can be assigned. If
you select Add Track in the Channel/Category column and Audio in the Value/Action
column, you can add audio tracks via your MIDI device, for example.

VST Quick Controls Manager

Allows you to assign VST Quick Controls. If you select Device in the Channel/
Category column and one of the Quick Control options in the Value/Action column,
you can control the VST quick control via your MIDI device.

Mixer
Allows you to control MixConsole functions. If you select one of the available channels
or Selected in the Channel/Category column and one of the options in the Value/
Action column, you can control the function of that specific channel or of the selected
channel via your MIDI device.

Transport
Allows you to control the transport functions. If you select Device in the Channel/
Category column and one of the options in the Value/Action column, you can control
the function via your MIDI device.

Metronome
Allows you to control metronome functions. If you select Device in the Channel/
Category column and one of the options in the Value/Action column, you can control
the function via your MIDI device.

VST Mixer
Allows you to control MixConsole functions. If you select one of the available channels
or Selected in the Channel/Category column and one of the options in the Value/
Action column, you can control the function of that specific channel or of the selected
channel via your MIDI device.

NOTE

You can also control all VST Instruments that you added in the Project window and that are
listed in the Device column.

615
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Remote-Controlling Cubase
Generic Remote Page (Legacy)

Assigning MIDI Messages in Learn Mode

You can assign MIDI messages in Learn mode.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Remote Devices list, select Generic Remote.
3. Activate Learn.
4. Select the control in the upper table, and move the corresponding control on your MIDI
device.

RESULT
The values for MIDI Status, MIDI Channel, and Address are automatically set to those of the
moved control.

NOTE

If you use the Learn function for a control that sends a program change value, Prog. Change
Trigger is automatically selected in the MIDI Status pop-up menu. This allows you to use the
different values of a program change parameter to control different parameters in Cubase.

If this does not produce the expected results, try using the Prog. Change value instead.

616
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 MIDI Realtime Parameters

MIDI realtime means that you can change or transform MIDI events on MIDI or instrument
tracks before they are sent to the MIDI outputs. This allows you to change the way MIDI data is
played back.

The actual MIDI events on the track are not affected. Therefore, MIDI realtime changes are not
reflected in any MIDI editor.

The following functions allow you to change MIDI events in real time:

● MIDI track parameters

● MIDI modifiers
● Transpose and Velocity on the info line

NOTE

To convert the track settings to real MIDI events, select MIDI > Freeze MIDI Modifiers or MIDI >
Merge MIDI in Loop.

RELATED LINKS
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part on page 632

MIDI Track Parameters

The MIDI track parameters are located in the topmost Inspector section and in the Routing
section for MIDI and instrument tracks.

These settings either affect the basic functionality of the track (mute, solo, enable record, etc.) or
send out additional MIDI data to the connected devices (program change, volume, etc.).

The following track parameters allow you to change MIDI events in real time:

● MIDI Volume
● MIDI Pan
● Track Delay

RELATED LINKS
Basics Section for MIDI Tracks on page 123

MIDI Modifiers
MIDI modifiers allow you to modify MIDI events during playback.

You can use them for the following purposes:

● To modify already existing MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks.

● To modify MIDI events that you play live.

617
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Realtime Parameters
MIDI Modifiers

NOTE

When playing live, select and record-enable the track, and activate MIDI Thru Active in the
Preferences dialog (MIDI page).

MIDI Modifiers Section

● To open the MIDI Modifiers section, select a MIDI track, and, in the Inspector, click MIDI
Modifiers.

NOTE

To compare the result of your modifier settings with the unprocessed MIDI, you can use the
bypass button in the MIDI modifiers section. If this button is activated, the MIDI modifiers
settings are temporarily disabled.

Transpose
Allows you to transpose all notes on the track in semitones. Extreme transpositions can
produce rather strange and unwanted results.

Velocity Shift
Allows you to add a velocity value to all notes on the track. Positive values increase the
velocity while negative values lower the velocity.

Velocity Compression
Allows you to add a multiplier to the velocity of all notes on the track. The value
is set with a numerator and a denominator. This parameter also affects the velocity
differences between the notes, thus compressing or expanding the velocity scale.
Values smaller than 1/1 compress the velocity range. Values greater than 1/1 together
with negative Velocity Shift values expand the velocity range.

IMPORTANT

The maximum velocity is 127, no matter how much you try to expand.

NOTE

Combine this setting with the Velocity Shift parameter.

618
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Realtime Parameters
MIDI Modifiers

Length Compression
Allows you to add a multiplier to the length of all notes on the track. The value is set
with a numerator and a denominator.

Random 1/Random 2
Allows you to introduce random variations to various properties of MIDI notes.

Range 1/Range 2
Allows you to specify a pitch or velocity range and to either force all notes to fit within
this range or to exclude all notes outside this range from playback.

Hermode Tuning
Activate Apply Tuning to apply Hermode tuning to the notes played on this track.
Activate Use for Analysis to use the notes you played on this track to calculate
retuning.

RELATED LINKS
Musical Scale Setup Dialog on page 737

Setting up Random Variations

You can set up random variations for position, pitch, velocity, and length of MIDI events using
one or two random generators.

PROCEDURE
1. Select a MIDI or instrument track.
2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Modifiers section.
3. Open one of the Random sections and in the Random Target pop-up menu, select the note
property you want to randomize.
4. Specify the limits of the randomization in the value fields.
The values vary between the minimum and maximum value. You cannot set the minimum
value higher than the maximum value.
5. Optional: Repeat for other random values.
6. Play back the track to listen to the randomized events.

RESULT
The corresponding properties are randomized.

NOTE

Depending on the track content, certain changes might not be immediately noticeable or might
have no effect at all.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Deactivate the random function by opening the Random Target pop-up menu and selecting Off.

619
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Realtime Parameters
MIDI Modifiers

Setting up Ranges
You can filter out pitches or velocities that do not match a specified range, or you can force them
to fit a specified range.

PROCEDURE
1. Select a MIDI or instrument track.
2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Modifiers section.
3. Open one of the Range sections, and in the Range Target pop-up menu and select a mode.
4. Set the minimum and maximum values with the two fields to the right.

NOTE

You can make independent settings for the two Range sections.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To deactivate the function, open the Range Target pop-up menu, and select Off.

Range Modes
The Range Target pop-up menu offers different range modes to choose from. Values are
displayed as numbers, from 0 to 127, for the velocity modes, and as note numbers, from C-2
to G8, for the pitch modes.

Vel. Limit
Allows you to force all velocity values to fit within the range that you specified by
setting min and max values. Values below the lower limit are set to the min value,
velocity values above the higher setting are set to the max value.

Vel. Filter
Allows you to filter out notes with velocity values below the min value or above the
max value.

Note Limit
Allows you to transpose all notes below the min value upwards and all notes above the
max value downwards in octave steps.

Note Filter
Allows you to filter out notes that are lower than the min value or higher than the max
value.

Applying Hermode Tuning

Hermode tuning changes the tuning of the notes that you play. It creates clear frequencies for
every fifth and third interval, for example. Retuning only affects individual notes and maintains
the pitch relationship between keys and notes. Retuning is a continuous process and takes the
musical context into account.

PROCEDURE
1. Select a MIDI or instrument track.
2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Modifiers section.
3. Open the Hermode Tuning section and activate Apply Tuning.
4. Activate Use for Analysis to use the notes you play to calculate retuning.

620
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Realtime Parameters
MIDI Modifiers

NOTE

If you use tracks with acoustic piano, activate Use for Analysis, and deactivate Apply
Tuning. This excludes the piano from being tuned, as this would sound unnatural.

5. Select Project > Project Setup to open the Project Setup dialog.
6. Open the HMT Type pop-up menu, and select one of the options.
7. Play some notes.
It may take a moment until all notes are recalculated and you can listen to the results of the
retuning.

NOTE

Notes that are produced by MIDI plug-ins are not taken into account.

RESULT
If you use a VST 3 instrument that supports Micro Tuning and Note Expression, notes are retuned
dynamically while you play them. With VST instruments that support Note Expression, this also
works in MIDI Thru mode.
If you use a track with a loaded VST 2 instrument, the notes you play are retuned on every
keystroke.

RELATED LINKS
Hermode Tuning on page 621

Hermode Tuning
You can select different Hermode tuning types.

● To select a Hermode tuning type, select Project > Project Setup, and select an option from
the HMT Type pop-up menu.

The following options are available:

None
No tuning is applied.

Reference (pure 3/5)

Tunes pure thirds and fifths.

Classic (pure 3/5 equalized)

Tunes pure thirds and fifths. In conflict situations, a slight equalization is applied. This
tuning type is suitable for all kinds of music.

Pop Jazz (3/5/7)

Tunes pure thirds and fifths, as well as natural sevenths. This tuning type should not be
applied to polyphonic music. Try this with pop or jazz.

621
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Realtime Parameters
Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line

Baroque (3/5 adaptive)

Tunes pure thirds and fifths. The degree of purity changes according to the sequence
of harmonies. This tuning type is suitable for church organ and polyphonic music.

Freezing MIDI Modifiers

You can apply all filter settings permanently to the selected track. The settings are applied to the
events on the track, and all modifiers are set to zero.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI track.
2. Select MIDI > Freeze MIDI Modifiers.

RESULT
The following settings are frozen:
● Several settings in the top section of the Inspector, such as Track Delay.
● The settings in the Routing section, such as Program Selector, and Bank Selector.
● The settings in the MIDI Modifiers section, such as Transpose, Vel. Shift, Vel. Comp., and
Len. Comp..
● The info line settings Transpose and Velocity.

RELATED LINKS
Basics Section for MIDI Tracks on page 123

Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line

You can edit the transposition and the velocity for selected MIDI events and parts on the Project
window info line. This only affects the notes in playback.

● Use the Transpose field to transpose the selected parts in semitone steps.
The value is added to the transposition set for the entire track.
● Use the Velocity field to offset the velocity for the selected parts.
The value is added to the velocities of the notes in the parts.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Info Line on page 684
Drum Editor Info Line on page 713

622
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Using MIDI Devices

The MIDI Device Manager allows you to work with MIDI devices, that is, representations of
external MIDI hardware.

You can install preset MIDI devices or define new ones. This is useful for global control and patch
selection.

Program Change Messages and Bank Select Messages

To select a patch, that is, a sound in your MIDI device, you must send a program change
message to that device.

Program Change Messages

You can record program change messages or enter them in a MIDI part. You can open the
Routing section of the Inspector for the MIDI track and select a value in the Program Selector
field.

Program change messages allow you to choose from 128 different patches in your MIDI device.

Bank Select Messages

Many MIDI instruments, however, contain a larger number of patch locations. To make these
available from within Cubase, you must send bank select messages.

Bank select messages allow you to choose from 128 different programs in your MIDI device.

If your device supports MIDI bank select, you can open the Routing section of the Inspector
for the MIDI track and choose a value in the Bank Selector field to select a bank. Then use the
Program Selector field to select a program in this bank.

Unfortunately, different instrument manufacturers use different schemes for how bank select
messages are constructed. This can lead to confusion and make it hard to select the correct
sound. What is more, selecting patches by numbers seems unnecessarily cumbersome, in view of
the fact that most state-of-the-art instruments use names for their patches.

The MIDI Device Manager allows you to specify which MIDI devices you are using, and to select
to which device each MIDI track is routed. This enables you to select patches by name via the
track list or the Routing section of the Inspector.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Device Manager on page 624

623
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using MIDI Devices
Patch Banks

Patch Banks
The Patch Banks list can have two or more main banks, depending on the selected device.

The reason for this is that different types of patches are handled differently by the instruments.
In general, patches are regular programs that you play one at a time. Performances, however,
may be combinations of programs, which can be split across the keyboard, layered, or used for
multitimbral playback, etc.

For devices with several banks you can select Bank Assignment to specify which bank a specific
MIDI channel should use.

The Bank Assignment affects which bank is displayed when you select programs by name for
the device in the track list or Inspector.

Many instruments use MIDI channel 10 as the exclusive drum channel, for example. If this is the
case, select the Drums or the Rhythm Set or the Percussion bank for channel 10 from the list.
This allows you to choose from different drum kits in the track list or in the Inspector.

MIDI Device Manager

The MIDI Device Manager allows you to install preset MIDI devices or to define new ones.

● To open the MIDI Device Manager, select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager.

624
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager

Installed Devices list

Lists the connected MIDI devices and the imported device setups.

Install Device
Allows you to install a preset device. These presets are simple patch name scripts that
do not include any device mapping of parameters and controls and no graphic panels.
For more information about patch name scripts, see the separate document MIDI
Devices.

Remove Device
Removes the selected device.

Export Setup
Exports the MIDI device setup as an XML file.

Import Setup
Allows you to import an XML file of a MIDI device setup. Device setups can include
device mapping, and/or patch information. Device setups are also added to the list of
installed devices when imported.

Output
Allows you to select a MIDI output for the selected device.

Enable Edit
Activate this to enable the editing of the selected device.

625
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager

Commands
Allows you to edit the selected device. The patch structure for the selected device is
shown to the left.

MIDI Messages
Shows which MIDI messages are sent out to select the patch that is highlighted in the
list to the left.

Commands for Patches

In the MIDI Device Manager, patches can be structured in banks, folders, and presets.

NOTE

Activate Enable Edit to use the commands pop-up menu for the selected device.

The commands pop-up menu contains the following items:

Create Bank
Creates a new bank in the Patch Banks list. You can rename this by clicking on it and
typing a new name.

If you specify more than one bank, a Bank Assignment button is added next to the
Patch Banks button.

New Folder
Creates a new subfolder in the selected bank or folder. This can correspond to a group
of patches in the MIDI device, or just be a way for you to categorize sounds.

New Preset
Adds a new preset in the selected bank or folder. If you select it, the corresponding
MIDI events are shown to the right. The default program change value for a new preset
is 0, but you can adjust the number in the Value column.

You can move presets among banks and folders via drag and drop.

626
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager

Add Multiple Presets

Allows you to set up a range of presets and to add them to the selected bank or folder.

NOTE

You can remove banks, folders, and presets by selecting them and pressing Backspace .

IMPORTANT

For details on which MIDI events are used for selecting patches in the MIDI device, consult its
documentation.

RELATED LINKS
Add Preset Functions on page 627
Patch Banks on page 624

Add Preset Functions

If you add or select a preset for the selected bank or folder, further functions become available
to the right. If you add multiple presets, the Add Multiple Presets dialog opens with additional
functions.

The following columns are available:

MIDI Message Name

The name of the MIDI message.
● To change an event, click it, and select another option from the pop-up menu.
● To add another event, click below the last event, and select an option from the
pop-up menu.
● To remove an event, select it, and press Delete or Backspace .

IMPORTANT

If you insert a Bank Select event, keep in mind that, depending on your device, you
must choose CC: BankSelect MSB, Bank Select 14 Bit, Bank Select 14 Bit MSB-LSB
Swapped or some other option.

Value
The value of the event.

MIDI Message Bytes

The message bytes of the event.

Valid Range
The valid range of the event.

Default Name
You can specify a default name for multiple presets. The added events assume this
name, followed by a number.

627
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager

Installing Preset MIDI Devices

You can install preset MIDI devices, that is, patch name scripts that do not include device
mapping.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager.
2. Click Install Device.
3. In the Add MIDI Device dialog, do one of the following:

● Select the script of the device from the list.

● Select GM Device or XG Device if your device is not listed but compatible with these
standards, and type in the name of your instrument in the next dialog.
4. Click OK.
5. Select the device from the Installed Devices list, and open the Output pop-up menu.
6. Select the MIDI output that the device is connected to.

RESULT
The structure of the patch name script is shown. It usually has one or several layers of banks or
groups with patches.

Selecting Patches for Installed Devices

If you install a device and you select it from the Output Routing pop-up menu for the MIDI track,
you can select patches by name.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI track that you want to associate to the installed device.
2. In the Routing section of the Inspector, select the installed device.
This routes the MIDI track to the MIDI output, as specified for the device in the MIDI Device
Manager. The Bank Selector and the Program Selector fields are replaced by a single
Program Selector field that reads Off.
3. Open the Program Selector.
A program list, similar to the one in the MIDI Device Manager, is shown.

628
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager

4. Select an entry from the list.

RESULT
The corresponding MIDI message is sent to the device.

Renaming Patches in Devices

If you have replaced some of the factory presets with your own patches, you can modify the
device so that the patch name list matches the actual device.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager.
2. Select the device from the Installed Devices list.
Make sure that the Patch Banks tab is selected.
3. Activate Enable Edit.
4. In the Patch Banks list, locate the patch you want to rename, and click the name.
5. Type in the new name, and press Return .

RESULT
The patch is renamed.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To avoid modifying the device by accident, deactivate Enable Edit.

Defining New MIDI Devices

You can define new MIDI devices.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager.
2. Click Install Device.
3. In the Add MIDI Device dialog, select Define New.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Create New MIDI Device dialog, enter the name of the device and activate the MIDI
channels that you would like to use.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the device in the Installed Devices list.

629
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager

8. Activate Enable Edit and use the commands pop-up menu to organize the patch structure of
the new device.

630
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 MIDI Functions

MIDI functions allow you to permanently edit MIDI events or MIDI parts in the Project window or
from within a MIDI editor.

Which events are affected when you use a MIDI function depends on the function, the active
window, and the current selection:

● In the Project window, the MIDI functions apply to all selected parts, affecting all events of
the relevant types in them.
● In the MIDI editors, MIDI functions apply to all selected events. If no events are selected, all
events in the edited parts are affected.

NOTE

Some MIDI functions only apply to MIDI events of a certain type. For example, Delete
Controllers only applies to MIDI controller events.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Realtime Parameters on page 617

Transpose Setup Dialog

The Transpose Setup dialog contains settings for transposing the selected events.

● To open the Transpose Setup dialog, select the MIDI notes that you want to transpose, and
select MIDI > Transpose Setup.

The following settings are available:

Transpose by Semitones
Sets the amount of transposition.

Scale Correction
Transposes the selected notes to the closest note of a specific scale type. This allows
you to change the key and the tonality.

631
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part

● Select a root note and a scale type for the current scale in the Current Scale
pop-up menus.
● Select a root note and a scale type for the new scale in the New Scale pop-up
menus.

NOTE

If the new root note differs from the current root note, this leads to an entirely
different key.

Keep Notes in Range

Limits the transposition of notes to the note values that you specify with the Highest
Note and Lowest Note settings.

NOTE

Notes that would be outside the range after transposition are shifted to another
octave, keeping the correct transposed pitch, if possible. If the range between the
upper and lower limit is very narrow, the note is transposed as far as possible, that is,
to notes specified with the Highest Note and Lowest Note values. If you set Highest
Note and Lowest Note to the same value, all notes are transposed to this pitch.

RELATED LINKS
Musical Scale Setup Dialog on page 737

Merging MIDI Events into a New Part

You can merge all MIDI events into a new part, apply MIDI modifiers, and generate a new part.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:
● Mute the tracks or parts that you do not want to include in the merge.
● Solo the track that contains the events that you want to include in the merge.
2. Set up the left and right locators to encompass the area that you want to merge.

NOTE

Only events starting within this area are included.

3. Optional: Select a track for the new part.

If you do not select a track, a new MIDI track is created. If several MIDI tracks are selected,
the new part is inserted on the first selected track.
4. Select MIDI > Merge MIDI in Loop.
5. In the MIDI Merge Options dialog, make your changes.
6. Click OK.

RESULT
A new part is created between the locators on the destination track, containing the processed
MIDI events.

632
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Merge Options Dialog on page 633
Freezing MIDI Modifiers on page 622

MIDI Merge Options Dialog

● To open the MIDI Merge Options dialog, select a MIDI part, and select MIDI > Merge MIDI
in Loop.

The following options are available:

Include Inserts
Applies MIDI modifiers.

Erase Destination
Deletes MIDI data between the left and right locators on the destination track.

Include Chase
Includes events placed outside the selected part, but relating to it in the processing, for
example, to a program change right before the left locator.

Convert VST 3
Converts all VST 3 data within the selected area to MIDI data.

RELATED LINKS
Chase on page 222

Applying Effects to a Single Part

You can apply MIDI modifiers to a single part.

PROCEDURE
1. Set up your MIDI modifiers for the part.
2. Set the locators to encompass the part.
3. From the track list, select the track with the part.
4. Select MIDI > Merge MIDI in Loop.
5. In the MIDI Merge Options dialog, activate Erase Destination.
6. Click OK.

RESULT
A new part is created on the same track, containing the processed events. The original part is
deleted.

633
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Dissolve Part Dialog

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Turn off or reset all MIDI modifiers, so that the track plays back as before.

Dissolve Part Dialog

You can separate MIDI events in a part according to channels or pitches and dissolve the part to
different tracks or lanes.

● To open the Dissolve Part dialog, select the MIDI part you want to dissolve, and select
MIDI > Dissolve Part.

The following settings are available:

Separate Channels
Separates MIDI events according to their channel. This is useful for MIDI parts on MIDI
channel Any that contain events on different MIDI channels.

Separate Pitches
Separates MIDI events according to their pitch. This is useful for drum and percussion
tracks, where different pitches usually correspond to separate drum sounds.

Dissolve to Lanes
Dissolves the part to lanes.

Optimized Display
Automatically removes silent areas of the resulting parts.

NOTE

This option is not available when Dissolve to Lanes is activated.

Dissolving Parts into Separate Channels

You can dissolve MIDI parts that contain events on different MIDI channels, and you can
distribute the events into new parts on new tracks, one for each MIDI channel found.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the parts that contain MIDI events on different channels.
2. Select MIDI > Dissolve Part.
3. Activate Separate Channels.
4. Click Process.

634
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops

RESULT
For each MIDI channel used in the selected parts, a new MIDI track is created and set to
the corresponding MIDI channel. Each event is copied into the part on the track with the
corresponding MIDI channel, and the original parts are muted.

MIDI Channel Setting

Setting a track to MIDI channel Any causes each MIDI event to play back on its original MIDI
channel, rather than on a channel set for the whole track.

There are two situations when Any channel tracks are useful:

● You record several MIDI channels at the same time.

You may, for example, have a MIDI keyboard with several keyboard zones, where each zone
sends MIDI on a separate channel. Setting the channel to Any allows you to play back the
recording with different sounds for each zone (since the different MIDI notes play back on
separate MIDI channels).
● You have imported a MIDI file of Type 0.
MIDI files of Type 0 contain only one track, with notes on up to 16 different MIDI channels.
If you were to set this track to a specific MIDI channel, all notes in the MIDI file would be
played back with the same sound. Setting the track to Any causes the imported file to play
back as intended.

Dissolving Parts into Separate Pitches

You can dissolve MIDI parts that contain events of different pitches and distribute the events into
new parts on new tracks, one for each MIDI pitch found. This is useful if different pitches are
used for separating different sounds, such as MIDI drum tracks or sampler sound effect channel
tracks. By dissolving such parts, you can work with each sound individually, on a separate track.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the parts that contain MIDI events of different pitches.
2. Select MIDI > Dissolve Part.
3. Activate Separate Pitches.
4. Click Process.

RESULT
For each MIDI pitch used in the selected parts, a new MIDI track is created. Each event is copied
into the part on the track for the corresponding pitch, and the original parts are muted.

Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops

You can repeat the MIDI events inside an independent track loop to fill up a MIDI part. This is
useful if you want to convert the events of an independent track loop to actual MIDI events.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up an independent track loop, and the Key Editor is open. The part ends after the
end of the independent track loop.

PROCEDURE
● Select MIDI > Repeat Loop.

635
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Extending MIDI Notes

RESULT
The events of the independent track loop are repeated, up to the end of the part. Events that are
located to the right of the independent track loop are replaced.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up the Independent Track Loop on page 437

Extending MIDI Notes

You can extend MIDI notes so that they reach the next notes.

PREREQUISITE
A MIDI part with some note events is open in the Key Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the note events that you want to extend to the next notes.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Legato.

RESULT
The selected note events are extended to the start of the next notes.

NOTE

To specify a gap or overlap for this, adjust the Legato Overlap setting in the Preferences dialog
(Editing—MIDI page).

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Inspector on page 685

Fixing MIDI Note Lengths

You can set the length of selected MIDI notes to the Length Quantize value.

PREREQUISITE
A MIDI part with some note events is open in the Key Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Length Quantize pop-up menu, and select the desired
note length.
2. Select the note events that you want to fix.
3. Select MIDI > Functions > Fixed Lengths.

RESULT
The selected note events are set to the specified Length Quantize value.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677

636
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Fixing MIDI Note Velocities

Fixing MIDI Note Velocities

You can set the velocity of selected MIDI notes to the Note Insert Velocity value.

PREREQUISITE
A MIDI part with some note events is open in the Key Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Set up Insert Velocities pop-up menu, and select a
velocity value.
2. Select the note events that you want to fix.
3. Select MIDI > Functions > Fixed Velocity.

RESULT
The selected note events are set to the specified Note Insert Velocity value.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677

MIDI Insert Velocities Dialog

● To access the MIDI Insert Velocities dialog, open the Set up Insert Velocities pop-up menu
in the Key Editor toolbar, and select Setup.

Level fields
Allow you to set the velocity values that are shown in the Set up Insert Velocities
pop-up menu.

Presets
Allows you to save velocity values as presets.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677
Fixing MIDI Note Velocities on page 637
Velocity Dialog on page 639

637
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths

Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths

You can render sustain pedal data to note lengths. This is useful if you recorded MIDI data with a
MIDI keyboard and a sustain pedal and you want to extend the actual MIDI notes for as long as
you hold the pedal, in order to edit the notes later.

PREREQUISITE
You recorded MIDI using a MIDI keyboard and a sustain pedal. The MIDI part is open in the Key
Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the note events.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Pedals to Note Length.

RESULT
The selected notes are lengthened to match the off position of the sustain pedal, and the sustain
controller on/off events are removed.

Deleting Overlaps
You can delete overlaps of notes that have the same or different pitches. This is useful if your
MIDI instruments cannot handle overlapping events.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the note events.
2. Do one of the following:
● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (mono).
● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (poly).

RESULT
The overlapping MIDI notes are shortened, so that no note begins before another ends.

Editing Velocity
You can manipulate the velocity of notes.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the note events.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Velocity.
3. Open the Type pop-up menu, and select an option.
4. Depending on the Type, enter a Ratio, an Amount, or an Upper and Lower value.
5. Click OK.

RESULT
The note velocities are changed according to your settings.

638
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Editing Velocity

RELATED LINKS
Velocity Dialog on page 639

Velocity Dialog
● To open the Velocity dialog, select a MIDI part, and select MIDI > Functions > Velocity.

Add/Subtract
Adds the specified value to the velocity value. You can enter positive or negative values.

Compress/Expand
Compresses or expands the dynamic range of MIDI notes by the specified value. You
can enter values from 0 to 300%. A factor higher than 1 (exceeding 100%) expands the
differences between velocity values, while using a factor lower than 1 (below 100%)
compresses them.
● To compress the dynamic range, use ratio values below 100%.
After processing the compression, you can add a velocity amount to maintain the
average velocity level.
● To expand the dynamic range, use ratio values above 100%.
Prior to the expansion, you can adjust the velocity to the middle of the range.

Limit
Limits the velocity values so that they stay between the Low and the High values.

Fixed To
Fixes the velocity value to the specified value.

Variance
Sets the velocities to a value between the current velocity value and a lower value. You
can specify the percentage of variance.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677
MIDI Insert Velocities Dialog on page 637
Fixing MIDI Note Velocities on page 637

639
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Deleting Double Notes

Deleting Double Notes

You can delete double notes from selected MIDI parts, provided that they are of the same
pitch and on the exactly the same position as their counterpart. Double notes can occur when
recording in cycle mode after quantizing, for example.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI part that contains the double notes.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Doubles.

RESULT
The double notes are automatically deleted.

Deleting Controller Data

You can delete controller data from selected MIDI parts.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI parts that contain the controller data.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Controllers.

RESULT
The controller data is automatically deleted.

Deleting Continuous Controller Data

You can delete continuous controller data from selected MIDI parts.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI parts that contain the controller data.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Continuous Controllers.

RESULT
The continuous controller data is automatically deleted. However, On/Off events, such as sustain
pedal events, are kept.

Restricting Polyphonic Voices

You can restrict polyphonic voices in selected MIDI notes or parts. This is useful if you have an
instrument with limited polyphony and want to make sure that all notes are played.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI notes or parts that contain the voices.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Restrict Polyphony.
3. Specify how many voices you want to use.
4. Click OK.

640
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Thinning Out Controller Data

RESULT
The notes are trimmed as required, so that they end before the next note starts.

Thinning Out Controller Data

You can thin out controller data in selected MIDI parts. Use this to ease the load on your external
MIDI devices, in case you have recorded very dense controller curves.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI parts that contain the controllers that you want to thin out.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Thin Out Data.

RESULT
The controller data is thinned out.

Extracting MIDI Automation

You can convert continuous controllers of your recorded MIDI parts into MIDI track automation
data, so that you can edit them in the Project window.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI part that contains the continuous controller data.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Extract MIDI Automation.
3. Right-click the MIDI or instrument track in the Project window, and select Show Used
Automation (Selected Tracks).
This shows the MIDI controller data on the automation track.

RESULT
In the Project window, an automation track is created for each of the continuous controllers in
the MIDI part.
In the MIDI editors, the controller data is removed from the controller lane.

NOTE

This only works for continuous controllers. Data such as aftertouch, pitchbend, or SysEx cannot
be converted to MIDI track automation data.

Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events

You can invert the order of selected events or of all events in selected parts rhythmically. This
causes the MIDI to play backwards. However, this is different from reversing an audio recording.
The individual MIDI notes still play as usual, but the playback order changes.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI events or the MIDI part.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Reverse.

641
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Functions
Inverting the Order of Selected MIDI Events

RESULT
The playback order of the events is reversed, while the individual notes still play as usual in the
MIDI instrument. Technically, this function reverses the note-on message of a note within a part
or selection.

Inverting the Order of Selected MIDI Events

This function inverts the order of the selected events or of all events in the selected parts,
graphically. Technically, this function turns a note-on message into a note-off message and vice
versa, which can lead to rhythmic inaccuracies, if the note-off position of a note has not been
quantized.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI events or the MIDI part.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Mirror.

RESULT
The order of the events is inverted, while the MIDI instrument still plays the individual notes
as usual. Technically, this function turns a note-on message into a note-off message and vice
versa, which can lead to rhythmic inaccuracies, if the note-off position of a note has not been
quantized.

642
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 MIDI Editors

There are several ways to edit MIDI in Cubase. You can use the tools and functions in the Project
window for large-scale editing or the functions on the MIDI menu to process MIDI parts in
various ways. To manually edit your MIDI data on a graphical interface, you can use the MIDI
editors.

● The Key Editor presents notes graphically, in a piano roll-style grid. The Key Editor also
allows for detailed editing of non-note events, such as MIDI controllers.
● The Score Editor displays MIDI notes as a musical score and provides advanced tools and
functions for notation, layout, and printing.

NOTE

The Score Editor is described in the separate document Score Editor.

● The Drum Editor is similar to the Key Editor, but each key corresponds to a separate drum
sound.
You can use the Drum Editor to edit drum or percussion parts.
● The Score Editor shows MIDI notes as a musical score and offers basic score editing and
printing.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor on page 675
Drum Editor on page 704

Common MIDI Editor Functions

You can use the tools and functions of the MIDI editors to process MIDI parts in various ways.

Changing the Ruler Time Format

You can change the time format for the ruler. By default, the ruler shows the timeline in the time
format that is selected on the Transport panel.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● Click the arrow button to the right of the ruler, and select an option from the pop-up
menu.
● Right-click the ruler, and select an option from the pop-up menu.

RELATED LINKS
Ruler Time Format Menu on page 45

643
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

Zooming in MIDI Editors

The MIDI editors provide several zooming options:

● The zoom sliders.

● The Zoom tool.

● The Zoom submenu in the Edit menu.

NOTE

To use the Zoom tool for horizontal and vertical zooming, deactivate Zoom Tool Standard Mode:
Horizontal Zooming Only in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Zoom page).

RELATED LINKS
Editing - Zoom on page 890

Using Cut and Paste

You can use the Cut, Copy, and Paste options from the Edit menu to move or copy material
within a part or between different parts.

● To insert note events at the project cursor position without affecting existing notes, select
Edit > Paste.
● To insert note events at the project cursor position, move and, if necessary, split the existing
note events to make room for the pasted notes. Select Edit > Range > Paste Time.

Handling Note Events

Event Colors Menu

You can select different color schemes for the note events in the MIDI editors.

● To open the Event Colors pop-up menu, click Event Colors on the toolbar.

The following options are available:

Velocity
The note events get different colors depending on their velocity values.

Pitch
The note events get different colors depending on their pitch.

Channel
The note events get different colors depending on their MIDI channel value.

644
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

Part
The note events get the same color as their corresponding part in the Project window.
Use this option if you are working with 2 or more tracks in an editor, to see which note
events belong to which track.

Grid Match
The note events get different colors depending on their time position. For example,
this mode enables you to see if the notes of a chord start at the exact same beat.

Voice
The note events get different colors depending on their voice (soprano, alto, tenor,
etc.).

Scale/Chords
The note events get different colors depending on whether they match the current
chord, scale, or both.

For all of the options except Part and Sound Slot, the pop-up menu also contains a Setup option.
This option opens a dialog in which you can specify the colors that are associated with velocities,
pitches, or channels.

RELATED LINKS
Selecting Note Events on page 647
Color Picker on page 82
Event Colors Setup Dialog on page 645

Event Colors Setup Dialog

The event colors setup dialogs allow you to set up colors for event properties such as velocities,
pitches, channels, or chords and scales.

● To open the event colors setup dialog for the selected color scheme option, open the Event
Colors pop-up menu in the Key Editor or Drum Editor toolbar, and select Setup.

Pitch Color Setup dialog

The following options are available:

Color fields
Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color.

645
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

Description
Shows further information about the usage of the color.

OK
Applies your changes and closes the dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Event Colors Menu on page 644
Color Picker on page 82

Pitch Colors Setup

You can set up Cubase to color events depending on their pitch. The color scheme is defined in
the Pitch Colors setup dialog.

● To open the event Pitch Colors setup dialog, open the Event Colors pop-up menu in the Key
Editor toolbar, activate Pitch, and then select Setup.

The following options are available:

Color fields
Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color.

Description
Shows further information about the usage of the color.

OK
Applies your changes and closes the dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Event Colors Menu on page 644
Color Picker on page 82

Chord and Scale Colors Setup

You can set up Cubase to color events depending on whether they match the current chord,
scale, or both. The color scheme is defined in the Chord and Scale Colors setup dialog.

● To open the event Chord and Scale Colors setup dialog, open the Event Colors pop-up
menu in the Key Editor toolbar, activate Scale/Chords, and then select Setup.

646
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

The following options are available:

Color fields
Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color.

Description
Shows further information about the usage of the color.

OK
Applies your changes and closes the dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Event Colors Menu on page 644
Color Picker on page 82

Selecting Note Events

The selected MIDI editor determines which of the following methods apply.

Do one of the following:

● Use the Object Selection tool to drag a selection rectangle around the note events that you
want to select. You can also click individual events.
● Use the Range Selection tool to select all note events in a specific time range.
● Select Edit > Select, and select one of the options.
● To select the previous or next note event, use the Left Arrow / Right Arrow key.
● To select several notes, press Shift , and use the Left Arrow / Right Arrow key.
● To select all notes of a certain pitch, press Ctrl/Cmd , and click on a key in the keyboard
display to the left.
● To select all the following note events of the same pitch/staff, press Shift , and double-click a
note event.

647
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

NOTE

If you select the notes in the event display, the note event is displayed in black, and only its
outline is shown in color. On the keyboard display, the keys that correspond to the note pitches
of the selected notes are also displayed in color.

RELATED LINKS
Event Colors Menu on page 644
Select Submenu for Note Events on page 648
Editing on page 884

Select Submenu for Note Events

The Select submenu offers you several options to select note events.

● To open the Select submenu for a note event, select the note event, and select Edit > Select.

All
Selects all note events in the edited part.

None
Deselects all note events.

Invert
Inverts the selection. All selected note events are deselected, and all notes that were
not selected are selected instead.

In Loop
Selects all note events that are partially or completely inside the boundaries of the left
and right locators (only visible if locators are set).

From Start to Cursor

Selects all note events that begin to the left of the project cursor.

From Cursor to End

Selects all note events that end to the right of the project cursor.

Equal Pitch - all Octaves

Selects all note events of the highlighted part that have the same pitch (in any octave)
as the selected note event.

NOTE

This function requires that a single note event is selected.

Equal Pitch - same Octave

Selects all note events of the highlighted part that have the same pitch (same octave)
as the selected note event.

NOTE

This function requires that a single note event is selected.

Select Controllers in Note Range

Selects the MIDI controller data within the range of the selected note events.

648
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

RELATED LINKS
Deleting Note Events on page 649

Muting Note Events

You can mute individual note events in a MIDI editor. Muting individual notes allows you to
exclude note events from playback.

Do one of the following:

● Click on a note event with the Mute tool.

● Drag a rectangle with the Mute tool, enclosing all note events that you want to mute.
● Select the note events, and select Edit > Mute.
● To unmute a note event, click it or enclose it with the Mute tool. You can also select a note
event and select Edit > Unmute.

NOTE

Muted notes are dimmed in the note display.

Toggle Selections
● To toggle selected elements within a selection rectangle, press Ctrl/Cmd , and enclose the
same elements within a new selection rectangle.

Deleting Note Events

● To delete note events, click on them with the Erase tool or select them, and press
Backspace .

Delete Notes Dialog

The Delete Notes dialog allows you delete note events that do not match a specific length or
velocity.

● To open the Delete Notes dialog, select a MIDI part in the Project window, and select
MIDI > Functions > Delete Notes.

The following options are available:

Minimum Length
Allows you to set a minimum note length in ticks. Notes that are shorter than the
set value are deleted. You can use the value field or the graphical length display. If

649
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

you click the field to the right of the graphical length display, the scale for the display
changes. You can set it to 1/4 bar, one bar, two bars or four bars.

Minimum Velocity
Allows you to set a minimum note velocity. Notes with a lower velocity than the set
value are deleted.

Remove when under

This option is only available if Minimum Velocity and Minimum Length are both
activated. It allows you to choose if both or just one of the criteria must be met for
notes to be deleted.

Trimming Note Events

The Trim tool allows you to cut off the end or the beginning of note events.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the Trim tool on the toolbar.
2. Do one of the following:

● To trim the end of a single note event, click on the note event.
● To trim the beginning of a single note event, press Alt , and click the note event.
● To trim several note events, click and drag across the note events.
● To set the same start and end time for all edited note events, press Ctrl/Cmd , and
vertically drag along the note events.

Editing Note Events on the Info Line

You can move, resize, or change the velocity of note events on the info line using regular value
editing.

● To apply a value change to all selected note events, press Ctrl/Cmd , and change a value on
the info line.
● To adjust the pitch or velocity of note events via your MIDI keyboard, click in the Pitch or
Velocity fields on the info line, and play a note on your MIDI keyboard.

NOTE

If you selected several note events and you adjust a value, all selected events are changed by
the set amount.

Duplicating and Repeating Note Events

You can duplicate and repeat note events in the same way as events in the Project window.

● To duplicate the selected note events, hold down Alt/Opt , and drag the note events to a
new position.
If Snap is activated, it determines to positions to which you can copy notes.
● To copy the selected note events and to place them behind the original, select Edit >
Functions > Duplicate.
If several note events are selected, all of them are copied as one unit, maintaining the
relative distance between the note events.

650
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

● To create a number of copies of the selected note events, select Edit > Functions > Repeat,
specify the number, and click OK.
You can also press Alt/Opt , and drag the right edge of the note events to the right to create
copies of the note events.

Finding Exact Positions with Snap

The Snap function restricts horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. This helps
you find exact positions in the note display when editing note events in a MIDI editor. Affected
operations include moving, duplicating, drawing, sizing, etc.

● To activate/deactivate snap, click Snap.

If you select the Bars+Beats time format, the snap grid is set by the quantize value on the
toolbar. This makes it possible to snap to straight note values and to swing grids that have
been set up in the Quantize Panel.
● If you select any of the other time formats, positioning is restricted to the displayed grid.

Setting Note Insert Velocity Values

When you draw note events in the MIDI editor, the note events assume the velocity value that
is set in the Note Insert Velocity field on the toolbar. There are different methods to set the
velocity.

● Use the tool modifier for Edit Velocity that is specified in the Preferences dialog (Tool
Modifiers page). The cursor changes into a speaker, and next to the note, a field with the
Note Velocity slider shows the value. Move the mouse pointer up or down to adjust the
value.

Value changes are applied to all selected notes.

● Open the Note Insert Velocity pop-up menu, and select a velocity value.
On this menu, you can also select Setup and specify custom velocity values for the pop-up
menu.
● Double-click the Note Insert Velocity field on the toolbar, and enter a velocity value.
● Assign key commands to Insert Velocity 1-5, and use them.
This allows you to quickly switch between different velocity values when you enter note
events.

Looping MIDI Parts

The Independent Track Loop function allows you to loop a MIDI part independently from the
project playback.

When you activate the loop, the MIDI events within the loop are repeated continuously, while
other events on other tracks are played back as usual. Every time the cycle restarts, the
independent track loop also restarts.

651
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Common MIDI Editor Functions

PROCEDURE
1. Activate Independent Track Loop on the toolbar.
If the button is not visible, right-click the toolbar, and activate Independent Track Loop.
If you have set up a loop range in the Project window, it is hidden from the ruler in the MIDI
editor.
2. Ctrl/Cmd -click in the ruler to specify the start of the independent track loop.
3. Alt/Opt -click in the ruler to specify the end of the independent track loop.

RESULT
The independent loop range is indicated in a different color.
The start and the end of the loop range are displayed on the status line.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

To repeat the events of the loop range and fill up the active MIDI part, select MIDI > Repeat
Loop.

Part Editing Mode Pane

The Part Editing Mode pane allows you to define exactly which events or parts can be selected
and edited when you select multiple events with a selection rectangle in the event display.

● To open the Part Editing Mode pane, click Part Editing Mode in the Multiple Part
Controls section of the Key Editor, Drum Editor, or List Editor toolbar.

The following options determine what is selected when you drag a selection rectangle:

All Parts
Selects all events of all visible parts.

Active Part
Selects events of the active part.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Events on page 162
Creating MIDI Events on page 163
MIDI Parts on page 164
Creating Empty MIDI Parts on page 164
MIDI Recording on page 240

652
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

Handling Several MIDI Parts

The Multiple Part Controls section in the Key Editor, Drum Editor, and List Editor toolbar
features controls and tools for working with multiple parts.

Show Part Borders

● To display any borders defined for the active part, activate Show Part Borders.
If this option is activated, all parts, except for the active part, are grayed out.
● To change the size of the part, drag the part borders.
The part borders display the name of the active part.

Part Editing Mode

● To restrict editing operations to the active part, activate Active Part in the Part Editing
Mode pane.

Activate Part for Editing

The Activate Part for Editing pop-up menu lists all parts that were selected when you opened
the editor. The list is arranged in the same way as the track list, and the parts are listed under
the name of the corresponding track. The parts are arranged according to their position on the
timeline. You can use the search field to search for part names.

To activate a part for editing, click its name in the list.

NOTE

If the part that you open for editing is a shared copy, any editing that you perform affects all
shared copies of this part. In the Project window, shared copies are indicated by an equal sign in
the top right corner of the part.

RELATED LINKS
Multiple Part Controls on page 681
Part Editing Mode Pane on page 652

Controller Display
The controller display is the area at the bottom of the Key Editor and the Drum Editor.

To show the controller display, do one of the following:

653
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

● Open the Create Controller Lane pop-up menu in the Key Editor or the Drum Editor, and
select Show/Hide Controller Lanes.
● On the Key Editor or the Drum Editor toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate
Controller Lanes.

The following options are available:

1 Note display
Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes.
2 Controller Selection and Functions menu
Allows you to select which controller type is displayed, and contains editing functions for
controller lanes and events.
3 Divider
Allows you to resize the display areas by dragging the line between the note display and the
controller display.
4 Controller display
Shows one or multiple controller lanes.
5 Controller events
The controller display shows the added controller events of the selected controller type and
their current values. Controller events have no length. Their values are valid until the start of
the next event.
Velocity values are displayed as vertical bars, with higher bars corresponding to higher
velocity values. Each velocity bar corresponds to a note in the note display.

654
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

All other controller events are shown as steps, with their heights corresponding to the values
of the events.
6 Create Controller Lane
Allows you to add controller lanes, so that you can view and edit multiple controllers at the
same time. Each controller lane can display one of the following properties or event types:

● Velocity
● Pitchbend
● Aftertouch
● Poly Pressure
● Program Change
● SysEx (System Exclusive) events
● Continuous Controllers
● Off Velocity
7 Controller Lane Setup
Contains setup functions for controller lanes, and allows you to add and organize presets.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Velocity Events on page 662
Controller Event Editor on page 673

Controller Lane Setup Menu

The Controller Lane Setup pop-up menu allows you to add lanes and to select which event type
to display.

● To open the Controller Lane Setup pop-up menu, click Controller Lane Setup at the
bottom left of the controller display.

The following options are available:

Add Preset
Opens the Save Preset dialog, which allows you to save a preset and to enter a name
to it.

Organize Presets
Opens the Organize Presets dialog, which allows you to rename and delete presets.

Type of New Controller Events

Allows you to specify whether new controller events change gradually (Ramp) or
instantly (Step) from the previous curve point to the new one.

NOTE

This setting is saved with the program and affects any new events that you create
manually as well as recorded MIDI CC events. The following events, however, are
always recorded as steps:

● CC 0 (BankSel MSB)

655
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

● CC 32 (BankSel LSB)
● CC 64 (Sustain)
● CC 98 (NRPN LSB)
● CC 99 (NRPN MSB)
● CC 100 (RPN LSB)
● CC 101 (RPN MSB)
● CC 120 (AllSndOff)
● CC 121 (Reset Ctrl)
● CC 122 (Local Ctrl)
● CC 123 (AllNoteOff)
● CC 124 (Omni Mode Off)
● CC 125 (Omni Mode On)
● CC 126 (Mono Mode On)
● CC 127 (Poly Mode On)
● All MIDI CC events that are recorded on tracks with the Output Group and
Channel set to Any.
● All MIDI CC events for which Record MIDI as Note Expression is enabled.

Set up Available Controllers

Opens the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, which allows you to specify which MIDI
controllers are visible/hidden in the pop-up menu.

Controller Lane Context Menu

● To open the controller lane context menu, right-click in the left area of the controller display.

The following options are available:

Create Controller Lane

Creates a controller lane.

Remove This Lane

Removes the current controller lane.

Select All Events on Lane

Selects all controller events on the current lane.

Cut
Cuts the selected events.

Copy
Copies the selected events to the clipboard.

656
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

Paste
Pastes the clipboard data at the cursor position.

Paste at Origin
Pastes the clipboard data at its original position. Any existing events are replaced.

NOTE

You can copy data between different CC lanes.

RELATED LINKS
Controller Display on page 653

Controller Selection and Functions Menu

The Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu that is shown to the left of a controller
lane allows you to select which controller type to display. This pop-up menu is only available if
at least one controller lane is shown. It also contains editing functions for controller lanes and
events.

● To open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu, click Controller Selection
and Functions to the left of a controller lane.

The following options are available:

657
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

Controller event types

Lists the event types that you can display on the controller lanes. If automation data
already exists for a controller, this is indicated by a rhombus that is displayed to the left
of the controller name.

Select All Events on Lane

Selects all controller events on the current lane.

Remove This Lane

Hides the current controller lane from view.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI Controller Setup Dialog on page 661

Create Controller Lane Menu

The Create Controller Lane pop-up menu allows you to create a new controller lane and to
select which controller type to display.

● To open the Create Controller Lane pop-up menu, click Create Controller Lane to
the left of the controller display.

The following options are available:

Controller event types

Lists the event types that you can display on the controller lanes. If automation data
already exists for a controller, this is indicated by a rhombus that is displayed to the left
of the controller name.
Select an event type to add the corresponding controller lane to the controller display.

Show Used Controllers

Opens all controller lanes that have controller events.

NOTE

As note events always have Off Velocity events, Show Used Controllers ignores the
Off Velocity controller lane.

658
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

Show Velocity Lane Only

Resets the controller display to show the velocity lane only.

Show/Hide Controller Lanes

Shows/Hides the recently displayed controller lanes.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Note-Off Velocities on page 663

Adding Controller Lanes

You can add controller lanes to the controller display. Controller lanes allow you to select a
specific controller type for display, so that you can add and edit controller events of that type.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Create Controller Lane .

2. Select the controller event type from the pop-up menu.

NOTE

If the controller event type that you want to show is not available, open the Controller
Lane Setup pop-up menu, and select Set up Available Controllers. You can then set up the
available controller event types in the MIDI Controller Setup dialog.

RESULT
A new controller lane is created.

NOTE

● To hide a controller lane from view, open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up
menu, and select Remove This Lane. This does not affect the events in any way.
● If you hide all lanes, the controller display is hidden. You can bring it back by clicking Create
Controller Lane or by opening the Create Controller Lane pop-up menu and selecting
Show/Hide Controller Lanes.

RELATED LINKS
Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 657
Setting up Available Continuous Controllers on page 660

Displaying a Different Controller Event Type

You can select which event type to display on a controller lane. Each controller lane shows one
event type at a time.

PROCEDURE
● Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu, and select an event type.

659
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

RELATED LINKS
Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 657

Setting up Available Continuous Controllers

In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, you can specify which continuous controllers are available
for selection.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Controller Lane Setup > Set up Available Controllers.
2. In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, do one of the following:
● In the Hidden column, select all controllers that you want to show, and click Add.
● In the Visible column, select all controllers that you want to hide, and click Remove.
3. Click OK.

RESULT
The corresponding continuous controllers are now available for selection.

NOTE

The MIDI Controller Setup dialog is available in different areas of the program. The settings are
global, that is, the setup you choose here affects all areas of the program where MIDI controllers
can be selected.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Available Continuous Controllers on page 660

660
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

MIDI Controller Setup Dialog

The MIDI Controller Setup dialog allows you to specify which MIDI controllers are visible/
hidden.

● To open the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, click Controller Lane Setup to the left of the
controller display, and select Set up Available Controllers.

Visible
Lists the MIDI controllers that are visible.

Hidden
Lists the MIDI controllers that are hidden.

Add >>
Select an item from the Hidden list, and click Add >> to make it visible.

<< Remove
Select an item from the Visible list, and click << Remove to hide it.

Saving Controller Lane Presets

You can save a controller lane setup as a controller lane preset. This way, you can have a preset
with one velocity lane and another preset with a combination of several controller lanes, such as
velocity, pitchbend, or modulation.

PREREQUISITE
You have added at least one controller lane and selected a controller event type for display.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Controller Lane Setup.
2. Select Add Preset.
3. In the Save Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset.
4. Click OK.

661
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

RESULT
Your controller lane setup is now available as a controller lane preset. The number of lanes and
the displayed event types are saved in the preset.
To load, remove, or rename presets, open the Controller Lane Setup menu, and select Organize
Presets.

RELATED LINKS
Controller Lane Setup Menu on page 655

Editing Velocity Events

Each note event automatically gets a velocity event. You can edit the velocity values of these
events.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane and set it up to display velocity events. You have added velocity
events for several notes.

PROCEDURE
1. Optional: On the toolbar, activate Acoustic Feedback.
This plays back the notes when you adjust the velocity so that you can audition your
changes.
2. Do one of the following:
● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection or the Draw tool, and click a velocity bar in
the controller display.
● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, press Alt , and click a velocity bar in the
controller display to select it. Change the Velocity value on the info line.
● On the toolbar, select the Line tool, and drag in the velocity display to change the
velocity values of several notes.
The velocity value at the project cursor position is displayed below the Controller Selection
and Functions pop-up menu.

NOTE

If there is more than one note at the same position, their velocity bars overlap. To edit the
velocity of a single note, select the note in the note display. If no note is selected, all velocity
events assume the same velocity value.

RESULT
The velocity values change according to your edits.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Velocity Events on page 663

662
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 657

Controller Event Editor on page 673

Adding Velocity Events

You can add velocity events by adding note events.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu, and select Velocity.
2. Select the Draw tool or the Line tool.
3. Click in the note display to add a note event.
This adds a note event and a velocity controller event that you can edit.

RESULT
The velocity values are shown as vertical bars in the controller display. Each velocity bar
corresponds to a note event in the note display. Higher bars correspond to higher velocity
values. The value is valid until the beginning of the next event.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Controller Lanes on page 659
Line Tool Modes on page 671
Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 657

Editing Note-Off Velocities

You can add note-off velocities to note events. This allows you to define how quickly a pressed
key is released which gives your MIDI events more dynamic expression.

NOTE

Note-off velocity is only supported by specific devices.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu, and select Off Velocity.

663
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

2. In the note display, select the note events whose note-off velocity you want to edit.

NOTE

You can edit single notes in a chord by selecting individual note events, or you can select the
entire chord.

3. In the Off Velocity controller lane, drag the note-off velocity events up or down to adjust
their values.

RESULT
The Off Velocity values are shown as vertical bars in the controller display. Each bar corresponds
to a note event in the note display. Higher bars correspond to higher note-off velocity values. The
value is valid until the beginning of the next event.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Velocity Events on page 662
Key Editor Info Line on page 684
Drum Editor Info Line on page 713

Pitchbend Controller Lanes

Pitchbend controller lanes allow you to add and edit pitchbend controller events.

● To add a pitchbend controller lane, open the Controller Selection and Functions menu, and
select Pitchbend.

664
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

1 Curve Type field

Shows the controller curve type. You can set this to Step or to Ramp/Curve.
2 Value at project cursor
Displays the pitchbend value at the project cursor position. What is shown depends on the
Show Semitones Grid setting in the Grid Settings pane:
● If Show Semitones Grid is activated, this value shows the semitones value at the project
cursor position. The range goes from +96 semitones to -96 semitones. The value is
shown in semitones and cents.
● If Show Semitones Grid is deactivated, this value shows the pitchbend MIDI value at the
project cursor position. The range goes from +8191 steps to -8192 steps.
3 Set up Grid
Opens the Grid Settings pane that allows you to set up the semitones grid for the pitchbend
controller lane.
4 Snap Pitchbend Events
Restricts vertical movement and the positioning of controller events to the semitones grid.
By default, activating Snap Pitchbend Events also activates Show Semitones Grid to show
the grid that the events are snapping to.

NOTE

Snap Pitchbend Events is not effective in the controller event editor.

5 Controller value from MIDI device

This value shows up if you input MIDI data for this controller lane from your MIDI device.
6 Semitones grid
The semitones grid shows the semitone values. The amount of grid lines and their width
depends on the settings for Pitchbend Range: Down and Pitchbend Range: Up. By default,
the range is set to +/- 2 semitones, that is, a major second.

665
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

NOTE

You can show the grid, even if Snap Pitchbend Events is deactivated.

7 Controller curve
The pitchbend controller curve.

RELATED LINKS
Controller Event Editor on page 673
Grid Settings on page 666

Grid Settings
The Grid Settings pane allows you to set up a semitones grid for the pitchbend controller lane.
As grid settings only affect the corresponding track, you can set up different grid settings for
different MIDI or instrument tracks. All grid settings are saved with the project.

● To show the Grid Settings for pitchbend controller lanes, add a pitchbend controller lane,
and click Set up Grid.

Show Semitones Grid

The semitones grid shows the semitone values that the events snap to. The amount
of grid lines and their width depend on the settings for Pitchbend Range: Down and
Pitchbend Range: Up.

NOTE

The grid is a visual help that allows you to find exact semitone positions for pitchbends
more easily. Changing the grid does not change the values of pitchbend events.

Pitchbend Range: Up
Allows you to specify a value between 1 and 96 semitones for the upper grid. By
default, the upper pitchbend range for the grid is set to 2 semitones, allowing you to
specify upward bends from 1 to up to 2 semitones.

Pitchbend Range: Down

Allows you to specify a value between 1 and -96 semitones for the lower grid. By
default, the lower pitchbend range for the grid is set to -2 semitones, allowing you to
specify downward bends from 1 to up to -2 semitones.

Link
Allows you to link the pitchbend ranges. You can deactivate this, to set up a higher
value for the upper range than for the lower range, for example.

666
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

NOTE

The actual pitchbend range depends on the settings of the VST or MIDI instrument and the
sound or preset that you are using. To make the most of this feature, make sure to adjust the
pitchbend range settings of your instrument to the settings of the pitchbend controller lane, or
vice versa.

RELATED LINKS
Pitchbend Controller Lanes on page 664

Adding Pitchbend Events

You can add pitchbend events to your note events.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Create Controller Lane pop-up menu, and select Pitchbend.
2. Optional: Click Set up Grid to open the Grid Settings pane, and set up the grid according to
your needs.
3. Optional: Activate Snap Pitchbend Events to snap the pitchbend controller events to the set
grid.
4. Select the Draw tool, and click in the controller display to enter as many pitchbend events as
you need.

RESULT
The pitchbend controller events are added.

RELATED LINKS
Pitchbend Controller Lanes on page 664
Create Controller Lane Menu on page 658
Grid Settings on page 666
Creating Smooth Transitions between Continuous Controller Events on page 670
Editing Pitchbend Events on page 667

Editing Pitchbend Events

PREREQUISITE
You have added a pitchbend controller lane and pitchbend events.

PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool.
2. Optional: Click Set up Grid to open the Grid Settings pane, and set up the grid according to
your needs.
3. In the controller display, move the mouse pointer over a pitchbend controller event.
The mouse pointer turns into a pointing hand symbol.

NOTE

You can create smooth transitions between the pitchbend controller events by selecting a
pitchbend controller event, switching the Curve Type, on the info line to Ramp/Curve and
editing the curve handles.

667
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

4. Click the pitchbend controller event to select it, and drag it to another position.

RELATED LINKS
Grid Settings on page 666
Adding Pitchbend Events on page 667
Pitchbend Controller Lanes on page 664

Adding Poly Pressure Events

You can add poly pressure events to your note events. Poly pressure events are events that
belong to a specific note number, that is, key. For each poly pressure event, you can edit the note
number and the amount of pressure.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Create Controller Lane .

2. Select Poly Pressure from the menu.

A Poly Pressure controller lane is added. It shows a note number value field to the left of the
controller display.
3. Do one of the following:
● Select a note event in the note display to set the note number for the corresponding
pitch. This only works for the topmost of several poly pressure controller lanes.
● If you work with several poly pressure controller lanes, use the pop-up menu in the note
number value field to the left of the controller display to select the note pitch for that
controller lane.
The selected note number is displayed in the upper value field, to the left of the controller
display.
4. On the toolbar, select the Draw tool, and add a new poly pressure event.
You can determine the value by moving the mouse up or down in the controller display.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Select a different note number, and add poly pressure events for this.

RELATED LINKS
Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 657

Editing Poly Pressure Events

PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane and set it up to display poly pressure events. You have added
poly pressure events for several note numbers.

PROCEDURE
1. Click the arrow button next to the note number, to the left of the controller lane.
A pop-up menu with a list of all note numbers for which you inserted poly pressure events
opens.
2. Select a note number from the pop-up menu.
The poly pressure events for the selected note number are shown in the controller lane.

668
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

3. On the toolbar, select the Draw tool.

4. Hold down Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt , and edit the events in the controller display.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Poly Pressure Events on page 668

Adding Continuous Controllers

You can add continuous controllers to your note events.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu, and select a continuous
controller.
2. Select the Draw tool or the Line tool.
3. Do one of the following:
● To add a single event, click in the controller display.
● To add multiple events, click and drag in the controller display.
● To add a Modulation (CC 1) event, copy note events from the Key Editor note display,
and paste them on a controller lane in the controller display.
When you move the Draw tool on the controller lane, a tooltip shows the position and the
controller value at the mouse position.

RESULT
The added events correspond to the event values. The beginning of an event is marked by a
curve point. Controller events have no length. The value of a controller event in the display is
valid until the beginning of the next controller event.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Controller Lanes on page 659
Line Tool Modes on page 671
Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 657

Editing Continuous Controllers

You can edit the values of the continuous controller events that you added or recorded.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane and set it up to display controller events. You have added
controller events for several notes.

PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, select the Object Selection, the Draw or the Line tool.
2. Do one of the following:

● If you selected the Draw, or the Line tool, drag in the controller display.

669
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

● If you selected the Object Selection tool, press Alt and drag in the controller display.

RESULT
The controller event is edited.

RELATED LINKS
Line Tool Modes on page 671

Creating Smooth Transitions between Continuous Controller Events

By default, when recording or drawing MIDI continuous controller events, these are inserted as
steps. If this is not what you want, you can create smooth transitions between the events.

PREREQUISITE
You have recorded MIDI data with continuous controller events.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, double-click the MIDI part.
2. In the Key Editor, open the Create Controller Lane menu, and select Show Used
Controllers.
The controller lanes for all controller events that you have recorded are shown in the
controller display.
3. Locate the controller lane of the continuous controller that you want to edit, and select a
controller event.
The info line of the Key Editor displays information about the selected controller event, such
as Type, Start position, Value, Channel, and Curve Type.

4. Do one of the following:

● On the info line, change the option in the Curve Type field from Step to Ramp/Curve.

NOTE

You can change the curve type for several controller events by selecting them and
changing the value in the Curve Type field.

● In the controller display, move the mouse pointer between two controller events, and
double-click the handle that appears to change the curve type from Step to Ramp/
Curve.
5. Move the mouse pointer over the ramp, click the handle, and move it upwards or downwards
to convert the ramp into a curve shape.

RESULT
The ramp turns into a curve.
When you play back ramps/curves, the data between two MIDI continuous controller events is
interpolated to a suitable MIDI data resolution. You can visualize this by selecting MIDI > Merge
MIDI in Loop or MIDI > Freeze MIDI Modifiers, or by exporting the part as a MIDI file.

670
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

NOTE

Ramp/Curve controller curves are demanding on the performance of the application.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

You can use the controller lane context menu to cut, copy, and paste controller events.

RELATED LINKS
Controller Lane Context Menu on page 656
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part on page 632

Continuous Controllers and MIDI Automation

You can record or enter MIDI controller data for a MIDI part in the controller lane, or for an
automation track in the Project window.

To show and edit MIDI controller data on the automation track, you must extract the MIDI
automation from the MIDI part.

MIDI controller data from the automation track is also displayed on the controller lane. However,
you cannot edit this data on the controller lane.

On the controller lane, you can also see the controller curve that is applied before the part starts.
This tells you which controller value is being used at the starting point of the part so that you can
choose the start value accordingly.

RELATED LINKS
Extracting MIDI Automation on page 641

MIDI Part Data vs. Track Automation

You can enter or record MIDI controller data as automation data on an automation track or as
part data in the MIDI part.

● If Read Automation for a track is enabled, controller data is written as automation data on
an automation track in the Project window.
● If Read Automation is disabled, the controller data is written in the MIDI part and can be
viewed and edited for example in the Key Editor.

Nevertheless, you can end up with both kinds of controller data for a MIDI part if you recorded
controller part data in one pass and automation data during another. In this case, these
conflicting data types are combined during playback as follows:

● Part automation only begins when the first controller event within the part is reached. At the
end of the part, the last controller value is kept until an automation breakpoint is reached on
the automation track.

Line Tool Modes

You can use the different Line tool modes to edit controller events.

● To select a line mode, click the Line tool on the Key Editor or the Drum Editor toolbar, and
click again to open a pop-up menu with the available modes.

The following modes are available:

671
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

Line
In this mode, you can draw events in a straight line by clicking in the controller display
and dragging the cursor to where you want the ramp to end.

NOTE

If Snap is activated, the Length Quantize value determines the density of created
controller curves. For very smooth curves, use a small Length Quantize value or
deactivate Snap. Beware that very dense controller curves can cause MIDI playback to
stutter.

Parabola
In this mode, you can draw events on a parabola curve. This results in more natural
curves and fades.

You can use modifier keys to determine the shape of the parabola curve.
● To reverse the parabola curve, press Ctrl/Cmd .
● To change the position of the whole curve, press Alt/Opt .
● To increase or decrease the exponent, press Shift .

NOTE

If Snap is activated, the Length Quantize value determines the density of created
controller curves. For very smooth curves, use a small Length Quantize value or
deactivate Snap. Beware that very dense controller curves can cause MIDI playback to
stutter.

Sine, Triangle, and Square

These modes create different periodic waveform curves.

The quantize value determines the period of the curve that is the length of one curve
cycle. The Length Quantize value determines the density of the events.

NOTE

If you set Length Quantize to Quantize Link and enter data in Sine, Triangle or
Square mode, the density of the events depends on the zoom factor.

You can use modifier keys to determine the shape of the curve.

● To change the phase of the beginning of the curve, press Ctrl/Cmd .

● To change the position of the whole curve, press Alt/Opt - Ctrl/Cmd .
● To change the maximum position of the triangle curve or the pulse of the square
curve in Triangle and Square mode, press Shift - Ctrl/Cmd . This creates sawtooth
curves.

672
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

● You can also set the curve period freely by holding down Shift when you insert
events in Sine, Triangle, or Square mode. Activate Snap, Shift -click, and drag
to set the length of one period. The resulting period length is a multiple of the
quantize value.

Paint
In this mode, you can draw in multiple notes.

NOTE

If Snap is activated, the Length Quantize value determines the density of the created
controller curves. For very smooth curves, use a small Length Quantize value or
deactivate Snap. Beware that very dense controller curves can cause MIDI playback to
stutter.

NOTE

You can use the Thin Out Data function in the MIDI menu to thin out controller data. This can
ease the load on your external MIDI devices, in case you have recorded very dense controller
curves.

RELATED LINKS
Thinning Out Controller Data on page 641

Controller Event Editor

The controller event editor allows you to perform additional scaling operations for selection
ranges on existing controller curves.

● To open the controller event editor, activate the Object Selection or the Range Selection
tool, and drag a selection rectangle on the controller lane.
● To open the controller event editor for velocity lanes, select multiple MIDI notes in the note
display. You can also activate the Object Selection or the Range Selection tool, press Alt ,
and drag a selection rectangle on the controller lane.

The controller event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes:

1 Tilt Left
If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve.
2 Compress Left
If you Alt/Opt -click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the
left part of the curve.
3 Scale Vertically
If you click in the middle of the upper border of the editor, you can scale the curve vertically.

673
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Controller Display

4 Move Vertically
If you click on the upper border of the editor, you can move the entire curve vertically.
5 Compress Right
If you Alt/Opt -click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the
right part of the curve.
6 Tilt Right
If you click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can tilt the right part of the curve.
7 Stretch
If you click on the lower border of the editor, you can stretch the curve horizontally.
8 Scale Around Absolute Center
If you click in the center of the right corner of the editor, you can scale the curve absolute to
its center.
9 Scale Around Relative Center
If you Alt/Opt -click in the center of the right border of the editor, you can scale the curve
relative to its center.

RELATED LINKS
Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 657
Selection Range Editing on page 186
Editing Velocity Events on page 662

Auto Select Controllers

Auto Select Controllers automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. This is
useful, as selected controllers for notes are moved together with the corresponding notes.

● To show Auto Select Controllers, right-click the Key Editor or the Drum Editor toolbar, and
select Auto Select Controllers.

If you activate Auto Select Controllers, controllers that belong to a note event are automatically
selected when you select the note event.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677

Moving Events in the Controller Display

You can move events of a controller curve in the controller display. This only works for curve
type controller events, such as continuous controllers, pitchbend, aftertouch, poly pressure, and
program change.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● With the Object Selection or the Range Selection tool, drag to create a selection
rectangle that encompasses the events that you want to move.
● On the toolbar, activate Auto Select Controllers. In the note display, select the notes
whose controllers you want to move.

674
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

● In the note display, select the notes whose controllers you want to move, and select
Edit > Select > Select Controllers in Note Range to select the controllers within the
range of the selected notes.
2. Move the note/controller events.

RESULT
The controller events are moved to the new position. Snap is taken into account.

RELATED LINKS
Select Controllers in Note Range: Use Extended Note Context on page 887
Selection Range Editing on page 186

Copying and Pasting Events between Controller Lanes

You can copy events from a controller lane and paste them onto another controller lane. The
controller events must have the same event type.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:
● With the Object Selection or the Range Selection tool, drag to create a selection
rectangle that encompasses the events that you want to copy.
● On the toolbar, activate Auto Select Controllers. In the note display, select the notes
whose controllers you want to copy.
● In the note display, select the notes whose controllers you want to copy, and select
Edit > Select > Select Controllers in Note Range to select the controllers within the
range of the selected notes.
2. Press Ctrl/Cmd - C to copy the note/controller events.
3. Select the controller lane where you want to paste the events, and press Ctrl/Cmd - V .

RESULT
The controller events are pasted onto the controller lane. Snap is taken into account.

RELATED LINKS
Displaying a Different Controller Event Type on page 659

Key Editor
The Key Editor is the default MIDI editor. It displays notes graphically in a piano roll-style
grid. The Key Editor allows for detailed editing of notes and non-note events, such as MIDI
controllers.

You can open the Key Editor in a separate window or in a tab in the lower zone of the Project
window. Opening the Key Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful if you want to
access the Key Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.

NOTE

Some features are only available in the Key Editor window.

To open a MIDI part in the Key Editor, do one of the following:

675
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

● Double-click a MIDI part in the Project window.

● Select a MIDI part in the Project window, and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd - E .
● Select a MIDI part in the Project window, and select MIDI > Open Key Editor.
● In the Key Commands dialog in the Editors category, assign a key command for Open Key
Editor. Select a MIDI part in the Project window, and use the key command.

NOTE

If you select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors
page. Make your changes to specify if you want the editors to open in a separate window or in
the lower zone of the Project window.

The Key Editor window:

The Key Editor is divided into several sections:

1 Toolbar
Contains tools and settings.
2 Status line
Informs you about the mouse time position, the mouse value, and the current chord.
3 Info line
Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note.
4 Left Zone (Key Editor Inspector)
Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data.
5 Ruler
Displays the timeline.
6 Piano keyboard display
Helps you to find the right note number.
7 Note display
Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes.

676
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

8 Controller display
The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes.

NOTE

You can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, and the controller lanes by clicking Set
up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677
Key Editor Status Line on page 683
Key Editor Inspector on page 685
Key Editor Note Display on page 687
Key Editor Piano Keyboard Display on page 688
Controller Display on page 653

Key Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and settings for the Key Editor.

● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar, and activate or deactivate the
elements.

Default Items
Solo Editor

Solos the editor during playback if the editor has the focus.

Record in Editor

Enables the recording of MIDI data in the editor if the editor has the focus.

NOTE

This only works with MIDI Record Mode set to Merge or Replace.

Retrospective Record
Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor

Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are
always shown.

Pitch Visibility
Pitch Visibility On/Off

677
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Deactivate this to show all pitches in the note display. Activate this to reduce the
pitches in the note display according to the selected pitch visibility option.

Select Pitch Visibility Options

Allows you to determine which pitches are displayed in the note display:

● Show Pitches with Events shows only the pitches for which events are available in
the note display.
● Show Pitches from Scale Assistant shows only the pitches that match the musical
scale that is selected in the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector.

Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll

Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.

Select Auto-Scroll Settings

Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend
Auto-Scroll When Editing.

Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic Feedback

Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you
create them by drawing.

Tool Buttons
Object Selection

Selects events and parts.

Range Selection

Selects ranges.

Draw

Draws events.

Erase

Deletes events.

Trim

Trims events.

Split

678
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Splits events.

Glue

Glues together events of the same pitch.

Mute

Mutes events.

Zoom

Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt , and click to zoom out.

Line

Creates a series of continuous events.

Auto Select Controllers

Auto Select Controllers

Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes.

Independent Track Loop

Independent Track Loop

Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.

Insert Velocity
Note Insert Velocity

Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes.

Nudge
Nudge Settings

Allow you to set up a snap grid for the nudge commands.

● By default, the snap grid for nudge operations is set to Link to Grid, and the step
width corresponds to the snap grid.
● If you activate Link to Primary Time Format, the snap grid for nudge operations
follows the primary time format, and you can set up the step width in the Nudge
Settings pop-up menu.
● If you deactivate Link to Grid and Link to Primary Time Format, you can set up
an independent snap grid for nudge operations. In this case, you can select a time
format and a value from the Nudge Settings pop-up menu.

NOTE

To display the nudge buttons, click the points to the right of the Nudge Settings.

679
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Nudge Start Left

Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left.

Nudge Start Right

Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right.

Move Left

Moves the selected event to the left.

Move Right

Moves the selected event to the right.

Nudge End Left

Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left.

Nudge End Right

Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right.

Transpose Palette
Move Up

Transposes the selected event up by a half note.

Move Down

Transposes the selected event down by a half note.

Move Up More

Transposes the selected event up by an octave.

Move Down More

Transposes the selected event down by an octave.

Snap
Snap On/Off

Activates/Deactivates the Snap function.

Snap Type

Allows you to select one of the following snap types:

● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up
menu.

680
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

● Grid Relative keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the grid.
● Events snaps events to the start or to the end of other events.
● Shuffle changes the order of events, if you drag one event to the left or to the
right of other events.
● Cursor snaps events to the cursor position.
● Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize
Presets pop-up menu, or to the cursor position.
● Events + Cursor snaps events to the start or to the end of other events, or to the
cursor position.
● Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the
Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or to the end of other events, or to
the cursor position.

Grid Type

Allows you to choose from one of the following grid types:

● Use Quantize activates a grid where events snap to the value that is selected in
the Quantize Presets pop-up menu.
● Adapt to Zoom activates a grid where events snap to the zoom level.

Quantize
Apply Quantize

Applies the quantize settings.

Quantize Presets

Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset.

Soft Quantize On/Off

Activates/Deactivates soft quantize.

Open Quantize Panel

Opens the Quantize Panel.

Length Quantize
Length Quantize

Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths.

Multiple Part Controls

Show Part Borders

Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part within the left and right locators.

681
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Part Editing Mode

Sets the editing mode for parts.

● All Parts allows you to select and edit all events of all visible parts.
● Active Part restricts selecting and editing to events of the active part.

Activate Part for Editing

Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor and allows you to activate
a part.

Step/MIDI Input
Step Input

Activates/Deactivates step input.

MIDI Input

Activates/Deactivates MIDI input.

Move Insert Mode

Moves all note events to the right of the step input cursor to make room for the
inserted event when you insert notes.

NOTE

This only works if Step Input is activated.

Record Pitch

Includes the pitch when you insert notes.

Record NoteOn Velocity

Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes.

Record NoteOff Velocity

Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes.

Keep Existing Notes

Keeps existing notes when you insert notes.

Event Colors
Event Colors

Allows you to select event colors.

682
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Right Divider
Right Divider
Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are
always shown.

Window Zone Controls

Open in Separate Window

This button is available in the Editor tab in the lower zone. It opens the editor in a
separate window.

Open in Lower Zone

This button is available in the editor window. It opens the Editor tab in the lower zone
of the Project window.

Show/Hide Left Zone

Shows/Hides the left zone.

Show/Hide Controller Lanes

Shows/Hides the controller lanes.

Set up Window Layout

Allows you to set up the window layout.

RELATED LINKS
Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 644
Part Editing Mode Pane on page 652

Key Editor Status Line

The Key Editor status line shows information about the mouse time position, the mouse value,
and the current chord.

● To show the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Status
Line.

The on/off status of the status line in the Key Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
zone of the Project window are independent of each other.

Mouse Time Position

Displays the exact time position of the mouse pointer, based on the selected ruler time
format. This lets you edit or insert notes at exact positions.

Mouse Value
Displays the exact pitch of the mouse pointer position in the event display. This
facilitates finding the right pitch when entering or transposing notes.
If you move the mouse in the controller display, the controller event value is displayed
at the mouse cursor position.

683
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Current Chord Display

When the project cursor is positioned over notes that form a chord, the chord is
displayed here.

RELATED LINKS
Looping MIDI Parts on page 651

Key Editor Info Line

The Key Editor info line shows values and properties of the selected events.

Info Line for Selected Note Events

● To show the info line for note events, select the events with the Object Selection tool, click
Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Info Line.
● NOTE

If several notes are selected, the values for the first note are displayed in color.

The values for Start, End, and Length are displayed in the selected ruler time format.

The values for Velocity and Off Velocity can be displayed in high resolution. In the Preferences
dialog (Editing—MIDI page), set up the High Resolution Display Range and the High
Resolution Display Format.

NOTE

The on/off status of the info line in the Key Editor window and on the Editor tab in the lower
zone of the Project window are independent of each other.

Info Line for Selected Ranges

● To show the info line for a selected range, select a range with the Range Selection tool, click
Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Info Line.

NOTE

The on/off status of the info line in the Key Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower zone
of the Project window are independent of each other.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Note Events on the Info Line on page 650
Changing the Ruler Time Format on page 643
Editing - MIDI on page 887
Expanding Selection Ranges Vertically (MIDI only) on page 189
Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line on page 622

684
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Key Editor Inspector

The Inspector is located left of the note display. The Key Editor Inspector contains tools and
functions for working with MIDI data.

● To show/hide Inspector sections, right-click an empty area, select Set up Sections, and
activate/deactivate the corresponding options.

Chord Editing
Allows you to enter chords instead of single notes.

Quantize
Allows you to access the main quantize parameters. These are identical with the
functions on the Quantize panel.

Transpose
Allows you to access the main parameters for transposing MIDI events.

Length
Contains length-related options, similar to the Functions submenu of the MIDI menu.
● To change the length of the selected MIDI events or to change all events of the
active part with no events selected, use the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider.
At the maximum value, the notes reach the beginning of the next note.
● To make the new length settings permanent, click Freeze MIDI Lengths.
● To fine-tune the distance between consecutive notes, use the Overlap slider.
At 0 Ticks, the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider extends each note so that it
exactly reaches the next note. Positive values cause the notes to overlap, and
negative values allow you to define a small gap between the notes.
● To use the Legato function or the slider to extend a note up to the next selected
note, activate Extend to Next Selected.
This is identical with activating the Legato Mode: Between Selected Notes Only
option in the Preferences dialog.

Scale Assistant
Allows you to select a musical scale that highlights all note events whose pitches
belong to this scale.

NOTE

If you open the Key Editor in the lower zone, these sections are shown in the Editor Inspector in
the left zone.

RELATED LINKS
Quantize Panel on page 259
Opening the Editor Inspector on page 52
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686

685
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Scale Assistant in the Key Editor

The Scale Assistant section of the Key Editor Inspector helps you to match note events to a
musical scale.

Scale Assistant Status Indicator

Shows the on/off status of the Scale Assistant.

Use Editor Scale

Allows you to select a scale for the notes in the Key Editor note display.
● Editor Scale
Allows you to select a scale.
● Scale Suggestions
Shows the number of scale suggestions that match the pitches of the MIDI
notes. Open the pop-up menu to choose one of the suggestions. To receive
scale suggestions for specific notes, select them. If no note is selected, the scale
suggestions are made for all notes in the note display.

Use Chord Track

Allows you to use the chord track data as a musical scale.
● Chord Track Mode
Allows you to select whether you want to use the scale events of the chord track,
the chord events, or both as a musical scale.

Show Scale Note Guides

Changes the display background of the note event according to the selected scale.
Pitches that do not belong to the selected scale are shown with a darker background.

Snap Pitch Editing

Snaps the pitches or the notes to the selected scale when you add, edit, or move them.

NOTE

Snap Pitch Editing does not apply when you change pitches using the Pitch value field
on the info line or if you record notes via MIDI input.

Snap Live Input

Automatically corrects the pitches of incoming notes according to the selected scale.

NOTE

This only works if Record in Editor is activated.

686
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

Quantize Pitches
Quantizes the pitches of the selected notes to the nearest pitch of the selected scale.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Note Display on page 687
Using Live Input on page 743
Event Colors Menu on page 644
Musical Scale Setup Dialog on page 737
Matching Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 691
Using the Chord Track to Match Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 692
Quantizing MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 694
Chord Track on page 726
Mapping Incoming MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 694
Snapping MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales While Editing on page 695

Key Editor Note Display

The note display is the main zone in the Key Editor. It contains a grid in which note events are
shown as boxes.

The width of a box corresponds to the note length. The vertical position of a box corresponds to
the note number (pitch), with higher note events higher up in the grid.

Depending on the zoom factor, the note events show the note names.

NOTE

You can change the naming format and the note names of the pitches in the Pitch Notation
section of the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Chords&Pitches page).

You can activate Pitch Visibility On/Off on the Key Editor toolbar, in order to show only the
pitches with events or the pitches suggested by the Scale Assistant. This hides the keyboard
keys whose pitches are not used and displays note names on the remaining keys.

687
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Piano Keyboard Display on page 688
Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 644
Pitch Notation on page 893
Pitch Visibility Options on page 690

Key Editor Piano Keyboard Display

The piano keyboard display is shown to the left of the note display in the Key Editor.

The piano keyboard offers you a visual orientation with regard to the pitch positions in the note
display and helps you to find specific note pitches.

You can click a key to listen to the pitch and the sound of the connected instrument.

If you move the mouse to the far left of the piano keyboard display, the mouse pointer changes,
allowing you to scroll up and down and to zoom in and out of the keyboard display:

● Drag upwards/downwards to scroll up/down in the piano keyboard display.

● Drag to the right/left to zoom in on/out of the piano keyboard display.

The C keys show the note names of the corresponding pitches.

You can activate Pitch Visibility On/Off on the Key Editor toolbar to show only the pitches with
events or the pitches suggested by the Scale Assistant. This hides the keyboard keys whose
pitches are not used and displays note names on the remaining keys.

NOTE

You can change the naming format and the note names of the pitches in the Pitch Notation
section of the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Chords&Pitches page).

If you select note events in the event display, the corresponding keys on the piano keyboard
display are shown in the same color as the note event.

688
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

NOTE

You can use the Event Colors menu in the Key Editor toolbar to select a color scheme.

If you move the mouse pointer in the event display, the corresponding pitch position on the
piano keyboard display is highlighted.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Note Display on page 687
Key Editor on page 675
Pitch Notation on page 893
Pitch Visibility Options on page 690
Event Colors Menu on page 644

Showing Specific Pitches in the Key Editor

You can define which pitches are visible in the event display and the piano keyboard display of
the Key Editor. By hiding pitches that you do not need, you can save screen space. This is useful
if you add note events that span more than one octave and want to display all of them, for
example.

PROCEDURE
1. On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up menu .

2. Do one of the following:

● To show only the pitches for which events are available in the note display, select Show
Pitches with Events.

NOTE

If you edit multiple MIDI parts, the pitches of all note events in the different MIDI
parts are taken into account. The visible pitches are updated according to the MIDI part
selection in the Project window.

● To show only the pitches that match the musical scale that is selected in the Scale
Assistant section of the Key Editor Inspector, select Show Pitches from Scale
Assistant.

RESULT
The note display and the piano keyboard display are changed according to your settings.

EXAMPLE
If you selected Show Pitches from Scale Assistant in the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up
menu and the Scale Assistant uses a specific scale, but some of the notes in the note display
do not match the scale, this is indicated by the color of the note events, and by the exclamation
mark on the corresponding keys on the keyboard display.

689
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor

RELATED LINKS
Pitch Visibility Options on page 690
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677
Key Editor Note Display on page 687
Key Editor Piano Keyboard Display on page 688

Pitch Visibility Options

The pitch visibility options allow you to show or hide specific pitches from the Key Editor event
display and the piano keyboard display. Pitch visibility options are saved with the program. If a
setting leads to a situation where no pitches would be shown, all pitches are shown instead.

● To open the pitch visibility options, click Select Pitch Visibility Options on the Key Editor
toolbar.

The following options are available:

Show Pitches with Events

Allows you to show only the pitches for which events are available in the note display.

NOTE

If you edit multiple MIDI parts, the pitches of all note events in the different MIDI
parts are taken into account. The visible pitches are updated, based on the MIDI part
selection in the Project window.

Show Pitches from Scale Assistant

Allows you to show only the pitches matching the musical scale that is selected in the
Scale Assistant section of the Key Editor Inspector.

● Use Editor Scale

Shows only notes that match the editor scale.

NOTE

If the note display contains note events on pitches that do not match the
selected scale, the corresponding keys on the keyboard display are shown with
an exclamation mark. If you activate the Scale/Chords option in the Event Colors

690
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

pop-up menu on the Key Editor toolbar, the non-matching note events are
displayed in a different color.

● Use Chord Track

Shows only notes that match the chord track. The Chord Track Mode that you
selected for the Scale Assistant determines if the pitches of the scale, the chord,
or both are visible.

RELATED LINKS
Event Colors Menu on page 644
Key Editor Piano Keyboard Display on page 688
Key Editor Note Display on page 687
Showing Specific Pitches in the Key Editor on page 689

Pitch Editing with Reduced Pitch Visibility

If you edit pitches and reduce the pitch visibility via one of the Select Pitch Visibility Options,
there are some general guidelines regarding the behavior of the program that you should keep
in mind.

As a general rule, you can only move note events to pitch positions that are visible. This applies
to moving note events upwards/downwards with the mouse, to using the corresponding key
command, or to using the cursor keys.

Exceptions
To access specific pitch positions that are not displayed, you have the following possibilities:

● To move note events to pitch positions that are not visible, use the Pitch value field on the
info line.
● To move note events by octaves, select the note event, and press Shift - Up Arrow to move it
up an octave or Shift - Down Arrow to move it down an octave.
● To move chord notes, open the Chord Editing section, and activate an option in the
Inversions or Drop Notes section.

In all these cases, the note display and the piano keyboard display extend to show the new
pitches.

RELATED LINKS
Pitch Visibility Options on page 690
Key Editor Note Display on page 687
Key Editor Piano Keyboard Display on page 688

Key Editor Operations

This section describes the principal editing operations within the Key Editor.

Matching Note Events to a Musical Scale

You can select a musical scale that is based on all or selected note events in the Key Editor and
match note events to it.

PROCEDURE
1. Open a MIDI part in the Key Editor.

691
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

2. Open the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector, and activate Use Editor Scale.
3. Do one of the following:
● Select some note events in the note display to receive suggestions of musical scales that
match those notes.
● Deselect all note events in the note display to receive suggestions of musical scales that
match all notes of the MIDI part.
4. Activate Show Scale Note Guides.
This changes the background of the event display according to the selected scale so that
pitches that do not belong to the scale are shown with a darker background.
5. On the Key Editor toolbar, set Event Colors to Scale/Chords.
This changes the colors of the note events in the event display according to whether or not
the pitches match the selected musical scale.

NOTE

To view the color scheme of the selected color mode, open the Event Colors pop-up menu,
and select Setup.

6. Open the Scale Suggestions pop-up menu, and select one of the options.
7. Optional: On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up menu
, and select Show Pitches from Scale Assistant.
This filters the note display and the piano keyboard display so that they show only the
pitches that match the selected musical scale.

RESULT
The coloring of the event display background and the note events serves as a visual guide for
editing note pitches.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

If you need more assistance to match note events to the nearest pitches of the selected musical
scale, you can click Quantize Pitches to quantize pitches of existing MIDI notes. Activate Snap
Pitch Editing to snap the note pitches of MIDI notes while editing or Snap Live Input to map the
note pitches of incoming MIDI.

RELATED LINKS
Using the Chord Track to Match Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 692
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686
Showing Specific Pitches in the Key Editor on page 689
Snapping MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales While Editing on page 695
Mapping Incoming MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 694
Quantizing MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 694

Using the Chord Track to Match Note Events to a Musical Scale

You can select a musical scale that is defined by chords or scales on the chord track and match
note events to it.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track with chord events to your project.

692
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

PROCEDURE
1. Open a MIDI part in the Key Editor.
2. Open the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector, and activate Use Chord Track.
3. Open the Chord Track Mode pop-up menu, and do one of the following:

● To match note events to the scale events on the chord track, select Scales.
● To match note events to the chord events on the chord track, select Chords.
● To match note events to both scale and chord events on the chord track, select Chords &
Scales.
4. Activate Show Scale Note Guides.
This changes the background of the event display according to the selected scale, so that
pitches that do not belong to the scale are shown with a darker background.
5. On the Key Editor toolbar, set Event Colors to Scale/Chords.
This changes the colors of the note events in the event display according to whether or not
the pitches match the selected musical scale.

NOTE

To view the color scheme of the selected color mode, open the Event Colors pop-up menu,
and select Setup.

6. Optional: On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up menu
, and select Show Pitches from Scale Assistant.
This filters the note display and the piano keyboard display so that they show only the
pitches that match the selected musical scale.

RESULT
The coloring of the event display background and the note events serves as a visual guide for
editing note pitches.

NOTE

As you might have added different scale/chord events at specific time positions, the scale
indications in the event display background and on the note events change along the timeline.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

If you need more assistance with matching note events to the nearest pitches of the selected
musical scale, you can click Quantize Pitches to quantize pitches of existing MIDI notes, activate
Snap Pitch Editing to snap the note pitches of MIDI notes while editing or activate Snap Live
Input to map the note pitches of incoming MIDI.

RELATED LINKS
Event Colors Menu on page 644
Matching Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 691
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686
Showing Specific Pitches in the Key Editor on page 689
Chord Track on page 726

693
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

Quantizing MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales

You can quantize MIDI note pitches to the nearest pitch of the selected scale.

PREREQUISITE
In the Key Editor, you have selected a scale for your MIDI notes or you have selected a Chord
Track Mode.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector.
2. Optional: Activate Show Scale Note Guides.
3. Do one of the following:

● In the note event display, select the notes whose pitches you want to quantize.
● Deselect all notes in the note event display to quantize all note pitches of the MIDI part.
4. Click Quantize Pitches.

RESULT
All note pitches that do not match the selected scale are quantized to the nearest pitches in the
scale.

RELATED LINKS
Matching Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 691
Using the Chord Track to Match Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 692
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686
Snapping MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales While Editing on page 695
Mapping Incoming MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 694
Quantizing MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 694

Mapping Incoming MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales

When monitoring or recording in the Key Editor, you can map the note pitches of incoming MIDI
to the nearest pitches of the selected scale.

PREREQUISITE
In the Key Editor, you have selected a scale for the MIDI notes or you have selected a Chord
Track Mode.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector.
2. Activate Show Scale Note Guides.
3. On the Key Editor toolbar, activate Record in Editor.
4. To start playback, click Start on the Transport panel or in the Transport Bar.
5. Activate Snap Live Input.
6. Play or record some notes on your MIDI keyboard.

RESULT
The pitches of the played or recorded notes are automatically mapped to the selected scale.

694
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

RELATED LINKS
Matching Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 691
Using the Chord Track to Match Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 692
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686
Using Live Input on page 743

Snapping MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales While Editing

You can snap the note pitches of MIDI notes to the nearest pitches of the selected scale while
editing in the Key Editor.

PREREQUISITE
In the Key Editor, you have selected a scale for your MIDI notes or you have selected a Chord
Track Mode.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector.
2. Activate Show Scale Note Guides.
3. Activate Snap Pitch Editing.
4. Do one of the following:
● Insert a note event with the Draw tool, the Object Selection tool, or with the Line tool.
● Drag a note event upwards or downwards with the mouse.
● Select a note event, and use the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys.

RESULT
The notes snap to pitches of the selected scale. You cannot place notes on pitches outside of the
scale. If you select multiple notes and move them to different pitches, all selected notes snap to
the pitches of the selected scale.

NOTE

Snap Pitch Editing does not apply when you change pitches by means of the Pitch value field on
the info line or if you record notes via MIDI input.

RELATED LINKS
Matching Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 691
Using the Chord Track to Match Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 692
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686
Drawing Note Events with the Draw Tool on page 696
Inserting Note Events with the Object Selection Tool on page 695
Drawing Note Events with the Line Tool on page 697
Moving and Transposing Note Events on page 698
Modifying Note Values while Inserting Notes on page 697

Inserting Note Events with the Object Selection Tool

You can insert note events with the Object Selection tool.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up the length for the note events quantize value in the Length Quantize pop-up
menu of the toolbar.

695
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

PROCEDURE
● In the note display, double-click with the Object Selection tool at the position where you
want to insert a note.

RESULT
A note is inserted at the position where you double-clicked.

Deleting Note Events

PROCEDURE
● Perform one of the following actions:

● Select the Erase tool, and click the event.

● Select the Object Selection tool, and double-click the event.

RESULT
The note event is deleted.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677

Drawing Note Events with the Draw Tool

The Draw tool allows you to insert single note events in the note display.

When you move the cursor inside the note display, its position is indicated on the status line. Its
pitch is indicated both on the status line and on the piano keyboard to the left.

● To draw a note, click in the note display.

The note event has the length that is set on the Length Quantize pop-up menu.
● To draw longer note events, click and drag in the note display.
The length of the note event is a multiple of the Length Quantize value. If Length Quantize
is set to Quantize Link, the note value is determined by the quantize grid. The Snap function
is taken into account.

NOTE

To temporarily switch from the Object Selection tool to the Draw tool, hold down Alt/Opt .

696
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

Modifying Note Values while Inserting Notes

When inserting note events, you can modify specific note values on the fly.

● To edit the note velocity, drag upwards or downwards.

● To edit the note pitch, hold down Alt/Opt , and drag upwards or downwards.
● To edit the note length, drag to the left or to the right.
● To edit the time position, hold down Shift , and drag to the left or to the right.

NOTE

You can activate/deactivate Snap temporarily by holding down Ctrl/Cmd .

Drawing Note Events with the Line Tool

In the note display, the Line tool allows you to draw a series of contiguous note events along
different line shapes.

● To create contiguous note events, click and drag in the note display.
● To restrict movement to the horizontal direction, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag.
The notes have the same pitch.

If Snap is activated, the note events and the controller events are positioned and sized according
to the Quantize and Length Quantize values.

RELATED LINKS
Line Tool Modes on page 697

Line Tool Modes

The Line tool allows you to create a series of contiguous note events along different line shapes.
You can also edit multiple controller events simultaneously.

● To open the Line tool modes, click Line.

The following line modes are available:

Line
If this option is activated, you can click and drag to insert note events in the note
display along a straight line, at any angle. Use this option to edit controller data along a
straight line in the controller display.

Parabola, Sine, Triangle, Square

These modes insert note events along different curve shapes.

Paint
This mode allows you to insert note events by painting in the note display.

697
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

Moving and Transposing Note Events

There are several options to move and transpose note events.

● To move note events in the editor, select the Object Selection tool, and drag the notes to a
new position.
All selected note events are moved, maintaining their relative positions. Snap is taken into
account.
● To allow only horizontal or only vertical movement, hold down Ctrl/Cmd while dragging.
● To move note events via the buttons in the Nudge section on the toolbar, select the note
events, and click a button.
● To move note events to the project cursor position, select the note events, and select Edit >
Move > Event Start/Range Start to Cursor.
● To move a note event via the info line, select a note event, and edit the Position or Pitch on
the info line.
● To transpose note events, select the note events and use the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys.
● To transpose note events via the Transpose Setup dialog, select the note events, and select
MIDI > Transpose Setup.
● To transpose note events in steps of one octave, press Shift , and use the Up Arrow /
Down Arrow keys.

NOTE

● When you move selected note events to a different position, any controllers selected for
these note events move accordingly.
● You can also adjust the position of note events by quantizing.

RELATED LINKS
Transpose Setup Dialog on page 631

Resizing Note Events

Do one of the following:

● To resize the note event, position the Object Selection tool at the start or at the end of a
note event, and drag the mouse cursor to the left or right.
● To move the start or the end positions of the selected notes in steps according to the Length
Quantize value on the toolbar, use the Nudge Start Left, Nudge Start Right, Nudge End
Left, and Nudge End Right buttons in the Nudge section.
● Select the note, and adjust its length on the info line.
● Select Draw, and drag left or right within the note display to draw a note.
The resulting note event length is a multiple of the Length Quantize value on the toolbar.
● Select Trim, and cut off the end or the beginning of note events.

RELATED LINKS
Value Editing Rules on the Info Line on page 48
Using the Trim Tool on page 699
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch on page 175

698
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

Using the Trim Tool

The Trim tool allows you to change the length of note events by cutting off the end or the
beginning of notes. Using the Trim tool means moving the note-on or the note-off event for one
or several notes to a position defined with the mouse.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Trim on the toolbar.
The mouse pointer changes to a knife symbol.
2. To edit a single note, click it.
The range between the mouse pointer and the end of the note is removed. Use the mouse
note info on the status line to find the exact position for the trim operation.
3. To edit several notes, click and drag across the notes.

By default, the Trim tool cuts off the end of notes. To trim the beginning of notes, press
Alt while dragging. When dragged across several notes, a line is displayed. The notes are
trimmed along this line. Pressing Ctrl/Cmd while dragging results in a vertical trim line,
allowing you to set the same start or end time for all edited notes. You can change the Trim
tool key commands in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tool Modifiers page).

Splitting Note Events

● To split the note at a specific position, select Split, and click.
If several notes are selected, they are all split at the same position. The snap setting is taken
into account.
● To split all notes that are intersected by the project cursor position, select Edit > Functions >
Split at Cursor.
● To split all notes that are intersected by the left or right locator at the locator positions, select
Edit > Functions > Split Loop.

Gluing Note Events

You can glue note events of the same pitch.

● To glue note events, select Glue, and click on a note event.

The note event is glued together with the next note event of the same pitch. The result is a
long note event that spans from the start of the first note to the end of the second note. The
properties (velocity, pitch, etc.) of the first note event apply.

Changing the Pitch of Chords

You can use the chord type buttons to change the pitch of chords.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Key Editor Inspector, open the Chord Editing section.

699
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

2. In the note display, select the notes that you want to edit.
If the chord is recognized, the root note, the chord type, and the tensions are indicated in the
Chord Type field. This also works with arpeggiated notes.
3. In the Chord Editing section, activate one of the 3-Note Chords/Triads buttons or 4-Note
Chords buttons.
The selected notes are transposed so that they fit the selected chord type.
4. Use the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys to change the pitch of the chord.

Changing the Voicing of Chords

PROCEDURE
1. In the Key Editor Inspector, open the Chord Editing section.
2. In the note display, select the notes that you want to edit.
3. In the Chord Editing section, use the Inversions buttons and the Drop Notes buttons to
change the voicing.

RESULT
The selected notes are transposed so that they fit the selected chord type.

Chord Editing Section

The Chord Editing section in the Key Editor Inspector allows you to insert and edit chords, and
to change voicings.

Chord type of selected notes

Shows the chord type of the selected chords.

Add to Chord Track

Adds the chord, as indicated in the Chord type of selected notes field, to the chord
track. The chord event is inserted at the position on the chord track that corresponds
to the position of the MIDI notes. Any existing chord events at this position are
overwritten.

700
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

Match with Chord Track

Applies the chord events from the chord track to the selected notes in the MIDI editor.
The chord event that is effective at the position of the first selected note is applied to
the selected notes, which are then transposed. Only the basic chord type is applied.
Tensions are not taken into account.
Only the first effective chord event is applied.

3-Note Chords/Triads
Allows you to insert triads into the note display. You can also click one of the 3-Note
Chords/Triads buttons to transpose the selected notes so that they fit to the selected
chord type.

4-Note Chords
Allows you to insert 4-note chords to the note display. You can also click one of the
4-Note Chords buttons to transpose the selected notes so that they fit to the selected
chord type.

Inversions - Move Up

Inverts the lowest note of a chord. The corresponding notes are transposed by as
many octaves as needed.

Inversions - Move Down

Inverts the highest note of a chord. The corresponding notes are transposed by as
many octaves as needed.

Drop Notes - Drop 2

Moves the second highest note of a chord down by one octave.

Drop Notes - Drop 3

Moves the third highest note of a chord down by one octave.

Drop Notes - Drop 2 + 4

Moves the second and fourth highest notes of a chord down by one octave.

Create Chord Events

Performs a chord analysis of the selected notes. If no note is selected, the entire MIDI
part is analyzed.

RELATED LINKS
Create Chord Events Dialog on page 748

Inserting Chords
You can use the tools in the Chord Editing section of the Key Editor Inspector to insert and edit
chords.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Key Editor Inspector, open the Chord Editing section.
2. Select the Insert tool to the right of the chord type that you want to insert.

701
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

3. Click in the note display, and drag to the left or right to determine the length of the chord.
Drag up or down to determine its pitch.
To change the chord type while you insert chords, hold Alt , and drag up or down.
If Acoustic Feedback is activated, you hear the chord while dragging. A tooltip indicates the
root note and the chord type of the inserted chord. Snap and Length Quantize are taken
into account.

Applying Chord Events to Note Events

You can apply chord events from the chord track to notes in the MIDI editor.

PREREQUISITE
Create a chord track, and add chord events.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the MIDI editor.
2. In the Key Editor Inspector, open the Chord Editing section.
3. Select Match with Chord Track.

RESULT
The first chord event of the chord track is applied to the selected notes. Only the basic chord type
is applied. Tensions are not taken into account.

Drum Map Handling

When a drum map is assigned to a MIDI or instrument track, the Key Editor displays the drum
sound names, as defined by the drum map. This allows you to use the Key Editor for drum
editing, for example, when editing drum note lengths or when editing several parts to identify
drum events.

The name of the drum sound is displayed in the following locations:

● On the info line in the Pitch field.

● On the status line in the Mouse Value field.
● In the note event, if the zoom factor is high enough.
● At the mouse pointer when dragging a note event.

Editing Note Events via MIDI Input

The MIDI Input allows you to insert note events or chords via MIDI. These can be added to
already existing note events or they can replace them.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the Key Editor toolbar, and activate Step/MIDI Input.
2. In the Step/MIDI Input section, activate MIDI Input.
3. Use the controls to the right to determine which properties are included when you insert the
note events:

● To include the pitch when you insert notes, activate Record Pitch.

702
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

● To include the note-on velocity/note-off velocity of the played notes, activate Record
NoteOn Velocity/Record NoteOff Velocity.
● To keep existing notes, activate Keep Existing Notes.
4. In the note display, select the note event that you want to edit.
5. Press one or several keys on your MIDI instrument.

RESULT
The selected note assumes the pitch, the note-on velocity and/or the note-off velocity of the
played note or chord. The next note in the edited part is automatically selected, to allow for quick
editing of a series of notes.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677
Inserting Note Events via Step Input on page 703

Inserting Note Events via Step Input

Step Input allows you to insert note events or chords one at a time, without worrying about the
exact timing. This is useful, for example, when you know the part to record but are not able to
play it exactly as you want it.

PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the Key Editor toolbar, and activate Step/MIDI Input.
2. In the Step/MIDI Input section, activate Step Input.
3. Open the Length Quantize pop-up menu, and select a value to determine the length of the
note events or chords that you want to insert.

NOTE

If you set the Length Quantize value to Quantize Link, the note length is determined by the
Quantize value.

4. Open the Quantize pop-up menu, and select a value to determine the step length, that is,
the position of the following note events or chords that you want to insert.
5. Set the project cursor to the position where you want the first note event or chord to start.
6. Do one of the following:
● To insert a note event or a chord, press one or several keys on your MIDI instrument.

NOTE

The length of the inserted note event or chord is determined by the Length Quantize
value.

● To lengthen/shorten the note event or chord while inserting it, press one or several keys
on your MIDI instrument, and press Right Arrow / Left Arrow while you hold the keys.

NOTE

The initial length of the inserted note event or chord is determined by the Length
Quantize value. However, the lengthening/shortening factor is determined by the
Quantize value.

703
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

The step input cursor is displayed with blue a handle in the ruler, and a vertical line in the
note display.

The note event or chord is inserted and the step input cursor automatically jumps to the next
position on the timeline that is determined by the Quantize value.

NOTE

You can move the step input cursor manually by clicking in the note display, or by pressing
Right Arrow / Left Arrow .

7. Optional: To insert a rest, press the Right Arrow key. This advances the step input cursor by
one step.
8. Repeat the steps above to insert further note events or chords.
9. When you are done, click Step Input again to deactivate step input.

RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 677
Editing Note Events via MIDI Input on page 702

Drum Editor
You can use the Drum Editor when you are editing drum or percussion parts.

You can open the Drum Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
Opening the Drum Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful to access the Drum
Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.

To open a MIDI part in the Drum Editor, do one of the following:

● Select a MIDI part in the Project window, and select MIDI > Open Drum Editor.

If the MIDI track has a drum map assigned to it and Editor Content Follows Event Selection
and Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned are activated in the Preferences dialog
(Editors page), you can do the following to open a MIDI part in the Drum Editor:

● Double-click a MIDI part in the Project window.

● Select a MIDI part in the Project window, and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd - E .
● Select a MIDI part in the Project window, and select MIDI > Open Drum Editor.
● In the Key Commands dialog in the Editors category, assign a key command to Open Drum
Editor. Select a MIDI part in the Project window, and use the key command.

704
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

NOTE

If you select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors
page. Specify if you want the Drum Editor to open in a separate window or in the lower zone of
the Project window.

The Drum Editor window:

The Drum Editor is divided into several sections:

1 Toolbar
Contains tools and settings.
2 Status line
Informs you about the mouse time position and the mouse value.
3 Info line
Displays information about the selected event.
4 Left Zone (Drum Editor Inspector)
Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data.
5 Drum sound list
Lists all drum sounds.
6 Ruler
Displays the timeline.
7 Note display
Contains a grid in which notes are displayed.
8 Drum map
Allows you to select the drum map for the edited track or a list of drum sound names.
9 Controller display
The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes.

705
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

NOTE

You can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, and the controller lanes by clicking Set
up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options.

RELATED LINKS
Drum Editor Toolbar on page 706
Drum Editor Status Line on page 712
Drum Editor Info Line on page 713
Drum Editor Inspector on page 714
Drum Editor Note Display on page 715
Controller Display on page 653

Drum Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the Drum Editor.

● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar, and activate or deactivate the
elements.

Solo/Feedback
Solo Editor

Solos the editor during playback if the editor has the focus.

Solo Instrument (Requires Drum Map)

Solos the instrument during playback.

NOTE

This only works if there is a drum map assigned.

Record in Editor

Enables the recording of MIDI data in the editor if the editor has the focus.

NOTE

This only works with MIDI Record Mode set to Merge or Replace.

Retrospective Record
Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor

Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are
always shown.

706
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

Pitch Visibility
Pitch Visibility On/Off

Activates the selected pitch visibility option.

Select Pitch Visibility Options

Deactivate this to show all drum sounds in the note display. Activate this to reduce the
drum sounds in the note display according to the selected pitch visibility option.
● Show Drum Sounds with Events shows only the drum sounds for which events
are available in the note display.
● Show Drum Sounds in Use by Instruments shows the drum sounds for which a
pad, etc. is in use. This option is only available in case the instrument can provide
this information.
● Reverse Drum Sound List reverses the order of the sounds displayed in the drum
sound list.

Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll

Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.

Select Auto-Scroll Settings

Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend
Auto-Scroll When Editing.

Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic Feedback

Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you
create them by drawing.

Tool Buttons
Object Selection

Selects events and parts.

Range Selection

Selects ranges.

Drumstick

Draws drum events.

Erase

Deletes events.

707
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

Mute

Mutes events.

Zoom

Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt , and click to zoom out.

Line

Creates a series of continuous events.

Auto Select Controllers

Auto Select Controllers

Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes.

Independent Track Loop

Independent Track Loop

Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.

Nudge
Nudge Settings

Allow you to set up a snap grid for the nudge commands.

● By default, the snap grid for nudge operations is set to Link to Grid, and the step
width corresponds to the snap grid.
● If you activate Link to Primary Time Format, the snap grid for nudge operations
follows the primary time format, and you can set up the step width in the Nudge
Settings pop-up menu.
● If you deactivate Link to Grid and Link to Primary Time Format, you can set up
an independent snap grid for nudge operations. In this case, you can select a time
format and a value from the Nudge Settings pop-up menu.

NOTE

To display the nudge buttons, click the points to the right of the Nudge Settings.

Nudge Start Left

Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left.

Nudge Start Right

Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right.

Move Left

708
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

Moves the selected event to the left.

Move Right

Moves the selected event to the right.

Nudge End Left

Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left.

Nudge End Right

Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right.

Transpose Palette
Move Up

Transposes the selected event up by a half note.

Move Down

Transposes the selected event down by a half note.

Move Up More

Transposes the selected event up by an octave.

Move Down More

Transposes the selected event down by an octave.

Insert Velocity
Note Insert Velocity

Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes.

Notes Length
Insert Length

Allows you to determine a length for newly created notes.

Show Note Length On/Off

Shows drum notes as boxes that display the note length.

Snap
Snap On/Off

Activates/Deactivates the Snap function.

709
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

Snap Type

Allows you to select one of the following snap types:

● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up
menu.
● Grid Relative keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the grid.
● Events snaps events to the start or to the end of other events.
● Shuffle changes the order of events, if you drag one event to the left or to the
right of other events.
● Cursor snaps events to the cursor position.
● Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize
Presets pop-up menu, or to the cursor position.
● Events + Cursor snaps events to the start or to the end of other events, or to the
cursor position.
● Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the
Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or to the end of other events, or to
the cursor position.

Grid Type

Allows you to select one of the following grid types:

● Use Quantize activates a grid where events snap to the value that is selected in
the Quantize Presets pop-up menu.
● Adapt to Zoom activates a grid where events snap to the zoom level.
● Use Snap from Drum Map activates a grid where events snap to the Snap value
that is selected in the drum map.

Quantize
Apply Quantize

Applies the quantize settings.

Quantize Presets

Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset.

Soft Quantize On/Off

Activates/Deactivates soft quantize.

Open Quantize Panel

Opens the Quantize Panel.

Multiple Part Controls

Show Part Borders

Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part within the left and right locators.

710
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

Part Editing Mode

Sets the editing mode for parts.

● All Parts allows you to select and edit all events of all visible parts.
● Active Part restricts selecting and editing to events of the active part.

Part Editing Mode

Sets the editing mode for parts.

● All Parts allows you to select and edit all events of all visible parts.
● Active Part restricts selecting and editing to events of the active part.

Activate Part for Editing

Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor and allows you to activate
a part.

Event Colors
Event Colors

Allows you to select event colors.

Step/MIDI Input
Step Input

Activates/Deactivates step input.

MIDI Input

Activates/Deactivates MIDI input.

Move Insert Mode

Moves all note events to the right of the step input cursor to make room for the
inserted event when you insert notes.

NOTE

This only works if Step Input is activated.

Record Pitch

Includes the pitch when you insert notes.

Record NoteOn Velocity

Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes.

Record NoteOff Velocity

711
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes.

Keep Existing Notes

Keeps existing notes when you insert notes.

Right Divider
Right Divider
Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are
always shown.

Window Zone Controls

Open in Separate Window

This button is available in the Editor tab in the lower zone. It opens the editor in a
separate window.

Open in Lower Zone

This button is available in the editor window. It opens the Editor tab in the lower zone
of the Project window.

Show/Hide Left Zone

Shows/Hides the left zone.

Show/Hide Controller Lanes

Shows/Hides the controller lanes.

Set up Window Layout

Allows you to set up the window layout.

RELATED LINKS
Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 644
Part Editing Mode Pane on page 652

Drum Editor Status Line

The Drum Editor status line is displayed below the toolbar. It displays important mouse
information.

● To show the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Status
Line.

The on/off status of the status line in the Drum Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
zone of the Project window are independent of each other.

712
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

Mouse Time Position

Displays the exact time position of the mouse pointer, depending on the selected ruler
time format. This lets you edit or insert notes at exact positions.

Mouse Value
Displays the exact pitch of the mouse pointer position in the event display. This
facilitates finding the right pitch when entering or transposing notes.
If you move the mouse in the controller display, the controller event value at the
mouse cursor position is displayed.

Track Loop Start/Track Loop End

If Independent Track Loop is activated on the toolbar and you set up a loop, the
start/end position is displayed.

RELATED LINKS
Drum Editor Toolbar on page 706

Drum Editor Info Line

The Drum Editor info line displays values and properties of the selected events. If several notes
are selected, the values for the first note are displayed in color.

Info Line for Selected Drum Note Events

● To show the info line for drum note events, select the events with the Object Selection tool,
click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Info Line.
● NOTE

If several notes are selected, the values for the first note are displayed in color.

The values for Start, End, and Length are displayed in the selected ruler time format.

The values for Velocity and Off Velocity can be displayed in high resolution. In the Preferences
dialog (Editing—MIDI page), set up the High Resolution Display Range and the High
Resolution Display Format.

NOTE

The on/off status of the info line in the Drum Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
zone of the Project window are independent of each other.

Info Line for Selected Ranges

● To show the info line for a selected range, select a range with the Range Selection tool, click
Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Info Line.

NOTE

The on/off status of the info line in the Drum Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
zone of the Project window are independent of each other.

713
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

● To show the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Info Line.

NOTE

● The on/off status of the info line in the Drum Editor window and in the Editor tab in the
lower zone of the Project window are independent of each other.
● If several events are selected, the values for the first event are displayed in color.

The values for Start, End, and Length are displayed in the selected ruler time format.

The values for Velocity and Off Velocity can be displayed in high resolution. In the Preferences
dialog (Editing—MIDI page), set up the High Resolution Display Range and the High
Resolution Decimal Count.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Note Events on the Info Line on page 650
Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line on page 622
Editing - MIDI on page 887

Drum Editor Inspector

The Drum Editor Inspector is located to the left of the note display. It contains tools and
functions for working with MIDI data.

● To show/hide Inspector sections, right-click the toolbar, and activate/deactivate the

corresponding options.

Quantize
Allows you to access the main quantize parameters. These are identical with the
functions on the Quantize Panel.

Length
Contains length-related options, similar to the Functions submenu of the MIDI menu.
● To change the length of the selected MIDI events or to change all events of the
active part with no events selected, use the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider.
At the maximum value, the notes reach the beginning of the next note.
● To make the new length settings permanent, click Freeze MIDI Lengths.
● To fine-tune the distance between consecutive notes, use the Overlap slider.
At 0 Ticks, the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider extends each note so that it
exactly reaches the next note. Positive values cause the notes to overlap, and
negative values allow you to define a small gap between the notes.
● To use the Legato function or the slider to extend a note up to the next selected
note, activate Extend to Next Selected.
This is identical with activating the Legato Mode: Between Selected Notes Only
option in the Preferences dialog.

714
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

NOTE

If you open the Drum Editor in the lower zone, these sections are shown in the Editor Inspector
in the left zone.

RELATED LINKS
Quantize Panel on page 259
Opening the Editor Inspector on page 52

Drum Editor Note Display

The note display of the Drum Editor contains a grid in which note events are shown.

The notes are displayed as diamond symbols. If you activate Show Note Length On/Off on the
toolbar, notes are displayed as boxes, indicating the note length.

The vertical position of the notes corresponds to the drum sound list to the left, while the
horizontal position corresponds to the position of the note in time.

RELATED LINKS
Drum Editor Toolbar on page 706

Drum Sound List

The drum sound list lists all drum sounds by name and allows you to adjust and manipulate the
drum sound setup in various ways.

NOTE

The number of columns in the list depends on whether a drum map is selected for the track or
not.

715
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor

Pitch
Note number of the drum sound.

Drum Sound
Name of the drum sound.

Snap
This is used when entering and editing notes.

Mute
Allows you to mute drum sounds.

I-Note
Input note for the drum sound. When you play this note, it is mapped to the
corresponding drum sound and automatically transposed according to the Pitch
setting for the sound.

O-Note
The MIDI output note that is sent out every time the drum sound is played back.

Channel
The MIDI channel on which the drum sound is played back.

Output
The MIDI output on which the drum sound is played back.

RELATED LINKS
Muting Notes and Drum Sounds on page 725
Drum Maps on page 717

Select Pitch Visibility Options Menu

The Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up menu on the drum editor toolbar allows you to
determine which drum sounds are shown in the drum sound list.

● Activate Pitch Visibility On/Off, and click Select Pitch Visibility Options on the
toolbar.

NOTE

If Pitch Visibility On/Off is deactivated, all drum sounds of the selected drum map are
displayed, and you can manually edit the order of the drum sound list.

Show Drum Sounds with Events

Shows only the drum sounds for which events are available in the selected MIDI part.

Show Drum Sounds in use by Instrument

Shows all drum sounds for which a pad, etc. is used by the instrument. This option is
only available in case the instrument can provide this information.

Reverse Drum Sound List

Reverses the order of the sounds displayed in the drum sound list.

716
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps

Drum Map and Names Menus

The pop-up menus below the drum sound list allow you to choose a drum map for the edited
track or to select items or a list of drum sound names.

RELATED LINKS
Drum Maps on page 717

Drum Maps
A drum kit in a MIDI instrument is most often a set of different drum sounds, with each sound
placed on a separate key. For example, the different sounds are assigned to different MIDI note
numbers. One key plays a bass drum sound, another one a snare, and so on.

Different MIDI instruments often use different key assignments. This can be troublesome if you
have created a drum pattern using one MIDI device and then want to transfer it to another
one. When you switch devices, it is very likely that your snare drum becomes a ride cymbal or
your hi-hat becomes a tom, etc., because the drum sounds are distributed differently in the
instruments.

To solve this problem and to simplify aspects of MIDI drum kits, such as using drum sounds from
different instruments with the same drum kit, Cubase features drum maps. A drum map is a list
of drum sounds with a number of settings for each sound. When you play back a MIDI track with
a drum map assigned to it, the MIDI notes are filtered through the drum map before they are
sent to the MIDI instrument. The map determines the MIDI note number sent out for each drum
sound and the sound played on the receiving MIDI device.

To try your drum pattern on another instrument, switch to the corresponding drum map, and
your snare drum sound remains a snare drum sound.

To include the same drum maps in your projects, load these into the template.

NOTE

Drum maps are saved with the project files. If you have created or modified a drum map, use the
Save function to save it as a separate XML file to make it available for loading into other projects.

RELATED LINKS
Saving a Project Template File on page 89

Drum Map Setup Dialog

This dialog allows you to load, create, modify, and save drum maps.

● To open the Drum Map Setup dialog, select Drum Map Setup from the Map pop-up menu
or from the MIDI menu.

717
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps

The list on the left shows the loaded drum maps.

NOTE

The settings for the drum sounds are the same as in the Drum Editor.

New Map
Adds a new drum map to the project. The drum sounds are named “Sound 1”, “Sound
2”, etc. The map is named “Empty Map”.
To rename the drum map, click the name in the list, and type in a new name.

New Copy
Adds a copy of the selected drum map to create a new drum map. You can then
change the drum sound settings of the copy and rename the drum map in the list.

Remove
Removes the selected drum map from the project.

Save
Allows you to save the drum map that is selected in the list on disk. Drum map files
have the extension .drm.

Load
Allows you to load drum maps into your project.

Output
Allows you to select the output for the drum map sounds.

Drum Sound list

The drum sound list displays the sounds and the settings of the selected drum map.

NOTE

If you audition a sound in the Drum Map Setup dialog, and the sound is set to MIDI output
Default, the output that is selected on the Output pop-up menu in the lower left corner is used.
When auditioning a default output sound in the Drum Editor, the MIDI output selected for the
track is used.

Pitch
Shows the note number of the drum sound.

718
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps

Drum Sound
Shows the name of the drum sound in the map.

Snap
This is used when entering and editing notes.

Mute
Allows you to mute drum sounds.

I-Note
Input note for the drum sound. When you play this note, it is mapped to the
corresponding drum sound and automatically transposed according to the Pitch
setting for the sound.

O-Note
The MIDI output note that is sent out every time the drum sound is played back.

Channel
The MIDI channel on which the drum sound is played back.

Output
The MIDI output on which the drum sound is played back.

Display Note
The display pitch at which the note is shown in the Score Editor.

Noteheads
Allows you to assign a notehead set to each percussion instrument in the drum map.
Each notehead set in the library defines a set of notehead symbols for different note
durations. These are preset and are not user editable. Each percussion instrument in
the drum kit is assigned a notehead set.

Voice
Allows you to make all notes with this pitch belong to a certain voice, so that they get
a common rest handling and stem direction. You can set up 4 voices: Stem up 1, Stem
down 1, Stem up 2, Stem down 2.

Instrument Type
Shows the unpitched percussion instrument.

NOTE

If you work with a custom drum map, you must set the Instrument Type for each
pitch. Otherwise, no notation is displayed.

If you create a drum map with the Create Drum Map from Instrument function the
Instrument Type is mapped automatically.

Technique
Allows you to select a playback technique for the instrument.

RELATED LINKS
Drum Map Settings on page 720
Channel and Output Settings on page 721

719
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps

Drum Map Settings

A drum map consists of settings for 128 drum sounds, one for each MIDI note number.

● To get an overview of the drum map settings, open the Drum Editor, and use the Map
pop-up menu below the drum sound list to select the GM Map drum map.

The GM map is set up according to the General MIDI standard.

You can change all drum map settings, aside from the pitch, in the drum sound list or in the
Drum Map Setup dialog. These changes affect all tracks that use the drum map.

RELATED LINKS
Drum Sound List on page 715
Drum Map Setup Dialog on page 717

Importing Drum Maps from Virtual Instruments

You can import your drum map settings to an instrument track that is routed to Groove Agent SE.

PREREQUISITE
To import your drum map settings to an instrument track, the track has to be routed to Groove
Agent SE or to another drum instrument that supports drum maps.

PROCEDURE
1. Load a drum kit in Groove Agent SE.
2. In the Inspector for the track, open the Routing section.
3. In the Drum Maps pop-up menu, and select Create Drum Map from Instrument.
The drum map is created for the kit that is assigned to the MIDI port and the channel
selected in the Inspector.
4. Open the Drum Maps pop-up menu again, and select Drum Map Setup.
5. From the list on the left, select the kit that you have loaded in the instrument.

RESULT
The sounds and settings of the instrument are displayed in the Drum Map Setup.

NOTE

Instrument and pattern pads are both exported to the drum map. If they share keys, the pattern
pads are prioritized, that is, their settings are included in the drum map.

720
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps

Channel and Output Settings

You can set separate MIDI channels and/or MIDI outputs for each sound in a drum map. When a
drum map is selected for a track, the MIDI channel settings in the drum map override the MIDI
channel setting for the track.

You can select different channels and/or outputs for different sounds. This allows you to
construct drum kits with sounds from several different MIDI devices, etc.

● To make a drum sound use the channel of the track, set the channel in the drum map to Any.
● To make the sound use the MIDI output that is selected for the track, set the MIDI output for
a sound in a drum map to Default.
● To send the sound to a specific MIDI output, select any other option.
● To select the same MIDI channel or MIDI device for all sounds in a drum map, click in the
Channel column, press Ctrl/Cmd , and select a channel or output.
● If you make specific MIDI channel and output settings for all sounds in a drum map, you can
switch between drum maps to send your drum tracks to another MIDI instrument.

Selecting a Drum Map for a Track

● To select a drum map for a MIDI track, open the Drum Maps pop-up menu in the Routing
section of the Inspector or the Map pop-up menu in the Drum Editor, and select a drum
map.
● To deactivate the drum map functionality in the Drum Editor, open the Drum Maps pop-up
menu in the Routing section of the Inspector or the Map pop-up menu in the Drum Editor,
and select No Drum Map.
Even if you do not use a drum map, you can still separate sounds by name via a name list.

NOTE

Initially, the Drum Maps pop-up menu only contains GM Map.

I-Notes, O-Notes, and Pitches

Going through the following theory helps you make the most of the drum map concept –
especially if you want to create your own drum maps.

A drum map is a kind of filter that transforms notes according to the settings in the map. It does
this transformation twice; once when it receives an incoming note, that is, when you play a note
on your MIDI controller, and once when a note is sent from the program to the MIDI sound
device.

The following example shows a modified drum map with a bass drum sound that has different
pitch, I-note, and O-note values.

721
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps

I-Notes (Input Notes)

When you play a note on your MIDI instrument, the program looks for this note number among
the I-notes in the drum map. If you play the note A1, the program identifies it as the I-note of the
bass drum sound.

This is where the first transformation happens: the note assumes a new note number according
to the pitch setting for the drum sound. In our case, the note is transformed to a C1 note
because that is the pitch of the bass drum sound. If you record the note, it is recorded as a C1
note.

For example, you can place drum sounds close to each other on the keyboard so that they can
easily be played together, move sounds so that the most important sounds can be played from
a short keyboard, or play a sound from a black key instead of a white one. If you never play
your drum parts from a MIDI controller but draw them in the editor, you do not need the I-note
setting.

O-Notes (Output Notes)

The next step is the output. This is what happens when you play back the recorded note, or when
the note you play is sent back out to a MIDI instrument in real time (MIDI Thru):

The program checks the drum map and finds the drum sound with the pitch of the note. In our
case, this is a C1 note, and the drum sound is the bass drum. Before the note is sent to the MIDI
output, the second transformation takes place: the note number is changed to that of the O-note
for the sound. In our example, the note sent to the MIDI instrument is a B0 note.

The O-note settings let you set things up so that the bass drum sound really plays a bass drum.
If you are using a MIDI instrument with the bass drum sound on the C2 key, you set the O-note
for the bass drum sound to C2. When you switch to another instrument (with the bass drum
on C1), you want the bass drum O-note set to C1. Once you have set up drum maps for all of
your MIDI instruments, you can select a different drum map when you want to use another MIDI
instrument for drum sounds.

Setting Pitches of Notes According to their O-Note Settings

You can set the pitch of notes according to their O-note settings. This is useful to convert a track
to a regular MIDI track with no drum map and still have the notes play back the correct drum
sound.

It is a typical use case to export your MIDI recording as a standard MIDI file. If you first perform
an O-note conversion, make sure that your drum tracks play back as intended when they are
exported.

● To perform an O-note conversion, select MIDI > O-Note Conversion.

RELATED LINKS
Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files on page 141

722
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor Operations

Drum Editor Operations

This section describes the general editing operations within the Drum Editor.

Inserting Drum Note Events

You can insert note events with the Object Selection tool or with the Drumstick tool.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up the Insert Length on the toolbar to determine the length of the inserted note.
If Insert Length is set to Drum-Map Link, the note assumes the length of the Snap value, as set
for the sound in the drum sound list. You have activated Snap.

NOTE

If you want to snap positions according to the Quantize Presets setting on the toolbar, activate
Use Quantize.

PROCEDURE
● Perform one of the following actions:
● Select the Object Selection tool, and double-click in the event display.
● Select the Drumstick tool, and click in the event display.

NOTE

To temporarily switch from the Object Selection tool to the Drumstick tool, hold down
Alt/Opt .

RESULT
A note event is inserted.

Inserting Multiple Drum Note Events

You can insert multiple note events of the same pitch with the Object Selection tool or with the
Drumstick tool.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up the Insert Length on the toolbar to determine the length of the inserted note.
If Insert Length is set to Drum-Map Link, the note assumes the length of the Snap value, as set
for the sound in the drum sound list. You have activated Snap.

NOTE

To snap positions according to the Quantize Presets setting on the toolbar, activate Use
Quantize.

PROCEDURE
● Perform one of the following actions:

● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, double-click in the event display; and
drag to the right.

723
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor Operations

● On the toolbar, select the Drumstick tool, click in the event display; and drag to the
right.

RESULT
The note events are inserted.

RELATED LINKS
Drum Editor Toolbar on page 706

Modifying Note Values While Inserting Notes

When inserting note events, you can modify specific note values on the fly.

● To edit the note velocity, drag upwards or downwards.

● To edit the note pitch, hold down Alt/Opt , and drag upwards or downwards.
● To edit the note length, drag to the left or to the right.

NOTE

If you want to edit the note length in the Drum Editor, you must deactivate Snap and
activate Show Note Length On/Off. Otherwise, the note is repeated.

● To edit the time position, hold down Shift , and drag to the left or to the right.

NOTE

You can activate/deactivate Snap temporarily by holding down Ctrl/Cmd .

Changing the Note Length

You can change the note length in the drum editor, either with the Object Selection tool or with
the Drumstick tool.

PREREQUISITE
You have activated Show Note Length On/Off on the drum editor toolbar.

PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the beginning or to the end of the note that you want to edit.
The mouse pointer turns into a double arrow.
2. Drag to the left or to the right to adjust the length.
An info box with the current length value is displayed.
3. Release the mouse button.

RESULT
The note length is changed. Snap is taken into account.

Deleting Drum Note Events

PROCEDURE
● Perform one of the following actions:

724
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor Operations

● Select the Erase tool, and click the event.

● Select the Object Selection tool, and double-click the event.
● Select the Drumstick tool, and click the event.

RESULT
The note event is deleted.

Deleting Multiple Drum Note Events

You can delete multiple note events of the same pitch, either with the Object Selection tool or
with the Drumstick tool.

PREREQUISITE
To delete multiple note events with the Object Selection tool, Snap must be activated.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, double-click the first event you want to
delete, and drag to the right.
● On the toolbar, select the Drumstick tool, click the first event you want to delete, and
drag to the right.

RESULT
The note events are deleted.

Muting Notes and Drum Sounds

IMPORTANT

The mute state for drum sounds is part of the drum map. All other tracks using this map are
affected.

● To mute individual notes, click or enclose them with the Mute tool, or select Edit > Mute.
● To mute a drum sound in a drum map, click in the Mute column for the drum sound.

● To mute all other drum sounds, click Solo Instrument (Requires Drum Map) on the toolbar.

RELATED LINKS
Selecting a Drum Map for a Track on page 721

725
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Chord Functions

The chord functions offer many possibilities for working with chords.

The chord functions allow you to:

● Build chord progressions by adding chord events to the chord track.

● Convert chord events to MIDI.
● Use the chord track to control MIDI playback.
● Use the chord track voicing to change the pitches of your MIDI.
● Extract chord events from MIDI data to obtain an overview of the harmonic structure of a
MIDI file.
● Extract chord events from audio events.
● Record chord events with a MIDI keyboard.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Chord Events on page 727
Converting Chord Events to MIDI on page 742
Creating Chord Events from MIDI on page 747
Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard on page 750
Creating Chord Events from Audio Events on page 748
Chord Editing Section on page 700

Chord Track
The chord track allows you to add chord events and scale events.

RELATED LINKS
Scale Events on page 736
Chord Events on page 727
Musical Scale Setup Dialog on page 737
Adding the Chord Track on page 726

Adding the Chord Track

PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Add Track > Chord.

RESULT
The chord track is added to your project.

726
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

RELATED LINKS
Chord Track on page 726
Adding Chord Events on page 727

Chord Events
Chord events are representations of chords that allow you to control or transpose playback on
MIDI and instrument tracks.

Chord events alter the pitches of MIDI notes if their track is set up to follow the chord track.

Chord events have a specific start position. Their end, however, is determined by the start of the
next chord event. They can have a root note, a type, a tension, and a bass note.

1 Root note
2 Chord type
3 Tensions
4 Bass note

RELATED LINKS
Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track on page 743
Chord Editor on page 728

Adding Chord Events

PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the Draw tool, and click in the chord track.
An undefined chord event named X is added.
2. Select the Object Selection tool, and double-click the chord event.
3. Open the Editor tab, and select a root note from the leftmost column.
The chord event on the chord track changes accordingly.
4. Optional: Select a chord type, one or more tensions, and a bass note.

727
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

5. Optional: Click Add Chord or press Tab to add a new unassigned chord event to the chord
track.
6. Repeat the steps above to assign a chord to the new event.
7. To close the Editor, click outside the Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Adding the Chord Track on page 726
Chord Editor on page 728
Changing How Chord Events Are Displayed on page 736
Auditioning Chord Events on page 735

Chord Editor
The chord Editor allows you to define or change chord events, and to add new chord events.

● To open the chord Editor, double-click a chord event.

Go to Previous Chord/Go to Next Chord

Allows you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing.

Add Chord
Adds a new unassigned chord event on the chord track.

NOTE

This only works if the last chord event on the chord track is selected.

Chord definition buttons

Activate these buttons to define a root note, a chord type, one or more tensions, and a
bass note for your chord event.

NOTE

If you do not select a separate bass note, the setting is linked to the root note.

Keyboard display
Shows the notes of the chord event, including the current voicing settings.

728
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

Activate MIDI Input

Allows you to define a chord by playing a chord on your MIDI keyboard. If the chord
is recognized, the respective chord definition buttons and the keyboard display are
highlighted.

Define Chord by Text Input

Allows you to define a chord via computer keyboard.

RELATED LINKS
Assigning Chords by Text Input on page 729
Chord Events on page 727

Assigning Chords by Text Input

In the chord Editor, you can use the text input field to assign a chord with the computer
keyboard.

PROCEDURE
1. Double-click a chord event to open the chord Editor.
2. Click in the text input field at the bottom of the Editor.
3. Enter a chord by performing the following actions:
● Define a root note, for example, C, D, E.
● Define accidentals, for example, # or b.
● Define the chord type, for example maj, min, dim, sus, or aug.
● Define a chord extension, for example, 7, 9, or 13.

NOTE

If you have activated Solfège in the Note Name pop-up menu in the Preferences dialog
(Event Display—Chords&Pitches page), you can also enter chords in this format. To do so,
capitalize the first letter and write “Re” instead of “re”, for example. Otherwise, the chord is
not recognized.

4. Do one of the following to add a new unassigned chord, and assign it:
● Press Tab .
● Click Add Chord.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Editor on page 728
Chord Events on page 727

Chord Assistant
The Chord Assistant helps you to find chords that you can apply to the selected chord event.

● To open the Chord Assistant, double-click a chord event, and click Chord Assistant.

RELATED LINKS
List Assistant on page 730
Proximity Assistant on page 731
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 733

729
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

Chord Assistant – Detected on page 734

List Assistant
The List assistant allows you to create chord progressions based on harmonic rules that can be
simple or complex.

● To open the List assistant, double-click a chord event, click Chord Assistant, and click List.

Go to Previous Chord/Go to Next Chord

Allows you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing.

Add Chord
Adds a new unassigned chord event on the chord track.

NOTE

This only works if the last chord event on the chord track is selected.

Suggestions list
Displays suggestions for the next chord. Click a chord suggestion to select it.

Reference

NOTE

This is only available if you select an unassigned chord in between 2 assigned chords.

Select Previous Chord to get suggestions for the next chord, based on the previous
chord.
Select Previous & Next Chord to get suggestions for chords in between 2 assigned
chords, based on the previous and the following chord.

Algorithm
Select Cadence to build up a chord progression based on cadences. Select Common
Notes to build up a progression by specifying how many common notes you want the
chords to share. The suggested chords and the colors change accordingly.

730
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

Cadence Type
Allows you to select a cadence type for the suggestions. As a result, only the chords
with specific harmonic functions are suggested. The suggested chords and the colors
change accordingly.

NOTE

These options are only available if you select Cadence as the Algorithm.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant on page 729
Proximity Assistant on page 731
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 733
Chord Assistant – Detected on page 734

Proximity Assistant
The Proximity assistant uses a set of harmonic rules, in order to offer you suggestions that
match the reference chord.

If you open the Chord Assistant for a chord event, the previous event is set as reference chord.

The reference chord is displayed at the bottom, in the center of the Chord Assistant window.
The further away a chord suggestion is situated from this chord, the more complex the
suggestion.

● To open the Proximity assistant, double-click a chord event, click Chord Assistant, and click
Proximity.

● To audition a suggestion and assign the chord to the selected chord event, click it.
The last 3 suggested chords that you clicked are shown in bold.

NOTE

● If you hover the mouse pointer over one of the suggestions in the Chord Assistant, a tooltip
with suggestions for progressions is shown.
● The Proximity assistant is subject to the same rules as the List assistant.

731
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant on page 729
List Assistant on page 730
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 733
Chord Assistant – Detected on page 734

Adding Chord Events Based on Suggestions

If you do not know what your chord progression should look like, you can use the Chord
Assistant to obtain suggestions for the following chords.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord event on the chord track.

PROCEDURE
1. Double-click the chord event.
2. Click Chord Assistant.
3. Click Add Chord.
4. Do one of the following:
● To display the suggestions in a list, click List.

● To display the suggestions graphically, click Proximity.

732
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

5. Click a suggestion to select a chord.

RESULT
The suggested chord is added to the chord track. Repeat the steps above to create as many
chord events as required by your harmonic structure as a chord event.

RELATED LINKS
List Assistant on page 730
Proximity Assistant on page 731

Circle of Fifths Assistant

The Circle of Fifths assistant displays the chords in an interactive visualization.

● To open the Circle of Fifths assistant, double-click a chord event, click Chord Assistant, and
click Circle of Fifths.
● The chord that defines the current key, which is shown at the top, in the center of the Circle
of Fifths, is marked as the tonic (I).
● The outer circle shows the twelve major chords, ordered in intervals of fifths.
● The inner circle displays the corresponding parallel minor chords.
● The roman numerals mark the chords of the current key with their scale degree. You can use
these chords to create typical chord progressions, or you can use the other chords for more
creative results.

● To play a chord and to assign it to the selected chord event, click it.
The last 3 chords that you clicked are displayed in bold.
● To define a new key, right-click the chord, and select Use as Origin.
● To select the parallel minor chord and to define it as the key, open the Major/Minor pop-up
menu and select an option.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant on page 729
List Assistant on page 730
Proximity Assistant on page 731
Chord Assistant – Detected on page 734

733
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

Chord Assistant – Detected

The Detected tab of the Chord Assistant is only available if you created chord events from audio
events. It lists the detected chord for the selected chord event and alternative results.

● To open the Detected tab of the Chord Assistant, double-click a chord event that was
created from an audio event, click Chord Assistant, and click Detected.

NOTE

Chord events that were created from audio events are indicated by a symbol in the upper
right corner of the event.

Go to Previous Chord/Go to Next Chord

Allows you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing.

Add Chord
Adds a new undefined chord event on the chord track.

NOTE

This only works if the last chord event on the chord track is selected.

Audio Event
The name of the audio event from which the chord events were detected.

Chord list
Shows the detected chord for the selected chord event on top, and alternative results
further down the list. Click a chord to audition it, and assign it to the selected chord
event.

Highlight Suggestions from List Tab

Highlights the suggestions from the List assistant in the chord list.

Algorithm
Select Cadence to build up a chord progression based on cadences. Select Common
Notes to build up a progression by specifying how many common notes you want the
chords to share. The suggested chords and the colors change accordingly.

734
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Chord Events

Cadence Type
Allows you to select a cadence type for the suggestions. As a result, only the chords
with specific harmonic functions are suggested. The suggested chords and the colors
change accordingly.

NOTE

These options are only available if you select Cadence as the Algorithm.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant on page 729
List Assistant on page 730
Proximity Assistant on page 731
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 733
Creating Chord Events from Audio Events on page 748

Auditioning Chord Events

To audition the chord events on the chord track, connect the chord track to the output of an
instrument or a MIDI track.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track and chord events.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Click Instrument.
3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu, and select a VST instrument.
4. Click Add Track.
The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST
instrument is opened.
5. Select a sound.
6. In the chord track Inspector, activate Acoustic Feedback.
7. In the track list, open the Select Track for Auditioning pop-up menu, and select the track
that you want to use for auditioning.

RESULT
The chord events on the chord track now trigger the sound of the assigned instrument on the
MIDI or instrument track.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Track on page 726
Adding Chord Events on page 727
Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 102

735
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Scale Events

Changing How Chord Events Are Displayed

You can change the way chord events are displayed. This is useful if chord events overlap at low
zoom levels or if you do not like the font type.

PROCEDURE
1. On the chord track, activate Resolve Display Conflicts.

2. In the Preferences dialog, select Event Display > Chords&Pitches, and set up the chord
font.
You can also determine the note name and the naming format.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Chord Events on page 727

Scale Events
Scale events inform you which chord events fit in a specific sequence of notes that belong to a
specific root note.

Cubase automatically creates scale events for your chord events.

● To show the scale events, activate Show Scales on the chord track.

● To audition the notes that belong to a scale event, click the scale event.

You can also add and edit scale events manually.

Scale events have a specific starting position. Their end is determined by the start of the next
scale event.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Scale Events on page 736

Editing Scale Events

PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track and chord events. You have deactivated Automatic Scales in the
chord track Inspector.

PROCEDURE
1. On the chord track, activate Show Scales.
The scale lane is displayed.
2. Select the chord event.
A scale event is shown on the scale lane.

736
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Scale Events

3. Do one of the following:

● Click the first scale event on the chord track. On the info line, select a Root Note and
Type.

● Double-click the scale event. In the keyboard that appears, select a Root Note and a
scale.

The keys that correspond to the scale are highlighted.

RELATED LINKS
Scale Events on page 736
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686

Musical Scale Setup Dialog

The Musical Scale Setup dialog allows you to set up and manage musical scales.

● To open the Musical Scale Setup dialog, select Project > Chord Track > Set up Musical
Scales.

737
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Scale Events

Add Scale
Adds a new scale to the list. Use the keyboard display to define the scale pitches. All
scales start with C as a root note.

Factory Defaults
Resets all scales.

Use
Activates a scale.

NOTE

Activated musical scales are used in the chord track, in the Scale Assistant section of
the Key Editor Inspector, in the Transpose Setup window, and in the MIDI Modifiers
section of the Inspector.

Name
Shows the name of the scale. Double-click to change it.

Scales
Shows a keyboard that allows you to define the scale pitches. Click a key to activate/
deactivate a pitch for a scale. All scales start with C as a root note.

Preview Scale
Plays back the scale.

NOTE

For playback, the selected MIDI or instrument track must be record-enabled and its
output must be routed to an instrument.

Information
Informs you if the scale matches another scale or if it has the same name as another
scale.

Remove Scale
Removes the corresponding scale from the scale suggestions.

NOTE

All changes apply to the entire application. This allows you to customize scales once and to use
them in all projects. However, if you remove or rename scales that are used in other projects, the
scales cannot be retrieved.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Track on page 726
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686
Transpose Setup Dialog on page 631
MIDI Modifiers Section on page 618
Scale Events on page 736

738
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Voicings

Voicings
Voicings determine how chord events are set up. They define the vertical spacing and the order
of the pitches in a chord, as well as the instrumentation and the genre of a musical piece.

For example, a C chord can be spread over a wide range of pitches, and a pianist chooses
different notes than a guitarist. The pitches the pianist plays may also depend on the musical
genre.

● You can set up voicings for the entire chord track in the chord track Inspector.
● You can set up voicings for individual chord events on the Voicing pop-up menu on the info
line.

NOTE

If Adaptive Voicings is activated in the chord track Inspector, you can only change the
voicings for the first chord event on the info line.

RELATED LINKS
Inspector Settings for Voicings on page 739
Custom Voicing Panel on page 740

Inspector Settings for Voicings

To set up voicings for the entire chord track, you can use the chord track Inspector.

Voicing library
Allows you to select Guitar, Piano, or Basic as a voicing library.

Voicing library subset

NOTE

This is only available if Guitar or Piano is set as the voicing library.

Allows you to select a preset voicing library subset.

Configure voicing parameters

Opens the Custom Voicing panel that allows you to configure your own voicing
parameters for a specific voicing scheme.

Adaptive Voicings
Activate this to let Cubase set the voicings automatically. This prevents the individual
voices from jumping too much.

Automatic Scales
Activate this to let Cubase set the scales automatically.

739
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Voicings

Shift Chords
If you enter a negative number of ticks, the chord events affect the MIDI notes that
have been triggered too early.

RELATED LINKS
Voicings on page 739
Custom Voicing Panel on page 740

Custom Voicing Panel

If you click Configure voicing parameters in the Chords section of the Inspector, you can
configure your own voicing parameters for a specific voicing scheme.

● To open the Custom Voicing panel, click Configure voicing parameters in the Chords
section of the Inspector.

In the Style section for Piano voicings, you can set up the following parameters:

Triads
Sets a triad. Chords with more than 3 notes are not changed.

Triads with maj9

Sets a triad with a major ninth, but without root note. Chords with more than 3 notes
are not changed.

Triads with maj9 and min9

Sets a triad with a major and a minor ninth, but without root note. Chords with more
than 3 notes are not changed.

4-Note Chords
Sets a 4-note chord without root note. Chords with fewer than 3 notes are not
changed.

740
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Voicings

4-Note Chords (Open Jazz)

Sets a 4-note chord without root note and without fifth. Chords with fewer than 3 notes
are not changed.

5-Note Chords
Sets a 5-note chord with a ninth. Chords with fewer than 4 notes are not changed.

In the Options section for Piano voicings, you can set up the following parameters:

Add Root Note

Adds a root note.

Duplicate Root
Duplicates the root note.

Fatten up
Duplicates the tenor.

In the Voicing Range section for Piano voicings, you can set up the following parameters:

Lowest Root Note

Sets the limit for the lowest root note.

Lowest Note
Sets the limit for the lowest note, with the exception of the root note.

Highest Note
Sets the limit for the highest note, with the exception of the root note.

In the Style section for Guitar voicings, you can set up the following parameters:

Triads
Sets a triad with 4, 5 or 6 voices.

4-Note Chords
Sets a 4-note chord with 4, 5 or 6 voices without tensions.

3-String Triads
Sets a 3-string triad.

Modern Jazz
Sets 4-note, 5-note, and 6-note chords, partly without root note, but with tensions.

For Basic voicings, only Octave Offset from C3 is available. This allows you to determine an
offset value for the octave range.

In the Start Voicing section for Piano, Guitar, and Basic voicings, you can select a start voicing.

NOTE

This is only available for MIDI and instrument tracks, but not for the chord track, and only if you
select Voicings in the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu.

RELATED LINKS
Voicings on page 739
Inspector Settings for Voicings on page 739

741
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Converting Chord Events to MIDI

Converting Chord Events to MIDI

You can convert chord events to MIDI for further editing.

PREREQUISITE
● You have added a chord track and chord events.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Do one of the following to specify the destination track for your chord events:

● Click Instrument to add an instrument track.

● Click MIDI to add a MIDI track.
3. Click Add Track.
4. Do one of the following:

● To convert only selected chords to MIDI, select the chord events, and drag them to the
MIDI or instrument track.
● To convert all chord events to MIDI, select Project > Chord Track > Chords to MIDI.

RESULT
● A new MIDI part is created on the selected instrument or MIDI track. It contains the chords
as MIDI events.
● If you converted the chord events by selecting Project > Chord Track > Chords to MIDI, the
selected track is set to follow the chord track.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 102
Add Track Dialog – MIDI on page 105

Assigning Chord Events to HALion Sonic Pads

You can trigger chord events via HALion Sonic pads.

PREREQUISITE
Create a chord progression on the chord track, and add an instrument track with HALion Sonic as
the VST instrument to your project.

PROCEDURE
1. On the chord track, select the chord events, and drag them to the HALion Sonic pads.

NOTE

The first chord event is mapped to the pad where you dropped it, and all subsequent chord
events are mapped to the following pads.

2. Click the corresponding pads on the HALion Sonic keyboard to trigger the chords.

742
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track

Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track

You can use the chord track to control MIDI playback.

RELATED LINKS
Chords Section for MIDI Tracks on page 743
Using Live Input on page 743
Using Follow Chord Track on page 744
Using Map to Chord Track on page 746

Chords Section for MIDI Tracks

The Chords section in the MIDI track Inspector allows you to determine how the events on the
MIDI track are mapped to the chord track.

● To open the Chords section for a MIDI track, select the track, and in the Inspector, click the
Chords section.

Follow Chord Track

Select an option to determine how the events on your track are mapped to the chord
track.

This Track’s Voicings

Allows you to select a voicing library or to use the voicings from the chord track. This
is only available if you selected Voicings or Single Voice in the Follow Chord Track
pop-up menu.

Live Input
Allows you to transpose the MIDI input to a chord progression on the chord track.

RELATED LINKS
Using Follow Chord Track on page 744
Follow Chord Track Modes on page 745
Using Live Input on page 743

Using Live Input

Live Input allows you to transpose the MIDI input live to a chord progression on the chord track.
This way, you do not have to worry about what key to hit on your MIDI keyboard, as the MIDI
input is transposed to match chords or scales on your chord track in real time.

PROCEDURE
1. Create a MIDI or an instrument track, and activate Record Enable.
2. Right-click an empty area of the Inspector, and select Set up Sections.
3. In the Set up Sections pane, activate Chords.
4. In the Inspector, open the Chords section.

743
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track

5. Open the Live Input pop-up menu, and do one of the following:

● To map the MIDI input to chord events, select Chords.

● To map the MIDI input to scale events, select Scales.
6. Hit some keys on your MIDI keyboard or on the On-Screen Keyboard.

RESULT
Any key that you hit is mapped to the chord or the scale events on the chord track in real time.

RELATED LINKS
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 686
Mapping Incoming MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 694

Using Follow Chord Track

This allows you to match an existing recording to a chord progression on the chord track.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the track that you want to match to the chord track.
2. In the Inspector, click Chords.
3. Open the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu, and select a mode.

NOTE

If this is the first time that you open this pop-up menu for the track, the Follow Chord Track
dialog opens.

4. In the Follow Chord Track dialog, make your changes.

5. Click OK.

RESULT
The events on your track now match the chord progression on the chord track.

NOTE

If you matched your MIDI track to the chord track, some of the original MIDI notes may
be muted. To hide these notes in the editors, activate Hide Muted Notes in Editors in the
Preferences dialog (Editing—Chords page).

RELATED LINKS
Follow Chord Track Dialog on page 746
Follow Chord Track Modes on page 745

744
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track

Follow Chord Track Modes

This section of the Inspector allows you to determine how your track follows the chord track.

The following options are available on the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu:

Off
Follow Chord Track is deactivated.

Chords & Scales

This maintains the intervals of the original chord or scale as far as possible.

Chords
This transposes MIDI notes to match the key note and maps them to the current chord.

Scales
This transposes MIDI notes to match the current scale. This allows a bigger variety of
notes and a more natural performance.

Root Notes
This transposes MIDI notes to match the root note of the chord event. The effect
corresponds to using the transpose track. This option is suitable for bass tracks.

Voicings
This transposes MIDI notes to match the voices of the selected voicing library.

Single Voice
Maps MIDI notes to the notes of a single voice (soprano, tenor, bass, etc.) of the
voicing. Use the pop-up menu below to select the desired voice.

NOTE

If you apply this mode to a selection of tracks that contain separate voices, you can set
up one track as master and the others as voicing slaves. This way, you can change the
voicing of the master, and the slaves will follow automatically.

RELATED LINKS
Assigning Voices to Notes on page 747

745
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track

Follow Chord Track Dialog

This dialog opens the first time that you select an option from the Follow Chord Track pop-up
menu on the Chords section of the Inspector.

Follow Directly
Activate this if your MIDI notes are already in accordance with the chord track. This is
the case if you extracted your chords from the MIDI events on the track by selecting
Project > Chord Track > Create Chord Events, for example.

Synchronize Track Data with Chord Track First

Activate Analyze Chords if the track data has nothing in common with the chord
events. This analyzes the MIDI events and matches the found chords to the chord
track. This is only available for MIDI.
Activate Apply a Known Chord if the track data has nothing in common with the chord
events and if there are no chord changes. Specify Root Note and Chord Type of your
events.

RELATED LINKS
Creating Chord Events from MIDI on page 747
Create Chord Events Dialog on page 748

Using Map to Chord Track

This allows you to match individual parts or events to a chord progression on the chord track.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select the events or parts that you want to map to the chord track.
2. Select Project > Chord Track > Map to Chord Track.
3. From the Mapping Mode pop-up menu, select a mapping mode.

NOTE

If you select Voicings and no voices are found, Auto mode is used instead.

4. Click OK.

RESULT
The chords and scales of each event or part are analyzed and used for mapping. If no chords
are found, Cubase assumes that the performance is in “C”. The available mapping modes
and voicings correspond to the Follow Chord Track parameters in the Chords section of the
Inspector.

RELATED LINKS
Follow Chord Track Modes on page 745

746
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Assigning Voices to Notes

Assigning Voices to Notes

You can transpose MIDI notes to match the voices of a selected voicing library.

PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Chord Track > Assign Voices to Notes.

RESULT
The note pitches now match the voicing of the chord track and you can still edit the MIDI notes. If
you now select a note in the Key Editor, you see that Voice on the info line is assigned.

Creating Chord Events from MIDI

You can extract chords from MIDI notes, parts, or tracks. This is useful if you have a MIDI file and
want to show its harmonic structure, and use this file as starting point for further experimenting.

PREREQUISITE
● You have added a chord track.
● On a MIDI track, you have created a MIDI part with MIDI events that can be interpreted as
chords.

NOTE

Drums, monophonic bass, or lead tracks are not suitable.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select a part or one or several MIDI tracks.
You can also select the MIDI tracks, parts, or notes that you want to create in the Key Editor,
Score Editor, or In-Place Editor.
2. Do one of the following:
● Drag the MIDI part and drop it on the chord track.
● Right-click a MIDI part, and select Create Chord Events from the context menu.
● Select Project > Chord Track > Create Chord Events.
3. In the Create Chord Events dialog, make your changes and click OK.

RESULT
The chord events are added to the chord track.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Use the Chord Assistant to create variations.

RELATED LINKS
Create Chord Events Dialog on page 748
Creating Chord Events from Audio Events on page 748
Chord Editing Section on page 700

747
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Creating Chord Events from Audio Events

Create Chord Events Dialog

This dialog allows you to determine which MIDI data to take into account when creating chord
events from MIDI.

Include Bass Notes

Activate this if you want your chord events to contain a bass note.

Include Tensions
Activate this if you want your chord events to contain tensions.

Detect Arpeggios
Activate this if you want your chord events to contain arpeggiated chords, that is,
chords whose notes are played one after another instead of all at once.

Interpret Sustain Pedal

Activate this if you want your chord events to contain sustain pedal chords, that is,
notes that are played while the sustain pedal is held.

Ignore Notes Shorter Than

Allows you to determine the minimum length of the MIDI events that are taken into
account.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Editing Section on page 700
Creating Chord Events from MIDI on page 747

Creating Chord Events from Audio Events

You can extract chords from audio events. This is useful if you have an audio file and want to
show its harmonic structure, and use this file as a starting point for further experimenting.

PREREQUISITE
● You have added a chord track.
● On an audio track, you have added an audio event with audio material that can
be interpreted as chords, that is, with three or four different note pitches playing
simultaneously.

NOTE

The audio material should contain western music with 12 pitches per octave, tuned in equal
temperament.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select an audio event on an audio track.

748
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Creating Chord Events from Audio Events

NOTE

You cannot use audio parts.

2. Do one of the following:

● Drag the audio event, and drop it on the chord track.

● Right-click an audio event, and select Create Chord Events from the context menu.
● Select Project > Chord Track > Create Chord Events.

RESULT
● The chord events are added to the chord track.

NOTE

Depending on the length of the audio event, this may take a while.

● The chord events that you created from audio events are indicated by a symbol in the upper
right corner.
● The created chord events match the positions and lengths of the corresponding chords in
the audio event.
● If the chord track already contained chord events, these are replaced within the position and
length of the audio event. Chord events outside that range are maintained.

RELATED LINKS
Editing Chord Events That Were Detected from Audio Events on page 749
Chord Assistant – Detected on page 734
Creating Chord Events from MIDI on page 747

Editing Chord Events That Were Detected from Audio Events

If you are not satisfied with the chord events that were detected from audio events, you can edit
them. The algorithm provides several possible results for chord types.

PREREQUISITE
● You have detected chord events from audio events.
● You have connected the chord track to the output of an instrument or a MIDI track. This
allows you to audition the chords.

PROCEDURE
1. Double-click the detected chord event that you want to edit.
2. Click Chord Assistant, and click Detected.
A list of the detected chords ranked from top to bottom is shown.
3. Optional: Activate Highlight Suggestions from List Tab.
This highlights the suggestions from the List tab of the Chord Assistant in the chord list.
4. Click one of the chords in the list to audition the chord, and assign it to the chord event.

RESULT
The chord is assigned to the chord event on the chord track.

749
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Chord Functions
Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

You can change the position of the chord events manually or by using the Quantize function on
the Edit menu.

RELATED LINKS
Auditioning Chord Events on page 735
Chord Assistant – Detected on page 734
List Assistant on page 730

Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard

You can use a MIDI keyboard to record chord events on the chord track.

PREREQUISITE
Your project contains an instrument track with Record Enable or Monitor activated.

PROCEDURE
1. On the chord track, activate Record Enable.
2. On the Transport panel, activate Record.
3. Play some chords on your MIDI keyboard.

RESULT
All recognized chords are recorded on the chord track as chord events.

NOTE

The chord track uses its own voicing settings. The recorded chord events may therefore sound
different.

RELATED LINKS
Adding Chord Events on page 727

750
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Using Chord Pads

Chord pads allow you to play with chords and to change their voicings and tensions. In
terms of harmonies and rhythms, they allow for a more playful and spontaneous approach to
composition than the chord track functions.

You can:

● Perform with chords in real time via a MIDI keyboard.

● Record your performances as MIDI events on a MIDI or instrument track or even on the
chord track.

NOTE

We recommend that you connect and set up a MIDI keyboard to use the chord pads.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Zone on page 751
Chord Pads Zone Toolbar on page 752
Chord Pads on page 757
Chord Pads Zone Keyboard on page 760

Chord Pads Zone

The chord pads zone in the lower zone of the Project window offers all the functions that you
need to work with chord pads.

To open the chord pads zone, select Project > Show/Hide Chord Pads.

The chord pads zone features the following sections:

1 Chord Pads Zone Toolbar

Contains tools and settings for the chord pads zone.
2 Chord Pads Zone Extended Toolbar
Contains tools and settings for the individual chord pads and the assigned chords.
3 Chord Pads

751
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

Each chord pad can have a chord assigned to it that is played back when you trigger the
chord pad, either by clicking it or by playing the corresponding key on your MIDI keyboard.
4 Chord Pads Zone Keyboard
Shows which keys are played when you trigger a chord pad with the mouse or the MIDI
keyboard. It also highlights the trigger key when you hover the mouse over an assigned pad.
5 Integrated Editor/Assistant
Allows you to open the chord Editor or the Assistant in the right zone of the chord pads
zone.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Zone Toolbar on page 752
Chord Pads Zone Extended Toolbar on page 755
Chord Pads on page 757
Chord Pads Zone Keyboard on page 760
Chord Pad Playback and Recording on page 771
Players and Voicings on page 781
Opening Chord Pads on page 55
Chord Editor on page 728
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 779
List Assistant on page 777

Chord Pads Zone Toolbar

The chord pads zone toolbar contains tools and settings for the chord pads.

● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar, and activate or deactivate the
elements.

Output Mode
Chord Pad Output Mode

Activate this to send chord data to all tracks that are monitored or record-enabled.
Deactivate this to send chord data exclusively to tracks that are monitored or record-
enabled and where Input Routing is set to Chord Pads.

NOTE

If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—

MIDI page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.

Step Input
Step Input

Activates/Deactivates step input.

Move Insert Mode

Moves all chord events to the right of the step input cursor to make room for the
inserted event when you insert chord events.

752
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

NOTE

This only works with Step Input activated.

Root Key
Root Key

Opens the Root Key pane, which allows you to change the root key. If you activate
Transpose Pads, all chord pads are transposed to the set root key. The Enh. Shift
pop-up menu allows you to change the enharmonic spelling of notes.

Chord Pads Presets

Open Chord Pads Preset Browser

Allows you to select a preset for chord pads and players.

Load Preset Settings

Opens a pane with preset settings.

● Load Chords & Players
Loads the chords and the players of Chord Pads Presets.
● Load Chords Only
Loads only the chords of Chord Pads Presets.
● Load Players Only
Loads only the players of Chord Pads Presets.

Previous Preset

Loads the previous chord pads preset.

Next Preset

Loads the next chord pads preset.

Save Preset

Allows you to save presets for chord pads and players.

Player Settings
Player Settings

Shows the selected player and opens the Player Settings pane, where you can select
another player and a voicing style.

Player Mode Settings

Player Mode

753
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

Shows the selected player mode and opens a pop-up menu, where you can select
another player mode.

NOTE

You can drop a MIDI part from the event display on the Player Mode section. This
automatically sets the player mode to Pattern and uses this MIDI part as a pattern.

Chord Assistant Window

Show/Hide Chord Assistant Window

Shows/Hides the Chord Assistant window that features the List, the Proximity, and
the Circle of Fifths assistants.

Assign from Chord Track

Assign from Chord Track

Assigns the chord events from the chord track to the chord pads in the same order as
they are shown on the chord track. Chord events that have more than one occurrence
are only assigned once. If there are not enough chord events to fill the chord pads,
some pads stay unassigned.

Snap Playback to Musical Grid

Snap Playback to Musical Grid

Allows you to snap the playback of a triggered chord pad to the next defined musical
position. This is useful if you work with an arpeggiator or if you set the Player Modes
to Pattern.

Velocity on Mouse Click

Velocity

Allows you to determine the velocity value that is used when you trigger chord pads
with the mouse.

NOTE

You can set up the velocity range in the Preferences dialog (Editing—MIDI page).

Chord Pads Remote Settings

Chord Pads Remote Settings

Opens the Chord Pads Remote Settings dialog, which allows you to change the
remote key assignments and the layout of the chord pads.

Chord Assistant Window

Show/Hide Editor/Assistant

754
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

Shows/hides the Editor/Assistant in the chord pads zone.

Chord Pads Display Settings

Pad Display Settings

Opens the Chord Pad Display Settings pane, which allows you to change the chord
symbols and the pad layout.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant on page 777
Chord Pads Presets on page 775
Player Settings on page 781
Player Mode Settings on page 783
Chord Pads Display Settings Pane on page 791
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog on page 786
Inserting Note Events via Step Input on page 703

Chord Pads Zone Extended Toolbar

The extended toolbar contains additional tools and settings for the individual chord pads and the
assigned chords.

● To show/hide the extended toolbar elements, right-click the extended toolbar, and activate
or deactivate the elements.

NOTE

The assignment functions and the modifiers apply to all chord pads that are selected.

Select All
Select All

Selects all chord pads.

Assignment Functions
Open Chord Editor

Opens the chord Editor.

Assign from MIDI Input

Allows you to assign chords via MIDI input, that is, by pressing keys on your MIDI
keyboard.

Remove Assignment

Removes the assigned chord from the chord pad.

755
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

Pad Modifiers
Transpose Down

Plays back the chord assigned to the first selected pad and transposes all selected and
assigned chord pads downwards.

NOTE

You can also move the mouse pointer over a chord pad, press Shift and move the
mouse wheel down to transpose the assigned chord downwards.

Transpose Up

Plays back the chord assigned to the first selected pad and transposes all selected and
assigned pads upwards.

NOTE

You can also move the mouse pointer over a chord pad, press Shift and move the
mouse wheel up to transpose the assigned chord upwards.

Fewer Tensions

Plays back the chord assigned to the first selected pad and reduces tensions of all
selected and assigned pads.

NOTE

You can also move the mouse pointer over a chord pad, press Alt and move the
mouse wheel down to reduce tensions of the assigned chord.

More Tensions

Plays back the chord assigned to the first selected pad and adds tensions to all selected
and assigned pads.

NOTE

You can also move the mouse pointer over a chord pad, press Alt and move the
mouse wheel up to add tensions to the assigned chord.

Previous Voicing

Plays back the chord assigned to the first selected pad and switches all selected and
assigned pads to the previous voicing.

NOTE

You can also move the mouse pointer over a chord pad and move the mouse wheel up
to switch to the previous voicing of the assigned chord.

Next Voicing

756
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

Plays back the chord assigned to the first selected pad and switches all selected and
assigned pads to the next voicing.

NOTE

You can also move the mouse pointer over a chord pad and move the mouse wheel
down to switch to the next voicing of the assigned chord.

Pad State Modifiers

Lock

Locks the assigned chord on the chord pad.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can select chord pads and press Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - L to lock the
assigned chords on the chord pads.

Adaptive Voicing

Activates adaptive voicing for a chord pad. If you change the voicing for a pad
manually, adaptive voicing is deactivated.

Adaptive Voicing Reference

Sets the selected pad as an adaptive voicing reference. If set, the automatic voicings
for the subsequent pads are set in a way that they do not get too far away from the
reference voicing. Only one pad can be set as an adaptive voicing reference.

RELATED LINKS
Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor on page 762
Assigning Chords with the MIDI Keyboard on page 765
Adaptive Voicing on page 781
Removing Chord Assignments on page 767

Chord Pads
You can assign a chord to each chord pad. The chords are played back when you trigger the
chord pads. Chord pads display the assigned chord, the used voicing and information about the
status of the pad.

Chord Information
Chord Symbol

The symbol of the chord that is assigned to the chord pad is shown in the center of
the chord pad. Each chord pad can contain one chord. By default, the chord symbol

757
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

is displayed as a note name. To specify how the chord symbol is shown, change the
settings in the Chord Symbols section of the Chord Pads Display Settings pane.

NOTE

If the name of the assigned chord is too long to display it on the chord pad, it is
underlined, and the full chord name is shown in a tooltip.

Voicing Indicator

The voicing that is used for the chord is indicated at the bottom of the chord pad.
Voicing indicators are only displayed if the zoom level for the chord pads is high
enough.

Adaptive Voicing Indicator

The adaptive voicing indicator is shown in the top right corner of the chord pads. This
is activated by default. If you manually change the voicing for a pad, adaptive voicing
is deactivated. You can activate it by enabling the Adaptive Voicing button on the
extended toolbar.

Adaptive Voicing Reference Indicator

The adaptive voicing reference indicator is shown in the top right corner of the chord
pads. The chord pad frame is shown in yellow. If a chord pad is set as an adaptive
voicing reference, the automatic voicings for the subsequent pads are set in a way that
they do not get too far away from the reference voicing. Only one pad can be set as an
adaptive voicing reference.

List Assistant Color Indicator

The color indicator from the List assistant is shown at the bottom of the chord
pad, if you activate Show List Assistant Colors on the Chord Pads Display Settings
pane. Chord pads that hold chords that match List assistant suggestions are colored

758
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

according to their musical usefulness. Green indicates that this suggestion is more
common, orange or red are musically more adventurous or do not fit at all. The
reference for the suggestions is the chord that is assigned to the first selected pad.

Status Information
Locked Chord Pad

A padlock icon in the upper right corner of a chord pad indicates that the chord is
locked to the chord pad.

Selected Chord Pad

A white frame indicates that the chord pad is selected.

Triggered Chord Pad

A highlighted background indicates that the chord pad is triggered.

Drop Location

If you drop a chord from the chord Editor or one of the assistants to the chord pad, its
frame is temporarily highlighted in green.

MIDI Input Destination

If you select a chord pad and activate Assign from MIDI Input, its frame is temporarily
highlighted in red to indicate that the MIDI input is routed to this chord pad.

759
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

Pattern Playback Progress

If you activate Pattern as a Player Mode and enable Show Pattern Play Progress
in the Chord Pads Display Settings pane, the progress of the pattern playback is
indicated by a progress bar at the bottom of the chord pad.

NOTE

● By default, the chord pads are shown in keyboard layout. To change the display, use the
settings on the Chord Pads Display Settings pane.
● If the chord pads zone has the focus, the default key commands apply to the chord pads.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Editor on page 728
Chord Assistant on page 777
List Assistant on page 777
Show List Assistant Colors on page 792
Selected Mode Settings—Pattern on page 784
Chord Symbols on page 791
Adaptive Voicing on page 781
Chord Pads Display Settings Pane on page 791

Chord Pads Zone Keyboard

The chord pads zone keyboard shows how a chord that is assigned to a chord pad is played back
when you trigger the chord pad with the mouse or a MIDI keyboard.

NOTE

You can zoom the keyboard by clicking and dragging up or down. You can scroll the keyboard by
clicking and dragging to the left or to the right.

760
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone

1 Played Notes
When you trigger a chord pad with the mouse or a MIDI keyboard, the notes of the assigned
chord are highlighted.
2 Chord Pad Triggers (Pad Remote Control)
The range of keys that trigger the chord pads is highlighted in blue. On the Pad Remote
Control page of the Chord Pads Remote Settings dialog, you can define the range by
setting the values for Pads Remote Range Start and Pads Remote Range End in the Chord
Pad Triggers section.
When you hover the mouse over an assigned pad, its trigger key is highlighted on the chord
pads zone keyboard.

3 Chord Modifiers for Voicing, Tension, and Transpose (Pad Remote Control)
The keys that change the voicing, tensions, and transpose settings of the chord pads are
highlighted in green.

NOTE

The chord modifier keys are only highlighted and active on the keyboard with the Activate
option enabled in the Chord Modifiers section on the Pad Remote Control page of the
Chord Pads Remote Settings dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads on page 757
Player Mode Settings on page 783
Pad Remote Control Tab on page 787
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog on page 786

761
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assignment

Chord Assignment
You can use the default chord assignments, but you can also assign your own chords to the
chord pads.

To assign chords to chord pads, you can use:

● The chord Editor

● The List assistant
● The Proximity assistant
● The Circle of Fifths assistant
● Chord Pads Presets
● Your MIDI keyboard
● Chord events from the chord track

RELATED LINKS
Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor on page 762
Assigning Chords with the Proximity Assistant on page 763
Assigning Chords with the Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 764
List Assistant on page 777
Chord Pads Presets on page 775
Assigning Chords with the MIDI Keyboard on page 765
Assigning Chords from the Chord Track on page 766

Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor

If you know exactly which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use the
chord Editor.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the chord pad to which you want to assign a chord.
2. Do one of the following to open the Chord Editor:
● Double-click the chord pad.
● Press Return .
● On the chord pads zone toolbar, activate Show/Hide Editor/Assistant to show the
Editor/Assistant in the chord pads zone, and select chord Editor.
● On the chord pads zone extended toolbar, click Open Chord Editor.
3. In the chord Editor, use the chord definition buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a
tension, and a bass note.

RESULT
The selected chord is automatically assigned to the chord pad, and the sound is triggered to give
you acoustic feedback.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Editor on page 728

762
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assignment

Assigning Chords with the List Assistant

If you have a chord that you want to use as a starting point for finding follow-on chords, you can
use the List assistant.

PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, activate Show/Hide Chord Assistant Window.
2. Open the List assistant.
3. Select the chord pad that has the chord assigned that you want to use as a reference for
suggestions.
The further away the chord is from the reference chord, the more complex the suggestion
becomes.

4. Optional: In the list, click the chord symbols to audition the corresponding chords.
5. To assign a chord to a chord pad, drag it out of the List assistant, and drop it on a chord pad.
If one of the chord pads is unassigned, you can also double-click the chord in the List
assistant to assign it to the first unassigned pad.

RESULT
The chord is assigned to the chord pad. It is played back to give you acoustic feedback.

RELATED LINKS
List Assistant on page 777
Chord Pads on page 757

Assigning Chords with the Proximity Assistant

If you have a chord that you want to use as a starting point for finding follow-on chords, you can
use the Proximity assistant.

PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, activate Show/Hide Chord Assistant Window.
2. Open the Proximity assistant.

763
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assignment

3. Select the chord pad that has the chord assigned that you want to use as a reference for
suggestions.
The reference chord is shown at the bottom, in the center of the Proximity assistant. The
further away the chord is from the reference chord, the more complex the suggestion
becomes.

4. Optional: In the Proximity assistant, click the chord symbols to audition the corresponding
chords.
5. To assign a chord to a chord pad, drag it out of the Proximity assistant, and drop it on a
chord pad.

NOTE

If one of the chord pads is unassigned, you can also double-click the chord in the Chord
Assistant window to assign it to the first unassigned pad.

RESULT
The chord is assigned to the chord pad. It is played back to give you acoustic feedback.

RELATED LINKS
Proximity Assistant on page 779
Chord Pads on page 757

Assigning Chords with the Circle of Fifths Assistant

You can use the Circle of Fifths assistant to assign chords.

PROCEDURE
1. Open the Circle of Fifths assistant.

764
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assignment

The root key is displayed in the center, and the chords that belong to the same scale are
shown above it. The numerals indicate the scale degree of the chords. These help you to
create chord progressions.
2. Optional: In the Circle of Fifths assistant, click the chord symbols to trigger the
corresponding chords.
3. To assign a chord, drag it out of the Circle of Fifths assistant, and drop it on the chord pad.

NOTE

If one of the chord pads is unassigned, you can also right-click the chord in the Circle of
Fifths assistant and select Assign to First Unassigned Pad to assign the chord to the first
unassigned pad.

RELATED LINKS
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 779
Chord Assignment on page 762
Root Key Pane on page 768

Assigning Chords with the MIDI Keyboard

If you know which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use a MIDI keyboard
or the On-Screen Keyboard.

PREREQUISITE
You have selected a MIDI track or an instrument track.

PROCEDURE
1. Select one ore more chord pads to which you want to assign new chords.
2. On the extended toolbar, activate Assign from MIDI Input.
The chord pad frame is highlighted in red to indicate that it is enabled for MIDI Input.
3. On your MIDI keyboard or on the On-Screen Keyboard, press the keys that make up the
chord that you want to assign.

765
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assignment

The chord and the voicing are assigned to the chord pad, and you obtain an acoustic
feedback of the chord.

NOTE

The assigned voicing can be changed by setting the Adaptive Voicing parameter. If you
want to prevent changes to the voicing for a specific chord pad, right-click the chord pad,
and on the chord pads zone toolbar, click Lock.

4. Repeat the steps above to assign chords to the other chord pads.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assignment on page 762
Adaptive Voicing on page 781
Chord Pads Zone Extended Toolbar on page 755

Assigning Chords from the Chord Track

You can assign chord events from the chord track to the chord pads.

PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track with chord events to your project.

PROCEDURE
● On the chord pads zone toolbar, click Assign from Chord Track.
If chords are already assigned to the chord pads, a warning message informs you that all
previous assignments are overwritten.

RESULT
The chord events are assigned to the chord pads in the same order as on the chord track.

NOTE

Chord events that have more than one occurrence on the chord track are only assigned once.

RELATED LINKS
Adding the Chord Track on page 726
Adding Chord Events on page 727

Swapping Chord Assignments

You can swap the chord assignments of two pads.

PROCEDURE
● Click a chord pad, and drag it to another chord pad.
While you drag, the frame of the destination chord pad is highlighted in green.

RESULT
When you drop the chord pad on another chord pad, the chord assignments are swapped,
together with their settings. An exception to this is the Adaptive Voicing Reference setting,
which remains on the chord pad to which it was originally applied.

766
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Root Key

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads on page 757

Copying Chord Assignments

You can copy the chord assignment of one chord pad and paste it to another chord pad.

PROCEDURE
● Alt/Opt -click a chord pad, and drag it to another chord pad.
While you drag, the frame of the destination chord pad is highlighted in green.

RESULT
When you drop the pad on another one, the assignment of the first pad is copied to the
destination chord pad, including its settings. An exception to this is the Adaptive Voicing
Reference setting, which remains on the chord pad to which it was originally applied.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads on page 757

Removing Chord Assignments

You can remove chord assignments from chord pads to start from scratch. This operation cannot
be undone.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the chord pads whose chord assignments you want to remove.

● NOTE

To select all chord pads, press Ctrl/Cmd - A , or activate Select All on the extended
toolbar.

2. Do one of the following to remove the assignments:

● Press Backspace .
● Press Delete .
● On the extended toolbar, click Remove Assignment.
3. In the warning message, click OK.

RESULT
The assignments are removed from the selected chord pads.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Zone Extended Toolbar on page 755

Root Key
You can set up the root key of the chord pads.

By default the root key is set to C. You can set up a different root key in the Root Key pane. When
you load a preset, the root key is set automatically.

767
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Root Key

The root key is displayed on the following interface items:

● The Root Key field on the chord pads zone toolbar.

● The chord symbol on chord pad that is situated in the lower left corner of the chord pads
zone.
● The chord symbol that is displayed in the center of the Circle of Fifths assistant.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Zone Toolbar on page 752
Assigning Chords with the Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 764
Chord Pads Presets on page 775

Root Key Pane

The Root Key pane allows you to change the root key for chord pads. It also allows you to
transpose chord pads and to change the enharmonic spelling of the assigned chords.

● To open the Root Key pane, click Root Key in the chord pads zone toolbar.

The following options are available:

Pitch fields
Allow you to select a pitch.
● If Transpose Pads is activated, the selected pitch determines how the chord pads
are transposed.
● If Transpose Pads is deactivated, the selected pitch sets the root key for the chord
pads.

Transpose Pads
Allows you to transpose all chord pads to the selected pitch. If you deactivate this and
select another pitch via the pitch fields, the root key for the chord pads is set.

Enh. Shift
Allows you to change the enharmonic spelling of notes.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Zone Toolbar on page 752
Changing the Root Key without Transposing on page 769
Transposing Chord Pads on page 770

768
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Root Key

Changing the Root Key without Transposing

You can change the root key of the chord pads. This is useful if the harmonic functions of the
individual chord pads are not indicated correctly. This can happen when you assign the chord
pads manually and your root key differs from the default key of C.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Root Key on the toolbar.
2. In the Root Key pane, deactivate Transpose Pads.

3. Click a pitch field to select the correct root key.

NOTE

You can also set the root key by moving the mouse pointer over the Root Key field and using
the mouse wheel.

RESULT
The root key and the harmonic functions are changed while the chords assigned to the chord
pads stay the same. The assigned chords are not transposed.

RELATED LINKS
Root Key Pane on page 768

769
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Root Key

Transposing Chord Pads on page 770

Transposing Chord Pads

You can transpose all chord pads without changing their root key. Do this, if you want to
transpose all assigned chord pads to a higher or lower pitch.

PROCEDURE
1. Click Root Key on the toolbar.
2. On the Root Key pane, activate Transpose Pads.

3. Click a pitch field to select another pitch.

RESULT
The chords assigned to the chord pads are changed while the root key stays the same. The
assigned chords are transposed.

NOTE

You can also transpose all chord pads by clicking Select All on the extended toolbar, and clicking
Transpose Up or Transpose Down or by pressing Shift and using the mouse wheel or by using
the corresponding key commands.

770
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pad Playback and Recording

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Zone Toolbar on page 752
Changing the Root Key without Transposing on page 769
Root Key Pane on page 768

Chord Pad Playback and Recording

You can play back and record chords that are assigned to chord pads using MIDI or instrument
tracks.

There are two different Chord Pad Output Modes that determine if chords that are assigned to
chord pads can be played back and recorded using any MIDI track or using exclusive instrument
or MIDI tracks:

● Chord Pad Output Mode: On

Allows you to play back and record chord pads on any MIDI or instrument track, as long as
Record Enable or Monitor is activated.
● Chord Pad Output Mode: Off
Allows you to play back and record chord pads using exclusive MIDI or instrument tracks,
as long as Record Enable or Monitor is activated, and with Chord Pads selected as a MIDI
input in the Input Routing pop-up menu.

NOTE

If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI

page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Zone on page 751
Recording Chords on the Chord Track on page 773
Recording Chords on Instrument Tracks on page 773
Playing Back Chord Pads Using Any Instrument Track on page 771
Playing Back Chord Pads Using Exclusive Instrument Tracks on page 772

Playing Back Chord Pads Using Any Instrument Track

You can play back chord pads on any instrument or MIDI track, as long as Record Enable or
Monitor is activated.

PREREQUISITE
You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Click Instrument.
3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu, and select a VST instrument.
4. Click Add Track.
The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST
instrument is opened.
5. On the instrument track, click Record Enable or Monitor.

771
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pad Playback and Recording

NOTE

If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI

page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.

6. On the chord pads toolbar, activate Chord Pad Output Mode.

7. Press some keys on your MIDI keyboard or click the chord pads to trigger the assigned
chords.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 102
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog on page 786
Changing the Pads Remote Range on page 790

Playing Back Chord Pads Using Exclusive Instrument Tracks

You can play back chord pads using exclusive instrument or MIDI tracks where Record Enable
or Monitor is activated, and where Chord Pads is selected as a MIDI input in the Input Routing
pop-up menu.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up a MIDI keyboard.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Click Instrument.
3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu, and select a VST instrument.
4. Click Add Track.
The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST
instrument is opened.
5. On the instrument track, click Record Enable or Monitor.

NOTE

If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI

page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.

6. In the Inspector for the instrument track, open the Input Routing pop-up menu, and select
Chord Pads.
7. On the chord pads toolbar, deactivate Chord Pad Output Mode.
8. Press some keys on your MIDI keyboard or click the chord pads to trigger the assigned
chords.

RESULT
The instrument track now receives MIDI data exclusively from the chord pads. You can use a
connected MIDI keyboard to trigger the chord pads. This still works if you hide the Chord Pads
from view.

772
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pad Playback and Recording

NOTE

Via the Pad Remote Control tab of the Chord Pads Remote Settings dialog, you can select your
connected MIDI keyboard from the MIDI Input pop-up menu. This is useful if you want to use a
specific MIDI keyboard exclusively for triggering the chord pads.

RELATED LINKS
Pad Remote Control Tab on page 787

Recording Chords on Instrument Tracks

You can record chords that are triggered by chord pads on MIDI or instrument tracks.

PREREQUISITE
You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard. You have opened and set up the chord pads,
and you have added an instrument or a MIDI track for which a VST instrument is loaded.

PROCEDURE
1. On the instrument track, click Record Enable or Monitor.

NOTE

If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI

page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.

2. On the Transport panel, activate Record.

3. On your MIDI keyboard, press the keys that trigger the chord pads.

RESULT
The triggered chords are recorded on the track. The note events are automatically assigned to
different MIDI channels, according to their pitches. Note events that correspond to the soprano
voice are assigned to MIDI channel 1, alto is assigned to MIDI channel 2, and so on.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Open the Key Editor, and fine-tune your recorded MIDI parts using the chord editing functions,
for example. You can also use MIDI > Dissolve Part to dissolve the recorded chords by pitches/
channels.

RELATED LINKS
Dissolve Part Dialog on page 634
Dissolving Parts into Separate Channels on page 634
Dissolving Parts into Separate Pitches on page 635

Recording Chords on the Chord Track

You can record chords that are triggered by chord pads on the chord track. This way, you can
easily create chord events for a lead sheet, for example.

PREREQUISITE
You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard, you have opened and set up the chord pads,
and you have added an instrument or a MIDI track for which a VST instrument is loaded.

773
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Inserting Chord Events via Step Input

PROCEDURE
1. On the instrument track, click Record Enable or Monitor.

NOTE

If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI

page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.

2. Select Project > Add Track > Chord.

The chord track is added to the track list.
3. In the Inspector for the chord track, click Record Enable.
4. On the Transport panel, activate Record.
5. On your MIDI keyboard, press the keys that trigger the chord pads.

RESULT
The chord events are recorded on the chord track.

NOTE

The recorded chord events may sound different from the chord pad playback. This is because the
voicing settings for the chord track differ from the chord pad voicings.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Track on page 115
Chord Functions on page 726
Voicings on page 739

Inserting Chord Events via Step Input

You can insert chords from chord pads as chord events on the chord track. Chord events are
inserted at the start of a bar.

PREREQUISITE
You have assigned chords to the chord pads, and you have added a chord track to your project.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Step Input section of the chord pads zone toolbar, activate Step Input.
2. Trigger a chord pad in the chord pads zone to insert a chord event.
The step input cursor is displayed with blue a handle in the ruler, and a vertical line in the
note display. The chord event is inserted, and the step input cursor automatically jumps to
the start of the next bar.

NOTE

You can use the Right Arrow / Left Arrow to set the step input cursor to the position where
you want to insert the chord event.

If you activate Move Insert Mode, all chord events to the right of the step input cursor are
moved to make room for the inserted event.

3. Repeat the steps above to insert further chord events.

774
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads

4. When you are done, click Step Input again to deactivate it.

RESULT
The chord events are inserted on the chord track.

RELATED LINKS
Step Input on page 752
Move Insert Mode on page 752
Chord Events on page 727
Adding Chord Events on page 727

Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads

You can use the chords assigned to the chord pads to create chord events in the Project window.

PROCEDURE
● Click a chord pad, and drag it onto the chord track.

RESULT
A chord event is created.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Events on page 727
Adding Chord Events on page 727

Creating MIDI Parts from Chord Pads

You can use the chords assigned to the chord pads to create MIDI parts in the Project window.

PROCEDURE
● Click a chord pad, and drag it onto a MIDI or instrument track.

RESULT
A MIDI part is created. It contains the MIDI events that make up the chord and has a length of
one bar.

Chord Pads Presets

Chord Pads Presets are templates that can be applied to newly created or existing chord pads.

Chord Pads Presets store the chords that are assigned to the chord pads, as well as the player
configurations, including any pattern data.

NOTE

Chord Pads Presets are organized in the MediaBay, where you can categorize them via
attributes.

RELATED LINKS
Saving Chord Pads Presets on page 776

775
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Presets

Load Preset Settings Pane on page 776

Load Preset Settings Pane

The Load Preset Settings pane allows you to define precisely what to include when you load a
preset.

● To open the Load Preset Settings pane, click Load Preset Settings on the chord pads
toolbar.

The following options are available:

Load Chords & Players

Loads the chords and the players of the Chord Pads Presets.

Load Chords Only

Loads only the chords of the Chord Pads Presets. This is useful if you want to use
specific chords that you have saved as a preset, but you do not want to alter your
current player setting.

Load Players Only

Loads only the player configurations of the Chord Pads Presets. This is useful if you
have saved very complex player settings and you want to reuse them on other chord
pads without changing the assigned chords.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Presets on page 775
Saving Chord Pads Presets on page 776

Saving Chord Pads Presets

If you have set up chord pads, you can save them as Chord Pads Presets.

PROCEDURE
1. On the chord pads toolbar, click Save Preset.
2. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset.

NOTE

You can also define attributes for the preset.

3. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Presets on page 775
Load Preset Settings Pane on page 776

776
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assistant

Chord Assistant
The Chord Assistant assists you in finding chords to create a chord progression for your song.

To open the Chord Assistant, do one of the following:

● Activate Show/Hide Chord Assistant Window on the chord pads zone toolbar.
● Activate Show/Hide Editor/Assistant on the chord pads zone toolbar.

The Chord Assistant features the following tabs:

● List
Allows you to find suggestions for the chord that is assigned to the selected chord pad.
● Circle of Fifths
Allows you to find suggestions for the chord that is assigned as Root Key.
● Proximity
Allows you to find suggestions for the chord that is assigned to the selected chord pad.

NOTE

The Proximity assistant is not available in the right zone of the chord pads zone.

RELATED LINKS
List Assistant on page 777
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 779
Proximity Assistant on page 779
Root Key Pane on page 768

List Assistant
The List assistant allows you to create chord progressions based on harmonic rules that can be
simple or complex.

To open the List assistant, do one of the following:

● Activate Show/Hide Chord Assistant Window on the chord pads zone toolbar, and select
List.
● Activate Show/Hide Editor/Assistant on the chord pads zone toolbar, and select List.

777
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assistant

Suggestions list
Displays suggestions for the next chord.
● Click a chord suggestion to audition it.
● Drag a suggestion to a chord pad to assign the chord to the chord pad.
● Double-click a chord suggestion to assign the chord to the first free chord pad.

NOTE

The suggestions are colored according to their musical usefulness. Green indicates
that this suggestion is more common, orange or red are musically more adventurous
or do not fit at all.

Algorithm
Select Cadence to build up a chord progression based on cadences. Select Common
Notes to build up a progression by specifying how many common notes you want the
chords to share. The suggested chords and the colors change accordingly.

Cadence Type
Allows you to select a cadence type for the suggestions. As a result, only the chords
with specific harmonic functions are suggested. The suggested chords and the colors
change accordingly.

NOTE

These options are only available if you select Cadence as the Algorithm.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant on page 777
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 779
Proximity Assistant on page 779

778
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assistant

Proximity Assistant
The Proximity assistant uses a set of harmonic rules, in order to offer you suggestions that
match the reference chord.

The reference chord is displayed at the bottom, in the center of the Chord Assistant window.
The further away a chord suggestion is situated from this chord, the more complex the
suggestion.

NOTE

The Proximity assistant is not available in the right zone of the chord pads zone.

● To open the Proximity assistant, activate Show/Hide Chord Assistant Window on the chord
pads zone toolbar, and select Proximity.

● To audition a suggested chord, click it.

The last 3 suggested chords that you clicked are shown in bold.
● To assign a suggestion to the first unassigned chord pad, double-click the suggested chord.
You can also drag the suggested chord and drop it on a chord pad.

Chords that cannot be fully displayed are underlined. The entire chord is shown in the tooltip.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant on page 777
Assigning Chords with the Proximity Assistant on page 763
List Assistant on page 777
Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 779

Circle of Fifths Assistant

The Circle of Fifths assistant displays the chords in an interactive visualization.

● The chord that defines the current key, which is shown at the top, in the center of the Circle
of Fifths, is marked as the tonic (I).

779
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Assistant

● The outer circle shows the twelve major chords, ordered in intervals of fifths.
● The inner circle displays the corresponding parallel minor chords.
● The roman numerals mark the chords of the current key with their scale degree. You can use
these chords to create typical chord progressions, or you can use the other chords for more
creative results.

To open the Circle of Fifths assistant, do one of the following:

● Activate Show/Hide Chord Assistant Window on the chord pads zone toolbar, and select
Circle of Fifths.
● Activate Show/Hide Editor/Assistant on the chord pads zone toolbar, and select Circle of
Fifths.

● To play a chord, click it.

The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown in bold.
● To assign a chord to the next unassigned chord pad, right-click the suggested chord, and
select Assign to First Unassigned Pad, or double-click the suggested chord.
You can also drag the suggested chord and drop it on a chord pad.
● To correctly display the scale degrees, open the Major/Minor pop-up menu and select an
option.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant on page 777
Assigning Chords with the Circle of Fifths Assistant on page 764
List Assistant on page 777
Proximity Assistant on page 779

780
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Players and Voicings

Players and Voicings

Different types of instruments and styles have different voicing libraries. These determine how
the chords are played back and which pitches are played. These voicings are referred to as
players.

For example, a C chord can be spread over a wide range of pitches, and a pianist chooses
different notes than a guitarist. The pitches the pianist plays may also depend on the musical
genre.

RELATED LINKS
Player Settings on page 781
Adaptive Voicing on page 781

Adaptive Voicing
In Cubase, the adaptive voicing setting ensures that pitches in chord progressions do not change
abruptly.

Adaptive voicing is activated, and the voicings of the chord pads are determined automatically,
according to specific voice leading rules.

To set the voicing of a specific chord pad manually, and to prevent it from being changed
automatically, you can use the voicing control to the right of a chord pad. When you assign your
own voicing, adaptive voicing is deactivated for this particular chord pad, so that the pad no
longer follows the voice leading rules of the voicing reference. To activate adaptive voicing again,
activate Adaptive Voicing on the chord pads zone extended toolbar.

To lock the voicing for a chord pad, you can activate Lock on the chord pads zone extended
toolbar. This locks this pad for editing and remote control changes and deactivates Adaptive
Voicing. To unlock the chord pad again, deactivate Lock on the chord pads zone extended
toolbar.

RELATED LINKS
Players and Voicings on page 781

Player Settings
The Player Settings allow you to select a player and a voicing setting that is typical for the
particular kind of player.

● To open the Player Settings, click Player Settings on the chord pads toolbar.

781
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Players and Voicings

In the Select Player section, the following options are available:

List of Added Players

Shows the added players, and allows you to activate a player and use its voicing style
for the chord pads.

Add Player
Allows you to add a player.

Rename Selected Player

Allows you to rename the selected player.

Delete Selected Player

Allows you to delete the selected player.

In the Selected Player Settings section, the following options are available:

Chord Voicing Style (Guitar Player and Piano Player only)

Allows you to select a chord voicing style for the selected player. This determines how
chords are played back, and what pitches are used.

Octave Offset (Basic Player only)

Allows you to determine an offset value for the octave range.

RELATED LINKS
Players and Voicings on page 781
Player Settings on page 781

Using Different Players on Multiple Tracks

You can set up different players with different sounds on different tracks. If you record-enable
these tracks and play the chord pads, each track uses a dedicated player.

PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .

2. Click Instrument.
3. In the Count value field, select the number of tracks that you want to add.
4. Open the Instrument pop-up menu, and select a VST instrument.
5. Click Add Track.
The instrument tracks are added to the track list, and the control panels of the selected VST
instrument are opened.
6. Activate Chord Pad Output Mode.
7. Click Player Settings.
8. Select the first instrument track, select a sound for the VST instrument, and set up a player.

782
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Player Mode Settings

For example, select a piano sound, and activate Piano Player.

NOTE

When setting up the player for a track, make sure that Record Enable or Monitor is only
active for this particular track.

9. Select the second instrument track, select a sound for the VST instrument, and set up
another player.
For example, select a guitar sound, and activate Guitar Player.
10. Select the next instrument track, and proceed in the same manner as for the other 2 tracks.
For example, select a string sound, click Add Player, and select Add Basic Player.
11. Select all instrument tracks, and click Record Enable.

RESULT
You can now play the chord pads and use the remote control parameters for tensions and
transpose to change all chord symbols for each player simultaneously. However, if you change
the Voicing, only the selected player is affected.

RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 102

Player Mode Settings

The Player Mode Settings allow you to select a player and a voicing setting that is typical for the
particular kind of player.

● To open the Player Mode Settings, click Player Mode Settings on the chord pads toolbar.

Select Mode Section

In the Select Mode section, the following options are available:

Plain Chords
Allows you to play back the chords that are assigned to the chord pads as plain chords.

Pattern
Allows you to use the notes of the chords that are assigned to the chord pads to play
back a MIDI pattern.

RELATED LINKS
Selected Mode Settings—Plain Chords on page 784

783
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Player Mode Settings

Selected Mode Settings—Pattern on page 784

Selected Mode Settings—Plain Chords

The player mode Plain Chords allows you to play back the chords that are assigned to the chord
pads as plain chords.

● On the toolbar, click Player Mode Settings, and in the Select Mode section, activate Plain
Chords.

In the Selected Mode Settings section, the following options are available:

Overlaps
Allows you to select what happens with the notes of the first chord when you play a
chord without releasing the previous chord.
● Hold First holds the notes of the first chord. No note-off message is sent. If the
chords have common notes, these are not triggered again.
● Legato releases the notes of the first chord, except for the common notes. These
are held and not triggered again.
● Stop First releases the notes of the first chord, including the common notes.

Filter Notes
Allows you to select which keys are filtered.
● Off filters nothing.
● From MIDI Thru filters unassigned keys and keys that are assigned as remote keys
for voicings, tensions, and transpose.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog on page 786

Selected Mode Settings—Pattern

The player mode Pattern allows you to play back a MIDI pattern using the notes of the chords
that are assigned to the chord pads.

● On the toolbar, click Player Mode, and in the Select Mode section, select Pattern.

784
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Player Mode Settings

The following options are available:

In the Selected Mode Settings section, the following options are available:

Preset
Allows you to load pattern presets.

Import from MIDI Loop

Allows you to select a MIDI loop that is used as a pattern.

Pattern information field

Shows information about the loaded pattern.

Velocity from
● Pattern uses the velocity values from the MIDI loop or the MIDI part that is
selected as a pattern.
● MIDI Keyboard allows you to determine the velocity values by pressing the keys
on your MIDI keyboard harder or more softly.

NOTE

You can drop a MIDI part from the event display onto the Player Mode section of the toolbar.
This automatically sets the player mode to Pattern and uses the MIDI part as a pattern.

RELATED LINKS
Player Mode Settings on page 783
Using the Pattern Player on page 785

Using the Pattern Player

You can play back a MIDI pattern using the notes of the chords that are assigned to the chord
pads.

PROCEDURE
1. On the chord pads toolbar, click Player Mode.
2. In the Select Mode section, activate Pattern.

785
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog

3. In the Selected Mode Settings section, do one of the following:

● Open the Preset pop-up menu, and select a pattern preset.

● Click Import from MIDI Loop, and select a MIDI loop.

NOTE

The loop or part must have between 3 and 5 voices. The number of voices is indicated in
the Voices column of the Filters list.

4. In the Velocity from field, select a velocity source for the notes.
5. Trigger the chord pads.

RESULT
The chord pads play back the pattern of the loop or part using the notes of the assigned chord.

NOTE

In Pattern mode, you can also step through the presets by moving the mouse pointer over the
Preset Browser field on the chord pads zone toolbar and using the mouse wheel.

RELATED LINKS
Player Mode Settings on page 783
Selected Mode Settings—Pattern on page 784
Assigning Voices to Notes on page 747
Setting up the Results List Columns on page 506

Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog

The Chord Pads Remote Settings dialog allows you to change the remote key assignments and
the layout of the chord pads.

● To open the Chord Pads Remote Settings dialog, click Chord Pads Remote Settings.

786
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog

Pad Remote Control

Allows you to specify a range of remote keys that trigger the chords that are assigned
to the chord pads. In addition, you can also set up chord modifiers that allow you to
specify how to play back the chords.

RELATED LINKS
Pad Remote Control Tab on page 787

Pad Remote Control Tab

The Pad Remote Control tab in the Chord Pads Remote Settings dialog allows you to define a
range of remote keys that trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads.

● To open the Pad Remote Control tab, click Chord Pads Remote Settings . In the Chord
Pads Remote Settings dialog, click Pad Remote Control.

787
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog

MIDI Input
Allows you to select a MIDI input.

Chord Pad Triggers

In the Chord Pad Triggers section, the following options are available:

Latch Chords
Activate this if you want the chord pad to play back until it is triggered again.

Pads Remote Range Start

Allows you to set the start note for the remote range. By default, this is set to C1.

Pads Remote Range End

Allows you to set the end note for the remote range. By default, this is set to B1.

MIDI Learn
Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the pads remote
range.

Chord Modifiers
In the Chord Modifiers section, the following option is available:

788
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog

Activate
Activates/Deactivates the remote key assignment for voicings, tensions, and
transposition. If this option is deactivated, only the remote key assignment for the
pads remote range is active.

NOTE

If you use the remote keys for voicings, tensions, or transposition after releasing the
remote key for the chord pad, the selected chord pad is affected.

In the Voicing Modifiers section, the following options are available:

Next Voicing
Plays back the next voicing of the first assigned and selected pad and updates all
selected pads accordingly.

Previous Voicing
Plays back the previous voicing of the first assigned and selected pad and updates all
selected pads accordingly.

Modify All Pad Voicings

Allows you to set the voicings for all chord pads using one of the following modifiers:
● No Modifier
● Aftertouch
● Pitchbend
● Controller
If you select Controller, you can set the controller number in the Controller
Number field.

MIDI Learn
Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the parameters
for changing voicings.

In the Tension Modifiers section, the following options are available:

More Tensions
Plays back the first assigned and selected pad with more tensions, and updates all
selected pads accordingly.

Fewer Tensions
Plays back the first assigned and selected pad with fewer tensions, and updates all
selected pads accordingly.

Modify All Pad Tensions

Allows you to set the tensions for all chord pads using one of the following modifiers:

● No Modifier
● Aftertouch
● Pitchbend
● Controller
If you select Controller, you can set the controller number in the Controller
Number field.

789
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog

MIDI Learn
Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the parameters
for changing tensions.

In the Transpose Modifiers section, the following options are available:

Transpose Up
Plays back the first assigned and selected pad, and transposes it and all selected pads
upwards.

Transpose Down
Plays back the first assigned and selected pad, and transposes it and all selected pads
downwards.

Transpose All Pads

Allows you to transpose all chord pads using one of the following modifiers:
● No Modifier
● Aftertouch
● Pitchbend
● Controller
If you select Controller, you can set the controller number in the Controller
Number field.

MIDI Learn
Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the parameters
for changing transpose.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog on page 786
Changing the Pads Remote Range on page 790

Changing the Pads Remote Range

You can extend the pads remote range to access more chord pads. If you want to use a wider key
range on your MIDI keyboard for regular playing, you can narrow the pads remote range.

PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, click Chord Pads Remote Settings.
2. Open the Pad Remote Control tab.
3. In the Chord Pad Triggers section, do one of the following:

● Activate MIDI Learn so that the button lights up. On your MIDI keyboard, press the 2
keys that you want to assign as the start and the end of the range.
● Enter a new value in the Pads Remote Range Start and Pads Remote Range End fields.

RESULT
On the keyboard, the indication for pads remote range is changed.

RELATED LINKS
Pad Remote Control Tab on page 787

790
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Display Settings Pane

Chord Pads Remote Settings Dialog on page 786

Chord Pads Display Settings Pane

The Chord Pads Display Settings pane allows you to change the display and the layout of the
chord pads.

● To open the Chord Pads Display Settings pane, click Chord Pads Display Settings on the
chord pads zone toolbar.

Chord Symbols
Primary Type
Allows you to select the primary display type for chord symbols. The following options
are available:
● Note Name
Allows you to display chord symbols with note names, without reference to any
key.
● Roman Numerals
Allows you to display chord symbols in a chord notation system, based on scale
degrees that are written in roman numerals. They refer to the location or the
function of a chord, relative to the root key.
● Nashville Number System
Allows you to display chord symbols in a chord notation system that works
independently of the key of the song. Hence, chord 1 always represents the tonic,
regardless of the key that you are in.

Secondary Type
Allows you to select the secondary display type for chord symbols. The secondary type
is displayed below the primary type, provided that there is enough space. It features
the same options as the primary type.

Pad Layout
Type
Activate Keyboard to show the chord pads in a keyboard layout.
Activate Grid to show the chord pads in a grid layout.

791
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Using Chord Pads
Chord Pads Display Settings Pane

Number of Pads (Keyboard mode only)

Allows you to select the number of pads that are displayed in the keyboard layout.

Start Note (Keyboard mode only)

Allows you to select the start note for the first chord pad in the keyboard layout.

Number of Rows (Grid mode only)

Allows you to select the number of rows to be displayed in the grid layout.

Number of Columns (Grid mode only)

Allows you to select the number of columns to be displayed in the grid layout.

NOTE

After changing the pad layout, you may need to adjust the remote setup.

Show List Assistant Colors

Allows you to show/hide the list assistant pad coloring on the chord pads.

Show Voicing Indicators

Allows you to show/hide the voicing indicators on the chord pads.

Show Pattern Play Progress

Allows you to show/hide the progress of the pattern player on the chord pads.

RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads on page 757
List Assistant on page 777
List Assistant Color Indicator on page 758

792
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Editing Tempo and Time
Signature

You can set up a tempo and time signature for your project. By default, the tempo is set to
120 BPM, and the time signature to 4/4.

Project Tempo Modes

For any project you can set a tempo mode, depending on whether your music has a fixed tempo
or if it changes throughout the project.

On the Transport panel, you can set the following tempo modes:

● Fixed Tempo Mode

If you want to work with one fixed tempo that does not change throughout the project,
deactivate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel. You can change the tempo value
to set a fixed rehearsal tempo.

● Tempo Track Mode

If the tempo of your music contains tempo changes, activate Activate Tempo Track on the
Transport panel. You can change the tempo value at the cursor. If your project does not
contain any tempo changes, the tempo is changed at the project start.

RELATED LINKS
Projects in Fixed Tempo Mode on page 798
Projects with Tempo Changes on page 796

Tempo Track Editor

The Tempo Track Editor provides an overview of the project tempo settings. It allows you to add
and edit tempo events.

To open the Tempo Track Editor, do one of the following:

● Select Project > Tempo Track.

● Press Ctrl/Cmd - T .

793
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Tempo Track Editor

The Tempo Track Editor is divided into several sections:

1 Tempo scale
Shows the tempo scale in BPM.
2 Toolbar
Contains tools for selecting, adding, and changing tempo and time signature events.
3 Info line
Shows information about the selected tempo or time signature event.
4 Ruler
Shows the timeline and the time format of the project.
5 Time signature display
Shows the time signature events in the project.
6 Tempo curve display
If your project is set to a fixed tempo, only one tempo event and a fixed tempo are shown.
If your project is set to tempo track mode, the curve display shows the tempo curve with the
tempo events in the project.

Tempo Track Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools for selecting, adding, and changing tempo and time signature events.

The following tools are available:

Activate Tempo Track

Activate Tempo Track

Switches the project tempo between fixed tempo mode and tempo track mode.

Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.

794
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Tempo Track Editor

Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll

Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.

Select Auto-Scroll Settings

Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend
Auto-Scroll When Editing.

Tool Buttons
Object Selection

Selects events.

Draw

Draws events.

Erase

Deletes events.

Zoom

Zoom in. Hold Alt/Opt , and click to zoom out.

New Tempo Type

Type of New Tempo Points

Allows you to select the type of new tempo points.

Select Ramp if you want new tempo points to change gradually from the previous
curve point to the new one.
Select Step if you want new tempo points to change instantly.
Select Automatic if you want new tempo points to be of the same type as the previous
curve point.

Current Tempo
Current Tempo

In fixed tempo mode, this allows you to change the current tempo.

Snap
Snap On/Off

Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap
Type. Time signature events always snap to the beginning of bars.

795
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Projects with Tempo Changes

Snap Type

Allows you to specify to what positions you want events to snap.

Right Divider
Right Divider
Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.

Show Info Line

Show/Hide Info

Opens/Closes the info line.

Projects with Tempo Changes

If the tempo track is activated, you can set up tempo changes for your project.

NOTE

If you work in tempo track mode, make sure that the time format in the Project window ruler is
set to Bars+Beats. Otherwise, you may obtain confusing results.

If you activate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel, the tempo track curve is displayed
in the tempo curve display.

You can adjust the tempo value as follows:

● By adding tempo events in the Tempo Track Editor.

● By adding tempo events by tapping.

RELATED LINKS
Project Tempo Modes on page 793
Editing Tempo Events in the Tempo Track Editor on page 797
Setting up Tempo Changes by Tapping on page 798

Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes

When you create a new project, the project tempo is automatically set to fixed tempo mode. If
your music contains tempo changes, you must set your project to tempo track mode.

PROCEDURE
● To set your project to tempo track mode, do one of the following:

● On the Transport panel, activate Activate Tempo Track.

● Select Project > Tempo Track, and activate Activate Tempo Track.

RESULT
The project tempo is now set up to follow the tempo track.

RELATED LINKS
Tempo Track Editor on page 793

796
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Projects with Tempo Changes

Inserting Tempo Events at the Cursor Position

You can assign a key command to insert tempo events at the project cursor position.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Key Commands.
2. In the Edit category of the Key Commands dialog, select the command Insert Tempo Event
at Cursor, and assign a key to it.
3. Select Project > Tempo Track > Open Tempo Track Editor.
4. In the Tempo Track Editor, open the Type of New Tempo Points pop-up menu, and select
an option.
5. In the event display, set the project cursor to the position where you want to insert the new
tempo event.
6. Press the key that you assigned to the Insert Tempo Event at Cursor command.
7. In the Insert Tempo Event at Cursor dialog, enter a new tempo value.

8. Click OK.

RESULT
The tempo event is inserted at the project cursor position in the Tempo Track Editor.

Editing Tempo Events in the Tempo Track Editor

In the Tempo Track Editor, you can edit selected tempo events.

Use the following methods:

● With the Object Selection tool, click and drag horizontally and/or vertically.
● On the info line, adjust the tempo value in the Value field.

NOTE

When editing tempo events on tempo curves, make sure that the time format in the Project
window ruler is set to Bars+Beats. Otherwise, you may obtain confusing results.

Use the following methods to remove tempo events:

● With the Erase tool, click the tempo event.

● Select the tempo event, and press Backspace .

NOTE

You cannot remove the first tempo event.

Use the following method to change the tempo curve type:

● On the info line, adjust the tempo curve type in the Type field.

797
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Projects in Fixed Tempo Mode

Setting up Tempo Changes by Tapping

You can insert tempo changes into your project by tapping to the tempo of a recording or a live
beat.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Tempo & Time Signature section of the Transport panel or the Transport Bar,
activate Tempo Track.
This sets the tempo mode to Tempo Track mode.
2. Open the Tap Tempo Mode pop-up menu, and select a mode.
The Tap Tempo Mode defines where new tempo events are inserted when you insert tempo
changes by tapping.
3. In the Tempo & Time Signature section, do one of the following:

● Keep clicking Tap to the tempo of the recording or the live beat.
● Press Shift and keep clicking Space to the tempo of the recording or the live beat.

A message informs you that you are in Tap Tempo mode and indicates where the tempo
events are inserted. The tempo is updated as you keep tapping.
4. Stop clicking Tap or using the key command to confirm the tempo.

RESULT
A new tempo event that is set to the tapped tempo is inserted into your project.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes on page 796
Tap Tempo Modes on page 800

Projects in Fixed Tempo Mode

If your music does not contain tempo changes and the tempo track is deactivated, you can set up
a fixed tempo for your project.

When the tempo track is deactivated, the tempo track curve is grayed out. The fixed tempo is
displayed as a horizontal line in the tempo curve display.

If you know the tempo of your music, you can adjust the tempo value in the following areas:

● Tempo field on the Transport panel

● Current Tempo field on the Tempo Track Editor toolbar

If you do not know the tempo of your music, use one of the following tools to calculate and set it:

● Tap Tempo
● Set Project Tempo from Loop

RELATED LINKS
Project Tempo Modes on page 793
Setting the Project Tempo by Tapping on page 799
Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop on page 799

798
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Projects in Fixed Tempo Mode

Setting the Project Tempo by Tapping

You can set the project tempo by tapping to the tempo of a recording or a live beat.

PROCEDURE
1. Optional: To tap to the tempo of a recording in the Project window, click Start on the
Transport panel or the Transport Bar.
You can also tap the tempo in Stop mode. This is useful if you want to tap to the beat of a
sound source outside of the Project window.
2. In the Tempo & Time Signature section of the Transport panel or the Transport Bar, open
the Tap Tempo Mode pop-up menu, and activate Set project tempo.

NOTE

If Tempo Track is deactivated on the Transport panel or the Transport Bar, you can also
use the Automatic mode to set the project tempo.

3. Do one of the following:

● Keep clicking Tap to the tempo of the recording or the live beat.
● Press Shift and keep clicking Space to the tempo of the recording or the live beat.
A message informs you that you are in Tap Tempo mode and that you are setting the project
tempo. The tempo is updated as you keep tapping.
4. Stop clicking Tap or using the key command to confirm the tempo.
5. Optional: Click Start to deactivate playback.

RESULT
The project tempo is set to the tapped tempo.

RELATED LINKS
Tap Tempo Modes on page 800
Projects in Fixed Tempo Mode on page 798

Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop

You can set the project tempo from the tempo of an audio loop.

PREREQUISITE
Your project contains an audio loop that is not in Musical Mode.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window ruler, set the left locator to the beginning of the audio loop.
2. Set the right locator to the end of the last bar.
This does not need to match the end of the audio loop, but its number of bars.
3. Select the audio loop.
4. Select Audio > Advanced > Set Tempo from Event.
5. Perform one of the following actions:

● Click Yes to adjust the project tempo globally.

799
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Tap Tempo Modes

● Click No to adjust the project tempo only in the section of the audio event.

RESULT
The project tempo is set to the tempo calculated for the audio loop.

RELATED LINKS
Projects in Fixed Tempo Mode on page 798

Tap Tempo Modes

When you insert tempo changes into your project by tapping, you can set up a Tap Tempo
Mode. This mode defines where new tempo events are inserted.

● To open the Tap Tempo Mode pop-up menu, open the Tempo & Time Signature section of
the Transport panel, and click Tap Tempo Mode.

The following modes are available:

Automatic
Depending on the selection, the following happens:
● If a part, an event, or a range is selected, a new tempo event is inserted at the start
of a selection.
● If nothing is selected and Start is activated on the Transport panel or the
Transport Bar, a new tempo event is inserted at the last playback start position.
● If nothing is selected and Stop is activated on the Transport panel or the
Transport Bar, a new tempo event is added at the project cursor position.
● If Tempo Track is deactivated on the Transport panel or the Transport Bar, the
project tempo is set.

Insert tempo event at selection start

Inserts a tempo event at the start of the current selection. If nothing is selected, no
tempo event is inserted.

Insert tempo event at last playback start position

Inserts a tempo event at the last playback start position.

Insert tempo event at cursor position

Inserts a tempo event at the cursor position.

Set project tempo

If Tempo Track mode is activated, this changes the initial tempo event of the tempo
track. If Tempo Track mode is deactivated, this sets the project tempo.

Display only
Displays the tapped tempo in an informer without applying any changes.

800
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Set Definition from Tempo Dialog

NOTE

By default, the Tap Tempo Mode is set to Automatic.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Tempo Changes by Tapping on page 798
Transport Panel Sections on page 195
Transport Bar Sections on page 205

Set Definition from Tempo Dialog

The Set Definition from Tempo dialog allows you to set up freely recorded audio material to
follow a specific tempo.

● To open the Set Definition from Tempo dialog for an audio recording, select Audio >
Advanced > Set Definition from Tempo.

Save Definition in Project Only

Saves the tempo information in the project file only.

Write Definition to Audio Files

Writes the tempo information to the selected audio files. This is useful if you want to
use them in other projects in conjunction with the tempo information.

Adjusting the Audio Tempo to the Project Tempo

You can adjust the tempo of freely recorded audio material to the project tempo.

PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio events that you want to adjust to the project tempo.
2. Select Audio > Advanced > Set Definition from Tempo.
3. Optional: Adjust the settings.
4. Click OK.

RESULT
The tempo information is copied to the audio, and the tracks are set to musical time base. This is
achieved by applying warping to the events. Musical Mode is activated for the audio events. The
audio tracks now follow any tempo changes in the project.

801
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Time Signature Events

Time Signature Events

You can set up one or more time signatures for a project.

You can set up the first time signature event of your project on the Transport panel. You can add
further time signature events in the Tempo Track Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Project Window Toolbar on page 37
Transport Bar on page 48
Adding Time Signature Events in the Tempo Track Editor on page 802

Adding Time Signature Events in the Tempo Track Editor

PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Tempo Track to open the Tempo Track Editor.
2. Select Draw on the toolbar, and in the time signature display, click at the time position
where you want to insert the time signature event.
3. Edit the numerator and the denominator to change the value of the time signature event.

NOTE

You can also select the time signature event and edit the time signature value on the info
line.

RESULT
The time signature event is added at the specified time position. The timeline and the event
displays for the Project window and the editors reflect the changes.

Inserting Time Signature Events at the Cursor Position

You can assign a key command to insert time signature events at the project cursor position.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Key Commands.
2. In the Edit category of the Key Commands dialog, select the command Insert Time
Signature Event, and assign a key to it.
3. Select Project > Tempo Track > Open Tempo Track Editor.
4. In the event display, set the project cursor to the position where you want to insert the new
tempo event.
5. Press the key that you assigned to the Insert Time Signature Event command.
6. In the Insert Time Signature Event dialog, enter a new time signature by editing the
numerator and the denominator.

802
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Time Signature Events

7. Click OK.

RESULT
The time signature event is inserted at the project cursor position in the Tempo Track Editor.

RELATED LINKS
Time Signature Events on page 802

803
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Export Audio Mixdown

The Export Audio Mixdown function allows you to mix down and export any audio between the
left and right locators of a project.

● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.

Export Audio Mixdown Dialog

The Export Audio Mixdown dialog allows you to set up how audio is mixed down and exported.

● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.

The Export Audio Mixdown dialog is divided into several sections.

804
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog

Export Channel
In the Export Channel pop-up menu, you can select an output channel for export.

File Location
In the File Location section, the following options are available:

Name
Allows you to specify the name of the mixdown file.
Click File Name Options to open a pop-up menu with naming options:
● Set to Project Name inserts the project name into the Name field.
● Auto Update Name adds a number to the file name and increments the number
every time you export a file.
Click Set up Naming Scheme to open a dialog where you can specify a naming
scheme.

Path
Allows you to specify the file path for the mixdown file.
Click Path Options to open a pop-up menu with file path options:

● Use Project Mixdown Folder sets the path to the Mixdown folder of your project.
● Use Project Audio Folder sets the path to the Audio folder of your project.
● Choose Folder... opens a dialog that allows you to browse for a file location.

805
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog

NOTE

The Mixdown folder is automatically created in your project folder. It is used by

default if no export path information is available, that is, if you create a new empty
project, or if you load or create a project from a template.

● Recent Paths allows you to select recently selected file locations.

The Mixdown folder is not added to the list of Recent Paths.
● Clear Recent Paths allows you to delete all recently selected file locations.

Preview
Shows the file name with the naming scheme applied.

Conflicts
Exporting audio can cause naming conflicts with existing files that have the same
name. You can define how file name conflicts are resolved:
● Always Ask opens a warning that allows you to choose whether to overwrite an
existing file or to create a new unique file name by adding an incremental number.
● Create Unique File Name creates a unique file name by adding an incremental
number.
● Always Overwrite always overwrites the existing file.

File Format
In the File Format section, the following options are available:

File Type
Allows you to select a file type for the mixdown file.

Sample Rate
Sets the sample rate for the mixdown file.

NOTE

● Wave, AIFF files only: If you set the value lower than the project sample rate, the
audio quality degrades, and the high-frequency content is reduced. If you set the
value higher than the project sample rate, the file size increases without increasing
the audio quality. For CD burning, select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample
rate used on audio CDs.

Bit Depth (Wave, AIFF, FLAC)

Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file.

Bit Rate (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

Sets the bit rate for the MP3 file. The higher the bit rate, the better the audio quality
and the larger the file. For stereo audio, 128 kBit/s is considered to be providing good
audio quality results.

Export as
Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file:

● Interleaved
Allows you to export to an interleaved file.
● Split Channels
Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files.

806
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog

● Mono Downmix
Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file.

Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk (Wave, AIFF)

Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format.

NOTE

By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may
not be able to handle these files. If you encounter problems using the file in another
application, deactivate Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk, and export the file again.

Set up Broadcast Wave Chunk (Wave, AIFF)

Opens the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog where you can enter information.

Insert Marker Chunk (Wave)

Activates the embedding of markers from your project via marker chunk in the
exported wave file.

Set up Marker Chunk (Wave)

Opens the Select Marker Tracks for Export dialog that allows you to specify the
marker tracks that you want to be taken into account for the marker chunk. All markers
on the specified tracks are written into the metadata of the wave file.

Insert iXML Chunk (Wave, AIFF)

Includes additional project-related metadata, such as project name, author, and project
frame rate.

Don’t Use Wave Extensible Format (Wave)

Deactivates the Wave Extensible format that contains additional metadata, such as the
speaker configuration.

Insert Tempo Definition (Wave, AIFF)

This option is only available if Insert iXML Chunk is activated. It allows you to include
tempo information from the tempo track in the iXML chunk of the exported files.

High-Quality Mode (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

Sets the encoder to a different resampling mode. This may deliver better results,
depending on your settings. However, it does not allow you to select the Sample Rate.

Insert ID3 Tag (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

Includes ID3 Tag information in the exported file.

Edit ID3 Tag (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

Opens the Setup ID3 Tag dialog that allows you to enter information about the file.
This information is embedded in the file and can be displayed by most MP3 playback
applications.

Compression Level (FLAC)

Sets the compression level for the FLAC file. Since FLAC is a lossless format, the level
has more influence on the encoding speed than on the file size.

Quality (OggVorbis)
Sets the quality for the variable bit rate encoding. This setting determines the range of
the bit rate. The higher the value, the higher the sound quality and the larger the files.

After Export
● Do Nothing does nothing after export.

807
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog

● Open in WaveLab opens your mixdown file in a WaveLab version after export. This
requires that WaveLab is installed on your computer.
● Create New Project

NOTE

This option is only available for uncompressed file formats, with Use Project Audio
Folder deactivated.

Creates a new project that contains an audio track for each of the exported
channels, as well as the signature and tempo track of the original project.
The corresponding mixdown file is placed on the tracks as audio events. The
resulting track names are identical with the export channel names. The new
project is the active project.
Activating this option disables the Insert to Pool and Create Audio Track options.
● Create Audio Track
Creates an audio event that plays the clip on a new audio track, starting at the left
locator. Activating this option also activates the Pool option.
● Insert to Pool
Imports the resulting audio file automatically back into the Pool as a clip.
Deactivating this option also deactivates the Create Audio Track option.

Pool Folder
Allows you to specify a Pool folder for the clip.

General Options
In the bottom section, the following options are available:

Keep Dialog Open

Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Export Audio.

Update Display
Updates the meters during the export process. This allows you to check for clipping, for
example.

Export Audio
Allows you to export your audio as specified.

RELATED LINKS
File Formats on page 811

Naming Scheme Dialog

The Naming Scheme dialog allows you to define naming schemes for the file name of the audio
material that you want to export.

The naming attributes that are available in this dialog depend on the channel that you selected
for export.

● To open the Naming Scheme dialog, open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog. In the File
Location section, to the right of the Name field, click Set up Naming Scheme.

808
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog

Scheme
Allows you to save and delete naming schemes.

NOTE

The name of a naming scheme is unique.

Attributes
Holds the following naming scheme attributes:
● Name
Adds the name to the resulting file name.
● Free Text
Allows you to enter free text.
● Channel Number
Adds the channel number to the resulting file name.
● Channel Type
Adds the channel type to the resulting file name.
● Channel Name
Adds the channel name to the resulting file name.
● Project Name
Adds the project name to the resulting file name.

Result
Allows you to drop attributes for the file name and to rearrange them by dragging.

Settings
Allows you to select separator and counter settings.

● Separator
Divides attributes from each other.

Preview
Displays a preview of your current settings.

809
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog

Defining Naming Schemes

You can define a naming scheme by combining attributes that determine the structure of the file
names for the exported audio files.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Naming Scheme dialog, drag attributes from the Attributes section into the Result
section.

NOTE

You can also double-click an attribute to add it to the Result section.

2. Optional: In the Settings section, double-click the Separator text field to change the
separator.
The Preview section displays the file name scheme according to your settings.
3. Optional: Click the Name value field in the Scheme section and enter a preset name. Press
Return to save your settings as a preset.

NOTE

The preset is only available for the channels that are selected in the Channel Selection
section.

4. Click OK.

Entering Free Text

You can enter free text that is added to the file name of the exported audio files.

PROCEDURE
1. In the File Location section of the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, click Set up Naming
Scheme.
The Naming Scheme dialog opens.

810
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
Mixing Down to Audio Files

2. Open the Scheme pop-up menu, and select New Scheme.

3. Double-click the Free Text attribute to add it to the Result field.
4. In the Result field, double-click the Free Text label, and enter the text that you want to add.
5. Press Return to confirm your changes.
6. Click OK.

RESULT
The text that you entered is added to the file name scheme and applied on export.

Mixing Down to Audio Files

You can mix selected channels down to audio files.

PREREQUISITE
● You have set up the left and right locators so that they encompass the range that you want
to mix down.
● You have set up your tracks so that they play back the way you want.
This includes muting unwanted tracks or parts, making manual MixConsole settings, and/or
activating the R (Read) automation buttons for MixConsole channels.

IMPORTANT

The setting of the Output Routing in the corresponding track Inspector determines the
channel width of the Export Audio Mixdown export. This means that if no main output bus
is selected, the exported audio file only contains silence.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
2. In the File Location section, set up a valid export path.
3. Set up the file name.

NOTE

You can define a naming scheme in the Naming Scheme dialog.

4. In the File Format section, set up the settings according to your needs.
5. Click Export Audio.

RESULT
The audio is exported.

File Formats
The File Type pop-up menu in the File Format section allows you to select a format and make
additional settings for the mixdown file.

Wave file
This is the most common file format on the PC platform. Wave files have the
extension .wav.

811
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
File Formats

AIFF file
This is an audio file format standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFF files are used on most
computer platforms. The files can contain embedded text strings. AIFF files have the
extension .aif.

MPEG 1 Layer 3 file

This is a family of standards used for encoding audio-visual information, such as
movies, video, and music in a digital compressed format. Cubase can read MPEG Layer
2 and MPEG Layer 3. MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio
quality. The file extension is .mp3.

FLAC file
This is an open source format that reduces the size of audio files by 50% to 60%,
compared to regular Wave files. The file extension is .flac.

Ogg Vorbis file

This is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology. The Ogg
Vorbis encoder uses variable bit rate encoding. It offers small, compressed audio files
of comparatively high audio quality. The file extension is.ogg.

RELATED LINKS
Wave Files on page 812
AIFF Files on page 813
MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3) Files on page 814
FLAC Files on page 815
Ogg Vorbis Files on page 816
File Format on page 806

Wave Files
Wave files have the extension .wav. On personal computers, this is the most common file format.

● To open the settings for wave files, select Wave in the File Type pop-up menu.

Sample Rate
Sets the sample rate for the mixdown file.

NOTE

If you set the value lower than the project sample rate, the audio quality degrades,
and the high-frequency content is reduced. If you set the value higher than the
project sample rate, the file size increases without increasing the audio quality. For
CD burning, select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs.

Bit Depth
Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file. You can select 8 bit, 16 bit,
24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, or 64 bit float. If you plan to re-import the mixdown file into
Cubase, select 32 bit float. This is the resolution used for audio processing in Cubase.
32 bit (float) files are twice the size of 16 bit files. For CD burning, use the 16 bit option,
as CD audio is always 16 bit. In this case, we recommend dithering.
Activating the Lin Dither dithering plug-in reduces the effects of quantization noise
and artifacts when converting the audio to 16 bit. A resolution of 8 bit results in limited
audio quality and should only be used in cases where it is unavoidable or explicitly
required.

812
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
File Formats

Export as
Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file:

● Interleaved
Allows you to export to an interleaved file.
● Split Channels
Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files.
● Mono Downmix
Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file.

Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk

Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format.

NOTE

By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may
not be able to handle these files. If you encounter problems using the file in another
application, deactivate Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk, and export the file again.

Set up Broadcast Wave Chunk

Opens the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog where you can enter information.

Insert iXML Chunk

Includes additional project-related metadata, such as project name, author, and project
frame rate.

Insert Tempo Definition

This option is only available if Insert iXML Chunk is activated. It allows you to include
tempo information from the tempo track in the iXML chunk of the exported files.

Don’t Use Wave Extensible Format

Deactivates the Wave Extensible format that contains additional metadata, such as the
speaker configuration.

AIFF Files
AIFF stands for Audio Interchange File Format, a standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFF files have
the extension .aif and are used on most computer platforms.

● To open the settings for AIFF files, select AIFF in the File Type pop-up menu.

Sample Rate
Sets the sample rate for the mixdown file.

NOTE

If you set the value lower than the project sample rate, the audio quality degrades,
and the high-frequency content is reduced. If you set the value higher than the
project sample rate, the file size increases without increasing the audio quality. For
CD burning, select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs.

Bit Depth
Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file. You can select 8 bit, 16 bit,
24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, or 64 bit float. If you plan to re-import the mixdown file into
Cubase, select 32 bit float. This is the resolution used for audio processing in Cubase.

813
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
File Formats

32 bit (float) files are twice the size of 16 bit files. For CD burning, use the 16 bit option,
as CD audio is always 16 bit. In this case, we recommend dithering.
Activating the Lin Dither dithering plug-in reduces the effects of quantization noise
and artifacts when converting the audio to 16 bit. A resolution of 8 bit results in limited
audio quality and should only be used in cases where it is unavoidable or explicitly
required.

Export as
Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file:

● Interleaved
Allows you to export to an interleaved file.
● Split Channels
Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files.
● Mono Downmix
Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file.

Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk

Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format.

NOTE

By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may
not be able to handle these files. If you encounter problems using the file in another
application, deactivate Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk, and export the file again.

Set up Broadcast Wave Chunk

Opens the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog where you can enter information.

Insert iXML Chunk

Includes additional project-related metadata, such as project name, author, and project
frame rate.

Insert Tempo Definition

This option is only available if Insert iXML Chunk is activated. It allows you to include
tempo information from the tempo track in the iXML chunk of the exported files.

MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3) Files

MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio quality. They have the
extension .mp3.

● To open the settings for MP3 files, select MPEG 1 Layer 3 in the File Type pop-up menu.

Sample Rate
Sets the sample rate for the mixdown file.

Bit Rate
Sets the bit rate for the MP3 file. The higher the bit rate, the better the audio quality
and the larger the file. For stereo audio, 128 kBit/s is considered to be providing good
audio quality results.

Export as
Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file:

● Interleaved

814
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
File Formats

Allows you to export to an interleaved file.

● Split Channels
Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files.
● Mono Downmix
Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file.

High-Quality Mode
Sets the encoder to a different resampling mode. This may deliver better results,
depending on your settings. However, it does not allow you to select the Sample Rate.

Insert ID3 Tag

Includes ID3 Tag information in the exported file.

Edit ID3 Tag

Opens the Setup ID3 Tag dialog that allows you to enter information about the file.
This information is embedded in the file and can be displayed by most MP3 playback
applications.

FLAC Files
Free Lossless Audio Codec files are audio files that are typically 50% to 60% smaller than regular
Wave files.

● To open the settings for FLAC files, select FLAC in the File Type pop-up menu.

Sample Rate
Sets the sample rate for the mixdown file.

NOTE

If you set the value lower than the project sample rate, the audio quality degrades,
and the high-frequency content is reduced. If you set the value higher than the
project sample rate, the file size increases without increasing the audio quality. For
CD burning, select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs.

Bit Depth
Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file. You can select 8 bit, 16 bit,
24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, or 64 bit float. If you plan to re-import the mixdown file into
Cubase, select 32 bit float. This is the resolution used for audio processing in Cubase.
32 bit (float) files are twice the size of 16 bit files. For CD burning, use the 16 bit option,
as CD audio is always 16 bit. In this case, we recommend dithering.
Activating the Lin Dither dithering plug-in reduces the effects of quantization noise
and artifacts when converting the audio to 16 bit. A resolution of 8 bit results in limited
audio quality and should only be used in cases where it is unavoidable or explicitly
required.

Export as
Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file:

● Interleaved
Allows you to export to an interleaved file.
● Split Channels
Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files.
● Mono Downmix

815
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Export Audio Mixdown
File Formats

Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file.

Compression Level
Sets the compression level for the FLAC file. Since FLAC is a lossless format, the level
has more influence on the encoding speed than on the file size.

Ogg Vorbis Files

Ogg Vorbis is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology, offering
compressed audio files of small size, but with comparatively high audio quality. Ogg Vorbis files
have the extension .ogg.

● To open the settings for Ogg Vorbis files, select OggVorbis in the File Type pop-up menu.

Quality
Sets the quality for the variable bit rate encoding. This setting determines the range of
the bit rate. The higher the value, the higher the sound quality and the larger the files.

Export as
Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file:
● Interleaved
Allows you to export to an interleaved file.
● Split Channels
Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files.
● Mono Downmix
Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file.

816
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Synchronization

Synchronization is the process of getting 2 or more devices to play back together at the same
speed, position, and phase. These devices can range from audio and video tape machines
to digital audio workstations, MIDI sequencers, synchronization controllers, and digital video
devices.

If you know the position and speed of the master device, you can align the speed and position of
the slave device with it, so that the 2 devices play in perfect sync with each other.

Position (Time)
The following clock signals are used to specify time positions:

● Audio word clock

Specifies time positions in samples.
● Timecode
Specifies time positions in video frames.
● MIDI clock
Specifies time positions in musical bars and beats.

Speed (Clock)
The following clock signals measure the speed of a device:

● Audio word clock

Measures the sample rate.
● Timecode
Measures the frame rate.
● MIDI clock
Measures the tempo.

Phase
Phase refers to the alignment of the position and speed components to each other. Each pulse of
the speed component should be aligned with each measurement of the position to achieve the
greatest accuracy possible. Each frame of timecode should be perfectly lined up with the correct
audio sample. Put simply, phase is the precise position of a synchronized device relative to the
master (sample accuracy).

Master and Slave

Calling one device the master and another one the slave can lead to confusion. Therefore, the
timecode relationship and the machine control relationship must be differentiated and clearly
defined in this regard.

● Timecode Master
The device generating position information or timecode.
● Timecode Slave

817
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Synchronization
Timecode Formats

Any device receiving the timecode and synchronizing or locking to it.

Timecode Formats
The position of any device is most often described using timecode. Timecode represents time
using hours, minutes, seconds, and frames to provide a location for each device. Each frame
represents a visual film or video frame.

The following timecode formats are supported:

● LTC
Longitudinal timecode or LTC is an analog signal that can be recorded on tape. It should
primarily be used for positional information. It can also be used for speed and phase
information as a last resort, if no other clock source is available.
● VITC
Vertical interval timecode or VITC is contained within a composite video signal. It is recorded
onto video tape and physically tied to each video frame.
● MTC
MIDI timecode or MTC is identical to LTC, except that it is a digital signal transmitted via
MIDI.

Timecode Standards
Timecode has several standards. The subject of the various timecode formats can be very
confusing due to the use and misuse of the shorthand names for specific timecode standards
and frame rates. The timecode format can be divided into 2 variables: frame count and frame
rate.

Frame count (frames per second)

The frame count of timecode defines the standard with which it is labeled. There are 4 timecode
standards:

24 fps Film (F)

This frame count is the traditional count for film. It is also used for HD video formats
and commonly referred to as 24 p. However, with HD video, the actual frame rate or
speed of the video sync reference is slower, 23.976 frames per second, so timecode
does not reflect the real time on the clock for 24 p HD video.

25 fps PAL (P)

This is the broadcast video standard frame count for European (and other PAL
countries) television broadcast.

30 fps non-drop SMPTE (N)

This is the frame count of NTSC broadcast video. However, the actual frame rate or
speed of the video format runs at 29.97 fps. This timecode clock does not run in real
time. It is slightly slower by 0.1%.

30 fps drop-frame SMPTE (D)

The 30 fps drop-frame count is an adaptation that allows a timecode display running
at 29.97 fps to actually show the clock-on-the-wall-time of the timeline by dropping or
skipping specific frame numbers in order to catch the clock up to real time.

818
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Synchronization
Clock Sources

NOTE

Remember to keep the timecode standard (or frame count) and frame rate (or speed) separate.

Frame rate (speed)

Regardless of the frame counting system, the actual speed at which frames of video go by in real
time is the true frame rate.

Cubase supports the following frame rates:

24 fps
This is the true speed of standard film cameras.

25 fps
This is the frame rate of PAL video.

29.97 fps/29.97 dfps

This is the frame rate of NTSC video. The count can be either non-drop or drop-frame.

30 fps/30 dfps
This frame rate is not a video standard anymore but has been commonly used in music
recording. Many years ago, it was the black and white NTSC broadcast standard. It is
equal to NTSC video being pulled up to film speed after a 2-3 telecine transfer. The
count can be either non-drop or drop-frame.

IMPORTANT

Video formats with a variable frame rate (VFR) are not supported.

Frame count vs. frame rate

Part of the confusion in timecode stems from the use of frames per second in both the timecode
standard and the actual frame rate. When used to describe a timecode standard, frames per
second defines how many frames of timecode are counted before one second on the counter
increments. When describing frame rates, frames per second define how many frames are
played back within one second in real time. In other words: Regardless of how many frames
of video there are per second of timecode (frame count), those frames can be moving at different
rates depending on the speed (frame rate) of the video format. For example, NTSC timecode
(SMPTE) has a frame count of 30 fps. However, NTSC video runs at a rate of 29.97 fps. Thus, the
NTSC timecode standard known as SMPTE is a 30 fps standard that runs at 29.97 fps in real time.

Clock Sources
Once the position is established, the next essential factor for synchronization is the playback
speed. Once 2 devices start playing from the same position, they must run at exactly the same
speed in order to remain in sync. Therefore, a single speed reference must be used, and all
devices in the system must follow that reference. For digital audio, the speed is determined by
the audio clock rate. For video, the speed is determined by the video sync signal.

Audio clock
Audio clock signals run at the speed of the sample rate used by a digital audio device and are
transmitted in several ways:

819
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Synchronization
Project Synchronization Setup Dialog

Word clock
Word clock is a dedicated signal running at the current sample rate that is fed over
BNC coaxial cables between devices. It is the most reliable form of audio clock, and is
relatively easy to connect and use.

AES/SPDIF Digital Audio

An audio clock source is embedded within AES and SPDIF digital audio signals. This
clock source can be used as a speed reference. Preferably, the signal itself does not
contain any actual audio (digital black), but any digital audio source can be used if
necessary.

ADAT Lightpipe
ADAT Lightpipe, the 8-channel digital audio protocol developed by Alesis, also contains
audio clock and can be used as a speed reference. It is transmitted between devices via
optical cables.

NOTE

Do not confuse the audio clock embedded in the Lightpipe protocol with ADAT Sync, which uses a
proprietary DIN plug connection for timecode transmission and machine control.

MIDI clock
MIDI clock is a signal that uses position and timing data based on musical bars and beats
to determine location and speed (tempo). It can perform the same function as a positional
reference and a speed reference for other MIDI devices. Cubase supports sending MIDI clock to
external devices but cannot slave to incoming MIDI clock.

IMPORTANT

MIDI clock cannot be used to synchronize digital audio. It is only used for MIDI devices to play in
musical sync with one another. Cubase cannot be used as a MIDI clock slave.

Project Synchronization Setup Dialog

The Project Synchronization Setup dialog provides a central place to configure a complex
synchronized system. In addition to settings for timecode sources, basic transport controls are
available for testing the system.

To open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog, do one of the following:

● Select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup.

● In the Transport Bar, Ctrl/Cmd -click Sync.

820
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Synchronization
Project Synchronization Setup Dialog

RELATED LINKS
Sources Page on page 822
Destinations Page on page 824

821
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Synchronization
Project Synchronization Setup Dialog

Sources Page
The Sources page allows you to set up the synchronization inputs and to determine which
external signals enter the application.

In the topmost section, the following options are available:

Activate External Sync

Activates/Deactivates the external synchronization.

Timecode Source
The Timecode Source section allows you to determine whether Cubase is acting as the timecode
master or slave. The following options are available:

Internal Timecode
Sets Cubase as the timecode master that generates all position references for any
other device in the system, based on the project timeline and the Project Setup
settings.

MIDI Timecode
If Activate External Sync is activated, this sets Cubase as the timecode slave to any
incoming MIDI timecode. You can select the MIDI Input ports in the MIDI Timecode
Settings section.

ASIO Audio Device (Windows only)

Only available for audio cards that support the ASIO positioning protocol. These cards
have an integrated LTC reader or ADAT sync port and can perform a phase alignment
of timecode and audio clock.

822
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Synchronization
Project Synchronization Setup Dialog

VST System Link

Sets VST System Link as a timecode source. This allows for all aspects of sample-
accurate synchronization between different computers that are connected via VST
System Link.

NOTE

Discrepancies between the Project Frame Rate and the incoming timecode can cause problems
during postproduction, even if Cubase is able to lock to the corresponding timecode.

MIDI Timecode Settings

The MIDI Timecode Settings become available if you activate MIDI Timecode as a Timecode
Source.

MIDI Input
Allows you to select the MIDI input ports. To allow Cubase to synchronize to MIDI
timecode from any MIDI connection, select All MIDI Inputs.

Timecode Source Preferences

If you activate MIDI Timecode as a Timecode Source, you can set up Timecode Source
Preferences for working with external timecode. The following options are available:

Lock Frames
Determines how many full frames of timecode it takes for Cubase to lock, that is, to
establish synchronization.

NOTE

If you have an external tape transport with a very short start-up time, set Lock Frames
to a low value to make lock-up even faster.

Drop Out Frames

Sets the number of timecode frames that must be missed until Cubase stops. Using
LTC on an analog tape machine can increase the number of drop outs.

Inhibit Restart ms
Some synchronizers still transmit MTC for a short period of time after an external
tapemachine has been stopped. These extra frames of timecode sometimes cause
Cubase to restart suddenly. Inhibit Restart ms allows you to control the amount of
time in milliseconds that Cubase waits before restart (ignoring incoming MTC) once it
has stopped.

Auto-Detect Frame Rate Changes

Notifies you about frame rate or timecode changes and interrupts playback or
recording. Activate this if you want to diagnose problems with timecode and external
devices.

Transport Start/Stop
Starts/Stops playback in Cubase.

RELATED LINKS
Activating VST System Link on page 831
Project Setup Dialog on page 90

823
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Synchronization
Project Synchronization Setup Dialog

Destinations Page
The Destinations page allows you to set up the synchronization outputs and to determine which
external signals leave the application.

MIDI Clock Destinations

In the MIDI Clock Destinations section, you can select any MIDI ports that you want to use
to output MIDI clock. Some MIDI devices, such as drum machines, can match their tempo and
location to incoming MIDI clock.

MIDI Clock Preferences

In the MIDI Clock Preferences section, the following options are available:

MIDI Clock Follows Project Position

Ensures that MIDI clock follows Cubase.

Always Send Start Message

MIDI clock transport commands include start, stop, and continue. Activate this if a MIDI
device does not recognize the continue command.

Send MIDI Clock in Stop Mode

Activate this if a MIDI device needs MIDI clock to run continuously in order to operate
arpeggiators and loop generators.

MIDI Timecode Destinations

In the MIDI Timecode Destinations section, you can specify the MIDI ports to which MTC is
routed.

824
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Synchronization
External Synchronization

NOTE

Some MIDI interfaces send MTC over all ports by default. If this is the case, only select one port
of the interface for the MTC.

MIDI Timecode Preferences

In the MIDI Timecode Preferences section, the following options are available:

MIDI Timecode Follows Project Time

Ensures that the MIDI output always follows the time position of Cubase.

External Synchronization
To activate external synchronization, do one of the following:

● Select Transport > Activate External Sync.

● Select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup, and on the Sources page, activate
Activate External Sync.
● Cubase awaits incoming timecode from the chosen timecode source, as defined in the
Project Synchronization Setup dialog, in order to play.
Cubase will detect incoming timecode, locate to its current position, and start playback in
sync with the incoming timecode.

825
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 VST System Link

VST System Link is a digital audio network system that allows you to link several computers
using digital audio hardware and cables.

Linking 2 or more computers allows you to split different tasks and different tracks between
different computers. You can run CPU-intensive processes, such as send effect plug-ins or VST
instruments on one computer, and record audio tracks on another one.

VST System Link supplies transport and sync control, as well as up to 16 MIDI ports, with 16
channels each.

With VST System Link, the signal is passed from one machine to the next and eventually returns
to the first machine.

For this to work, you need 2 or more computers that use the same or different operating
systems. In addition to this, for each computer that is part of the network, you need:

● Audio hardware with digital inputs and outputs and a specific ASIO driver.
The same digital formats and connection types.
● At least one digital audio cable, such as S/PDIF, ADAT, TDIF, or AES.
● A VST System Link host application.

NOTE

You might want to invest in a KVM (Keyboard, Video, Mouse) switchbox. This allows you to use
the same keyboard, monitor, and mouse to control each computer in the system, and to switch
between computers very rapidly.

Setting up VST System Link

To be able to work with VST System Link, you must first set up the network, configure the audio
hardware, and set up the digital audio connections.

VST System Link Section

The VST System Link section allows you to set up VST System Link.

● To open the VST System Link section, select Studio > Studio Setup, and select VST System
Link from the Devices list.

826
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Setting up VST System Link

Active
Activates VST System Link.

Online
Puts the computer online.

ASIO Input
Allows you to define the networking input channel.

ASIO Output
Allows you to define the networking output channel.

Use Selected ASIO Ports for Data only

Activate this if you want to devote more bandwidth to MIDI and send VST System Link
information on the entire channel. This channel is then no longer available for audio
transfer.

Offset Samples
Allows you to set an offset for the computer, so that it plays slightly ahead of or after
the rest.

Transfer Bits
Allows you to specify whether you want to transfer 24 or 16 bits. This allows you to use
older audio cards which do not support transfer of 24 bits.

MIDI Inputs
Allows you to set the number of MIDI input ports.

MIDI Outputs
Allows you to set the number of MIDI output ports.

Self test
Allows you to test the network.

Receiving
Lights up if the computer is active.

827
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Setting up VST System Link

Sending
Lights up if the computer is active.

List
Shows the name of each computer.

Setting up a Network
You can set up a network by connecting computers.

PROCEDURE
1. Use a digital audio cable to connect the digital output of computer 1 to the digital input of
computer 2.
If you have more than 2 computers, add the others one by one.
2. Use a cable to connect the digital output of computer 2 to the digital input of computer 1.
VST System Link is a daisy chain system, that means, that the output of computer 1 goes to
the input of computer 2, the output of computer 2 goes to the input of computer 3, and so
on, around the chain. The output of the last computer in the chain must always go back into
the input of computer 1, to complete the ring.

NOTE

If a card has more than one set of inputs and outputs, choose whichever suits you – usually,
the first set is best.

Configuring the Audio Clock

To be able to use VST System Link, the clock signals on your ASIO cards must be synchronized
correctly.

PREREQUISITE
For each computer in the network, the following must apply:
● The correct audio driver is selected in the Studio Setup dialog.
● The clock mode or sync mode is set up in the ASIO control panel of the audio hardware.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. From the Devices list, select the your audio hardware.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Set one audio hardware to be the clock master and all other cards to be clock slaves. Consult
the documentation if required.

IMPORTANT

If you set up more than one card as the clock master, the network cannot function correctly.

However, if you use an external clock from a digital mixing desk or a special word
clock synchronizer, for example, you must leave all your ASIO cards in clock slave or
AutoSync mode and make sure that each of them is listening for the signal coming from

828
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Setting up VST System Link

the synchronizer. This signal is usually passed through your ADAT cables or word clock
connectors in a daisy chain fashion.

RESULT
Typically, the ASIO control panel for an audio card contains some indication of whether or
not the card receives a proper sync signal, including the sample rate of that signal. This is a
good indication that you have connected the cards and set up clock sync properly. Refer to the
documentation of your audio hardware for details.

RELATED LINKS
Selecting an Audio Driver on page 16
ASIO Driver Setup Page on page 19

Adjusting the Buffer Size

In a VST System Link network, adjusting the buffer size to minimize latency is of vital
importance. This is due to the fact that the latency of a VST System Link network equals the
total latency of all the ASIO cards in the system added together.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. From the Devices list, select your audio hardware.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Lower the size of the buffers.
The lower the buffer size, the lower the latency. It is best to keep to fairly low buffer sizes if
your system can handle it. About 12 ms or less is usually a good idea.

IMPORTANT

Latency does not affect the synchronization, but it can affect the time it takes to send and
receive MIDI and audio signals, or it can make the system seem sluggish.

Audio Hardware Settings that Affect VST System Link

Specific audio hardware settings might change the digital information in a way that the correct
functioning of VST System Link is affected.

You can find these settings in the control panel or in an additional application for your audio
hardware. Make sure that the following conditions are met:

● Any additional format settings for digital ports that you use for VST System Link data must
be turned off.
If you use an S/PDIF connection for VST System Link, for example, turn off Professional
format, Emphasis, and Dithering.
● Any mixer application of your audio hardware that allows for level adjustments of digital
inputs and outputs must be disabled.
Alternatively, you can set the levels for the VST System Link channels to ±0 dB.
● Digital signal processing, such as pan or effects, must be turned off for the VST System Link
signal.

829
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Setting up VST System Link

● For RME Audio Hammerfall DSP audio hardware, select the default or plain preset for the
Totalmix function.
Otherwise, signal loops might prevent VST System Link from working properly.

Setting up Sample Rates

All projects on all computers must be set to the same sample rate.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Project Setup.
2. In the Project Time Displays section, open the Sample Rate pop-up menu, and select a
sample rate.

Setting up Digital Audio Connections

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Audio Connections.
2. Click the Inputs tab, and click Add Bus.
3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus.
4. Click Add Bus.
5. Click the Outputs tab, and click Add Bus.
6. In the Add Output Bus dialog, configure the bus.
7. Click Add Bus.
8. Repeat these steps for all applications.
Set up the same configuration in all applications. If you have 4 stereo output busses on
computer 1, set up 4 stereo input busses on computer 2, etc.
9. Route the applications to the digital inputs and outputs.

RELATED LINKS
Audio Bus Setup on page 22
Audio Connections Window on page 28

Verifying the Digital Connection

PROCEDURE
1. Connect an audio source to your audio interface.
2. Start recording, playing back, and mixing.
3. On computer 1, play back some audio.
4. Select Studio > MixConsole, and route the channel that contains the audio material to one
of the digital output busses.
5. On computer 2, select Studio > MixConsole, and locate the corresponding digital input bus.
The audio that is played back should now appear in the application running on computer 2,
and the input bus level meters should move.

830
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Activating VST System Link

RESULT
You have verified that the digital connection works as intended. You can reverse this procedure
so that computer 2 plays back and computer 1 listens.

Activating VST System Link

You must activate VST System Link on all network computers to be able to work with VST
System Link.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup, and on the Sources tab, activate VST
System Link as the timecode source.
2. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
3. From the Devices list, select VST System Link.

4. Use the ASIO Input and ASIO Output pop-up menus to define is the networking channel to
carry the VST System Link information.

NOTE

The networking signal is carried on only one bit of one channel. In an ADAT-based system 7
channels of 24-bit audio and 1 channel of 23-bit audio are used for networking. As a result,
you still have approximately 138 dB headroom on this channel.

5. Activate Active at the top left of the VST System Link setup.
6. Repeat the steps for each computer in the network.

RESULT
The sending and receiving indicators on each active computer start flashing, and the name
of each computer is listed in the Self test section of the dialog. Each computer is assigned a
random number.

831
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Activating VST System Link

The name will be shown in the VST System Link window of every computer in the network. You
can double-click the name of the computer and enter another name.

NOTE

If you do not see the name of each computer, repeat the steps above. Make sure that all ASIO
cards are listening to the digital clock signals correctly, and that each computer has the correct
inputs and outputs assigned to the VST System Link network.

RELATED LINKS
Sources Page on page 822

Putting Network Computers Online

You must put the network computers online so that they can send and receive transport and
timecode signals and their sequencer applications can be started and stopped.

PREREQUISITE
All computers have their tempos set to the same value.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. From the Devices list, select VST System Link.
3. Activate Online.
4. Repeat this for each computer in the network.

RESULT
The computers are online.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

Start playback on one computer to verify that the system is working and that all computers start
and play in time.
VST System Link sends and understands all transport commands. This allows you to control
the entire network from one computer. However, any computer can control any and all of the
others. This is due to the fact that VST System Link is a peer-to-peer network, and that there is
no absolute master computer.

Activating MIDI Ports for VST System Link

You can activate MIDI input and output ports for VST System Link. This allows you to route MIDI
tracks to VST instruments running on another computer.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. From the Devices list, select VST System Link.
3. Open the Routing section of the Inspector.
4. Specify the required number of MIDI ports via the MIDI Inputs and MIDI Outputs value
fields.
5. Create a MIDI track.

832
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Application Examples

RESULT
The Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus now show the specified VST System
Link ports.
This allows you to route MIDI tracks to VST instruments running on another computer.

Application Examples
VST System Link allows you to split different tasks between 2 or more computers. The following
application examples are intended to give you an idea of the possibilities.

Configuring a Main Mix Computer

Configuring one computer as a main mix computer that receives audio from your other
computers allows you to mix internally on the computer.

In the following example, we assume that you are using 2 computers: computer 1 as your main
mix computer and computer 2 for 2 additional stereo audio tracks, an effect channel track with a
reverb plug-in and a VST instrument plug-in with stereo outputs.

PROCEDURE
1. On computer 1, use an unused set of outputs, such as an analog stereo output, connected to
your monitoring equipment, to listen to the audio playback.
2. On computer 2, route each of the 2 audio tracks to a separate output bus connected to the
digital outputs, bus 1 and 2, for example.
3. Route the effect channel track to another VST System Link bus, bus 3, for example.
4. Route the VST instrument channel to yet another bus, bus 4, for example.
5. On computer 1, check the corresponding 4 VST System Link input busses.
If you start playback on computer 2, the audio should appear on the input busses on
computer 1. However, to mix these audio sources, you need actual mixer channels.
6. Add 4 new stereo audio tracks on computer 1, and route these to the output bus you use for
listening, such as the analog stereo outputs.
7. For each of the audio tracks, select one of the 4 input busses.
Now, each computer 2 bus is routed to a separate audio channel on computer 1.
8. Activate monitoring for the 4 tracks.

RESULT
If you now start playback, the audio on computer 2 will be sent live to the new tracks on
computer 1, allowing you to hear them with any tracks you play back on computer 1.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

If you notice a processing delay while you listen to signals coming from your other computers
during monitoring, try the following to compensate for latency issues:

● Activate ASIO Direct Monitoring on the Audio System device panel for your hardware if
your audio hardware supports this.
● Alternatively, open the Studio Setup dialog, and on the VST System Link page, change the
Offset Samples value.

833
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Application Examples

Configuring a Computer as Submixer

If you have more audio tracks than you have VST System Link busses, you can use a computer
mixer as a submixer.

PROCEDURE
● Route several audio channels to the same output bus, and adjust the output bus level if
needed.

NOTE

If your audio cards have multiple sets of input and output connections, you can link up
multiple ADAT cables and send audio via any of the busses on any of the cables.

Routing MIDI Tracks to VSTis on Other Computers

You can route MIDI tracks from one computer to VST instruments on another computer. This
allows you to use one computer for playback and recording and the other one as a VSTi rack.

PROCEDURE
1. Record a MIDI track into computer 1.
2. Once you have finished recording, route the MIDI output of that track to VST System Link
MIDI port 1.
3. On computer 2, open the VST Instruments window and assign an instrument to the first
slot.
4. Route the VST instrument channel to the desired output bus.
If you are using computer 1 as your main mixing computer, this would be one of the VST
System Link output busses, connected to computer 1.
5. Create a new MIDI track in the Project window of computer 2, and assign the MIDI output of
the track to the VST instrument you created.
6. Define the MIDI input of the track as VST System Link port 1.
Now, the MIDI track on computer 1 is routed to the MIDI track on computer 2, which in turn
is routed to the VST instrument.
7. Activate monitoring for the MIDI track on computer 2, so that it listens and responds to any
incoming MIDI commands.
In Cubase, click the Monitor button in the track list or Inspector.
8. Start playback on computer 1.
Computer 1 sends the MIDI information on the track to the VST instrument loaded on
computer 2.

RESULT
Even with a slow computer, you should be able to stack many extra VST instruments in this
manner, considerably expanding your sound palette. VST System Link MIDI is also sample-
accurate, and thus has much tighter timing than other hardware MIDI interfaces.

834
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Application Examples

Routing Audio Sends to Other Computers

The effect sends for an audio channel in Cubase can either be routed to an effect channel track
or to any activated group or output bus. This allows you to use a separate computer as a virtual
effect rack.

PROCEDURE
1. On computer 2, the machine you will use as effect rack, add a new stereo audio track.
2. Add the desired effect as an insert effect for the track.
3. In the Routing section of the Inspector, select one of the VST System Link busses as the
input for the audio track.
4. Route the channel to one of the VST System Link output busses connected to computer 1.
5. Activate monitoring for the track.
6. Go back to computer 1, and select a track to which you want to add some reverb.
7. Open the Sends section for the track in the Inspector or the MixConsole.
8. Open the Send Routing pop-up menu for one of the sends, and select the VST System Link
bus assigned to the effect.
9. Use the Send slider to adjust the amount of effect as usual.

RESULT
The signal is sent to the track on computer 2 and processed through its insert effect, without
using any processor power on computer 1.
You can repeat the steps above to add more effects. The number of effects made available in this
manner is only limited by the number of ports used in the VST System Link connection, and by
the performance of computer 2.

Recording Tracks on Other Computers

You can record tracks on another computer. This is useful if the hard drive on one computer is
not fast enough to run as many audio tracks as you need.

PROCEDURE
● Add tracks on another computer and record on them.

RESULT
This creates a virtual RAID system, with several disks all operating together. All tracks remain
locked together just as tightly as if they were all running on the same machine.

Playing Back Video on Other Computers

You can play back video on another computer to free up resources for audio and MIDI
processing on your main CPU. This is recommended, as playback of high-resolution video can
be quite demanding on the CPU.

PROCEDURE
● Move video tracks to another computer.

835
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
VST System Link
Application Examples

RESULT
Since all transport commands respond on the VST System Link computers, scrubbing video is
possible even in case it is coming from another computer.
When scrubbing, the playback on the linked systems may not be perfectly in sync. In addition to
this, there are some further restrictions when scrubbing via VST System Link:

● Always use the system where you started scrubbing to control the scrubbing.
Changing the scrub speed on a remote system only changes the speed on the local system.
● You can start playback on all systems.
This stops scrubbing and enters playback on all systems in sync.

836
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Video

Cubase allows you to work with video content.

You can play back video files in various formats and via different output devices from within
Cubase, extract the audio material from a video file, and add music to your videos.

The video export function allows you to share your videos with clients or other users.

Cubase supports the playback of video files with a resolution of up to 8k.

NOTE

The playback of 4K or 8K video files requires a sufficiently capable computer system.

Videos are exported with a Full HD resolution (1920 x 1080 px). Video files with a lower or higher
resolution than Full HD are upscaled or downscaled when exporting them.

RELATED LINKS
Video File Compatibility on page 837
Importing Video Files on page 839
Preparations for Video Playback on page 841
Video Export on page 850
Extracting Audio from Video on page 852

Video File Compatibility

When working on a project involving a video file, you must make sure that the video file type
works on your Cubase system.

NOTE

If you are not able to play back a specific video file, use an external application to convert the file
into a compatible format.

To find out which video files are supported, refer to the support area at steinberg.net.

RELATED LINKS
Codecs on page 838

Video Container Formats

Video and other multimedia files come in a container format.

This container holds various streams of information including video and audio, but also
metadata such as synchronization information required to play back audio and video together.
Data regarding creation dates, authors, chapter markings, and the like can also be saved within
the container format.

The following container formats are supported by Cubase:

837
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Frame Rates

MOV
This is a QuickTime movie.

MPEG-4
This format can contain various metadata for streaming, editing, local playback, and
interchange of content. Its file extension is .mp4.

AVI
This is a multimedia container format introduced by Microsoft.

Codecs
Codecs are methods of data compression used to make video and audio files smaller and more
manageable for computers.

For further details, refer to the support area at steinberg.net.

Frame Rates
Cubase supports different video and film frame rates.

Frame rate (speed)

Regardless of the frame counting system, the actual speed at which frames of video go by in real
time is the true frame rate.

Cubase supports the following frame rates:

24 fps
This is the true speed of standard film cameras.

25 fps
This is the frame rate of PAL video.

29.97 fps/29.97 dfps

This is the frame rate of NTSC video. The count can be either non-drop or drop-frame.

30 fps/30 dfps
This frame rate is not a video standard anymore but has been commonly used in music
recording. Many years ago, it was the black and white NTSC broadcast standard. It is
equal to NTSC video being pulled up to film speed after a 2-3 telecine transfer. The
count can be either non-drop or drop-frame.

IMPORTANT

Video formats with a variable frame rate (VFR) are not supported.

Video Output Devices

Cubase supports several video output devices.

Viewing video files onscreen in the Video Player window may work just fine for many
applications, but it can become necessary to display video in a large format in order to see
details or to enable other people present to see the video, too. Cubase provides several types of
video output devices to accomplish this.

838
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Preparations for Creating Video Projects

Dedicated Video Cards

You can use dedicated internal or external video cards by Blackmagic Design. Video is sent
directly to the output of the active video device.

To use the output of dedicated video cards, you must activate the device that you want to use for
playing back video on the Video Player page of the Studio Setup.

IMPORTANT

● You must install the appropriate driver for the video device and set the video card output to
the video file resolution used in your project.
● Video output via FireWire is not supported.

RELATED LINKS
Video Player Page on page 841
Activating a Video Output Device on page 843

Preparations for Creating Video Projects

In order to work with video in Cubase, you must make sure that a few requirements are fulfilled.

In Cubase, you can work with multiple video files of different formats on the same video track.

IMPORTANT

● For proper synchronization of audio and video events, make sure that the project frame rate
matches the frame rate of the video file.
● For accurate video playback and to ensure that all editing functions work correctly, it is
important for video events to start exactly on a frame on the timeline. Therefore, we strongly
recommend selecting Timecode as the time format, and to activate Snap on the Project
window toolbar with Grid as the Snap Type and 1 frame or 1 second as the Grid Type.

RELATED LINKS
Project Setup Dialog on page 90
Snap Function on page 70
Ruler Time Format Menu on page 45

Importing Video Files

If you have a compatible video file, you can import it into your project.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Video File.

2. In the Import Video dialog, select the video file that you want to import.
3. Optional: Activate Extract Audio from Video to import any embedded audio streams.
4. Click Open.

RESULT
Cubase creates a video track with a video event. If Extract Audio from Video was activated, an
audio track with an audio event is positioned below the video track. The corresponding audio clip
is saved in the Pool Record folder.

839
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Preparations for Creating Video Projects

NOTE

You can also import video files by dragging them from the MediaBay, the File Explorer/macOS
Finder and dropping them in your project. If you want Cubase to automatically extract the audio,
activate Extract Audio on Import Video File in the Preferences dialog (Video page).

RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 468
Extracting Audio from Video on page 852

Adopting the Project Frame Rate

To ensure that the time display of Cubase corresponds to the actual frames in the video, you
must set the project frame rate to the frame rate of the imported video file.

PREREQUISITE
The frame rate of the imported video file differs from the project frame rate.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Project Setup.
2. In the Project Setup dialog, click Get Frame Rate from Video.
3. Click OK.

RESULT
● If Cubase supports the frame rate of the video, the project frame rate is adopted to it. If
needed, the project start time is automatically adjusted to reflect the change in frame rate.
For example, if the project frame rate is switched from 30 fps to 29.97 fps, the project start
time is adopted so that all the events in the project remain at the same positions in relation
to real time.

NOTE

If you want the project start time to remain the same, you must manually reset it. In this
case, you must snap the video event to the timeline to ensure proper positioning and
synchronization within the project.

Thumbnail Cache Files

For every imported video file, Cubase automatically creates a thumbnail cache file.

RELATED LINKS
Manually Generating Thumbnail Cache Files on page 841

840
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Preparations for Video Playback

Manually Generating Thumbnail Cache Files

You can manually generate thumbnail cache files. This is necessary if a thumbnail cache file
could not be generated during import because the folder is write-protected, or because you have
edited the file with an external video editing application.

PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:

● In the Pool, right-click the video file, and select Generate Thumbnail Cache.
● In the Project window, select the video event, and select Media > Generate Thumbnail
Cache.

NOTE

You can only refresh existing thumbnail cache files from within the Pool.

RESULT
The thumbnail cache file is generated in the background so that you can continue working with
Cubase.

Preparations for Video Playback

You can play back imported video files from within Cubase by using the transport controls.

For this to work, you must activate and set up a video output device.

Video Player Page

The Video Player setup page in the Studio Setup dialog allows you to set up your video player,
to change the color space for the video output device and for the video files in your project, and
to check if your video equipment allows for video playback from within Cubase.

● To open the Video Player page, select Studio > Studio Setup, and activate Video Player in
the Devices list.

841
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Preparations for Video Playback

Device
Lists the video output devices that are available on your system.

Format
Allows you to select an output format.

NOTE

The Onscreen Window device only supports a fixed format.

Color Space
Per default, the color space is automatically set to sRGB or P3D65/Display P3,
depending on the display that is used for the Video Player window.

NOTE

On Windows systems, only sRGB displays are automatically detected.

If needed, you can change the color space manually. In this case, during playback, the
color space of the video in your project is converted according to your selection in the
Color Space column of the video output device.

NOTE

HDR (high dynamic range) video is tone-mapped to SDR (standard dynamic range) for
sRGB and Display P3 displays.

For video production environments where external color space management with
calibrated video hardware is used, you can disable internal color space management in
Cubase by selecting No Color Space.

Offset
If the video image does not match the audio, you can enter an offset value
in milliseconds to specify how much earlier the video should be delivered. This

842
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Preparations for Video Playback

compensates for the display delay. The offset is only used during playback. It is saved
globally for each output device and is independent of the project.

Active
Allows you to activate the device that you want to use for playing back video.

Show Timecode
Allows you to show the timecode.

Position
Allows you to determine the position for the timecode display.

Video Files Color Space

Allows you to set the color space to be used for the video files in your project. This
setting overrides the color space information of the video files in your project.

RELATED LINKS
Video Player Window on page 843

Activating a Video Output Device

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select Video Player.
On the Video Player page, the available video output devices are listed in the Device
column.
3. Optional: When using one or multiple dedicated video cards, activate the checkbox for the
device that you want to use for playing back video in the Active column.

NOTE

If you have not connected any internal or external dedicated video cards, the Onscreen
Window device is activated that allows you to play back the video file on your computer
monitor.

4. Optional: Adjust the Color Space settings if the color space of your device is not detected
correctly or if you use calibrated video hardware, and click Apply.

RELATED LINKS
Video Output Devices on page 838
Dedicated Video Cards on page 839

Video Player Window

The Video Player window provides different size options for video playback on your computer
screen. However, the larger the size of the window and the higher the resolution of your video,
the more processor load is needed.

● To open the Video Player window, select Studio > Video Player.

843
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Preparations for Video Playback

Video Player window with open context menu

The context menu allows you to set the size of the Video Player window:

Fullscreen Mode
Sets the window to full screen mode.

NOTE

In full screen mode, the aspect ratio of the video is always maintained.

Quarter Size
Reduces the window to a quarter of the actual size.

Half Size
Reduces the window to half the actual size.

Actual Size
Sets the window to the size of the video.

Double Size
Enlarges the window to twice the actual size.

Aspect Ratio
You can also drag the borders of the Video Player window to resize it. However, this
might lead to a distorted image. To prevent this, you can set an option from the Aspect
Ratio pop-up menu.

● If you select None, the aspect ratio of the video is not kept when you resize
the window. The image is enlarged/reduced to occupy the whole Video Player
window.
● Internal allows you to resize the window freely while keeping the aspect ratio of
the video. Borders might be displayed around the video image to fill the window.
● External allows you to resize the window within some limits so that the video
image always fills the full window while maintaining its original aspect ratio.

844
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Editing Video

Scrubbing Video
You can scrub video events, that is, play them back forwards or backwards.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Video Player.
2. Do one of the following:

● Click in the Video Player window, and move the mouse to the left or to the right.
● Use a jog wheel on a remote controller.

Editing Video
Video events are created automatically when you import a video file.

When working with video events, the following applies:

● You can view and edit video events in the Project window. A video event triggers the
playback of the corresponding video clip.
● You can copy and trim video events.
● You cannot draw, glue, and mute video events, or apply fades or crossfades.

Export Video Dialog

The Export Video dialog provides settings for replacing audio in video files as well as for
exporting video files from your project.

● To open the Export Video dialog, select File > Export > Video.

845
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Export Video Dialog

The following tabs are available:

Replace Audio in Video

Allows you to replace the audio in one or more video files.

Render New Video File

Allows you to export video files from your project.

RELATED LINKS
Video Export on page 850
Replace Audio in Video Tab on page 846
Render New Video File Tab on page 849

Replace Audio in Video Tab

The Replace Audio in Video tab of the Export Video dialog allows you to embed your sound mix
in one or more video files of the project without re-rendering them.

● To open the Replace Audio in Video tab of the Export Video dialog, select File > Export >
Video, and click Replace Audio in Video.

846
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Export Video Dialog

File Location
Add to Video File Name
Allows you to add the specified text to the name of the exported video file.

File Path
Allows you to specify the file path of the exported video file.
Click Path Options to open a pop-up menu with file path options:
● Choose opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, allowing you to navigate to a file
location.
● Recent Paths allows you to select a recently selected file location.
● Clear Recent Paths allows you to delete all recently selected file locations.

Audio Settings
Channel Selection
Allows you to select a stereo output channel for export. MixConsole settings and insert
effects are taken into account.

Real Time Export

Allows you to export the audio mixdown in real time. Real time export takes at least the
same time as regular playback. Activate this if you use external effects or instruments,
or if you use VST plug-ins that require time to update correctly during the mixdown.
For further information, refer to the documentation of the respective plug-ins.

847
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Export Video Dialog

NOTE

● If you export external effects or instruments in real time, you must also activate
Monitor for the respective audio channels.
● Real Time Export affects only the audio export.

Resulting Video Files

This section provides information about the resulting video files.

RELATED LINKS
Video Export on page 850
Render New Video File Tab on page 849

Replacing Audio in Selected Video Files

You can embed your stereo sound mix in one or more selected video files without re-rendering
them. This is not only safer, but also quicker.

PREREQUISITE
● Your project contains one or more video events and you have arranged and mixed the audio
to a stereo output bus.
● The video files are compressed using the H.264 codec in the .mp4 or .mov container format.

PROCEDURE
1. Select one or more video events in your project.
2. Select File > Export > Video.
3. In the Export Video dialog, open the Replace Audio in Video tab.
4. In the File Location section, choose a File Path for the videos that contain the new audio.
Copies of the original video files are saved at this location.
5. Optional: In the Add to Video File Name field, enter a string that you want to add to the file
names of the original video files.
The resulting names of the video files are displayed in the Resulting Video Files section of
the Export Video dialog.
6. In the Audio Settings section, open the Channel Selection pop-up menu, and select a
stereo output bus.

7. Click Replace Audio.

RESULT
The original video files are copied to the specified location, and an audio mixdown of the selected
stereo output bus is embedded into the files.

NOTE

If you trimmed the lengths of the video events in your project, the resulting video files are longer
than the video events in the project. As a result, they contain silent portions.

The resulting video files are MP4 files. The embedded audio is compressed using an AAC LC
encoder with 192 kbps at a constant bit rate.

848
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Export Video Dialog

Render New Video File Tab

The Render New Video File tab of the Export Video dialog allows you to export a new video file.

● To open the Render New Video File tab of the Export Video dialog, select File > Export >
Video, and click Render New Video File.

File Location
File Name
Allows you to specify the name of the exported video file.

File Path
Allows you to specify the file path of the exported video file.
Click Path Options to open a pop-up menu with the following file path options:

● Choose opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, allowing you to navigate to a file
location.
● Recent Paths allows you to select a recently selected file location.
● Clear Recent Paths allows you to delete all recently selected file locations.

Video Settings
Video Format
Shows the format of the exported video file.

Add Timecode
Adds the project timecode to the exported video file.

849
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Export Video Dialog

Audio Settings
Channel Selection
Allows you to select a stereo output channel for export. MixConsole settings and insert
effects are taken into account.

Real Time Export

Allows you to export the audio mixdown in real time. Real time export takes at least the
same time as regular playback. Activate this if you use external effects or instruments,
or if you use VST plug-ins that require time to update correctly during the mixdown.
For further information, refer to the documentation of the respective plug-ins.

NOTE

● If you export external effects or instruments in real time, you must also activate
Monitor for the respective audio channels.
● Real Time Export affects only the audio export. Video is processed as usual.

Export Range
This section provides information about the exported locator range.

File Information
This section provides detailed information about the exported video file.

General Options
In the bottom section, the following options are available:

Keep Dialog Open

Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Export Video.

Export Video
Allows you to export your video as specified.

RELATED LINKS
Video Export on page 850
Replace Audio in Video Tab on page 846

Video Export
You can export a video file from your project. This allows you, for example, to share sections of
intermediate results or finished videos with clients or other users.

The Export Video function allows you to export a video and a stereo audio signal that are
enclosed between the left and right locators. This allows you to export a specific section or the
entire project by setting the locators accordingly.

Videos are exported in the following format:

● Container format: MP4

● Video compression codec: H.264 without long group of pictures (Long GOP) sequences
● Resolution: 1920 x 1080 px (Full HD)

850
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Export Video Dialog

IMPORTANT

Video with a lower or higher resolution than Full HD is upscaled or downscaled on export.

● Frame rate: Identical with the project frame rate

● Audio compression codec: AAC
● Sample rate: Identical with the project sample rate

IMPORTANT

Video export supports sample rates of 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz only.

● Bit depth: 16 bit

You can only add a stereo output channel to the exported video file. We recommend routing all
mono, stereo, or multi-channel channels that you want to export to a stereo output channel via
send, and selecting this output channel in the Export Video dialog.

RELATED LINKS
Export Video Dialog on page 845
Exporting Video Files on page 851

Exporting Video Files

You can export a video, including a stereo audio signal of your whole project or of a specific
range, as an MP4 video file.

PREREQUISITE
● Your project sample rate is set to 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
● To export external audio signals, you have activated Monitor for the corresponding channel.

PROCEDURE
1. Set up the left and right locators to encompass the section that you want to export.
2. Set up the audio in your project so that it plays back the way you want.

NOTE

You can only add a stereo output channel to the exported video file. We recommend routing
all mono, stereo, or multi-channel channels that you want to export to a stereo output
channel via send.

3. Select File > Export > Video.

4. In the Export Video dialog, activate the Render New Video File tab.
5. Select the stereo output channel that you want to export.

NOTE

Make sure that the selected output channel contains all audio that you want to use for the
exported file. For example, solo the channels that you want to export, or mute the channels
that you do not want to export.

6. Make any further export settings.

7. Click Export Video.

851
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Video
Extracting Audio from Video

RESULT
The video file is exported.

RELATED LINKS
Export Video Dialog on page 845

Extracting Audio from Video

You can extract the audio stream of a video file on import.

PROCEDURE
1. Do one of the following:

● Select File > Import > Audio from Video File.

This creates an audio clip in the Pool but does not add any events to the Project
window.
● Select Media > Extract Audio from Video File.
2. In the dialog, select the video file, and click Open.
3. In the Import Options dialog, select the desired import options.

RESULT
The extracted audio stream is added to the project on a new audio track and can be edited in the
same manner as any other audio material.

RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 468
On Import Audio Files Settings on page 248
Importing Video Files on page 839

852
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Key Commands

Key commands are assigned to most main menus and functions in Cubase. They are used for all
of your projects.

You can view and add key commands in the Key Commands dialog. Key command assignments
are also shown in the tooltips.

Tooltips with an exclamation mark at the end have not been assigned a key command yet.

You can save key command settings as a key commands file, which is stored separately and
can be imported into any project. In this manner, you can quickly and easily recall customized
settings, when moving projects between different computers, for example. The settings are
saved in an XML file on the hard disk.

RELATED LINKS
Saving Key Command Presets on page 856

Key Commands Dialog

The Key Commands dialog allows you to view and edit key commands for the main menus and
functions in Cubase.

● To open the Key Commands dialog, select Edit > Key Commands.

853
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Key Commands Dialog

Key Commands Section

The following options are available in the key commands section:

Expand All

Expands all folders.

Collapse All

Reduces all folders.

Press Key/Search Command

Activate this button and press a key to verify if a specific key is already assigned to a
command.
Deactivate this button and enter the name of a Cubase command to filter the list.

Reset Search
Resets the search field. This button is only available with Press Key/Search Command
deactivated.

All
Shows all commands.

Assigned
Shows all assigned key commands.

Customized
Shows all customized key commands.

Unassigned
Shows all unassigned commands.

Select Preset
Opens a menu from which you can load and save key command presets.

Command
Shows the Cubase commands to which you can assign key commands. The key
commands are arranged in category folders.

Key
Shows the assigned key command for the command that is selected in the Command
column.
If you select a command that has no key assigned to it, the Key column shows click
here. Click and press the key that you want to assign to the selected command.
If you select a command that has a key assigned, the following functions are shown to
the right of the key:

● Remove Key Command

Removes the assigned key from the command.
● Reset Key Command
Resets the key command. This is only available if you changed a key command
assignment.
● Assign Additional Key

854
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Assigning Key Commands

Assigns an additional key command. The additional key command can be used as
an alternative to the default key command.

Defaults
Resets all key commands to their default settings.

Clear All
Removes all key command assignments.

RELATED LINKS
Assigning Key Commands on page 855
Searching for Key Commands or Assignments on page 855
Resetting Key Commands on page 857
Removing Key Command Assignments on page 856
Loading Key Command Presets on page 856
Saving Key Command Presets on page 856

Assigning Key Commands

You can assign key commands in the Key Commands dialog.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Key Commands.
2. Do one of the following:
● In the key commands section, open the corresponding category folder, and select the
function to which you want to assign a key command.
● Deactivate Press Key/Search Command , in the Search Command field, enter the
name of the function to which you want to assign a key command, and select it.
3. Click the click here field, and press the key that you want to use as a key command.
You can press individual keys or a combination of one or several of the modifier keys Ctrl/
Cmd , Alt/Opt , Shift plus any key.

RESULT
The key command is assigned.

NOTE

To assign an additional key to the same function, click Assign Additional Key, and press the key.
Adding a key command to a function that already has another key command assigned to it does
not replace the previously defined key command.

Searching for Key Commands or Assignments

In the Key Commands dialog, you can search for Cubase functions or for assignments.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Key Commands.
2. Do one of the following:

855
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Removing Key Command Assignments

● Activate Press Key/Search Command , and press a key to verify if it is already

assigned to a command.
● Deactivate Press Key/Search Command , and in the Search Command field, enter
the name of a Cubase function to verify if a key is already assigned to it.

RESULT
The key commands list is filtered to show the corresponding command and/or the key.

RELATED LINKS
Press Key/Search Command on page 854

Removing Key Command Assignments

PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Key Commands.
2. In the Command list, open a category folder, and select the function whose key command
assignment you want to remove.
3. Select the key command in the list, and click Remove Key Command to the right of the
function.
4. Click Remove to confirm your choice.

Saving Key Command Presets

You can save key command settings as presets.

PREREQUISITE
You have set up the key commands to your liking.

PROCEDURE
1. From the Presets pop-up menu, select Save Preset.
2. Enter a name for the preset, and click OK.

RESULT
Your key commands settings are now available as a preset on the Presets pop-up menu.

Loading Key Command Presets

You can load key command presets.

PROCEDURE
● Open the Presets pop-up menu, and select the preset.

RESULT
The new key command preset replaces the previous key command settings.

856
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Exporting Key Command Assignments

Exporting Key Command Assignments

You can export a file that lists all key command assignments.

PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Export > Key Command Assignments.
2. In the file dialog, choose a location, and enter a file name.
3. Click Save.

RESULT
The key command assignments are exported as an .html file.

Resetting Key Commands

You can reset customized key commands to their default state.

IMPORTANT

If you reset key commands, any changes you made to the default key commands are lost. To be
able to revert to these settings again, save them first.

PROCEDURE
1. Optional: In the Key Commands dialog, click Customized to show only the key commands
that were changed and can be reset.
2. Do one of the following:
● To reset a key command, select it in the key commands section, and click Reset Key
Command.

● To reset all key commands, click Defaults, and confirm with Reset All.

RESULT
The key commands are reset.

857
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Default Key Commands

The default key commands are arranged in categories.

NOTE

When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because
they are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard. The only exceptions are: Ctrl/Cmd - S (Save),
Num * (Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1 (Jump to Left Locator), Delete
or Backspace (Delete), Num / (Cycle on/off), F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel), and Alt/Opt - K
(Show/Hide On-Screen Keyboard).

Add Track Category

Option Key command

Add Track T

Audio Category

Option Key command

Adjust Fades to Range A

Crossfade X

Automation Category

Option Key command

Read Automation for All Tracks On/Off Alt/Opt - R

Write Automation for All Tracks On/Off Alt/Opt - W

Chords Category

Option Key command

Show/Hide Chord Pads Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - C

858
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Devices (Studio) Category

Option Key command

Audio Connections F4

Audio Performance Monitor F12

MixConsole F3

MixConsole in Project Window Alt/Opt - F3

On-Screen Keyboard Alt/Opt - K

Video Player F8

VST Instruments F11

Direct Offline Processing Category

Option Key command

Direct Offline Processing F7

Edit Category

Option Key command

Activate/Deactivate Focused Object Alt/Opt - A

Auto-Scroll On/Off F

Copy Ctrl/Cmd - C

Cut Ctrl/Cmd - X

Cut Time Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - X

Delete Delete or Backspace

Delete Time Shift - Backspace

Duplicate Ctrl/Cmd - D

Expand/Reduce Alt/Opt - E

859
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Option Key command

Insert Silence Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - E

Invert Alt/Opt - F

Invert Selection Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - I

Left Selection Side to Cursor E

Move Event Start/Range Start to Cursor Ctrl/Cmd - L

Move Events to Front U

Mute M

Mute Events Shift - M

Mute/Unmute Objects Alt/Opt - M

Open Ctrl/Cmd - E

Paste Ctrl/Cmd - V

Paste at Origin Alt/Opt - V

Paste Relative to Cursor Shift - V

Paste Time Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - V

Primary Parameter: Decrease Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - Down Arrow

Primary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - Up Arrow

Record Enable R

Redo Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - Z

Repeat Ctrl/Cmd - K

Right Selection Side to Cursor D

Secondary Parameter: Decrease Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - Left Arrow

Secondary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - Right Arrow

Select All Ctrl/Cmd - A

Select None Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - A

860
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Option Key command

Snap On/Off J

Solo S

Split At Cursor Alt/Opt - X

Split Range Shift - X

Stationary Cursor Alt/Opt - C

Undo Ctrl/Cmd - Z

Unmute Events Shift - U

Write W

Editors Category

Option Key command

Open Score Editor Ctrl/Cmd - R

Open/Close Editor Return

File Category

Option Key command

Close Ctrl/Cmd - W

New Ctrl/Cmd - N

Open Ctrl/Cmd - O

Quit Ctrl/Cmd - Q

Save Ctrl/Cmd - S

Save As Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - S

Save New Version Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - S

861
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Focus Category

Option Key command

Confirm Alt/Opt - Shift - Space

Edit Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Return

Next Tab

Previous Shift - Tab

Marker Category

Option Key command

Add Position Marker on Active Track Insert

Media Category

Option Key command

Open MediaBay F5

Open/Close Favorites Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 8

Open/Close File Browser Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 4

Open/Close Filters Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 5

Open/Close Previewer Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 2

Preview Cycle On/Off Shift - Num /

Preview Start Shift - Enter

Preview Stop Shift - Num 0

Search MediaBay Shift - F5

862
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

MIDI Category

Option Key command

Show/Hide Controller Lanes Alt/Opt - L

Navigate Category

Option Key command

Add Down: Shift - Down Arrow

Expand/Undo selection in the Project window

to the bottom/Move selected event in the Key
Editor down 1 octave

Add Left: Shift - Left Arrow

Expand/Undo selection in the Project

window/Key Editor to the left

Add Right: Shift - Right Arrow

Expand/Undo selection in the Project

window/Key Editor to the right

Add Up: Shift - Up Arrow

Expand/Undo selection in the Project window

to the top/Move selected event in the Key
Editor up one octave

Bottom: End

Select bottom track in the track list

Down: Down Arrow

Select next in the Project window/Move

selected event in the Key Editor one semitone
down

Left: Left Arrow

Select previous in the Project window/Key

Editor

Right: Right Arrow

Select next in the Project window/Key Editor

Toggle Selection Ctrl/Cmd - Space

863
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Option Key command

Top: Home

Select top track in the track list

Up: Up Arrow

Select next in the Project window/ Move

selected event in the Key Editor one semitone
up

Nudge Category

Option Key command

Left Ctrl/Cmd - Left Arrow

Right Ctrl/Cmd - Right Arrow

Nudge Bottom Down Alt/Opt - Down Arrow

Nudge Bottom Up Alt/Opt - Shift - Up Arrow

Nudge End Left Alt/Opt - Shift - Left Arrow

Nudge End Right Alt/Opt - Right Arrow

Nudge Start Left Alt/Opt - Left Arrow

Nudge Start Right Alt/Opt - Shift - Right Arrow

Nudge Top Down Alt/Opt - Shift - Down Arrow

Nudge Top Up Alt/Opt - Up Arrow

Project Category

Option Key command

Colors Alt/Opt - Shift - S

Open Markers Ctrl/Cmd - M

Open Pool Ctrl/Cmd - P

Open Tempo Track Ctrl/Cmd - T

864
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Option Key command

Remove Selected Tracks Shift - Delete

Set Track/Event Color Alt/Opt - Shift - C

Setup Shift - S

Tap Tempo Shift - Space

Quantize Category

Option Key command

Quantize Q

Set Insert Length Category

Option Key command

1/1 Alt/Opt - 1

1/2 Alt/Opt - 2

1/4 Alt/Opt - 3

1/8 Alt/Opt - 4

1/16 Alt/Opt - 5

1/32 Alt/Opt - 6

1/64 Alt/Opt - 7

1/128 Alt/Opt - 8

Toggle Dotted Alt/Opt - .

Toggle Triplet Alt/Opt - ,

Tool Category

Option Key command

Draw Tool 8

865
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Option Key command

Drumstick Tool 0

Erase Tool 5

Glue Tool 4

Mute Tool 7

Next Tool F10

Object Selection Tool 1

Play Tool 9

Previous Tool F9

Range Selection Tool 2

Split Tool 3

Zoom Tool 6

Transport Category

Option Key command

Activate External Sync Alt/Opt - Shift - T

Activate Metronome C

Activate Punch In I

Activate Punch Out O

Cycle Num /

Enter Left Locator Shift - L

Enter Locator Range Duration Shift - D

Enter Project Cursor Position Shift - P

Enter Right Locator Shift - R

Enter Tempo Shift - T

866
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Option Key command

Enter Time Signature Shift - C

Exchange Time Formats .

Fast Forward Shift - Num +

Fast Rewind Shift - Num -

Forward Num +

Go to Left Locator Num 1

Go to Project Start Num . or Num , or Num ;

Go to Right Locator Num 2

Locate Next Event N

Locate Next Hitpoint Alt/Opt - N

Locate Next Marker Shift - N

Locate Previous Event B

Locate Previous Hitpoint Alt/Opt - B

Locate Previous Marker Shift - B

Locate Selection Start L

Locators to Selection P

Loop Selection Alt/Opt - P

Loop Selection Solo Alt/Opt - Shift - P

MIDI Retrospective Record: Insert from All Shift - Num - - *

MIDI Inputs

Nudge Cursor Left Ctrl/Cmd - Num -

Nudge Cursor Right Ctrl/Cmd - Num +

Play Selection Alt/Opt - Space

Play Selection Solo Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Space

Recall Cycle Marker 1 to 9 Shift - Num 1 to Num 9

867
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Default Key Commands

Option Key command

Record Num *

Rewind Num -

Set Left Locator to Project Cursor Position Ctrl/Cmd - Num 1

Set Marker 1 Ctrl/Cmd - 1

Set Marker 2 Ctrl/Cmd - 2

Set Marker 3 to 9 Ctrl/Cmd - Num 3 to Num 9 or Ctrl/Cmd - 3

to 9

Set Right Locator to Project Cursor Position Ctrl/Cmd - Num 2

Start Enter

Start/Stop Space

Stop Num 0

To Marker 1 Shift - 1

To Marker 2 Shift - 2

To Marker 3 to 9 Num 3 to Num 9 or Shift - 3 to 9

Window Zones Category

Option Key command

Show/Hide Left Zone Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - L or Alt/Opt - I

Show/Hide Channel Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - C

Show/Hide Right Zone Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - R

Show/Hide Lower Zone Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - E or Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt -

B

Show/Hide Transport Zone Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - T

Show Previous Tab Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Left Arrow

Show Next Tab Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Right Arrow

Show Previous Page Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Up Arrow or Page Up

868
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Setting up Tool Modifier Keys

Option Key command

Show Next Page Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Down Arrow or

Page Down

Show/Hide Info Line Ctrl/Cmd - I

Show/Hide Overview Alt/Opt - O

Zoom Category

Option Key command

Zoom Full Shift - F

Zoom In H

Zoom In On Waveform Vertically Alt/Opt - H

Zoom In Tracks Ctrl/Cmd - Down Arrow

Zoom In Vertically Shift - H

Zoom Out G

Zoom Out Of Waveform Vertically Alt/Opt - G

Zoom Out Tracks Ctrl/Cmd - Up Arrow

Zoom Out Vertically Shift - G

Zoom to Event Shift - E

Zoom to Selection Alt/Opt - S

Zoom Tracks Exclusive Z

Setting up Tool Modifier Keys

You can set up tool modifier keys that allow you to access an alternative function when using a
tool.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Tool Modifiers.

869
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Key Commands
Setting up Tool Modifier Keys

2. Select an option from the Categories list, and locate the action for which you want to edit
the modifier key.
3. In the Action list, select the action.
4. Hold down the desired modifier keys, and click Assign.

NOTE

If the modifier keys you pressed are already assigned to another tool, you can choose to
overwrite them. If you do so, this leaves the other tool without any modifier keys assigned to
it.

5. Click OK.

RESULT
The modifier keys for the action are replaced.

870
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Customizing

In Cubase, you can set up the appearance of specific elements.

RELATED LINKS
Setup Panes on page 871

Setup Panes
Setup panes are available for the Transport panel, the toolbars, the info lines, or the Inspector.
They allow you to specify which elements are visible/hidden and in what order they are shown.
You can save and recall setup presets.

● To configure the sections for the Inspector, for example, right-click an empty area of the
Inspector, and select Set up Sections.

Section options
Activate/Deactivate the option for the section that you want to show/hide.

Preset
Allows you to save the settings as presets.

Show All
Shows all sections.

Reset All
Allows you to restore the default settings.

NOTE

You can change the order of the sections by dragging them up or down in the list.

871
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Customizing
Windows Dialog

Windows Dialog
The Windows dialog allows you to manage open windows in Cubase.

● To open the Windows dialog, select Window > Windows.

The dialog lists all open dialogs, windows, and editors. The following options are available:

OK
Closes the dialog.

Mode
Allows you to select a mode that affects the function.
● Selected
Affects the selected window only.
● Cascaded
Affects also the associated windows, such as the editors of a project window, for
example.
● All
Affects all windows.

Activate
Activates the selected window.

Minimize
Minimizes the selected or all windows.

Restore
Restores the selected or all windows.

Close Windows
Closes the selected or all windows.

Reset Layout
Resets the layout of the selected window.

Where are the Settings Stored?

You have many different options for customizing Cubase at your disposal. While some of the
settings you make are stored with each project, others are stored in separate preference files.

872
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Customizing
Safe Mode Dialog

If you need to transfer your projects to another computer in another studio, for example, you
can bring all your settings along by copying the desired preference files and installing them on
the other computer.

NOTE

It is a good idea to save a backup copy of your preference files, once you have established your
desired setup. This ensures that, if another Cubase user wants to use his or her personal settings
when working on your computer, you can restore your own preferences afterwards.

● On Windows, preference files are stored in the following location: \Users\<user

name>\AppData\Roaming\Steinberg\<program name>\.
On the Start menu, you will find a shortcut to this folder for easy access.
● On macOS, preference files are stored in the following location: /Library/Preferences/
<program name>/ under your home directory.
The full path is: /Users/<user name>/Library/Preferences/<program name>/.

NOTE

The RAMpresets.xml file, which contains various presets settings, is saved on exiting the
program.

NOTE

Program functions that are not used in the project, such as crossfade, or configurations, such as
panels, are not stored.

Updating from a Previous Version of Cubase

If you are updating from Cubase 6 or higher, most of the customized settings of your previous
installation are automatically transferred to the new Cubase version.

If your previous Cubase version is older than Cubase 6, its settings are discarded, and the default
settings of the new version of Cubase are applied.

Safe Mode Dialog

The Safe Mode dialog offers options for troubleshooting.

● To open the Safe Mode dialog, launch Cubase, and hold down Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - Alt/Opt .

873
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Customizing
Safe Mode Dialog

The following options are available in the Plug-Ins section:

Deactivate all third-party plug-ins

Temporarily disables all third-party plug-ins. After startup, only Steinberg plug-ins are
available.

The following options are available in the Preferences section:

Use current program preferences

Opens the program with the current preference settings.

Disable program preferences

Disables the current preferences and opens the program with the factory default
settings instead.

Delete program preferences

Deletes the preferences and opens the program with the factory default settings
instead. This process cannot be undone. This affects all versions of Cubase installed
on your computer.

RELATED LINKS
Disabling Third-Party Plug-ins on page 875
Disabling the Preferences on page 874

Disabling the Preferences

Inconsistent Preferences settings can prevent Cubase from working properly. If you experience
any issues related to this, save your project, and relaunch Cubase. Disable or delete the current
Preferences, and reset the settings to the factory defaults.

PROCEDURE
1. Quit Cubase.
2. Launch Cubase, and hold down Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Shift .
3. In the Preferences section of the Safe Start Mode dialog, activate one of the
troubleshooting options.
● Use current program preferences
Opens the program with the current preference settings.
● Disable program preferences

874
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Customizing
Safe Mode Dialog

Disables the current preferences, and opens the program with the factory default
settings instead.
● Delete program preferences
Deletes the preferences and opens the program with the factory default settings
instead. This process cannot be undone. Note that this affects all versions of Cubase
installed on your computer.
4. Click OK.

AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

If the program works fine with the preferences disabled, consider deleting and re-initializing the
preferences.

RELATED LINKS
Safe Mode Dialog on page 873
Preferences on page 882

Disabling Third-Party Plug-ins

If Cubase does not start or if a project does not load, it is highly probable, that this is due to a
third-party plug-in. To check if this is the case, disable third-party plug-ins on startup.

PROCEDURE
1. Quit Cubase.
2. Launch Cubase, and hold down Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Shift .
3. In the Plug-Ins section of the Safe Start Mode dialog, activate Deactivate all third-party
plug-ins.
4. Click OK.

RESULT
Only Steinberg plug-ins are available after startup, and third-party plug-ins are temporarily
disabled.

RELATED LINKS
Safe Mode Dialog on page 873

875
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Optimizing Audio Performance

To fully benefit from all the capacities of your Cubase system in terms of audio performance, you
can optimize specific settings.

NOTE

For details and current information on system requirements and hardware properties, refer to
the Steinberg web site.

RELATED LINKS
Settings That Affect Performance on page 877
Performance Aspects on page 876
Audio Performance Monitor Panel on page 878
ASIO-Guard on page 880

Performance Aspects
Tracks and Effects
The faster your computer, the more tracks, effects, and EQs you are able to play. An accurate
definition of what constitutes a fast computer is almost a science in itself, but some hints are
given below.

Short Response Times (Latency)

One important aspect of performance is response time. The term “latency” refers to the
buffering, that is, the temporary storing of small chunks of audio data at various stages of the
recording and playback processes on a computer. The larger those chunks, and the more there
are, the higher the latency.

High latency is most irritating when playing VST instruments and when monitoring through the
computer, that is, when listening to a live audio source via the Cubase MixConsole and effects.
However, very long latency times (several hundred milliseconds) can also affect other processes
like mixing, for example, when the effect of a fader movement is only heard after a noticeable
delay.

While Direct Monitoring and other techniques reduce the problems associated with very long
latency times, a system that responds fast will always be more convenient to work with.

● Depending on your audio hardware, it may be possible to trim your latency times, usually by
lowering the size and the number of buffers.
● For details, refer to the audio hardware documentation.

Audio Hardware and Driver

The hardware and its driver can affect regular performance. A badly written driver can reduce
the performance of your computer. However, when it comes to latency, the choice of a suitable
hardware driver can make all the difference.

876
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Optimizing Audio Performance
Settings That Affect Performance

NOTE

We recommend that you use audio hardware for which there is a specific ASIO driver.

This is especially true when using Cubase for Windows:

● Under Windows, ASIO drivers written specifically for the hardware are more efficient than
the Steinberg built-in ASIO Driver and produce shorter latency times.
● Under macOS, audio hardware with properly written macOS (Core Audio) drivers can be very
efficient and produces very low latency times.

However, there are additional features only available with ASIO drivers, such as the ASIO
Positioning Protocol.

Settings That Affect Performance

Audio Buffer Settings

Audio buffers affect how audio is transmitted to and from the audio hardware. The size of the
audio buffers affects both the latency and the audio performance.

Generally, the smaller the buffer size, the lower the latency. On the other hand, working with
small buffers can be demanding for the computer. If the audio buffers are too small, you may
get clicks, pops, or other audio playback problems.

Adjusting the Buffer Size

To lower the latency, you can reduce the buffer size.

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. From the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Do one of the following:
● Windows: Adjust the buffer size in the dialog that opens.
● macOS: Adjust the buffer size in the CoreAudio Device Settings dialog.

Multi Processing
Multi Processing distributes the processing load evenly to all available CPU cores, allowing
Cubase to make full use of multi-core CPUs and multiple processors.

Multi Processing is activated by default. You can find the option in the Studio Setup dialog
(Audio System page).

RELATED LINKS
Audio System Page on page 17

877
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Optimizing Audio Performance
Audio Performance Monitor Panel

Audio Performance Monitor Panel

The Audio Performance Monitor panel shows the current audio processing load and hard disk
transfer rate, and visualizes any audio dropouts that have been detected during the playback
of your project. It provides detailed information about dropouts and suggests measures to
decrease the processing load.

● To open the Audio Performance Monitor panel, select Studio > Audio Performance
Monitor.

Real Time
Shows the average load of all audio processed in real time.

ASIO-Guard
Shows the average load of audio that is preprocessed.

NOTE

Preprocessing only takes effect if Activate ASIO-Guard is activated on the Audio

System page of the Studio Setup dialog.

Peak
Shows the peak processing load in the real-time path of the audio engine. The higher
this value, the higher the risk of dropouts.

Processing Overload
The overload indicator at the top right indicates dropouts. Dropouts occur when the
processing load exceeds 100% or when the audio engine is restarted due to the
internal detection of excessive processing delay.
If the overload indicator lights up, we recommend the following:

● Activate the ASIO-Guard.

878
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Optimizing Audio Performance
Audio Performance Monitor Panel

● Reduce the number of active audio effects.

● Reduce the number of audio tracks or instrument tracks that play back
simultaneously.
● Activate monitoring for audio tracks and instrument tracks only if needed.
● Record-enable instrument tracks only if needed.

NOTE

To reset the overload indicator, click its display. In the Audio Performance category of
the Key Commands dialog, you can also assign a key command for this.

Disk Cache
Shows the hard disk transfer load.

Disk Cache Overload

The overload indicator to the right of the disk indicator lights up in case the storage
device does not read/write data fast enough.
If it lights up, we recommend using Disable Selected Tracks to reduce the number of
tracks for playback.

NOTE

You can show a simplified view of the performance meter on the Transport panel and on the
Project window toolbar. These meters only feature the maximum load value and the disk cache
load.

Dropouts section
Performance display
Shows the values for ASIO-Guard (orange curve) and Real Time (blue curve), as
measured during playback. Dropouts are indicated by red vertical lines. When hovering
over the curves, the exact values at the current position of the mouse pointer are
displayed above the display.

The section below the performance display provides detailed information about detected
dropouts.

Previous Dropout/Next Dropout

Allow you to select the previous/next dropout.

Position & Related Tracks

This column shows the position of the selected dropout on the timeline and lists the
tracks that are related to it. The tracks are sorted in descending order, based on their
influence on the processing load at the dropout position.

Locate Dropout Position in Project

Allows you to move the project cursor to the selected dropout position.

Suggested Operations
This column allows you to take action to reduce the processing load:

● ASIO Buffer opens the control panel for the audio hardware, where you can
increase the buffer size.

879
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Optimizing Audio Performance
ASIO-Guard

NOTE

Increasing the buffer size also results in a higher latency and is not recommended
if you record audio or play virtual instruments in real time.

● ASIO-Guard opens the Audio System page of the Studio Setup dialog, where you
can adjust the ASIO-Guard and further performance-related settings.

NOTE

If dropouts occur during playback, we recommend the following settings in the

Advanced Options section:

● Activate ASIO-Guard is enabled.

● ASIO-Guard Level is set to High.
● Activate Multi Processing is enabled.
● Activate Steinberg Audio Power Scheme is enabled (Windows only).

● Freeze Track allows you to freeze the corresponding audio track or instrument
track and its insert effects.
Frozen tracks are locked for editing. You cannot edit, remove, or add insert effects
applied to a frozen track. To unfreeze a frozen track, you can click Freeze Track
again.

RELATED LINKS
Audio System Page on page 17
ASIO-Guard on page 880
Audio Performance Meter on page 41
Transport Panel Sections on page 195
Freezing Insert Effects on page 356

ASIO-Guard
The ASIO-Guard allows you to shift as much processing as possible from the ASIO real-time path
to the ASIO-Guard processing path. This results in a more stable system.

The ASIO-Guard allows you to preprocess all channels as well as VST instruments that do not
need to be calculated in real time. This leads to fewer dropouts, increases the capacity to process
tracks or plug-ins, and enhances the ability to use smaller buffer sizes.

ASIO-Guard Latency
High ASIO-Guard levels lead to an increased ASIO-Guard latency. When adjusting a volume fader,
for example, you hear the parameter changes with a slight delay. ASIO-Guard latency, in contrast
to the latency of the audio hardware, is independent of live input.

External effects and external instruments are not processed by the ASIO-Guard.

NOTE

If you select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager and click Show VST Plug-in Information, you can
deactivate the ASIO-Guard option for selected plug-ins.

880
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Optimizing Audio Performance
ASIO-Guard

If you activate monitoring for an input channel, a MIDI channel, or an instrument channel, or
if you record-enable a MIDI or an instrument channel, all related channels are automatically
switched from ASIO-Guard to real-time processing. This may result in a higher processing load.

RELATED LINKS
VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings on page 556
Audio Performance Monitor Panel on page 878

Activating the ASIO-Guard

PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. From the Devices list, select Audio System.
3. Activate the Activate ASIO-Guard option.

NOTE

This option is only available if you activate Activate Multi Processing.

4. Select an ASIO-Guard Level.

The higher the level, the higher the processing stability and audio processing performance.
However, higher levels also lead to an increased ASIO-Guard latency and memory usage.

RELATED LINKS
Audio System Page on page 17

881
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Preferences

The Preferences dialog provides options and settings that control the global behavior of the
program.

Preferences Dialog
The Preferences dialog is divided into a navigation list and a settings page. Clicking one of the
entries in the navigation list opens a settings page.

● To open the Preferences dialog, select Edit > Preferences.

In addition to the settings, the dialog provides the following options:

Preference Presets
Allow you to select a saved preference preset.

Save
Allows you to save the current preferences as a preset.

Rename
Allows you to rename a preset.

Delete
Allows you to delete a preset.

882
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Preferences Dialog

Save marked preferences only

Allows you to select which pages to include in the preset.

Defaults
Resets the options on the active page to their default settings.

Apply
Applies any changes that you have made without closing the dialog.

OK
Applies any changes that you have made and closes the dialog.

Cancel
Closes the dialog without saving any changes.

RELATED LINKS
Editing on page 884
Editors on page 891
Event Display on page 891
General on page 895
MIDI on page 896
MediaBay on page 900
Metering on page 901
Record on page 901
Transport on page 903
User Interface on page 904
VST on page 906
Video on page 908

Saving Preference Presets

You can save complete or partial preference settings as presets.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, make your changes.
2. Click Save in the lower left section of the dialog.
3. Enter a preset name, and click OK.

RESULT
Your settings are now available on the Preference Presets pop-up menu.

Saving Partial Preference Settings

You can save partial preference settings. This is useful in case you have made settings that only
pertain to a certain project or situation, for example. By applying a saved partial preference
preset, you only change the saved settings. All other preferences are left unchanged.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, make your changes.
2. Activate Save marked preferences only.
In the preferences list, the Save column is shown.

883
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Editing

3. Click in the Save column of the preference pages that you want to save.
4. Click Save in the lower left section of the dialog.
5. Enter a preset name, and click OK.

RESULT
Your settings are now available from the Preference Presets pop-up menu.

Editing
‘Edit Solo’/’Record in MIDI Editors’ Follow Focus
Suspends Record in Editor and Solo Editor in the MIDI editor when the Project
window gets the focus.

Display Warning before Deleting Non-Empty Tracks

Triggers a warning if you delete tracks that are not empty.

Select Track on Background Click

Allows you to select a track by clicking in the event display background.

Auto Select Events under Cursor

Automatically selects all events that are under the project cursor in the Project window
or in an editor.

Range Tool Splits Partly Selected Events

Automatically splits partially selected events when performing editing operations such
as moving, nudging, muting, or phase inversion.

Cycle Follows Range Selection

Sets the left locator to the range start position and the right locator to the range end
position of a range selection.

Delete Overlaps
Deletes overlapped, that is, hidden, sections of overlapping events.

NOTE

You can hold Shift while moving events to override this setting.

Parts Get Track Names

Automatically changes event names to the name of the track they are moved to.

Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks only

Uses the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys for track selection, not for event/part selection.

Track Selection Follows Event Selection

Automatically selects the corresponding track when you select an event in the Project
window.

Range Selection Follows Track Selection

Automatically moves a selection range to a track that you select in the Project window.

884
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Editing

NOTE

We recommend that you activate this option, for example, when using a wheel-based
remote controller for editing.

Automation Reduction Level

Allows you to remove any superfluous automation events. A reduction level value of
0% removes repeated automation points only. A reduction level value between 1% and
100% smoothens the automation curve. The default value of 50% should reduce the
automation data amount significantly without affecting the sound resulting from the
existing automation.

Show Automation Track in Project on Writing Parameter

Reveals the automation track on writing automation parameters. This provides you
with a visual control of any parameters that are changed on writing.

Automation Follows Events

Causes automation events to automatically follow when you move, duplicate, copy, or
paste an event or part on the track. This facilitates setting up automation that is related
to a specific event or part, instead of a specific position in the project.

Drag Delay
Allows you to set up a delay in ms that is used when you move events. This is useful to
avoid accidentally moving events when you click on them in the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
Editing - Audio on page 885
Editing - Chords on page 886
Editing - Controls on page 887
Editing - MIDI on page 887
Editing - Project & MixConsole on page 888
Editing - Tool Modifiers on page 889
Editing - Tools on page 890
Editing - Zoom on page 890

Editing - Audio
Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted
Allows you to play the hidden event of 2 overlapping audio events when you mute the
top event.

Use Mouse Wheel for Event Volume and Fades

Allows you to use the mouse wheel to move event volume and fades.

● Moving the mouse wheel moves the event volume up or down.

● Holding down Shift while moving the mouse wheel moves the fade curves.
● Positioning the mouse in the left half of the event moves the end point of the fade
in.
● Positioning the mouse in the right half of the event moves the start point of the
fade out.

On Import Audio Files

Determines what happens when you import an audio file.

● Open Options Dialog

885
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Editing

Opens a dialog where you can select whether you want to copy the file to the audio
folder and/or convert it to the project settings.
● Use Settings
Uses the default settings for importing audio.

On Bouncing/Rendering Audio
Determines what happens when you apply Bounce Selection on an audio event in the
Project window, or on an audio selection in the Sample Editor.

● Open Options Dialog

Opens the Options dialog that allows you to select whether you want to replace
the current audio or not.
● Replace Audio in Project
Always replaces the current audio.
● Keep Current Audio in Project
Never replaces the current audio. The bounced audio is saved in the Audio folder
of your project.

On Processing Shared Clips

Determines what happens when you apply processing to a shared clip that is used by
more than one event in the project.
● Open Options Dialog
Opens the Options dialog that allows you to select whether you want to create a
new version of the clip or apply the processing to the existing clip.
● Create New Version
Creates a new editing version of the clip and applies the processing to that version,
leaving the original clip unaffected.
● Process Existing Clip
Applies the processing to the existing clip. All events playing that clip are affected.

Remove Regions/Hitpoints on all Offline Processes

Removes regions/hitpoints of audio ranges when you perform offline processing.

Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection

Enables the automatic hitpoint detection for imported or newly recorded audio files.

Default Warping Algorithm

Sets the warp algorithm for new audio clips in the project.

Editing - Chords
‘X’ Chords Mute Notes on Tracks That are in Follow Chord Track Mode
Mutes playback when you play back a track that follows the chord track and the cursor
reaches an undefined chord event (X chord).

Disable ‘Acoustic Feedback’ during Playback

Disables Acoustic Feedback during playback. This ensures that chord events are not
triggered twice.

Hide Muted Notes in Editors

Hides notes that are muted because of their MIDI track following the chord track.

886
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Editing

Editing - Controls
Value Box/Time Control Mode
Allows you to select your preferred way of controlling value fields.

● Text Input on Left-Click

Clicking opens a value box for editing.
● Increment/Decrement on Left/Right-Click
Clicking decreases the value, right-clicking increases the value. Double-clicking
allows you to enter values manually.
● Increment/Decrement on Left-Click and Drag
Clicking and dragging up or down adjusts the value. Double-clicking allows you to
enter values manually.

Knob Mode
Allows you to select your preferred way of controlling knobs.
● Circular
Clicking and dragging in a circular motion changes the setting. Clicking anywhere
along the edge of the encoder immediately changes the setting.
● Relative Circular
Clicking anywhere on an encoder and dragging changes the current setting. There
is no need to click at the exact position.
● Linear
Clicking on an encoder and dragging up or down, or left or right, changes the
setting.

Slider Mode
Allows you to select your preferred way of controlling value sliders.
● Jump
Clicking anywhere on a slider instantly moves the slider handle to that position.
● Touch
Clicking and dragging the actual slider handle adjusts the setting.
● Ramp
Clicking and dragging a slider causes the handle to move smoothly to the new
position.
● Relative
Clicking and dragging up or down changes the setting according to how far you
drag, not according to where you click.

Editing - MIDI
Select Controllers in Note Range: Use Extended Note Context
Takes the extended note context into account when you move notes in conjunction
with their controllers. This means that controllers between the most recently selected
note and the following note or the end of the part are also moved.

Legato Overlap
Allows you to set an overlap for the Legato function. Legato allows you to extend MIDI
notes so that they reach the next notes.

887
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Editing

An overlap setting of 0 ticks causes each selected note to extend so that it reaches the
next note exactly. A positive value causes the notes to overlap by the specified number
of ticks. A negative value causes a slight gap between the notes.

Legato Mode: Between Selected Notes Only

Adjusts the length of selected notes so that they reach the next selected note.

Split MIDI Events

Splits MIDI events when you split a MIDI part in the Project window and the split
position intersects the MIDI events. This also creates new notes at the beginning of the
second part.

Split MIDI Controllers

Splits MIDI controllers when you split a MIDI part in the Project window and the part
contains a controller. If the controller value at the split position is not zero, a new
controller event of the same type and value is inserted at the split position at the
beginning of the second part.

NOTE

If you just split a part and play back the result, it sounds the same, regardless of this
setting. However, if you split a part and delete the first half or move the second half to
a different position in the project, you may want to activate Split MIDI Controllers to
make sure all controllers have the correct value at the beginning of the second part.

High Resolution Display Range

Allows you set up the display range for velocity, control change, pan, aftertouch, poly
pressure, and pitchbend values.

High Resolution Display Format

Allows you set up the number of decimal places for velocity, control change, pan,
aftertouch, poly pressure, and pitchbend values.

Editing - Project & MixConsole

Select Channel/Track on Solo
Selects channels/tracks when you click their Solo button.

Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings

Selects channels/tracks when you click their Edit Channel Settings button.

Scroll to Selected Track

Scrolls the track list when you select a MixConsole channel and the respective track is
out of view.

Scrolling: Disable Mouse Wheel for Parameter Change

Allows you to scroll the channel sections in the MixConsole and in the Channel tab of
the Project window by using the mouse wheel. If this is activated, you cannot use the
scroll wheel to make parameter changes.

Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track

Record-enables MIDI tracks when you select them.

Enable Record on Selected Audio Track

Record-enables audio tracks when you select them.

888
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Editing

Enable Solo on Selected Track

Solos tracks when you select them.

Enlarge Selected Track

Enlarges a track when you select it. If you select a different track, this track is enlarged,
and the previously selected track is displayed in its original size.

Editing - Tool Modifiers

The default tool modifiers are arranged in categories.

Categories Action Modifiers

Controls Reset to Default Value Ctrl/Cmd

Drag & Drop Constraint Direction Ctrl/Cmd

Copy Alt/Opt

Shared Copy Alt/Opt - Shift

Draw Tool Rename Marker Event Shift

Erase Tool Delete later events Alt/Opt

Glue Tool Glue All Following Events Alt/Opt

Info Line All Events Same Value Ctrl/Cmd

Range Tool Exclude Row Alt

Select Full Vertical Alt - Shift

Slip Range Content Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt

Select Tool Edit Velocity Ctrl/Cmd - Shift

Set Cursor Position Alt/Opt - Shift

Slip Event Content Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt

Split Event Alt/Opt

Size Objects All Events Same Value no default assignment

Disable Snapping Ctrl/Cmd

Repeat Event Alt/Opt

Size with Fade Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt

Time Stretch no default assignment

Split Tool Split repeated Alt/Opt

889
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Editing

Categories Action Modifiers

Trim Tool Constrain Direction Ctrl/Cmd

Trim Start Alt/Opt

Editing Tool Modifiers

You can edit the default tool modifier keys.

PROCEDURE
1. Select an option from the Categories list.
2. Select the action whose modifier keys you want to edit in the Action list.
3. On your computer keyboard, hold down the modifier keys, and click Assign.

RESULT
The current modifier keys are replaced. If this tool already has assigned modifier keys, you are
prompted to replace them.

Editing - Tools
Show Toolbox on Right-Click
Opens a toolbox when you right-click in the event display and editors. To open the
context menu instead of the toolbox, press any modifier key when right-clicking.

Cross-Hair Cursor
Allows you to set up the colors for the line of the cross-hair cursor, as well as its width.
You can also show an outline for the cross-hair cursor.

Range Selection Cursor

Allows you to set up the colors for the line of the range selection cursor, as well as its
width. You can also show an outline for the range selection cursor.

Select Tool: Show Extra Info

Displays the current pointer position and the name of the track and event at which
you are pointing when you use the Object Selection tool in the Project window event
display.

Show Notification when Switching Tool Mode with Key Command

Shows a notification when you switch the tool mode by using a key command.

Editing - Zoom
Quick Zoom
Only redraws the contents of parts and events once you have stopped changing the
zoom. This is useful if screen redraws are slow on your system.

Use Selection Start as Zoom Anchor

Activate this to use the selection start as an anchor when zooming with the horizontal
zoom sliders or the corresponding key commands. If this is deactivated, the project
cursor position is used as an anchor instead.

890
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Editors

Zoom while Locating in Time Scale

Allows you to zoom in or out by clicking in the ruler and dragging down or up.

Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only

Zooms the window horizontally without changing the track height when you zoom with
the Zoom tool.

Editors
Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned
Shows drum note symbols in parts on MIDI tracks to which drum maps are assigned.
The parts automatically open in the Drum Editor on double-click. This overwrites the
Default MIDI Editor setting.

Default MIDI Editor

Determines which editor is opened when you double-click a MIDI part or when you
select it and press Ctrl/Cmd - E . This setting is overwritten for tracks with drum maps if
Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned is activated.

Double-click opens Editor in a Window/in Lower Zone

Determines where an editor is opened when you double-click an audio event or a MIDI
part, or when you use the key command assigned to Open/Close Editor.

Open Editor Commands open Editors in a Window/in Lower Zone

Determines where an editor is opened when you use an open command from the
Audio or MIDI menu or the corresponding key commands.

Editor Content Follows Event Selection

Open editors show the events that are selected in the Project window.

RELATED LINKS
Score Editor on page 891

Score Editor
Preferred Unit of Measurement
Allows you to choose your preferred unit of measurement. As a result, it is globally
applied in the Score Editor for options that use absolute measurements, such as the
size of page margins in the Layout Settings dialog.

Default Paper Size Type

Allows you to apply your preferred paper size type as the default setting.
International uses international ISO standards, for example A4. North American uses
North American standards, such as US Letter.
Automatic chooses a paper size that is based on your computer's local settings. For
example, if your computer is set to a European country, an international ISO standard
is used. If it is set to a North American country, an American standard is used.

Event Display
The Event Display section allows you to customize the display in the Project window.

Show Event Names

Shows the names on parts and events.

891
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Event Display

Hide Truncated Event Names

Hides event names if they are too long.

Highlight Borders of Selected Events

Highlights selected events with a red border.

Show Overlaps
Determines how overlapping events are displayed.

Grid Overlay Intensity

Sets the overlay intensity of the displayed grid lines.

Event Handling Opacity

Sets the opacity of overlying events when you move them.

Event Opacity
Sets the opacity of the event background.

NOTE

● If you reduce the event opacity, it can be helpful to increase the Waveform
Brightness for audio events or the Note Brightness for MIDI events.
● Reducing the opacity may result in a less responsive user interface.

Smallest Track Height to Show Data

Determines the minimum track height for displaying the content of the track.

Smallest Track Height to Show Name

Determines the minimum track height for displaying the name of the track.

RELATED LINKS
Event Display - Audio on page 892
Event Display - Chords & Pitches on page 893
Event Display - Folders on page 894
Event Display - MIDI on page 894
Event Display - Tracks on page 895
Waveform Brightness on page 892
Note Brightness on page 894

Event Display - Audio

Append Clip Name to Event Name
Attaches the clip name to the displayed event name in brackets.

Interpolate Audio Waveforms

Interpolates sample values to form curves when you zoom in to one sample per pixel
or less.

Show Waveforms
Displays waveforms for audio events.

Show Hitpoints on Selected Events

Displays hitpoints for selected audio events.

Waveform Brightness
Sets the brightness of the waveform.

892
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Event Display

Waveform Outline Intensity

Sets the intensity of the waveform outline.

Background Color Modulation

Reflects the waveform dynamics of audio waveforms in the background.

Show Fades
Allows you to choose when to display fades: Always or On Mouse Over.

Fades Brightness
Sets the brightness of the fade lines for audio events.

Event Display - Chords & Pitches

Pitch Notation
● Note Name
Allows you to select how chord symbols are displayed. You can choose English,
German, or Solfège.
● Naming Format
Allows you to determine how MIDI note names are displayed in editors, etc.
● Display ‘Bb’ as ‘B’
Displays ‘B’ as a pitch name. This is only available if you selected English in the
Note Name pop-up menu.
● Display ‘B’ as ‘H’
Displays ‘H’ as a pitch name. This is only available if you selected English in the
Note Name pop-up menu.
● Enharmonics from Chord Track
Uses the chord events on the chord track to determine if enharmonically
equivalent notes in the Key Editor and in the List Editor are displayed as sharp or
flat.

Chord Font
Allows you to specify a font for all chord symbols.

Chord Symbols
Allows you to select your preferred display method for major 7th chords, minor chords,
half-diminished chords, diminished chords, and augmented chords.

Custom Chord Symbols

Allows you to modify the default chord symbols that are used on the chord track, and
for the chord pads.

893
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Event Display

● New Custom Chord allows you to add a new custom chord symbol.
● The options to the left allow you to specify the chord for which you want to change
the chord symbol.
● Click the Type and Tension column, and enter your custom symbol.

NOTE

You must define custom symbols for each set of tensions.

● The Result column offers a preview of the chord display.

● The Remove Custom Chord button allows you to remove the custom chord
symbol that is selected in the list.

EXAMPLE
To change the appearance of all minor chords from Xmin to X-, click New Custom Chord,
activate 5 and min3/#9 to define the chord type, and change the symbol in the Type column
from min to -.

Event Display - Folders

Show Event Details
Displays event details instead of data blocks.
This setting depends on the Show Data on Folder Tracks setting.

Show Data on Folder Tracks

Determines in which case data blocks or event details are displayed on folder tracks.
● Always Show Data
Always displays data blocks or event details.
● Never Show Data
Displays nothing.
● Hide Data When Expanded
Hides the display of events when you open folder tracks.

Event Display - MIDI

Part Display
Part Data Mode
Determines if and how events in MIDI parts are shown. This setting is overwritten for
tracks with drum maps if Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned is activated.

Show Controllers
Shows non-note events such as controllers, etc. in MIDI parts.

Note Brightness
Sets the brightness of note events.

Controller Brightness
Sets the brightness of controller events.

894
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
General

Event Display in Editor

Inactive Note Event Intensity
Allows you to set the intensity for inactive note events.

RELATED LINKS
Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned on page 891

Event Display - Tracks

Default Track Name Width
Sets the default name width for all track types.

Track Name Font Weight

Sets the font weight for all track names.

General
The General page contains general settings that affect the program user interface. You can set
the parameters so that they suit your working style.

Enable HiDPI (Windows only)

Enables the appropriate resolution to ensure that the display of the Cubase user
interface is sharp and precise on high resolution displays with supported scaling
factors of 100%, 125%, 150%, 175%, and 200%.

NOTE

Other scaling factors, such as 133%, are not supported.

The Application Scaling menu allows you to scale the Cubase user interface relative to
the Windows system scaling setting.

NOTE

On macOS, you can disable HiDPI support in the Cubase application folder by invoking
Get Info and checking Open in Low Resolution.

Usage Logger Options

If you activate this option, Cubase gathers usage information and writes it in a log file
that you can find at the following location:

● On Windows: \Users\<user name>\AppData\Local\Steinberg\usagelogger

On macOS: /Users/<user name>/Library/Logs/Steinberg/usagelogger

Activating this option to write such a file and then sending the file to the Steinberg
support team can be useful if Cubase crashes and the crash dump files do not reveal
enough information.
By default, Enable Usage Logging is deactivated. We recommend that you deactivate
it when you no longer need it.

Show News in Hub

Allows you to show/hide the News section in the Hub.

895
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
MIDI

Language
Allows you to select the language displayed in the application. After switching the
language, you must restart Cubase for the change to take effect.

Auto Save
Automatically saves copies of all open projects with unsaved changes in the Auto
Saves folder inside your project folder.
The files are named Name-xx-(last edit).bak, where “Name” corresponds to the
name of the project and “xx” is an incremental number. Unsaved projects files are
automatically saved in a similar way as UntitledX-xx-(last edit).bak, with “X”
being the incremental number for unsaved projects.

Auto Save Interval

Allows you to specify how often an auto save file is created.

Maximum Number of Auto Save Files

Allows you to specify the number of auto save files to be created. As soon as the
maximum number of files is reached, the existing files are overwritten, starting with
the oldest file.

Show Tips
Displays an explanatory tooltip when you position the mouse pointer over an icon or
button in Cubase.

Maximum Undo Steps

Allows you to specify the number of undo steps.

Run Setup on Create New Project

Opens the Project Setup dialog, every time you create a new project.

Open Last Project on Startup

Opens the most recently saved project when you start Cubase.

RELATED LINKS
General - Personalization on page 896
Cubase Hub on page 84
Auto Save on page 95

General - Personalization
Default Author Name
Allows you to specify an author name that is used by default for new projects. This is
included as metadata when exporting audio files with an iXML chunk.

Default Company Name

Allows you to specify a company name that is used by default for new projects. This is
included as metadata when exporting audio files with an iXML chunk.

MIDI
This page contains settings that affect MIDI recording and playback.

MIDI-CI Support
Allows you to enable automatic detection and setup of MIDI-CI devices.

896
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
MIDI

MIDI Thru Active

Sets all MIDI tracks that are record-enabled or have monitoring activated to echo
incoming MIDI data, sending it back out on their respective MIDI outputs and
channels. This allows you to hear the correct sound from your MIDI instrument during
recording.

NOTE

If you use MIDI Thru, select the Local Off mode on your MIDI instrument to prevent
each note from sounding twice.

Reset on Stop
Sets Cubase to send out MIDI reset messages, including note-off and controller resets,
on stop.

Never Reset Chased Controllers

Never resets controllers to 0 when you stop playback or move to a new position in the
project.

Length Adjustment
Allows you to enter a length adjustment value in ticks by which the notes that have the
same pitch and MIDI channel are adjusted. This ensures that there is always a short
gap between the end of one note and the start of another. By default, there are 120
ticks per 1/16 note, but you can adjust this with the MIDI Display Resolution setting.

Chase Events
Chases event types for which one of the chase options is activated when you locate to a
new position and start playback. This makes your MIDI instruments sound as intended
when you locate to a new position and start playback.
If Chase not limited to Part Boundaries is activated, MIDI controllers are also chased
outside the part boundaries, and the chase is performed on the part under the cursor
as well as on all the parts to the left of it. Deactivate this for very large projects, as it
slows down processes like positioning and soloing.

MIDI Display Resolution

Allows you to set the display resolution for viewing and editing MIDI data.

Extend Playback Range of Notes that start before the Part

Extends the playback range of MIDI notes that start before the part in ticks. This is
useful if MIDI events start shortly before the start of the MIDI part. If you do not
extend the playback range, these events are not played. This setting is also taken into
account during cycle playback.

Insert Reset Events after Record

Inserts a reset event at the end of each recorded part. This resets controller data, such
as Sustain, Aftertouch, Pitchbend, Modulation, or Breath Control. This is useful if
you stop recording before the note-off command is sent, for example.

MIDI Latency Mode

Allows you to specify the latency of the MIDI playback engine.
Low lowers the latency and increases the responsiveness of the MIDI playback engine.
However, this setting might also decrease your computer performance if your project
contains lots of MIDI data.
Normal is the default mode and the recommended setting for most workflows.
High increases the latency and the playback buffer. Use this if you work with complex
VST instrument libraries or with projects that have a very high performance level.

897
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
MIDI

MIDI Max. Feedback in ms

Allows you to set the maximum length of the notes when using Acoustic Feedback in
MIDI editors.

RELATED LINKS
MIDI - MIDI File on page 898
MIDI - MIDI Filter on page 900

MIDI - MIDI File

This page allows you to make settings for exporting and importing MIDI Files.

Export Options
These options allow you to specify what data is included in exported MIDI files.

Export Inspector Patch

Includes MIDI patch settings in the Inspector as MIDI bank select and program
change events in the MIDI file.

Export Inspector Volume/Pan

Includes volume and pan settings in the Inspector as MIDI volume and pan events in
the MIDI file.

Export Automation
Includes automation as MIDI controller events in the MIDI file.

Export Inserts
Includes MIDI modifiers and MIDI inserts in the MIDI file.
Includes MIDI modifiers in the MIDI file.

Export Markers
Includes markers as standard MIDI file marker events in the MIDI file.

Export as Type 0
Exports a type 0 MIDI file with all data on a single track, but on different MIDI channels.
If you deactivate this option, a type 1 MIDI file with data on separate tracks is exported.

Export Resolution
Allows you to set a MIDI resolution between 24 and 960 for the MIDI file. The
resolution is the number of pulses, or ticks, per quarter note (PPQ) and determines
the precision with which you will be able to view and edit the MIDI data. The higher the
resolution, the higher the precision. Choose the resolution based on the application or
sequencer to be used, because certain applications and sequencers may not be able to
handle certain resolutions.

898
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
MIDI

Export Locator Range

Exports only the range between the left and the right locator.

Export includes Delay

Includes delay settings you have made in the MIDI file via the Inspector.

NOTE

● To include other Inspector settings, you must convert the settings to real MIDI events and
properties by using the Merge MIDI in Loop function for each track.
● Exported MIDI files include the tempo and time signature events of the Tempo Track Editor
or, if the tempo track is deactivated, the current tempo and time signature.

Import Options
The Import Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data to include in imported MIDI
files.

Extract First Patch

Converts the first Program Change and Bank Select events for each track to
Inspector settings for the track.

Extract First Volume/Pan

Converts the first MIDI Volume and Pan events for each track to Inspector settings
for the track.

Import Controller as Automation Tracks

Converts MIDI Controller events in the MIDI file to automation data for the MIDI
tracks.

Import to Left Locator

Aligns the imported MIDI file to the position of the left locator.

Import Markers
Imports any markers that have been added.

Import Dropped File as Single Part

Places the file on one track if you drag a MIDI file into the project.

Ignore Master Track Events on Merge

Ignores tempo track data if you import a MIDI file into the current project. The
imported MIDI file adapts to the current tempo track in the project.

Auto Dissolve Format 0

Automatically dissolves imported MIDI files of type 0. Each embedded MIDI channel in
the file is placed on a separate track in the Project window.

899
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
MediaBay

Destination
Allows you to specify what happens when you drag a MIDI file into the project.

● MIDI Tracks creates MIDI tracks for the imported file.

● Instrument Tracks creates instrument tracks for each MIDI channel in the MIDI
file and causes the program to automatically load appropriate presets.
● HALion Sonic multi-timbral creates several MIDI tracks, each routed to a
separate instance of HALion Sonic in the VST Instruments window, and loads the
appropriate presets.

Import Karaoke Lyrics as Text

If this option is deactivated, lyrics are only shown in the List Editor.

MIDI - MIDI Filter

This page allows you to prevent certain MIDI messages from being recorded and/or echoed by
the MIDI thru function (thruput).

The page is divided into 4 sections:

Record
Prevents the corresponding type of MIDI message from being recorded. It will,
however, be thruput, and if already recorded, play back normally.

Thru
Prevents the corresponding type of MIDI message from being thruput. It will, however,
be recorded and played back normally.

Channels
Prevents MIDI messages on that MIDI channel from being recorded or thruput. Already
recorded messages are, however, played back normally.

Controller
Prevents certain MIDI controller types from being recorded or thruput.
To filter out a controller type, select it from the list at the top of the section and click
Add. It is shown in the list below.
To remove a controller type from the list (allow it to be recorded and thruput), select it
in the lower list and click Remove.

MediaBay
Scan Folders Only When MediaBay Is Open
Scans for media files when the MediaBay window is open.

NOTE

During playback or recording no folder scans are performed.

Scan Unknown File Types

Scans all file types.

Maximum Items in Results List

Sets the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results list.

Show File Extensions in Results List

Displays file name extensions in the Results list.

900
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Metering

Metering
Map Input Bus Metering to Audio Track (in Direct Monitoring)
Maps the input bus metering to monitor-enabled audio tracks, giving you the
opportunity to watch the input levels of your audio tracks when working in the Project
window. For this to work, activate Direct Monitoring in the Studio Setup dialog.
Note that the tracks are mirroring the input bus signal, that is, you will see the same
signal in both places. When using mapped metering, any functions, such as trimming,
that you apply to the audio track are not reflected in its meters.

Meters’ Peak Hold Time

Allows you to specify for how long the peak levels are held in the meters. For this to
work, deactivate Meters - Hold Forever in the MixConsole.

Meters’ Fallback
Allows you to specify how quickly the meters in the MixConsole return to lower values
after signal peaks.

RELATED LINKS
Metering - Appearance on page 901

Metering - Appearance
This page allows you to assign colors to level meter values to quickly identify what levels are
reached.

Add
Adds a color handle to the top of the meter.

Remove
Removes the selected color handle.

RELATED LINKS
Setting up Meter Colors on page 313

Record
This page contains settings related to audio and MIDI recording.

Deactivate Punch In on Stop

Deactivates Punch In on the Transport panel whenever you enter stop mode.

Stop after Automatic Punch Out

Stops playback after automatic Punch Out. If the post-roll value on the Transport
panel is set to a value other than zero, playback will continue for the set time before
stopping.

RELATED LINKS
Record - Audio on page 902
Record - MIDI on page 902

901
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Record

Record - Audio
Audio Pre-Record Seconds
Sets for how many seconds any incoming audio you play is captured in buffer memory
during playback or in stop mode.

When Recording Wave Files Larger than 4 GB

Determines what happens if you record wave files that are larger than 4 GB.

● To split the wave file, select Split Files.

Use this if you work on a FAT32 file system that supports only file sizes up to 4 GB.
● To save the wave file as an RF64 file, select Use RF64 Format.
RF64 files use the .wav extension. However, they can only be opened with an
application that supports the RF64 standard.

Create Audio Images during Record

Creates and displays a waveform image during the recording process.

NOTE

This real-time calculation uses some extra processing power.

Record - Audio - Broadcast Wave

This page allows you to specify the Description, Author, and Reference Value text strings that
are embedded in recorded Broadcast Wave files. The settings you make here also appear as
default strings in the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog when you export files to certain formats.
Not only Broadcast Wave files can contain embedded information, but also Wave, and AIFF files.

Record - MIDI
Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru
Prevents record-enabled MIDI or instrument tracks from echoing incoming MIDI data.
This way record-enabled tracks to which a VST instrument is assigned do not play
doubled notes.

Snap MIDI Parts to Bars

Lengthens recorded MIDI parts so that they start and end at whole bar positions. If you
are working in a context that is based on bars and beats, this can make editing, such as
moving, duplicating, and repeating, easier.

MIDI Record Catch Range in ms

Ensures that the very start of a recording that starts at the left locator is included.

Retrospective Record Buffer Size in Events

You can capture MIDI data that you played in Stop mode or during playback and turn
them into a MIDI part. Retrospective Record Buffer Size determines how much MIDI
data can be captured in the buffer.

ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default

Determines the initial state of the ASIO Latency Compensation button in the track list
for MIDI or instrument tracks.
If you record live on a VST instrument, you usually compensate the latency of your
audio card by playing too early. In consequence, the timestamps are recorded too

902
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Transport

early. By activating this option, all recorded events are moved by the current latency,
and playback sounds like during the recording situation.

Add Latency to MIDI-Thru Processing

If you set the audio buffer size to a high value, and you play an arpeggiator in real
time, for example, the MIDI notes are output with an increased latency.
If you consequently adapt your playing to the output latency, the notes are recorded
even later. To minimize this effect, you can activate Add Latency to MIDI-Thru
Processing. This adds a regular latency to each note that is played in real time.

Replace Recording in Editors

Affects the result of recording in a MIDI editor when Replace mode is selected as a
record mode:
● None
Nothing is replaced.
● Controller
Only controller data is replaced, not notes.
● All
Replace mode works as usual. Notes and controllers are replaced when recording.

Transport
This page contains options related to playback, recording, and positioning.

Playback Toggle Triggers Local Preview

Allows you to use Space on your keyboard to start/stop local playback of the selected
file in the Sample Editor or the Pool.
When the Sample Editor is not open or when there is no audio file selected in the Pool,
Space still toggles the global project playback.

Show Timecode Subframes

Shows subframes for all frame-based time formats.

Stop Playback while Winding

Stops playback when you click Rewind or Forward on the Transport panel.

Wind Speed Options

These options affect the forward/rewind speed.
● Adjust to Zoom adapts the wind speed to the horizontal zoom factor.
If you zoom in very close for detailed editing, you probably do not want to have a
high forward/rewind speed. Because of this, the Speed Factor does not have any
effect in this mode. The Fast Wind Factor still applies.
● Fixed keeps a fixed wind speed regardless of the horizontal zoom factor.
● Speed Factor allows you to set the wind speed. You can set a value between 2 and
50. The higher the value, the faster the wind speed will be.
If Adjust to Zoom is activated, this has no effect.
● Fast Wind Factor allows you to set the winding speed to a multiple for fast
winding.
If you press Shift while forwarding or rewinding, the wind speed will increase. The
increase in speed is a multiple of the Speed Factor. Meaning that if you set the

903
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
User Interface

Fast Wind Factor to 2, the wind speed will be twice as fast. If you set it to 4, the
wind speed will be 4 times as fast, etc. You can set a value between 2 and 50.

Cursor
Allows you to set up the colors for the line of the cursor, as well as its width. You can
also show an outline for the cursor.

Clicking Locator Range in Upper Part of the Ruler Activates Cycle

Allows you to activate/deactivate cycle mode when you click the locator range in the
upper part of the ruler.

Locate when Clicked in Empty Space

Allows you to move the project cursor by clicking in an empty area of the Project
window.

RELATED LINKS
Transport - Scrub on page 904

Transport - Scrub
Scrub Tool Volume
Sets the playback volume for the Scrub tool in the Project window and audio editors.

NOTE

This does not affect the scrub volume controlled by any connected hardware.

Use High Quality Scrub Mode

Enables effects for scrubbing and uses a higher resampling quality. However,
scrubbing will be more demanding on the processor.

Use Inserts While Scrubbing

Allows you to activate insert effects for scrubbing with the shuttle speed control. By
default, insert effects are bypassed.

User Interface
This page contains options that allow you to adjust the default user interface colors.

Color Schemes
Allows you to adjust the color scheme for the application and the desktop cover.

● Click the Custom Color Scheme field to open the Color Picker, and select one of
the colors in the Default Colors section to apply a pre-defined color.
● Click the color field for a specific item to open the Color Picker and select a custom
color for it.

Track & MixConsole Channel Colors

Allows you to set the Auto Track/Channel Color Mode, to colorize track controls and
MixConsole channel controls, and to determine the brightness of selected channels.

Track Type Default Colors

Allows you to set the colors for the different track types.

RELATED LINKS
User Interface - Track & MixConsole Channel Colors on page 905

904
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
User Interface

Customizing the User Interface Colors

You can change the color of the Cubase desktop, the track types, the Project window, and the
editor elements.

PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select User Interface > Color Schemes.
2. Click Custom Color Scheme and in the Color Picker, select a new color.

RESULT
The color scheme is instantly applied.

User Interface - Track & MixConsole Channel Colors

Allows you to set the Auto Track/Channel Color Mode to colorize track controls and channel
faders, and to determine the brightness of selected channels.

Auto Track/Channel Color Mode

Allows you to set an automatic color assignment mode for new tracks or new channels.

Use Track’s Default Color

New tracks get the default event color.

Use Previous Track Color

New tracks get the same color as the tracks preceding them in the track list.

Use Previous Track Color +1

This is similar to Use Previous Track Color, except that new tracks get the next color in
the color palette.

Use Last Applied Color

New tracks get the color that you last applied to an event/part.

Use Random Track Color

New tracks get random track colors.

Colorize Tracks and MixConsole Channels

Applies the track/channel color to track/channel controls.

Selection Brightness
Allows you to adjust the brightness of the selected MixConsole channel.

Tracks
Enables the application of the track color to the track controls.

Folder Tracks
Enables the application of the folder track color to the track controls.

MixConsole Channels
Enables the application of the MixConsole channel color to the channel controls.

Color Strength
Allows you to adjust the intensity of the color.

905
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
VST

Show Color for Selected Channel

Colorizes the selected channel and increases its color intensity instead of displaying it
in gray.

VST
This page contains settings for the VST audio engine.

Warn if real time mixdown is required in order to include external plug-in

Shows a warning if a realtime mixdown is required.

Connect Sends Automatically for Each Newly Created Channel

Automatically connects the send routing for existing effect channels when you create a
new audio or group channel.

Instruments use Automation Read All and Write All

If you activate this, the Read and Write automation status in control panels for VST
instruments is affected by Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks and Activate/
Deactivate Write for All Tracks.

Mute Pre-Send when Mute

Mutes pre-fader sends when you mute their channels.

Default Send Level

Allows you to specify a default level for your send effects.

Group Channels: Mute Sources as well

Mutes channels that are directly routed to a group channel when you mute the group
channel. Channels that were muted prior to the group channel being muted do not
remember their mute status and are unmuted when the group channel is unmuted.

NOTE

This does not have an impact on how mute automation is written.

Delay Compensation Threshold (for Recording)

Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation while maintaining the sound
of the mix to the greatest possible extent. Only plug-ins with a delay higher than this
threshold setting are affected by the Constrain Delay Compensation function. By
default, this is set to 0.0 ms, which means that all plug-ins are affected. If you feel that
a little latency is acceptable, you can raise this threshold value.

NOTE

Cubase features full delay compensation. Any delay inherent in the VST plug-ins you
use will automatically be compensated for during playback. However, when you play
a VST instrument in real time or record live audio (with monitoring through Cubase
activated), this delay compensation may result in added latency.

Do Not Connect Input/Output Busses When Loading External Projects

Prevents connecting input and output busses to the ASIO ports of your system when
loading external projects.

Warn on Channel Configuration Change

Shows a warning if the channel configuration is changed.

906
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
VST

Auto Monitoring
Determines how Cubase handles monitoring. The following options are available:

● Manual
Turns input monitoring on or off when you click Monitor.
● While Record-Enabled
Connects the audio source to the channel input when you click Record Enable.
● While Record Running
Switches to input monitoring during recording only.
● Tapemachine Style
Activates input monitoring in stop mode and during recording, but not during
playback.

NOTE

The automatic monitoring options apply when you monitor through Cubase or when
you use ASIO Direct Monitoring. If you monitor externally (that is, if you listen to the
input signal from an external mixer, for example), select Manual mode, and keep all
audio Monitor buttons turned off in Cubase.

Warn on Processing Overloads

Shows a warning if the Processing Overload indicator on the Transport panel lights
up during recording.

RELATED LINKS
VST - Plug-ins on page 907
Constrain Delay Compensation on page 548

VST - Plug-ins
Create MIDI Track when Loading VSTi
Allows you to determine if a MIDI track is created when you add a rack instrument.
● Always
A MIDI track is always created.
● Do not
No MIDI track is created.
● Always ask to
You are asked whether a corresponding MIDI track should be created.

Warn before Removing Modified Effects

Shows a warning if you remove an effect plug-in for which you have made parameter
changes.

Open Effect Editor after Loading It

Opens the effect control panel when you load VST effects or VST instruments.

Synchronize Plug-in Program Selection to Track Selection

Synchronizes track and plug-in program selection if you route multiple MIDI tracks to
multitimbral instruments.

907
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Preferences
Video

Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio signals are received

Suspends VST plug-in processing in passages where no audio is passing through the
plug-in. This can noticeably improve system performance.

NOTE

We recommend to leave this option deactivated.

Plug-in Editors “Always on Top”

Always shows the control panels for effect plug-ins and VST instruments on top of
other windows.

Video
Extract Audio on Import Video File
Extracts and saves the audio data of imported video files as a separate audio clip.

Thumbnail Memory Cache Size

Allows you to set the size of the thumbnail cache.

908
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
 Index

A Attribute Filter
Applying in the MediaBay 517
ACID® loops 429 Context menu search 518
Activate Extend Process Range MediaBay 517
Direct Offline Processing 383 Attributes
Activate Project 94 MediaBay 517
Activate tempo track 794 Audio
Adapt to Zoom 66 Handling 161
Grid type 72 Zooming 67
ADAT Lightpipe Audio clock
Synchronization 819 Synchronization 819
Add Cycle Marker Audio Connections 28
Track Control 134 Editing 32
Add Latency to MIDI-Thru Processing 902 Presets 31
Add Marker Audio Driver 16
Track Control 134 Audio events 159
Add Track dialog 137 Auditioning 165
Audio tracks 100 Inverting phase 183
Effect channel tracks 109 Audio files
Folder tracks 112 Inverting phase 183
Group channel tracks 107 Previewing in MediaBay 511
Instrument tracks 102 Audio Functions 393
MIDI tracks 105 Detect Silence 393
Ruler tracks 110 Spectrum Analyzer 397
Sampler tracks 104 Statistics 398
Adding chords 727, 732 Audio hardware
AES/SPDIF Digital Audio Connections 15
Synchronization 819 Externally clocked 21
AIFF files 813 Audio Part Editor
Algorithms Lower zone 57
Limitations 392 Toolbar 431
Time-stretching 391 Audio parts
All MIDI Inputs 23 Auditioning 165
Appearance Creating 163
Colors 904 Multiple Part Controls 438
Metering 901 Audio performance
Append Clip Name to Event Name 892 Optimizing 876
Archive Audio Performance Monitor panel 878
Prepare 96 Audio Pre-Record Seconds 902
Arranger track 278 Audio processing
Flattening 281, 284 Pool 486
Inspector 114 Audio Processing
Track controls 114 Direct Offline Processing 379
ASIO Direct Monitoring 22, 232 Audio Recording 235
ASIO Driver 19 Pre-Record Time 237
ASIO Latency Compensation Preparations 234
Track Control 134 RAM Requirements 234
ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default 902 Record File Format 233
ASIO-Guard 880 Record Folder 234
Aspect ratio Record Modes 235
Video Player window 843 Recovering 237
Assigning chords to chord pads 762 Recovering recordings 237
Assigning chords with the Chord Editor 762 Undo 236
With Effects 236
Audio regions 161
Audio System 16

909
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Audio tracks 100 Automation tracks 533

Add Track dialog 100 Assigning parameters 533
Basics 119 Hiding 533
Changing the channel configuration 142, 143 Muting 534
Freezing 150, 356 Removing 533
Inspector 119 Showing 533
Audition chords 735
Auditioning
Audio events 165
B
Audio parts 165 Back up Project 96
Using key commands 482 Background Color Modulation 892
Auto fades Bank assignments 624
Global settings 276 Bézier curves
Track settings 276 Automation 529
Auto Monitoring Continuous controllers 670
Manual 906 Bounce Selection 160
Tapemachine Style 906 Broadcast Wave files 812
Auto Save 95, 895 Broadcast Wave Files
Auto Saves Embedded information 902
Folder 86 Buffer
Auto Select Controllers 674 Settings 877
Auto Select Events under Cursor 884 Busses
Auto Track/Channel Color Mode 905 Adding 30
Auto-Scroll 215 Removing 32
Crossfades 273 Bypass EQs
Suspend 215 Track Control 134
Automatable parameters Bypass Inserts
Controlling with Quick Controls 563 Track Control 134
Automatic Hitpoint Detection Bypass Sends
Enabling 885 Track Control 134
Automatic scales 736
Automatic voicings 739
Automatically generating new audio clips C
Pool 488
Cadence mode
Automation 525
Chord Assistant 730
Bézier curves 529
Channel
Data 671
Set up 130
Quick scaling 532
Track Control 134
Ramp curves 525
Channel Configuration
Read 526
Track Control 134
Recording actions 525
Channel configurations 142
Smooth transitions 529
Switching between mono and stereo 143
Static value line 526
Channel latency
Step curves 525
MixConsole 334
Write 525, 526
Channel sections 315
Automation data
Equalizer 321
Editing 529
Filters 317
Removing 533
Gain 318
Selecting 530
Inserts 319, 320
Automation Event Editor
Phase 318
Compress Left 530
Pre 317, 318
Compress Right 530
Routing 316
Move Vertically 530
Sends 331
Scale Around Absolute Center 530
Strip 323, 329
Scale Around Relative Center 530
Channel settings 336
Scale Vertically 530
Channel Faders 347
Stretch 530
Channel Inserts 339
Tilt Left 530
Channel Sends 346
Tilt Right 530
Channel strip 340
Automation Follows Events 884
Channel Strip 341–343
Automation parameter
Copying 315
Track Control 134
Equalizer 345
Automation Reduction Level 884
Toolbar 337

910
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Channel strip section 323 Chord pads (continued)

Compressor 323 Pads remote range 790
EQ position 323 Pattern player 785
Gate 323 Player Mode settings 783
Limiter 323 Player modes 784
Presets 329 Player settings 781
Saturation 323 Players 781
Transformer 323 Playing back 771, 772
View options 329 Presets 775
Channel tab 49, 99 Recording 771, 773
Opening 50 Removing chord assignments 767
Channel types Root key 768, 769
MixConsole 306 Saving presets 776
Channels 99 Setting up different players 782
Color 145 Show/Hide 751
Linking 307 Status information 757
Reordering 332 Step input 774
Chase Events 222, 896 Swapping chord assignments 766
Chord Assistant 729, 777 Toolbar 752
Assigning chords 763, 764 Transposing 770
Cadence mode 730 Voicings 781
Circle of Fifths 733, 779 Zone 751
Common notes mode 730 Chord Pads Remote Settings
Detected 734 Remote control 786
List 777 Chord symbols 893
Proximity 731, 779 Chord track 115, 726
Reference 730 Adding 726
Chord editor Assigning pads 766
MIDI input 729 Controlling MIDI or audio playback 744
Chord Editor 728 Inspector 129
Adding chords 732 Live input 743
Assigning chords 762 Track controls 115
Chord events 727 Chord voicing
Adding 727 Changing 700
Adding chords 727 Chords
Assigning 729 Changing pitch 699
Auditioning 735 Changing voicing 700
Chord type 727 Editing 700
Converting to MIDI 742 Editing via MIDI 702
Creating from Audio Events 748 Inserting 701
Creating from MIDI 747 Inserting via MIDI 703
Editing 727 Circle of Fifths 733
Getting suggestions 732 Click Sounds
Resolving Display Conflicts 736 Custom Sounds 221
Tensions 727 Clip editing
Voicings 739 Pool 482
Chord Font 893 Clips
Chord pads 751 Renaming 474
Adaptive voicing 781 Color
Assigning chords 762–766 Auto Track/Channel Color Mode 145
Chord information 757 Color Picker 82
Chord symbols 791 Color Set 80
Copying chord assignments 767 Colorize Track Controls 905
Creating chord events 775 Colorizing
Creating MIDI parts 775 Events 78
Display settings 791 Note events 644
Extended toolbar 755 Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events 76, 78
Keyboard 760 Single Tracks 77
Load Preset Settings 776 Tracks 76
Nashville Number System 791 Colors
Output modes 771 MixConsole Channels 334
Pad layout 791 Preferences 904
Pad remote control 787

911
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Colors (continued) Crossfades

Tracks 78, 79 Auto Zoom 273
User Interface 905 Auto-Scroll 273
Colors Setup Dialog Creating 271
Events 645 Editing in dialog 273
Project 79 Equal Gain 273
Common notes mode Equal Power 273
Chord Assistant 730 Presets 273
Compress Left Simple Crossfade Editor 273
Automation Event Editor 530 Symmetric Fades 273
Compress Right Cubase Elements Hub 84
Automation Event Editor 530 Cursor Width 903
Compressor Custom Chord Symbols 893
Strip module 323 Customizing
Connect Sends automatically for each newly created Colors 82
Channel 906 Meter Colors 313
Connecting User Interface Colors 905
Audio 15 Cycle
MIDI 23 Follows Range Selection 884
Constrain Delay Compensation 548 Recording 229
Continuous controllers Track Control 134
Adding in controller display 669 Cycle markers 289
Controller display 660 Adding 289
Controller lane 669 Editing 289
Ramp/Step 670 Using 295
Smooth transitions 670 Zooming 69, 289
Control link 307
Controller Brightness 894
Controller curves
D
Smart controls for scaling 673 Data on Folder Tracks
Controller Data Showing 894
Thinning Out 641 DC Offset
Controller display 653 Removing 386
Adding events 663, 669 Default MIDI Editor 891
Continuous controllers 660 Default Paper Size Type
Copying events 675 Score Editor 891
Editing events with Line tool 671 Delay compensation
Moving events 674 Constraining 548
Pasting events 675 Threshold for Recording 906
Controller Event Editor 673 Delete Notes
Controller lane Dialog 649
Adding 659 Delete Overlaps 884
Continuous controllers 669 Deleting
Presets 661 Continuous Controllers 640
Removing 659 Controllers 640
Selecting event types 659 Doubles 640
Setting up as preset 661 MIDI controllers 640
Controller lanes 656 Deleting Overlaps
Setup 655 Poly (MIDI) 638
Controller Selection and Functions 657 Poly (Mono) 638
Controllers Designating a new pool record folder
Extended note context 887 Pool 485
Selecting 674 Detect Silence
Showing 894 Audio Functions 393
Convert to Real Copy 181 With current settings 396
Converting chord events to MIDI 742 Device ports
Create Audio Images during Record 902 Selecting for busses 30
Create Chord Events 747, 748 Direct Offline Processing 379
Create MIDI track when loading VSTi 907 Applying 382
Creating chord events from Audio Events 748 Applying to multiple events 383
Creating chord events from MIDI 747 Deleting 383
Cross-hair cursor 74, 890 Envelope 384
Extend Process Range 383

912
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Direct Offline Processing (continued) Effect channel tracks 108

Fade In 385 Add Track dialog 109
Fade Out 385 Adding 358, 359
Gain 385 Basics 125
Invert Phase 386 Changing the channel configuration 142, 143
Key Commands 389 Inspector 125
Modifying 383 Effect parameters
Normalize 386 Track Quick Controls 561
Pool 486 Effect Plug-in Presets
Remove DC Offset 386 Loading in MediaBay 520
Resample 387 Effects 349
Resetting 383 Comparing settings 370
Reverse 387 Context menu 369
Silence 387 Control panel 367
Stereo Flip 387 Direct Offline Processing 379
Time Stretch 388 Dithering 367
Toolbar 381 Functions menu 369
Window 380 Insert effects 349, 352
Workflow 380 Plug-in delay compensation 351
Disable Acoustic Feedback during Playback 886 Pre/Post fader sends 361
Dithering Presets 371
Applying 367 Presets browser 371
Effects 367 Routing 360
Divider Saving presets 373
Project window toolbar 42 Selecting presets 372
Drag Delay 884 Send effects 349, 357
Draw tool Side-chain inputs 362
Drawing note events 696 Side-chain routing 365
Drum Editor 704 System component information 376, 378
Info line 713 Tempo sync 351
Lower zone 57 Track Presets 376
Note display 715 VST 3 350
Status line 712 Enable Record on Selected Audio Track 888
Toolbar 706 Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track 888
Drum Map Enable Solo on Selected Track 888
Track Control 134 Enlarge Selected Track 147, 888
Drum maps 717, 721 Envelope
Key Editor 702 Direct Offline Processing 384
Selecting 717 Envelope editor
Setting up 717, 720 Sampler Control 452
Drum notes EQ
Deleting 724 Presets 323
Drum sounds 715 Settings 345
Changing the note length 724 Strip module 323
Settings 720 Equal Gain
Setup 715 Crossfades 273
Visibility 716 Equal Power
Drum Visibility Agents 706 Crossfades 273
Duplicating Equalizer
Events 179 Channel sections 321
Settings 345
Event Details
E Showing 894
Edit Channel Settings Event display 44
Track Control 134 Folder tracks 153
Edit History dialog 75 Modifying on folder tracks 152
Edit Instrument Event Handling Opacity 891
Track Control 134 Event lengths
Editing Changing with Trim tool 699
Project window info line 48 Event name
Editor Content Follows Event Selection 891 Showing 891
Event Opacity 891

913
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Event volume Fade Out

Setting 277 Direct Offline Processing 385
Event Volume Curves Fade Out dialog 269
Showing 892 Fader section
Events 159 MixConsole 310
Copying and Pasting 179 Fades
Creating clip-based volume changes 384 Auto fades 275
Creating new files from events 160 Editing in dialog 269
Displaying on folder tracks 153 Presets 269
Duplicating 179 Showing 892
Editing 165 With Range Selection tool 269
Gluing 178 Fades Brightness 892
Moving 168, 172 Favorites
Moving the content without changing the position Adding 498, 499, 505
182 Media rack 497
Moving via info line 173 File Browser
Moving with Nudge 170 Media rack 497
Moving with Object Selection 169 File Extensions
Muting 183 Showing in Results list 900
Normal resizing 174 Fill Loop 181
Pasting 179 Fixed lengths 636
Pasting copies to locator range 181 Fixed tempo
Pasting from clipboard to selection ranges 181 Mode 793
Removing 168 Fixed Tempo
Renaming 173 Mode 798
Repeating 180 Setting up 798
Resizing 174, 175 Fixed velocity 637
Resizing with Object Selection 174, 175 Flac files 815
Resizing with Scrub 177 FLAC files
Size with Fade 174 Importing 249
Sizing Applies Time Stretch 175 Flattening
Sizing Moves Contents 174 Arranger track 281, 284
Splitting 177 Focus Quick Controls
Splitting repeatedly 178 Focus lock 591
Volume 277 Focus setup 591
Export Audio Mixdown 804, 811 Setting up 590
AIFF files 813 Folder parts 165
Broadcast Wave files 812 Folder tracks 112
File Formats 811 Add Track dialog 112
Flac files 815 Displaying events 153
MP3 files 814 Inspector 127
Ogg Vorbis files 816 Modifying event display 152
Wave files 812 Track controls 114
Export Audio Mixdown dialog 804 Follow Chord Track 745
Export Video 850 Auto 745
Export Video dialog 845 Chords 745
Exporting Directly 746
MIDI files 141 Scale events 746
Video files 851 Single Voice 745
Extending the Process Range Synchronizing Track Data 746
Direct Offline Processing 383 Using 744
External monitoring 231 Frame count 818
Extract Audio on Import Video File 908 Frame rates
Extracting Mismatch 840
Audio from video 252, 852 Synchronization 818
MIDI Automation 641 Video 840
Freeze
Multiple tracks 150
F Sampler tracks 465
Fade In VST instruments 545
Direct Offline Processing 385 Freeze Channel
Fade In dialog 269 Track Control 134

914
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Freeze Channel Options Importing

Sampler tracks 466 Audio files 249
VST instruments 546 Audio from video files 252
Freeze MIDI Modifiers 622 Compressed audio files 249
FX chain presets 320 FLAC files 249
FX Chain Presets MIDI files 141, 254
Loading in MediaBay 521 MP3 files 249
FX Plug-in Presets MPEG files 249
Loading in MediaBay 520 Ogg Vorbis files 249
REX/REX2 files 253
Video files 839
G WMA files 249
Gain Independent track loop
Direct Offline Processing 385 Audio Part Editor 437
Gate Independent Track Loop
Strip module 323 MIDI 651
Generic Remote 611 Info line
Global Meter Settings 312 Project window 47
Global track controls 44 Input busses
Gluing Adding 30
Events 178 Removing 32
Grid Overlay Intensity 891 Renaming 29
Grid type Routing 317
Project window 72, 73 Input gain
Groove quantizing 261 MixConsole 318
Group channel tracks 107 Input levels 15
Add Track dialog 107 Input ports 22
Basics 124 Inputs
Changing the channel configuration 142, 143 Meter position options 312
Inspector 124 Insert effects 349, 352
Group channels Adding to busses 353
Adding insert effects 353 Adding to group channels 353
Adding to selected channels 353 Freezing 356
Group Channels - Mute Sources as well 906 Routing 352
Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor 245
Insert presets
H Copying 374
Pasting 374
Hardware controls
Saving 374
Activating pick-up mode 610
Insert Reset Events after Record 896
Hardware setup
Inserts
Control panel 16
FX chain presets 320
Hermode tuning 620
MixConsole 319
Hide muted Notes in Editors 886
Using while scrubbing 904
Hide Truncated Event Names 891
Inserts section
High Quality Scrub Mode 904
View options 320
Highlight Borders of Selected Events 891
Inspector 51, 99
History
Editor 52
Edit History 75
Sections 117, 131
Project window 37
Set up 117
Sampler Control 459
Track Inspector 51
Hitpoints 418
Inspector Sections
Showing 892
Expanding exclusively 53
HMT Type
Showing/Hiding 53
Hermode tuning 621
Instrument
Horizontal Zoom presets
Track Control 134
Project window 68
Instrument Freeze 545
Hub 84
Instrument parameters
Showing news 895
Track Quick Controls 561
Instrument presets
I Applying 155

I-notes (Input notes) 721

915
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Instrument Presets Legato 636

Loading in MediaBay 520 Mode 887
Results 544 Overlap 887
Instrument tracks 102 Length
Add Track dialog 102 Adjusting 896
Basics 121 Level meters (MixConsole) 314
Freezing 150 Limiter
Inspector 121 Strip module 323
Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog 547 Line tool 697
Instruments use Automation Read All and Write All Drawing note events 697
906 Editing controller display events 671
Interpolate Audio Waveforms 892 Link groups 307
Invert Phase Q-Link 308
Direct Offline Processing 386 Link to Grid
Info line 183 Nudge Settings 170
MixConsole 318 Link to Primary Time Format
Project window 183 Nudge Settings 170
Linking selected channels 308
Live input
K Chord track 743
Key commands 853, 869 Loading Multi-Track Presets 156
Default 858 Locate
Dialog 853 Track Control 134
Loading 856 Locate When Clicked in Empty Space 903
Modifying 855 Locator range duration 213
Removing assignments 856 Locators 211
Resetting 857 Left 211
Saving 856 Right 211
Searching for 855 Setting ranges 213
Key Editor 675 Lock Record 246
Fold keyboard 689 Looping
Info line 684 Audio Part Editor 437
Inspector 685 Loops and Samples
Lower zone 57 Loading in MediaBay 519
Note display 687 Loudness
Piano keyboard display 688 Statistics 398
Pitch Visibility 690 Lower zone 54
Scales 686 Chord Pads 55
Status line 683 Editor 57
Toolbar 677 MIDI Remote 59, 565
Visible Pitches 689 MixConsole 56
Keyboard focus Sampler Control 56
Activating for a zone 65 Selecting a MIDI editor 58
Zones 65 Setting up 54
Keyboard navigation
MixConsole 347 M
Knob Mode 887
macOS
Port activation 30
L Port selection 30
Lanes Main mix
Audio Part Editor 436 Setting up 31
Language (Preferences) 895 Managing media files
Latency Pool 468
MixConsole 334 Map Input Bus Metering to Audio Track 901
Optimizing 876 Mapping Assistant
VST System Link 829 MIDI Remote 584
Left locators 211 Mapping Pages
Setting 213 MIDI Remote 589
Left zone 50 Mapping Scopes
Inspector 51 MIDI Remote 589
MixConsole 301 Marker lines 288

916
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Marker tracks 116, 288 MediaBay (continued)

Basics 126 Shuffle Results 507
Inspector 126 Text search 509, 510
Track controls 116 Toolbar 501
Markers 288 Using Media Files 519
Adding 289 Volume databases 522–524
Attributes 293 Window 500
Cycle markers 289 MediaBay results
Editing 289 Managing media files 507
Exporting 295 Resetting 511
Exporting via MIDI 296 Setting up 506
IDs 294 Shuffling 507
Importing 295 Menu bars
Importing from wave files 296 Showing/Hiding 35
Importing via marker chunk 296 Menus
Importing via MIDI 296 Project window 35
Markers window 290 Showing/Hiding 35
Position markers 289 Merge MIDI in Loop 632, 633
Reassigning IDs 294 Metadata
Sync to selection in Project window 290 Author Name 896
Markers window 290 Company Name 896
Adding markers 292 Meter Colors 313
Editing markers 292 Meter peak options 312
Marker list 292 Hold forever 312
Max. Record Time Display 246 Hold peaks 312
Maximizer Meter position options 312
Details view 343 Input 312
Edit Module 343 Post-Fader 312
Maximum Items in Results List 900 Post-Panner 312
Maximum Undo Steps 895 Meters
Media rack Settings 312
Adding Favorites 498, 499 Meters’ Fallback 901
Adding VST plug-in pictures 499, 500 Meters’ Peak Hold Time 901
Favorites 491, 497 Metronome 218–220
File Browser 492, 497 Setup window 218
Home 489 Metronome Setup 218
Results 491 Click Sounds 220
Right zone 62, 64 General 219
Right Zone 489, 491 MIDI
Track Presets 498 Delete notes 649
VST Effects 495, 498 Display resolution 896
VST Instruments 494, 497 Latency mode 896
MediaBay 489 MIDI channels
Adding Favorites 505 Separating for drum map sounds 721
Attribute Filter 517, 518 MIDI clock
Attributes 517 Synchronization 819
File Browser 503 MIDI Controller Scripts
Filters 517 MIDI Remote 572
Finding file locations 507 MIDI Controller Settings
Hiding sections 503 MIDI Remote 583
Instrument Presets 544 MIDI Controller Surface
Media Type Filter 508 Adding 575
Media Types 508 Editing 578
Previewer 511 MIDI Remote 571, 575, 577
Rating filter 509 MIDI controllers 565
Refresh Views 505 MIDI Remote Manager 593
Reset Filter 518 Splitting 887
Results 506, 507, 511 Using with MIDI Remote 569, 570
Scanning 504 MIDI Controllers
Select Media Type 508 Pitchbend 664
Settings 524 MIDI devices
Show in Explorer/Reveal in Finder 507 Defining new for patch selection 629
Showing sections 503 Device Manager 624

917
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

MIDI devices (continued) MIDI Remote 565

Editing patches 629 Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces 571, 575
Installing 628 API 599
Selecting patches 628 Deleting Scripts 597
MIDI editors Disabling Scripts 597
Cutting and pasting 644 Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces 571, 575
MIDI events 162 Focus Quick Controls 590
Splitting 887 Importing MIDI Controller Scripts 572
MIDI Export Options 898 Info line 566
MIDI files 141, 254 Lower zone 59
Previewing in MediaBay 513 Mapping Assistant 584
MIDI Filter 900 Mapping Pages 589
MIDI Import Options 898, 899 MIDI Controller Settings 583
MIDI input 702 MIDI Controller Surface Editor 577, 578, 581
Chord editor 729 Parameter Mapping 573
Setting up 239 Quick Control Focus 591
MIDI interface Remove Mapping 574
Connecting 23 Script files 572
MIDI Loops Scripting 599
Previewing in MediaBay 514 Using Other MIDI Controllers 570
MIDI max. feedback in ms 896 Using Supported MIDI Controllers 569
MIDI Merge Options 633 MIDI Remote Manager 592
MIDI modifiers 617 MIDI controllers 593
Hermode tuning 620, 621 Scripts 595
Random variations 619 MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant 573
Range 620 MIDI Remote Script Console 598
MIDI notes MIDI Retrospective Recording 243
Numbers 720 MIDI Thru 896
Transpose (function) 631 MIDI Thru Active
MIDI pan Monitoring 233
MIDI track parameters 617 MIDI track delay
MIDI part data MIDI track parameters 617
Automation 671 MIDI track parameters 617
MIDI parts 164 MIDI tracks 105
Creating empty 164 Add Track dialog 105
Independent Track Loop 651 Basics 123
Multiple Part Controls 653 Freezing MIDI Modifiers 622
Processing 643 Inspector 123
MIDI Port Setup 238 MIDI Velocity
MIDI ports Editing 638
Setting up 23 MIDI volume
MIDI Record Catch Range in ms 902 MIDI track parameters 617
MIDI Record Mode 242 Mirror
MIDI recording MIDI 642
MIDI input setting 239 Missing ports
MIDI Recording Re-routing 94
Channel and Output 239 MixConsole 297, 298
Continuous messages 241 Channel linking 307
Different types of messages 241 Channel types 306
Instruments and channels 238 Channels 332
Naming MIDI ports 238 EQ presets 323
Notes 241 Fader section 310
Preparations 238 Functions 308
Program Change Messages 241 FX chain presets 320
Record mode 242 Left zone 301
Recovering 244 Left Zone 302
Recovering in Editor 245 Level meters 314
Recovering recordings 243 Lower zone 56
Reset 242 Lower Zone 297
Sound selection 239 Mute 311
SysEx Messages 242 Notepad 334
MIDI recordings Opening 297
Exporting to MIDI file 722 Panning 311

918
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

MixConsole (continued) Note events

Pictures 333 Colorizing 644
Pre section 317 Deleting 649, 696
Sections 315 Drawing with Draw tool 696
Setting volume 312 Drawing with Line tool 697
Solo 311 Duplicating 650
Solo Defeat 311 Editing 650
Strip presets 329 Editing via MIDI 702
Toolbar 302 Excluding from playback 649
Visibility 302 Gluing 699
MixConsole in Project Window 56 Inserting 695
Mixing down to audio files 811 Inserting via MIDI 703
Monitor Moving 698
Track Control 134 Muting 649
Monitoring 22, 231 Repeating 650
ASIO Direct Monitoring 232 Resizing 698
External 231 Selecting 647
MIDI 233 Setting velocity values 651
Via Cubase 231 Setting with Snap 651
Mouse Wheel for Event Volume and Fades 885 Splitting 699
Move Vertically Transposing 698
Automation Event Editor 530 Trimming 650
Moving Notepad
Events 168 MixConsole 334
MP3 files 814 Nudge
Importing 249 Move Left 170
MPEG files Move Right 170
Importing 249 Nudge Settings 170, 176
Multi processing 877 Resizing Events 175, 176
Musical Mode 429 Snap Grid 170
Musical Scales
Finding 691, 692
Key Editor 686
O
Live Input 694 O-notes (Output notes) 721
Quantize Pitches 694 Object Selection tool
Setup 737 Inserting note events 695
Snap Pitch Editing 695 Ogg Vorbis files 816
Mute Importing 249
MixConsole 311 On Import Audio Files 885
Track Control 134 On Processing Shared Clips 885
Mute Automation On-Screen Keyboard window 224
Track Control 134 Computer keyboard 225
Mute Pre-Send when Mute 906 Modulation 225
Muting events 183 Note velocity level 225
Octave offset 225
N Options 225
Piano keyboard 225
Name Pitchbend 225
Track Control 134 Recording MIDI 224
Naming schemes Open Effect Editor after Loading it 907
Export Audio Mixdown 808, 810 Open Last Project on Startup 895
Navigating Open/Close Sampler
MixConsole 347 Track Control 134
Never Reset Chased Controllers 896 Organizing files in subfolders
News Pool 485
Showing 895 Output
Normalize Track Control 134
Direct Offline Processing 386 Output busses
Maximum peak level 386 Adding 30
Note Brightness 894 Default 31
Note display Removing 32
Drum Editor 715 Renaming 29
Key Editor 687 Routing 317

919
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Output ports 22 Polyphony

Overlapping Audio 152 Restricting 640
Overlaps Pool
Showing 891 Applying different processing methods 474
Overview line Audio processing 486
Project window 48 Automatically generating new audio clips 488
Clip editing 482
Designating a new pool record folder 485
P Key commands 482
Panning Managing large sound databases 478
Bypass 311 Managing media files 468
MixConsole 311 Organizing files in subfolders 485
Part Data Mode 894 Reducing the project size 486
Part Editing Mode 652 Reference file 468
Parts 159, 163 Renaming clips and regions 474
Editing 165 Resolve Missing Files 479, 480
Folder 165 Resolve missing files dialog 479
Moving the content without changing the position Sampler tracks 468
182 Toolbar 471
Parts Get Track Names 884 Position markers 289
Paste at Origin 179 Adding 289
Paste Relative to Cursor 179 Editing 289
Patch Banks 624 Post fader sends 361
Pedals Post-roll
To note length 638 Transport panel 216
Performance Pre fader sends 361
Aspects 876 Pre section
Audio dropouts 878 View options 318
Audio performance 878 Pre-Record time
Optimizing 876 Audio recording 237
Phase Pre-roll
MixConsole 318 Transport panel 216
Piano keyboard display Preferences
Key Editor 688 Colors 904
Piano voicings 739 Dialog 882
Pick-up Mode 610 Disabling 874, 875
Pictures 146 Save marked preferences only 883
MixConsole 333 Saving presets 883
Track list 145 Preferred Unit of Measurement
Pitch Score Editor 891
Changing for chords 699 Presets
Pitch Notation 893 Previewing in MediaBay 516
Pitch Visibility Previewing using a MIDI file 516
Key Editor 689 Previewing using the Memo Recorder 516
Options 690 Previewing via MIDI Input 516
Pitchbend Previewing via the Computer Keyboard 516
Controller lanes 664 Presets browser
Playback Effects 371
Disable Acoustic Feedback 886 Primary Time Format
Excluding note events 649 Selecting 215
Playback Toggle triggers Local Preview 389, 903 Programs
Player modes Track Control 134
Pattern 784 Project Colors Setup
Plain chords 784 Color Set 80
Plug-in delay compensation 351 Options 82
Plug-in Editors Always on Top 907 Presets 81
Plug-in latency Project Colors Setup Dialog 79–82
MixConsole 334 Project compatibility with older program versions
Plug-in processing File size 86
Suspending 351 Saving projects 93
Poly Pressure events Project Setup Dialog 90
Adding 668
Editing 668

920
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Project Synchronization Setup 820 Q

Destinations 824
Sources 822 Q-Link 308
Project tempo QC Learn Mode
Tap Tempo 799 Track Quick Controls 561
Project window Quantize Panel 259
Event display 44 Quantizing to a grid 261
Global track controls 44 Quantizing to a groove 263
History 37 Quantizing 256
Horizontal Zoom presets 68 Catch Range 261
Info line 47 Original position 263
Inspector 51 Pre-Quantize 263
Keyboard focus 65 Swing 261
Left zone 50 Tuplets 261
Lower zone 54–57, 59 Using groove presets 261
Menus 35 Quick Controls
Overview 34 Focus lock 591
Overview line 48 Focus setup 591
Project zone 36 MIDI Remote 590
Right zone 59 Quick Zoom 890
Ruler 45
Showing/Hiding Zones 35
Snap 70
R
Snap to zero crossing 70 RAM
Status line 47 Recording 234
Toolbar 37 Ramp/Step
Toolbox 43 Continuous controllers 670
Track list 43 Range Selection tool
Transport Bar 48, 205 Creating fades 269
Transport pop-up window 210 Re-Record
Zoom submenu 67 Activating 230
Zooming 66 Common Record Modes 230
Project zone 36 Read automation 526
Event display 44 Read Automation
Global track controls 44 Track Control 134
Ruler 45 Recent projects 94
Toolbar 37 Record Enable
Track list 43 Track Control 134
Projects Record File Format
Activating 94 Audio 233
Back up 96 Record Folder
Creating new 84 Audio 234
Hub 84 Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru 902
Location 86 Recording 227
Maximum file size 86 Common Record Modes 230
Missing ports 94 Cycle 229
Opening 93 Levels 15
Opening recent 94 Lock Record 246
Prepare archive 96 Remaining Record Time 246
Project files 86 Stopping 229
Revert 96 Stopping automatically 229
Saving 94 With Effects 236
Saving templates 89 Recovering recordings
Setting up 90 Audio 237
Template files 87 MIDI 243
Templates 87 ReCycle files 253
Punch In 217 Reducing the project size
On Stop 901 Pool 486
Punch In/Out Reference
Common Record Modes 230 Chord Assistant 730
Punch Out 217, 229 Reference file
Stop after automatic 901 Pool 468
Punch Points 217

921
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Refresh Views REX/REX2 files

MediaBay 505 Importing 253
Regions Loading into Sampler Control 440
Creating with Detect Silence 396 Right locators 211
Event or Range as Region 162 Setting 213
Events from Regions 162 Right zone 59
Renaming 474 Media rack 62, 64, 489, 492, 494, 495
Remote control 600 VSTi rack 60, 61
Assigning commands 604 Root Key
Automation 603 Sampler Control 462
Connections 600 Routing
Control Assignment 614 Input busses 317
Generic Remote 611 Insert effects 352
Global Options 603 MixConsole 316
MIDI Port Setup 600 Output busses 317
MIDI remote control configuration 612 Ruler
Remote Control Editor 605 Project window 45
Resetting 602 Time format 45
Setting up 601 Timeline 643
Remote Control Editor 605 Ruler tracks 110
Control settings 606 Add Track dialog 110
Layout 608 Track controls 112
Parameter assignment 608 Run Setup on Create New Project 895
Toolbar 606
Remote Controllers
Connecting Track Quick Controls 609
S
Remove DC Offset Safe Mode
Direct Offline Processing 386 Dialog 873
Remove Regions/Hitpoints on all Offline Processes 885 Sample editing
Removing Sampler Control 461
Events 168 Sample Editor 401, 411, 412
Silence 396 Info Line 408
Renaming Inspector 409
Clips 474 Lower zone 57
Events 173 Overview Line 408
Regions 474 Regions 413
Tracks 144 Ruler 410
Reordering tracks 144 Showing multiple waveforms 411
Repeat Events 180 Snap 416
Repeat Loop 635 Toolbar 402
Replace Recording in Editors 902 Undo zoom operations 412
Resample Sample rate
Direct Offline Processing 387 Externally clocked 21
Reset on Stop 896 Sampler Control 441
Resizing events 174 Adjusting the sample gain 464
Resolve Display Conflicts Amp section 451
Track control 134 AudioWarp mode 447
Resolve Missing Files Envelope editor 452
Pool 479, 480 Filter section 451
Retrospective MIDI Recording 244, 245 History 459
Empty Buffer 246 Keyboard section 459
Insert from All MIDI Inputs 244 Loading Audio Samples 440
Retrospective Record 902 Lower zone 56
Retrospective Record Buffer 243 Normalizing samples 464
Retrospective Recording Pitch section 450
Buffer 243 Playback and sound parameters 447
MIDI 243 Playback quality 447
Reverse Playback section 447
Audio 387 Playing back samples 463
Direct Offline Processing 387 REX/REX2 files 440
MIDI 641 Root Key 462
Sample editing 461
Slice playback 447

922
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Sampler Control (continued) Select Channel/Track on Solo 888

Slicing 465 Select Controllers in Note Range 674
Toolbar 442 Select Media Type
Transferring samples to VST instruments 460 MediaBay 508
Undoing parameter changes 459 Select Tool - Show Extra Info 890
Waveform display 446 Select Track for Auditioning 735
Sampler tracks 103 Track control 134
Add Track dialog 104 Select Track on Background Click 884
Basics 120 Selection ranges
Creating 441 Editing 186
Freeze Channel Options Dialog 466 Moving the content without changing the position
Freezing 150, 465 182
Inspector 120 Nudging 188
Loading Audio Samples 440 Resizing 188
Loading MIDI Parts 441 Selection Ranges 185
Pool 468 Covering several tracks 186
Sampler Control 440 Creating 185
Transferring Samples to Instruments 460 Creating audio clips 193
Unfreeze Channel Options Dialog 467 Creating audio events 193
Saturation Cropping 192
Strip module 323 Cutting 191
Save as Template 89 Deleting 191
Save partial preferences settings 883 Duplicating 190
Save Track Preset 154, 157 Editing 189
Scale Around Absolute Center Encompassing events 185
Automation Event Editor 530 Expanding MIDI selection tanges 189
Scale Around Relative Center Filling from clipboard 181
Automation Event Editor 530 Inserting Silence 192
Scale Assistant Moving 172
Key Editor 686 Moving the content to a new position 190
Scale Suggestions 691, 692 Nudging 189
Scale events 736 Playback 199
Adding 736 Selection mode 189
Auditioning 736 Selection Ranges
Automatic scales 736 Between two events 185
Changing 736 Splitting 192, 884
Follow Chord Track 746 Switching to object selection 186
Showing 736 Send effects 349, 357
Scale Vertically Adding effect channel tracks 358
Automation Event Editor 530 Adding to selected channels 359
Scaling of the application 895 Setting level 362
Scan Folders only when MediaBay is open 900 Send Level 906
Scan unknown File Types 900 Sends
Scanning MixConsole 331
MediaBay 504 Setting Event Colors to Track Colors 79
Score Editor Shared Copies
Lower zone 57 Convert to Real Copy 181
Preferences 891 Creating 181
Script files Show Scales 736
MIDI Remote 572 Track control 134
Scripts Side-chain 362, 365
MIDI Remote Manager 595 Ducking delay 363
MIDI Remote Script Console 598 Effect inputs 351
Scroll to selected Track 888 Inserts section 320
Scrub Tool 166 Trigger signals 364
Scrub Volume 904 Side-chain inputs 351
Scrubbing Silence
Scrub tool 166 Detecting 393
Secondary Time Format Direct Offline Processing 387
Selecting 216 Removing 396
Sections Simple Crossfade Editor 273
MixConsole 315 Single Voice
Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings 888 Follow Chord Track 745

923
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Size with Fade 174 Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio
Slices 418 signals are received 907
Close gaps 424 Swing
Delete overlaps 424 Quantizing 261
Slider Mode 887 Sync Selection
Slip Event Content 182 Markers window 290
Slip Range Content 182 Synchronization 817
Smallest Track Height To Show Data 891 Audio clock 819
Smallest Track Height To Show Name 891 External Sync 825
Snap 70 MIDI clock 819
Sample Editor 416 Setup dialog 820
Snap MIDI Parts to Bars 902 Speed references 819
Snap point Timecode 818
Setting 70 Synchronize Plug-in Program Selection to Track
Snap Point Selection 907
Sample Editor 417 Synchronizing Track Data
Snap Point To Cursor 70 Follow Chord Track 746
Snap to zero crossing 70 System component information 376
Snap type Exporting 378
Project window 71, 73
Solo
MixConsole 311
T
Track Control 134 Tap Tempo 799
Solo Defeat Mode 800
MixConsole 311 Project tempo 799
Solo Record in MIDI Editors 902 Tempo track 798
Spectrum Analyzer 397 Tapemachine Style
Audio Functions 397 Monitoring 906
Comparing level values 398 Template projects 87
Splitting Templates 87
Events 177 Renaming 89
Into equal events 178 Tempo
MIDI controllers 887 Set Definition from Tempo 801
MIDI events 887 Tempo changes
Standard algorithm 391 Tap Tempo 798
Standard Compressor Tempo Editor
Details view 341 Toolbar 794
Edit Module 341 Tempo Events
Start Recording at Cursor Editing 797
Common Record Modes 230 Tempo modes
Start Recording at Left Locator Fixed Tempo 793
Common Record Modes 230 Tempo track 793
Static value line Tempo track 793
Automation 526 Activate 794
Stationary Cursors 903 Editor 793
Statistics Inserting tempo events 797
Audio Functions 398 Inserting time signature events 802
Status line Mode 793
Project window 47 Tap Tempo 798
Step input Tempo changes 796
Chord pads 774 Thumbnail Memory Cache Size 908
Step Input 703 Thumbnails 840
Stereo Flip Thumbnail cache files 840
Direct Offline Processing 387 Tilt Left
Stop playback while winding 903 Automation Event Editor 530
Stretch Tilt Right
Automation Event Editor 530 Automation Event Editor 530
Strip presets 329 Time display 215
Strip Presets Time Display Window 210
Loading in MediaBay 521 Time format
Studio Setup Ruler 45
Dialog 13 Time Format 215
Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing 215

924
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Time Signature Events Track Quick Controls 559, 609, 611

Adding 802 Assigning effect parameters 561
Setting up 802 Assigning instrument parameters 561
Time Stretch Assigning parameters 560
Algorithms 391 Automatable Parameters 563
Direct Offline Processing 388 Connecting with Remote Controllers 609
Limitations 392 Inspector 560
Timecode Loading presets 563
Standards 818 Parameter assignment 560
Synchronization 818 QC Learn Mode 561
Timecode Subframes Removing assignments 562
Showing 903 Saving assignments as presets 562
Timeline Showing automated assignments 564
Ruler 643 Track Selection follows Event Selection 884
Tips Tracks 99
Showing 895 Add Track dialog 139
Tool modifier keys 890 Adding 139, 140
Tool modifiers 869 Audio 100
Key commands 853, 869 Channel 130
Toolbar Chord 115
Pool 471 Color 145
Project window 37 Colorizing 77
Toolbox 43 Customizing track controls 132
Toolbar Divider 42 Deselecting 149
Toolbox Disabling 150
Project window 43 Duplicating 149
Toolbox on Right-Click 890 Effect channel tracks 108
Track automation data Enabling 150
Automation 671 Folder 112
Track Color Group Channel 107
Resetting 78 Inspector 117, 131
Track Controls 134 Instrument 102
Track Controls Settings 132 Marker 116
Track Height 147 MIDI 105
Track Inspector Removing 143
Opening 51 Renaming 144
Track list 43 Reordering 144
Dividing 43 Ruler 110
Track Name Sampler 103
Font Weight 895 Selecting 148
Width 895 Using Track Presets 140
Track parameters Video 115
Track Quick Controls 560 Zooming 147
Track pictures Transformer
Browser 146 Strip module 323
MixConsole 333 Transport
Track list 145 Overview 205
Track Presets 153 Sections 205
Applying 153, 154 Transport Bar 205
Audio 153 Transport menu
Creating 154 Functions 199
Extracting sounds 156 Transport panel 195
Instrument 155 Overview 195
Loading 157 Post-roll 216
Loading in MediaBay 519 Pre-roll 216
MIDI 154 Sections 195
Multi-Track 156 Time format 215
Previewing in MediaBay 515 Transport pop-up window 210
Quick Control assignment 562 Transport Zone
Sampler tracks 157 Project window 48
VST Presets 155 Transpose
MIDI function 631
Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted 885

925
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

Trim tool Voicings 739

Changing event lengths 699 Automatic voicings 739
Tube Compressor Configuring parameters 739
Details view 341 Library 739
Edit Module 341 Library subset 739
Tuplets Octave offset 739
Quantizing 261 Piano 739
Type of New Tempo Points 794 Range 739
Volume
Event 277
U MixConsole 312
Undoing Volume curves
Edit History 75 Creating clip-based volume changes 384
Maximum Undo Steps 76, 895 Volume databases
Offline processing 383 Creating in the MediaBay 522
Project window 37 Mounting in the MediaBay 524
Recording audio 236 Removing from the MediaBay 523
Sampler Control 459 Unmounting in the MediaBay 524
Zoom operations 412 VST
Unfreeze Channel Options Input ports 22
Instrument tracks 547 Output ports 22
Sampler tracks 467 VST 2 350
Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting VST 3 350
Tracks only 884 VST 2
Enable VST 2 support 554
Plug-in path settings 556
V VST 3
Suspend plug-in processing 545
Value Box/Time Control Mode 887
VST effect selector 357
Velocity
VST instrument selector 538
MIDI function 639
VST instruments
Velocity events
Context menu 542
Adding in controller display 663
Control panel 536
Editing 662, 663
Freeze Channel Options Dialog 546
Video
Freezing 150, 545
Codecs 838
Functions menu 542
Color Space Management 841
Presets 543
Dedicated video cards 839
Saving presets 543
Editing 845
Setting up 535
Exporting 851
VST Plug-in collection
External video cards 839
Adding 557
Extracting audio from 852
VST Plug-in control panels
Formats 837
Closing 371, 538
Importing 839
Hiding 370, 537
Output devices 838
Showing 370, 537
Playback 841
VST Plug-in Manager 553
Preparations for video projects 839
Collections 554
Scrubbing 845
Window 554
Studio Setup 841
VST plug-in pictures
Thumbnails 840
Adding 499, 500
Video cards 839
VST Plug-ins
Video Player window 843
Adding collections 557
Aspect ratio 843
Blocklist 558
Setting window size 843
Hiding 557
Video track 115
Installing 553
Inspector 130
Managing 553
Track controls 116
Reactivating 558
Vintage Compressor
Showing 557
Details view 342
VST Presets
Edit Module 342
Loading 157
Virtual keyboard 224
Previewing in MediaBay 515
Visibility
MixConsole 302

926
Cubase Elements 14.0.20
Index

VST System Link 826

Activating 831
Connections 828
Latency 829
Putting computers online 832
Setting up sync 828
VSTi rack
Right zone 60, 61

W
Warn before removing modified effects 907
Warn on Processing Overloads 906
Warping Algorithm 885
Wave files 812
Waveform Brightness 892
Waveform display 411
Sample Editor 411
Waveform Outline Intensity 892
Waveforms
Showing 892
Wind Speed Options 903
Windows
Dialog 872
Menus 35
Showing/Hiding menu bar 35
Windows Media Audio files
Importing 249
Word clock
Synchronization 819
Working with MIDI data
Tools and functions for 714
Write Automation
Track Control 134
Writing automation 526
Automatically 526, 527
Manually 526, 527
Tools 528

Z
Zones
Keyboard focus 65
Lower zone 54
Project zone 36
Right zone 59
Zoom
Adapt Grid to Zoom 66
Audio Contents 67
Cycle Markers 69
Event display 66
Project window 66
Track Control 134
Tracks 66, 147
Zoom Anchor 890
Zoom history
Project window 70
Zoom Tool Standard Mode - Horizontal Zooming Only
890
Zoom while Locating in Time Scale 890
Zooming 147, 411, 412
Sample Editor 411, 412
To cycle markers 289

927
Cubase Elements 14.0.20